ee had

ome thet Oe ede fete

PO ews meme the Uaent eh Yin Mel

tie iby wee nenbe hel etn ete He ay Oraphelice ener

tee are eb aseyire nin tee eon

ye hs Hs ite Mn ogee oe

Se HM oe Oe Hae Tha hs the ol Ae Lee ttosty al

= Uns me re ee

”

an otk

aren tat

emi Toasts hs Mier hetrer He)

“

ears as Ch se teNe eet

te othe gt Wanted neve Aaah eH Hoes in pet ome le fom tale hs

Maveretatdvace Pte beta Pome eiel MM Se teetene mee ee imate dt ead TRO MEAs tril eahe teeth hh ai pems

Cr eeeR Ce ee Co cra eer eee et ve raise a iran poor anes et ee ar

ome ON Heal mak thee ney dea veamaidsa yA hve Geaetey

Gal) moons Lea

Gowran Mle teat ow

Meera heacawens de detent ben taesre

2 tenet ‘Late aga pe wedem hi M Rte ltt Hy mete perils tits hae

hot Wl Woche thane tt i Pah atte eee een te

Mode neer es de Gam betaine era 00 Nem The ithe ee:

eee een Death We Romeate HaMhew A

temrhoch Hi arbe ee Mets ko wyarneM yee dy sem deel gy dime Re Rede lle | aa tewede he

ed 49 ia ‘yah ie Woes ae NT eRh erie th Sea BBs “Pr peapeatabed bruth dL jisbea bot

@abver ee eat sed memrnrin thie 45 toh Re erm ermad

“ ha ttole A Re Mhetnygte ot the nate

. ete deme hr) Rete ity M

oe! Wisk OC ee ee

seri, Bey eet Yee aie see orice cst es eled Avice

WeetsA gume thas Wag Hota MELE Porbe rte be heheh fe eo, rae oe

lina fresyatany dene sabeveo inet Strela tt Oa Sane ped als Mi qed sae

hb Vese HK babe ido lho MEME Miaahe ine Hoy hr 82 PRE HE WEay Kod IAT pag

diename waar ee hata nag ae

eth & Wehr ne ara este areas

aero eed Oval Eran @edangersads ee

phetetytraner art CON ape hie ont mE Ur Oe

Tsceesre aye PEMA © Bm Rana tl eha homed obs:

yates ereerorie a a6: Heh Pray tet eere, Baelenck OF

ita iain lta ty 1 Hite thy wit iayerheath ene INT Tbe tLe

Woots tte te bythe asytompe te We tnt eta he rhosbediote

oe hl ahhy bader Crh sido etary Cathe i anodes &

Miakdig alten Hae. reas ida tate ta wa BA Hate

sae Karte titel &

yi winshha. Af wry ai

“Reg h eet siti itrbeth ite

ay \ Nisetk Case ay Reet

Serer Rte 1: Har frit

“4

SPA He HT ma gt OH Te wy 4) 4 eae 6

40 e Gi Weaetet, ba88We betewews es

Seeds etre te doch) Wales be tet!

me ne ug Mr deity vew? eiteds

See OTH balte (baa ty

Detids tetas te

ts an vie

Gt deter rite tite

We Fe te Rett toler theme ae

ra is ates iierin Pan} Whe

Wet tad tig et

rt Maere

CO Meh ae tidede

Us Whe kena iierten bara

ee LUNs ty ted

sictuasasaaits

fens

CW AA dede unite Te He rR ae hed

+ bs dete tre degeaitede deny

HAC AN Diier

Coc t

atepeleseiaia Iapsve pe”

Hrarmepen ryan te

ths Bets +:

mse med eM ATNY

DEEL OM ele kore ee:

park emg Tee WW we9 bt

iy WAS nea A

BPW Ths Dee went wet tay

ica debtebetedee oe Set aie

oo ited ga eeu

Bea vary be Hoe dr see Se

tes 4 en

co a fh ‘get Gantcaeteernse ean asdaed

st detfodes, be See eter 4

Cee tt

vba

pil ual hep

tanvacin sega lie EE ali Gapttsaprtnse

eeedee Hi i ot {ce ed

; » eidahw Savas

RNC He

dale, Mi eatan tan Sagat

a aes at We i

mit yah ¢ aaigont

PPPMLA hots

rare 1

Sarees fe

Ni aa nail Tay

-« 4

ee +. neh (Te ee yt

i tone dens ‘eit en! Wee eh bred oS ond Wy ed Or Tod tae teh HAG

NON PUA Seid Sa Ue eT hw dette a Lig delle toga ve

ett sey Vy Why Lene ivaede bt WAGs ih Thee Mey toy

*Mo'be ‘My Fibs ee EMT aelbe Dike obe Va Wetetak se tayt be talkie ne be

Oe WCU ee See Me Cok OY ee ihiinias

scheics day hederste heya) :

Cy ibtted

Wentricmeden g's

Hirererrertt

wl Gatee

7 iit Mena

} Ny AERA Tree © wet tebe i.

Rat Rice ant) ee atirl

thei ty teh: Ast Gr ttetets toed

stem ay EPO te he 6

We aetbete 20) Galledate dede ty

“> tee eee y

WAvpri drasaetodea. “it

“hole fee beta bee ean MG aden

Ane at

Tae deeds He tt Fahey

iaigiei det

sae) nbs wast

Meer! histewie

wanes ew Ay A detede | nea 4 nhs Hahei: Peet ros artnet is ty My a ”

Ee o 8 ot teeta neeia Rev tate wt * ee et an chon ba en

= taal e444 eo a0 rere) ‘e { ANS Papi HIM oo as Hi Meat

Serre ye sh eA th CAR Gy Raa. sonar 4 ot hy

. . -aMetey are v¥ Rh us ON Gast Mica B SW hued met ht high. i La

“earn aa ae ae tes ated ra eel kale da he , OF til

b) Wiletenea et Mee de® nr eh or Gn Dl Ms thy ye Li * oS deteipe Bs

ASW Aer yow eaip A) ede ae 4

teas ta PLE ash AR ba

VAN gaa aN Ag Ceara are ms 4

‘ * ua st Wed ayee Ys yAS ‘ non 1 serena: cones

hye

mes ith

° attest here

aan a oa Madey Fy (Hiss Ee

ste tel

wr) Sareea

wet Hela he Fina)

20 Yo esrinds ee

teed by! etd

Shean ere ate. einer ef

Peat a tab) nh xt “iiebtg annette

EA, iy vette

Rite

AAA Pht

rs SSOP Whe BW abe ss genes PPAR EI eeataeee tit Den gries wage e ss beet

La t Mh We ede teh OB nts BE aie Cok Ae A te pepe Wy Reed ae arty ie or be vedi he foe oe watch vere barecuats

, eit; aie , mi Mi Wea) ite CA sO filtalicg sea ial salir pal Wedeatenn cist seat roche: site ttentats hath

' ThA hee a i

Whe DAT eD he Ge see

ie Ma stencaentt i hss ee

AF RW as iy wih ae

is seve eam val si aaa he rw) hentonss a9

ev collate ket plde 3

Aa At He ea

Pabheh

Us CBO CR aa Ream Pp debe Yr Piseler ese

45 bree Sek de

RAS aed Hy

Wie Feed ee

TS a ta ieaerayes

Wace tod bee de tes Gant

Hee bias tear Hee Te Nt

1 Y Cate h AAD be Reber de Sepa A yee Medel Pr eae te + Wels hse Ae a? BS hee e eh,

yieits Vie Ae ral chi TC UTA i bey if MSaevia tee Masvediwenagreesesiste yt trp bs) se a te

HeResh ishaby Hheegeteges fet Wim Clb Eat WROTE bai hobs BL a Dees iy Ms de paeite WD Moute deta erties top Gah at

ny Whi bd eter) edad Heald iter: hive Abend etal wei - Arengracsesionts

iO tOTik cere | eu A) Bikepe abet bent Ware Msi ege te ve { atte G Ridvieior ea Seeeens Waa beet

. A grerth ds SQ upbeat de ha by le deftewy b> hy 8S TS alah “+ aaah 8 Wk oa \ todomr fa Out Reed

Smt de Fe a ih Cwer Cy tiki SH NY ON 2 River cre beet BeQumnend sakes a

ney va i eon yy ode if

ran oir ner Siiden uit] AHP) Sete ed ete

ho PS AL Tag) LTE al Oy ese ak ea

adored

“

caro ee he |

“14 ot pide ds 4+ Aol Aw tee “

“ % NAA phe Creer nt eitiagh ae % Perr hae ocd Yi, Me 8 weet Aw inate

4 OG teh Wits Mace ae Uo ik an ai inheasioge ey the

som waked Ws Ca eee ardewetea st deadedet deh gh wot seas t

: prada ghhed chat vh vp Ls aceon

Pee wR naa Wet ay greed t iene ashe nah > Wy aN eat Poepiasird vas be ne Beta he eit Mierty Menai preg rareregracacent

ri avian eye ve ids aiehen Vasa see ashing Oh hele diryy ads ha hay chet inrayt yj

aN het b tite

Oey trein: i tine Mt hind Shan iaraaanl wanes cy pth Teweh! gor base Crpd aan pe

Ay A Ra ae Ee ede Ppeit aw iy Gh yosl desea ;

hanna *? tare bi ahd el 4 om iedebens! wy asian iain Lite ieee

rer si Tn eh hee kate edad ore Lispiohd sebskih

aie Ate mee gee F he tkees Youre tt. tat tte tek tee bales! ered ni anee Baten Preeanes

EY io A vey S44 Bevo dete gre 4 pear yt ya)

vic AV BoA Moab ee take Pet Hy ate ryt TOA Aste em edi tte rr Seat ardee:

bt Wa iee Ny beats ee HAT tae Wee det Note ioe ar dre aaa

iia: de Gas idoy aie ay th ay M " pete ake Oh ee

Wem ads Wty ar f - ane

ri rsd ere ‘

er CMS oath Maem a

‘eat *

reese eK

> ie ered

- ee eee ky

heeded, Mba PEN

“ 7 eid fo beaee aed oO 4

AW Bare odra By ADA AUTH eth He tate

che pete ia eRe rr tl iets Sr irek i itt

3 7 Was Msp Bi Aerie scat aes Sea

reteaietnt ie Dea taAa dedons

shred fatty) ain ”

exer on Aah Maa br eb t pty ty Hy

fon Paap apie: we Mt atlns ee neheak

. Poh ee ones i Wey NAT +MH dD whee hosa tyes

TC de FE gel Uta it OW *

" at NBS iy ies ys Laat

Sa ee on

ix “w! a wt AN -aesreroee enS

od gr ewan

, Shad

ew Nal chaste vie bel

ats Ranma

Reba. 8s deaaibon AF ore en

‘rh ka Shree . : pare deicen bah

aye “inthe atdetay

W 4edver

a ‘eeu it

th pant

ae re

Sa es ave alk a esa

he * Cbd nee

ep ern ante Ped ade nrdmedrere ica ace 4-4

Saat Wetter eid a ded FH werent

. Oa Rte SRA ra ice LRA

Lapa Geararank +

‘ v *

. ha neble aucun Tre eo a et “* ~~ i Wee ae ont ot ee aeves

2 Gee as we Oe ent ues Hdeqrawenirivate a ort ore he aaerhet fin te ‘eh mirne ie ep ickswork

debe abs eres Rae egae we ae war ee ey rh ea rfccui

lime CON, 9 Rte dle ere. * ate

* ae Wawra eed yy tant

- ae ene € ae Saeki teu a

rrr hie wk it he

i re er

ry)

eae saad oar

aooaesnitn aiiteatargath oe

atest Sg see he es

Pavatretertise neem ora

44 Hote diet e ’ aah boa ASA 48 ary ara OC HSN ARN RH Leg eng ME ea ods

WA Ava Mabe Ban Sa a ae a a: HSUPA yh hs Daib Byh Shkta 2 Aed ated bh aaah ebaiyn

* 4 raw etannglojue ard dope eat ew we ede te

de G-erde weeny athe ly Aaa r* aseee. s &. bre: 4

[Irtone ‘ + PY araAicmmresHraerien ah niet

Ae sae cee eT EVEN E Ada Hue ditte eat Ele teeby me atthe

iets

he eet eet ad pare aN bastobee Nee HDA enh he heat heme de i etay ae

Sate rears ite Sheedlishc ayaa LIAL Re DOL MR tes Nowk eek

ater en * ‘ an Wee een ev ean HEM NT Eg eycasiom rAiemsven ATHY

AATEC Nea ey eta Hanon ts “* he Oe Wome we

ares,

. reece ht kine tay hin Wh

Panevan ety eters ee ge ANG « ‘i

sees “ vee yiieea or

Ser eer ee tever oan biannhn

Sean E

‘nD

PA a} Leer ey Aan, Cs oe ek oe

SAW prec RR Se Ade e er A Oth dew

° POITrh Sera ay te he ri atte Piro

ei race rites mieten ks +

CMM tau torr A

oo ated

WY-owra a aan

weet ae

Teal aes 8

Vosbiep haart a

hs NTE ET ewe

Faretee ae ve Ae

pels bean thy tt oy

Rae ie Dek Sel ee thd Vota

09) Wome Giarareesana tA

erbe ue renert oi 46

166k. 11Os O84 sO

“

W7TW/6>5

TRANSACTIONS

OF THE

WISCONSIN ACADEMY

cS)

VOL. Vi. 1881-83, Cave 10 18, j

PUBLISHED BY AUTHORITY OF LAW.

MADISON, WISCONSIN:

DEMOCRAT PRINTING COMPANY, STATE PRINTERS.

1885,

| TABLE OF CONTENTS OF VOLUME VI.

‘

i ; THIRTEENTH ANNUAL MEETING.

Pages

Freedom of Will Empirically Considered, by John Bascom Shavasats 2-20

The Increase of Insanity, by A. O. Wright, (2 papers) ........... 20-28

The Primitive Democracy of the Germans, by Wm. F. Allen... 28-42

Notes on the Dispersion of Drift Copper, by R. D. Salisbury,

Bcrithimeapye. esi. se a RUA 5 CR OT 49-50

On the Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord, by EH. A.

OS ate PLALOS) TTT. ye eis 2 eaickel sta lel © ayo! ogee wee ech chino: hatabaoe atattenaana 51-82

Who Built the Mounds, by R. P. Hoy... .........ce.:ec0eec tense 84-100

“Who Made the Copper Implements, by R. P. Hoy.......-.-.. 44. 101-106

; Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi, by William

REELS Cum yc Nay AM Nl ata aut 2 9 Satara Whalelacs are 106-144

On the Present State of Our Knowledge of Stellar-Motion, by

Seetromann Ponty: Safford, 2.0 .cc) elie wces cece ak wen eee es oh esee 145-152

FOURTEENTH ANNUAL MEETING.

Ancient Villages among/Emblematic Mounds, by S. D. Peet, (with

_ seven MOEN AIA NITES) osc, sich fags, 8 5. 4 have eng anasenciok heater Oe 154-176

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds in Brown

and Outagamie counties, by S. W. Willard..................0. 177-196

he Variation in the Attraction due to the Figure of the At-

tracting Bodies, by D. P. Blackstone, (with 11 figures)......... 197-25 4

enera of the Family Attide, with a Partial Synonomy, by

eorge W. and Elizabeth G. Peckham, (with inserted tables

Hiv 1 ERR Ee I ALS AOE SRI dR 255-342

Py roceedings of the Academy since December, 1881 ............. 343-352

MMIRTEIRIORS ies aad ss os hoe digi Facnldhe oct dLcies ere ean 353-356

OPEC HRS

OF THE

WISCONSIN ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, ARTS AND LETTERS.

Term Expires December 27th, 1884.

PRESIDENT:

R. D. IRVING, EK. M., Ph. D.,

U.S. Geologist, Professor of Geology, University of Wisconsin.

VICE-PRESIDENTS:

Department of Sciences—T. C. CHAMBERLIN, A. M., Ph. D.,

U.S. Geologist, Beloit.

Department of Arts—Captain JOHN NADER, C. E.,

Madison.

Department of Letters— WESLEY C. SAWYER, Ph. D.,

Professor State Normal School, Oshkosh.

SECRETARY:

EH. A. BIRGE, Ph. D.,

Professor of Zoology, University of Wisconsin.

LIBRARIAN:

A. O. WRIGHT,* A. M.,

Secretary State Board of Charities and Reform.

CURATOR OF MUSEUM:

R. C. HINDLEY,

Professor Racine College, Racine.

TREASURER:

Hon. 8. D. HASTINGS,

Madison.

* Resigned, 1883.

TWELFTH ANNUAL MERTING.

DECEMBER 27 anp 28, 1881.

PROGRAMME.

TUESDAY, DECEMBER 27.

Business meeting.

Taper:

Paper:

WEDNESDAY MORNING, DECEMBER 28, 9 o’clock.

“Land Communities among the Ancient Germans.” — W. F.

ALLEN, Professor of Latin and History, University of Wis-

consin.

“The Number, Distribution and Function of the large Ganglion

Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord.” —E. A. BIRGE, Professor of Zo-

ology, University of Wisconsin.

“The Causes of Insanity.”— A. O. WriGHtT, Secretary State

Board of Charities and Reform.

“Medieval German Schools.” —J. D. BUTLER, LL. D., Madison.

“The Dispersion of Drift Copper.”—R. D. SALISBURY, Beloit.

WEDNESDAY AFTERNOON, 2 o’clock.

Held in Lecture Room of Natural History, No. 36, Science Hall, Univer-

sity of Wisconsin.

Paper:

* Recent Observations on Cell-Divison and their Relation to Theo-

retical Zoology.— E. A. BIRGE,

(1) American Glacial History in the Light of Recent Investiga-

tions. (2, The Harmony of Recent Observations on Moraines,

with Croll’s Hypothesis of the Origin of the Glacial Epoch.”

—T. C. CHAMBERLIN, State Geologist, Beloit.

Proportional Representation in Legislation.” —G. ScHUMM, Editor

Radical Review.

WEDNESDAY EVENING, 7:30 o’clock.

“My Visit to the Hawaiian Volcano.” — Pror. J. D. BUTLER.

“Human Liberty Empirically Considered.” —PRESIDENT JOHN

Bascom, State University.

2 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

FREEDOM OF WILL EMPIRICALLY CONSIDERED.

By JouNn Bascom, D. D. LL. D., President University of Wisconsin.

It is not our present purpose to present again the proofs of

liberty in human action. These proofs are so primitive in

their charater. approach so nearlythe first principles of rea-

son, that later discussions of them between the defenders of

philosophical systems do not often subserve any purpose of

conviction.

The object we now have in view is a consideration of lib-

erty as it offers itself in experience, first, in the relation of

the mind to the brain; and, second, in the reaction between

the powers of the mind and the products of those powers in

the world about it. If we were to grant liberty theoreti-

cally, should we find its exercise possible under our present

experience? This is the question we wish to answer.

It will not be amiss to remind ourselves in starting of the

nature of the interests involved in this discussion of liberty.

Moral facts are supreme facts in human society. The axi-

omatic principle on which these rest in the general mind is,

Responsibility is commensurate with power. This involves

at once choice as the indispensable condition of virtue. We

are not considering in morals a balance of tendencies, but a

balancing of tendencies —a dealing of the mind with tend-

encies. No adverse statement at this point has weakened

the general convictions on which morality proceeds, or pre-

sented itself as more than an ingenious evasion of them.

Virtue and liberty rise and fall together; whatever the one

loses the other loses also.

The same relation belongs to truth and liberty. Truth is

to be inquired into and sought out. It may be attained, and

it may be missed. Thatmovement of mind, therefore, which

is to be occupied with this work of inquiry, must be flexible

and spontaneous; must be at liberty to guide itself by the

purely intellectual laws of logic. If thought is in any way

subjected to forces beyond itself it can no longer shape itself

freely to its own conditions. Conclusions reached under a

Freedom of Will Empirically Considered. 3

physical necessity have nothing to do with truth. They are

facts, not truths. The laws of logic are not laws in this

sense, the mind must move logically; but in this sense, the

mind must move logically if it is to reach the truth. The

implication is that the mind may easily move illogically,

and miss the truth; that it shapes its own movement to its

own object; that it is free, and that truth is the reward of

freedom wisely exercised.

The beauty of the world involves a like conjunction of lib-

erty and activity, though less obviously so. Beauty is fitting

thought and feelings rendered in a form wholly suitable to

them. Its pursuit involves, therefore, an ideal, and a spon-

- taneous movement toward that ideal. Impulsion and force

_are alien to beauty. Attraction and freedom are of its very

nature. |

Nor, indeed, does the plain idea of serviceabless — ren-

dered as man always will render it —lack this notion of lib-

erty. The world is made up of forces that may be used, and

of powers in man that may use them. It is made up of the

fixed and the flexible, and neither term can be lost and the

serviceable process remain. State the case strictly under

the forms of empirical forces, and not only do virtue, science,

art disappear, use also disappears. We use things in this

higher sense when we shape them to our purposes. We use

air not when we breathe it spontaneously, but when we fill

our air-brakes with it. We use water when we convert it

into steam in our boilers, rather than when we drink it un-

der an organic impulse. If the world, both in matter and in

man, is made up of forces under settled laws of interaction,

man no more uses matter than matter uses man. If we in-

clude in the natural what is causal and fixed, and in the

supernatural what is free and flexible, the natural can

never be in any way handled or interpreted or used without

the supernatural. Whenever interpretation reaches either

comprehension or use it must do so by virtue of the super-

natural, and in behalf of the supernatural. To these ideas

of knowledge and of service the one is as necessary as the

other. The knowing and using agent is not at the same

A Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

time and in the same relation a part of the thing known and ~

used.

Human knowledge and human liberty fundamentally

planted in this union of the physical and spiritual, as we

here conceive them, show empirically two lines of limita-

tion. The first of these appears in connection with the

brain, the medium by which the mind receives influences,

and the instrument by which it communicates energies. We

-may pass at once to the extreme conclusion which science is

approaching, that the nervous system in man, with its great

centre, the cerebrum, is constructed throughout with definite

lines of inner and outer movement. Organic connections

differ from mechanical ones in admitting a greater variety

of offices, and allowing a freer substitution of one organ or

one method for another; yet a distinct constructive purpose

rules an organism as it rulesa mechanism. The definite-

ness of the nerves and of the exterior termini of nerves in

the nervous system carries with it a corresponding definite-

ness of offices both in them and in the great nerve-centres.

Exactness in superficial relations without exactness in inte-

rior ones, would be futile, the meaningless juncture of order

and disorder. The distribution and precision of the surface in-

dicate like exact inner relations in completion of the one plan. —

Observation of the effects of obstruction and of disease in

the brain, and of artificial irritation of its different locali-

ties, serves also to disclose explicitness of office combined

with organic flexibility.

There is nothing in this which liberty may not easily ac-

cept. This dependence of the mind on the body gives strict

conditions to liberty, but does not take away its first terms.

The tool is an instrument to the hand; the hand is an instru-

ment to the brain; the tool, the hand, and the brain are con-

joint instruments to the mind. The workman cannot go

beyond the possibilities of his tools. His circuit of liberty

les within those possibilities. The mind united to the body

receives from it what we may cail two sets of limitations, or

two sets of powers as we choose to regard them: those which

pertain, in the senses, to the ingress of knowledge, and those

which pertain, in the muscular system, to its egress in ac-

Freedom of Will Empirically Considered. 5

tion, The nervous system is the medium in each case, and

the bond between the two.

The only view which at all gan with liberty at this

point is that which regards all action in consciousness as a

secondary accompaniment of this interplay of stimuli and

activities in an organism, and so determined in its phenom-

ena by it. If the chief nerve-centres, more especially the

cerebrum, in man are the seat of a series of interactions

which take place between the inward movement and the

ontward one, and are governed by them; if the phenomena

of consciousness are simply the accompaniments of these

complex actions and reactions in the brain, then liberty is

lost, not limited, by such conditions.

The adverse reasons are many. (1) A very large share,

much the largest share, of nervous interplay goes on both in

the lowest and in the highest life without consciousness.

Consciousness is certainly no necessary product of merely

nervous interaction. (2) Consciousness regarded in this

light is from beginning to end a superfluous term. If con-

sciousness is incident to forces seeking directly their own

ends, we have no more use for consciousness in living than

in dead things; no more need of it in securing the muscular

activities that follow thought than in the circulation of the

blood, or in uniting the recognition by the eye of the char-

acters on the printed page with the muscles of the throat in

articulation. If no state of consciousness is of itself pro-

ductive of subsequent states of consciousness, but all are

alike dependent on underlying cerebral conditions, then each

state of consciousness and the entire series of states are, in

reference to physical events, supernumerary results. Be-

tween these states and these events it is impossible to affirm

any correspondence which is of the nature of knowledge.

(3) Consciousness has been introduced in development, on

the contrary, as anew term ina higher life, incident not

simply to organic relations, but one that seems greatly to

extend them and put them to new service. (4) There is no

known counterpart of any given thought in any given mole-

cular changes of any nerve substance. The first and funda-

mental step of proof in this direction has not yet been taken.

6 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The whole theory of correspondence has not one explicit

fact to sustain it. The senses are definite in their outer con-

ditions and inner impressions; the activities are definite in

their inner conditions and outer effects; but our experience

does not extend or cannot extend to any puremental state

as the exact counterpart of a physical one embraced between

these two lines of ingress and egress. Arguments looking

to such a conclusion are all. inferences from insufficient

grounds. | |

There are two contrasted views that we may take of the

relation of the processes of pure thought to cerebral action.

We may regard them as strictly incident to cerebral changes

which intervene between sensation and action. This sup-

position implies an exact and causal connection of each

specific cerebral state with a corresponding state in con-

sciousness. The line of efficient forces is thus maintained in

the physical world. Or, we may regard pure intellectual

activity as a distinct term, under its own laws, which is in-

troduced between sensor impressions and muscular actions,

as the musician is an independent agent between the sheet

of music that lies on the piano and the instrument itself.

On this supposition the mind as mind receives impressions,

correlates them in its own fashion, arrests them or passes

them on in effects according to its own ends. We may, if we

choose, modify this second opinion by still further supposing

that there is a distinct molecular state of brain as the neces-

sary accompaniment of each thought, but that it is secured by

existing states of mind and not by antecedent sensations.

This expansion of the theory, however, seems to be a weak

concession to physical ideas, as no such correspondence can

be proved, and the cerebral states thus accompanying pure —

thought would have causal connections neither with antece-

dent nor subsequent cerebral states, would be a dead term in

the material world, and serve no known purpose in the

mental one.

This intervention of mind does not imply any chasm in

physical sequences, any break of relations between sensa-

tions and actions, but simply the power of the mind to pen-

etrate, and in a great variety of ways to modify, these —

e Freedom of Will Empirically Considered. 7

connections; thus heat alters physical sequences, without

interrupting them. The change does not lie in the insertion

of alien terms, but in the control of congenital ones.

Several empirical reasons are urged for the strict depend-

ence of thought on cerebral states. In insanity, it is said,

the mind is subverted in its action simply by disease of the

brain. But this it should be under either view. The mind

is dependent for its facts or supposed facts on a nervous

organism, and an abnormal state of the organism may

wholly alter the data of thought. The quickness, however, and

accuracy with which the patient reasons from his premises are

often very observable. If the sensor and active physical pow-

ers are broken down by disease, the mind on the one side loses

data, and on the other side the power of expression. Aphasia,

or the inability to utter or to write words, is often offered as

a proof of this dependence. This fact, however, seems to

look in the opposite direction, as the idea is still grasped by

the mind even when it cannot control the organs of utter-

ance.

But the experience which looks most directly to a con-

stant and complete dependence of thought on cerebral

conditions is the sense of fatigue and the waste of nerve-

tissue which accompany the action of mind. This fact re-

quires careful consideration. Under all theories the brain is

the medium of impressions and expressions, and the action

of the mind lies between the two. The only question is

whether it lies as intervening cerebral links between cere-

bral states, to which connection thought is incidental; or as

a relatively independent spiritual power to which no cerebral

state need be set apart. In either case the action of mind

involves sensor activity and motor activity, and this, too, in

a much higher degree than is usually thought. It is this

incipient or complete ministration of sensor and motor

action of the brain to the mind that we would regard as a

sufficient explanation of the fatigue of mental activity.

Things and words are the counters of mind, and without

them it can make only the feeblest advances in reflection.

But things involve sensor impressions, and our acts of atten-

tion, analysis, and arrangement involve sensor impressions

Si Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

and motor activities. The sensor and motor terms are as

omnipresent in inquiry as are the two poles in an electric

current. Still more if possible is this true in.the use of

words, the most intimate and constant means of thought.

When the words of others direct us, they become sensor

impressions that call for careful attention. When we our-

selves guide our thoughts by words, they are either distinct

motor terms or guasi-motor terms.

All acquisition commences with language and seeks its

constant aid, and as language has a definite cerebral term

involved in its use and expression, we find in this fact an

occasion for a consumption of nerve-tissue in all mental

action. Children, if circumstances admit the habit, prefer

to study aloud; that is, to aid the comprehending process by

a full use of its counters. If the habit is inconvenient, the

pupil will often move his lips without emitting any sound.

He still finds the incipient utterance of the accompanying

words a help to the mind. Some adults are aided in under-

standing a book by reading it aloud. AIl persons observe

the much greater clearness of thought which follows the

utterance of one’s conclusions or the writing of them.

Even dreams frequently lead to talking in sleep. All these

things show thatit requires considerable effort on the part of

the student to reduce the language which he employs in

thought to its lowest terms in nascent expression.

A little attention to our mental processes will show us

that language never disappears in thought, but that our

most silent processes still go forward by its aid. This de-

pendence of thought on expression is also well illustrated

in the education of mutes. “Though the deaf-and-dumb ~

prove clearly to us that a man may have human thought

without being able to speak, they by no means prove that

he can think without any means of physical expression.

Herein lies the necessity of utterance, the repre- —

sentation of thought. Thought is not even present to the

thinker till he has set it forth out of himself. . . . The

deaf-and-dumb gesticulate as they think. Laura Bridg-

man’s fingers worked, making the initial movements for

letters of the finger-alphabet, not only during her waking

Freedom of Will Empirically Considered. 9

thoughts but even in her dreams. . . Heinicke gives a descrip-

tion of the results of his teaching his pupils to articulate,

their delight at being able to communicate their ideas in a

new way, and the increased intelligence which appeared in

the expression of their faces. . . . The teachers of Laura

Bridgman used to restrain her from making inarticulate

sounds, but she felt a great desire to make them, and would

sometimes shut herself up and ‘indulge herself in a surfeit

of sounds.’ But this vocal taculty of hers was chiefly exer-

cised in giving what may be called name-sounds to persons

whom she knew, and which she would make when the persons.

to whom she had given them came near her, or when she

wanted to find them, or even when she was thinking of

them. She had made as many as fifty or sixty of these

name-sounds.” * These cases indicate the aid which the

mind immediately receives from any method of expression,

and the consequent pleasure it takes in it.

Deaf mutes are accustomed, in acquiring their lessons,

to spell out the results on their fingers. The training of

imbeciles opens with an effort to give them a better control

of their hands, their senses, and their organs of speech.

Impotence, vagueness, uncertainty in these directions are

the expression of kindred mental qualities. One who does.

not articulate words well finds difficulty in recalling them.

When a name we have forgotten is rightly articulated we

recognize it at once. Language is the full realization to the

mind of its own activity. Weare also to bear in mind the

greater fatigue which attends on thought when it receives

full vocal utterance, asin oratory. The accompanying activ-

ity of the nerves and organs of articulation with the neces-

sity of continuous and rapid expression often make the

fatigue very great. This labor is also much increased if the

subject discoursed on is one whose vocabulary we have not

fully mastered, or if the discussion is carried on in a lan-

guage with which we are not perfectly familiar.

On the other hand, an exact but familiar process, as the

multiplication of large numbers, is much more trying if we

*“Farly History of Mankind,” pp. 67-74.

ich Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

are compelled to carry it on mentally, and are not allowed

visible counters. In this casé the steps are no more diffi-

cult, but the difficulty of rétaining them is greatly in-

creased. Mere reverie, in which the transitions are very

loose, is restful rather than fatiguing.

It is an ultimate fact in neurology that connections once

established in images or in actions, become increasingly

easy and spontaneous. The power to utter words by rote,

into which complete memory is constantly passing, is plainly

the result of nervous and muscular training. Literary mat-

ter which has just been learned can be repeated but slowly

and hesitatingly. A repetition on successive days greatly

increases the facility of movement, and a repetition at dis-

tant periods very much strengthens the hold of the mind.

We often render aloud lines of poetry, giving full sway to

the rhythm, as a means of recalling one or more missing

words. The loss of memory by disease and its restoration

of health find explanation in these neural connections. More

recent occurrences suffer most from this loss of recollection,

and the power of memory returns ;by first regaining more

distant events, those whose connections have been fully

established in the nervous system. This method of restora-

tion is made plain by the simple fact that memory is supple-

mented by vital connections in the nervous system of

perceptions and of actions. A memory which easily lays

hold of an idea, but retains with difficulty the precise words.

in which it is stated, is doubtless to be explained by diver-

sity in the cerebral conditions of language; as much as is

hesitancy in speech as contrasted with volubility. Memory

is evidently much modified by the fact that it so often in-

volves the physical condition of expression.

More than one instance of this kind has come to my

knowledge. A person, awakened from a deep sleep, has re-

called certain thoughts that were present to the mind, and

also words that accompanied them. Giving the subject

closer atention, he has been surprised to find that the words

did not belong to the thoughts, but seemed to have been

evoked vaguely by them. The thought-process stirred the

faculties of expression without controlling them. In like

Freedom of Will Empirically Considered. 11

manner sounds that enter the ear are distorted in dreams

so as to suit the circumstances of,the dream, rather than the

external fact. Both of these results indicate a momentary

separation between the thinking process and the organs of

expression and preception which accompany and sustain it.

The hesitancy and difficulty with which the mind sometimes

meets in trying to recall a word seems to lie in the feeble

hold of the memory on the one side, and the inability of the

mind to guide the organs of utterance on the other. The

image of the written word and the sound of the word are

both partially present, and both fail of perfect form. Thus

one may have uttered yesterday a difficult sound, and have

lost to-day the power of repeating it.

If we allow an exact correspondence between cerebral

condition and pure thought. we confound the distinction

between instinct and reason. Instinct is plainly character-

ized by a direct connection of external stimuli with appro-

priate actions; the transition being, however, more or less

protracted, and united with the ordinary variable experi-

ences of life. Reason, under the view now combated, would

be simply an extension of instinct, whereas it manifests

itself not only as a new combination of powers, but also as

one that is constantly setting instinct aside and reducing it

to its lowest terms.

This theory of an exact correspondence between cerebral

states and rational activity makes no sufficient and no

plausible provision for the growth of rational powers. —

Cerebral states and cerebral actions are not inexhaustible.

If a distinct combination is demanded by each distinct

thought, and if memory requires the preservation of these

combinations, the capacity of the brain would be steadily

exhausted by its development, and we should experience in

reason, as we do experience in instinct, limits to mental un-

folding. So small a substance as the brain cannot, in its

molecular states, be the counterpart of the entire universe

in all the actual and possible relations of its parts. There

must be some limit to the discursus of reason if each

thought appropriates a definite portion of a limited power.

The theory is unreasonably complicated, and in that degree

12 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

improbable. It would also imply increased difficulty in the

acquisition of mental power, when the facts disclose in-

creased ease. Nor is it any relief to this embarrassment to

say that the special senses, like the eye, give the mind very

complex impressions by an equally complex organic state.

The image of a landscape is displaced by each succeeding

image. The eye isa specialized organ that has been de-

veloped to its present power by stages of growth that date

back almost to the beginning of animal life, and yet its maxi-

mum power is represented in the reproduction of a single

landscape, with very great limitation of distinctness of

vision beyond the immediate centre of observation. The

method and degree of reproduction in the eye and the ear

give no color of plausibility, but the reverse rather, to the

supposition that the cerebrum has in its molecular action an

exhaustless representative and retentive power both in the

regions of imagination and of abstract thought.

Mathematical truth and all exact knowledge lead to the

opposite conclusion. Cerebral states as physical effects can

never be the precise counterparts of each other in different

brains. No truth, therefore, dependent on such states could

be absolute and universal. Some kind of color-blindness

would sooner or later show itself in all directions.

The deductive reasons already referred to come in to con-

firm this conclusion of the relative independence of pure

thoughtin anunmistakable way. No physical relation can be

the equivalent of logical convictions; and no convictions

can be merely physical effects. The two lines of law are

not parallel, and cannot be made the counterparts of each

other. The conditions of thought are not those of force.

We may then pass all strictly physical experience as in-

deed giving limits to liberty and sometimes limits crowding

very close upon it, but limits that never abolish it as long as

thought remains. We turn now to our intellectual experi-

ence in its relation to freedom.

Men start with a balance of powers and a bias of disposi-

tion which are not easily modified or resisted. This natural

disposition is the result of primitive passions and tastes that

are stubborn facts by no means to be wiped out by a simple

Freedom of Will Empirically Considered. 13

choice, nor indeed altogether to be rooted out by the most

faithful and continuous effort. A portion of these procliv-

ities may be attributed to physical inheritance, and a por-

tion to original endowment. For our present purpose we

need not strive to settle the balance between them or even

stop to enforce the existence of the second constituent. The

position of the individual in reference to liberty is not much

altered whether his first make-up comes to him by descent

or by gift, or by a combination of the two. The stubborn-

ness of these first tendencies experience clearly records.

Those who have the training of children attach great im-

portance to parentage and antecedents. Even in the

earliest instruction these forces make themselves felt. The

parent and the teacher are constantly aware in the same

household of diversities of temperaments and tastes as

fundamental considerations in discipline. It is true that

much more can be done in shaping these forces early in life

than later in life, but they can at no time be overlooked, and

will often undo unskilful and even skilful labor in a sudden,

resentful way.

It is also to be remembered that the moral inheritance of

early surroundings and discipline so adds itself to, and in-

corporates itself with, primitive endowments as to be prac-

tically inseparable from them. By the time a young man

begins to come within the range of his own personal freedom

a composite stream of strong currents hashim in hand. He

need not lose time to inquire how he came by his inclina-

tions, whether by native endowment, by physical inherit-

ance, or by direct instruction; to guide and shape these

energies, already realized in volume and direction, becomes

his sufficient labor. The limitations of liberty are, there-

fore, very obvious and very great. They are allied to those

of a gunner whose position and piece are given him. Said

an active boy in answer to the complaints of his sluggish

companion, “I do not walk so fast on purpose, I cannot help

it.” If we look at the limitations of liberty in reference to

the immediate actions that are.to follow them, we may re-

gard freedom as not having much to do with the ordering

’

14 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

of life. Indeed, hasty reasoners often come to this con-

clusion. y

A restriction closely concurrent with this of primitive dis-

position is that of habit. We all becomeincreasingly aware

of this restraint as we advance. We are not simply ham-

pered by physical habits, but by intellectual ones also. The

lines of thought we have taken up we pursue with increas-

ing ease, but we are at the same time more and more reluct-

ant to accept new ones. In youth we were adepts in

mathematics or quick in languages; in middle life we dis-

cover we have much narrowed these powers by disuse. We

have passed the point of indifference in reference to any

class of attainments, and find them all positively eae or

positively hard.

The convictions we have reached, especially those touch-

ing action and character, personal, social and religious, —

though they themselves may have grown up in the exercise

of liberty, are still limitations upon it. Especially is this

true if a dogmatic spirit enters into them and we regard our

opinions as finalities. ;

What Lanfrey says of Napoleon is capable of much wider

application. He is speaking of wilfulness— which is really

the want of well-ordered will—as united with very great

intellectual powers. “The studied frenzy of a calculating

mind is without remedy, because it does not depend on a

sentiment, but on the very form of the intellect itself.” This

is true of all mental activity in proportion as it becomes deep

and narrow. The life flows on init as a river in a canon,

not merely beyond flexion, but for the most part beyond ob-

servation. A dogmatic intellect does not simply open before

us one way, it systematically closes up all other ways.

Dogmatism is a universal loss of liberty, and most of all in

the inner life of the mind. :

The remoteness of primary principles from the truths

which flow from them leads to the same result. Most of the

discussion by which the current of empirical philosophy is

resisted in our day goes for little or nothing. It lies far out

among marginal truths, and can find no acceptance with

minds adversely disposed, and rarely leads to a fundamental

Freedom of Will Empirically Considered. 15

renovation of thought. A boy sits upon the bank of a stream

and gives his slight boat an impulse up the current; it soon

returns to him, because the water flows in the opposite di-

rection. The tidal movement of many minds is something

not often comprehended, difficult to be resisted, and hard to

be overcome. While the questions involved are questions of

reason, the questions are very many, and the reasons very

many, and are arrayed like armies. Single men or single

regiments of men, can no longer wage successful war.

Another restraint which overtakes freedom in its unfold-

ing is that which arises from the accumulating force of feel-

ings and of social relations. It is thought that the minds of

women are less open to the force of reason than those of

men. So far as the assertion is true, it is largely due to the

emotional energy which characterizes them. This medium of

thought refracts and colors the light on all personal topics,

till a presentation is insensibly reached that suits the temper

of the inquirer. Light is full of all colors, and will yield

them all according to our analyzing prism. Wise men find

that in dealing with the foibles of others they must not ex-

pect to remove them, but rather to accommodate themselves

tothem. Friends that undertake thoroughly to correct each

other will soon reach aversion. Refractions that belong to

the very atmosphere of the mind itself must be patiently

borne. It is far easier for those who see these disturbances

of vision in others to endure them than for those who suffer

under them without recognition to remove them.

Not only are the feelings themselves very persistent forces,

all our social relations become objective provocations to

them, renewing them constantly and with great energy.

As we interpret society to-day we interpret it to-morrow;

and it acts on us vigorously to perpetuate ruling impressions.

Hence it is not our own emotional atmosphere simply, but

the atmosphere of the world we live in, that is unbraiding

the light for us, and casting sombre or brilliant colors on

the objects about us. To these physical and intellectual

restrictions are to be added secondary ones which arise from

their interaction. Disease, fatigue, old age, success, failure,

predispose the mind to certain judgments which are not eas-

16 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ily cast off. The unsuccessful man becomes untrustworthy

in his opinions. | :

We care not to trace these limitations further, but wish

rather to inquire how they leave the problem of liberty. So

profoundly are some minds impressed with these subtile and

overwhelming influences that human liberty sinks out of all

high estimate. Life seems but a painful beating of the

waves of the ocean by aswimmer who must ultimately sink.

Constraining forces are of the most pervasive and insinu-

ating order; they are often nearest us when we think least

of them, and bind us most when we seem to ourselves most

free. |

Accumulative impressions, like those now brought forward,

require corresponding care in the search for compensatory

considerations or they quite confound the thoughts. Weare

too much accustomed to think of liberty as the immediate

casting off of restraint, and as efficient, therefore, in the

degree in which this is accomplished. This is far from the

truth. The value of liberty lies in its power to work under

and with invariable and permanent forces. If liberty in-

volved mobility simply, it would lose its possessions as fest

as it gained them. The air is mobile, and for that reason its

distribution of parts has little interest. Wecan carve noth-

ing out of it and record nothing on it. Rocks are compar-

atively immobile, and immediately they become material in

many forms of work, while their distribution is an important

fact. If results followed on after vagrant wishes, choice

would gain apparent power, but would suffer immense loss.

The thing done would be as quickly undone, and the clash

of choices would be as idle as the collisions of winds. In-

deed, there can be but one Aladdin with his magic lamp. He

alone must be left to act on things fixed and permanent for

all but himself. A pair of them would subvert the world,

become spirits with invulnerable bodies who could settle

nothing in confliet.

The resistance which surrounding conditions offer to lib-

erty represents the strength and tenacity of the material at —

the service of the mind, and is a question simply of the right

degree. If the resistance is slight, the gains are slight; if

_ Freedom of Will Empirically Considered. 1

_ the resistance is great, the labor must be great, but so also

may be the results.

Now the individual and the race encounter in the exercise

of freedom two lines of resistance: that offered by matter

and that offered by the mind itself. The first of these is, in

the strictest sense, the coherence and firmness of material.

It is the office of mind, availing itself of inorganic and

organic laws, to permeate matter and hold it to fixed and

extended service. The most complete illustration of this is

the human body, penetrated in every part with nerves of

sensation and action, and so becoming not itself merely an

arena of mind, but a powerful instrument of mind, operating

by means of it freely in the physical world. To complete

this mastery of mind over matter, to establish it as a settled

intellectual dynasty, is what wise men are about in the world.

Now material laws are sufficiently pliant to thought to make

this labor possible, and sufficiently resistful to make the

gains of infinite worth when secured. Men soon learn that

mere vaporing accomplishes nothing, but they also learn that

skill and patience are surprisingly effective. The stream

does not flow like water, but it flows like a glacier. It can

hardly be said that the physical material offered the hand of

man is so intractable as to waste liberty; it has rather that

degree of tractability which stores liberty.

But the second line of resistance is one of equal interest —

the restraints which the laws of mind offer to mind. It has

been fourd a universal social law, that if freedom is to grow,

wisdom and virtue must grow with it. It is the same truth

we are contemplating in the limitations of liberty within

the mind itself. The agency slips away from the agent un-

less the agent masters himself also. While man is held

back from the control of the physical world by laws within

that world, he is equally held back by laws within himself,

and the two sets of laws must be handled together and

mastered together; otherwise the movement will soon find

arrest. When the mind stagnates within itself its external

force is lost also.

_ What do the limitations of freedom which we have found

arising within the mind itself signify but this, that the grow-

18 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ing points of intelligence and virtue must be carefully main-

tained? If these are lost, freedom is lost. The mind settles

down under fixed epinions, becomes subject to an unbroken

sequence of feelings, and accepts the social sentiments that

prevail about it.

The one condition of freedom is to maintain unimpaired

intellectual activity in all directions of action. This alters

the horizon, varies the grounds of effort, breaks up and sub-

ordinates habit, and holds in arrest the aggression of other

minds. The mind that ceases on any topic — for instance,

on that of religion—from fresh intellectual activity has

turned down the light by which it should be guided, and it

is only fortunate, therefore, that it begins to fall into a cal-

culable routine of action, that it does not go plunging on

with nothing to direct it. When the buds of a tree cease to

shoot the leaves may come and go for awhile with the sea-

sons, but the constructive life is arrested. The limitations of

liberty do not show the power of man to be nothing, but only

that there are moments, places, and ways of its skilful ap-

plication.

We are not to conceive liberty in men asa gigantic power,

easily executing its purposes and holding fast results with a

firm grasp. We allstart under conditions alien to ourselves,

organic influences, educational influences, social influences.

Here is a young man brought up on a farm to hard labor,

close economy, and a limited intellectual horizon. External

circumstances and parental precept and example have con-

curred in deepening the ruts in which he is slowly moving

onward. None the less it is possible that some new activity |

shall come to his thoughts, that he shall of a sudden

say to his astonished father, on the occasion of some new

exaction, “I do not think so.” From that moment he may

begin to break the cords that have bound him, and, in the

progress of years, get to himself new incentives with a new

outlook. Motives have force, not in themselves, but in rela-

tion to the mind to which they appeal. Change the mind

and you change the motive. When aman thinks to some

some new purpose the chains of custom drop off him. Ey-

ery man, in his experience, is liable to share the astonishment

Freedom of Will Empirically Considered. 19

_ of the father, when his son says to him for the first time, “I

think differently.” Asamanthinketh soishe. Hereisa

pivot of revolution which no external facts can control, but

upon which they in turn are dependent. If we introduce

liberty in human action at this centre of thought, and leave

it to extend itself by a steady modification of internal con-

ditions, and to maintain itself by fresh acquisitions, freedom

is reconcilable both with the theory of lifeand the facts of

life, and is seen to be the one significant factor in them both.

If there isa slow accumulation of circumstances about

one which hedge the way, the fact is due to the passivity of

the mind in the ripening of events. If the mind is active

and watchful, this infinite division of particulars, this slow

gathering of difficulties are in favor of liberty. By foresight

and effort the mind increases its powers of resistance and

guidance. The problem of life is indefatigable will at war

with unwearied forces, but forces can be divided against

themselves, and enlisted on the side of will.

While spontaneity exercised in thought — and in this way

productive of light — isthe condition of continuous freedom,

the condition of the condition is virtue, feelings that turn on

and subordinate themselves to the truth. If the intellectual

movement is not honest in its incipiency it shortly fails of

thoroughness. Itis not light alone that is the efficient con-

structive force in the green tissue of leaves; it is light and

heat. Itis not truth alone that maintains the vitality of

growing points in the mind, but truth and feeling. Feelings

that are alien to the facts soon alter our conception of the

facts, and so the facts shake us off and escape us. We

are not masters, because we have lost the true word of com-

mand.

Personal liberty is like liberty iu the state. Its safe pos-

session is one of profound obedience to deeply implanted

principles. It is not, therefore, the less liberty or of less

worth. On the one side the very condition of strength is a

struggle with domineering tendencies, and on the other their

steadfast government under new conditions. Liberty isa

movement from law to law, each succeeding law being

higher, broader, more inclusive, and more fortunate.

20 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The value of liberty is that it enables the mind freely to

conform to law. The liberty that does not pass instantly

into law is like the seed that is not sownin the soil. It abides

alone. Liberty that confines itself to its narrow field, that is

content to knit skilfully together the past and the future at

the one plastic point, the present, is not weak, it is well-nigh

omnipotent. It only requires long times and large spaces in

which to unroll its power; it merely calls for material of

every order and the union of every law by which to record

its work. There is no reason in any limitation of liberty

why, under the laws of inheritance, man should not in time

walk the earth with the bounding life of an archangel, gov-

ern it with the strength of an archangel, and take home its

thoughts and feelings to the pure and serene experience of

an archangel.

The one law of this progress is continuous intelligence and

virtue.

THE INCREASE OF INSANITY.

By A. O. WRIGHT, Secretary of the State Board of Charities and Reform.

The United States census of 1860 showed in the state of

Wisconsin 283 insane persons. The census of 1880 will show

probably about 2,000. This is not an isolated fact. An in-

crease of insanity is shown by these two enumerations in

the twenty years from 1860 to 1880 in every state of our

Union, and in some of them as great an increaee as in Wis-

consin. Is the increase a real increase, and what are the

causes of it?

I. This is not all a real increase. The census of 1880 was

taken much more accurately than ever before, and this in-

creased accuracy shows itself especially in the enumeration ~

of the defective classes. The United States deputy marshals

were sometimes careless in counting the numbers of popula-

tion, and much more careless in gathering such special sta-

tistics as those of the defective classes. Their sins were

The Increase of Insanity. 21

generally of omission rather than commission, and therefore

the more accurate methods of the last census caused an ap-

parent increase in the number of the insane, as of all the de-

fective classes. Thus this census will show in Massachusetts

one insane person to every 338 of the population instead of

one to 350 as before supposed.

II. An apparent increase of insanity is caused by the

wider definitions of insanity given nowadays by physicians

in charge of insane hospitals. A wide range of diseases of

the brain and of mental and moral perversions is now called

insanity, which formerly would have been called nervous-

ness, or eccentricity, or wickedness, as the case might be.

Consistently with this theory an expert witness lately testi-

fied in the Guiteau trial that one in five persons on the aver-

age are insane. The effect of these teachings has been to

cause many persons now to be considered insane who form-

erly would not have been so considered. The disease or the

mental or moral perversion would have been there, but it

would not have been calledinsanity. The increase of insan-

ity from this cause is like the astonishing increase of some

cities, made on paper by taking in outlying suburbs.

III. A very large apparent increase of insanity has been

made by the better care now taken of the insane than

formerly. The barbarous treatment of the insane which

lasted as the rule in Wisconsin down to about 1860, when

the State Hospital was fairly opened, and after that in most

jails and poorhouses until after the State Board of Charities

and Reform began their work of improvement of those in-

stitutions in 1870, and which is still found in a few places in

this state to-day, tended to greatly shorten the lives of the

insane. Living in filth and squalor, chilled by frost and

scorched with heat, given too little food and drink, shut in

dark, damp dungeons away from the healing beams of the

sun, they died rapidly. Now, under humane treatment,

with proper food, warmth, exercise and fresh air, the chronic

insane live at least as long as the average of mankind.

There is little in the mental disease itself to destroy life, and

people cared for according to the laws of health in hospitals

and county asylums are less liable to disease and death than

ees

22 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

those who are free to neglect their health outside of insane

asylums. Now this process of preserving the lives of the

insane has been going on in this state for the last twenty

years with the inevitable result of increasing the number of

the insane. For while as many have been becoming insane

as ever, fewer have been dying cff, and thus the number in-

sane alive at any given time is growing greater.

IV. Another cause of the increase of insanity is the in-

crease of population. Wisconsin has increased from 775,000

in 1860 to 1,315,000 in 1880. While the population has nearly

doubled it is not wonderful that the number of insane should

increase also. ie

V. An important cause of the increase of insanity in

this state is that Wisconsin is passing from a new state to.

an old settled state. The first generation of pioneers who.

settled the southern part of the state are passing away.

When they came here, they were usually people of vigorous.

health and in the prime of life. Like most settlers of a new

country they left their defective classes behind them. There

were few insane among the immigrants who came first or

among those who have followed them since from ‘the eastern

states or from foreign lands. The cases of insanity we have

had have mostly been produced upon our own soil. Now,

bearing in mind the great part that heredity has in produc-

ing insanity, it is plain that a body of immigrants

selected for healthfulness of body and mind, as nearly all

immigrants are, will have less insanity for several genera-

tions than the people of an old settled country. The ratio

of insanity to the population will show this. The census of

1860 shows insanity in the ratio of one insane person to every

2,740 of the population. A census which I have recently

taken of the insane under public care which is at least as

imperfect as that was, because it gives only those

under public care, and not those cared for at home,

gives a ratio of one insane person to every 743 of the

population. This shows a sufficiently rapid increase in ©

the ratio of insanity. But the same census when shown by

counties as in the subjoined table, and illustrated by the

map which I have prepared, shows very clearly that the in-

-” ae

=| Oe

The Increase of Insanity. 23

crease in the ratio of insanity has been in the older settled

counties. Thus the same law is at work within the state as

between the counties which is at work upon the state at

large.

When the results of the United States census of 1880 in

regard to the insane are published, there will probably be

about 2,000 insane shown to be in the state or one to every

_ 656 of the population.

Of the five causes for the apparent or real increase of in-

sanity, we may suppose that hereafter we shall have as

accurate returns of insanity as the nature of the subject

admits of. While it is questionable whether certain persons

are insane or not, no one can count the insane with entire

accuracy; but they will be hereafter counted as accurately

as possible. The second cause in the wider definitions of

insanity has gone about as far as it is likely to go in increas-

ing the number of the insane. If anything, thetfe is likely

to be a reaction as the result of Guiteau’s trial, and of other

causes, to narrow somewhat the definition of insanity and

thus slightly reduce the number of those called insane. The

increase of insanity caused by the more humane treatment

and therefore longer lives, is, we may trust, a permanent

increase. Rather than resort to the old, barbarous methods,

it would be far better to give these poor creatures the euthan-

asia afforded by an overdose of laudanum. If they are to

be killed off, let it at least be done without unnecessary

cruelty. But though the increase in the number of insane

from this cause is doubtless a permanent one, it will not be

as rapid in the future as in the past.

When the expectation of life among the insane has once

been permanently lengthened by more humane modes of

treating them, they will not continue to accumulate forever,

but will die off as before, only ata greaterage. We have not

yet reached the end of this change for the better in the treat-

ment of the insane. But when we have done so, then this

source of increase will soon cease. The increase of popula-

tion in our state will doubtless go on, but at a slower rate,

and with it necessarily that increase in the total number of

insane which goes with it. The increase of insanity, which

24 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

arises from our state becoming an old settled state, will of

course keep on until we attain our fair average.

What that average is becomes then an interesting question.

In Massachusetts, as I learn from Mr. F. B. Sanborn, who

has charge of that subject there, the rate of insane to the

population is about one to 338. In Scotland it is about one —

to 290. If we assume that we shall reach the ratio of one

to 500 under public care in twenty years more, and shall

havea population then of 1,600,000, both low estimates, we

must expect in 1900 to provide for at least 3,200 insane

persons.

povetas | BAYFIELD

1V WV G)

ASHLAND i

(IV

BURNETT

CHIPPEWA

PRICE

BARRON

MEISE)

—

a | coe ire rell Cc i Ss

i) 7S ee | | im Pa 4

Lu lv = i Ih er . ‘i Uh o HS 3

F WODODII| @ IV S

A ANN - | la a io ne cil

> | i TIN ‘if fi

Aa i se al ie vy

| Hi: ie ill I I allt

AUS eo? eee

rome rowatn = | VERNON | o @ “Ui i i 7s

J—MORE THAN! T0 EACH 600 wu i LL i

HW — 170 EACH 600 T0800 IV QJRICHLAND el i Pail S

‘IM =1 TO EACHENO 701000 ( ae iM ys i Ul

IVLESS THANITO EACH 1000 Lis

Pras. Chien fh

Lit

ml nif

po ras

‘

The Increase of Insaaity.

_ If supported. in state institutions at anywhere near the

rates these institutions now cost, the charge to the public

will be at least $640,000 annually, besides $3,000,000 for build-

ings, a burden which the state will find it difficult to bear.

This whole question is one whichis now pressing on us for

solution and which deserves the attention of every philan-

thropist and every statesman.

TABLE SHOWING INSANITY IN WISCONSIN BY COUNTIES, 1884.

Counties.

Buffalo ...

Glanls 46 85

Columbia .

Crawford .

Douglass. .

Dann .: 2°.

Towa..... é

Juneau ..

Kenosha ..

Kewaunee

LaCrosse. .

La Fayette

eee ewww wwe

aire (e|\e)'@. 6 «)'e (eile

eer ee ee ene

eee ee ee eee

i ee

Sw aie de! aiwlale

Ce ar

CA OC Ce

ee ee

eeeececor sds

See ee vse 6 «

Langlade. .

Lincoln ...

Total insane

under pub-

lic care.

ulation: one

Ratio to popu-

to each.

825

sete ee ee

Counties.

Marathon) «hisses ent

Marinetice. see -

Marquette™ ..).,./:. .

Milwaukee: ........

Monroews st cer. ees

ITI COW en ry Wetieees ae, 8

Sheboygan .........

Maylor weyers

Trempealeau .......

Wermnon sss worse. 0 xs

Washington........

Waukesha .........

IWialpacals stactacre a

Wraushamratencs a8 oa.

Winnebago..... ...

IAW OOU Sr. osteo. aes

State at large.......

under pub-

Total insane

lic care.

lation: one to

Ratio to popu-

each.

ae eee ewe

Car te eC et ter

; 4

26 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

THE INCREASE OF INSANITY. . WF

_ SECOND PAPER. 1882.

By A. O. WRIGHT, Secretary State Board of Charities and Reform.

Last year I presented to the Academy a paper upon the

increase of insanity in this state, in which I gave a census

of the insane under public care. by counties, the first ever

made in the state, showing that we had then 1,773 insane

persons under public care or one to every 742 persons in the

state, and predicted that we should probably reach the num-

ber of 3,200 insane in the state by the close of this century.

' Ihave completed another census of: the insane under pub-

lic care, and am able to give statistics for this year.

There were on September 30, 1882, under public care in this

state, 1,913 insane persons. This is an increase of 140 over

last year. If the same increase occurs for the next eighteen

years, or until 1900, we shall have about 5,000 insane per-

sons at that time under public care.

On the supposition that we shall have about 1,600,000 pop-

ulation at the close of the century, that would be one insane

person to every 320 of the population, or not far from the

proportion of Massachusetts.

But it is not hkely that the increase during the whole pe-

riod will be so rapid, or the number of insane at the end of

the century so great as these figures seem to show. In all

probability insanity will continue to increase until eventu-

ally we reach the ratio of Massachusetts or even of Scotland,

one to 290. But this increase will be by a continually re-

tarded ratio. As the number of the insane increases, the

rate of increase will grow less, until some fixed ratio is

reached, from which the variations will be slight and tem-

porary, as long as the conditions of society remain the same.

The increase, or in some cases, decrease, of insane by

counties, is shown by the following table:

. The Increase of Insanity. ut

_ The counties which have had the largest increase are:

b Mimrercnticen) eT. ieee ooo ee ite OHUDVCWANs <aimtis. sink eee ae oe 7

Winnebago........ Pape rres ots. stshe sts LAS NGO lM TE; oo ighe spe ged edi <a s Riakere 7

PEGE O Meese oi <b sles cisiecie bee es Set Ty |S RBemnealean. 5 A(kc bass ole Wie ora fase i

1 0 ae Dr PAESAABALG 9 osc, Seta cay cho Peccte dtete le 6

PEON AN cos ao co ate ale wcnehelce'ess SEIN ORCS TV) niece em viene Rese ge Re

MUMMIES scl wins «cnc cep ae, c's en pee WON reaa rs erat erties haere aS citer ee cont 6

PRMITISE SINE 2 5G siete sk cela soy ote sais 8

The counties which have had a decrease of insane under

public care, are:

PIMEMOSSE S, ofe. eicieietels se sialcis asian OFWs ino tomentose 3

PAE MITTTONVOC ed arsicier< ccdlcin teres sue ave tosis Did MEHETCOMRS Miraigineisost te Rieest ue Arete s 2

25 Ta GUTS) SRN Bi aeRO PE Asha @lanneian caer ae eae Ape en SeAR 2

PERT Rey eh ou. ah ok het awe oie Green eWalkeriar ist can tue ae eee 2

[PDT SS Cece ECL Greer HER er Dee ras el (5) OV CA PN PES Pacis ice ORR Ct 2

“ToS Ee ene Se eR i | IONOSHAN Sis yaeetinctom ipomee aaron. 1

TUDE, ASSES aA an ae SoA eNO OG are sities cae ne me hy Ce Soe 1

err CUE AG 2k Lanier ewe cae es 3

The decrease in the insane under public care may come

from three different sources: The insane may recover, or at

least improve so much as to be discharged from public care;

they may die; or they may be returned as chronic insane

from the state institutions to the counties, and in consequence

of the counties having no adequate provision for them they

may be left under private care by their relatives. Decrease,

of course, occurred from all these causes, and in the counties

just named the decrease from these causes was greater than

the increase from new cases of insanity, or from old cases

placed under public care. From the fact that none of the

counties have had during the past year adequate accommo-

dations for the chronic insane, though some of them are

preparing such accommodations, I think it is fair to conclude

that in most of the counties this decrease is not a real de-

crease of the insane, by death or recovery, but only an

apparent decrease, caused by sending chronic insane back

from state institutions to the care of their relatives.

If this is the case, we shall see another year a considerable

increase in the number of insane under public care, owing

to the increased accommodations which will be provided in

the new county asylums.

Iam unable to find any law governing the distribution of

insanity in this state, except the one I gave last year, that

28 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters. ie

the older settled portions of the state have a greater popu- _

lation of insanity than the newer portions. I cannot find —

that the proportion of native or foreign-born persons seems —

to affect the proportion of insanity, or that any other of the ©

causes so frequently alleged to be the chief factor in pro-

ducing insanity, has any considerable influence upon the

geographical distribution of insanity in the state.

NoTE: The delay in the publication of the proceedings gives me oppor-

tunity to give the numbers of the insane under public care on September

30, 1883. The three years show as follows:

Number.of insane under public care in 188{. ...>..)/. 1.23 eee 1,778

Number of insane under public care in 1882.....................--. 1,918

Number of insane under public care in 1888...................00--. 2,075

Net increase) from 1881) to 188250. - V5. 140

Net inerease from 1882/to 1883-5. 2.4 -eee ee. eee 162

As was predicted above, the increased accommodations for the insane

provided by the new county asylums, opened in the year 1883, have caused

an apparent increase of insanity in addition to the real increase. The real

increase, however, has been large.

THE PRIMITIVE DEMOCRACY OF THE GERMANS. *

By W. F. ALLEN, Professor of Latin and History, University of Wisconsin,

The political institutions of the ancient Germans, as de-

scribed by Tacitus, are of an essentially democratic charac-

ter. Some of their nations have kings, but royalty is not a

necessary part of their constitution, for many nations have

no king, and where there is one, he is not invested with any

very positive or absolute powers.t Nobles are frequently

mentioned, but special privileges or powers are never as-

cribed to the nobility, and, so far as appears from the in-

*This paper is composed of two papers; one, upon the village commun:

ity system, read at the meeting of the Academy in 1881; the other at the

meeting in 1883. Being properly supplementary to one another, they

have been united, and the discussion of both papers brought down to the

date of publication.

+ Nee regibus lobera aut infinitu potestas Tac. Germ. 7.

The Primitive Democracy of the Germans. 29

formation in our possession, it was a social rather than a

political aristocracy. There are serfs, but we are absolutely

- without information as to their origin or their relative num-

bers— whether they are Germans, who have sunk from a

condition of freedom, or the remnants of a conquered race;

whether they are few or many. We cannot, of course, ex-

pect to find organized government of the modern type, or

any precise definition of powers; but so far as we are war-

ranted in any positive conclusion upon the subject, we may

say that the sovereign power was in the hands of the whole

people, acting collectively, meeting in a general assembly at

stated intervals. (Tac. Germ. 11-12.) The people, in their

family organizations, also compose the army;* from a

comparison of Tacitus with Cesar,t an earlier writer, we

have a right to infer that these same family organizations

live in common occupation of independent districts of land.

There are magistrates, holding their office it would seem for

life, elected by the people in their national assembly, and

acting as a board of administration in the intervals between

the meetings of assembly,{ but also having each his own

district where he presides over the adminstration of justice. ||

From other authorities we know that in this district admin-

istration of justice the magistrates only preside; the verdict

is rendered by the people of the district in an assembly of

the district.

This is a thoroughly republican constitution of society, and

this sketch, which rests in every detail upon positive state-

ments of ‘Tacitus, supplemented in only two instances by

evidence from other but equally unimpeachable authority,

_justifies us in the statement that the political institutions of

*Non casus nec fortuita conglobatio turmam aut cuneum facit, sed

familiae et propinquitates. (Tac. Germ. 7.)

+ Magistratus ac principes in annos singulos gentibus cognationibusque

hominum quantum et quo loco visum est agri attribuunt. B. G. vi. 22.

tDe minoribus rebus principes consultant, de majoribus omnes, Tac.

Germ. 11.

| Principes qui jura per pagos vicosque reddunt. id. 12.— Principes

regionum atque pagorum inter suos jus dicunt controversiasque minuunt.

Cees. B. G. vi. 23.

30 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters. — ~

the primitive Germans were essentially democratic. Thisis

also the conclusion at which we should arrive by the analogy —

of other primitive peoples, especially those of the Indo-Ku- ©

ropean family. Most of them established a kingly office, 4

most of them had slaves, or serfs, or imperfectly qualified 4

citizens to whom they stood in the relation of a ruling aris-

tocracy; but as a rule all authority is regarded as emanating

from the body of the citizens.

There was, however, an institution of the Germans, not

inconsistent in its original character with the democratic

theory of their institutions, which, nevertheless, must have

interfered materially with the democratic working of these

institutions, and which in the end effected a complete revo- —

lution in them of a strongly aristocratic character. This —

was the so-called comitatus, the body of personal followers. —

It appears to have been of relatively recent origin, for as

Ceesar describes it,* it was quite imperfectly developed, con-

sisting simply in the custom of voluntary leaders in times of

war, around whom gathered a group of voluntary followers,

the relation apparently continuing only for the period of the

war. In the time of Tacitus, one hundred and fifty years

later, it has been converted from a custom into an institution;

the relation is a permanent one. The followers live at the

expense of their chief in peace as well as war.+ There are

grades in dignity among them, and the several chiefs emu- |

lously rival one another in the number and prowess of their —

followers.t

Both Ceesar and Tacitus use the word princeps, “chief,” to

designate the leader of the comztatus, and this is the same

word which is used by both writers to designate also the per-

manent magistrates who have been already described. The

question has naturally arisen, and has been debated with

* Ubi quis ex principibus in concilio dixit se ducem fore, qui sequi velint —

profiteantur, consurgunt vi, etc. Ces. B. G. vi. 23.

+ Epulae et quamquam incompti largi tamen apparatus pro stipendiis

cedunt. Tac. Germ. 14.

t Gradus quin etiam et ipse comitatus habet judicio ejus quem sectantur;

magnaque et comitum aemulatio, quibus primus apud principem suum locus,

et principum cui plurinv et acerrimi comites. Id. 13.

—

The Primitive Democracy of the Germans. 31

considerable warmth, whether the right of entertaining a

comitatus was confined to the magistrates or chiefs of the

state. Some have held that any person who chose might

gather about him a body of followers; others, on the other

hand, have taken principes in this relation to mean “ nobles,”

and have regarded the right as a privilege of nobility. I

have already said that neither Cesar nor Tacitus ascribes any

political privileges to the nobility, which appears, therefore,

to have been a purely social distinction; and this statement

is correct, if we take only the terms nobiles or proceres to

mean “nobles,” they being the words regularly used in this

sense. The word principes, on the other hand. does not

3 properly mean “ nobles,” but “ chiefs ” — individuals invested

with certain governmental powers. It is purely begging the

question to assume that, in relation to the comitatus it is

used in a different sense from its usual one. But the con-

nection in which the word is used is conclusive upon this

point. Both the writers in question speak of the principes

as magistrates before speaking of them as leaders of the

comitatus; and in Tacitus the passages follaw close upon

one another with no interruption. He passes directly from

the election and the judicial functions of the principes to the

description of the comitatus; the conclusion is irresistible

that the principes who maintain the comitatus are the same

as those who administer the government of the state and

preside over the judicial assembles of the districts.

It will be readily seen that an institution like this, which,

as Tacitus says, had a direct interest in war,* must have

had a powerful influence in converting a peaceful commu-

nity of peasants intothe turbulent and quarrelsome nation

of warriors who invaded and overthrew the Roman empire.

But our immediate connection is with the constitutional

change which it effected. We see a body of elected magis-

trates (to use a modern term) holding their office for life, and

therefore, virtually irresponsible, administering the govern-

mentin the intervals between the assemblies, having the

administration of justice wholly under their direction and

* Magnum comitatum non nisi vi belloque tueare. Germ. 14.

32 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

gathering about them a body of armed retainers, whom ~

they support in peace as well asin war, but whose interests

are wholly in war. The elected magistrates are to all

intents and purposes converted into barons, holding their ~

fellow-countrymen in control by armed force. Moreover, ;

although there is no indication and no likelihood that nobility .

of birth was a necessary qualification for the office of prin-

ceps, it was natural that an office of so much power would

be filled almost exclusively from the wealthy and distin-

guished members of the nobility. The principes were not

nobles as a class, or by any necessity; but as individuals

they must in almost every instance have been of noble birth.

We are able, in the light of this condition of things, to in-

terpret the single pussage which has appeared to identify the

princtpes with the nobles: Tacitus Annals, i. 55, where it is ;

said that Segestes, the friend of the Romans, urged the Ro- _

man general Varus, in view of the impending revolt of his

countrymen, to put in custody both himself, his rival Arm-

inius, and the rest of the nobles—the common people would

venture upon no movement when they had lost their chiefs.*

The principes and the proceres, in their origin wholly dif-

ferent — the one elected magistrates, the other a social aris-

tocracy — became identified with each other; the office of

princeps would tend to become hereditary, and the social

aristocracy was gradually converted into a political aris-

tocracy.

The primitive and fundamental democracy of the Ger-

mans was, therefore, in the time of Tacitus, confronted by

a wealthy and powerful official aristocracy, the forerunner

of the feudal nobility. By the side of the national army,

the organic divisions of which were formed by groups of

kindred, there appeared the bands of military followers,

fighting under the leadership of their personal chief, who

at the same time, in his official capacity, must have com-

manded also the national host. By the side of the primitive

communities of free tribesmen, also composed of family

groups, there appeared the baronial residences of the chiefs,

* Ut se et Arminium et ceteros proceres vinciret: nihil ausuram plebem

principibus amotis.

The Primitive Democracy of the Germans. 33

like feudal castles among the villages of peasants. Both of

these systems, the democratic and the aristocratic, are clearly

described in the Germania of Tacitus, the work in which he

treats of their institutions from an antiquarian point of

view. In his historical works, where the Germans are in-

- troduced, we see clearty the aristocracy as the preponderating

force. The same appears also in native pictures of Germanic

life, like the poem of Beowulf and the Icelandic sagas.

In two books published within the past year by Mr. Fred-

eric Seebohm,* an eminent English writer, and Mr. D. W.

Ross,t of Cambridge, Mass., these baronial — or, as Mr. See-

bohm prefers to call them, manorial — features of the primi-

tive Germanic constitution are sketched with great learning

and cogency. Other writers have emphasized the aristocratic

features of this constitution, but to Mr. Seebohm, approach-

ing the subject from an economic rather, than a _ historical

point of view, belongs the credit of having first pointed out

that the German institutions were working themselves out

upon “manorial lines.” But, just as the generally accepted

democratic theory undervalues the aristocratic elements of

German society, so Mr. Seebohm appears to undervalue its

democratic elements. To himthe German institutions ap-

pear to have been fundamentally aristocratic, while the

sketch given above represents the aristocratic features as a

relatively late outgrowth.

The argument of Mr. Seebohm and Mr. Ross, is founded

principally upon a passage in the Germania of Tacitus

(Chap. 16), which we will now proceed to consider. It is as

follows: “They dwell separate and scattered, asa fountain,

a plain, or a grove catches their fancy. They build their

villages, not like ours, with houses touching one another,

but each house hasa space about it.”{ Here are two modes

of habitation described— that of villages, and that of iso-

*English Village Communities. London. Longmans & Co.

+ Early History of Land-holding Among the Germans. Boston. Soule

& Bugbee.

¢ Colunt discreti ac diversi, ut fons, ut campus, ut nemus placuit. Vicos

locant non in nostrum morem conexis et cohaerentibus aedificis; suam quis-

que domum spatio cireumdat.

34. Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters. ~

lated homesteads. The passage, like most passages In

ancient works, has been variously interpreted; the interpre-

tation of Mr. Seebohm and Mr. Ross is, that the method first

described is that followed by the free tribesmen, and that

the villages are of their serfs. This very ingenious theory

leaves the democratic features of the German institutions

wholly out of account. Itrepresents the free tribesmen as

petty barons, each with his village of serfs, and of necessity

assumes the free tribesmen to have been a relatively small

number of nobles ruling over a large conquered or subject .

population. It explains half the facts in the case, but leaves

the other half unaccounted for,—and this not only in the

antiquarian statements of the Germania, but also in the in-

cidental mention in the historians, poets and writers of sagas.

For while, as has been already remarked, the aristocratic

character appears very strongly in these works, itis no less

apparent that the free tribesmen are a numerous, homogen-

eous body, inferior in wealth and influence, but equally

qualified members of the state.

Again, the language of Tacitus does not warrant any so

broad contrast between the dwellers. in the isolated home-

steads, and those in the villages. Mr. Seebohm remarks,

(p. 339), that “It is obvious that the Germans who chose to

live scattered about the country sides, as spring, plain or

grove attracted them, were not the villagers who bad spaces

round their houses.” This wemay admit; but when he adds:

“We are left to conclude that the first class were the chiefs

and the freetribesmen, . . . while the latter, the villagers,

must chiefly have been their servile dependents,’ the infer-

ence isnot soclear. It would seem that if Tacitus had meant

to distinguish not individuals but classes, and especially if

he had meant that the one class were chiefs and the other

their servile dependents, he would have said so in plain

terms. The two kinds of residence are so coupled together,

that the only natural inference is that they were alike the

residences of the free Germans of whom he is speaking.

They are his subject throughout the early part of his work;

it is not until he is nearly through with speaking of them,

Lu The Primitive Democracy of the Germans. 35

in the 25th chapter—eight chapters later than the passage

under discussion — that he mentions the serfs.

We must conclude, therefore, that the free tribesmen lived

in villages as well as in isolated homesteads; and this con-

clusion is supported by the incidental mention of villages in

other relations: for example, in the first book of the Annals,

chapter 56, in an invasion of the German territory by Ger-

manicus, Tacitus says that the Germans scattered into the

woods, leaving their districts and villages, amissis pagis

vicisque. If then, some of the free Germans inhabited vil-

lages, while others inhabited isolated homesteads; if, further,

some of the free Germans fought in companies by family

groups, while others followed personal chieftains; and if

these personal chieftains were at the same time really noble--

men and public officers, it seems probable that it was these

chieftains who lived in isolated homesteads, surrounded by

their free retainers and their serfs—just as is assumed by

Mr. Seebohm and Mr. Ross— while the common freemen, a

class ignored by their theory, lived in other villages.

Assuming, then, that the common freemen of the Germans

lived in villages, the question arises, what kind of villages

were they, and what was the nature of their occupation?

In other words, are we warranted in assuming the exist-

ence of free village communities among the Germans of

Cesar and Tacitus, as is done by many modern writers.

The evidence as to this point is very scanty, being confined

to afew isolated statements of these writers, but it is, I

think, sufficient to warrant a positive conclusion, partly af-

firmative, partly negative.

We must begin by defining our terms. The village com-

_munity is a group of persons occupying a tract of land,

which they own and cultivate in common. For the purpose of

this common cultivation they must have their residences

near tcgether, in a village, from which the arable lands, the

meadows, pasture and wood land will be equally accessible

to all. The view of the German writers, Von Maurer, Thu-

dichum and others, who have worked up the theory of vil-

lage communities, is that some communities, Markgenos-

senschaften had such villages, and others not. It is only

36 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

those that had them that formed Dorfgenossenschaften or —

village communities proper; and they hold that this was the

prevalent form of the occupation of land in the countries oc-

cupied by Germanic nations in the early middle ages. The

land being owned in common, all members of the commun-

ity were, originally at least, equal partners; a democratic

structure of society is therefore necessarily taken for granted

_ by the theory. |

As time went on, individual property in land came into

existence. The lands were divided up —the lots occupied

by individual marksmen became their property; first the

house-lot, then the strip of arable land, became the subject

of individual ownership, and when this had taken place, the

entire aggregate belonging to one member of the commu-

nity — house-lot. share of arable land, and right to the pas-

ture, forest, etc.— was called in English, frde. Hvery

member, therefore, of the primitive democracy, had an equal

property at the outset. The irregularities in wealth and

station were the outgrowth of the natural workings of com-

petitive relations in the more advanced state of society.

The question of village communities is essentially a question

of the occupation of land, and its theory stands in the closest

connection with the history of the origin of the feudal tenure

of land. It necessarily involves, moreover, the discussion of

another subject, which may be treated independently in

other historical epochs, but which in the early history of in-

stitutions is inextricably connected with that of land—the ~

structure of society. The reason of this is that, whereas in

modern society the state, or political organization, starts with

a given territory, and embraces all occupants of that terri-

tory; in ancient society it was exactly the reverse. The tribe

or nation was the starting point, a given body of persons; and

the state —if we may use this expression for this period —

comprised whatever territory was occupied by these persons.

We seesurvivals of this primitive condition of things in the

tribal organization of our North American Indians. Although

occupants of part of the territory comprised within the

limits of the United States, they are, nevertheless, not recog-

nized as belonging to that nation, for the reason that they

The Primitive Democracy of the Germans. 37

§ keep up their tribal organization, with a quasi authority over

the lands assigned to them by the national government.

The structure of society forms, therefore, the first subject

of inquiry in the history of early institutions. And here we

notice astillmore fundamental contrast with modern society.

Modern society, at least here in the United States, has no

structure at all beyond the loose institution of the family;

apart from these petty communities our society is composed

simply of individuals with no organic connection with one

another, except such as grows out of political relations or

private association. But all early societies are highly or-

ganized and closely coherent. The man does not exist

except as a member of an organization. Any person who

stands outside of the organization is in the strictest sense of

the term an outlaw. The structure of society must, there-

fore, be sought first, and the land system will necessarily be

an outgrowth of that.

I will first examine the earliest writer, Cesar, by himself,

then see how far the statements of Tacitus agree with those

of Ceesar, and what system of society and land tenure may

be assumed for both periods.

It has become acommon place of political history that

early society was founded upon the Family; or, if we go

back to the rudest beginnings, where the Family as an insti-

tution did not exist, upon Kinship. That this was the case

among the ancient Germans, and that the occupation of the

land was based upon the family, is testified to in the most

_ positive manner by Cesar (B. G. vi. 22), where he says that

the lands are assigned by the magistrates to the several

clans and kindreds of men (gentibus cognationibusque

hominum). This assignment, he adds, is made for a year at

a time (in annos singulos), and that it is made ata public

gathering, appears to follow from the words qui una coierunt,

“who have assembled together,” where the relative must

refer to hominum, “men.” Among the reasons mentioned

for this custom of annual division is the significant one that

thus they are able to maintain an equality of possessions

(cum suas quisque opes cum potentissimis aequari videat,

“each one of the community seeing his own possessions

38 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

equal to those of the most powerful”). . This fact is further

emphasized by the statement that no one has land of his

own (neque quisquam agri modum certum aut fines habet pro-

prios); and he adds that this annual shifting is imperative

_and under the direction of the government (anno post alio

transire cogunt). These last statements are found also

in the description of the Suevi (iv. 1); privati ac separati —

agri apud eos nihil est, neque longius anno remanere uno in

loco incolendi causa licet. “ There is among them no private

and individual land, nor are they allowed to remain longer

than a year in one place for the purpose of habitation.”

Yn these few clear and positive statements Czesar gives us.

the materials for determining precisely the stage of social

progress reached by the Germans of his time. They were

still in the patriarchal stage,in which kinship rather than

territory formed the basis of their organization; but they

had passed beyond the stage of nomadic life. The individ-

ual had no permanent home, neither had the family, but the

nation had. More than this, it would appear that there were

already certain fixed and determinate territorial divisions of

the territory of the nation, for the assignments of land are

made with absolute authority by the magistrates, who

assign lands and compel the annual changes; and these

magistrates, as we learn from Chap. 23, have authority over

territorial districts (principes regionum atque pagorum).

From this we may infer that the shiftings of occupation

were made rigidly under the direction of the magistrates,

and within the limits of definite territorial districts. Thus

Horace (Od. iii, 24, 12) says of the Getze, a Germanic people:

Immetata quibus jugera liberas

Fruges et Cererem ferunt.

Nec cultura placet longior annua,

Defunctumque laboribus

Hquali recreat sorte vicarius.

Here are clearly indicated the shifting annual occupation,

and the lack of any permanent boundaries to the cultivated

fields —no ownership, but temporary occupation and use;

perhaps also the alternation of agriculture and service in

the field, described by Ceesar, B. G.,iv.1. Singula millia

Bem

ee ~ The Primitive Democracy of the Germans. 39

maiz

armatorum bellandi causa ex finibus educunt. Reliqui qui

domi manserunt se atque illos alunt. Hi rursus in vicem

anno post in armis sunt, illi domi remanent.

Passing now to the account given by Tacitus, who lived

about one hundred and fifty years later, we find that his des-

cription partly confirms and partly supplements that of

Cesar; that it nowhere contradicts it, but in some points

shows the changes which might reasonably be expected to

take place in the course of a century and a half, among a

semi-barbarous, but vigorous and intelligent people, in direct

contact and constant intercourse with a highly civilized

nation.

As to the structure of society, Tacitus testifies, just as

Ceesar does, to the persistence of the family principle; only

he mentions it in connection with the military organization,

instead of the occupation of land (Germ. ch. 7.); non casus nec

Fforturta conglobatio turmam aut cuneum facit, sed familiae

et propinquitates. “ Their divisions of cavalry and infantry

are not made up by chance or accidental assembling, but by

families and neighborhoods ”— the same patriarchal groups

no doubt, which are described by Cezesar’s gentibus cogna-

tionibusque. The two statements naturally form the com-

plement to each other; if patriarchal groups lived together

as Ceesar says, they naturally formed military divisions to-

gether, as Tacitus says.

Tacitus does not tell us that the patriarchal groups lived

together, but it may be inferred that this was the

case, from the fact that they fought side by side. When he

takes up the subject of the occupation of land (Chap. 26), he

merely speaks of the land being occupied by communities,

ab universis. The passage is so important and so difficult to

interpret, that I will cite it at length: Agr? pro numero

cultorum ab unzversis in vices occupantur, quos mox tnter

se secundum dignationem partiuntur; facilitatem partiundi

camporum spatia preestant. Arva per annos nutant, et

superest ager. “It is their practice to have their lands

taken into possession by communities, turn by turn, in

amounts proportioned to the numbers of their members,

and afterwards to share these out among the members ac-

ic SER UGE Re

Ag ak 160 Sha RY aa

40) Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

cording to rank; the wide extent of the tracts occupied

makes this division easy. They change the fields in cultiva-

tion every year, and there is land left over.”

Here we have, just as in Caesar’s description, a periodical

shifting of occupation, and this is the only feature of the

two descriptions which we identify positively. For the

reasons already given, we may infer that these communities,

like those of Cezesar’s time, were patriarchal, at least prevail- ~

ingly so; but the distribution was probably no longera yearly

one. It will be noticed that two distinct procedures are

described —the shifting occupation (agri... occupantur)

and the shifting cultivation (arva per annos mutant). It is

hardly possible that there could have been any shifting cul-

tivation, that is, rotation of crops, unless the occupation was

for more than one year. I think, therefore, that although

not explicitly stated, it is distinctly implied, that the assign-

ment of lands was made for a period of years, as is the

case with the Russian M7r and the Hebrew seven-years’

period. This points to a marked progress of society in the

period between Ceesar and Tacitus.

In another point this progress is more positively asserted.

We have seen that in Csesar’s time there was not only no

private property in land, but no disparity in property or in.

occupation. Tacitus, on the other hand, states with equal

positiveness that the lands were assigned according to rank,

secundum dignationem, that is, there was still no private

property in land, but the amount of land temporarily as-

signed to individuals varied according to theirrank. This

disparity probably had reference only to the nobles and

magistrates; the most of the common freemen in all likelihood

received equal lots. And when, at the end of the period, the

community was transferred to another tract of land, the

process was begunoveragain. There could therefore be no

aggregations of landed property, but there was a condition

of things out of which such aggregations might easily

grow, as soon as the occupation of a definite tract of land

by a particular community should become permanent.

We find from this analysis, that in the first century after

Christ, the Germans were grouped in family communities, not

The Primitive Democracy of the Germans. 41

yet established in permanent homes, but probably changing

their residences at intervals of some years, although always

within a definite territorial district. This district was, as we

learn from the same authority, a permanent political insti-

tution. It follows as a matter of course that at this period

there was not only no private property in land, but no

common property in land, that is, no property in land at all.

Neither the community nor the family owned the land or

occupied it personally, any more than the individual. It

might perhaps be urged that the district owned the territory

within which the shifting occupation took place, but it

may be doubted whether even this would be a correct

statement of the facts. Property in land was probably a

conception which lay wholly outside of their imagination

as wellas their experience. The land, like the air, was a free

a of nature, to be used in common, but with no thought

ff ownership.

As the theory of the village community implies not merely

permanent occupation, but ownership of the land, on the

part of the group of occupants, our conclusion must be that

the village community did not exist in the time of Tacitus.

Nevertheless, it must be admitted, on the other hand, that

the condition of things here described is one out of which

the village community could very easily have arisen. In

the fact that the distribution was periodical instead of an-

nual, we see a movement towards permanence of occupa-

tion, and therefore towards ownership, on the part of the

community. The time would very soon come, in the progress

of society, when the community would have accumulated

so much fixed wealth in the course of its occupation, that it

would be a hardship and an injustice to force it to change

its habitation. Thenext change therefore —hardly a greater.

change than that from annual to periodical re-distribution

— would be to convert the temporary occupancy into perma-

nent occupancy, which means property. If this stage was

reached — and it is hard to conceive of its not being reached,

at least as a temporary condition of things — there resulted

to village community: that is, the ownership in common of

42 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

‘a definite tract of land by a group of persons who were in

their origin an enlarged family. .

By the side of the movement towards permanency of oc-

cupation, we saw another, towards inequality of possession.

The important testimony of Tacitus shows that already in

his time there was, not individual property in land, or ine-

quality of ownership, but inequality of station and of tem-

porary occupation. Out of this would speedily be developed

the inequality of property which the theory of village com-

munities recognizes as one of the causes of the dissolution of

the institution. And thus we find confirmed, from the point of

view of the occupation of land, the conclusion drawn from

the evidence of political and military institutions, of the de-

velopment of an aristocracy of a baronial type; or, in Mr.

Seebohm’s words, of development on manorial lines. !

NOTES ON THE DISPERSION OF DRIFT COPPER.

By Pror. R. D. SaLisBuRY, Beloit, Wis.

Although the fact of its wide distribution has long been

known, and used as evidence of the northern origin of our

drift, yet no general recent compilation of the known data

relating to the dispersion of drift copper seems to have been

made. The study now entered upon has been undertaken at

the suggestion of Prof. Chamberlin. The present paper is

little more than a collection of what is to be found bearing

on the subject in survey reports and scientific contributions.

Frequent reference is made in geological literature to the

fact that native copper has been found, and that quite gen-

erally, scattered throughout the drift region of the interior,

viz.: Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Missouri, lowa, Michigan, Wis-

consin and Minnesota, and perhaps Nebraska and Dakota.

But the particulars of its occurrence, e. g., its exact locali-

ties, the size of specimens, whether or not worn and rounded,

what the limits of its distribution, how abundantly the metal

Notes on the Dispersion of Drift Copper. 43:

is found in the formation in which it occurs, whether it is

uniformly scattered, or whether there is grouping in the dis-

persion, whether it is in lacustrine or true drift deposits, and

if in the latter, whether in modified or unmodified drift;

these particulars arerarely given. An attempt to bring to-

gether and map what can be obtained from the survey re-

ports of the several states, at once reveals the fact that the

observations on this subject have been of an extremely gen-

eral character. The following compilation is believed to in-

clude essentially all that has been printed, bearing on the

subject. .

In Ohio, Col. Whittlesey’ has noted a specimen from

Weymouth, Medina county, thirty miles south from Lake

Erie. This, so far as is known, marks the eastern limit of

the dispersion of copper. Again, in Clermont county,

Prof. Orton, of the Ohio Survey,’ notes the occasional

occurrence of fragments of copper in the bowlder clay. Ref-

erence is also made in the Ohio reports,* to the frequent oc-

currence of copper in the drift of the northwestern part of

the state, but no localities, or details as to its occurrence are

given.

In Indiana, R. B. Warder, of the Indiana Survey,’ notes a

specimen found at Weisburg, in Dearborn county, on Tan-

ner’s Creek, weighing twenty-six ounces. Other specimens

also have been found in the adjacent counties, Ohio and

Switzerland. Still farther down, in the southwest corner of

the state, in Vanderberg county, small fragments have been

noted by Prof. Collett,’ and a little to the north, the same

authority notes small specimens from Knox and Brown

counties. In Warren county, larger nuggets have been

found, and Prof. E. T. Cox’ is authority for the statement

that some large pieces and many small ones have been found

in the drift both of northern and southern Indiana.

'Smithsorian Contributions; On Fresh Water Glacial Drift of the North-

western States.

*Vol. I, p. 441.

$Vol. I, p. 87.

+Indiana Geological Report, 1872, p. 403.

* Geological Survey, 1875, p. 284.

° Geological Report, 1878, p. 117.

44. Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Of the copper in Illinois we have somewhat fuller notes,

though not more detailed. In this state, drift copper reaches _

its southern limit, so far as now known. In Saline county,

near Gallatin, latitude 37° 40’, a nugget “larger than a hen’s

egg,” with not infrequent smaller ones, have been found by

Dr. Smith, and noted by Prof. E. T: Cox, then of the Illinois

Survey, in the beds of streams and in ravines.’ The sameis

true of Hamilton county, lying just north.

Prof. Worthen has noted the existence of copper in the

drift of Clark and Cumberland counties, and Mr. F. H.

Bradley in Edgar, Champaign and Ford counties, lying

just to the north. In Vermillion county, still further north,

the same authority * says that several large masses of cop-

per, and many small ones have been taken from the upper

drift beds, The occurrence of copper in Hancock, Adams,

Brown‘ and Schuyler’ counties has also been noted by Prof.

Worthen; and in Stephenson and Winnebago counties,

where the nuggets are spoken of as much worn and rounded,

and Boone, Ogle and Lee counties,’ by James Shaw, of the

Illinois survey. Woodford’ and La Salle counties, have

also yielded specimens of “ float mineral,” as noted by H. A.

Greene. In Will county, a specimen of considerable size

was found near Wilmington, probably in a lacustrine for-

mation, while many smaller ones have been discovered both

here and in Cook county.”

The dotted area on the map represents the area of the copper-bear-

ing series, essentially as determined by Prof. R. D. Irving.. The drift

copper is represented by dots, located as exactly as the data at hand will

permit. No attempt is made to show the relative sizes of the different

pieces. Where the statement has been made that “float copper” is fre-

quently found in a certain county, several dots have been placed within

the limits of such county. Where but a single find has been authorita-

tively reported from a given district, the fact is indicated by a single dot.

'Vol. I, Illinois Geological Report, p. 282.

*Tbid., vol. VI, pp. 10 and 98. ‘

’Tbid., vol. IV, p. 244.

4Tbid., vol. IV, p. 65.

Mipidyy Vol DWE: p: 107:

6 Tbid., Vol. V.

T]bid., Vol. IV.

8K. H. Bradley, ibid., vol. IV.

Notes on the Dispersion of Drift Copper. 45

In Missouri, specimens, on the authority of G. C. Brod-

head, State Geologist, have been found in the eastern part of

Putnam county.’

In Iowa, Dr. White has noted the occurence ~f copper in

various parts of the state, and a single bowlder mass

weighing upward of 30 pounds, has been taken from the

drift in Lucas county.*. In Lee and Henry counties, the oc-

currence of the metal in question is recorded by Prof.

Worthen.’ :

In Minnesota, copper has been found in Fillmore county,‘

and at Pleasant Grove, in Olmstead county. In a descrip-

tion of Travers county, Mr. J. O. Barrett, speaks of its occur-

rence, but his language is somewhat ambiguous, and it is

uncertain whether the copper referred to belongs to the

county under description, or to the coteau in the adjacent

part of Dakota.

Prof. G. D. Swezey, of Doane College, Nebraska, informs

me that it 1s current report that copper has been found in

small fragments in Nebraska, but he is unable to give lo-

calities. }

In Michigan, a mass of copper was found at Northport,

Leelenaw county, which was sold for $80,and hence must

have been of greatsize. In Benzie, Antrim and Grand Trav-

erse counties also, copper has been frequently met with. Col.

Whittlesey speaks of a specimen the size of a man’s fist,

from Ada, Kent county, with frequent smaller fragments.

In Wisconsin, Dr. Lapham says’ that in the form of drift

bowlders copper is often found in eastern Wisconsin, the

masses varying from a few ounces to several hundred

pounds. The largest, near Huntsford, in Dodge county,

had a weight of four hundred and eighty seven pounds.

Prof. Chamberlin * states that copper is frequently found

at all points along the Kettle range.

‘Geological Survey of Missouri, p. 289.

*Vol. I, Geological Survey of Iowa, 1870, p. 96.

* Geological Report of Iowa, 1878, p. 178.

+N. H. Winchell’s Report of 1875, p. 71.

° Wisconsin Geological Report, vol. 2, p. 27.

*Geological Report of Wisconsin, vol. 2, p. 210.

AG Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Prof. Irving says further that fragments of copper are

far more abundant in Wisconsin than elsewhere, and far

more abundant here than has been commonly supposed, and

that specimens of forty to fifty pounds weight are not un-

common, and have been made of economic use. It is stated

by E. T. Sweet,’ on the authority of Mr. S. Vaughan, that a

copper bowlder of seventeen hundred pounds weight was

formerly taken from the bed of the Sioux river, six miles

south of Lake Superior, and that a bowlder of one hundred

pounds weight was taken from Outer Island only afew

years ago.

Col. Whittlesey’ speaks of the copper drift in Wisconsin

and northern Michigan as follows: “A copper rock weigh-

ing three thousand pounds was found in the red clay on the

west fork of the Ontonagon river. One was found in 1845,

opposite La Pointe, on the mainland, weighing eight hun-

‘dred pounds. Three miles south of the Minnesota Mine on

middle fork of the Ontonagon, another copper bowlder was

taken from the red clay, which weighed between three and

four hundred pounds. Ina well in Madison one was found

at a depth of twenty feet, having a weight of thirty pounds.”

At the mouth of the Menominee river a chunk three or four

pounds in weight has been found, and another at the mouth

of the Oconto of about the same size, while a much larger

piece was taken from the Pesaukie river. In Walworth

county, near the state line, Col. Whittlesey also notes a boulder

of forty or fifty pounds weight. Copper has also been no-

ticed from Ripon and Kenosha in gravel beds. In addition

‘to these occurrences cited by Col. Whittlesey, Prof. Cham-

berlin has had record of about thirty specimens from Wal-

worth county. Aside from these, one was recently found at

Geneva Lake which weighed upward of seven pounds.

Prof. Chamberlin is authority for the statement that

a specimen of one hundred and fourteen pounds weight

was taken from Newark, Rock county. This bowlder had

also attached to it fragments of Lake Superior Keweenawan

1 Wisconsin Geological Report, vol. 2, p. 619.

* Wisconsin Geological Report, vol 4, p. 353.

*> Smithsonian Contributions, 1866.

Notes on the Dispersion of Drift Copper. 47

rock. In Sauk and Chippewa counties, on the same author-

ity, specimens have been found. I have picked up two spe-

cimens of copper on the shore of Lake Michigan in Ozaukee

county, after a severe storm during which they were proba-

bly washed from the red clay, which there borders the lake.

These specimens were both very irregular, and showed no

signs of having been subjected to corrasive action.

‘The area over which copper is scattered is thus seen to be.

very great, perhaps not less than 450,000 square miles. If

all the fragments came from Lake Superior, some of them

must have been transported about 600 miles to the south,

others, 150 or 200 miles, or perhaps more, to the west, and

small specimens have been carried more than 100 miles east

of the eastern limit of the locality from which the copper

is supposed to have come., There is then an east-west distri-

bution, accepting the testimony from Nebraska, of more

than 700 miles, and a north-south distribution about 100

miles less. |

Farther than the fact of its occurrence, however, little at

present can'‘be said of the copper in these various localities.

Specimens have been found about Lake Superior and along

Lake Michigan, both in Wisconsin and Illinois, in lacustrine

deposits. Again, specimens have been found in bowlder

clay, in lower and upper drift beds, in beds of streams and

in ravines. But the character of the deposits in which the

copper has been found, has, in by far the larger number of

cases, not been indicated more closely than by the statement

thatit is drift. Pieces have been found both north and south

of the kettle moraine, as well as init. The general fact that

these specimens diminish in size southward, seems to be well

established, but to this there are some exceptions. Many of

the nuggets are worn and rounded, but this does not seem

to be universal, for angular fragments, and fragments hav-

ing the irregular, scraggly form peculiar to this metal, have

been found well down in Illinois., What the agency or

agencies concerned in this wide spread dispersion is an in-

teresting question. If fuller observations had been made,

or if those noted had been more exact —e. g., if the precise

character of the formations in which the copper occurs had

Mak) Peo ws

a aoa

48 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

been determined in each case, the size, shape and condition

of the specimens, and their frequency in any locality, this —

might give us the data required for explaining the dispersion.

There appear to be localities where the copper is more abund-

ant than at others, as at Grand 'Traverse Bay, at the mouth

of the Illinois river, and along the lower course of the Wa-

bash. The seemingly greater abundance at these points,

however, may only be due to fuller observation or record

of the metal found at these points, and not to its really

greater prevalence.

It may not be out of place to call attention to the probable

fact that the Illinois river, about whose mouth many speci-

mens have been found, was once the outlet of Lake Michi-

gan, and that the Wabash, about whose lower course much

copper has also been found, was the channel for discharge,

in post-glacial times, of Lake Erie. It is evident that if the

copper were all transported from Lake Superior by glaciers,

they must have had, at different periods, very divergent

courses to account for the east-west dispersion. The fact that

copper has been found in the red clay both of Lake Superior

and Lake Michigan, suggests that along the lake borders,

pieces of copper may have been dropped by floating ice, and

the roughness of at least a portion of the specimens here

found, is in harmony with such a view.

There is of course a possibility in all cases, and this possi-

bility may at times amount to probability, that the disper-

sion of copper has been by human agencies. A single loose

specimen, for instance, has been found in the “ driftless

area” in Jo Daviess county, Illinois, in a rock crevice. But

in regions where frequent specimens are found scattered

through the drift, there is little probability that their occur-

rence can be explained by human transportation.

Dr. Bell, of the Canada Survey,’ has described a formation

on Hudson’s Bay, which has a strong resemblance to our

Keweenawan system. Hehas indicated his belief that the for-

mation is the equivalent of the Nipigon group, which is sup-

posed to be continuous with the Keweenawan, and, therefore,

its equivalent. Dr. Bell describes copper sulphide in the as-

1 Geological Report, 1878.

Notes on the Dispersion of Drift Copper. 49

sociated formations about the Bay, but does not note native

copper, which seems not yet to have been discovered. If it

should be found to exist there, this would furnish a, second

center of dispersion, but as it is nearly north of the Lake Su-

perior region, this would not greatly facilitate the explana-

tion of the extensive east-west dispersion.

Fuller notes, which it is proposed to collect at an early

date, will doubtless throw fuller, and, it is to be hoped, im-

portant light on the question of the dispersion of drift cop-

per, the agency or agencies by which it was effected, and

their method of action, and this solution may in turn have

some bearing upon other interesting geological problems.

Since the above notes were presented in 1881, the follow-

ing additional facts have been secured through the kindness

of the parties to whom they are accredited. In Ohio, Mr. M.

C. Read states that “there is an important belt of drift run-

ning through Licking, Knox and Richland counties, in

which many fragments of copper have been found.” Mr. C.

R. Barnes reports from Indiana, a specimen weighing 3,125.8

grams, somewhat flattened, from Moot’s Creek, White

county. Another piece “four inches long by twoand one-

half broad, and three-fourths of an inch thick, worn smooth,”

was found “in glacial gravel,” in Vermillion county, near

Kugene (J.T. Scovell). From the same state, Mr. Joseph

Moore gives information of. four specimens. One was found

near Richmond, Wayne county, weighing 17 oz. Another of

two pounds weight was found three miles from Elkhart,

Elkhart county. A third piece (mostly carbonate), has been

found in Henry county, and a fourth near Brookville, Frank-

lin county. Besides these finds, Mr. Moore also states on

the authority of Mr. Farrar, that copper is frequently found

about Peru, Miami county, in isolated lumps, also that a

piece weighing 30 pounds wasfound “in shelly limestone,

where they were excavating for aroad.” From Michigan,

Prof. I. W. McKeever, gives information of a piece of cop-

per from Jackson county, which the finder (Dr. Baker, of

Adrian) believed to be of meteoric origin. It is claimed

that it was seen while falling, and taken the next day from

the opening found in the earth where the meteor was seen

50 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

to strike. It was found eight feet below the surface. It is

further asserted that “fragments of copper were found all

the way down.” This interesting specimen is “ about two

inches thick, having an area of about one square foot. It

looked as if it had been melted. There were spots of green

carbonate upon it,’ when seen by Prof. McKeever, but these,

he suggests may have formed since it wasfound. From

Wisconsin, Mrs. G. W. Esterley,in an article in the Hvening

Wisconsin, reports the finding of a piece of thin, flat copper

insinuated among the beds of Trenton limestone, in a quarry

near Lake Koshkonong. Prof. Chamberlin reports a similar

case of insinuation in Galena limestone near Belvidere, Ill.

Professor H. E. Storrs writes from Jacksonville, Illinois,

that a fragment of copper was some time since found

twenty-five feet below the surface, in digging a well in that

city; the same being three inches long by one and one-half

broad, and one-fourth of an inch thick. The same gentle-

man also speaks of two other specimens of copper in his pos-

session, weighing six and one-half ounces, and four pounds,

three ounces respectively, the second being “ evidently worn

in transit.” The precise localities of these two specimens is

unknown. “A small piece of native copper was found...

in the city of Alton, ... in l6éss,’ according to Professor

Charles Fairman, who also adds that it is locally reported

that large bowlders containing copper were formerly found

in that locality.

Professor N. H. Winchell, furnishes the following facts

concerning drift copper in Minnesota:

State. County. Town. ceenawee Condition. | Formation

Minnesota ....... he Sueurs eee ILO SUEWI Gs codsc6 2 ? ?

Minnesota....... SOOM dasquoasae JOrdant nee eee 2 ? 4

Minnesota....... SCO Aagoeseoade WIERMENN Sop escacs % ? ?

Minnesota ....... Hennepin....... Minneapolis. .... 3 pounds..}| Rounded. } Gravel.

Minnesota ....... Hennepin Eden Prairie..... Si POUNGSHS|Eae eee ea Glee neers

Minnesota ....... Olmstead....... Rochester ....... 4 ounces..| Rounded..}| Among

stones near

the rock.

Minnesota ....... Olmstead....... Zumbrota ....... 5) pounds ss RoOmnded eae eee meet

and cor-

roded...

Minnesota ....... Olmstead....... Pine Island...... 34 pound | Rounded .| Onsurface.

Minnesota ....... Ramsey ........ White Bear...... 2 pouads...| Rounded .| Near surface

Minnesota....... St. Louis and} Knife Falls to| Hundreds.

Carlton....... N. Pacific June..}| of pieces. ? Among

stones and

rounded

bowlders.

Minnesota....... Pine ss... AW Nea sos Various places. . 2 2 ?

* Found in a railroad cut,

5 oh es ey Snir, é = “e . 3 eh

A bee eee Fer ws ha Dei

Or age YG. at J | oe J f i : ‘ ‘ ?

~ = os e “

as a ee 7 * Sspniyeriet

= *

Jathsenville

Kan

«a

$ S? Z > Alton

MAP

SHOWING DISTRIBUTION OF

DRIFT COPPER.

ar ee y

SE Bless ee

S¢ we

te Le i

: o~

ery:

CANSING + J

1o Hi

r= COLUMUS G

+ pranaPous "5 aN py

eae py

: Ree. Pr 5

i dh

3 5 fy

gl Me

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord. — 51

ON THE MOTOR GANGLION CELLS OF THE FROG’S

SPINAL CORD.

By E. A. BirGe, Ph. D., Professor of Zodlogy, University of Wisconsin.

The following paper was originally published in the

*« Archiy fiir Anatomie and Physiologie,” for 1882. A syn-

opsis of the work is here presented in English.

The reason of our defective knowledge of even the most

important numerical relations of the elementary structure

of the body lies in the incomplete methods of investigation

which were formerly employed. STILLING’s attempts to

determine the number of the elements of the central nerves

system have not been carried further, because the means of

investigation were too imperfect to secure certain results

even with the greatest care and industry. Rough approxi-

mations only were made, which naturally were often in-

correct. The enumerations recently made of the fibers of

the optic, and of certain spinal nerves have shown that the

more perfect methods now at our command, have brought

us nearer to accurate results.

The method of saturating the specimens with a sub-

stance which binds all parts together and gives them a like

consistency, obviates one of the greatest dangers to be found

in counting the cells of an organ, viz., the loss or destruction

of part of the cells. Further in the possibility of staining

specimens en masse, in perfect and rapid microtomes, in the

accurate arrangement of specimens upon the slide, we have

gained means which reduce to the work of a few months,

tasks, for which, a decade since, a life-time would not have

sufficed.

Two conditions must be fulfilled in the counting of the

cells of an organ. The cells must be brought under the mi-

croscope without loss, and must be so colored that they can

be at once and easily distinguished. If these conditions are

met, the enumeration will be easy and quick, as well as trust-

worthy; but if one must deliberate whether to count certain

52 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

elements or not, the process will be exceedingly slow and

wearisome, and the result thoroughly untrustworthy. Since

our methods of discriminating staining are yet far from

perfect, the structures capable of counting are stillfew. Dr.

Gaule, of the Physiological Institute at Leipsic, under whose

direction this paper was worked out, called my attention to

two structures which filled both the above conditions, and

which were of great interest. These were the medullated

nerve-fibres of the anterior roots of the spinal nerves, and

the large ganglion cells of the anterior horn of the gray

matter of the spinal cord. The enumeration was made upon

the frog, the most favorable animal, both because of its small

size and because of its importance in experimental physi-

ology.

The value of such enumerations as the following depends,

of course, entirely upon their accuracy. I have attempted in

every way to assure myself of the reliability of my results.

The close correspondence of the number of cells found on

right and left sides, seems to me the clearest proof of the

accuracy of the counting.

The numbers of the elements which I have determined

lead to certain conclusions, apart from any theoretical con-

siderations. 1. The frog has an equal number of cells in

the anterior horn of the spinal cord, and of fibres in the

anterior roots of the nerves. Each motor cell, then, corre-

sponds to a motor fibre. 2. There isa general correspond-

ence between the number of cells in any region of the spinal

cord and of fibres entering that region. When an individ-

ual frog shows peculiarities of distribution of fibres to

different nerves there is a corresponding peculiarity in the

distribution of the motor cells. It is thus probable that the

ganglion cell belonging to a particular fibre lies not far from

its entrance to the cord. 3. The number of fibres and cells

varies with the weight of the frog. Each frog starts with a

certain minimum number which is regularly increased with

the increase in weight. Hence (a) the fibres and cells must

be constructed during the life of the frog; (b) a certain re-

lation obtains between the weight of the muscles and the

number of the motor fibres and cells.

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Froq’s Spinal Cord. 53

I. NUMBER OF MoToR FIBRES.

The roots were treated in situ with osmic acid, one per

cent., for two to six hours, and imbedded in paraffine. The

sections must not be over 1-100 mm. thick, better 1-200 mm.,

since if the axis of the fibre is not exactly parpendicular to

the section the ight will not pass through it unless the cyl-

inder is very short. If the fibres overlie each other, or if

they are so long that their obliquity cuts off the light, rapid

and accurate counting is out of the question.

The counting was performed with an eye-piece micrometer

divided into squares. Some counts were made with the

camera lucida, marking each fibre by a pencil dot. This

was a less accurate method. All nerves were counted twice,

and the work was repeated if the difference was over two

per cent.

The results are shown as follows:

TABLE I.

Number of frog ........ 49 | 46 41 36 40 43 42

Weight in grammes .... io) les BY GR TR Gre aa

Motor fibres on one side.| 2, 992 |8, ne 5 , ; 5, 734

6,418 |7,058 |8,566 9,492 |10,004 | 11,468

Total motor fibres...... | 5, 984

| |

The total number is reached by doubling the number ob-

tained on one side. As will be seen later in the section on

ganglion cells the number is the same on the two sides.

A somewhat regular increase of fibers proportionally to

the increase of weight is seen:

TABLE II.

PRPPCE EL Star totnc-at <i Ao oak 49 | 46 See tO | 43 42

Increase of weight ........ leas as au ee Cee Ote. | por 9 | 60.5 | 85.5 | 109.5

Increase of fibres.......... |......| 497 |1, 064 |2, 582 |3, 508 4,020 | 5, 484

Fibres per gram. of increase] Batches | 62 50| 42] 53 | | 47 50

} |

From this table it becomes possible to compute a priort

the approximate number of fibres, at least for Rana escu-

lenta. The addition of fifty fibres for each gramme in

weight to the fixed number 6,000 will come near the required

result. The female frogs must be weighed without ovaries.

54 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

How does this increase in number of fibres take place? It

may come either by division of fibres previously present, or

by new formation. The latter method is on all grounds more

probable. The relative size of fibres in young and old frogs

forbids us to think of division as the process, since in young

frogs the fibres are of far smaller average size. This is

shown by the number of fibres which stand in a given area,

as the following table exhibits:

TABLE III.

Frog 49, 4 36

wt 14 grm.| 23 grm. | 68 gr.

Area of cross section of 2d motor root.. .|0.046sq. mm 0.105 0.125

INO ROD ND ECS cece de ve loys zucmieyes dieerege eieetens 968 1098 975.

IMlorREs) [OsIe MOS WaT, Gone oouds baocdaoookads 21, 484 10, 457 7, 800

Hence the fibres in the smallest frog had hardly one-third

the area of those in the larger frog. The large fibres in both

are about the same size, but there are in the smaller frogs a

vast number of minute fibres. There are also, probably,

others not yet medullated and hence not rendered visible by

osmic acid, which develop into the new nerve fibres of the

older frogs.

The size of the fibres is by no means the same in the dif-

ferent nerves of the same frog as the following table will

show:

TABLE IV.

Frog No. 36 — Wt. 63 grm.

Nerve. I TT | TEE) TV Vi Va | WA ARIST Se oe

Area of mot’r root

iM SQ. MMM... 0.087/0.125/0.052/0.018/0.024! 0.02) 0.04/0.152/0.067| 0.015

No. of fibres.....| 783} 975) 481] 106) 114) 159) 142) 870) 441; 212

Fibres persq. mm| 9000} 7800} 9257) 5888} 4750) 7035} 3550) 5728) 6582) 14133

The differences are obvious, and unquestionably depend

on the function of the nerves. The first three nerves, which

supply the tongue, forward extremity, etc., have an area of

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord. 55

0.264 sq. mm., with 2,239 fibres, while the seventh, eighth,

ninth nerves which supply the lumbar plexus, have an area

of 0.259 sq.mm., with only 1,453 fibres, that is, with approx-

imately the same area, there are only two-thirds as many

fibres. The fourth, fifth and sixth nerves stand in size of fi-

bres between the two grouvs, while the tenth nerve has

the smallest fibres, possibly since it contains those which

supply the lymph hearts.

Since the muscle fibres of the hind legs are so much larger

than those of the fore legs one cannot help thinking that there

isa relation between size of motor fibres and the muscle fibres

supplied by them. But this question needs further investi-

gation.

Another striking fact, like that of the size, and found also in

the ganglion cells, is that of the number of fibres in brach-

ial and lumbar plexus respectively. In spite of the smaller

size of the anterior extremities they receive an equal or

greater number of nerve fibres than do the hind limbs.

These facts will become more apparent by the following table:

TABLE V — MOTOR FIBRES.

Number ..... 49 46 41 36 40 43 42

oo eS a eae Cla ae eal eae

oe see! ae) oy | 38 |. es G7. lo nene Gh dit

ea Nerve. [ae a

I sno | 416 | 652 | 783 | 754 | 658 | 1098

~ a | ose | ves | 1098 | 975 | 1051 | 1307 | 1056

ist | sve) 326 | 484 | .a59. | vez. | ys

My Ph Wo ass. | tie | foe | tay | ae | day

ie 79] 96 de aga 0 goed) ass | Mabe

tr no | ate | isy | isos ia? | oe | ase

era | iss | is | 497 | wa| 12 | ie | ia

vin | 583 | 309 | 501 | 870 | 967 | 446 | sin

etiax | ose | sos | 450 | 44. | 681 | vap | 1948

ex | ee | es | ta |” ete | 206. | @oa | 310

Sum. 2992 | 3209 | 3524 | 4283 | 4746 | 5002 | 5134

56 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The table shows that considerable individual differences

are present. In No. 36 the 8th nerve has twice as many

fibres as the 9th. In No. 42 the relation is reversed. Usu-

ally the 6th nerve is larger than the 5th, but occasionally the

5th is the larger, etc. The relations are more regular when

groups of nerves are considered. If we neglect the contri-

bution of the 1st nerve to the brachial plexus and that of the

10th nerve to the lumbar plexus, we have:

TABLE VI.

Number...... 49 46 41 36 40 43 492

Plexus brach-

Tali See 1, 237 1,338 1,304 1, 456 1,710 | 2,074 2,088

Plexus lum-

aliseaaa- LOL Pel 020m a 088 1, 4538 1,760 | 1,418 1, 904

The brachial plexus contains at least as many fibres as the

lumbar, and the relative size would be still more striking

if the parts of the 1st and 10th nerves were assigned to their

respective places.

The variation in individual nerves appears most plainly in

the hinder half of the cord, and is very probably due to the

relation of points of exit of nerve from cord and spinal

column. When a nerve fibre has considerable distance to

travel before leaving the spinal canal, it makes little differ-

ence whether it leaves the cord in one or another root. It is

only necessary that it gain the proper nerve-trunk and this

ls determined by the plexus.

Il. THe Motor GANGLION CELLS OF THE SPINAL CORD.

The cords whose cells were to be counted were stained in

Grenacher’s alum carmine, imbedded in paraffine, and the

sections cut of a uniform thickness, usually 1-50 mm. They

were mounted in order and covered with xylol balsam.

In this method the nerve fibres are little stained, while nu-

merous granules and ganglion cells are tinged with a more

or less deep red. Inthe anterior horn of the gray matter

les the group of closely-joined, large motor cells whose

number is to be determined. The only difficulty in counting

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the F'rog’s Spinal Cord. 57

lies in the presence of a number of small ganglion cells, ap-

‘parently belonging to the motor center, but whose small

size makes them hardly distinguishable from the “ granules”

of the cord. In the first frogs investigated, these cells were

not counted. Later it was found that they belong to the

small motor fibres and they were enumerated. In frog number

eighteen, whose large cells only were first counted, the

small cells were afterwards determined and about six hun-

dred were found on each side.

The number of cells in the motor group varies in each

section from 2-3 to 25-30, according to its thickness and the

region of the cord to which it belonged. Single, very thin

sections from the center of the cord, occasionally contain no

cells.

There is no difficulty in determining with fair accuracy the

number of cells, if all mechanical aids are employed, so that

individual attention can be given to counting. One source

or error, however, cannot be avoided. There is no natural

limit to the motor center toward the medulla oblongata, but

the cord gradually passes into that structure. The only

fixed point is that where the spinal canal opens into the

fourth ventricle, and this arbitrary line was chosen as the

only one which could be determined. The following table

gives the result of the counting.

TABLE VII.

| | | |

Number | Total num- | : | ; aware Per cent. of

of frog. |ber of cells.| Right. i | difference.

| |

lj = eat en

49 4, 871 2, 457 2,414 | 43 1.8

18 6, 760 3, 385 3, 875 10 | 0.3

12 6, 892 3, 424 3, 468 44 1.3

3 8, 539 4, 272 4, 267 5 0.1

43 11,517 Deve 5, 740 7 0.6

25 11,131 5, 567 5, 064 3 0.1

“

The correspondence of the two sides is so close that it

might be supposed that the exactness was attained by uncon-

sciously following, on one side of each section, the number

58 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

found on the other. This is not the case. The cells lie in small

clusters, which are seldom cut in the same position, and hence

the number of cells on the two sides of the same section

rarely corresponds exactly. It is therefore impossible to be

influenced by the preceding counts in such a way as to

“force a balance.”

Tadd the complete enumeration of the cells of one frog,

No. 43. Sections 1-146 lay in the medulla oblongata.

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord.

TABLE VIII.— No. OF CELLS.

(e@) a} for) (=) er) 16 for} (oy) bam! i 2) oO

= sH — a) ine) oo Yes} H bi Je) 19 ~)

Do = SP ie =

3 = — > = =

DNAD DD SD LD AHS DI DD DM OONGSDWASIOAD NO ONDNrOrOHMNINOASHNOOHRHHMENO

mr rH mH mr rm rm mr mM mo m dor Om So Oe ror mr

Ne} Ten} S bare! for) o> an) [a for) S 16

st st Yon} <sH ian) a Ht 1 sH ioe) ,

"Eh

Ps) SHAD MDOANASOHDDAAPMOMMAWDABDAOMOADArDHDDADMrDROCAMDHMDDSOHREDANONS

fom — retire tiie rm ted ea! Deal mr rm rm ro re rm rm QNr Dm be | Mew airir

5 OS TER CD SBD 6D B= GD 0 TA CR OD HID CD EE COS A OLED HIS OE OO S GV HIS OP O'S HN NISMO

iF lo QQ CR [J ly J lo J

(oy) H ian) sH oS S - lar) oD So for)

a tH I mo rm iv] OR mn iar) OR s oD

Dar

iS ee ee ee ee

Besancon ee ete ToS EMG RLCR rit a HLS GD) SHC at 151091100) IG > TESA SES OD CO ard Hier =ntS OT el Gy ey ees OCD

Fe ee eee ee eee

oa) > 4 oo S HW Ye) Ye) Ye) =) 2

E in) re rm R Or Q mM oy J mi sH s

Se peel ee ee ee ee ee eee

jae ie leper See ON ous Be ee SHE C9 CIO) ral1G0 SH G9 6 AD E2 U9 RKO Te COIS OD CO) HT Os Hh ODO FS coe P= tics ion oie

ee eee Se a i EE EEE Ee

SP FB CRD HID SOT CD SB 4 GRAD HD EO E> GD SH 4 VOD HID EOD HS v4 CVD HID DE DD 1 CACO WI OM CO HS ri CVO9

| mm Be rm be! ba fo J

60 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE VIII. — NO. OF CELLS — Continued.

No. Right. Left. No. Right.

260 17 68 18 79 315 13 73 19

1 13 if 6 14 13

2 Id ily 7 10 12

3 18 12 8 14 16

4 15 13 9 13 14

4) 11 02 17 70 320 12 63

6 15 15 il 15 18

7 10 aL 2 11 12

8 19 12 3 13

9 12 lil 4. 18 11

270 7 63 9 58 5 22 79 15

1 12 12 6 16 12

2 11 12 u 12 15

3 iil 8 8 14 1

4 7 12 9 13

i) 19 60 16 60 |; 330 9 64 12

6 8 9 1 17 16

yl 10 11 2 15 18

Cn 13 8 5) 13 10

9 | 15 16 4. 8 14

280 8 o£ 10 54 5 12 65 12

il 14 12 6 23 18

2 ill 10 7 13 11

3 14 8 8 12

- 11 : 9 9 17 12

9) 10 60 10 49 340 12 77 18

6 12 15 1 13 19

7 13 21 2 15 11

8 12 10 3 21 18

9 19 17 4 16 ofa

290 il 67 20 83 9) 14 79 13

il 12 18 6 19 14

2 11 12 7 12) 16

3 9 13 8 13 11

= 9 12 9 12 iG

5 10 ol 16 wal 350 9 65 il

6 15 18 1 15 2

ia 10 17 2 13 11

8 12 8 3 12 10

9 10 1 4. 11 10

300 9 56 12 69 5 15 66 14

1 7 15 6 15 12

2 9 10 7 17 15

3 8 13 8 11 13

4 12 10 9 10 14

5 10 56 9 57 360 12 65

6 9 19 i 13 13

7 11 16 2 15 11

8 7 17 3 18 15

9 12 11 4 9 17

310 15 52 12 75 by) 18 73 13

1 13 17 6 9 10

2 16 12 7 17 1

5 14 11 8 24 Ws

4 17 28 9 22 15

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord.

TaBLE VIII.— NO. OF CELLS — Continued.

Left.

Right. Left. No. Right.

No.

= oo on S i= Sa on

re rc m

SNS Hs ee ee CRS PS NP Ara Nea dei LoS I CYS es G)URED RUE OSD CID Itt ret ettCES C9) 9 5 0) SHV aed ret a EER Se 22.2 Ce

sH S le} ine) OQ @

inn) ae) rm

bam! =H 4 =

oO CR OQ CR QQ mr

for)

CR C2

DOE 19 HER D 19 19 CH 19 H 19 AHL 19 S HH OD OH © OD FD CV TH H Be © £9 19 H 1D 19 19 OD HD 2 OD SH 2 14110 OD OD OD CR SH OD

Se WD DED DD 4 OVEN OD HID] EW DD] v4 CVO HID 6] EW DD 4 GVO HID DEO HD 4 CVG HI] > WO HD SH 4 CVO HS Ore

st st H st st x

19 aol © for) 10 ae) 10° 10 wD

= i- We) s fo) A) oy] fy) OR r

ily

OD LD HID DD NES DID 19 ML H WH 1 DW © 60 09 SH HH DID INT LD NHS OHIO ONDO AH

ielirolirala D a ant nm

H H for) sH H ar) i re (oy) o 10

D =) oO Tex} an) ain) an) (oy) oy) mR oO

CR ED XH 1D 90 GOO T= £0 10 OT CO G9 TIS WH E> HO H 1S & CREO WO MH OD MH CO OY & E> tO Poh oS Sire

TH GR GD HUD E> GD OD v4 C2 OD HAD CD E> GO SD 4 GVO GD MH 1D OE HD 4 VOD HID OE DAO A NID HID OI DBS wi CVO

f—)

of} of in) — = —~

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TaBLeE VIII — NO OF CELLS. — Continued.

(oa) Q fed oS 5 eal re ee 10 Soe

a rv) a QR ar) an) an) a RQ fon) ach

Set

4 WO 8D CO OD HH ID 1D E> CO LH OLD 1D 1] DE ID DO BG HE HH SO HD 25 09 10 6] HD &O 7D HOD E> HOD OV OT CD GB HOD OV OV <H

Ne) So Ye) ~ ry) S od ae) H fon) co)

or) ron) mR — an) aC) on) low) or) lov) —

fa TH EH 1D SH 1D GQ HE 69 © 8 09 9 HOD HO DH B19 DO HID Br 9919 & 1019 H 1D H O19 1 1919 MAM 19 1D OAH IDAHM RM NHC

8 GR HD CO B= GO OD A GRAD HID £] BO D4 GVO HID ©] ES 4 VOD H 1D ] PD SA VOD HIG OID PDS 4 NID GIG Or

7 1d 1D Yen) 1D Yon) 1D

co) Yo) r—) H el lv) ox) x4 oD (oa) D

=I aa RQ ro) fom) or) ror) fon) an) nn) ron)

Sed

to)

4 GP TD UD G2 GD OD SHH 4 GO 1D CO ID CO GD HID TH SO 39.09 OD ECO CP XH XH OD 00 HD HID 09 10 10 HO OO 1D VID S 1019 & 1 |] HH 10

H ico) = wo ae) R Ne) co =H (ora) sH

ri Il Or il QR (av) [od OQ ine) inn) (0)

are]

"Sp

oe WD GV OQAD 1D OH OV HID 1D HD 41D © 09 19. 99.19 UH 1D OD OO E> VID 1] DP DIDI GINO NI AGO N19 19 1019

S DOD 4 CVAD HID 6 TD DD 4 OVO HID DP DD SA CV HID OI WMO] A NW HID GI DHS AAI HIS Om OAS

7, OH = 1D 19 iD ex

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord.

TaBLE VILI.— NO. OF CELLS.— Continued.

Left.

Right.

ae) —) H | ar) >

nl co oO an) =H an) o oO ry) oO of

DP AD E> 1D 1D CD UD DS] OD UD LUD G9 BMH COD D9 E> G9 DE 1G 1D 1D C9 1D T~ CV IH COT CV EVO CO 0.10 Od C2 OD H TH ID CO CO GO OHI OD

io 2) xH fy] QQ S

in) oD an) an)

fad oD

oO C2 OQ On ar)

eC) CCE LESS) CON CONSID ES COLNE Me) SS) S110) oh Ge) 22) 50) (USM sorl Ge IeNGpH SS GAN Hea) oMar ye Mijn)

iret

No.

Right. Left.

No.

TG C8 89 HID GO ECO DD 4 VOD HID EW DD A OVO HID OI DASA RN HID GM OAS AND HID OM OAS ri over

=) Je) Yo) oO To) ©

bs we) DO io) [ od ile) ioe) OD 5 al for) —

x i m oe mW ao bo oO sH

cD 1D G2 <H OGD oD CR BEE SS IGRAGISGD STG B ASCO UD 1S Eom 09 CSU E G2 CR, OO.GO. 9a, 00.2926, 6, = 80) SO sR OD a

il<} oO Co =) lor) ~ D ile)

mr deal nm inet nm re! inn) ian)

& on)

in) bi

ane ences rs nea Le ven et ORI SEL Se NS eA NS RSD IS GRC C10 SER mE D) a, eS) IE SA 1A Ea CIS rae

588

Shean eee re CPS PH ND EO EoD 5 r CiD PUD CE Te GS EA T.-H ACS BED. oe SSC 1 TBO aH 10D (6 I= OD Gp Gp

Yes} © =) © © S

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE VIII.— NO. OF CELLS — Continued.

H D 9 > = = = oS D R=)

i 1D 10 a iD H oH 10 = = ~H =

any ‘

S ———————— — — = => —

DASNMIG AAO OAM AIO NDOSRNHOHrODHTRHOHDDMADSCHORARDDOMHHHEOHDONAHOD

BD re ere 9 pn oer on | Jal Seal Jol Sal al = vont mre Deel Taal iol rm 1 atl mr ri al

foes ae i ees hes ae oe

i ron i a) = 10 a) S a) = AS

’ + ae =H 19 x =H 19 red =H ue on

a=) 1

a= pea a te ae eT E

eI NAOGDAD AOSHI AOI AOAHAMDMD SOD ADIONGRIDHODROHDEODRODLHArLAONSLLADDKON

vol Sel Seals! Yala! b ml Sel hel rt 1 bn | iolisal Sol nm Veo! Srl mm mre Jolt

5 FB ORGS HID TB AGN GD SHI LD EH SAGA HID DI DHS rh V9 WI OO AOA HIS Sm OAS RAD

fo) =H 10 (To) = (o8) for)

Ve Ct a > Ge Se = (oa)

Ten) R 10 (eo) Cand (oa) H [ay =H bo io @)

: tn) an) an) GR G2 oO 1d + H tH on)

% a a ree Oa ee

DMmOASmHAHAROOIADIOD AM MOM MO AMHOHNDOOCONMHHHONDEANDOROCAOHOHDDNDODOOG

SI ri mr went ns nm ri Tali

2 H a ea} nr 10 on é = 2 é

: a oD oD ov) ov) oe o ar = x ror

+43

a a a eS

fe IO 1D CO ADF? 1D WD GO B= © B> XH TG CO HID WH EO HID HVS GF HI OO AD SOOM MIAAONHOAROROM OMY

a ee

iqy2 ae) =H

a) = > pS eS =

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord. 65

TABLE VIII.— NO. OF CELLS.— Continued.

No Right. Left. No Right. Left.

804 9 8 845 10 11

3) 9 4 6 11 12

6 7 6 ti 10 10

7 8 a) 8 il 50 ¢ AT

8 9 42 7 30 9 itil 12

9 8 10 850 15 7

810 11 10 1 13 14

1 8 7 2 12 14

2 9 6 3 8 57 10 57

3 13 49 12 45 a 12 8

4 10 13 9) 10 14

3) 9 6 6 18 6

6 5 i U 7 8

7 6 6 8 10 57 8 44

8 9 39 10 42 9 i 11

9 8 9 860 8 12

820 a 10 1 6 5

1 14 10. 2 U 6

2 9 12 3 9 oT 4 38

8 16 54 10 ol 4 8 7

4 11 8 5 6 5

5 9 11 6 8 of

6 10 13 7 6 5

Ul 12 14 8 3 ol 5) 24

8 14 56 18 64 9 4 6

9 16 18 870 3 i)

830 10 20 ul 3 ok:

il 15 8 2 i) 6

2 14 12 3 2 17 2 20

5) 16 iu 17 75 4 4 5)

4 15 11 5 1 0

5 10 7 6 3 1

6 8 10 7 2 2

7 9 8 8 0 10 1 u

8 17 59 13 49 9 2 0

9 12 10 880 ut 3

840 13 11 1 2 2

1 11 14 2 1 0

2 6 9 3 0 9 0 5

3 8 50 9) 49 + 1 1

+ 8 7 3) 2 1

The addition of all the cells gives

5,740 for the left side, as in table I.

numbers in the same section usually differ and often con-

siderably, while each group of five sections or one-tenth

mm. shows a closer corrrespondence.

KAW

O,0 64

for the right side

It will be seen that the

The total number of the cells varies in proportion to the

weight of the frog as shown by

66 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE IX.

INUHAG OETE OME HOP yes odyocnsooagace 49 18 12 36 42 25

Weight in grammes............. Ile Be 44 63 111 115

INuamberiot icells- aa. e sete 4,871 |6, 760 [6,882 |8,539 |11,517 |11, 137

In Nos. 12 and 25 only the large cells were counted and

tho numbers are therefore too small. Nos. 49, 18 and 43 are

male, 12, 14 and 25 female. The ovaries were removed from

the latter before weighing. Hence we may conclude that

there is a relation between weight and number of ganglion

cells not unlike that which obtains between weight and

motor nerve fibres.

In the brachial region the cells are distributed in small

layers, each only one cell thick, and the spaces between the

layers are occupied by the outgoing fibres. In the lumbar

region no such arrangement is visible. The motor fibres of

the brachial region pass off at right angles to the cord, and

in the same way from the motor centre, while those of the

lumbar region pass off obliquely both inside and outside of

the cord. The most convenient method of showing the dis-

tribution of the cells is, therefore, that of taking a unit of

space and showing the number of cells in that. I have

chosen one-tenth mm. as the space_since it is smal] enough

to show the influence of the nerves and large enough to elim-

inate differences in thickness of the sections. I give the re-

sult in tabular form and graphically in plates I and II which

are to be compared with the tables.

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frogs Spinal Cord. 67

TABLE X.

Frog No. 49. Weight 1} grm. No. of cells in each one-tenth mm. See

Plate I, Fig. I.

Sum. Left. | Right. Sum. Sum. Left. | Right. | Sum.

35 42 25 35

37 43 3d 32

51 51 21 21

68 72 26 26

89 98 30 32

192 137 43 52

104 108 52 56

90 96 53 53

114 131 68 71

859 129 119 897 431 78 89 467

120 iti 85 75

100 89 83 72

33 33 87 101

26 28 88 97

38 22 94. 87

22 16 95 87

26 21 83 80

16 19 54. 599)

24 QT 29 28

419 24. 25 401 705 0 9 692

2,414 2, 047

Total. | 4,871

68 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE XI.

Frog No. 18. ¢ Weight 22 grm. Plate I, Flg. II.

Sum. Left. | Right. Sum. Sum. Left. | Right. | Snm..

43 45 24 27

70 70 99 93

63 55 93 29

56 55 29 19

58 60 29 20

63 65 24 31

79 69 26 25

; 83 30 32

83 70 39 35

667 81 82 654. 268 29 32 266

82 rq 34 31

84. 79 34 30

69 "5 32 41

80 838 38 39

72 73 48 54

7 73 54 57

q 83 45 42

" 3 my) 51

1 " 49 49

"51 7 56 "54 429 46 39 433

28 20 52 AT

93 25 55 50

27 32 50 60

33 32 66 54.

24 20) 57 61

21 20 59 60

24 25 56 55

TI) ibe = 053 | 54. 65

aa | Saya | amen cl Gey

252 5 23 245 576 63 66 585

24 29 69 62

17 q 56 67 |

24 27 45 69 |

21 28 14 29

20 28 6 6

29 29 6 5

26 25

27 26

21 23

287 28 20 245 195 201

< 3, 375 3, 383

| Total. . 6,758

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord. 69

TABLE XII.

Frog No. 36. Weight 67 grm. Plate I, Fig. III.

Sum. Left. | Right. Sum. Sum. Left. | Right. | Sum,

7 11 21 24.

et! 19 18 21

32 7 16 13

22 35 21 15

31 34. 214 24. 20 197

40 49 27 26

S 45 ave aly

60 72 25 25

59 56 ily 21

308 46 52 403 21 24

42 39 20 26

40 7 26 27

52 o4 18 18

7 | 64 10 19

62 65 198 1 30 233

65 69 29 30

7 81 22 23

81 7 25 29

66 62 | 17 24

625 64. 73 619 26 25

62 72 21 33

74. 74 32 29

64. 57 17 20

62 61 21 21

65 69 232 21 21 255

68 i 16 25

Thi 7 31 30

85 7 3L 23

65 12 31 Sill

708 86 69 704 37 37

73 ill 35 33

76 69 45 aii

78 73 46 45

53 50 63 58

56 46 396 61 56 38790

27 23 61 67

27 29 64 65

34 25 55 51

Hh 21 52 46

465 20 24. 440 52 49

24 26 5d 43

27 26 45 45

23 20 41 39

23 25 34 43

35 26 487 28 32 480

20 23 30 31

16 21 29 32

14 17 40 at

23 24 7 34

226 21 20 228 40 38

23 16 44 41

29 23 33 34

23 19 36 38

22 30 23 25

ity al@(e | 343 21 13 823

70 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE XII. — Continued.

Sum. { Right. | Left. - Sum. Sum. Left. | Right. | Sum.

6 5 iL 1

2 3

2 4 15 16

3 0

2 i 4267 4272

Total 8539

TABLE XIII.

Frog No. 42. Weight. 111 Grm. See Plate II, Fig. IV.

Sum. | Left. | Right. Sum. Sum. Left. | Right. | Sum.

38 42 607 33 29 618

19 14 31 39

11 18 27 23

23 14 22 25

20 20 20 25

21 20 35 28

26 17 34 39

26 | 33 30 27

Go 23 31 23

240 40 40 236 25 31

42 39 278 23 21 277

46 48 22 23

45 44 18 19

50 49 29 20

Al 39 24 27

39 39 21 14

49 55 14 13

43 49 14 18

47 42 18 16

451 49 61 466 21 20

80 58 199 18 24 194

Go) i 62 22 22

68 79 26 22

72 70 26 21

63 58 34 30

60 60 38 38

54 54 o4 28

60 49 25 28

67 83 20 22

GSO Ha eealei) eel at 274 26 27 262

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Froq’s Spinal Cord. ak

TABLE XIII.— Continued.

Sum. Left. | Right. Sum. Sum. Left. | Right. | Sum.

56 69 17 20

56 7 32 31

52 (5) 30 81

73 12 27 30

63 62 23 24

79 65 24. 25

64 60 22 21

65 70 18 14.

i 67 13 14

664 i 1 669 222 16 16 229

65 64 10 8

66 68 17 16

65 62 16 1%

We 69 19 26

84 67 if 18

64 75 37 43

69 id 38 31

o4 61 35 39

34 46 43 41

270 38 38 287 56 59

34 33 44 41

32 30 45 41

37 34. 56 57

32 40 50 48

20 33 477 46 40 479

14 24. 61 48

20 23 37 46

17 22 42 30

29 25 49 45

264 Soumll 3D 299 39 42

32 Bis) 54. 51

34 32 56 64.

34 35 71 75

28 26 59 49

22 27 518 50 49

45 38 50 47

43 54 57 57

37 42 D7 44

41 44 37 38

858 42 41 3874 31 24.

aif 88 17 23

47 5t 10 a

49 58 268 9 5 245

47 43 5, 740 ae erirs

Total {11,517

2 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE XIV.

Frog No. 25. 6 Weight 115 grm. See Plate II, Fig. V.

Sum. | Left. | Right. Sum. Sum. Left. | Right. | Sum.

23 25 21 21

18 20 16 16

24 22 23 17

32 31 16 14

32 35 209 22 23 204

A4 40 20 25

50 45 21 18

56 49 28 23

65 65 25 25

438 94 76 408 23 28

64 64 26 26

64 61 29 26

58 50 21 25

60 51 22 20

38 53 229 19 19 205

39 39 27 24

41 62 18 17

57 73 27 25

56 65 15 18

547 7 7 589 18 12°

7 75 16 20

90 100 13 11)

74. 72 11 12

rad 82 18 20

Wg 76 183 20 19 192

90 1 33 35

84 78 37 36

77 67 37 34

75 66 28 32

789 67 84 791 37 37

‘eres 50 45 36

62 58 38 37

67 71 Al 34

65 60 34 30

67 59 364 34 34 345

83 77 36 39

62 62 23 32

66 73 33 34

64 68 32 36

685 72 70 648 34 32

73 69 45 47

54 48 38 40

39 31 34 38

33 26 42 44

28 30 360 43 33 375

18 18 43 30

NA 1g) 36 33

14 18 34 33

21 20 38 36

314 17 15 294 45 44

28 34 44 53

25 17 51 AT

17 21 31 42

20 21 57 5d

21 20 429 50 52 480

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Coad. 73

TABLE XIV.— Continued.

Sum. | Right. | Left. Sum. Sum. Right. | Left. | Sum.

44 7 22 20

68 70 16 14

60 62 383 4 9 417

58 63 9 10

54 sy) id 8

56 64 3 3

54 61 5 3

53 45 4 4

75 63 3 2

594 72 68 598 2 2

62 70 2 2

58 70 1 1

54 65 38 2 3 38

48 52 1 0

43 49 1 i!

44 41 5, 564 5d, 567

32 27 Total. | 11,131

If we consider the tables, or better, the plates, we shall see

that the cells are arranged in two great groups, correspond-

ing to the brachial and lumbar enlargements, which are con-

nected by the slender dorsal region. We can then divide the

spinal cord into three regions—one for the 1st-3d nerves,

the second for the 4th-6th nerves, and the third for the 7th-—

10th nerves. We will consider each separately:

TABLE XV.

ROMP EO see ss.c cs ag been so ote | 49 18 12 36 25 42

Cells of brachial region........... | 2076 | 2828 | 3204 | 4061 | 5306 | 5104

LTS C/U ERG oR ee ie he eae 4871 | 6758 | 6892 | 8539 {11131 |11517

Per cent. of cells in brachial re-

LOTR GS cic fl ROSES ECD ORC o 44.6 | 41.6 | 46.8 | 47.5 Aina

The length of this region does not correspond to the num-

ber of cells, as seen by

74 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE XVI.

INOS AGI AMROY Rasa ane, oS Soe Od come UaD CoS ai 49 18 36 25 43

ILemeiiln OE GOwl Witt... 53 54onasoce0c00000e Ac) 216) Tae Caos Om ieee

Meneihrot brachial pervony ee co aricelee 1.2 BN 3.8 4) 4.8

iRencents orm totallenotheeeeen. eee se 29.2 | 26.3 | 30.1 | 31.6 | 32.7

The cell-bearing part of the cord, only, is measured, and

the table shows that the celis lie far closer in the brachial

region than in the succeeding ones. It is also plain that

there is no correspondence between the outside measure-

ment of diameter of cord, or of the gray matter, and the

number of cells contained.

It is further noticeable that the cells are very regularly

distributed in the brachial region. There is a sudden rise in

number, atolerably regular maintenance of amaximum, and

a rapid diminution at the close of the region. This. fact is

due to the direction of exit of the fibres, it being, as before

said, at right angles to the cord. Part of the third ne v

indeed passes forward and so serves to still more clearly

mark the line between the first and second regions. It is

not easy to draw a line between the second and third re-

gions. In both the nerves pass off obliquely, and the roots

overlap each other in such a way that no sharp rise is

seen and no line of division can be drawn.

The two posterior regions together contain, in percentages,

the following number of cells. ;

TABLE XVII.

i 7 =

Num berioivhiro sein sais heme: | 49 | 18 | 12 36 25 42

| 55.3 | 58.3 | 538.2 | 02.5 52.9 | 54.9

| | |

In the second region it is not possible to find, in most

cases, enlargements corresponding to the nerves. The cells

are pretty evenly distributed.

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord. —%5

In the third region several facts are noticeable:

1. The small number of cells in proportion to the weight of

muscle supplied. The weight of the leg muscles is far greater

than that of the arm muscles, but the ganglion cells, though

larger are scarcely more numerous. The fibres of the muscles

are much larger in the leg, and of course, investigation should

turn on the relation of number of cells to fibres. This has

not been worked out.

2. Thecells increase gradually to a maximum and very

rapidly fall off in number at the rear end.

3 The position of the maximum is variable and probably

depends on the relative size of the nerves going into the

lumbar plexus. This is well seen in Frog No. 43, where

both fibres and cells were counted. An unusually large 10th

nerve was found and the maximum of cells is unusually far

back. In general the maximum lies near the exit of the 8th

nerve.

4, It may be inferred that the nerve fibres do not go far

in the cord before uniting with a cell.

5. There is a long string of scattered cells at the pastentoe

end often + mm. long.

The exact relation of the maxima of cells to the points of

exit of the nerves is not easy to determine on cross sections

which alone I have studied. The third nerve passes as.

already said, forward, and the roots of the posterior nerves

overlap. Longitudinal sections prepared by other meth-

ods will give conclusions on this point.

A word may be said on the relation of length of cord and

number of cells, though no proportional relation was found.

TABLE XVIII.

MMM OR et Se ies tooo /oldis'S “sD ore oa 'e/aniel ie | 4y 18 | 5 | 42

Meee HCOL COL, IND .!.... coo. 6d oo sri was Bae | 116 | 13.9 14.7

MPFPEOILTCOIIBI Ej dos dence, savcstce ot ane | 4871 | 6758 | 8539 11181 | 11517

8S TE 8 e e Paeaeae | 1189 | 905 | 636 | 800 | 783

It is plain that the length increases more rapidly than the

number of the cells. The length is necessarily taken from

76 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

the imbedded cord. Proportional results are probably not

impaired by this fact, although the exception to the series

seen in No. 36 may rest on some irregularity in shrinking

during imbedding.

A comparison of cells per mm. in brachial and lumbar re-

gions may be interesting.

TABLE XIX.

ROSSINI. cee hie ae elses coe aes Orne eee eae hehe 49 36 42

Weight of frog, elena Bete hls Stes AS ait i = il 67 abiet

i brachial sem: bias santas aeaeieres ae 1730 1160 1063

Calls, (ote aia anes Piensa eeneee 1352 | 791 | 784

The cells lie more closely than in the brachial region, and

the number of cells decreases per mm. with the growth of

the frog more rapidly in the lumbar than in the brachial re-

gion. This fact is plain also in the outer form of the cord

which gradually changes from a conical to a cylindrical

form. The change is also more rapid in youth than later.

Ill. RELATION oF Motor CELLS AND FIBRES.

In frog No. 42, the motor fibres of the right side and the

cells were both counted as given in the preceding pages.

The number of motor fibres in the ten nerves on the right

side was 5,734.

The number of ganglion cells was, right, 5,777; left, 5,740.

The correspondence is so close that we can well conclude

that for each motor nerve fibre there is present a ganglion

cell in the anterior horn of the cord, and that all ganglion

cells therein contained are connected with motor nerve fibres.

Other countings gave the following result:

TABLE XX.

INO RO PME O Sere a ued wlceue cals eieca Semen eee epee 49 36 42

Motorinbresiofonesideneeeeeeneeerooreee ole 2,992 | 4,283 5, 734

Ganolioni@ellsiofarichtisider mar cecceese ceeeeoor 2, 457 4272 5, 777

IDUPEREM CORR SA sis tse eoe RRR en ae +5385 +43 —43

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord. iin

The great difference between the fibres and cells of frog

49, was a surprise tome. It is, however, easily explained.

As already said, the nervous elements ina small frog are

smaller than in the larger ones. There are thus a larger

number proportionately of small cells and fibers. But

while osmic acid discriminates easily from the smallest

fibres, the corresponding cells are hardly distinguishable

from the large embryonic cells found in great numbers in

the cord of developing frogs, like the one in question. I

therefore suppose that the number given for the fibres is

probably the true number for the cells.

I append a figure in which the weight of the frog serves as

the axis of abscissas, and the number of ganglion cells and

nerve fibres as that of ordinates. It will be seen that there

is quite a close correspondence between the lines of cells and

and fibres, but that the former shows a too cupid decline in

the region of the smaller frogs. The lines should probably

run parallel and would do so were the methods for discrim-

inating cells as good as those for fibres.

In Fig. 1 the figures on the lower side of the cut represent the weight of

the frogs in grammes; those on the right of the cut, the number of cells

or fibres. The broken line represents the curve of the ganglion cells. The

upper line shows the nerve fibres, and the lower line the large ganglion.

cells in those frogs where only those cells were counted. The numbers in,

the cut refer to those of the frogs examined.

78 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The Motor Ganylion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord. — 79

It remains to briefly consider the relation of the fibres and

cells of different regions.

TABLE XXI.

ENE MMI cfele otal a2 stcre wien Sioa s SS cipeelmaseleveaies SOE 36 42

Fibres, Nerves1-3 ,...... rAahiahistctay'c Savas wheter SeeNe PRION aNenover ey Ss 4578 6122

AS GRO Ee OLACHTALEOTOM cia sielercis «sisaieis « slelaia Ss autevayae overs 4061 5104

HREMTOLETICOMSE arta eeidois Shisiditletace:shcld ss atere aleldans eb eta alt Aas —d17 —1018

IB MTe Se NOE VES Ali o cccck yay cages, <eyare s lenets) Siete erste Gap aveds 4088 5846

@elisvok dorso-lumbar TEGIOM. sie. 2 seh ae ce bc eo cise os 4478 6423

(PERELEM COI chp Pent sl acitsies ae fo siete Ns, Shh o a labloke See +890 —1067

The table shows that we have too many cells in the dorso-

lumbar region, too few in the brachial. The latter must

therefore draw on the former, and, as already remarked,

there are ascending fibres from the middle region of the

cord.

We can also determine the point where the supply for the

lumbar plexus begins.

The first six nerves contain in Frog 36, 5236 fibres, in 42,

7040. In figures I] and III this point is marked with d, a

point in the middle region just above the lumbar enlarge-

ment. This confirms previously advanced views.

IV. NUMBER oF SENSORY FIBRES.

The following table gives the facts so far as I have invest-

igated them.

TABLE XXII.

No. 41, 6 Wt. 23 Gr. No. 36. 9° Wt. 63 Gr.

Nerve. | Motor. |Sensory.| Sum. | Trunk. || Motor. |Sensory.| Sum. | Trunk.

Lis 652 78 | 720 718 783 124 | 907 908

ie 1098 1230 | 2328 2563 975 1649 | 2624 3041*

ge 226 143 | 369 370 481 264 | 745 749

IV. 119 185 | 304 301 106 193 | 299 297

Ne 92 188 | 280 279 114 |* 224 | 838 339

ws 137 176 | 313 314 159 184 | 348 341

VIL. 137 470 | 608 607 142 562 | 704 703

VIIL 501 737 | 12388 1243 870 1101 | 1971 1955

IX. 450 547 | 997 1001 441 993 | 1434 1633*

a: 112 27} 139 141 212 41 | 2538 253

Sum. 3524. 3781 7295 | 325 4283 5335 | 9618

80 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

It will be seen that except in two cases there is a close

agreement between the sum of the roots and the trunks. In

those two cases the nerve was so large as to be unstained

near ifs exit from the spinal column, and sections were taken

lower down, where the nerve may have been joined by other

nerves.

Tt is plain, (1) that the number of motor fibres is smaller

than that of the sensory; and (2), if these two frogs may be

taken as examples. that the number varies with the weight

of the frog, but not according to the same law as do the mo-

tor fibres.

V. FUNCTIONS OF THE Motor GANGLION CELLS.

Experiments were made with a view of directly determin-

ing the function of the group of cells whose numbers were

counted. The frog’s brain was destroyed and the spinal cord

exposed. It was then fastened on a plate like the mechan-

ical stage of a microscope, and its tendo achillis was con-

nected with a registering drum in the usual way. A very

fine needle was plunged into the cord by means of a rack-

and-pinion movement. It was first inserted into the center of

the cord, then withdrawn, the frog was moved one-tenth mm.

and the cord again pierced, the needle withdrawn, and the op-

eration was repeated until the whole breadth of cord was

passed below the needle. The usual effect of the prick was

either nothing ora twitch of the muscle; at one point, however,

a tetanus was produced. To determine this point the cord was

hardened, imbedded, and a section made at the point exper-

imented upon; a drawing of the section was then divided

into as many equal spaces as there had been needle pricks,

and it was found that those pricks which caused a tetanus

passed through or close to the group of large ganglion cells.

This was the case whether the cord was pierced from the

side or from above. We may then conclude that these

ganglion cells have the power of converting into a tetanus,

a stimulus which, if applied to the nerve would cause merely

a single twitch.

The Motor Ganglion Cells of the Frog’s Spinal Cord. — 81

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plates I and II are a graphic representation of the tables

X-XV.,and show the number of cells for each one-tenth mm,

of length of spinal cord. The vertical line marked O serves

as the axis of abscissas and contains as many units of

length as does the given cord one-tenth mm. On each side

are ordinates erected whose length corresponds to the num-

ber of cells at the given horizon. Each space on this axis

stands for ten ganglion cells. The figures are placed verti-

cally soas better to show the right and left, anterior and

posterior directions of the cord. In Fig. IV. the points of

exit of the nerves are marked.

One source of error in the plates should be noted. It is

assumed that the sections were cut at right angles to the

spinal cord. Since this is never exactly true it happens that

a small bilateral asymmetry exists in the figure which may

not be found in the cord.

Hicmelecee Table X., page 67:

Fig. IJ. see Table XI., page 65.

Fig. III. see Table XII., page 69.

Fig. IV. see Table XIII., page 70.

Fig. V.see Table XIV., page 72.

VolLVI Plate LT

scvaeseeed

~ %

ma AY

, Y] WZ

Wy Z —Y;

seed

ce ee . Se |

J —=

ie a aa | ig

Le Pal eclae

ee.

GGG _J N + |

Te |

Weel

i a

cdl ae

Val. VI Plate 7

100 HO PO

60 70 IO IO

Number of Cells ire meme.

3 Wis Acad. Sct. Arts. & Letter

; ——

: i]

Sy a

: 1

8 -

: 4

s* |

= |

RN |

SE: |

. : LZ,

S$ EYEE 7

Sy -

S8§ ty yy 3

AN ae

a ial

WA ee +

3 Ye | : |

: |

S ZA

$ [ | | |

| | |

7 HY 7 Re

| ies

} ! - :

= {{ses| ere ae |

~— HH | a

Y k |

a A VA + a 4

AAV : a:

> ,

ir EE

A yy

all yy

) ween

~ 5 i

Si Rs |

& s eg 3

a Wes

yy ~ §

: ~

S fs

NOS

Si Ss

: g

: NS

g i

: é 8

S ——4

—

Ss)

Vol. VI. Plate IT

Fig. V

uneber of Cells tre Fo rem:

ww SSK

Hossa tarts

et ba

2 SEA a Aa

“Ss SSSSSSSSS

Ree ee ae

1 oe oe ee ne

eo een ae bine | a

MYM ee Wide

Vol. FU. Plate

Trans. Wis Acad. Sc. Arts & Letters.

Fig. I

Member of Clls

a RE

i ia

Aig lr:

Number of Clls ir

WO 100 90 80 70 60 ZO 4O 30 2 VO Oo 70 20 30 #0

re fe 200 ee,

”

= ‘fam ro

Ta ee

i r| | ba

; | t T | ; | a == ha | ae = cr Ee

ns eae aia Be [I

Tat ee . a ) 7] (cy ee (eee Core] ees | S : ES = 2

| a a = Sa 1 i a LT | ty ena

3}—|—++ fe = jj +} = = —

3|—|— | Be aon a a. ae es fata |

3|— mail Ho - D a — + ail | ee Cees 2 | jos)

i ee tae al ‘Vy n | ee: | ee a | ea ts

o| | faa, _| a ni | TT Te = flap. Hal | |

malic 20SSSSEeSeeey || ee

[ea a | | es | eee =isak wx =

Bs — A <i | i dala ete ery ral

fe FES nfl. teeeoaees

ate

i ee f ; Z Se saBe ee

ee fieeia oe Te

ee - [a

= i ir |e ee | ‘5 | = | L ae a

a 4 i

TAA AMIR hy Arar pSaiyions Nahe ee arn:

THIRTEENTH ANNUAL MEETING.

DECEMBER 26, 27 anp 28, 1882.

PROGRAMME.

TUESDAY, DEC. 26, 7:30 P. M.

Business Meeting — Reports of Officers.

WEDNESDAY, DEc. 27, 9:30 A. M.

Unfinished Business.

Paper:

Paper;

“Who built the Mounds.”’— Dr. P. R. Hoy, Racine.

“ Who made the Copper tools”— Dr. P. R. Hoy, Racine.

“Greek Religion.”— Prof. J. EMERSON, Beloit.

AFTERNOON SESSION, 2:30 P. M.

“Portraits of Columbus.”— J. D. BuTLER, L.L. D., Madison.

“List of Hungi collected in Wisconsin.” —WM. TRELEASE, Madi-

son.

“Tnsanity.”— A. O. WRIGHT, A. M., Madison.

“Our knowledge of Stellar Motion.”— Prof. T. H. SArrorp, Wil-

liamstown, Mass.

EVENING SESSION, 7:30 P. M.

(Institute of Christian Philosophy.) ‘The Unity of Moral Ideas.”

Rev. C. CAVEENO. Lombard, Ills.

THURSDAY, DEC. 28th, ‘9:30 A. M.

“The effect of local attractiors on the Plumb line and Sea level.”

— Prof. J. E. Davies, Madison.

“Nature and Free.om.’’— Prof. J. J. ELMENDORF, Racine.

* Sorghum Sugar.’ — M. Swenson, M..8., Madison.

AFTERNOON SESSION, 2:30 P. M.

(Institute of Christian Philosophy.) “The Ideal Man.”— Prof. J.

J. ELMENDORF, Racine.

‘The Sochemanni.”—- Pror. W. F. ALLEN, Madison.

EVENING SESSION, 7:30 P. M.

Unfinished Business.

Paper:

(Institute of Christian Philosophy.) “The Universality of Law.”—

Pres. JOHN Bascom, Madison.

84 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

WHO BUILT THE MOUNDS?

By Dr. P. R. Hoy, Racine.

This question is often asked and variously answered. I

purpose to treat the subject with due candor, offering such

evidence only, as I consider authentic. Let us have the

truth, though it should undermine the fanciful poetic fic-

tions that have, from time to time, been advanced as the true

solution of this mooted question. We read in papers and

books on this subject, that the great antiquity of works is

proven by the trees on or near them that a mound or fortifica-

tion must be of great age for the trees were from three to

four feet in diameter, or the very indefinite expression, there

were large trees growing in such and such a locality.

Aside from the love of exaggeration, | am persuaded that

there is a large margin for error in counting three or four ©

inches of the outer margin of trees and thereupon estimating

the age by multiplying the semi-diameter by this partial

count.

The giant trees of California hove been over and over

again declared to be from three to four thousand years of

age. In 1875, J.G. Lemmons was sent to ascertain the ex-

act truth and report at the Centennial. On repeatedly count-

ing the rings of at least a dozen trees, he found ers their

ages were from 1,000 to 1,500 years.

The celebrated tree, the stump of which is used as a floor

for a ball room, is just 1.260 years old. Lemmons, during

these investigations ascertained that by counting the rings

on the outer foot and then, by this, estimating the age,

the years would be doubled, for the growths varied from

one-third of an inch in the interior, to the thickness of paper

on the outside. So after repeated trials, he found that by

counting a section one-third of the distance from the inside

of the bark toward the centre, the age thus ascertained

would correspond with the entire count. This rule was of

great value to him in ascertaining the ages of the old pros-

trate trees. (Botanical Gazette, Vol. 3, Nos. 10 and 11.)

Who Built the Mounds? 85

I have measured and counted the rings of many trees and

find that in most forest trees Lemmons’ rule is equally ap-

plicable.

Observation proves that forest trees acquire considerable

size in comparatively few years. Itis a rule in forestry to

cut off the timber in 100 years from the planting, as it is

then sufficiently large for all purposes, and after the expira-

tion of one century the waste, decay, etc., equals the increase

by growth. The fine shade trees that line our streets in

Racine, more «specially in the Second ward, are a source of

pride and comfort to the citizens. I was one of the earliest

settlers in this ward. In 1846-7 an organization for the pur-

pose, planted trees some of which, by this time, have attained

somewhat remarkable size. I have recently measured some

of the largest. The white elms, Ulmus Americana, are from

six to eight feet in circumference two feet from the ground.

Maples from four to five feet; black and golden willows,

eight feet ; poplars, Populus Candicans eight and a half to

nine feet. Not long since I had an opportunity of counting

the rings and accurately measuring one of these street elms,

finding the diameter two feet from the ground, inside of the

bark, twenty-four inches, rings forty-eight,—an average of

just one-fourth of an inch toa ring, giving an increase in

diameter each year of one-half an inch.

Benjamin Bones, living four miles from Racine, cut down

in 1870, a large white elm and on splitting it discovered, four

inches from the centre, a blaze which included a hack evi-

dently made by asharp ax. He brought me asection of the

tree including the blaze. There were one hundred and

eighty-eight rings outside of the hack, measuring twenty-

two and a half inches from inside of the bark to the blaze.

Counting back and adding two years for the growths

to cover the scar, we found that the period. corresponded

with Hennepin’s first voyage along the west coast of Lake

Michigan. A few years before this discovery Dr. Lapham

and I amused ourselves tracing Father Hennepin’s voyage.

We located the spot where he halted and spent several

days to recuperate. He says: “ At this station the natives

and voigeures we had with us killed plenty of stags, wild

86 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

goats and many turkeys, big and fat.” The point where we

located this halt is not over one-half a mile from this famous

historic tree, which was fully four feet in diameter. It is

probable that 203 years ago some of Hennepin’s party blazed

an elm sapling as a guide, and now the marks of that

hatchet are revealed as sharp and distinct as when first

made. ;

At the time Dr. Lapham and I surveyed the large group

of mounds, near Racine, in September, 1850, there was a pin

oak sapling growing on the centre of a small mound situ-

ated near the house of William Bull. That sapling is now

fifty-six inches in diameter although that species of tree is

ordinarily not arapid grower.

Trees that are planted on the mounds, in Mound Ceme-

tery have made a rapid growth being much larger than

those planted at the same time in the adjacent grounds.

It has been asserted over and over again, without fear of

contradiction, that the “Mound builders were an agricul-

tural people and the Indians not.” The truth is that the In-

dians well deserved the name agricultural.

When white men came to America they found corn in

cultivation from latitude forty degrees south, to

the St. Lawrence river of the north. Corn must have

originated ina warm country, probably in Mexico. How

it could have been adapted to the short summers of the re-

gions so far north, is a matter of interesting inquiry. With-

out other agricultural education than that derived from their

own unrecorded and necessarily imperfect observations, the

Indians pushed the production of corn from the Gulf of

Mexico to the St. Lawrence, Canada, ages before the white

man visited them, and it was to the natives that the early

settlers were indebted, not only for the seed corn, but for

instruction as to planting and cultivation. An annual like

corn may extend itself east or west along the same isother-

mal line by accidental causes, but it could not have moved

into a much colder climate without skillful cultivation and

careful attention to the selection and improvement of va-

riety. It must have required ages to change it to such a de-

gree as to fit it to grow and ripen in Canada.

Who Built the Mounds? 87

When the Pilgrims first came among the Indians they

bought great stores of venison and eight hogsheads of corn

and beans. (Mourt’s Relations. Drake, p. 79.) King Philip,

Metacomet, was surprised and driven from his home on

Mount Hope. The Pilgrims took “what he had worth

taking, and spoiled the rest, and also took possession of one

thousand acres of corn, which was harvested by the English

and disposed of according to their directions.” (Old Indian

Chronicle. Drake, p. 209.) In the history of the Pequod

war it is recorded that the Pequods had “two plantation s

three miles in sunder, and above 200 acres of corn, which the

English destroyed.” [Mourt’s Relations. Drake, p. 116.) At

Philip’s Fort, in Rhode Island, there were 500 bushels of

corn, stored in sections of hollow trees, each holding about

one barrel. These‘ gums” were so placed as to afford a for-

midable breastwork. (Dr. I. Mather. Drake, p. 218.)

In the war between the Narragansets and the combined

forces of the Mowhegans and Pequots, the latter “ committed

extensive robberies and destroyed twenty-three fields of

corn.” This occurred in 1637, so says Roger Williams.

(Drake, p. 123.)

In Wisconsin, the Winnebagoes, Menomonies and Pottawa-

tomies raised more corn than they required for their own use

Clark says: “ Gen Atkinson purchased, he thinks it was

6,000 bushels of corn of the Winnebagoes. In 1848, when my

brother and I traveled extensively through Wisconsin, we

drove in several instances over old Indian corn-fields, one of

which in Columbia county, extended over half a mile. An old

pioneer living near by told us the Winnebagoes had cultivaed

this large corn-field. The Mandans and Riccarees of the

west cultivate corn not only for their own use, but also

enough to make it a prominent article of trade.” (Antiqui-

ites of Wisconsin, page 90.)

Gen. Wayne in his official report of a battle with the In-

dians of Northwestern Ohio in 1783, says: “A vast destruc-

tion of Indian property took place during the expedition.

The very extensive and highly cultivated fields and gardens

show the work of many hands. The margins of the beauti-

ful rivers appeared like one continuous village for many

88 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

miles, nor have I ever before beheld such immense fields of

corn. All were laid waste for twenty miles on each side of

the rivers.” In Western New York there were large fields

of corn according to Champlain and Kirtland. In Hastern

New York, Hudson mentions there being in several places

extensive fields of corn. Marquis De Nouville in his cele-

brated expedition against the Seneca Indians says: “On

the 14th of July, 1685, we marched to one of the large vil-

lages of Senecas where we encamped. We remained at the

four Seneca villages for ten days. All the time we spent in

destroying the corn which, including the old corn that was

in cache, which we burned, was in such great abundance that

the loss was computed at 400,000 minots or 1,200,000 bushels

of Indian corn!” This was in Ontario county, New York.

(Aboriginal Monuments in the State of New York, pp. 63 and.

66.) Newport went up the Powhatan River to visit Pow-

hatan in 1607. Hestates that Powhatan had extensive fields

that came down to the river in which he cultivated corn,

beans, peas, pumpkins, tobacco and flax. (Churchill and ~

Holmes, Pickering p. 926.) De Soto speaks frequently of In-

dian villages that contained from 150 to 600 dwellings con-

structed of wood; sometimes walled in with stone and pro-

tected with tall palisades driven into the ground and sur-

rounded by extensive fields of maize, beans, peas, pump-

kins and other vegetables. In one instance he relates that

his army passed through continuous fields of maize for two

leagues—not a small field of corn even at the present time.

De Soto subsisted his army of one thousand men and

two hundred and thirteen horses on the Indians’ produce.

At one place he took corn enough to feed his entire army

for five days. He writes, “on Oct. 18 we came to Mobile, a

walled city. which we captured and where we rested forty

days. Found great stores of bear’s fat, oil of walnuts and

honey of bees stored in gourds. On March 3d, departed

north with maize enough for sixty leagues.”

De Soto’s army wandered among and lived on the Indian.

four and a half years. It certainly took no small amount of

corn and other provisions to subsist such an army for so.

long a period. The Seminoles, Cherokees, Chicasaws, Choc-

Who Built the Mounds? 89:

taws and Creeks were certainly a well-to-do people in an

agricultural sense, at that early day, 350 years since, before.

the introduction of whiskey, which has well-nigh paralyzed

their energies.

It is not uncommon for authors to assert confidently that

the mounds were erected by a different race of people from

the modern Indians, for the latter have no tradition of the

mounds, by whom and for what purpose they were built.

Let us consider the subject of Indian Tradition. Bartram,

the zoologist and botanist, traveled in Georgia, Terinessee,

Florida and South Carolina a little over one hundred years

ago. He says: “Atthe Cherokee town of Cowe, on the Ten-

nessee river, which contains one hundred houses, he noticed

that the council house, a large rotunda, capable of accom-

modating several hundred people, stood on the top of an

ancient artificial mound of earth, of about twenty feet in

perpendicular elevation. The Cherokees themselves could

give no account when or by whom the mound was built.”

At another important Cherokee town, Bartram saw a most

remarkable column. It stood adjacent to thetown, in the

center of an oblique square, and was about forty feet high,

and only from two to three feet thick at the base, and

tapered gradually toa point at the top. What is remarkable

about this ‘pillar is, that notwithstanding it is formed of a

single piece of pine timber, the Indians or white traders

could give no account for what purpose or at what time it

was erected. All the Indians that Bartram asked gave the

same answer, which was that the ancient Indians found it

there, and that their fathers knew nothing about it. This

fact, says Bartram, is not singular, when reference is had to

the mound of earth, but when the same answer is given

concerning a perishable material, there is at least some

slight ground for suspicion.

Another singular circumstance is that no pine trees grew

nearer than twelve miles from this point. (Drake’s In-

dians of North America, p. 63.)

None of the Indians at the present time have traditions

running back as far as Allouez and Marquette, or even to

the more recent time of John Carver. Is it not strange that

90 ° Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

they have no knowledge of these men ? The Winneba-

goes and Menomonees assert positively that they never made

flint arrowheads, stone axes or pottery,and that these things

must have been made by some one else. White Snake, a

chief of the Winnebagoes, said in all sincerity, they were

never made by the Indians. (Antiquities of Wisconsin, p.

90, Smithsonian Report of 1879, p. 430.)

In view of these facts what weight has the lack of tradi-

tion respecting the mounds? Just none at all.

Jefferson, speaking of the barrows or mounds of Virginia,

says: “ But on whatsoever occasion they may have been

made, they are of considerable notoriety among the Indians.

About thirty years ago a party of Indians passing through

that part of the country where a mound was situated, went

through the woods directly to it, without instruction or in-

quiry, and staid about it for some time with expressions

which were considered those of sorrow. They returned di-

rectly to the high road and pursued their journey after

spending one half of a day in visiting the mound.” \(Drake’s

Indians, p. 56.)

Dr. Samuel Drake studied many of the mounds of Ohio.

After describing stone axes, copper implements, flint arrow-

heads, teeth of carnivorous animals, mica and bone impie-

ments, shell beads, and various patterns of pottery, etc., he

remarks, “this pottery was made of the same materials em-

ployed by the Louisiana Indians within my own recollection.

namely, powdered muscle and other river shells, sand and

clay.”

Dr. Drake, in speaking of the rough stone walls found in

several localities in Ohio, said that they were similar to

those constructed by the Cherokee Indians of the south.

(Drake’s Indians, p. 57.)

Atwater, in 1819, surveyed and studied a large number of

the ancient works of Ohio. He says: “What the true

height of these ruined works was, cannot be very well ascer-

tained, as it is almost impossible to know the rate of their

diminution even were the space of time given. But there

can be no doubt that most of them are much diminished by

the action of the tempests which have swept over them for

Who Built the Mounds? 31

ages. That they were the work of a different race from

the present Indians, has been pretty confidently asserted ;

but, as yet, proof is entirely wanting to support such a con-

clusion. In afew instances Kuropean articles have been

found in and about some of these works. But few persons

of intelligence pronounced these works older than others of

the same kind found occupied by the Indians at the time of

the French wars.” (Drake, p. 60).

Bartram in his travels in Florida relates: “The Indians

collected the bones of the tribe and proceeded in a solemn

manner to excavate a hole in the ground in which they de-

posited the bones, and after covering them up they elevated

a circular mound of earth over the spot.” (Bartram’s Trav-

els, p. 514. New York Aboriginal Monuments, p. 68.)

When Gen. Oglethrop landed in Georgia, in 1732, he

communicated to the Indians the contents of the journal

of Sir Walter Raleigh. They pointed out to Oglethrop

a place near Yamacran bluff on which there was a

large mound in which was buried, they said, a chief who

had talked with Sir Walter Raleigh upon that spot. The

chief had requested his people to bury him there. (Commis-

sioners’ Report on Georgia Affairs, p. 119. Drake’s Indians,

p. 369.)

A mound opened by Jefferson on the Ravenna river was

attributed by him to recent Indians. (Jefferson’s Notes on

Virginia.)

A document accompanying the President's message of

1806 describes a mound of considerable size erected by the

Natchez Indians when they were expelled from Louisiana

(President Jefferson’s Documents). Forbes was of the opinion

that the mounds, thirty miles south of Natchez were erected

by the Cherokee Indians. He states that the trees growing

on the mounds were decidedly smaller than those growing

on the adjacent grounds.

La Salle and his companions visited, two hundred years

ago, the Natchez Indians. The town was surrounded by

strong earthworks defended by tall stakes. They kept a per-

petual fire burning on a mound which was forty-five feet

high.

92 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Bartram says in his Antiquities of Southern Indians that

in his day the Choctaws erected mounds over the bones of

the dead. The chief, Tomachechi, pointed out a large mound

in which were the bones of a chief who had entertained a

great white man with a red beard who came into the §Sa-

vanna river in ships.

Walker describes many of the Florida mounds in the

Smithsonian report of 1879. He excavated systematically a

mound at the mouth of the Kootre river. A skull taken

from the centre and base of the mound was broken in and

inside of the head he found a rusty tron spike about three

inches in length and a broken arrowhead. Excepting some

highly ornamental fragments of pottery, these were all the

relics he obtained in this mvund. Walker also epened a

mound on the south side of Alligator creek. This mound

was circular in shape, forty-six feet in diameter, and about

three feet in height.

He found many strings of colored glass beads, copper and

brass ornaments. Among other curious objects was a pair

of scissors and a fragment of a looking glass. By patience

and care he obtained many strings of beads in the order

they were worn by the owner. In two cases frag-

ments of strings were preserved, seemingly by the cop-

per. Many of the cut glass beads were very beauti-

ful. Walker remarks that this mound could not be older than

three hundred and forty years, probably much less. These

trinkets may have been derived from De Soto, for tradition

points out Phillips point, eight miles north of this mound as

the spot where the Spaniards landed. (Smithsonian report

1879, p. 410.)

Dr. 8. P. Hildreth opened a mound in Marietta, Ohio, and

the circumstances were detailed by the accurate pen of the

doctor. He relates: On removing the earth composing an

ancient mound in a street of Marietta, the articles found

were those belonging to the person over whom the mound

was originally made. The articles were silver plated buckles

and sword mountings; a streak of rust was all that re-

mained of the blade. The name of Dr: Hildreth is sufficient

guarantee that the statements are correct.

Who Built the Mounds? 93

This mound must have been erected within a little over

three hundred years at most. (Aboriginal Monuments of

New York p. 187.)

Several silver crosses, a number of small bags of ver-

milion and other articles of Kuropean origin were discov-

ered by C. A. Vaughn, of Cincinnati, in excavating several

mounds in the vicinity of Beardstown, Ill. These articles

were found within the skeleton at the base of the mounds.

(Ancient Monuments of Mass., p. 146.) A small mound was

opened near Chilicothe, Ohio, which was found to contain

the skeleton of a girl enveloped in bark. (Ancient Mounds

of Mississippi Valley, p. 171.) .

In the year 1827, while constructing the Ohio canal a

mound was removed under the supervision of William H.

Price, at that time a member of board of Public Works. At

the base of this mound with the skeleton, was a dial plate

and other articles of European origin. (Ancient Mounds of

Miss. Valley, p. 146.)

In Benton Township, Cuyahoga County, it became neces-

sary to remove a small mound while excavating the Ohio

canal. The remains of one or more human skeletons were

found, also a gun barrel and some mountings of the stock.

(Ancient Mounds of Miss. Valley, p. 146.)

In Green township, Chenango county, N. Y., there was a

mound four feet high situated near Chenango creek, which

was opened in 1829.

The mound had a pine stump standing on the top. Great

numbers of human bones were found. These skeletons were

lying without order, much decayed,and they crumbled on ex-

posure. There were two heaps of flint arrowheads, one of

which contained 200 of the usual pattern, color, black and yel-

low. At another point of the base of the mound, there were

more than half as many of asmaller size. In the same mound

a silver band or ring two inches in diameter, a number of

stone gouges or chisels of different shapes and a piece of

mica, heart-shaped and much decayed. (New York Aborig-

inal Monuments, p. 34.)

A remarkable work situated in Oneida county, N. Y., des-

cribed by M. B. Clark, was inclosed with two rows of cedar

94 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

palisades, they being twelve feet apart and inclosing ten

acres. When the ground was first plowed the burnt stumps

of these palisades were turned up. In this fort there were

six mounds, the largest of which was opened.

Near the base there was a layer of ashes beneath which

were human bones, many. trinkets made of red pipe stone (cat-

linite) and a great store of old iron articles consisting of

axes, files, knives.etc. (N. Y. Aboriginal Monuments, p. 171.)

Lewis and Clark speaks of a mound in which‘a great chief

of the Omahas had been interred. He was buried upon a

hill and a mound six feet in height and twelve feet in diam-

eter was erected over him. (Lewis and Clark Travels West

of the Mississippi, New York Monuments, p. 107.)

Beck mentions a large mound on the Osage river which

had been erected within the last thirty years by the Osages

in honor of a dead chief. (Missouri Gazette, p. 308.)

James, in 1816, upon what he deemed good authority, gives

an account of the discovery of a new-made mound which,

when opened, disclosed the body of a white officer placed in

a sitting position on a mat. (James’ Expedition, Vol. 2,

p. 38.)

Lapham discovered a mound situated in the town of Oak

Creek, Milwaukee County, Wis.

This isolated mound was six feet in height. The sides

were much steeper than any he had seen, which indicated

that the mound was comparatively recent. Time sufficient

to level down or spread out the mound had not elapsed.

(Antiquities of Wisconsin, p. 10.) |

The mounds near Lake Koshkonong, Jefferson county,

Wisconsin, are of a recent construction, as proved by the

bones being well preserved and containing considerable ani-

mal matter. The numerous bone implements and shell beads,

wampun arealike well preserved.

I havestudied carefully the large group of mounds situ-

ated near Racine, and have excavated fifty of the original

one hundred and thirty-eight, which Dr. Lapham and I sur-

veyed in 1850. These Racine mounds being of the oldest

type, the bones are entirely destitute of animal matter. I

asserted that the specimens exhibited at a meeting of the

Who Built the Mounds? 95

Wisconsin Academy of Science, Arts and Letters from

Koshkonong were of secondary interment, notwithstanding

I was assured they were taken below the center of the.

mounds, under a stratum of cement, composed of burnt-

fresh water sheils. In order to prove or disprove Mr. Clark’s

investigation, a party of scientific men went from Milwau-

kee and opened one of these Koshkonong mounds. They ran

a wide excavation through the center of the mound, starting

two feet below the surface of the ground. They were re-

warded and fully confirmed Clark’s statement, and proved

that these mounds are of no great age.

Dr. Sternberger, of the U.S. Army, critically examined

certain mounds near Pensacola, Florida. These mounds

proved to have been constructed by Indians, as blue glass

beads were found in several of them.

Catlin observed a conical mound ten feet in height, erected.

over the body of a young chief of the Sioux tribe who had

been accidentally killed on that spot. (N. A. Indians, vol. 2,

p. 107.) James Mathew, a brother of Rev. Father Mathew, of

Racine, settled on Zumbro River, in Olmstead county, Minne-

sota, in 1860. When he first, plowed the land there was a

mound six feet high and twenty feet in breadth, and so sit-

uated that it was in the way of properly cultivating the

land, so he made the attempt to plow it down. He sank the

plow to the beam repeatedly, but succeeded in reducing

the height about two feet. The next year he procured a

scraper, and went to work systematically to remove the en-

tire mound. After scraping down the eminence to within

about two feet of the base he came to some rotten wood.

On carefully removing the top he discovered a kind of cage

built of large stakes driven into the ground, as close together

as possible, and covered with a split log, finished by plaster-

ing the outside thickly with clay, thus forming a rude lodge

which was about three feet long and a little less in breadth.

In this pen he found one skeleton of an adult in a good

state of preservation and with the bones were found two

iron hatchets, a dozen flint arrow heads, a copper ring two

inches in diameter, a lot of shell beads and a red stone pipe

of rather large size and ingeniously ornamented with lead.

‘96 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Father Mathew visited his brother a few days after this find.

On his return he brought the entire lot of implements with

him.

George A West, an intelligent and thoroughly reliable

gentleman, wrote me an accurate description of a mound

opened, and of the interesting relics obtained. His letter is

as follows:

RACINE, WISCONSIN, Jan. 15, 1881.

Dr. Hoy, Sr.: :

Dear Sir — Knowing that for years, the works of the mount-buillers

have been closely studied by you, a'low me the pleasure of describing to

- you a few particulars in regard to a mound opened by me inthe year 1870.

When an uncle of mine by the name of Davis, was trapping on Root river,

in the town of Raymond, Racine Co., he discovered two small mounds on

the northwest quarter of section 15. The mounds were situated on the

east bank of the river, above highwater mark, yes very near to the stream,

on asand bank. One was partly eaten away by the stream, and the other,

situateda few rods away, was covered with hazel b ush, with a few large

trees standing near by. The mounds were each about ten feet across and

two and a half feet. above the level of the surrounding ground.

We concluded to open the remaining mound; so after removing the hazel

brush and digging about three feet through sand and roots, we came to a

bed of hard blue clay, which we threw out in chunks; beneath the clay we

came to asort of a cavity containing fragments of bone ani dark streaks

of earth, which marked the location of what was at one time a human

form.

From the appearance of what remained we concluded that the person

must have been buried ina silting posture; for we found a tooth or two

where apparently the pelvis was located, which must have dropped from

the jaw above. By exercising care we might have preserved a complete

cast of the interred, in the hard clay surrounding him.

Near the center of the mound we found a copper kettle, with a hole in

its bottom; within the kettle there was a quantity of dark earth, which

was composed mostly of vegetabl2 matter; being such a shapeless mass

we were unable to determine just what it might ave been. The kettle

was about six inches across, with straight s des; it had ears and no bale,

and in one plac? oaits side where th-re had beena hole, there was a rivet

insert-d, madeof copper. The kettle was badly rust-eaten, and when new

must have been very thin; Mr. Davis either disposed of it or

took it away with him, and where it is remains amystery. Wealso found

a copper spear head and two irrazular p’eces of copper. The spear head

was about three inches long, with a rivet hole ia the shank. The pieces

ef copper show marks of pounding; they contain particles of silver and

quartz, which show that they were never smelted. Iam in possession of

Who Built the Mounds? 94

them. We, before restoring the mound, dug a foot or two in each direc-

tion, but found nothing more.

Very truly yours, GEO. H. WEsT.

About fifteen years ago. John Elkins, a jeweler of Racine,

told me that he had bought a lot of silver trinkets, ear-rings,

belt-slides, and a fine double cross. These, he said, were

found in a mound situated in a street in Burlington. Sup-

posing these things to have been a secondary deposit, I made

no especial inquiry at the time. However, when I received

the report from Mr. West of the Raymond mounds, I deter-

mined to investigate the Burlington mounds. With this

object in view I attended a meeting of the old settlers asso-

ciation, held in a grove near the village of Burlington, Racine

Co., Wis. I called upon F. 8. Perkins, who accompanied me

to the grove to assist in finding the old Burlington pioneers.

We found many who knew that a mound had been removed

and that there were lots of silver trinkets and some brass

kettles found, but they could give me no further informa-

tion. They all, however, told me to write to Nathaniel Dick-

inson, of Elkhorn, Wis.,and that I would get a prompt reply,

and he would give me all the facts as accurately as if the

event was of last week, being a man of extraordinary mem-

ory. I wrote to him, and on the third day received a reply

as follows :

ELKHORN, WISCONSIN, June 26, 1881.

Dr. P. R. Hoy:

Dear Sir —There were originally three mounds situated near the junc-

tion of the White and Fox rivers. In seasons of freshets the locality of

tnese mounds was covered with water. They occupied an irregular tri-

angle, four to six rods apart.

The mounds in shape were each a section of a sphere. The two smaller

ones were three feet in height and fifteen feet in diameter at the base.

The remaining one was much larger, being six feet in elevation by twenty

in diameter. They were composed of ths surface sandy loam and ap-

parently built without extended intermissiou of time.

fn the fall of 1852, I was road commissioner and built a wooden bridge

over White river, near where it joins the Fox. This bridge has since given

p'ace to one of iron. Requiring some earth for filling the approach I re-

moved one of the sma|l mounds that stood on the street.

When we came to the original surface, we found the shape of four per:

sons, two adults and two children. Each was covered with a thick

‘

98 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

stratum of compact clay thus forming a rude kind of sarcophagus. On

breaking open these clay cases we found human bones partly decayed and

three copper kettles, one of which had some nuts in it, perhaps Pecans;

another had what are supposed to be the bones of a rabbit; also, there

were many silver ear-rings breast pins and one beautiful double armed,

ringed, silver cross, with R. C. in roman capitals engraved in the centre of

the upper arm vf the cross, also a large quantity of blue glass beads. The

remaining small mound we opened out of curiosity. We sank a wide

shaft over the centre; when we came to the original surface of the soil

and found one clay covered skeleton in a fine state of preservation. There

was one copp'r kettle of rather large size and a small fur-covered, brass-

nailed trunk, ten by twelve inches, and eight inches in height. In this

trunk we discovered a lot of cheap silver trinkets. In the kettle there

was some brown substance which we could not determine and over this

brown substance were two or three folds of a woolen blanket.

I might have said, in its proper place that the clay was obtained on the

opposite shore of White river, the only locality where this kind of clay

could be procured in this vicinity.

A Mr. Stowell built a house over the large mound and when they dug

the cellar they removed a part of this mound but nothing was found; still

it may be that the centre of the mound was not disturbed. Kettles, silver

and cran‘a were scattered, some by gift, others loaned without exacting a

return, so that at this time I cannot direct you where you can obtain any

of the relics.

Should you require further information in addition to the above com-

monplace recital you can make any inquiry that you may wish and I will

answer. Yours truly,

NATHANIEL DICKINSON.

In answer to further inquiry, I received the following:

The clay-covered skeletons were central, and on a level with the original

undisturbed soil, the second mound opened we did not sink below the

base of the mound, as it would be of no use, as we fully proved in the case

of the one removed, that the soil below was not disturbed, and in the

second opened, the water from White river was within two feet of its

base, as this mound was at a lower level than the other two mounds,

These two Dickinson mounds, the West mound, on Ray-

mond, and the Mathew mound, in Minnesota, were certainly

not older than 300 years, and in all probability not over

seventy-five years, judging from the fur-covered trunk and

wooden cage.

Mounds are usually found in groups of from three to

thirty. In these groups one is almost always much larger

Who Built the Mounds? 99

than those placed irregularly about the patriarch of this

mound family. In the large mounds it is not uncommon to

find secondary burials, which are mostly near the surface.

On the other hand, the small mounds are never interfered

with, so far as I canascertain from personal inspection and

extensive it quiry. Mounds are not usually opened with

sufficient care. In most cases, when the report is that there

was a confused heap of bones, critical investigation would

prove that the skeletons were originally placed in a sitting

position, and that the apparent confusion is caused by the

skeletons falling over at various angles, the legs alone re-

taining their original position. -

The Wisconsin mounds are allsepulchral, with the excep-

tion of the so-called animal mounds.

Squier, after a thorough investigation of the earthworks,

mounds and fortifications of New York says:

“Tn full view of the facts before presented I am driven to

the conclusion little anticipated when I started on my trip

of exploration, that these earthworks were erected by Iro-

quois and Senecas or their western neighbors; that the

tribes that inhabited New York were to a degree fixed and

agricultural in habit.” (Aboriginal Monuments of New

York, p. 83.)

Further on he says the light thrown upon the Ohio works

by those situated in western New York has led to an entire

modification of his former views regarding the Ohio works,

and to the conviction that they are all of a comparatively

late date and probably of common origin.

The flint arrow and spear points, the stone axes, pipes and

ornaments, as well as various forms of pottery, are identical

in shape, material and workmanship with those known to

be used and manufactured by the Indians, when the Euro-

peans first came among them. No one can tell by inspect-

ing these articles whether they were taken from a mound or

picked up on the site of a known Indian village. Shell beads

found so commoniy in mounds and Indian graves were

their money —wampum—just such as the Indians living

‘along the New England coast used to make continually.

They gathered great quantities of small univalve sea shells

100 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

in summer that they could continue the money making dur-

ing the winter. They managed to bore a hole in these shells

with a flint, before the whites furnished them with awls

and drills. (Drake’s Indians, page 229; Pickering’s Chrono-

logical History, page 955.)

The various species of large univalve shells, é conehee so

often found in mounds and Indian graves, are yet preserved

in the Omaha wigwams as sacred. The sound heard when

one of these shells is placed to the ear is supposed to be the

voice of departed spirits. (Paper read by Miss Fletcher at

Montreal meeting of A. A. A. 8.)

Then the mode of burial is still the same, mostly in a sit-

ting posture, surrounded by their worldly wealth and sup-

plied with a sufficiency of food to feed the hungry soul

while on the long road to the happy hunting ground. I

should like to see that anatomist who can distinguish the

crania taken from mounds from those procured from Indian

graves. The skulls from mounds differ just as much and

just as little as do those of the present tribes of Indians. I

obtained a skull of a Pottawatomie chief (it is now in the U.

S. A. medical museum at Washington), which is one of the

largest known. It is very symmetrical also, the capacity

being 1785 cubic centimeters; maximum length, 188.9; max-

imum breadth, 163.5. circumference, 555.6; facial angle, 75;

measured and photographed by order of the surgeon general.

I had a second Pottawatomie cranium that is as unlike the

above as possible, the capacity being 40 cubic inches less,

facial angle 70. In view of the foregoing evidence, the legit-

imate conclusion must follow that the “mound builders”

were Indians and nothing but Indians, the immediate ances-

tors of the present tribes as well as many other Indians

that formerly were scattered over this country. Differ-

ing in habits of life and language just as the Indians

of the several tribes did before the white man changed

them, they continued to build mounds after they had com-

munication with Kuropeans, since which time mound build-

ing, together with many of the arts of the red man, such as

making wampum, flint, stone and copper implements, pot-

tery, etc., have declined and finally nearly or quite ceased.

Who Made the Ancient Copper Implements ? 101

WHO MADE THE ANCIENT COPPER IMPLEMENTS.

By Dr. P. R. Hoy, Racine.

Elsewhere I have considered how the ancient copper im-

plements were fabricated. This paper wiil be devoted to the

answer of the question who made the ancient copper imple-

ments, that the plow and spade reveal so abundantly over

Wisconsin and sparingly over most of the other states and

Canada.

The early explorers upon the St. Lawrence in Canada, on

the coast of New England, New York, Virginia, the Caro-

linas and Florida (among whom we will mention Cartier,

Alfonse, Varanzano, Raleigh, Heriot, Ribauld, Newport, A1-

louez, Champlain and De Soto), all concur in saying that the

Indians had implements and ornaments made of copper.

Alexander Henry, who penetrated to Lake Superior at the

time of the French war, assures us that the Indians obtained

copper here which they made into bracelets, beads, spoons

and other articles. (Henry’s Travels p. 195.)

Dr. Jackson, of Boston, who spent several years on Lake

Superior during the early period of the copper excitement,

told me (in the summer of 1844, which I spent in the copper

region) that “it was undoubtedly the Chippewas that

mined, and probably the French half-breeds assisted in

these old mines. The fresh condition of the wood work,

skids and ladders, and the evidence that sharp axes were

used in fitting the timbers is evidence that they are not of

great antiquity.” Dr. Jackson has published since similar

views regarding these old mines.

Charles Whittiesey, U.S. Geologist, in the course of the

geological survey of the Lake Superior district, writes: “In

the old works on the Minnesota location near the forks of

the Ontonogan river there was found at the depth of eighteen

feet, amass of copper weighing eleven thousand five hundred

and eighty-eight pounds, which had been taken out of the

vein by the ancients. It had been raised a few feet along the

slope of the vein by means of wedges and cob-work made of

102 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

logs laid up in the form of the body of a small log house. I

had a piece of one of these logs which was cut from a black

oak tree about six inches in diameter, showing distinctly the

marks of a narrow axe, one and three-quarter inches wide,

and very sharp. The marks of the instrument by which it

was cut off were as plain and as perfect as they were on the

log and stump recently cut in the vicinity.

Directly over the mass and over the timber which sup-

ported it, there stood on the rubbish which covered the mass

about twelve feet in depth, a hemlock tree that had two

hundred and eighty rings. There was a part of a wooden

bowl and a wooden paddle taken from this old mine.

There were a number of wooden paddles found by Doctor

Blake, in an old mine, at the Copper Falls mine, all of which

were made of white cedar, which is abundant on Lake S8u-

perior. Most of these paddles were six feet in length, and

resembled those used by the Chippewas in size, shape and

material. The handles of these paddles used in the old

mines were shaved with a knife or some other sharp cutting

tool. In these old mines (Copper Falls), there was a skid

with marks showing that it was cut with a sharp ax. There

was also a bark spout for conveyiug the water from the lo-

cality. There was a birch tree growing over this debris

which was two feet in diameter. The only implements

found there which are made of copper, found in the rubbish

of the old works, at a depth of from five to fifteen feet below

the present surface, were one chisel, five inches long and

an inch wide, a gad or wedge and one spear head of the or-

dinary pattern, four and one-half inches in length, with a

socket for a handle.” (Annals of Science, edited by Hamil-

ton L. Smith, pages 28-30.)

It was reported by Singaba W’orsa (the head Chippewa

chief), that when the Chippewas assembled at their coun-

cils from many points of the Lake Superior region, they

had abundance of copper which led the council to the con-

clusion that copper abounded in many locations. In 1826,

this intelligent chief piloted the U. 8. Indian Commissioner,

Gen. McKenny and party, to a celebrated mass of copper

which had been long known by the Chippewas.

Who Made the Ancient Copper Implements? 103

The commissioners went prepared to remove the mass, with

a view of sending it to Washington. “We found it thirty-

five miles above the mouth of the Ontanogan river, Lake

Superior, on the west bank of the river, a tew paces above

low water mark. It consisted of pure copper, ramified in

every direction through by a mass of stone (mostly serpen-

tine, with calcareous spar),in veins of from one to three

inches in diameter, and in some parts exhibiting masses of

pure copper of over one hundred pounds. The entire weight

of the mass was estimated at from three to five thousand

pounds. It was found impossible, owing to the channel of the

river being intercepted by ridges of sandstone, forming three

cataracts with a descent in all of about seventy feet, to remove

this great national curiosity. Hvidence was discovered in

prying the rock of copper from its position, confirming the

history of the past, which recorded the efforts of other

parties to extract wealth from this mass. These evidences

consisted in chisels, axes and various implements, which are

used in mining. This copper mass must have been much

larger in dimensions, as no doubt those formerly working it

removed much of the copper.” (History of Indian Tribes of

North America, by Gen. McKinney, Vol. I, p. 159.) This

minute account is proof positive that long before 1826 per-

sons operated on this mass of copper with sharp tools.

An extensive find of copper implements near the Sault

Ste. Marie has recently been made. It contained twenty-three

pieces, consisting of six awls, the largest six inches in length,

the smallest three inches, five knives of various sizes and

thirteen pieces composed of axes, hammers and chisels.

They were found lying piled compactly together, sur-

mounted by a little pile of stones. (American Antiquarian

‘Wold; No: 1, p..89.)

The French penetrated to the Lake Superior region about

three hunired and fifty years since —a time quite sufficient

to account for all the old mining operations yet discovered.

Newport was told by Powhatan with whom he banqueted

April, 1607, that the copper they had “was got in the bites

of rocks between cliffs in certain veins a great distance

north.” (Dr. Pickering’s Chronological History, p. 926.)

104 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Granville speaks of copper among the Indians of Vir-

ginia which was said to have been obtained of the Shaw-

nees. It was of the color of our copper, but much softer.

(Granville’s voyages in 1685. Vol. 12, p. 580.)

William N. Rogers, for several] years connected with the

Indian agency at Keshena, Wisconsin, told me that he fre-

quently saw copper implements in the hands of the Chippe-

ways and Winnebagoes. Many of their pipes were orna-

mented with copper.

One celebrated calumet which formerly belonged to Black

Hawk, now owned by a Winnebago chief, has a broad rim

of copper with great blotches of native silver.

The following is a copy of a letter of the Hon. Saterlee

Clark, former Indian agent for the Winnebagoes from 1828

to 1830:

HoRIcON, WIS., May 9th, 1881.

IDR, IE, 1k IBlones

My Dear Sir —In answer to your communication, Feb., 27th, * * *

When I first came among the Winnebagoes many of them had copper-

headed weapons.

Many of them carried lances headed with copper, aud it was quite com-

mon to see arrows headed with copper. Masses of virgin copper both large

and small were often found scattered about, but particularly in the sand

on the beach of the Wisconsin. This was so pure and soft that it was no

trouble to shape it to suit them.

I have never seen any native copper vessels among them of any descrip-

tion, of their own manufacture, Very respectfully,

[S gued. | SAT. CLARK.

The original is in my possession.

I have a perfect copper implement eight inches in length,

tapering to a fine point at one end and to a blunt point at

the other, form square, each side at the center three-

eighths of an inch wide. It was ploughed up with a few

Indian bones by William Hass in the town of Caledonia.

This grave was situated on a high bank overlooking the

Root river. I inspected the grave.

John Trasen, living near the river, told me that there

were Indian bones sticking out of the river bank. On visit-

ing the spot we found three graves partially uncovered by

the washing away of the bank. Two of the skeletons were

Who Made the Ancient Copper Implements? 105

of adults and the third proved to be that of a child. The

adult graves were situated ten feet apart and sixteen inches

below the surface from above.

On carefully digging we found in each several copper im-

plements, nearly all of which were badlv oxidized, while some

articles had nearly disappeared. There was a succession of

small rounded articles which we took to be copper beads.

There were several small cylindrical articles of copper which

were three to four inches in length.

In each of these three graves were remnants of pottery.

In one of these pots there was a yellow paint that I could

not determine. In the second adult grave was a red paint

that proved to be vermilion. In connection with the child’s

grave I found two blue cut glass beads. The balance no.

doubt were appropriated by the river. In each adult grave

there were the leg bones of a deer. The dead were supplied

with venison while they lingered on the road to the blessed

hunting grounds. A copper lance head was found by George

West in Raymond, the description of whichis givenin West’s.

letter in “ On the Mounds.” ’

There were also two pieces of copper, one of which had

never been float-copper, but had been mined, as all the deep

angles and ridges were sharp and not in the least rounded.

The other specimen had been pounded out and a portion

cut off had spec's of silver associated with the copper.

Prof. Butler exhibited to me a spear head which had been

plowed up by Sanford Marsh, in Waukeshacounty. The hole

was filled with what appeared to be iron rust; on scraping

he found a small fragment of the rivet. On applying the

magnet it proved to be iron.

There can be no doubt that this spear head was manu-

factured after the Indians traded with the whites. (Since

this was written Prof. Butler has published a description of

this article in the American Antiquarian.)

F.S. Perkins, of Burlington, has collected nearly 400 cop-

per implements, not counting beads, and not one single speci-

men was taken from a mound. Nearly all were plowed up

or picked up from the surface. Mr. Perkins sold his origi-

nal collection, consisting of 143 copper implements, to the

106 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Wisconsin Historical Society, and has since devoted much

energy to the collecting of a second cabinet of copper. He

has now about two hundred specimens, many of which are

unsurpassed. There are eight axesranging from two to five

pounds in weight. The largest implement weighs ten

pounds two ounces. Among this magnificent collection he

has ninety spear heads alone.

Near Racine there has been at least one hundred mounds

either opened or entirely removed concerning fifty of which

I have personal knowledge, and not one single specimen of

copper has been discovered in these mounds and as this

group is of the oldest type, and as they are situated in the re-

gionof abundance of copper, the fact leads to the inference

that they were built before copper became of common use

among the Indians. This is the more likely as the later

mounds have not infrequently articles manufactured from

nativecopper. The conclusion follows that the Indians liv-

ing at no great distance from the copper regions of Lake

Superior did mine copper and make various ornaments and

implements, not only for their own use, but extensively for the

purpose of barter with distant tribes and nations of Indians.

PRELIMINARY LIST OF WISCONSIN PARASITIC

FUNGI.

By WILLIAM TRELEASE, 8. D., Professor of Botany, University of Wisconsin.

The following provisional list of the parasitic fungi of the

state includes only species which have been examined by

myself. With one or two exceptions, specimens of all have

been preserved in myherbarium.' Most of the species were

collected about Madison, by myself; although I have received

much valuable assistance from Mr. L. H. Pammel, a special

student in my laboratory, and a most excellent collector,

1PDr. Bundy informs me that none of the fungi enumerated in his list

in the first volume of the Report on the Geological Survey were saved, so

that I have been unable to refer to them.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi.

who has also contributed many interesting forms from

LaCrosse and elsewhere. <A few species have been

received from correspondents, whose contributions are

acknowledged in each instance.

Professor W. G. Farlow, of Harvard University, has aided

me very materially in the determination of doubtful species.

My thanks arealso due Dr. M. C. Cooke, Prof. C. H. Peck and

Mr. J. B. Ellis for similar assistance.

Where names different from those in common use have

been employed, in deference to Kuropean authority, the

synonym most frequently used is added in parenthesis.

As the list now stands it includes about 270 species on ap-

proximately the same number of hosts, most of which are

phaenogamic plants. Thisnumber will probably be nearly

doubled by a few years’ .collecting, especially through the

addition of imperfect forms belonging to Cercospora,

Septoria, and related form-genera. To this end, I shall be

grateful for specimens from any part of the state, and will

gladly render any assistance in my power in their identi-

fication.

CHYTRIDINEAE.

1. SYNCHYTRIUM FULGENS Schroeter, var. DECIPIENS Farlow.

Very common, on Amphicarpaea monoica Nutt. Madison, Ithaca;

La Crosse, Pammel,

2, SYNCHYTRIUM ANEMONES (D C.).

Common, on Anemone nemorosa L. Madison.

SAPROLEGNIEAH.

3. SAPROLEGNIA FERAX (Gruithus), form THURETIT De Bary. (S. dioica

Auct.).

On dead flies throwa in water. Madison.

This species has not been found occurring parasiiically with us, but it is

frequently known to attack living aquatic animals, especially fish, and is

the chief cause of the destructive salmon disease of England. It was ob-

tained on some cultures started with cistern water in the spring of 1882,

and again, in the fall of 1883, in water taken from a ditch. Antheridia

have not been observed. A small percentage of the oogonia show a

pseudo-pollinodium projecting into the base of the cell from below.

108 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

PERONOSPOREAE.

4, CYSTOPUS CANDIDUS (P.).

Common, through the open season, on various crucifers,—Capella

bursa pastoris Moench, Sisymbrium officinale Scop., etc. Madison,

Syene; Kirkland, La Crosse, Pammel.

5. CYSTOPUS CUBICUS (Strauss).

On Ambrosia artemisiaefolia L., Cnicus lanceolatus Hoffm. and Arte-

misia biennis Willd. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

6. CYSTOPUS BLITI Biv. (C. amaranthi, S.). :

On Amarantus retrofleaus L. Syene, Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

7, CYSTOPUS PORTULACAE (D C.).

On Portulaca oleracea L. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel; Sauk City,

Liiders.

8. PHYTOPHTHORA INFESTANS (Mont.) (Peronospora infestans, Mont.).

Common, in wet summers, on Solanum tuberosum L. Madison; and

received from many parts of the state.

In some years the loss from the potato rot is estimated at many thous-

ands of dollars in Wisconsin.

9, PERONOSPORA VITICOLA (B. & C.).

On various cultivated and wild grapes, and on Ampelopsis quinque-

folia Michx. Madison, Syene, Ithaca; La Crosse, Devil’s Lake,

Pammel; also reported from every part of the state.

This certainly causes very much of the dry rot of grapes, as pointed out

by Prillieux (Comptes Rendus, Oct. 2, 1882), who has more recently suc-

ceeded in observing the germination of tke oospores by the direct emission

of a mycelial thread, without the intervention of z»ospores. I have col-

lected it once producing conidiophores on the fruit.

10, PERONOSPORA HALSTEDII Farlow.

On Bidens frondosa L., Ambrosia artemisiaefolia L., A. trifida L.,

EHupatorium ageratoides L., Rudbeckia laciniata L., Silphiwm

terebinthinaceum L., S. integrifolium Mx., S. trifoliatuwm I., S.

perfoliatum L., Helianthus strumosus L., H. occidentalis Ridd.,

H. tuberosus L. and Solidago riddellii Frank. Madison; La Crosse,

Pammel.

11. PERONOSPORA OBDUCENS Schr.

On cotyledons and young leaves of Impatiens fulva Nutt. Madison;

La Crosse, Pammel. Also found on Impatiens pallida Nutt., at Ho-

kah, Minn., by Mr. Pammel.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 109

12. PERONOSPORA GERANII Peck.

On Geranium maculatum L. Madison, Stoughton; Kirkland, Pam-

mel.

13. PERONOSPORA ENTOSPORA (Roze & Cornu) (P. simplex Peck).

On Aster novae angliae L. and several unidentified species of Soli-

dago. Syene; Stoughton; La Crosse, Pammel.

14, PERONOSPORA PYGMAEA Unger.

On leaves of Anemone nemorosa L., in May. Madison.

15, PERONOSPORA GANGLIFORMIS (Berk.).

On Lactuca sativa L. and L. canadensis L. Madison and Syene;

La Crosse, Pammel.

16. PERONOSPORA PARASITICA (Pers.).

Common, on Capsella bursa pastoris Moench, Lepidium virginicum

L., Nasturtium armoracia Fr. and Brassica sp. Madison, Syene;

Baraboo, La Crosse, Pammel.

17. PERONOSPORA POTENTILLAE De Bary.

On Potentilla norvegica L. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

18. PERONOSPORA ARTHURI Farlow.

On Oenothera biennis L. Stoughton; La Crosse, Pammel.

19. PERONOSPORA VICIAE (Berk.).

On Vicia faba L. and V. americana Muhl. La Crosse, Baraboo,

Pammel.

20. PERONOSPORA EFFUSA (Grev.).

Common on Chenopodium album L.,in summer. Madison; La Crosse,

Baraboo, Pammel,

21. PERONOSPORA ALTA Fckl.

On Plantago major L. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel. \

22. PERONOSPORA CALOTHECA DeBary.

On Galium boreale L. and G. trifloruwum Michx. La Crosse, Pammel.

23, PERONOSPORA URTICAE (Lib.).

On Urtica gracilis Ait. Kirkland, La Crosse, Pammel.

24. PERONOSPORA CORYDALIS DeBary.

On leaves of Dicentra cucullaria DC. Madison.

Locally abundant, covering the entire lower surface of the leaf with a

matted, gray felt.

24a. PERONOSPORA LEPTOSPERMA DeBary.

On Artemisia sp. La Crosse, Pammel

110 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

25, PERONOSPORA AUSTRALIS Spegaz. (P. sicyicola Trelease, Botrytis

cubensis B.’& C. ?).

Very abundant in summer and fall, on Sicyos angulatus L. Madi-

son, Stoughton.

This species was first found in the summer of 1882. Its presence is indi-

cated by pale spots on the upper surface of the leaf, opposite which the

fruiting hyphae emerge in dense white tufts 1-3 mm. in diameter, with an-

gular contour, limited by the veinlets of the leaf. Later these spots be-

come dead and white, resembling those caused by Ramularia, Septoria, ete.

Berkeley and Curtis describe a Peronospora cubensis on a West Indian

cucurbitaceous plant (Journ. Linn. Soc., Bot., X., 363), but their description,

like many of Berkeley’s, is unsatisfactory and does not well apply to our

plant. Through the courtesy of Dr. Farlow, I have made a thorough ex-

amination of the leaf said to bear Botrytis cubensis, in the Curtis herbar-

ium, but whatever it may have once contained has entirely disappeared;

and a careful search on the Wright duplicates at Cambridge, which Dr.

Farlow was kind enough to make, does not show any Peronospora. The

species was, therefore, named P. sicyicola in my herbarium and in this pa-

per as first presented, and a description was given by Dr. Farlow, in the

Botanical Gazette for 1883, p. 331. Since that was published the descrip-

tion of a South American species on Cyclanthera, discovered by Spegaz-

zini, has reached this country. So far as can be made out, this is identi-

cal with the Wisconsin form, and the name of Spegazzini has the right of

priority, dating from 1881. His description is as follows: “Hypophylla;

maculae amphigenae, magnitudine ludentes, primo, parvulae, dein saepe

totum folium occupantes, pallescentes v. fusco-pellucidescentes, angulosae;

hyphae mycelii crassae, subtorulosae: haustoria subsphaeroidea v. subcla-~

vata, numerosa, saepe totam cellulam plantae hospitalis implectantia; hy-

phae fertiles hinc inde erumpentes v. e stomatibus exsurgentes, rectae-cy lin-

draceae, longiusculae (250—500 14—15 ), hincinde glomerulJatae, usquead

verticem continuae, inferne saepe incrassatulae, sed mox breviter ac abrupte

coarctato-attenuate, apice subverticillatim 5—12 ramosae; rami 38—6-

ies trichotomi, gradatim alternati, a> abbreviati; ramuli ultimi apice in-

crassatuli, 3—5 sterigmata (8.5 1.5—2 /«) hyalina, subampulliformia, inter

se angulo-recto divergentia, saepe 2-3 denticulato-lobata gerentia; conidia

obovato-sphaeroidea, sursum obtuse rotundata, saepeque apiculata (15 x 10—

12), hyalina.”—Ann. dela Sociedad Cientif. Argentina, 1881, XII. p. 81.

In our form the conidial branches are hyaline, tufted from the stomata,

often .6 mm. high, with a diameter of 12 4. 3-4 times branched below. Pri-

mary branches alternate, ascending. Ultimate and often penultimate twigs

spreading, the lateral ones in pairs, forming crosses with the branch which

bears them. Conidia hyaline, sub:pherical or broadly ellipsoidal, variable

in size, averaging 13X16 4“; with an apical papilla, hence probably ger-

minating by zoospores. Oospores not seen.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 111

26. PERONOSPORA LOPHANTHI Farlow.

On Lophanthus scrophulariaefolius Benth. La Crosse, Pammel.

27. PERONOSPORA SCHLEIDENIANA DeBary.

On leaves of Alliwm cepa L.

Cal'ed ‘‘onion-rust,” and very destructive.

28. PERONOSPORA GRAMINICOLA (Sace.) (Protomyces graminicola Sacc.,

Peronospora setariae Pass.).

On leaves of Setaria viridis Beauv. and S. italica Kunth. La Crosse,

and Hokah, Minn., Pammel.

The oospores give some leaves a decided brown color. Conidial branches

sparingly produced.

ASCOMYCETES.

GYMNOASCI.

29. EXOASCUS PRUNI Fckl.

On the fruit of Prunus, causing “ plum pockets” or “ bladder plums.”

Stoughton; Ahnap<e, Swaty; Ithaca, Hatch.

30, ASCOMYCES COERULESCENS Mont.

On leaves of Quercus coccinea Wang. and Q. rubra L. Stoughton;

Kirkland, La Crosse, Pammel.

PERISPORIACEAE.

31. UNCINULA ADUNCA (Wall.) (U. heliciformis Howe).

Common, in fall, on species of Salix, and on Populus balsamifera

L., var. candicans Gray.

32. UNCINULA SUBFUSCA B. & C. (U. ampelopsidis Peck).

On Ampelopsis quinquefolia Mich. Madison; LaCrosse, Pammel.

This is given the name of Berkeley and Curtis on the authority of Cooke

—Journ. Roy. Hort. Soc., 1878, p. 72.

33. UNCINULA AMERICANA Howe (U. spiralis B. & C.).

On leaves of cultivated grape, in the fall. Syene.

34, UNCINULA CIRCINATA C. & P.

On leaves of Acer rubrum L. Ithaca.

35. MICROSPHAERA EUPHORBIAE B. & C.

On Euphorbia corollata L. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

36. MICROSPHAERA FRIESII Lév,

On Syringa vulgaris L., very common, disfiguring the lilacs in sum-

mer and fall. Madison.

112 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

37. MICROSPHAERA DIFFUSA C. & P.

On Desmodium canescens D C, Lathyrus ochroleucus Hook. and

Lespedeza violacea Pers. Madison; Delton, Devil’s Lake. La-

Crosse, Pammel.

The form on Lathyrus has the 8-12 hyaline appendagas 4-5 times forked,

the ultimate divisions unequal, some of them stra‘ght, others recurved,

‘closely resembling those of M. ravenelit B., which occurs on Gileditschia.

They are also absolutely indistinguishable from those of M. pulchra C. &

P., in my collection. Mr. Ellis writes, however, that this form does not

differ more from Peck’s specimens of M. diffusa than the latter do from

those of Ravenel distributed by Cooke in Ravenel’s Fung. Amer.; in the

latter of which they are merely dichotomous and spreading as in my

specimens on Desmodium, whereas in the former they are only a little less

ornate than in my specimen on Lathyrus. Professor Peck also regards

this as a form of his species.

38. MICROSPHAERA PULCHRA C. & P.

On Lonicera flava Sims. and L. parviflora Lam. Madison; La-

Crosse, Pammel.

39. MICROSPHAERA VAN BRUNTIANA Gerard.

On Sambucus canadensis L. Madison.

40, MICROSPHAERA PENICILLATA (Wall.).

On Corylus americana Walt. and C. rostrata Ait. Very common in

the fall. Madison.

41, MICROSPHAERA EXTENSA C. & P.

On leave of Quercus rubra L. Madison.

42, MICROSPHAERA RUSSELII Clinton.

On Oxalis stricta L. La Crosse, Pammel.

43, PODOSPHAERA TRIDACTYLA (Wall) (P. kunzei Lév., P. oxyacanthae,

D C.).

Common, on leaves of cultivated cherry and plum, and on Prunus

virginiana L., causing the leaves to fold lengthwise, Madison,

Ithaca; La Crosse, Pammel.

44, PHYLLACTINIA SUFFULTA (Reb.) (P. guttata, Wall.).

On Celastrus scandens L., Carpinus americana Michx., Corylus

americana Walt. and species of Cornus and Fraxinus. Madison.

45, SPHAEROTHECA CASTAGNEI Lév.

Common, on Bidens frondosa L., Nabalus sp., Taraxacum dens-

leonis Desf., Veronica virginica L., Rubus triflorus Rich., Brunella

vulgaris L. and Agrimonia eupatoria L. Madison; La Crosse,

Pammel.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 113

46. SPHAEROTHECA PANNOSA (Wall.).

On Rosa parviflora Ehr., and on cultivated roses.

The mildew, or mycelium bearing conidia, is very common through the

summer and fall, injuring some of th3 moss-ros*s very greatly. The

perithecial fruit, on the contrary, is uncommon, and seems to form prefer-

ably on wild rose;, rather late in the fall.

47, ERYSIPHE TORTILIS (Wall.).

On leaves of Clematis virginiana L., in summer and fa'l. Madison;

Devil’s Lake, Pammel.

No. 558 of Ellis’ Nor‘h American Fungi, on the same host, distributed

under the name of EHrysiphe communis Schl., seems to belong to this

species.

48. ERYSIPHE LAMPROCARPA (Wall.).

Very common, on Ambrosia artemisiaefolia L., Helianthus stru-

mosus L., Aster miser L., A. laevisL., Xanthium strumarium L.,

Cnicus discolor Muhl., Diplopappus umbellatus T. & G., Hu-

patorium perfoliatum L, E. purpureumL., Phlox paniculata L.,

P. drummondii Hook., Teucrium canadense L., Hydrophyllum

virginicum L., Echinospermum virginicum Lehm. and Verbena

urticifolia L.

49, ERYSIPHE COMMUNIS (Wall.).

On Ranunculus abortius L., Lathyrus venosus Muhl. and Amphi-

carpaeamonoica Nutt. Madison.

Conidia, apparently of this species, are also very common on Thalictrum

dioicum L.

50. ERYSIPHE GRAMINIS D C.

On Poa pratensis L. Madison. Common, through the season, in shaded

places. ‘

Only the conidia (Oidiuwm monilioides Lk.) have been found, but there

can be litt'e doubt that they belong to this species, the perithecial fruit

of which forms most frequently on the old leaves.

PYRENOMYCETES.

d1. PHYLLACHORA LESPED#ZAE (Schw.) (Dothidea lespedezae, Schw.).

Oa leaves of Lespedeza capitata Michx., in summer. La Crosse,

and Hokah, Minn., Pammel.

52, PHYLLACHORA PTERIDIS (Reb.) (Dothidea pteridis Fr.).

The Pycnidia occur on fronds of Pleris aquilina L., from Milwaukee,

in the Lapham herbarium.

114 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

53. PHYLLACHORA ULMI (Duv.) (Dothidea ulmi Fr.).

Very common on leaves of Ulmus americana L., in fall and winter,

tke ascospores forming on the fallen leaves; the spermogonia

(Septoria ulmi Fr.) on the same host.

54, PHYLLACHORA TRIFOLII (Pers.) (Dothidea trifolit Fr.).

With its conidia (Polythrincium trifoliit Kze.), on Trifolium repens

L. and 7. pretense L. Common, in summer and fall. Madison,

Ithaca; La Crosse, Pammel; Sauk City, Liders.

55. PHYLLACHORA GRAMINIS (Pers.) (Dothidea graminis FY.).

Common, on Asprella hystrix Willd., Dactylis glomerata L., Elymus

canadensis L., Panicum latifoliwm L. and other grasses, in fall

and winter. Madison, Ithaca; La Crosse, Pammel.

56. MONTAGNELLA HELIOPSIDIS (Schw.) (Dothidea heliopsidis Schw.).

What appears to be this species was found on the dead stems of

species of Helianthus and Aster, but sterile, as usual.

57. PARODIELLA PERISPORIOIDES (B. & C.) (Dothidea perisporioides B. & C.)?

On leaves of Desmodium acuminatum DC. La Crosse, Pammel.

What I have referred to this species appears as numerous minute olive-

brown or black dots, .5 mm. or less in diameter, on the upper surface of the

leaves. These perithecia are smaller than those of any form of P. peri-

sporioides in my herbarium, and are pycnidial, containing numerous hya-

line round-oblong stylospores, each measuring 3-0”, and w.th 1-2. oil

globules.

58. HyPOMYCES LACTIFLUORUM (Schw.).

Very common on one or more species of agaric, deforming the in-

fested plants, which are ultimately covered closely by the bright

cinnabar-red perithecia.

59. GNOMONIELLA FIMBRIATA (Pcrs.) (Sphaeria jfimbriata Pers.).

On leaves of Carpinus americana Michx., in August. Pycnidia

(Glaeosporium carpini Desm.) and ascosporic fruit.

60. GNOMONIELLA CORYLI (Batsch) (Sphaeria coryli Batsch).

On leaves of Corylus americana Walt. and C. rostrata Ait., in sum-

mer. La Crosse, Kirkland, and Hokah, Minn., Pammel.

61. PLOWRIGHTIA MORBOSA (Schw.) (Sphaeria morbosa Schw.).

Common, on stems of Prunus virginiana L., P. americana Mar-

shall, P. pennsylvanica L. and P. serotina Ehrh. Madison; Sauk

City, La Crosse, Pammel.

In May, when conidia are abundant on the forming knots, those of the

preceding year commonly have the protoplasm of their asci still undiffer™

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 115

entiated into spores. A considerable number cf specimens show that the

species winters very largely by its perennial mycelium rather than by

ascospores, and new knots are usually formed close below the old ones by

the same mycelium. The “black knot” undoubtedly also occurs on culti-

vated species of Prunus, though I have not yet collected it on them.

62. NECTRIA CINNABARINA (Tode).

On branches of Robinia pseudacacia L. Madison.

This with its conidia, Twbercularia vulgaris Tode, has been collected

only on dead branches; but it has been shown by Dr. Heinrich Mayr

(Part 3 of Hartig’s Untersuchungen aus dem forstbotan. Institut zu Miin-

chen), that the species sometimes lives as a true parasite on maple, box-

elder, etc.

63. CRYPTOSPORELLA ANCALALA (Pk.) (Diatrype anomala Peck).

Forming knots on branches of Corylus americana Walt. Madison.

64, EPICHLOZ TYPHINA (Pers.).

On sheaths of an Hlymus, Andropogon furcatus Muhl. and one

other undetermined grass. Madison, Stoughton, Ithaca; La Crosse,

Pammel.

65, CLAVICEPS PURPUREA (Fr.) ?

Common on Secale cereale L., and Triticum vulgare Vill. Syene;

La Crosse, Pam mel.

The sclerotia were not subjected to cultures, and consequently no peri-

thecia were obtained, but there can be little doubt as to the species,

66. CLAVICEPS, sp.

On Zizania aquatica L. Milwaukee, Lapham.

The sclerotia are stout, ovoid, oblong, averaging 5x9 mm. Their coloris

pinkish, brown. I have seen the same thiag in the herbarium of Dr,

Farlow, but do not know that it has ever been made to fruit.

67, CLAVICEPS, sp.

Small sclerotia have been found in abundance on Elymus striatus

Willd., E. canadensis L., Koeleria cristata Pers., Glyceria nervaia

Trin., Agrostis scabra Willd., Deyeuxia canadensis Beauy., Poa

compressa L. and Phleum pratense L., at Madison, Ithaca,

LaCrosse and Kilbourn City, by Mr. Pammel and myself. No

cultures having been undertaken, however, the species is unde-

termined.

68. CORDYCEPS MILITARIS (L.) (ZYorrubia militaris, Fr.)?

Conidia on “white grubs” in fall. Madison.

Oniy the Isaria stage was seen, although a number of cultures were

undertaken.

116 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

69.

On leaves of Hupatorium ageratoides L. and Podophyllum pelta-

tum L.

Stroma sessile, 8mm. in diameter, hemispherical, waxy, pale flesh-colored

Perithecia superficial. Asci and spores as in Hpichloe typhina (P.).

A curious fungus, related to Cordyceps and Epichloe, apparently growing

on clusters of spiders’ eggs. Possibly connected with Isaria arachnophila,

No. 76.

PHACIDIACEAE.

70, PHACIDIUM RANUNCULI Desmaz.

On leaves of Ranunculus pennsylvanicus L. and R. sceleratus L.

Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

Flesh-colored; not dark like English specimens, but otherwise similar to

them.

71. PHACIDIUM TRIFOLII (Bernh.).

On leaves of Trifolium pratense L. Madison.

42, RHYTISMA SALICINUM Fr.

On leaves of Salix. Madison.

73, RHYTISMA ASTERIS Schw.

On leaves of Solidago. Sauk City, Liders. Also found on one

or more species of Aster, at Brownsville, Minn., by Mr. Pammel.

The compound nature of these galls is discussed in volume IV. of

“Psyche.”

74, RHYTISMA ILICIS CANADENSIS Schw.?

On leaves of Ilex verticillata Gray. Milwaukee, Lapham; Devil’s

Lake, La Crosse, Pammel.

Forming round or somewhat irregular black spots, about 2 mm. in dia-

meter, surrounded by a brown border, on the upper surface of the leaf —

whitish below. The same form occurs on leaves of J..laevigata Gray, col-

lected at Ovid, N. Y., by Brewer and Chickering; but all of my specimens

are immature.

DISCOMYCHETES.

75. PEZIZA DEHNII Rabh.

On petioles and leaves of Lotentilla norvegica L., in spring and

summer. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

ISOLATED IMPERFECT FORMS.

76, ISARIA ARACHNOPHILA Ditm.

On spiders, in autumn. Madison. (Cf. No. 69).

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 117

77, MICROSTROMA LEUCOSPORUM Mont.

Forming white spots on the under surface of leaves of Juglans cin-

erea L. Represented from just acros3 the line in Minnesota and

Illinois, and hence certain to be found in Wisconsin. It should

also occur on Carya.

78, DIDYMARIA UNGERI Cda. (Ramularia didyma Ung.).

On Ranunculus fascicularis Muhl., R. recurvatus Poir. and Anemone

dichotoma L. Madison: Kirkland, La Crosse, Pammel.

79. RAMULARIA CELASTRI Ell. & Martin. (R. celastri Pk.).

On leaves of Celastrus scandens L., in fall. Madison.

Spores 1-4 celled. Described under the same nameby Peck (33 Report,

p. 30).

80. RAMULARIA PLANTAGINIS Ell. & Martin.

On leaves of Plantago major L. Madison, Syene; Kirkland, Pammel,

81. RAMULARIA TULASNEI Sace. (R. fragariae Pk.).

On leaves of Fragaria vesca L. and Ff’. virginiana Ehr., wild and

cultivated. Madison; Milwaukee, Trowbridge; Janesville, Kellogg,

Known pretty generally over the country as ‘Strawberry Rust.”

With us this species appears to pass the winter in black, stromatoid

sclerotia, which protrude from the surface of the leaf. Inthe spring coni-

dial threads grow out from these bodies and quickly fruit.

82. RAMULARIA ARVENSIS Sacc.

Oa leaves of Potentilla norvegica L. Madison, Syene; La Crosse,

Pammel.

83. RAMULARIA MACROSPORA Fres., var. SENECIONIS Sacc.

On leaves of Aster novae angliae L. Syene.

To the naked eye resembling the conidia of Entyloma compositarum Farl.

Spores colorless, 1-4 celled, usually 2-celled; oblong-ovoid, slightly trun-

cate at the pointed extremities, sometimes narrowed gradually to the sep-

tum; 5-6<20—-40 yw.

84, RAMULARIA ARMORACIAE Fckl.

Common on leaves of Nasturtium armoracia Fr., wild and culti-

vated. Madison.

The common leaf disease of the horseradish, very destructive to the old

leaves in summer and fall. Presumably occurring on other Cruciferae in

Wisconsin, as it does elsewhere.

85. RAMULARIA URTICAE Ces.

On Urtica gracilis Ait., in spring. Madison.

Agrees closely with Berlin specimens from Magnus.

118 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

86. OVULARIA OBLIQUA (Cke.) (Ramularia obovata Fckl., Peronospora

obliqua Cke.).

Common, in spring, on leaves of Rumex. Madison.

87. OVULARIA IRREGULARE (Pk.) (O. isarioides Sacc., Oidium irregulare

ke):

On the fruit of Staphylea trifolia L. La Crosse, Pammel.

88. OVULARIA PYROLAE, N. sp.

On leaves of Pyrola rotundifolia L. Stoughton.

Spots circular, dark. Spores colorless, round-oval to oblong, frequently

acute at one end, unicellular. Usually 412 u; extremes noted: 3.5-6X

6-17 4.

89, FUSIDIUM RAVENELIANUM Thuem. (Ramularia desmodiit Cke., Fusispo-

rium pubescens B. & C.).

On leaves of a species of Desmodium and an Astragalus. Madison; La-

Crosse, Pammel.

90. FUSIDIUM PTERIDIS Kalchbr.

On fronds of Aspidiwn marginale Sw. Kirkland, Pammel.

91. CERCOSPORELLA CANA (Pass.) (Fusidiwm canwm Pass.).

Common, on leaves of Hrigeron canadense L., in summer and fall.

Madison.

What appears to be the same thing was found at La Crosse on the rad-

icai leaves of some Solidago.

92. CERCOSPORELLA APOCYNI HK. & K.

On leaves of Apocynum cannabinum L. La Crosse, Pammel.

93. CERCOSPORA APII Fres., var. PASTINACAE Far‘ow, in herb.

Common, on leaves of Pastinaca sativa L. Madison; La Crosse,

Pammel.

Perhaps from Cercosporella pastinacae Karst., as described in Hedwigia,.

1884, p. 68, is not distinct.

94, CERCOSPORA BETAECOLA Sacc.

On Beta vulgaris L. Ithaca.

Very destructive to beet leaves, in fall.

95. CERCOSPORA CHENOPODII Fres.

Very abundant, on leaves of Chenopodium album L., in midsummer:

and later. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

96. CERCOSPORA RACEMOSA Ell. and Mart., ined.

On Teucrium canadense L. La Crosse, Pammel.

Searcely a good Cercospora. Iam indebted to Dr. Farlow fur the de-

termination.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 119

97. CERCOSPORA PHYSALIDIS Ell.

On leaves of two species of Physalis. La Crosse, Pammel.

98. CERCOSPORA PYRI Farlow.

On leaves of Pyrus arbutifolia L. Kilbourn City, Pammel.

99, CERCOSPORA GRANULIFORMIS Ell. & Holway.

On leaves of Viola cucullata Ait. Madison; La Crosse, and Hokah,

Minn., Pammel.

Polythrincium trifolit Kz2.—See Payllachora trifolii, No. 54,

99a. CLADOSPORIUM TRIOSTEI Pk., n. sp.

On leaves of Triostewm perfoliatum L. La Crosse, Pammel.

Spots indefinite, pale, becoming brown at the center with age; 2-5 mm.

in diameter. Conidiophores tufted, slightly wavy, hypophyllous, 125-150

long, 3.54 in diameter, deep brown. Spores dark brown, sometimes

slightly paler than the threads; lemon-shaped, with strongly pronounced

papillae at either end; 2-celled; 5-715-20u. Septum usually central,

sometimes near one end.

100. PASSALORA DEPRESSA (B. & Br.) (Cladosporium depressum B.

& Br.).

On leaves of Zizia integerrima D C. and Archangelica atropurpurea

Hoffm.? La Crosse, Pammel.

101, FUSICLADIUM DENDRITICUM (Wail.) (Cladosporium dendriticum Wall.).

On leaves and fruit of Pyrus malus L., P. coronaria L. and P. pruni-

folia L. Madison, Ithaca; Baraboo, Johnson; La Crosse, Pammel;

and reported all over the state.

The cause of ‘‘leaf-blight” and “scab” of apples, and very destructive.

102. PyRICULARIA GRISEA (Cke.) (Trichothecium griseum Cke.).

On the leaves of Panicum sanguinale L. Syene, Madison.

Causing gray spots; common, in the fall.

103. TRICHOTHECIUM ROSEUM Fr.

On a living puff-ball in August. Madison.

Very possibly growing as a saprophyte on an injured part of the fungus,

as it occurs the year round on firewcod, old black-knots of cherry, etc.

104, SEPEDONIUM CHRYSOSPERMUM Link.

On a species of Boletus. Madison.

Although the host was almost entirely replaced by the conidia, as usual,

there was no indication of ascosporic fruit.

105, ASTERINA, sp. (?).

On leaves of Salix, in fall. Syene.

Forming dendritic black spots several millimeters in diameter. Too im-

mature for determination.

120 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

106. SPHAERONEMA PERSICAE (Schw.).

On Plowrightia morbosa Schw., and on branches of Prunus ameri-

cana Marsh. Madison.

Perhaps growing on the honey-dew of Aphides.

107. GLAEOSPORIUM LINDEMUTHIANUM Sacc, & Magn.

On pods of Phaseolus, sp. Madison.

Causing the common and destructive spotting of wax beans.

108. GLAEOSPORIUM (MARSONIA) MELILOTI, n. sp.

On the stems of Melilotus alba Lam. Madison.

Perithecia minute, inconspicuous, occurring in longitudinal rows 2-5

mm. long, on the stem. Spores oozing out in pale, flesh-colored tendrils,

under the microscope appearing colorless; oblong, straight or slightly

curved, 2-celled, 5-6X13-20 uw. In the smaller spores the septum is nearly

central; in the larger ones it occurs nearer one end.

109. GLAEOSPORIUM (MARSONIA) JUGLANDIS (Lib.).

On brown spots on leaves of Juglans nigra L. and J. cinerea L.

Madison; La Crosse, and Hokak, Minn., Pammel.

Almost entirely defoliating some trees in August.

109a. GLAEOSPORIUM (MARSONIA) CASTAGNEI (Desm. & Mont.).

On leaves of Populus alba L. Madison.

Glaeosporium carpini Desmaz.— See Gnomoniella fimbriata, No. 59.

110. PHoMA UVICOLA B. & C.

On cultivated species of Vitis. Syene; Ithaca, Hatch.

The apparant cause of much of the “dry rot” of grapes. The form sent

by Mr. Hatch is reported as very destructive to the young twigs of some

varieties, and appears to be identical with that distributed in Erb. Critt.

Ital., No. 747.

111. PHYLLOSTICTA SPHAEROPSOIDEA Ell & Everh.

On leaves of Aesculus hippocastanum L. Madison.

112. PHYLLOSTICTA VITICOLA (Cke.).

On leaves of cultivated grape and Ampelopsis quinquefolia Mich.

Madison, Ithaca.

118. PHYLLOSTICTA DODECATHEI, n. sp.

On leaves of Dodecatheon meadia L. Stoughton.

Spots circular, brown, about 3mm. in diameter. Spores hyaline, ovoid

to oblong, sometimes nearly spherical, eguttulate, 2-5 3.5-7 “, unicellular.

114. PHYLLOSTICTA QUERCUS Sacc. & Sp.

On leaves of Quercus macrocarpa Michx. and Q. alba L. Kirkland,

La Crosse, Pammel.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 121

115. PHYLLOSTICTA APOCYNI, n. sp.

On leaves of Apocynum cannabinum L. La Crosse, Pammel.

Spots circular, brown, about 3 mm. in diameter. Perithecia small.

black. Spores colorless, oblong, 3.5-45-7 “, unicellular.

116. PHYLLOSTICTA PYRINA Sace.

On apple leaves, Madison.

117. PHYLLOSTICTA, sp.

On leaves of Prunus serotina Ehrh. Madison.

Spots rounded or oblong, 3-8 mm. in diameter, brownish-red. Perithecia

small, black. Spores ellipsoidal, hyaline, 2-47-8 , unicellular,

Perhaps P. serotina Cke., of which I have not been able to examine

specimens,

118. ASCOCHYTA, sp.

On leaves of Silphium integrifolium Mich. and Vernonia noveb-

oracensis Willd. Stoughton; La Crosse, Pammel.

Spots brown, circular, about 3 mm. in diameter. Perithecia brown, 100-

120, slightly carbonized about the round orifice. Spores colorless; ovoid,

oblong or reniform, frequently constricted at the middle; 3-57-14, with

2-4 oil drops; when mature 2-celled.

Resembles Phyllosticta sonchi Sacc. (Michelia, I., 141), except in the sep-

tate spores.

119. ASCOCHYTA OXYBAPHI, n. sp.

On leaves of Oxybaphus nyctagineus Sweet. Stoughton.

Spots dark brown, roundish, 1-2 mm. Perithecia on the upper surface

of the leaf, small, brown, carbonized about the orifice. Spores coiorless,

2-celled, 410-17; sometimes constricted at the middle.

120. ASCOCHYTA VIOLAE Sace. and Sp.

On leaves of Viola pubescens Ait. Madison.

121. ASCOCHYTA QUERCUS Sacc. & Sp.

On leaves of species of Quercus; on round, white spots. Madison.

121a. ASCOCHYTA AMPELINA Sacc.

Onsmall brown spots, on leaves of Vitis eordifolia Mx. Madison.

122, ASCOCHYTA SPARTINAE, 0. sp.

On leaves of Spartina cynosuroides Willd.,in autumn. Madison; La

Crosse, Pammel.

This species was found in small quantity, in company with Uromyces

acuminatus Arthur, and causes small rounded pale yellow spots on the

leaves. The spores ooze out in flesh-colored masses, and are colorless,

straight or slightly curved, usually a little narrower at one end than the

other. They average 3X35 4“. As aru'e they are two-celled, but in a few

122 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

instances two or even three septa were distinguished. Perhaps idertical

with some of the numerous described Septoriae or Ascochytae of grasses;

but I have been unable to place it.

123. ASCOCHYTA SALICIFOLIAE, n. sp.

On leaves of Spiraea salicifolia L. La Crosse, Pammel.

Spots numerous, rounded, about 1 mm. in diameter, deep flesh colored.

Perithecia large, similarly colored. Spores oozing out; hyaline, fusiform,

usually a little curved in form of a crescent, 1-septate, with several (8-4)

oil drops; 2-3.530-50 yu.

Referred at first to Septoria ascochytoides Sacc., but differs in the ab-

sence of a darker border to the spots, while the spores are twice as long as.

in that species, where they are said to measure 18-202.5-3 uw. Perhaps,

like the last, more properly a Septoria than an Ascochyta.

124. SEPTORIA RAVENELIL THUEM.

On leaves of Prunus serotina Ehrh. La Crosse, Pammel.

This occurs in the Curtis herbarium under the name S. sanguinea Desm.

125. SEPTORIA NOLI TANGERIS Gerard.

Forming small black spots on cotyledons of Impatiens fulva Nutt.

Madison.

126. SEPTORIA SISYMBRII Ellis.

On leaves of Dentaria laciniata Muhl., in spring. Madison.

127. SEPTORIA ALLIORUM Westd. (S. viride tingens Curtis),

On leaves of Allium triceccum Ait., in spring. Madison.

With more distinct spots than the specimens described ian Peck’s 23d

Report, p. 55.

128. SEPTORIA RIBIS Desmaz.

On leaves of Ribes cynosbati L. and R. floridum L. Madison; La-

Crosse, Pammel.

129. SEPTORIA VIOLAE West.

On leaves of Viola pubescens Ait. Madison.

130. SEPTORIA ERIGERONTSS B. & C., in herb. Curtis (S. erigerontis Peck).

On radical leaves of some Hrigeron, in early spring. Madison.

131. SEPTORIA OENOTHERAE West.

On leaves of Oenothera biennis L. Madison.

132. SEPTORIA SCROPHULARIAE Peck.

On leaves of Scrophularia nodosa L. Madison; La Crosse, Pam-

mel,

133. SEPTORIA HETEROCHROA Desmaz.

On leaves of Malva rotundifolia L. Common, Madison.

Also frequently referred to S. destruens Desm., by authors.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 123.

134, SEPTORIA CANNABINA West.

On leaves of Cannabis sativa _L.,in autumn, Madison. Sometimes.

accompanied by a Phoma,

The diseased hemp leaves were marked by discolored spots very early in.

the season, but little fruit was formed.

135. SEPTORIA ACERIS (Libert).

On leaves of Acer dasycarpuwm Ehrh. Madison.

A comparison with the original Ascoxyta aceris Lib. (Crypt. Ard., No.

54), for which I am indebted to Dr. Farlow, shows very little difference be-.

tween our plant and the European form. The spores, after their escape, lie

loosely over the lower surface of the leaves. In both forms they are straight

or more commonly somewhat curved, usually 4-celled, and decidedly con-

strict<d at the septa. which, like the external walls, are very thin. The

average size is 440-50 4. Spots very small, yellow.

136. SEPTORIA ASTRAGALI Desmaz.

On leave3 of Vicia americana Muhl. Stoughton.

187. SEPTORIA, sp.

On leaves of Aquilegia canadensis L. La Crosse, Pammel.

Spots black’sh, elongated. Spores filiform, 1x25 4. Differs from S.

anemones Desm. chiefly in the spots. Penzig and Saccardo (Atti R. Inst.

Veneto, Ser. 6, v. 2.) describ2a species under the name S. aqutlegiae, which

produces large black spots on leaves of Aquwilegia atrata, which is possibly

the same, though I have seen only the abstract of their paper in the Bot,

Centralblatt, where spore-measurements are not given.

138. SEPTORIA COPTIDIS B & C.

On leaves of Coptis trifolia Salisb, Wisconsin, Lapham. In herb.

Curtis.

139. SEPTORIA PHLOCIS Sacc. & Sp.

On leaves of Phlox divaricata L. Madison.

Differs from the typical form in causing larger yellowi-h or dirty white.

spots 5 mm. in diameter, which are often confluent. Perithecia numerous.

Spores colorless, filiform, 230-40 jz, usually 2-septate.

140, SEPTORIA GRAMINUM Desm.

On leaves of Setaria viridis Beauy. and on Poa annua L. Ithaca,

Syene, Stoughton.

The variety on Poa is quite destructive in spring, occurring on the

rachis of the panicle and on the floral envelopes, which are uniformly

brown. Perithecia round, black, about 80 , in diameter, prominent.

Spores hyaline, slightly clavate, obscurely septate; average size, 2.540 ju.

141, SEPTORIA RUBI (Duby).

On leaves of Rubus strigosus Mich. Madison, Syene.

124 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts an |

142. SEPTORIA CONVOLVULI Desmaz, (S. flagellaris Ell. & Everh.) |

On leaves of Convolvulus sepium L. Madison.

Spots brown or nearly white, round, 1-3 mm, in diameter. Perithecia

small, one or a few on each spot. Spores nearly filiform, colorless, usually

2x40 «. Not certainly distinguishable from forms of S. convolvuli, which

varies much on different hosts. |

143. SEPTORIA, sp.

On leaves of Silphium integrifolium Mich. Stoughton.

Spots angular, blackish-brown, 1-3 mm. in diameter. Perithecia incon- —

spicuous, 60-70. Spores colorless, filiform, about 5-septate, 1.5-230-85 yu.

144, SEPTORIA, sp.

On stem of Ribes. “ Wisconsin, Lipham.” Jn herb. Curtis.

145. SEPTORIA POLYGONORUM Desmaz.

On Polygonum hydropiper lL. Ithaca, Madison; Baraboo, Pammel.

Septoria ulmi Fr.—See Phyllachora ulmi, No. 53.

146, DARLUCA FILUM Cast.

On various Uredineae; e. g., Puccinia polygont amphibii, on

Polygonum amphibium, P. asteris on Aster, Uromyces junci, on

Juncus, U. acuminatus, on Spartina, Puccinia tomipara, on Bro-

mus, Phragmidium, on Potentilla, Uredo iridis,on Tris versi-

color and Puccinia menthae, on Pycnanthemum.

BASIDIOMYCETES.

UREDINEAE.

147. UROMYCES TEREBINTHI (D C.) (Pileolaria brevines B. & Rav.).

Uredo and teleutospores on Rhus toxicodendron L. Madison; La-

Crosse, Pammel.

I have not compared this with the European form, but Shroeter has

‘shown that they are identical (Hedwigia, 1875, p. 170).

148. UROMYCES POLYGONI (Pers.).

Uredo and teleutospores on Polygonum aviculare L. and P. erectum

L., in summer and fall; the uredo especially abundant. Madison;

La Crosse, Pammel.

149. UROMYCES PHASEOLI (Pers.) (U. appendiculatus Leév.).

Uredo and teleutospores on leaves of cultivated beans (Phaseolus)

and Amphicarpaea monoica Nutt. The aecidium on the latter

host.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 125:

150. UROMYCES OROBI (Pers.).

Aecidium on Lathyrus venosus Mubl., L. palustris L. and Desmod-

ium acuminatum D C. Uredo and teleutospores on L. venosus

Muhl. Madison; Baraboo, La Crosse, Pammel. The accidium on

Desmodium, from Brownsville, Minn.

151. UROMYCES LESPEDEZAE (Schw.) (U. macrosporus B. & C.).

Aecidium, uredo and teleutospores on Lespedeza LLU Michx

Madison; Kilbourn City, La Crosse, Pammel.

152. UROMYCES TRIFOLII (A. & 8.) (U. apiculatus Strauss).

Aecidium, uredo and teleutospores on Trifolium repens L. and

T. incarnatum L. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

152a. UROMYCES EUPHORBIAE C. & P.

Aec dium, uredo and teleutospores on Huphorbia maculata L. and

E. hypericifolia L., very common in late summer and fall.

Madison; La Crescent, Minn., Pammel.

The aecidium has been distributed by Cooke, on the same host plant, as

A. euphorbiae Pers. (Ravenel’s Fung. Amer., No. 484),

158. UROMYCES ERYTHRONII (D C.) (U. liliacearum Ung.).

Aecidium, uredo and teleutospores on LEO canadense L. Madi-

son; La Crosse, Pammel.

The uredo corresponds in every respect with that described by Dr. Far-

low in the Proceedings of the American Academy, XVIIL., p. 79.

154, UROMYCEs JUNCI (Desmaz.).

Uredo and teleutospores on a small Juncus. Madison, Syene.

155, UROMYCES HEDYSARI PANICULATI Schw.

Uredo and teleutospores on a species of Desmodium. Madison.

156. UROMYCES PYRIFORMIS Cke.

Uredo and teleutospores on Acorus calamus L. La Crosse, Pammel.

157, UROMYCES CALADII (Schw.).

Aecidium, uredo and teleutospores on leaves of Arisaema triphyllum

Torr. Madison; Kirkland. Pammel.

Peck has given the synonymy of this species in full in the 29th Report.

on the New York Cabinet of Natural History, p. 67.

158. UROMYCES HYPERICI (Schw.).

Aecidium on Elodes virginica Nutt. Teleutospores on Hypericum.

pyramidatum Ait. La Crosse, Pammel.

159, UROMYCES SOLIDAGINIS Niessl.

Teleutospores on Rudbeckia laciniata L. La Crosse, Pammel.

126 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

160. UROMYCES ACUMINATUS Arthur.

Uredo and teleutospores on Spartina cynosuroides Willd. Madison;

La Crosse, Pammel.

A very variable species, which in some of its forms can scarcely be dis-

tinguished from a species on several grasses from cther yarts of the

‘country, which may be a form of the variable U. dactylidis Otth.

4161. PUCCINIA CIRCAEAE Pers.

Teleutospores very abundant on leaves of Circaea lutefiana L.

Madison; La Crosse, Pammel; also collected at Hokah, Minn., by

Mr. Pammel.

162. PUCCINIA ANEMONES VIRGINIANAE Schw. (P. solida Schw.).

Teleutospores on Anemone virginiana L. and A. cylindrica Gray, in

August. Madison; La Crosse, and Hokah, Minn., Pammel.

163. PUCCINIA THALICTRI Cheyvyall.

Teleutospores on Thalictrum dioicum L. and T. cornuti L. Madison;

Kirkland, La Crozse, Pammel.

I do not see how this can be distinguished morphologically from P.

anemones Pers. It is usually marked with larger and more obtuse warts

than our specimens of the latter, but European specimens of P. anemones

sometimes have quite as coarse granulations as our P. thalictri.

164. PUCCINIA HYDROPHYLLI Peck & Clinton.

Teleutospores on Hydrophyllum virginicum L. Madison.

165. PUCCINIA LOBELIAE Ger. (P.microsperma B. & C.).

Teleutospores on Lobelia syphilitica L., in August. Madison.

166. PUCCINIA VERRUCOSA (Schultz). (P. hyssopt Schw.).

Teleutospores on Lophanthus scrophulariaefolius Benth. La Crosse,

Pammel.

167. PUCCINIA SILPHIL Schw.

Teleutospores on Silphium perfoliatum L. and S. integrifoliwm Mich.

Stoughton; La Crosse, Pammel.

On the latter host sometimes accompanied by the spermogonia of an ae-

‘cidium, in June. (cf. No. 242.)

168. PUCCINIA ASTERIS Duby. (P. asteris Schw.).

Teleutospores on Aster corymbosus Ait., A. cordifolius L. and A.

tradescanti L. La Crosse, Dells of the Wisconsin, Pammel.

169. PUCCINIA SOLIDAGINIS Pk.

On leaves of Solidago nemoralis Ait. (?) La Crosse, Pammel.

Paler than the type, which it otherwise resembles, according to Prof es-

sor Peck.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 127

The teleutospores are often forked; in some cases the division ex-

tends merely through the terminal papilla; in others the lower cell is pro-

duced into a thickened papilla just below the septum.

170. PUCCINIA TOMIPARA, N. Sp.

Uredo and teleutospores on a spec’es of Bromus, apparently B. cili-

atus L. La Crosse, Pammel.

II. Sori small, round, or little elongated. on the upper surface of the

leaf. Spores commonly round, somewhat roughened with blunt,

inconspicuous warts; pale yellow, 22-26 su.

III. Sri compact, black, long covered by the epidermis; round or

slightly elongated, usually about .2mm. in diameter. Spores pale

chestnut-brown, thin walled, without apical thickening; irregu-

larly oblong, sessile; 2-5-celled, often tomiparous; 13-22 35-43 yu.

The species is remarkable from the fact that the spores are commonly

3-4-celled, with the uppermost septum oblique or not infrequently par-

allel to the axis of the spore, which is thus made to consist of more than

one row of cells. It somewhat resembles P. triarticulata B. & C., which

occurs on Elymus, and which has 3-celled spores; but these are longer and

differently shaped.

171. PUCCINIA BARYI (B. & Br.) (P. striatula Thuem., P. linearis Pk.).

Uredo and teleutospores on some dead grass, possibly Andropo-

gon scoparius Michx. Madison.

Well marked by the strongly clubbed paraphyses.

172. PUCCINIA ANDROPOGI Schw. (P. ellisiana Thuem.).

Teleutospores on Andropogon scoparizis Mx. Madison; Milwaukee,

Lapham; La Crosse, Pammel.

This has been compare with Schweinitzian specimens, by Dr. Farlow.

The teleutospores are not unlike those of P. cesati Schr., as described by

Winter.

173, PUCCINIA ARUNDINARIAE Schw.

Teleutospores on dead leaves of Spartina cynosuroides Willd., in

winter and spring. Madison.

174, PUCCINIA EMACULATA Schw. (P. graminis P., var. brevicarpa Peck).

Teleutospores on Panicum capillare L. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

175. PUCCINIA VEXANS Farlow.

The form described by Peck as Uromyces brandegeei, but now held to be

the uredo or mesosporic form of this species, was found once on Boutelowa

racemosa Lag., at La Crosse, by Mr. Pammel. The quantity examined was

small, and no teleutospores were seen.

128 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

176. PUCCINIA PHRAGMITIS (Schum.) (P. arundinacea Hedw.).

Uredo and teleutospores on Phragmites communis Trin. Milwaukee,

Lapham; La Crosse, Pammel. Also collected at Hekah, Minn., by

Mr. Pammel.

177. PUCCINIA MAYDIS Carrad. (P. sorghi Schw.).

Uredo and teleutospores on th: leaves of Zea mays L., common, in

summer and fall. Madison.

Cooke has described an Asiatic species on Indian Corn, under the name

of P. purpurea, the teleutospsres of which do not appear distinct from

ours. The purplish discoloration of the leaves which it induces, and from

which it derives its specific name, is not characteristic, for some of the

Wisconsin specimens of P. maydis occur on decidedly purplish spots, and

Dr. Farlow informs me that Italian specimens of the same species are

often purple. An examination of Indian specimens of P. purpurea, for

which I am indebted to Dr. Farlow, shows, however, that the uredo spores

are rather larger and more oblong than those of our plant; and they are

accompanied by nearly colorless, thick-walled, clavate paraphyses, which

are wanting in our species.

178. PUCCINIA POLYGONI AMPHIBII Pers. (P. polygonorum Lk., P. amphibii

Fckl.). :

Uredo and teleutospores on Polygonum amphibium L. Madison; La-

Crosse, Pammel. Also collected at Brownsville, Minn., by Mr.

Pammel.

The parasite is very commonly attacked and greatly deformed by Dar-

luca jfilum Cast.

179. PUCCINIA PRUNI SPINOSI (P.) (P. prunorum Link).

Uredo and teleutospores on leaves of seedling Prunus americana

Marsh. and on those of older plants of the same species and of P.

virginiana L., in late summer and fall. Madison.

180, PUCCINIA ARGENTATA (Schultz) (P. noli tangeris Cda.).

Uredo and teleutospores on Impatiens fulva Nutt., in fall. Madison.

As no aecidium accompanies this species in Europe, our Aecidium

impatientatum Schw. must be considered as probably belonging to some

heteroecismal species, although it occasionally occurs on the same leaves

with the Puccinia.

P. argentata has also been found on Impatiens pallida Nutt., at Ho-

kah, Minnesota, by Mr. Pammel.

181. PUCCINIA AMORPHAE Curtis.

Uredo and teleutosporcs on leaves of Amorpha canescens Nutt. and

A. fruticosa L., common. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel. Also

collected at Hokah, Minn., by Mr. Pammel.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 129

182. PUCCINIA PETALOSTEMONIS Farlow, in litt.

Uredo and teleutospores on Petalostemon. la Crosse, Pammel.

II. Sori round, brown, surrounded by the ruptured epidermis, which is

elevated so as to form a false-peridium. Spores pale brown, ovoid, nearly

smooth or somewhat granular on the surface. Average size, 2022 uw.

III. Sori similar to those containing uredo spores, |-lack. Spores me-

dium brown, broadly ellipsoidal, sl’ghtly constricted, thin-walled, without

apical thickening, surrounded by a smooth gelatinous sheath; average

2033 ju.

The species is related to P. amorphae Curt., but readily distinguished

by the paler and more transparent teleutospores, and the thinner, smooth

envelope. Pale-amber paraphyses, frequently hooked at the tip, accom-

pany both uredo and teleutospores.

183. PUCCINIA ZYGADENI, n. sp.

Teleutospores on Zygadenus glaucus Nutt. La Crosse, Pammel.

Sori small, rounded; on both sides of the leaf. Spores amber-brown,

darker at the apex, on thin walled colorless pedicels; oblong or sometimes

clavate; but slightly constricted. Apex thickened, usually rounded or

truncate, rarely acute. 16-20 33-56 4; commonly about 1743 yu.

This resembles a specimen in the Curtis herbarium, on Amianthium,

which is labeled P, asphodeli Duby. ‘It corresponds closely to a specimen

from France, bearing the same name, but evidently incorrectly named, as

other specimens from France and Italy, with the samename, are quite dif-

ferent.” (Farlow, in litt).

184. PUCCINIA ALETRIDIS B. & C.

Uredo and teleutospores on Aletris farinosa L. Kilbourn City,

Pammel.

The uredo sori are small; their spores pale yellow, round-ellipoidal, thin

walled and sparsely granulated. Their usual size is about 20 yu.

185. PUCCINIA KUHNIAE Schw.

Teleutospores on Kuhnia eupatorioides L., in the fall. Madison;

La Cros:e, Pammel.

186. PUCCINIA PODOPHYLLISchw. (P. aculeata Schw.).

Teleutospores common on Podophyllum peltatum L., in June. Madi-

son, Kilbourn City; La Crosse, Pammel.

Sometimes accompanying or preceded by Aecidiwm podophylli Schw.,

but frequently found where there is no trace of the latter.

187, PUCCINIA XANTHII Schw.

Teleutospores on Xanthium strumariumL. and Ambrosia trifida L.

Madison; La Crosse, Pammel. Also collected ot Hokah, Minpn., by

Mr, Pammel.

130 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

In New England, this is often preceded by an aecidium, according to Dr.

Farlow. ;

188. PuccInIA FUSCA (Relhan) (P. anemones P.).

Teleutospores very abundant, in spring, on Anemone nemorosa L.

Madison.

The aecidium occurring simultaneously on the same species is A. punc-

tatum Pers., and not A. lewcospermum D C., which is said by European

authorities to be a stage of this species. It is frequently associated with

Peronospora pygmaea Ung. and Urocystis anemones (Pers.), but I have

never seen it on the same leaf with the brown aecidium.

189. PUCCINIA CONVOLVULI (P.).

Aecidium (A. dubiwm Clinton, A. calystegiae Cast., A. convolvuli

Ces.), uredo and teleutospores on Convolvulus sepiwm L. La-

Crosse, Pammel.

190. PUCCINIA GALII (Pers.).

Sp+trmogonia on Galium aparine L.,in May. Uredo and tsleuto-

spores on G. triflorum Michx., in summer and fall. Madison; La-

Crosse, Pammel.

The teleutospores are uniformly more thickened at the apex, and more

clavate in general outline than those of P. valantiae Pers., to which the

American form has sometimes been referred. The presence of uredo-

spores is also characteristic, and the occurrence of spermogonia indicates

that the aecidium will ultimately be found, although I am not aware that

it has yet been recorded in this country.

191. PUCCINIA PIMPINELLAE (Strauss) (P. myrrhis Sckhw.).

Aecidium, uredo and teleutospores on Osmorrhiza brevistylis D C.

Madison; Kirkland, Pammel.

192. PUCCINIA MENTHAE Pers.

Aecidium on Monarda fistulosa L. and Lycopus europaeus lL. Uredo

and teleutospores on Mentha canadensis L., Pycnanthemum lanceo-

latum Pursh, Monarda fistulosa L. and M. punctata L. Madison;

Sauk City, Liiders; La Crosse, and Hokah, Minn., Pammel.

1938. PUCCINIA GENTIANAE (Strauss).

Uredo and teleutospores on Gentiana andrewsit Griseb., in autumn.

Madison.

194, PUCCINIA FLOSCULOSORUM (A. & S.) (P. compositarum Schl., P. varia-

bilis Grev., P. hieracit Mart.).

Uredo and teleutospores on Taraxacum dens-leonis Desf., Hieracium

canadense Mx., H. scabrum Mx., Cnicus altissinvus Willd., C. lance-

olatus Hoffm. and C. discolor Muhl. Madison; Devil’s Lake,

Pammel.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 131

Probably several of the aecidia referred to Aecidiwm compositarum Win-

ter belong to this species.

195. PUCCINIA HELIOPSIDIS Schw.

Uredo and teleutospores on Vernonia fasciculata Michx. La Crosse,

Pammel.

Scearcely distinct.

196. PUCCINIA TANACETI D C.

Uredo and teleutospores on Artemisia dracunculoides Pursh. Madison.

197. PUCCINIA HELIANTHI Schw.

Aecidium (A. helianthi Schw.) on Helianthus strumosus L. Uredo

and teleutospores common on H. grosse-serratus Mart., H. annuus

L. and H. strumosus L. Madison, Syene; La Crosse, Pammel.

The broader uredospores and the paler apex of the teleutospores distin-

guish this from the forms of P. tanaceti, with which Winter unites it, that

I have been able to examine.

198. PUCCINIA VIOLAE (Schum).

Aecidium on Viola cucullata Ait., V. subescens Ait. and V,

canadensis L. Uredo and teleutospores on V. cucullata Ait.,

V. blanda Willd. and V. pubescens Ait. Madison, Stoughton;

Delton, Devil’s Lake, Kirkland, Pammel.

199. PUCCINIA RUBIGO VERA (DC.) (P. straminis Fck1.).

Uredo and teleutospores common, on Hordeum jubatum L.

Aecidium asperifolii Pers., which is said to belong to this species, and

which occurs on various Boragineae, has not been found yet.

200, PUCCINIA GRAMINIS Pers.

Aecidium (Aecidium berberidis Gmel.) very common in spring, on

Berberis vulgaris L., wherever the barberry is cultivated. Uredo

and teleutospores abounding on many grasses, of which the fol-

lowing have been collected: Triticum vulgare Vill., Avena sativa

L., Phlewm pratense L., Hordeum jubatum L., Agrostis vulgaris

With., A. scabra Willd., Briza maxima L.,and Elymus, sp. Ithaca,

Madison, and reported from many other localities.

The uredo appeats sparingly in the spring, before aecidia have developed

on the barberry, and there is reason for believing that the mycelium bi-

bernates in winter grain and perennial grasses. Although the barberry

does not grow wild in the state, it is cultivated in sufficient abundance to

stock the state with wheat rust in favorable seasons. The teleutospores are

found in fall and winter, and are especially noticeable on the sheaths of

grasses, after their death. Attempts made in my laboratory to infect the

very young leaves of wheat seedlings with the sporidia from germinating

teleutospores have thus far entirely failed, thougk Plowright claims to

132 Wisconsin Adademy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

have succeeded. If this were possible it would entirely do away with the |

necessity for the intervention of the barberry, which, as has been said, is

questionable, for other reasons.

201. PUCCINIA CORONATA Cda.

Uredo and teleutospores very common, on Dactylis glomerata L.,

Avena sativa L., etc. Madison. The common oat rust in this vi-

cinity is the uredo of this species.

Aecidium rhamni Gmel., which is held to be a state of this species, has

not yet been found. It should be looked for on species of Rhamnus. ®

202. PUCCINIA CARICIS (Schum.).

Aecidium (Aecidium urticae Schum.) common, in spring, on Urtica

gracilis Ait. Uredo and teleutospores on Cyperus schweinitzit

Torr., and other sedges, in fall and winter, common. Madison;

La Crosse, Honey Creek, Pammel.

203. PHRAGMIDIUM SUBCORTICIUM (Shrank) (P. mucronatum Link),

Uredo and teleutospores on leaves of Rosa parviflora Ehrh., and on

cultivated roses. Madison.

204, PHRAGMIDIUM SPECIOSUM Fries.

Teleutospores on petioles and stems of Rosa parviflora Ehrh., in fall

and winter. Madison.

Uredo miniata P., or a form not tobe distinguished from it, sometimes

occurs on the same plant in spring under suspiciously similar circumstan-

ces, but a connection between the two species has not yet been traced.

205. PHRAGMIDIUM RUBI IDAEI (Pers.) (P. effuswm Fckl., P. gracile Grev.).

Uredo and teleutospores on leaves of Rubus occidentalis L., in au-

tumn. Madison.

This is the species distributed in Ellis’ North American Fungi, No. 282,

under the name of P. incrassatum Lk., var. gracile. The uredo which has

been associated with it is very abundant, scattered over the lower surface

of the leaves. It may prove to belong to P. rubi (Pers.) (P. bulbosum

Strauss).

206. PHRAGMIDIUM FRAGARIAE (D C.) (P. tréarticulatum, B. & C., P. obtu-

sun, P.).

Uredo (Uredo potentillarum D C.) on leaves of Potentilla canadensis

L. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

207. GYMNOSPORANGIUM MACROPUS Link.

Teleutospores common on cultivated Juniperus virginiana L., in

May. Madison, Syene; Oconomowoc, Lapham; Sauk City, La-

Crosse, Pammel.

Preliminary List of Wiseonsin Parasitic Fungi. 133

GYMNOSPORANGIUM SABINAE (Dicks.), var GLOBOSUM Farlow (G. fus-

cum, D C., var. globosum Farlow).

Teleutospores on Juniperus virginiana L., common on certain trees

in May. Madison; River Falls, King.

The galls of this species are less succulent than those of the last, which

are commonly known as “Cedar Apples.” Cornu records similar galls as

caused by it in France (Bull. Soc. Bot. de Fr., v. 25, p. 128).

The common European cluster-cup of the pear (Roestelia cancellata

Rebent.) is held to be a state of this species, but it does not occur with us,

if, indeed, it is found in this country.

209. MELAMPSORA SALICIS CAPREAE (Pers.) (MZ. salicina Leév.).

Uredo and teleutospores common on species of Salix, the latter de-

veloping after the leaves have fallen. Madison; La Crosse,

Pammel.

210. MELAMPSORA POPULINA (Jacq.).

Uredo very common in the fall, on leaves of Populus monilifera

Ait., P. tremuloides Michx., P. grandidentata Michx. and P. bal-

samifera L., var. candicans Gray. Teleutospores on fading or

fallen leaves of the same species. Madison.

211. COLEOSPORIUM SONCHI ARVENSIS (Pers.) (C. compositarum Lev., C.

solidaginis Thuem.).

Uredo and teleutospores common on species of Solidago and Aster, ~

ian summer and fall, Madison; Dells of the Wisconsin, La Crosse,

etc., Pammel.

ISOLATED UREDO FORMS.

212. UREDO MINIATA Pers. (Coleosporiwm miniatum, Pers.).

Very common on petioles and stems of Rosa parviflora Ehr., in

spring. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

Precedes Phragmidium speciosum Fr., to which some of its forms bear a

considerable resemblance in habit.

213. UREDO AGRIMONIAE EUPATORIAE (D C.) (Coleosporium ochraceum

Bonord.).

Common, on leaves of Agrimonia eupatoria L. Madison.

214. UREDO IRIDIS Duby. (Trichobasis tridicola Pk!).

On Jris versicolor L., in fall. Madison.

215, UREDO PYROLAE (Gmel.),

On Pyrola elliptica Nutt., in spring. Madison.

134 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

216. UREDO, sp.

On Mimulus ringens L., in company with Aecidium pentstemonis

Schw. La Crosse, Pammel.

Sori small, scattered loosely over both surfaces of the leaf; spores pale

orange, very irregular, unevenly warted, 10x23— 15x16.

217. UREDO POLYPODII (P.) ( U. filicum D C., U. aspidiotus Pk.?),

On Cystopteris fragilis Bernh., in May and June. Madison, Kil-

bourn City.

Spores obovate to pyriform, smooth, 13—20><28—26y, usually, 13.525;

thinner walled than European specimens on Cystopteris and Phegopteris.

218. CAEOMA NITENS Schw. (C. luminatum Schw.).

Common in spring, on wild and cultivated plants of Rubus occi-

dentalis L. and R. villosus Ait. Syene, Stoughton, Madison;

Baraboo, LaCrosse, Pammel; Janesville, Kellogg.

The common red-rust of raspberries. The orange rust which occurs in

autumn is referred to No. 205.

ISOLATED AECIDIAL FORMS.

219, AECIDIUM* PUSTULATUM Curt.

On Comandra wmbellata Nutt., in spring. Madison; Columbus,

Rockwell.

220, AECIDIUM POLEMONII Peck.

On Phlox pilosa L. and Polemonium reptans L. Common, in

spring. Madison.

221, AECIDIUM PODOPHYLLI Schw.

On Podophyllum peltatum L., in June. Madison.

Sometimes associated with Puccinia podophylli Schw., which, however,

more commonly occurs without any traceof the aecidium. 5

222, AECIDIUM OENOTHERAE Peck.

Very common in spring and summer, on Oenothera biennis L.

Stoughton, Madison; Baraboo, Pammel; Sauk City, Litiders.

223. AECIDIUM LYSIMACHIAE Lk.

On Steironema lanceolata Raf. (2) La Crosse, Pammel.

224, AECIDIUM SOLANI Mont.

On Physalis virginica Mill. and P. lanceolata Michx. Sauk City,

Liders.

* This name is sometimes written Oecidium. See Malinvaud, Bull. Soe. Bot. France, 1880,

No. 5.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 135

225. AECIDIUM PETERSII B. & C.

On Viola delphinifolia Nutt. Common, in spring. Madison,

Peridia longer than those of the aecidium of Puccinia violae.

226. AECIDIUM GERANII D C.

Very common, in spring, on leaves of Geraniwm maculatum L.

227, AECIDIUM GROSSULARIAE D C.

On leaves, pedicels and flowers of Ribes rotundifolium Mx., R. flori-

dum L’Her., R. cynosbati L., R. aureum Pursh and R. rubrum L,

Everywhere, in spring. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

This cannot b2 distinguished from the Eurcpean species, which is called

by Winter the aecidium of Puccinia grossulariae Gmel., with which he

identifies the American P. pulchella Pk. Though the aecidium is one of

the commonest of fungi everywhere east of the Mississippi, I am not aware

that its assumed teleutosporic form has been recorded for any locality but

the one given by Peck. Dr. Magnus, also, writing of this species as it oc-

curs in Germany, says “Aecidiuwm grossulariae certainly is an isolated

aecidium, which belongs to a heteroecismal Puccinia, as 1 convinced my-

self some years since by observations on Ribes nigrum, R. grossularia and

R. alpinum, in the vicinity of Berlin.” *

Since the above was written, Plowright, discussing British Uredineae,

says: ‘‘As no Puccinia occurs on gooseberry leaves in this country, it is

clear Aecidium grossulariae, as we find it, is not a Pucciniopsis but is

probably a heteroecismal species.” (Grevillea, XII., 36). the same con-

clusion is reached in Denmark, by Rostrup (Rev. Mycolgique, October 1884,

p. 211).

298, AECIDIUM POLYGALINUM Peck.

On Polygala senega L. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

229. AECIDIUM IMPATIENTATUM Schw.

On Impatiens fulva Nutt, and I. pallida Nutt. Madison; La Crosse,

Pammel; Sauk City, Liiders. Also collected at Hokah, Minn., by

Mr. Pammel.

230. AECIDIUM JAMESIANUM Peck.

On Asclepias tuberosa L., A. cornuti Dec., A. ovalifolia Dec. and

Acerates longifolia Ell. Stoughton; La Crosse, Pammel; Sauk

City, Liiders.

This is called the aecidium of Uromyces howei (Peck) by Mr. Arthur

(Bull. Minn. Acad., XI, 25).

The bright orange-red spores contrast beautifully with the pure white

peridia, much as ia Roestelia awrantiaca Pk., and the thickening of their

walls, mentioned by Mr. Arthur, is very characteristic.

* (Verhandl. Bot. Verein, Prov. Brandenburg, v. 23, p. XX VII-XXVIIL)

136 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

231. AECIDIUM CONVALLARIAE Schum.

On Polygonatum biflorum Ell. and P. giganteum Dietr. La Crosse,

Pammel. Spermogonia, probably of this species, on Smilacina

racemosa Desf.

232. AECIDIUM SAMBUCI Schw.

On Sambucus canadensis L. La Crosse, Pammel.

233. AECIDIUM FRAXINI Schw.

On Fraxinus sambucifolia Lam. Kirkland, La Crosse, Pammel.

934, AECIDIUM RANUNCULACEARUM, D C.

On Anemone dichotoma L. La Crosse, Pammel.

This species includes, in part, the aecidium of Uromyces dactylidis

Otth., which occurs on grasses, according to Schroeter and Plowright,

while Puccinia arundinacea DC. also has its aecidium on Ranunculus,

according to Cornu (Comptes Rendus, June 26, 1882).

To be distinguished is, perhaps —

2385. AECIDIUM THALICTRI Grev.

On Thalictrum dioicwm L. Madison; La Cros:e, Pammel.

236, AECIDIUM RANUNCULI Schw.

On Ranunculus abortivus L. Madison, in spring.

Quite distinct in its habit from either of the preceding.

237, AECIDIUM PUNCTATUM Pers. (A. quadrifidum DC.).

Not uncommon on leaves of Anemone nemorosa L. Less abundant

on Anemone acutiloba Lawson, in May. Madison.

The typical form witha wide 4-lobed margin is unusual, most of the

specimens having a narrow border divided into small lobes. The form on

Hepatica acutiloba is very distinct from A. hepaticae Beck, in its brown

spores. I donot distinguish it from some forms on A. nemorosa.

238. AECIDIUM DICENTRAE, 0. Sp.

On leaves of Dicentra cucullaria D C.,in company with Perono-

spora corydalis DeBary. Madison.

Hypophyllous, scattered. Spots none. Peridia short, pale yellow, irregu-

larly torn or finely many-lobed, .8 mm. in diameter. Peridial cells granu-

lated, polygonal, more or less isodiametric, averaging 13x15 uw. Spores

deep orange, thin-walled, smooth, nearly spherical or somewhat polygonal;

13-20 uw, usually about 16 4; wall colorless.

A beautiful species, collected by Mr. Pammel in May, 1884. The aecidia

are accompanied by small violet or brown spermogonia, like those of

A. punctatum.

239. AECIDIUM PAMMELII, n. sp.

On leaves of Euphorbia corollata L. La Crosse, Pammel.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 137

Spots brown, little, if at all, thickened, slightly pustulate, with a central

¢cluster of a few spermogonia. Cluster cups usually hypophyllous, concen-

trically arranged, rarely a few epiphyllous. Peridium short, whitish; bor-

der narrow, about 10-lobed. -Peridial cells colorles:, rugose, usually

nearly isodiametric, 20-25 4. Spores red-orange, polygonal, isodiametric

or commonly somewhat elongated, 20—25 yu.

The spots are generally orbicular, or elliptical with the longer axis par-

allel to the midrib. When the spermogonia appear near the margin of the

leaf, or near the midrib, the spot naturally develops in but one direction.

The species differs from the aecidium of Uromyces euphorbiae C. & P. in

the regular arrangement of the cluster cups on round spots, and from the

other aecidia occurring on this genus in not deforming the host plant.

240, AECIDIUM PENTSTEMONIS Schw.

On Castilleia sessiliflora Pursh., Pentstemon pubescens Sol. and

Mimulus ringens L., in summer. La Crosse, Pamamel.

The aecidia occur most abundantly on the lower surface of the leaf, less

frequently above. Spots rounded, slightly thickened, reddish-brown, often

yellow-bordered; less evident on Castilleia than on the other hosts. Peridia

white, short, scarcely bordered, crumbling into the rows of cell of which

they are composed. Spores orange; smooth, 15--20 / in diameter.

The form on Pentstemon seems to he A. pentstemonis Schw., and that on

Mimulus is scarcely different from A. gerardiae Pk., but neither seems to

be very distinct from A. scrophularinarum Lasch., on Scrophularia, in Ra-

benhorst, Herb. Mycol., Ed. 2, No. 374. A uredo (No. 216) occurs in com-

pany with the aecidium on Mimulus, but is not evidently connected with

it. 3

241, AECIDIUM SII LATIFOLII (Fiedler).

On leaves of Sium lineare Michx. La Crosse, Pammel.

242, AECIDIUM COMPOSITARUM Winter.

On leaves of Lactuca canadensis L., Nabalus, sp., Vernonia nove-

boracensis Willd., Hupatorium perfoliatum L., Aster sericeus Vent.

and several other species of Aster and Solidago (among the latter

S. latifolia L, and S. riddellit Frank), Silphium perfoliatum L.,

Erigeron annuum Pers., E. canadense L., HE. strigosum Muhl. and

Cynthia virginica Don. Madison; Kirkland, La Crosse, Pammel.

In this conglomeration, which for convenience includes all aecidia found

on Compositae and not connected with some teleutosporic form, are, per-

haps, to be distinguished: A. tenwe Schw. (A. compositarum, var. eupatorit

Schw.), A. erigeronatum Schw. and A. asteratum Schw. Specimens found

at Madison on Taraxacum dens leonis Desf. may prove to be A. taraxaci

Schm. and Kze., the aecidium of Puccinia silvatica Schr., of which we

have not detected the teleutospores.

138 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

243, ROESTELIA LACERATA (Sow.).

Very common in summer and fall, on leavesof Orataegus tomentosa

L. and CO. coccinea Li. Madison, Ithaca.

This is considered by European authorities to be the aecidium of Gym-

nosporangium clavariaeforme D C., which grows on the Juniper, but has.

not yet been reported in Wisconsin. Although the Roestelia is very abun-

dant about Madison, I have never seen the Juniper here, so that its

teleutospores are necessarily wanting.

244, ROESTELIA PENICILLATA (Sow.).

Common on leaves of Pyrus coronaria L.and Amelanchier canadensis

Torr. and Gray., the spermogonia in May and June, the cluster-

cups later. Madison; Delton, La Crosse, Pammel.

Sometimes considered a variety of the last species.

245. ROESTELIA TRANSFORMANS, Ell.(?)

Spermogonia on leaves of Pyrus arbutifolia L. La Cross2, Pammel.

USTILAGINEAE.

246. UstiLaco PANICI GLAUCI (Wall) (U. neglecta Niessl).

In ovaries of Setaria glauca Beauv. Very abundant in fall.

Syene, Madison.

247. USTILAGO SORGHI (Link) (U. tulasnei Kuehn).

In ovaries of Sorghum saccharatum l,, grown from imported

Chinese seed. Madison.

The specimens are more.elopgated than the typical form, but hardly

distinct. Dr. Farlow writes me that he has more typical forms from

Washington, D. C. The introduction of the smut with Chinese seed is.

well shown by its occurrence in three distinct localities (District of Colum-

bia, Farlow; New York, Sturtevant; and Wisconsin) on plants raised from

imported seed. It does not seem to spread with us.

248. USTILAGO ZEAE MAYS(DC.) (U. maydis Lév.).

In various parts of Zea mays L. Very abundant every where; also.

on leaves of the Teosinte (Huchlaena luxurians Fourn.) at Mad-

ison, and Cambridge, Mass.

249. USTILAGO SEGETUM Pers.

In ovaries of Avena sativa L., Triticum vulgare Vill. and Hor-

deum vulgare L. Madison; Sauk City, La Crosse, Pammel; Mil-

waukee, Lapham.

Very abundant; the small-grain smut.

250. USTILAGO RABENHORSTIANA Kuehn.

In the inflorescence of Panicum sanguinale L. Madison; La Crosse,

Pammel,

Spores smoother than the European form.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi. 139°

251. USTILAGO SPERMOPHORUS B. & C.

In ovaries of Eragrostis poaeoides Beauv., var. megastachya Gray.

Madison; Sauk City, Liiders.

The affected ovaries are round or ellipsoidal, scarcely enlarged, and.

remain long unbroken, enclosed by the paleae. Spores thin-walled, brown,

round or slightly elongated, finely echinulate, 6x8, 8x8— 108 yu.

The appearance of the ovaries recalls Tilletia decipiens (Pers.) as repre-

sented in Scandinavian specimens as Agrostis, from Professor Blytt, but

the spores of that species measure 23 — 28 yz.

252. USTILAGO JUNCI Schw.

Pedicels and perianth of Juncus tenuis Willd. (?) in June.

Stoughton.

Apparently referrible to Cornu’s genus Cintractia.

258. USTILAGO SYNTHERISMAE Schw.

Inflorescence of Cenchrus tribuloides L. La Crosse, Pammel.

204, TILLETIA FOETENS (B. & C.) (TZ. laevis Kuehn).

In ovaries of Triticum vulgare Vill. La Crosse, Pammel.

The “buat” or hard smut of wheat, published in 1860 as Ustilago foetens

B, & C.,in Ravenel’s Fungi Carol. Exsicc., V., 100.

255, TILLETIA STRIAEFORMIS (West) ? (Ustilago salveii B. & Br!).

In leaves of Phleum pratense L. and Elymus canadensis L.,var. glau-

cifolius. Stoughton, Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

Referred here on the authority of Winter.

256. ENTYLOMA COMPOSITARUM Farlow. (Protomyces polysporus Peck).

In leaves of Silphium integrifolium Mx., Ambrosia artemisiaefolia

L., A. psilostachya D C. and Lepachys pinnata Torr. & Gr. Mad-

ison, Ithaca; LaCrosse, Pammel.

Occurs also on Aster puniceus L., in the East, and has been described on

Ambrosia trifida L., by Peck (34th Repert, pp. 45-6).

257. ENTYLOMA LOBELIAE Farlow.

In leaves of Lobelia inflata L. Delton, Pammel.

258. ENTYLOMA CRASTOPHILUM Sace. (?)

In sheaths of Zizania aquatica L. Madison.

This agrees well with the description in all respects save the thickening

of the angles of the spores, which I have not noticed. I have not been

able to compare it with authentic specimens.

259. ENTYLOMA LINARIAE Schroeter.

In leaves of Veronica peregina L. Madison.

This occurs in round, thickened portions of the leaf, similar to those on

Linaria, in which it is found in Europe.

140 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

260. ENTYLOMA BESSEYI Farlow (EZ. physalidis Wint., Protomyces physali-

dis K. & C.?).

On Physalis, sp. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel,

The description does not allow it to be distinguished from the African

species described by Kalchbrenner and Cooke (Grevillea, IX., 22).

261. ENTYLOMA MICROSPORUM (Ung.).

On leaf and petiole of Ranunculus fascicularis Muhl. Stoughton.

262. ENTYLOMA MENISPERMI Farlow and Trelease.

In leaves of Menispermum canadense lL. Madison; Hokah, Minn., :

Pammel,

263. ENTYLOMA THALICTRI Schroeter (2).

In leaves of Thalictrum dioicwm L. Common in the fall. Madison.

This seems to be distinct from EF. ranunculi (Bonord.), to which it was

doubtfully referred by Farlow (Botanical Gazette, August, 1883). Having

seen no Gescription of Schroeter’s species, however, I can only assume that

the two may be identical.

264. DOASSANSIA ALISMATIS (Fr.).

In leaves of Alisma plantago L., var. americana Gray, and Sagitta-

ria variabilis Engelm. Madison.

The young spots in spring are white, and look like those of an Entyloma.

The conidia on Sagittaria are hyaline, cylindrical or fusiform, 1-celled, and

measure 2-3 12-20 wu.

265. UROCYSTIS ANEMONES (Pers.) (U. pompholygodes Schl.).

In stems and leaves of Anemone nemorosa L. and A. dichotoma

L. Madison; La Crosse, Pammel.

266. UROCYSTIS OCCULTA (Wall.).

In leaves of Elymus canadensis L. Stoughton.

267. ENTOMOPHTHORA MUSCAE (Cohn),

Very common, on house flies, in fall. Madison, Syene.

The common fall disease of flies. The tarichium state of E. calopteni

Busey will probably be found here in the larger grasshopper (Caloptenus

differentialis).

THELEPHOREAE.

268. HXOBASIDIUM VACCINII Wor.

On Gaylussacia resinosa Torr. & Gray and Vaccinium, sp. Kirkland,

La Crosse, Pammel. Also collected on the last-named host at

Hokah, Minn., by Mr. Pammel. ;

. Undoubtedly occurs on the cranberry and other Ericaceae here as else

where.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi.

ALPHABETICAL INDEX TO HOSTS.*

Acer dasyearpum, 135.

rubrum, 34.

Acerates longifolia, 230.

Acorus calamus, 156.

Aesculus hippocastanum, 111.

Agaric, 58.

Agrimonia eupatoria, 45, 213.

Agrostis scabra, 67, 200.

vulgaris, 200.

Aletris farinosa, 184.

Alisma plantago, 264.

Allium cepa, 27.

tricoccum, 127.

Amarantus retroflexus, 6.

Amber cane, 247.

Ambrosia artemisiaefolia, 5, 10, 48, 256.

psilostachya, 256.

trifida, 10, 187.

Amelanchier canadensis, 244.

Amianthium, 183.

Amorpha canescens, 181.

fruticosa, 181.

Ampelopsis quinquefolia, 9, 32, 112.

Amphicarpaea monoica, 1, 49, 149.

Andropogon fureatus, 64.

scoparius, 171, 172.

Anemone acutiloba, 237.

eylindrica, 162.

dichotoma, 78, 284, 265.

nemorosa, 2, 14, 188, 237, 265.

virginian>, 162.

Apocynum cannabinum, 92, 115.

Apple, 101, 116.

Aquilegia canadensis, 137.

Archangelica atropurpurea, 100.

Arisaema triphyllum, 157.

Artemisia, 24a.

biennis, 5.

dracunculoides, 196.

Artichoke, Jerusalem, 10.

Asclepias cornuti, 230.

ovalifolia, 230.

tuberosa, 230.

Ash, 2338.

Aspidium marginale, 90.

Asprella hystrix, 55.

Aster, 56, 73, 146, 211, 242.

cordifolius, 168.

corymbosus, 168.

laevis, 48.

miser, 48.

novae angliae, 13, 83.

puniceus, 256.

sericeus, 242.

tradescanti, 168.

umbellatus, 48.

vimineus, 168.

Astragalus, 89.

Avena sativa, 200, 201, 249.

Barberry, 200.

Barley, 249.

Beans, 19, 107, 149.

Beet, 94.

Berberis vulgaris, 200.

Beta vulgaris, 94.

a eeeSSMMmmmsmmsmsmmMseseseseseF

Bidens frondosa, 10, 45.

Bittersweet, 79.

Blackberry, 141, 218.

Black walnut, 109.

Blueberry, 268.

Blue grass, 50.

Boletus, 104.

Bouteloua racemosa, 175.

Brassica, 16.

Briza mazima, 200.

Bromus, 146.

ciliatus, 170.

Brunella vulgaris, 45.

Butternut, 77, 109.

(Ci.

Calamagrostis canadensis, 67.

Calystegia sepium, 142, 189.

Cane, Amber, 247.

Cannabis sativa, 134.

Capsella bursa pastoris, 4, 16.

Carpinus americana, 44, 59.

Castilleia sessiliflora, 240.

Cedar, Red, 207, 208.

Celastrus scandens, 44 79.

Cenchrus tribuloides, 253.

Chenopodium album, 20, 95.

Cherry, 43.

Circaea lutetiana, 161.

Cirsium altissimum, 194,

discolor, 194.

lanceolatum, 5, 194.

Clematis virginiana, 47.

Clover, 53, 71, 152.

Clover, Sweet, 108.

Cnicus altissimus, 194.

discolor, 194.

lanceolatus, 5, 194.

Comandra umbellata, 219.

Convolvulus sepium, 142, 189.

Coptis trifolia, 138.

Corn, Indian, 177, 248.

Cornus, 44.

Corylus americana, 40, 44, 60, 63.

rostrata, 40, 60.

Cottonwood, 210.

Crab apple, 101.

Cranberry, 268.

Crataegue coccinea, 243.

tome? tosa, 243.

Currant, 128, 227.

Cynoglossum morisoni, 48,

Cynthia virginica, 242.

Cyperus schweinitzii, 202.

Cystopteris fragilis, 217.

Dactylis glomerata, 55, 201.

Dentaria laciniata. 126.

Desmodium, 89, 155.

acuminatum, 57, 150.

canescens, 37.

Deyeuxia canadensis, 67.

Dicentra cucullaria, 24, 238.

Diplopappus umbellatus, 48.

Dock, 86.

Dodecatheon meadia, 113.

*The fungi are referred to by their list numbers.

142 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Echinospermum virginicum, 48.

Elder, 39, 232.

Elm, 53. |

Elodes virginica, 158.

Elymus, 64, 170, 200.

canadensis, 55, 67, 255, 266.

striatus, 67.

Eragrostis poaeoides, 251.

Erigeron, 130.

asnuum, 242.

canadense, 242.

strigosum, 242.

Euchlaena luxurians, 248.

Eupatorium ageratoides, 10, 69.

perfoliatum, 48, 242.

purpureum, 48.

Euphorbia corollata, 35, 239.

hypericifolia, 152.

maculata, 152a.

_ Fish, 3.

Flies, 3, 267.

Fragaria vesca, 81.

virginiana, 81.

Fraxinus sampucifolia, 233.

“Galium aparine, 190.

boreale, 22.

triflorum, 22, 190.

Gaylussacia resinosa, 268.

Gentiana andrewsii, 193.

Geranium maculatum, 12, 226.

Glyceria nervata, 67.

Gooseberry, 128, 227.

Grape, 9, 83, 110, 112, 121a.

Grasses: 28, 50, 55, 64-67, 102, 122, 140, 146, 160,

170-177, 199, 200, 201, 246-253, 255, 258, 266.

Grubs, White, 68.

»Gymnostichum hystrix, 55.

Hazel, 40, 60, 63.

Helianthus, 56.

annuus, 197.

grosse serratus, 197.

occidentalis, 10.

strumosus, 10, 48, 197.

tuberesus, 10,

- Hemp, 134.

Hepatica acutiloba, 237.

Hieracium canadense, 194.

scabrum, 194.

Hordeum jubatum, 199, 200.

vulgare, 249.

_ Horse chestnut, 111.

Horseradish, 16, 84.

Huckleberry, 268.

-Hydrophyllum virginicum, 48, 164.

Hypericum pyramidatum, 158.

Tlex laevigata, 74.

verticillata, 74.

Impatiens fulva, 11, 125, 180, 229

pallida, 11, 180, 229.

Indian corn, 177, 248.

Tris versicolor, 146, 214.

Tron wood, 44, 59.

Ivy, Poison, 147.

Jerusalem artichoke, 10.

Juglans cinerea, 77, 109.

nigra, 109.

Juncus, 146, 154, 252.

Juniper, 243.

Juniperus communis, 243.

virginiana, 207, 208.

Koeleria cristata, 67.

Krigia amplexicaulis, 242.

Kuhnia eupatorioides, 185.

Ibe

Lactuca canadensis, 15, 242.

sativa, 15.

Lathyrus, 149.

ochroleucus, 37.

palustris, 150.

venosus, 49, 150.

Lepachys pinnata, 256.

Lepidium virginicum, 16.

Lespedeza capitata, 51, 151.

violacea, 37.

Lettuce, 15.

Lilac, 36.

Lilium canadense, 153.

Lobelia inflata, 257.

syphilitica, 165.

Locust, 62.

Lonicera flava, 38.

glauca, 38.

parvitfiora, 38.

Lopnanthus scrophulariaefolius, 26, 166.

Lycopus europaeus, 192.

Lysimachia lanceolata, 223.

Malva rotundifolia, 133.

Maple, 34, 135.

Melilotus albus, 108.

Menispermum canadense, 262.

Mentha canadensis, 192.

Mimulus ringens, 216, 240.

Monarda fistulosa, 192.

punctata, 192.

Nabalus, 45, 242.

Nasturtium armoracia, 16, 84.

Nettle, 85, 202.

Oak, 30, 41, 114, 121.

Oats, 200, 201, 249.

Oenothera biennis, 18, 131, 222.

Onion, 27.

Orchard grass, 55, 201.

Osmorrhiza brevistylis, 191.

Oxalis stricta, 42.

Oxybaphus nyctagineus, 119.

Panicum ecapillare, 174.

latifolium, 55.

sanguinale, 102, 250.

Parsnep, 93.

Pastinaca sativa, 93.

Pear, 208.

Pentstemon pubescens, 240.

Petalostemon, 182.

Preliminary List of Wisconsin Parasitic Fungi.

Phaseolus, 107, 149.

Phieum pratense, 67, 200, 255.

Phlox divaricata, 139.

drummondii, 48.

paniculata, 4s.

pilosa, 220.

Phragmidium, 146.

Phragmites communis, 176.

Physalis, 97, 260.

lanceolata, 224.

virginica, 224.

Plantago major, 21, 80.

Plowrightia morbosa, 106.

Plum, 29, 43, 61, 106, 179.

Poa annua, 140.

compressa, 67.

pratensis, 50.

Podephylium peltatum, 69, 186, 221.

Poison ivy, 147.

Polemonium reptans, 220.

Polygala senega, 228.

Polygonatum biflorum, 231.

giganteum, 231.

Polygonum amphibium, 146, 178.

aviculare, 148.

erectum, 148.

hydropiper, 145.

Populus alba, 109a.

balsamifera, 31, 210.

grandidentata. 210.

monilifera, 210.

tremuloides, 210.

Portulaca oleracea, 7

Potato, 8.

Putentilla canadensis, 146, 206.

norvegica, 17, 75, 82.

Prenanthes, 45, 242.

Prunus, 29.

americana, 61, 106, 17'

pennsylvanica, 61.

serotina, 61, 117, 124.

virginiana, 43, 61, 172.

Pteris aquilina, 52.

Puccinia, 146.

Puff- ball, 103.

Purslane, 7.

Pycnanthemum lanceolatum, 146, 192.

Pyrola elliptica, 215.

rotundifolia, 88.

Pyrus arbutifolia, 98, 245.

communis, 208.

coronaria, 101, 244.

malus, 101, 116.

prunifolia, 101.

Quercus, 121.

alba, 114.

coccinea, 30.

macrocarpa, 114.

rubra, 30, 41.

Ranunculus abortivus, 49, 236.

fascicularis, 78, 261.

pennsylvanicus, 70.

recurvatus, 75.

sceleratus, 70.

Raspberry, 205, 218.

Reana luxurians, 248.

Red cedar, 207, 208.

Red-top, 200

Rhamnus, 201.

Rhus toxicodendron, 147.

Ribes, 144.

aureum, 227.

eynosbati, 128, 227.

floridum, 128, 227

rotundifolium, 227.

rubrum, 227.

Robinia pseudacacia, 62.

Roses, 45, 203.

Rosa parviflora, 46, 203, 204, 212.

Rubus occidentalis, 205, 218.

strigosus. 141.

villosus, 218.

Rudbeckia laciniata, 10, 1:9.

Rumex, 86.

Rye, 65.

Sagittaria variabilis, 264.

Salix, 31, 72, 105, 209.

Sambucus canadensis. 39, 232.

Scrophularia nodosa, 132.

Secale cereale, 65

Setaria glauca, 246.

italica, 28.

viridis, 28, 140.

Sicyos angulatus, 2 25.

perfoliatum, 10, 167, 242.

terebinthinaceum, 10.

trifoliatum, 10.

Silver maple, 135.

Sisymbrium officinale, 4.

Sium lineare, 241.

Smilacina racemosa, 231.

Solanum tuberosum, 8.

Solidago, 13, 73, 91, 211, 242.

nemoralis, 169.

riddellii, 10, 242.

Sorghum saccharatum, 247.

Sphaeria morbosa, 106.

Spiders, 69, 76.

Spiraea salicifolia, 123.

Staphylea trifolia, 87.

Steironema lanceolata, 223.

Strawberry, Si.

Sunflower, 197.

Sweet clover, 108.

Syringa vulgaris, 36.

Ty.

Taraxacum dens leonis, 45, 194, 242.

officinale, 45, 194, 242.

Teosinte, 248.

Teucrium canadense, 48, 96.

Thalictrum cornuti, 163.

dioicum, 49, 163, 235, 263.

Thastles, 5, 194.

Timothy, 67, 200, 255.

Toadstools, 58.

Trifolium incarnatum, 152.

pratense, 54, 71.

repens, 54, 152.

Triosteum perfoliatum, 99a.

Triticum vulgare, 65, 200, 249, 254.

10h,

Ulnus americana, 53.

Uredineae, 146.

Uredo, 146.

Uromyces, 146.

Urtica gracilis, 85, 202.

Vv.

Vaccinium, 268.

Verbena ur ticifolia, 48,

Vernonia fasciculata, 195.

noveboracensis, 118, 242,

Veronica peregrina, 259.

virginica, 45.

Vicia americana, 19, 136.

faba, 19.

Spartina cynosuroides, 122, 146, 160, 173

145

Suphium integrifolium,10, 118, 143, 167, 256.

144 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Viola blanda, 198.

canaéensis, 198.

culeullata, 99, 198.

delphinifolia, 225.

pubescens, 120, 129. 198.

Vitis, 9, 33, 110, 112, 121¢.

Walnut, Black, 109.

Waz beans, 107.

Wheat, 65, 200, 249, 254.

White grubs, 68.

Willow, 31, 72, 105, 209.

xX,

Xanthium strumarium, 48, 187.

Zea mays, 177, 248.

Zizania aquatica, 66, 258.

Zizia integerrima, 100.

Zygadenus glaucus, 183.

The Present State of our Knowledge of Stellar Motion. 145

ON THE PRESENT STATE OF OUR KNOWLEDGE OF

STELLAR MOTION.

By TRUMAN HENRY SAFFORD, Ph. D., Field Memorial Professor of

Astronomy in Williams College.

The stellar motions, the so-called proper motions of the

stars, which used to be thought fixed, seem to us very small,

because the suns we call stars are so very far away.

Bodies which move at least as rapidly as our earth does

about its sun, seem to move with velocities rarely exceeding

one second a year; and this large stellar motion is only

sufficient to produce a displacement equal to the moon’s

diameter as we see it in about eighteen centuries.

Under these circumstances another cause besides the ap-

parent slowness makes the problem in question a trouble-

some one—the fact, namely, that accurate astronomical

observation is a thing of less than two centuries past — and:

even Flamsteed, who commenced it, is now antiquated —

and we are obliged to take Bradley’s later observations—

from 1750 on —as the real beginning.

Moreover, as years go by, it is found possible and neces-

sary to re-reduce the older star-catalogues, in order to make

use of the past records to the greatest possible extent.

Thus Bessel’s Bradley’s catalogue superseded in 1818

Bradley’s own catalogue; and Professor Auwers has already

published the chief results of a new reduction, which, using

Bessel’s principles and methods, supersedes Bessel’s results.

Another element of difficulty in the problem lies in the

comparative ease of making new observations upon the

stars in a routine way, and the greater difficulty of select-

ing the fittest objects and observing those only. The prac-

tical astronomer who has learned simply how to observe, is

far inferior to him, whose ability lies in a combination of

the power to select well his working list, that to observe to

the last degree of accuracy, and that to discuss results with

skill and completeness. And the German school of astron-

omers, established by Bessel, Gauss and Struve, is at the

146 Wisconsin Aademy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

same time the most perfect and the most regardful of all

these matters.

At present star-catalogues are many; but complete dis-

cussions of their results are very scanty in comparison.

Three elements must then be considered in the present

paper.

First, what old catalogues need re-reduction?

Second, what new observations need to be added to those

now in progress.

Third, what discussions of stellar motion by the help of

these materials are timely and needful.

Bradley’s observations, as I have said before, have been

re-reduced by Auwers; and his work is partly published; he

has also taken care that new observations be made upon.

such of the stars as needed them; the resulting new cata-

logue by Dr. Becker of the Berlin observatory has been

published, with proper motions discussed by Auwers; and

Bradley’s stars need not be observed any more for the

present, except for purposes of the most refined accuracy.

It will be an economy in by far the most cases simply to

drop all Bradley stars from our working lists.

Flamsteed and Lacaille, from their want of precision,

need hardly be considered in this connection; Lacaille’s ob-

servations were, it is true, partly of some accuracy for his

time; but thesé cases will mostly come up under other cir-

cumstances, as repetitions of Bradley; or else will be in-

cluded in the Cape of Good Hope observations. Lacaille’s

far southern stars, whether well or ill observed by himself,

are all continued in the new Cape catalogue.

T. Mayer (1756) observed zodiacal stars mainly. These

are now in process of reobservation at Berlin.

Prof. Newcomb has lately prepared a catalogue of standard

and zodiacal stars; so that the observer or computer who

wishes to economize his labor had best avoid all stars within

6 degrees of the ecliptic; especially as the Greenwich observ-

atory, and also that at Wilhelmshaven, so far as its means

allow, are especially careful about stars near the moon’s

path from year to year.

The Lalande zones, including Fedorenko and D’Agelet,

Our Present State of our Knowledge of Stellar Motion. 147

have been or are to be reobserved in the great zones now

going on under the auspices of the Astronomische Gesell-

schaft, an international association having its seat at Leip-

zig. This reobservation is certainly sufficiently accurate to

compare with Lalande, whose single observations were

made with less accurate instruments than would now be

employed; and whose mistakes are many. His zones have

been fairly well reduced; and the lamented von Asten has

computed new tables of reduction for most of them.

Piazzi’s Palermo catalogue of 7,646 stars for 1800 needs a

new reduction. This would, however, be an enormous labor;

there are nearly 100,000 observations. Ten years’ iabor of a

skillful computer would at least be needed; and probably

this isa very lowestimate. The stars do not now need reob-

servation owing to the great zones just mentioned.

(sroombridge’s catalogue for 1810 of 4,243 stars needs also

arevision. But this would be much easier, as the original

manuscript calculations are preserved; and are probably

very free from mistakes. What is chiefly needed here is a

careful study of the azimuth correction of Groombridge’s

meridian circle.

William von Struve published a catalogue of right ascen-

sions for 1814 and 1815 in the first volume of the Dorpat

observations. This, probably, needs some little revision,

owing to its early date; and the same eminent observer con-

tinued this work during 1818 and 1819; but these latter

observations are unreduced.

Years’ work might readily be spent upon these right ascen-

sions of Struve; and would be important for the revision of

Groombridge, as the latter would be for that of Piazzi.

I have myself in progress a careful reobservation of the

stars observed by Struve, especially for the difficult region

within 10° of the north pole.

From the Greenwich observations of Bliss and Maskelyne,

not much can be obtained for the stars’ places. The plan-

ets, sun and moon, were the main subjects of Maskelyne’s

attention. §. Hertzsprung has reduced some of Maskelyne’s

work upon small stars,and I am myself calculating some

more of it for another purpose.

148 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

But Pond, who was Astronomer Royal from 1811 to 1835,

has left vast folios of observations; a good many of them

need a new reduction and discussion. It may, perhaps, be

hoped that the Greenwich authorities will accomplish this

work at some future period; it is probably not immediately

pressing.

Bessel, at Konigsberg, accumulated a great store of ob-

servations. Among them is the material for a considerable

catalogue of zodiacal stars, which a year’s work would per-

haps complete ready for press. It is all indexed and its

mean epoch would be 1830 or 1835. The stars contained in

it are also mostly in Piazzi and Mayer; but Bessel’s obser-

vations are so much better than these as to make up for

their comparative newness.

Something can also be made out of the same great astron-

omer’s work between 1814 and 1819 although, his instru-

ments were then very inferior to those employed later.

Another very useful, though very scattered, collection of

older star-places, mainly declinations, could be made up by

a careful study of the early latitude work of various astron-

omers from Mudge and Lambson, down to Bessel, Gauss

and Struve.

Struve’s great Dorpat catalogue, published in 1852, but

containing results of observations back to 1822, has been, I

believe, completely reobserved at Pulkova. So far as the

other catalogues for epochs about 1830 are concerned, I

fancy few of them need much reobservation; as they large-

ly contain identical stars.

A few stars in the Abo catalogue (Argelander’s of 1830)

need reobservation as well as rediscussion. My own copy

of this catalogue once belonged to the lamented Tiele, an as-

sistant at Bonn; and contains manuscript notes of results —

apparently calculated under Argelander’s direction, which

are nowhere else published as faras | know. The doubtful

stars ar? in all cases such as were imperfectly observed be-

fore Argelander, and so mentioned in his notes.

There is a class of several hundred stars which, although

visible to the naked eye, were only found in Lalande’s and

Bessel’s zones when Argelander placed them in the Urano-

The Present State of our Knowledge of Stellar Motion. 149

metria Nova. These were soon after observed by Hender-

son at Edinburgh, and by the Pulkova astronomers. They

are much needed for field work in latitude and longitude. I

have myself often missed accurate modern places for them,

and hope to see them soon catalogued. The Edinburgh cat-

alogue of Henderson is excellent in general plan, but is yet

unfinished. The astronomer who shall put it together from

the yearly volumes of 1834 to 1844 inclusive, will accomplish

a considerable service at comparatively trifling cost. And

these places begin to be old enough to serve as an old cata-

logue. The great Pulkova work of the same character is

vigorously in progress, and will be soon completed.

The old catalogues, then, which need re-reduction or com-

pilation, are these, with their epochs:

iaaAlmnic the. laneest Of, allio, os clara, sere slsinie os stevie = 35, eiaiaje on 1800

WHER ELE oso. Sich CREA EI BRU ic SIE CASO are Dr ean RS IL er eC 1756

GERD OEICSOF (LOVASION) © f. 5 Soviet 5 dG ce sis oe a eee cevs\e, Sa Seeds wee sare 1810

Siem CIECUMPOLAT AM cy taetetl Maat oe ose Me a teINy coats a celote al siereie ts 1815

onGi(tevision and: reealeulation): 25). 036 aise st esis weed at 1830

SE SSE ewe, OGLIAG AM ate cer ciay sus ies arates Stes ov aus geet atalta lene tape setlenrau wrap ahead ata Shorts 1830

Miscellancousilatitude stars. ..0...lscces ccc cine Saieae Bie ees ciate .. 1785-1830

BINED COPIA (COV PITE ALY OM) Fe cap sc fats 'aic,a cial omcicl xg Seta, sl s-ag dc anace Sail “eeley orale 1840

Of new star catalogues to be made I think the most im-

portant, next to the great zones several times mertioned,

which are now nearly done for the northern hemisphere, is

an accurate reobservation of all stars to the seventh magni-

tude inclusive, which are not now well known.

For the region south of the celestial equator there need be

little solicitude in this matter, as the powerful observatories

of the Cape, Melbourne and Cordoba have probably so

nearly filled the gaps left at northern stations, that we can

afford to wait till the results to date are completely published

for the two latter ones. And the extension to the Tropic of

Capricorn of the northern zones will show what farther is

acking.

North of the equator, the stars of the first four magni-

tudes are nearly all Pulkova fundamentals, and thus well

known, even where occasionally neglected at other places.

Those of the fifth and sixth magnitudes have either been, or

150 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

are about to be, carefully observed at Greenwich; our Coast

Survey has requested a few specially neglected ones of these

degrees of brightness to be attended to at three or four

places.

It may then be said that those astronomers who wish to

contribute to our knowledge of bright stars’ places, have

only to supply such observations as they themselves use

for semi-fundamental purposes, and observe stars of the

seventh magnitude; and a few brighter which may have

been neglected.

Ihave not yet mentioned the British Association Cata-

logue. This was published in 1852; its places and proper

motions were then inaccurate, and are now relatively much

worse, as great improvements have since been made in pre-

cision of observation. But the stars of this catalogue have

been greatly preferred in observatories, owing to its great

convenience as a working list; so that the general result

now is, that an astronomer who wishes to do anything not

superfluous, or liable soon to become so, must be very wary

in his work upon these stars.

I have myself long kept an index of them, showing where

and when their positions have been lately determined; and

have thus saved myself much labor. The index is not quite

complete, even for the northern hemisphere; a considerable

portion vf it is virtually published in my catalogue of 2,018

stars (Washington, War Department, 1879), and my manu-

scripts of the remainder are in such condition that I can

readily give authorities for any B. A. C. star north of the

equator.

When the great zones are published (this is to be expected

to take place in portions for the next ten years), they will

contain comparisons with several old authorities, and will

thus indicate many new stars whose proper motions are to

be looked for. They will consequently be referred to for this

purpose by every one interested in this subject.

Of least square discussions of this subject, published in

full, we have principally Madler’s Bradley, vols. 14 and 16 of

the Dorpat observations, and volume 7 of the Bonn observa-

tions, which contains two long memoirs by Argelander.

The Present State of our Knowledge of Stellar Motion. 161

Madler’s Bradley is in the main superseded by Auwers’

but is often convenient to refer to as an index and approxi-

mate check for such stars as were defectively or poorly ob-

served by Bradley.

Argelander’s papers are indispensable to any one who

wishes to master the subject; they have been excelled in

small details, hardly in general plan. The miscellaneous

list of considerable proper motions which the great astrono-

mer here gives deserves occasional reobservation, as many of

the stars were poorly observed before him.

There are four large catalogues lately published by four

departments of the United States government, viz.: Mr.

Boss’s declinations of 500 stars, by the State Department; my

own catalogue of 2,018 stars, both right ascensions and de-

clinations, by the War Department; Prof. Newcomb’s, of

1,098 stars, by the Navy Department; and the Coast Survey

list of 1,463, by the Treasury Department. The first is ad-

mirable in all respects; Prof. Boss took a great deal of pains

and spent much time; but the right ascensions are lacking,

My own work was for a practical end, which did not allow

either the means or the time for so complete a discussion of

four times as many stars;; but I think a great many trust-

worthy proper motions were detected by its means. I hope

by-and-by to observe the few stars in this catalogue which

are now at all uncertain, owing to lack of older opserva-

tions. Prof. Newcomb’s catalogue is, for the smaller non-

fundamental stars, much in the same condition as my own.

The coast survey computers have contented themselves with

the rather inaccurate proper motions of the B. A. catalogue,

and with a rather defective collection of modern authorities;

so that the present errors of their declinations are large.

They do not add right ascensions more accurate than to

whole seconds of time, which is, of course, entirely proper for

their purpose. In order to completely utilize for theoretical

purposes the three government catalogues first mentioned,

Mr. Boss’s needs to be completed by adding right ascensions,

and the other two —in fact all three — by revisions where-

ever the material at hand was deficient.

In the southern hemisphere, and especially in the southern.

152 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

most half of it, there are valuable discoveries by the Mel-

bourne observers and by Mr. Stone; and in the northern

hemisphere, and part of the southern, we have Auwers’

Bradley and the other compilations which have been just

mentioned. I estimate that probably two thousand stars in

the whole heavens have proper motions exceeding 0’.1 (a

tenth of a second) annually, which have already been cal-

culated by least squares, or some similar process, and only

need revision.

The field of investigation in this direction now open is, of

course, boundless; what needs to be done for the next twenty

years is mainly a critical study of the materials, their re-

duction to a fixed epoch and least square calculation there-

from, and adding (probably) a smaller amount of new ob-

servations than has been accumulating in a routine way,

without much plan, for the last half century; to say nothing

of the great catalogues which have been better planned. I

have not mentioned these newer catalogues in detail as they

are well known.

For the epoch 1900 it ought to be possible to construct a

catalogue like that of the British Association for 1850 in

general plan, but complete to the seventh magnitude, and of

great accuracy both in its positions and proper motions,

and before that time we ought to have a definitive settle-

ment of the problem of the solar motion, which will go far

to give us definite notions of the general structure of the

universe. For I have long ago shown that, in this way only

can we find much more about the average stellar distances.

FOURTEENTH ANNUAL MEETING.

DECEMBER 26, 27 anv 28, 1883.

PROGRAMME.

WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER 26th, 7:30 P. M.

Business Meeting — Reports of Officers.

THURSDAY, DECEMBER 27th,9 :30 A. M.

Unfinished Business.

Paper: “On Ancient Villagesamong Embiematic Mounds.”—Reyv, S. D.

PEET, Clinton.

Paper: ‘On Elephant Mounds.”— Rev. 8. D. PEET.

Paper: ‘Game Drives on the Mississippi River.”— Rev. 8. D. PEET.

Paper: ‘‘The Man Mounds.”— Rev. S. D. PEET.

AFTERNOON SESSION, 2:30 P. M.

Paper: “On the Distribution and Migration of Birdsin Outagamie and

Brown Counties.” —S. D. WILLARD, Depere.

Paper: “On the Principal of Duality.”— Prof. C. A. VAN VELZER,

Madison.

Paper: “Analysis of Water from Florence, Wis.” Pror. W. W. DAN-

IELLS, Madison.

Paper: “The Wisconsin Geological Survey on Upper Silurian Fossils.”

Dr. F. N. Day, Wauwatosa.

Paper: “Variation in Attraction due to the form of Attracting Bodies.”

D. P. BLACKSTONE, Berlin.

EVENING SESSION, 7:30 P. M.

Unfinished Business.

FRIDAY, DECEMBER, 28th, 9:30 A. M.

Paper: ‘On the Driftless Area.” — Prof. R. D. SALISBURY, Beloit.

Paper: ‘‘On Metamorphic Rocks.” — Prof. R. D. Irvine, Madison.

Paper: '“The Variation in Attraction due to the form of Attracting Bod-

ies.” D. P. BLACKSTONE, Berlin.

AFTERNOON SESSION, 2:30 P. M.

Paper: “On the Relation of Greek Art and Religion.” — Prof. J. EMER-

SON, Beloit.

Paper: “The Democracy of the Ancient Germans.”— Prof. W. F.

ALLEN, Madison.

Paper: “The Results of the Caroline Id. Eclipse Expedition.”— Prof. E.

S. HOLDEN, Madison,

Paper; ‘The Genera of the Family Attide.”— Prof. G. W., and ELIza-

BETH S. PECKHAM, Milwaukee.

154 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ANCIENT VILLAGES AMONG EMBLEMATIC

MOUNDS. ;

Rey. S. D. PEET, Clinton, Wis.

The subject which the author has set before himself in the

heading of this paper, is an important one and yet one

which is attended with peculiar difficulties. It is not an

easy task to take the silent monuments of the dead and to

people them with a living race. Even historic scenes when

once deserted and left in silent ruin are difficult to rehabili-

tate, but prehistoric scenes much more. Of all the prehis-

toric works none are more mysterious and difficult to explain

than are the emblematic mounds. There is an obscurity

about them which almost baffles investigation. The people

who built them are shadowy and unfamiliar as ghosts. For

one to enter into the study of their habits and ways and to

describe their modes of life is almost presumptuous. The

tokens are, however, before us. Other explorers have studied

monuments and from them given descriptions of unknown

people.

The villages of the emblematic mound-builders may, in-

deed, be different from the buried cities of the east and their

village life may contrast with the civilized state; yet this is

in accord with what is known concerning the mysterious

people. We are not to consider them asa civilized race, but

rather as arude and almst savage people. Their villages

are merely the habitations of a rude people and are to be

studied as much in their connection with their surroundings,

as in the works which are found upon their village sites.

This point will be considered by the reader as he follows the

line of thought, for there are many elements brought into

the account and they are all to be as exponents of the one

surrounding system. The treatment of the subject is mainly

from an archaeological standpoint. The only object of com-

parison is the villages of the later Indians. These, however,

differ so much in their tokens from the villages of the earlier

race, that they become sources of confusion and close anal-

Ancient Villages Among Emblematic Mounds. 155

ysis is required to distinguish the two classes of works. The

author has been careful to notice the differences between the

two and to make the subject definite. Our investigation is

to be among emblematic mounds and not other tokens and

the villages of which we are to speak are the villages of this

unknown people. There are several heads or divisions to

the snbject: ;

I. The existence of village life among the emblematic

mound-builders.

II. The probable characteristics of these villages.

III. The identification of these peculiarities or traits in

certain localities.

IV. The comparison of different localities as exhibiting

the same characteristics.

V. The contrasts which are presented by certain groups,

concerning which there are doubts whether they contain

village sites or not.

I. The existence of village life among the emblematic

mound builders is a point which has very great interest, and

which deserves especial attention. The proofs of this have

been lacking hitherto, although there are many facts which

have rendered it probable.

(1). In the first place it has been supposed that the

mound builders were in that stage of culture which would

render the village a necessity. They were passing out

from the stage of savagery and from a purely hunter’s

life into the agricultural state. This is evident from the fact

that garden beds are found associated with the mounds.

These garden beds differ from the corn fields of the Indians

as much as the elaborate works and effigies differ from the

ordinary burial mounds, and show that the mound builders

were superior to the later tribes.

Village life existed among the Indians. With them

there was the custom of raising the cereals combined with

the chasing of wild game and the subsistence upon fish.

With the mound-builders the same modes of life may have

prevailed, but village life would be more marked, inasmuch

as their culture was more advanced. The relics which are

found, as well as the works, indicate that a peaceable condi-

156 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

tion prevailed among the builders of the emblematic

mounds. These relics have been discovered in various parts.

of the state, and show that the copper age had been reached

by this unknown people. We do not say that the copper

age and village life were identical, but there was an approxi-

mation to the bronze age, and we know that the bronze age

was characterized by the prevalence of villages. Mining

was probably known to the mound-builders, and this

would render probable that village life had been reached.

(2). Again, the tradition and known customs of the later

tribes would render it probable that the mound builders.

dwelt in villages. The remark of Miss Fletcher in refer-

ence to the Dakotas is that they have favorite places to

which they resort for generation after generation, and, judg-

ing from the tokens furnished by the emblematic mounds,

we should say that the same custom prevailed among

them. Village life is known to have existed among the

Indians of this very locality, where the animal mounds are

found. There are many sites of villages which have been

identified by history. These differ from the sites of the

villages of the preceding race, but are often in the vicinity

of extensive groups of emblematic mounds. The record of

early explorers and travelers is that the natives dwelt in

villages, and the early maps locate these villages.

(3). The succession of races betokened by the earthworks

would show that village life had existed in the earliest

period. It is sometimes the case that the village site of a

later tribe will appear with a certain class of earthworks in

the vicinity, which differ from the works which belong to the

emblematic mound builders, yet render it probable that both

people built their mounds near their villages. It is one

point for the archzeologists to decide while studying the

‘mounds and earthworks, which works belong to the later

Indians and which to earlier mound builders.

(4). The universality of village life among uncivilized

races would prove that it existed among the emblem-

atic mound builders. This is a point which we shall

not stop to discuss, but shall take it for granted. The

similarity of village life is the point which we are to

Ancient Villages Among Emblematic Mounds. 157

examine. In reference to these there is, perhaps, more

uncertainty than in reference to the existence of vil-

lages. The study of the native life of the wild tribes may

furnish us some information in reference to their char-

acteristics and from our knowledge of the later tribes we

may ascertain what were the elements of the village con-

dition, but it is mainly by analogy that we predicate that

such elements existed among the mound builders. Wecarry

with us information from the living races to the extinct and

by one picture learn to interpret another filling up the out-

lines which have become obscure by the wear of time and

interpreting many things which would otherwise be inex-

plicable. | <

Again, IJ. The characteristics of village life are exhib-

ited or made known. These characteristics are as we have

seen, the selection of a locality favorable to subsistence,

the selection of a spot which would be convenient of access,

well guarded by its natural surroundings, and which should

be dry and favorable for the erection of houses. The tokens

that a village was located would be found in the existence

of mounds, earthworks and effigies around an enclosure,

in such a position as to give the idea of defense. The addi-

tional discovery of caches, springs of water, and other signs

of permanent residence, would be additional proof. The

existence of burial mounds in the vicinity of outlooks which

might serve as defenses and of altar mounds in the vicinity,

would prove that the locality had been occupied as

a place of residence. The existence of game drives and

of trails and gardens would be still further evi-

dent. The early explorers and travelers all speak of vil-

lages. It is very seldom that Indians were met with outside

of their villages, but there were many localities where vil-

lages were prevalent. The early maps have given the loca-

_ tion of many of the villages. According to these maps the

villages were situated on the water courses and lakes, and

were connected to one another by trails. Several villages

were situated on Green Bay, others on Lake Michigan, and

still others on the Mississippi river.

The study of these villages may give to us some hints as

158 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

to what constituted village life. We find striking analogies

between the locations of the earlier and the later races, for

the same places in which history describes villages to have

existed contain many monuments, which were evidently

works which belonged to the emblematic mound buildess.

The centers of population were the same and the same spots

were chosen for the residences of the two races. The ex-

ploration of the mounds reveals a striking similarity be-

tween the modes of life and in many places should seem

that these modes were carried out in exactly the same

places; the hunting grounds being the same, the village sites

the same, the defenses by lookouts the same, the burial places

in close proximity and all of the departments of life having

been conducted in the same scenes and having been repeated

by the two races. The only difference between them being

in the emblematic character of the mounds which the earlier

race erected. The characteristics of the villages of the

earlier race we conclude will be learned from the description

of those of the later races.

The early travelers and explorers found Indians dwelling

in villages, and from their descriptions we learn the charac-

teristics of village life. These characteristics areas follows:

1st. The selection of a locality favorable for hunting and

fishing, and at the same time accessible by rivers and trails

from other villages and from distant parts of the country.

2d. The selection of a favorable spot for residence and the

erection of houses or huts on some rise of ground overlook-

ing a stream or lake. 3d. The erection of certain defenses,

either stockade or a lookout station. This was a general

habit, although there were many villages in Wisconsin

which had no stockade and no visible defense. Asa substi-

tute, however, the villages were placed on land somewhat

remote from the water course, and so hidden by surround-

ing forests or hills that they could not be approached with-

out due warning being given. 4th. There were generally

near these villages burial places, either the rude structures

or graves protected by logs or rude planks, and the hollow

logs hung in trees near the stream or lake. 5th. There were

generally near the villages garden beds or corn fields, and

Ancient Villages Among E’mblematic Mounds. 159

always springs of water. 6th. In certain localities there

were arrangements or contrivances constructed from wooden

stockades by which game were entrapped. This was not

universal, but there are certain sketches in certain books,

especially in Champlain’s works, which illustrate the fact.

The Indians of Wisconsin are not known to have constructed

game drives, but the point is aninteresting one. 7th. There

are various traditions in reference to the attachments which

the Indians had for the localities where the villages were

situated, and in reference to the religious ceremonies which

were observed in or near their villages. These seven par-

ticulars we have here mentioned, because they illustrate

certain points which we have discovered in connection with

the emblematic mounds. The identification of a village site

surrounded by emblematic mounds, has led to the discovery

of the same characteristics, and proves interesting on this.

account. The mere discovery of a village site would not

avail much were there not some further information gained

from it. In describing the villages of the emblematic

mounds, we shall draw the comparison and speak of the

specific items or elements which seem to have been common

among the villages. We shall first refer to one particular

village and then show what its characteristics were and

then draw the comparison between this particular village.

and other supposed villages and from the aggregate draw

conclusions in reference to what constituted village life.

The identification of a village site among the emblematic

‘moundsis an interesting fact,and one worthy of notice in this

connection. Inthe first place it proves that the mound build-

ers dwelt in villages. This has indeed been rendered probable

by other facts, but has not been hitherto proved for a cer-

tainty. In the second place it furnishes a clue to a certain

class of works which have been supposed to mark village

sites, but concerning which there has been also much uncer-

tainty. These works have been discovered by the author in

various localities and the conjecture has often arisen that

they were village sites. The comparison between them and

the works which are known to have surrounded a village

now clears up the uncertainty.

160 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The identification of certain village sites will next engage

our attention. The method which we have pursued in iden-

tifying these sites is the one which we have already pre-

scribed. We have fixed in our mind what was the probable

characteristics of village life and then have studied the

mounds to see if these characteristics could be found in

them. We have, in fact, taken the picture of native society

‘as we have ourselves painted it and then have sought a

frame for the picture in the emblematic works. This is, in

our opinion, the only way in which a village site could be

identified. It was because we had framed some conception

of the people who erected the mounds and from the study of

their works had come to understand something of their

mode of life that we have made the discoveries which we

have.

The first place where a village site has been identified by

the writer is at Great Bend, on the Fox river, thirty miles

west of Milwaukee. Here is a series of works which Dr.

Lapham has described, and which have proved to be interest-

ing on many accounts. (1) A few words in reference to the

locality will be in place. Great Bend is situated at the edge

of the extensive forests which formerly stretched along the

lake shore, throughout the whole length of the state. Ata

point where the extensive system of prairies which charac-

terizes the scenery of the interior of the state intrudes upon

the forests near this place is an extensive marsh, wherein

are immense tracts of land filled with wild oats. There are

upon one side of the stream forests which abound with

game, especially with the beasts of prey and with the larger

class of birds, such as the wild turkey, wild goose, hawks

and eagles. On the other side are the prairies, where form-

erly abounded the grazing animals, such as the buffalo, elk,

wild deer, and the great variety of prairie birds, the marsh

and the river forming a favorite resort for ducks and wild

geese, and water fowls of various kinds. There arein the

vicinity many small streams and ponds where beaver and

muskrat would be numerous. The locality is, then, a favor-

able one for the permanent residence of a people.

The character of the region can be learned from the map

which we here present.

Ancient Villages Among Emblematic Mounds. 161

Sessa re

Seat ,

SSO MNS UM)

& A ty

Cee et ee

F-J-—e----}

TFRs

162 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Another point worthy of notice is that in the vicinity

there are high lands which command extensive prospects.

At this point there are extensive ridges which form promi-

nent points from which extensive views could be gained.

The geological formation is here noticeable. The Great

Bend was caused by the damming up of the stream in the

glacial period by great ridges of gravel which turned it from

its course, deflecting it to the eastward, for six miles or

more. At the point where the village is located the river

bursts through the barriers, leaving a high knob of land

upon the west side and gentle swells of ground upon the

east, making an extensive lake, or reedy and marshy

place to the north of the ridge, and throwing the region

to the south open to the ravages of fire, so that the prairie

crept up to the very edge of the stream atthat side. On this

ridge there are mounds and earthworks which correspond to

altar mounds and outlooks which have been discovered else-

where. In approaching the locality from the north one is

impressed with the sightliness of this bluff or ridge, for at

many intervals the ridge can be seen several miles away. It

is singular that as the writer approached it there were open

spots in the wooded hill top which attracted special notice,

and that these spots proved to be the very localities where

were outlooks and sacrificial mounds.

On reaching the locality the first thing which attracted at-

tention was the discovery of a panther effigy of remarkable

size and well defined shape. (See Fig. 2.) In following the out-

line of the effigy and reaching the head, it was discovered that |

the land was broken by a great number of pits, which proved

to be the caches of the village. These were situated on the

edge of a small pond, and near abeaver dam, but were hid-

den away in the forests and would not have been noticed ex-

cept for the proximity of the effigy.

There are many effigies which seem to guard caches as

this does, but none had so far been discovered near any vil-

vage site. Dr. Lapham describes one as situated at Indian

Prairie. Here the effigy is represented as guarding a low

mound. In the mound was a pit and upon the surface of

the soil were corn hills. The figure is given herewith for the

163

Ancient Villages Among Emblematic Mounds.

Fig. 2

164 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

sake of comparison. The effigy of a panther guarding the

caches at Great Bend is much more symmetrical than that

at Milwaukee. Dr. Lapham says that this ground is covered

with a present race of Indians who occupied the land in this

vicinity down to a very late period. The figure may be con-

sidered as a rude representation of a wolf or a fox

guarding the sacred deposits before it. Both of these

are of so little elevation as to be observed by the passer-by.

The body of the animal is 44 feet and the tail 63 in length.

The effigy which we discovered as guarding the caches near

the beaver dam was accompanied by several large platforms

o long mounds. One of them at right angles to the body

of the effigy and another several rods distant to the west;

these two having a parallel position. The caches were very

observable. There were twenty or more of them scattered

over the surface of the hill, but all of them in front of the

effigy. Passing over the small stream where was formerly

a beaver dam we came to other caches similarly situated,

but without any effigy near them. These were more

numerous than upon the other side, but were fully

as well as guarded, as they were hidden in the for-

est and were in the rear of a rise of ground, on which we

afterward discovered the site of the village itself. The exist-

ence of these caches was to us significant for it betokened

permanent residence. We have previously noticed the ad-

vantages of the locality. The forest, and marsh, and prairie

combined would lead one to expect a village somewhere in

the vicinity. The fact that extensive works had been de-

scribed also led to expectancy but the discovery of the caches

put us on the alert. .

(4) The situation of the village itself impressed us more than

the caches. It was on a rise of ground from which the water

flowed in every direction. The stream which we were cross-

ing formed a barrier upon the north side. The swale and

beaver dam and low land in which the stream headed

formed also a barrier to the spot on the east, separating the

village from the forests, making the approach to it inacces-

sible on that side. The river is some distance to the west, and

flows at an angle toward the tongue of land on which the

Ancient Villages Among Emblematic Mounds. 165

village is situated. Between the village and the river the

land is low, and so the spot is inaccessible except at one

point. At the south of the village site was another small

stream, which also heads in the swamp or springy land in

the rear of the village. The low land adjoining is covered

by a jungle of bushes and small trees, a fit place for the hid-

ing of wild animals, but abounding with berries and wiid

fruit of various kinds. Thesituation of the village on this

rise of ground was remarkable, because the spot was so fav-

orable in every respect. The peculiarity of the site is that

all the requisites of village life were furnished by it. It is

well guarded and drained, is surrounded by forests and

prairies, is well situated in relation to the river, the rice

swamps, the beaver dam and springs of water, was in a lo-

cality where the means of subsistence were furnished in

great abundance. Additional to these advantages was the

fact that, on the opposite side of the river, less than a mile

away, is the high bluff to which we have referred, and on

this bluff there proved to be mounds which undoubtedly

served as outlooks. The protection of the village was thus

secured by the locality as well as the means of subsistence.

The situation of the ground on which the village was located

was in the midst of swamps and low lands, which also served

for protection.

The evidence that this was a village site is as follows:

(a.) The selection of the locality with a view to subsist-

ence. The place for storing grain was furnished by the

hillside to which the approach was easy from the village

itself, but was diffieult from any other direction. The pres-

ence of springs near the village but in the rear of it secured

to the inhabitants a supply of water from which they could

not well be cut off. The presence of the game-drives shows

that the inhabitants depended upon wild game as well as

the products of the soil for their subsistence and the marshes

in the vicinity abound in wild rice. There may have been

the cultivation of maize, but no garden beds have been dis-

covered in the vicinity. The means of subsistence were fur-

nished by the forest, streams, lakes, and prairies.

166 Waosconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

(b.) The beauty of the spot and the advantages furnished

by the well-drained and shaded ground would indicate that

it had been used asa village site. Not all villages are as

favorably situated as this, but the advantages were too man-

ifest for any one to deny them in this case.

(5.) The artificial works of the locality impressed us.

The first object which engaged attention was the effigy of

a huge panther. This was situated on the edge of the hill

at a point where the small stream breaks through into the

valley of the Fox river. The effigy stretches along the brow

of this hill overlooking the valley of the river, its immense

body and tailforming a guard against approach to the

caches on the banks of the stream above, and protecting the

village site at this point. The effigy is a peculiar one; it

represents the panther as standing with head erect, the legs

straight, but the body extremely attenuated, as if the animal

was in the last stage of starvation. The position of the

effigy was also peculiar, while its immense body and tail

stretched along the hillside toward the little stream at the

north, and terminated at the very edge of the bluff in this

direction. Its head fronted the opening to the village itself,

and the attitude was as if the animal was looking directly

into the village, and was there watching and waiting for

some object that might satisfy its appetite. Such at least

was the impression made upon the imagination by the

figure. The contrast between this effigy and the one guard-

ing the caches in the rear of the village was marked. In

the first place the effigy was much longer and more

definitely marked. Again, it was situated on the brow of

the hill, overlooking the land adjoining. Its attitude and

shape were peculiar. Our conclusion was that the effigy was

stationed near the village site, with the head fronting the

opening, in the attitude as if guarding the gateway.

At the entrance of the village site there was a series of

oblong mounds. These mounds were arranged so as to

make a double guard; two of them formed an angle toward

the north, at the opening of which was the panther effigy

two others formed?an angle to the south, leaving openings

at either end and between them, but so arranged as to form

= Sse /

eg a al |

y VA pe Ks ~ \\ .

~ _-A

s N AUSIA) A

ys Bea \\\Zam

Sa me

Qw SN ra Pe

\ WZ

‘OS

| as

I VIN

AVR

C2.

S =e fog :

< . oe 3

E & 3 % x SS =

K te. a y < -

KG Se wees ) » B

V”) 2 { a / 4 :

S i y ; >

= PP | CA »

: igi on

= : aS Z

o ee p i

= LoJ Z Ze

LL SS * » B

S = : Z

. eae SS) ( = i

ae ame eS a

Ge << gs &

: ; =

-—

S&S

aa)

SS - : 5

<< Samay

a e

Ancient Villages Among Emblematic Mounds. 167

a guard to the entrance; beyond this, following along the

brow of a gentle slope of land were other oblong mounds.

A little further on to the south and west was another

panther effigy, the effigy this time situated at an opening

between the oblong mounds, but with the body running par-

allel with the mounds, and thus forming a guard across the

opening on the other oblong mounds and effigy mounds.

Here the effigy was that of an eagle or hawk which seemed

to guard the village on this side, and formed the bend of

the wall. Other oblong mounds were situated on the edge

of the rise of ground, forming a quasi wall at the south of

the enclosure, and turning back toward the north formed

also a partial wall upon the east side. The situation of the

village was on arise of ground within the enclosure, which

was formed by the oblong mounds. There was no evidence

of a stockade, but the earth-works so surrounded the village

and site that they may have served as a partial defense.

The entrances to the village were also guarded by mounds

which were peculiarly arranged. The one where the panther

effigy was had a double line of oblong mounds; the middle

entrance was also guarded by oblong mounds, but had no

effigies near it.

The means used for defending the locality prove that

it was a village. The enclosure covered an area of about

one hundred and sixty acres. The mounds surround

the edge of the enclosure forming afragmentary wall. They

needed only to be attended with stockades to form a splendid

defense against approaching enemies on three sides, while on

the other side the marsh and low land furnished a natural de-

fense. There was a double advantage or use to these oblong

mounds, while they furnished platforms from which warriors

could shoot approaching enemies. They also furnished plat-

forms on which the inhabitants could sit and watch the busy

life of the village within the enclosure. The entrance and

covered ways would indicate that there was a form of ar-

rangement of the houses, possibly streets ran through the

villages, and a square may have existed in the centre. Effi-

gies guarded the village at either side and gave the village

the sense of protection. (See Fig. 3.)

168 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The spot where the village is located is a beautiful one. It

is at present covered with a sturdy growth of oak trees and

isa very attractive place. The shade of the trees protects

the spot from the glaring heat of the sun during the warm

seasons, end the surrounding forest would protect also the

village from the sweeping winds and drifting snows during

the cold season. The presence of the caches and of the effi-

gies and oblong mounds show that it was a permanent

dwelling place. Asan additional protection to the village,

there were at the south of the village site a large number of

bird effigies. These are scattered over the surface of the hill

at this end of the village forming an abatis which might

serve both as a screen for hunters and as a guard against

the approach of an enemy.

The discovery of burial mounds in the vicinity indicated

also that it was a place of permanent residence. These

burial mounds were on the lowland adjoining the river.

They are so situated that they form an outlook along the

valley of the stream, but are in close proximity to the vil-

lage site itself. These mounds have not been excavated

but their shape and size would indicate that they were

burial mounds. ;

(6.) The outworks, or groups of mounds in the vicinity of

the village are worthy of notice. There are mounds on land

belonging to Mr. Rose, on section 26, one mile or more dis-

tant. These mounds are situated near the line of the bluff

overlooking the valley of the river, just at the point where

the stream and the marsh join. These mounds are nearly

obliterated, and their design could not be ascertained. They

were, however, so situated in relation to the river and marsh

and land adjoining, as to give rise to the idea that they

were used possibly for game ,drives. The effigies were in a

wheat field and could not be identified. The* out-works

which most interested us were those situated on the edge of

the same marsh or lake, three miles to the west. These have

been described by Dr. Lapham;* he calls them the mounds at

Crawfordsville, although there is no village there and never

was. The peculiarity of these works is that they are

*See Lapham’s Antiquities.

CRAWFORDSYILIE.

| -——___--—. —— —- —--—____—_.

ey a

sham,

Surveved ith

502 iy TA Laoy

SCALE

RO fa an lich,

Fig. 4.—bingies near Great bend,

WED

"YVAA

(LZ

——

X iH) S

fe “ly AW

‘ay

nee

ANAS

Wk Ay?

Ancient Villages Among E’mblematic Mounds. 169

stretched along parallel with one another, and form a group

~ resembling others which we have elsewhere identified as

game drives. An illustration of the group is here given It

will be noticed that the effigies are peculiarly situated and

shaped; they are unnaturally prolonged, and so placed in

reference to one another as to give the idea that they were

intended as screens for hunters, and as traps for wild game.

The arrangement of the ridges is not exactly in parallel lines,

but at angles, each effigy serving to make a narrow place

through which the animals would need to pass, and the ob-

long mounds forming guards to each opening, so that an

additional opportunity for shooting the game might be

furnished.

(7.) The most noticeable peculiarity of the region was the

discovery of a so-called altar mound. We mention this last

because it is the most suggestive and because it brings out

the point of analogy between the village life of the mound

builders and that of the Red Indians. There are no tradi-

tions connected with the locality but the religious significance

of this group of works is apparent. On the summit of the

hill overlooking the village itself is a small group of mounds,

consisting of three oblong mounds and one effigy. The oblong

mounds are situated on the brow of the bluff, and apparently

were designed to serve as guards tothe effigy. Theeffigy is

what we have called an altar mound, asit has the same shape

and situation with other mounds which have proved to con-

tain altars, and is one which has been found in various par-

ticulars. The figures of it willillustrate the point. (See Fig. 5.)

Itisamound formed by a combination of five mounds in one

the whole group making an effigy of an animal resembling the

horned toad or trog. A ridge which connects two tumuli or

conical mounds, forms the spine; four conical mounds situated

atthe corners formed the hips of the animals; the projections

which represent legs are blunt and w'thout particular re-

semblance to the animal formed. The distinguishing pecul-

iarity of the effigy is that its form is an exact repetition of

the shape of the bluff. The projections in the mounds imi-

tate on a small scale the spurs on the side of the bluff itself,

the two making a double effigy. As an additional feature

170 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

proving the religious character of the works, we may men-

tion the existence of two massive burial mounds. These are

situated on the low land below the bluff and between the

bluff and the river. They are massive, and may have been

the place where the bones of those who had been residents of

the villages were borne after death and deposited. The altar

mound was so situated that it could be seen from a great

distance. If there were fires lighted on it they would gleam

not only upon the waters and the river below, but they could

be seen for miles away. There is no doubt that this was the

place where sacrifices were offered and where religious cere-

monies were observed. The group furnishes a most distin-

guishing peculiarity of village life.

One point additional which we have not mentioned

is the line of communication of their villages in the

same region. The trails which communicated between

the villages of the Indians may prove an_ additional feature.

These trails are known, and have been identified and traced

by the author. The situation of the village on a well known

route is at least worthy of study.

It was situated on the line of the dividing ridge, which has

been used from time immemorial for a route from Lake Mich-

igan to the Mississippiriver. The route leads from Milwaukee

through Muskegon lake, on through the Great Bend, crossing

the Fox river; then at this point passes across the prairies

to the west until it reaches the Rock river. Hereit divides,

one route turning south towards Beloit and Rockton and an-

other towards Lake Koshkonong and the Four lake region

where Madison now is. Passing from here the route crosses

the dividing ridge between the Wisconsin river and the west-

ern branzhes of the Rock river, until it reaches the Blue

Mounds. From the Blue Mounds it crosses prairies to the

Platte Mounds and reaches the Mississippi river among the

bluffs somewhere about Cassville. At each of these local-

ities there are extensive works, showing that the same pop-

ulation and the same thoroughfares prevailed in prehistoric

times which prevailed in the historic, the modern villages

and cities having been placed on the very same sites where

the ancient villages were.

Ancient Villages Among Emblematic Mounds. atfal

The ancient trail was supplanted first by the stage route.

The railroad has now taken the place of both. This village site

has not been reached by the railroad although it was a fav-

orite project to connect the interior with the lake by this

route. The first plank road through the Milwauke mounds

was built from Great Bend and Muskegon to Milwaukee.

The first railroad struck the site of another native village,

that at Waukesha and then passed on tothe west. Proof

furnished by the thoroughfares of modern days may not

seem to be in point, and yet we take the ground that the

natural advantages of the country have led to the choice of

the same localities for residences, the same routes for travel,

and the same spots for centers of population throughout the

whole series of changes which have occurred both in his-

toric and prehistoric times.

The proofs that this was a village site do not need to be

dwelt upon longer. We only recapitulate the points which

have been illustrated in this case that we may understand

-what are the characteristics of village life among the em-

blematic mound builders generally. We have Ist, the sit-

uation of villages as regards the means of subsistance, (a)

on the edge of a forest and near a prairie abounding in wild

game; (b) in proximity to wild rice swamps and near streams

and forests where fruits and grains were abundant, (c.) it

was near rivers and lakes where fish could be procured, and

may have been a favorable position for the raising of maize

and horticultural products. 2d. The character of the ground

on which the village was located. (a.) It was isolated from

the river and from the surrounding country. (b.) It was a

favorable place for drainage and furnished favorable places

for hiding their stores of grain.

3rd. Provisions for defense: (a) fragmentary walls placed

on the edge of a hill; (b) effigies placed at the openings be-

tween; (c) a covered way, protecting the entrance to the

village.

4th. The outworks accompanying the village consisting of

(a) burial mounds; (b) game drives; (c) effigies protecting it;

(d) look-out mounds in a prominent position; (e) other works

designed to protect and to furnish means of subsistence.

172 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

5th. The evidences of religious observance: (a) the pres-

ence of the effigies surrounding the enclosure; (b) the num-

ber of burial mounds in the vicinity; (c) the altar and place

of cremation.

6th. The situation of the works as related to the surround-

ing country: (a) its connection by streams and trails with

other centres of population; (b) its location on a lake or

river; (c) the character of the country surrounding as fur-

nish opportunity of changing signals with distant points.

7th. The last characteristic and the chief is the presence of

the enclosure. In this case the enclosure was marked, and

affords undoubted evidence that a village was located here.

III. These evidences of village life have been dwelt upon,

for they are essential in fixing the points where other villages

were located. The comparison between this village of the

emblematic mound-builders and the known villages of the

later tribes have given us certain characteristics, but the

comparison is hereafter to be between one village of the un-

known people and other villages which may be presumably

fixed upon. It is a method of gradual approach.

IV. We proceed, now, to consider other village sites, and to

compare these with the one which has been identified. The

second locality where an ancient village has been identified

is at Waukesha. The points of .resemblance between the

two localities are as follows:

Ist. The locality was favorable for the subsistence of

a large population. The same forests which intervene

between the Fox river and the lake stretch north-

ward, and here forms a border line between wood

land and prairie, and between one form of natural

products and another, thus affording a double supply of

wild game and of nature’s cereals and fruits. The local-

ity is similar to that at Great Bend, in that there was an

extensive prairie bordering upon an extensive marsh, and

similar surroundings of high hills, and the same variety of

soil, At this place there were formerly extensive groups of

emblematic mounds, some of them on the prairie itself and

some of them in the openings surrounding, and some on the

summit of hills in the vicinity. It is evident from the na-

SECTION

OF THE

cHIGH HILL.

wo 4 Ca

Sh SS =

erambatell

Wig),

THEN PT

« TERRACE

MR Uh in

“ly,

F Yay

Fig. 6.—Map of Works at Waukesha.

Ancient Villages Among Hmblematic Mounds. 173

ture of the works that here had been a center of native

population. See map, Fig. 5.

The Fox river, also here furnishes a similar expanse of

marsh filled with wild oats. The advantages for gaining a

subsistence from the forests, and the stream and the open

prairie are similar to these found in the previous locality.

There are signs here of cultivation of the soil. (See Fig. 6.)

We quote from Dr. Lapham: “Much of the ground

about Waukesha was, in 1836, covered with Indian corn hills

or remains of the recent culture of maize. In this locality

as in numerous others, the mounds occupy the highest ground

and the points of hills and other places whence the most ex-

tensive view, both above and below can be obtained. The

town of Waukesha stands on a slightly undulating plain

surrounded by hills, forming a fine amphitheatre, which in

ancient times was doubtless crowded, as it is now, with nu-

merous population. One factis important in this connection

—the mound builders occupied the same localities that are:

now the favorite resort of the present Indians, who still

often make use of the mounds for the burial of their dead.

They have a kind of veneration for them which may be the

result of a lingering tradition. We need not look to Mexico

norany other country for the descendants of the mound

builders. We probably see them in the present red race in

the adjacent regions. Different tribes have different habits,

and a stronger one may have overrun and swallowed up a

weaker and then changed its customs and destroyed its in-

stitutions.

The corn hills found in this vicinity if they do not prove

that the mound builders were agriculturists, or that here

was an ancient village of the mound builders, at least they

show the advantages of the locality. There are caches near

Waukesha. <A gentleman, long resident of the country,

who owns a farm one mile east of the city, has pointed out

a number of these caches on his land. They are like those

at Great Bend, situated on the edge of a marsh and hidden

away among deep forests. There are no effigies guarding

these caches, and so we cannot ascribe them to the people

who built the emblematic mounds. The coincidence, how-

174 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ever, is worthy of thought for caches and corn fields indicate

village residence.

2nd. The situation of the village with relation to lookouts

and means of defense is worthy of notice. The reader

will examine the map and compare it with the map

at Great Bend and notice the occupied points in

both. There are near the village high bluffs as at

Great Bend. On these bluffs there are also emblematic

mounds, which possibly were used as lookouts. Two of

these groups overlook the village site; one which is not seen

on the map is situated 15 miles north of Waukesha. Dr.

Lapham has described this group and a diagram is taken

from his work. Hesays: “Ona high and very command-

ing position” are three round mounds in front of four

“lizard mounds.” They are at the crossing of the old Mad-

ison road in the southwest quarter of Sec. 26 A. A sentinel

stationed on them could give warning to the inhabitants on

‘the approach of any hostile force long before they could

reach the village. The lizards as in most other cases have

their heads toward the south. “The general situation, dis-

tribution of the mounds as well as the topographical features

of the country will be represented in the map.” It will be

noticed that they occupy three levels, those in the lower part

mostly conical (probably Indian burial places those on the

upper are on what may be called the second bank, others are

on the high land east and south of the village.

We have referred to the turtle mound as forming a look-

out. One of the most remarkable specimens of the turtle was

found by Dr. Lapham at this place. The location of this

would indicate that it was designed as a lookout to protect

the village from approach by way of the river. The high

bluff, called bird hill, is situated about one mile east of this.

A description of this bird hill and its effigies has been given

and does not need to be repeated. The village site was upon

the grounds of Carroll College.

3rd. The form of the enclosure and the character of the

ground are very similar to those found at Great Bend. Dr.

Lapham says, the mounds forma quasi enclosure, and hence

like many other groups of works, has been, by casual ob-

PB salen ccs pans

ecb . ‘

OWL ae ‘

cise ’ {ese

+ “J

: iy ‘i

1 es . °

ee . is ‘

¥ y

C ‘

* . 55

' 4

k ie

. Py

\ r

¥ 4

i i ¥

‘ \ y

}

’ fe

x ey

o Lee i

Lea Vey

. , i

¥ . o

‘

h iy ' 4

tn aN iG)

N 2)

COLLEGE.CROV

Za, Wa

—-

Fig. 7.-- Ancient Village on College Campus at Waukesha.

Ancient Villages Among Emblematic Mounds. 175

servers, called a fort. If we were not well acquainted with

the works in Ohio and elsewhere, which show that the

mound builders were considerably advanced in military arts,

we might suppose that this was intended for a rude fortifi-

cation, but we can only regard it as an accidental arrange-

ment, and not designed for any such purpose. Dr. Lapham’s

first impression of this locality was, however, a correct one.

The mound builders’ works were not all alike, and the sys-

' tem of defense which existed in Ohio would not be very likely

to have appeared in Wisconsin. The emblematic mound

builders defended their villages in a way peculiar to them-

selves. These fragmentary walls surrounding an enclosure

were the means of defense by which the people guarded

their villages. The ground on which the village is located

is surrounded by low land, the same as that at Great Bend.

The oblong mounds are erected near the edge of the rise

of ground, and form a broken wall around the whole,

making four sides of an enclosure, instead of three, as was

the case in the former village. (See Fig. 7.)

4th. The effigies are quite similar. There are panther and

wolf effigies both on the summit of the hill and upon its

side. The effigies form a guard or defense to the enclosure

and fillin the spaces between the oblong mounds. There

is also a similar arrangement of parallel mounds which

‘may be considered as forming the village, resembling that at

Great Bend, but farther removed from the circumvallation

and not so distinctly marked asa covered way. Still the

analogy is worthy of notice.

5th. Thecovered way is another indication of a village site.

There are or may be vilage sites which do not have this, but the

parallel walls which lead to an enclosure may be generally

regarded as an evidence that a village site has been reached.

This is true, both among the emblematic mounds of Wiscon-

sin and the earth-works of Ohio. Whether any such covered

way can be found in other localities, it is true that in these

two states it is peculiar to village sites. Marietta and New-

ark, Great Bend and Waukesha, may be compared, as the

same feature is common to all.

176 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

6th. The outworks are similar to those a Great Bend.

The hunting grounds which belong to this village are

not found nearer than Pewaukee, which is about six miles

away. There are works, there, however, which have been

described, by Dr. Lapham, and which have considerable

resemblance to the works at Crawfordsville.

Another game drive has been discovered by the author on

the very edge of Pewaukee lake. Here the mounds, which

are all oblong mounds, are arranged in a peculiar position,

making angles and open places along the brow of a bluff, as

if the purpose was to make screens for hunters and traps for

game. Whether these two series of works can be connected

with the village site at Waukesha is a question, but we refer

to them as among the items which make up the comparison

between the villages.

V. Another locality where a village has been presuma-

bly identified is at Muscoda. The peculiarity here is that

the enclosure was hidden away from observation by sur-

rounding hill-tops, and was so remote from the river as to be

entirely out of sight of any one who might be passing along

the river. The enclosure is in a valley or swale, and has a

number of effigies surrounding it. The effigies are all of

them eagles. This village site has a number of game drives

in proximity to it; two of them are situated on the same

stream, only a mile or two away. The position of the

enclosure is peculiar. The effigies and the fragmentary

walls surround a swale, the land enclosed being much lower

than that on which the effigies are placed. There are look-

outs on a hill top three miles away, and there are nine wards

or walls of defense in two separate lines between this place

and the river. The spot is drained by waters of two small

streams which make their head near this enclosure, Indian

creek and Mill creek. The region is a favorable one for a

village site. There are several particulars in which this en- -

closure resembles a village site.

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds. 17?

MIGRATION AND DISTRIBUTION OF NORTH AM-

ERICAN BIRDS IN BROWN AND OUTAGAMIE

COUNTIES.

By S. W. WILLARD, West De Pere, Wis. (1883.)

This paper was prepared from recorded observations. It

gives a systematic series of facts from which the general-

izations of Messrs. Baird and Allen may be again applied.*

Brown County is well adapted for such a system of ob-

servation. The warm, short summers succeeded by the

long cold winters mark distinctly each movement. The

vernal and autumnal movements through these counties are

large, thousands of migrants of species that are to some ex-

tent summer residents, pass us on their way to less crowded

areas. These with the other migrants swell the throng to

numbers almost incalculable.

To facilitate this study I have arranged the species in di-

visions based upon their migratory habits while in these

counties. |

Cuass I. Birds that are represented in this section

throughout the year, but whose numbers vary in the differ-

ent seasons. Members of this class may properly be called

“residents.”

+1. Parus atricapillus, L.

Black capped chickadee.

2. Sitta carolinensis, Gm.

White bellied nuthatch.

38. Cyanocitta cristata, (L.) Strickl.

Blue jay.

4, Picus vill sus, L.

Hairy woodpecker.

5. Picus pubescens, L.

Downy wceodpecker.

*Amer. Journal Sci. 1866, pp. 78, 184, 227 (Baird.) Scribner’s Monthly

1881, pp. 932 (Allen.)

+Nomenclature from Coues’ “ Check list of N. A. Birds.”

178 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

6. Bubo virginianus, (Gm.) Bp.

Horned owl.

‘7. Scops asio, (L.) Bp.

Screech owl.

“8. Strix nebulosa, Forst.

Barred owl.

9. Cupidonia cupido, (L.) Bd.

Prairie hen.

10. Bonasa umbella, (L.) Steph.

Ruffled grouse.

11. Passer domesticus, (L.) Koch.

English sparrow.

(Although net a native of America, yet its increasing numbers and

familiar habits bring it so prominently into view that to omit it would

be unfair.)

Cxuass Il. Includes the true migrants or those birds in

which the migratory instinct is so strong as to urge onward

their movements regardless of weather or the food supply.

1. Turdus migratorius, L.

Robin. (Breeds.)

2. Turdus fuscescens, Steph.

Wilson’s thrush.

3. Turdus unalasce nanus, (Aud.) Coues.

Hermit thrush.

4, Turdus ustulatus aliciez, (Bd.) Coues.

Alice’s thrush.

5. Turdus ustulatus swainsoni, (Cab.) Coues.

Olive backed thrush.

6. Mimus carolinensis, (L.) Gr.

Cat bird. (Breeds.)

7. Harporhynchus rufus, (L.) Cab.

Brown thrush. (Breeds.)

8. Sialia sialis, (L.) Hald.

Blue bird. (Breeds.)

9. Regulus calendula, (L.) Licht.

Ruby crowned kinglet.

10. Regulus satrapa, Licht.

Golden crowned kinglet,.

11.

12.

13.

14,

15.

16.

18.

19.

20.

21,

27.

28.

29.

30,

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds.

Troglodytes domesticus, (Bartr.) Coues.

House wren. (Breeds.)

Telmatodytes palustris, (Bartr.) Cab.

Long billed marsk wren. (Breeds.)

Cistothorus stellaris, (Licht.) Cab.

Short billed marsh wren. (Breeds in Outagamie Co.)

Anthus ludovicianus, (Gm.) Licht. © A

Titlark. Ws

Mniotilta varia, (L.) V.

Black and white creeper. (Breeds.)

Parula americana, (L.) Bp. © <s

Blue yellow-backed warbler. (Breeds.)

Helminthophaga chrysoptera, (L.) Bd.

Blue golden winged warweler. (Breeds.)

Helminthophaga ruficapilla, (Wils.) Bd.

Nashville warbler.

Helminthophaga celata, (Say) Bd.

Orange crowned warbler.

Helminthophaga peregrina, (Wils.) Cab.

Tennessee warbler.

Dendrceca aestiva, (Gm.) Bad.

Summer warbler. (Breeds.)

Dendroeca virens, (Gm.) Bd.

Black throated green warbler.

Dendroeca ceerulescens, (L.) Bd.

Black throated blue warbler.

Dendrceca coronata, (L.) Gr.

Yellow rumped warbler.

Dendroeca blackburniz, (Gm.) Bd,

Blackburn’s warbler.

Dendrececa striata, (Forst ) BJ.

Black poll warbler.

Dendrceca castanea, (Wi's.) Bd.

Autumnal warbler.

Dendroeca pennsylvanica, (L.) Bd.

Chestnut sided warbler. (Breeds.)

Dendroeca maculosa, (Gm.) Bd.

Black and yellow warbler.

Dendreeca tigrina, (Gm.) Bd.

Cape May warbler.

(bs

32.

33.

34,

30.

36.

37,

40,

41.

42.

45,

46.

47.

48.

49,

50.

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Dendreeca palmarum, (Gm.) Bd.

Yellow red poll warbler.

Dendreeca pinus, (Bartr.) Bd.

; Pine creeping warbler.

Siurus auricapillus, (L.) Sw.

Golden crowned thrush. (Breeds.)

Siurus neevius, (Bodd.) Coues.

Water thrush. (Breeds.)

Geothlypis trichas, (L.) Cab.

Maryland yellow throat. (Breeds.)

Myiodioctes pusillus, (Wils.) Bp.

Green black capped warbler.

Myiodioctes canadensis, (L.) Aud.

Canadian fly catching warbler.

Setophaga ruticilla, (L.) Sw.

American redstart. (Breeds.)

Pyranga rubra, (L.) V.

Scarlet tanager. (Breeds.)

Hirundo erythrogastra horreorum, (Bartr.) Coues.

Barn swallow. (Breeds.)

Tridoprocne bicolor, (V.) Coues.

White bellied swallow. (Breeds.)

Petrochelidon lunifrons, (Say) Cab.

Eave swallow. (Breeds.)

Cotile riparia, (L.) Boie.

Bank swallow. (Breeds.)

Stelgidopteryx serripennis, (Aud){Bd.

Rough winged swallow. (Breeds Outagamie Co.)

Progne subis, (L.) Bd.

Purple marten. (Breeds.)

Ampelis cedrorum, (V.) Bd.

Cedar bird. (Breeds.)

Vireo olivaceus, (L.) V.

Red eyed greenlet. (Breeds.)

Viveo philadelphicus, Cass.

Brotherly love vireo.

Vireo gilvus, (V.) Bp.

Warbling vireo. (Breeds.)

Vireo flavifrons, V.

Yellow throated vireo. (Breeds Outagamie Co )

51.

52.

53.

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds.

Vireo solitarius, V.

Blue headed vireo.

Lanius ludovicianus excubitorides, (Sw.) Coues.

White rumped shrike. (Breeds.)

Passerculus sandvicensis savanna, (Wils.) Ridg.

Savanna sparrow. (Breeds.)

Pocecetes gramineus, (Gm.) Bd.

Grass finch. (Breeds.)

Melospiza lincolni, (Aud.) Bd.

Lincoln’s song sparrow.

Melospiza palustris (Bartr.) Bd.

Swamp song sparrow. (Breeds).

Melospiza fasciata, (Gm.) Scott.

Song sparrow. (Breeds.)

Spizella domestica, (Bartr.) Coues.

Chipping sparrow. (Breeds.)

Zonotrichia albicollis, (Gm.) Bp.

White-throated sparrow. (Breeds Outagamie Co.)

Zonotrichia leucophrys, (Forst.) Sw.

White-browed sparrow.

Chondestes grammicus, (Say) Bp.

Lark finch. (Breeds.)

Passerella iliaca, (Merr.) Sw.

Fox colored sparrow.

Zamelodia ludoviciana, (L.) Coues.

Rose breasted grosbeak. (Breeds.)

Passerina cyanea, (L.) Gray.

Indigo bird. (Breeds.)

Pipilo erythrophthalmus, (L) V.

Chewink. (Breeds.)

Dolichonyx oryzivorus, (L.) Sw.

Bobolink. (Breeds.)

Molothrus ater, (Bodd.) Gray.

Cow bird. (Breeds.)

Xanthocephalus icterocephalus, (Bp.) Bd.

Yellow headed blackbird.

Sturnella magna, (L.) Sw.

Meadow lark. (Breeds.)

Icterus galbula, (L.) Coues.

Baltimore oriole. (Breeds.)

181

90.

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Quiscalus purpureus, (Bartr.) Licht.

Purple grackle. (Breeds.)

Tyrannus carolinensis, (L.) Bd.

King bird. (Breeds.)

Myiarchus crinitus, (L.) Cab.

Great crested fly-catcher. (Breeds Outagamie Co.

Sayiornis fusca, (Gm.) Bd.

Phoebe. (Breeds.)

Contopus virens, (L.) Cab.

Wood pewee. (Breeds.)

Empidonax minimus, Bd.

Least fly-catcher. (Breeds.)

Empidonax flaviventris, Bd.

Yellow bellied fly-catcher.

Antrostomus vociferus, (Wils.) Bp.

Whip-poor-will. (Breeds.)

Chordediles popetue, (V.) Bd.

Night hawk. (Breeds.)

Cheetura pelasgica, (L.) Steph.

Swift. (Breeds.)

Trochilus colubris, L.

Ruby throated hummer. (Breeds.)

Ceryle alcyon, (L.) Boie.

Kingfisher. (Breeds.)

Coccygus erythrophthalmus, (Wils.) Bd.

Black billed cuckoo. (Breeds.)

Coccygus americanus, (L.) Bp.

Yellow billed cuckoo. (Breeds.)

Sphyropicus varius, (L.) Bd.

Yellow bellied woodpecker. (Breeds.)

Melanerpes erythrocephalus, (L.) Sw.

Red headed woodpecker. (Breeds.)

Colaptes auratus, (L.) Sw.

Flicker. (Breeds.)

Asio wilsonianus, (Less.) Coues.

Long eared owl. (Breeds.)

Asio accipitrinus, (Pall.) Newt.

Short eared owl.

Circus cyaneus hudsonius, (L.) Coues.

Marsh hawk. (Breeds.)

91,

92.

93.

94,

95.

96.

Migration ana Distribution of North American Birds. 183

Accipiter fuscus, (Gm.) Bp.

Pigeon hawk.

Accipiter cooperi, Bp.

Cooper’s hawk. (Breeds.)

Falco columbarius, L.

Pigeon falcon.

Falco sparverius, L.

Sparrow hawk.

Buteo borealis, (Gm.) V.

Hen hawk.

Ectopistes migratorius, (L.) Sw.

Wild pigeon. (Breeds.)

Zenaidura carolinensis, (L.) Bp.

Carolina dove. (Breeds.)

Squatarola helvetica, (L.) Cuv.

Black bellied plover.

Charadrius dominicus, Mill.

Golden plover.

Adgialites vociferus, (L.) Cass.

Kildeer plover. (Breeds.)

AXgialites semipalmatus, (Bp) Cab.

Ring neck plover.

Lobipes hyperboreus, (L.) Cuv.

. Northern phalarope.

Philohela minor, (Gm) Gr.

Woodcock. (Breeds.)

Gallinago wilsoni, (Temm.) Bp.

Wilson’s snipe. (Breeds.)

Ereunetes pusillus, (L.) Cass.

Semipalmated sandpiper.

Actodromas minutilla, (V.) Coues.

Least sandpiper.

Actodromas bairdi, Coues.

Baird’s sandpiper.

Actodromas maculata, (V.) Cougs.

Jack snipe.

Pelidna alpina americana, (Cass.) Allen.

Dunlin.

Symphemia semipalmata, (Gm.) Hartl.

Willet.

184 . Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

111. Totanus melanoleucus, (Gm.) V.

Greater tattler.

112. Totanus flavipes, (Gm.) V.

Lesser tattler.

118. Rhyacophilus solitarius, (Wils.) Bp.

Solitary tattler. (Breeds Outagamie Co.)

114. Tringoides macularius. (L.) Gr.

Spotted sandpiper. (Breeds.)

11. Tryngites rufescens, (V.) Cab.

Buff breasted sandpiper.

116. Ardea herodias, L.

Great blue heron. (Breeds.)

11%. Botaurus mugitans. (Bartr.) Coues.

Bittern. (Breeds.)

118. Rallus virginianus, L.

Virginia rail. (Breeds Outagamie Co.)

119. Porzana carolina, (L.) V.

Common rail. (Breeds.)

120. Anas boscas, L.

Mallard. (Breeds.)

121. Anas obscura, Gm.

Black mallard.

122. Dafila acuta, (L.) Jen.

Pintail. (Breeds Outagamie Co.)

128. Chaulelasmus streperus, (L.) Gr.

Gadwall.

124. Mareca americana, (Gm.) Steph.

Widgeon.

125. Querquedula carolinensis, (Gm.) Steph.

Green winged teal.

126. Querquedula discors, (L.)* Steph.

Blue winged teal. (Breeds.)

127. Spatula clypeata, (L.) Boie.

Shoveler.

128. Aix sponsa, (L.) Boie.

Wood duck. (Breeds.)

129. Mergus merganser, L.

Merganser or fish duck.

130. Mergus serrator, L.

Red breasted merganser.

181.

132.

133.

134,

135.

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds. 185

Mergus cucullatus, L.

Hooded merganser. (Breeds.)

Sterna hirundo, L.

Common tern.

Hydrochelidon lariforniis, (L.) Coues.

Black tern.

Podicipes cornutus, (Gm.) Lath.

Horned grebe.

Podilymbus podiceps, (L.) Lawr.

Hell diver.

Cuass III: Birds that are migratory but whose move-

ments through these counties seem greatly influenced by

changes of temperature. A moderate variation in our win-

ter would undoubtedly cause many individuals of these spe-

cies to become “ winter residents” in this locality.

rh)

“10.

11.

Certhia familiaris, L.

Brown creeper. (Breeds.)

Sitta canadensis, L.

Red bellied nuthatch.

Eremophila alpestris, (L.) Boie. (var. praticula, Henshaw, 1884)

Horned lark. (Breeds.)

Lanius borealis, V.

Butcher bird.

Carpodacus purpureus, (Gm.) Gr.

Purple finch. (Breeds.)

Astragalinus tristis, (L.) Cab.

Yellow bird. (Breeds.)

Junco hiemalis, (L.) Sel.

Snow bird.

Spizella monticola, (Gm.) B1}.

Tree sparrow.

Agelzeus pheeniceus, (L.) V.

Red winged blackbird. (Breeds.)

Scolecophagus ferrugineus, (Gm.) Sw.

Rusty grackle.

Corvus frugivorus, Bartr.

Crow. (Breeds )

186 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

12. Astur atricapillus, (Wils.) Bp.

Goshawk.

18. Archibuteo lagopus sancti-johannis, (Gm.) Ridg.

Rough-legged buzzard.

Cuiass IV. Birds that are migratory, but whose move-

ments, with those of Class III., are influenced to a great

extent by immediate changes of temperature. In this

class the southward movement is deterred until the freezing

of our bays and rivers. Pot hunters for many seasons past

have taken most of the following species, up to the very day

of freezing up:

1. Fulica americana, Gm.

Coot

2. Chen hyperboreus, (Pall.) Boie.

Snow goose.

38. Bernicia canadensis, (L.) Boie.

Canada goose.

4, Haliaetus leucocephalus, (L.) Savig.

Bald eagle. (Breeds).

5. Bernicla canadensis hutchinsi, (Rich.) Coues.

Hutchin’s goose.

6. Fuligula marila, (L.) Steph.

Greater black head.

7. Fuligula affinis, Kyt.

Lesser black head.

8. Fuligula collaris, (Donov.) Bp.

Ring neck duck. (Breeds Outagamie Co.)

9. Fuligula ferina americana, (Eyt.) Coues.

Red head.

10. Fuligula vallisneria, (Wils.) Steph.

Canvas back.

11. Clangula glaucium, (L.) Brehm.

Golden eye. (Breeds Outagamie Co.)

12. Clangula albeola, (L.) Steph.

Buffle head.

13. Harelda glacialis, (L.) Leach.

Long tailed duck.

14,

15.

16.

lve

18.

19.

20.

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds.

(&idemia americana, Sw.

Black scoter.

(Kdemia fusca, (L.) Flem.

Velvet scoter.

Erismatura rubida, (Wils.) Bp.

Ruddy duck.

Larus argentatus, Briion.

Herring gull.

Larus delawarensis, Ord.

Ring billed gull.

Chroicocephalus philadelphia, (Ord.) Lawr.

Bonaparte’s gull.

Colymbus torquatus. Brinn.

Loon.

187

Ciass V.— Birds from northern sections that visit us

each fall. Some of the species remaining throughout the

winter, others appearing irregularly during the colder

months.

1, Anorthura troglodytes hiemalis, (Wils.). Coues.

Winter wren. (A few breed in Outagamie Co.)

2. Ampelis garrulus, L.

Bohemian waxwing.

3. Pinicola enucleator, (L.) V.

Pine grosbeak.

4, Loxialeucoptera, Gm.

Whi e winged crossbill.

5. Loxia curvirostra americana (Wils.) Coues.

Commoa crossbill,

6. A®giothus linaria, (L.) Cab.

Red-poll linnet.

7, Chrysomitris pinus, (Bartr.) Bp.

Pine linnet.

8. Plectrophanes nivalis, (L.) Meyer.

Snow bunting.

9. Centrophanes Japponicus, (L.) Kaup.

Lapland longspur.

10. Perisoreus canadensis, (L.) Bp.

Canada jay.

188 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

11. Picoides arcticus, (Sm.) Gray.

Black backed three-toed woodpecker.

12. Nyctea scandiaca, (L.) Newt.

Snowy owl.

18. Nyctala acadica, (Gm.) Bp.

Saw whet owl. (Breeds.) ;

Cuass VI. Birds whose visitations are so rare as to com-

pel me to place them in my list either as a stray from other

sections, or as one whose regular occurrences have escaped

my notice.

1. Turdus mustelinus, Gm.

Wood thrush.

I have found but one pair of these birds in Brown county, and they

were nesting; the nest contained three eggs.

Protonotaria citrea, (Gm.) Bd.

Prothonotary warbler.

A single specimen was taken May 4, 1883, by Mr. F. L. Grundtvig, at

Shiocton.

3. Spizella agrestis, (Bartr.) Coues.

Field sparrow.

A southerly bird, taken in Brown Co. only a few times in 1882.

4, Junco hiemalis oregonus, (Towns.) Coues.

Oregon snow bird.

A specimen of Junco was taken in W. De Pere October 6th, 1883,

the markings (identified by Coues) inclined strongly towards oregonus

5. Icterus spurius, (L.) Bp.

Orchard oriole.

Noticed but twice in Brown Co.

6. Hylotomus pileatus, (L.)/Bd.

Pileated woodpecker.

Heavier timber seems to be all that is necessary to make this spe.

cies a resident in Brown Co.

%. Pandion haliaetus, (L.) Sav.

Fish hawk.

Only occasionally seen in Brown Co.

8. Corvus corax, L.

Raven.

I have taken but one specimen in Brown Co.

10,

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds. 189

Centurus carolinus, (L.) Bp.

Red bellied woodpecker.

A rare spring visitor.

Cathartes aura, (L.) Ill.

Turkey buzzard.

None seen in Brown Co., a few were noticed by Mr. F. L. Grundt-

vig in Outagamie Co.

Ortyx virginiana, (L.) Bp.

Quail.

I have not met this species in Brown Co., although Louis Sheller,

Green Bay,has a mounted specimen which he claims to have taken

here.

Strepsilas interpres, (L.) Il.

Turnstone.

June 2, ’82, a flock of 5 of these birds were seen near West De Pere,

3 were taken.

Limosa foeda, (L.) Ord.

Marbled godwit.

Louis Scheller reports having taken this species near Green Bay

I have not found it.

Bartramia longicauda, (Bechst.) Coues.

Field plover.

May ist ’82, a single specimen was taken by Harry Hammond in

West De Pere.

Butorides virescens, (L.) Cab.

Green heron.

Mr. F. L. Grundtvig saw a single specimen near Shiocton, Outa.

gamie Co.

Ardetta exilis, (Gm.) Gr.

Least bittern.

May 20th ’83, a male of this species was taken near West De Pere.

Gallinula galeata, (Licht.) Bp.

Florida gallinule.

Subsequent observation (1884) warrants the insertion of this spe-

cies in Class II.

Chen hyperboreus albatus, (Cass.) Ridg.

Lesser snow goose.

April 22d ’81, a single specimen was taken on the shore of Fox

River near De Pere.

Summing up the above six classes, I find the avian fauna

of Brown and Outagamie counties, to consist of two-hundred

190 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

and ten species. Eleven are residents throughout the year.

Eighteen are strays or very rare visitors. Highty-seven are

summer residents, and ninety-four are through migrants.

Of the above residents and migrants, one-hundred species

have been known to breed in either Brown or Outagamie

counties.

In the foilowing table, I have attempted to compare the

arrival of our migratory birds, for the years 1882 and 1883;

giving as data, the results of Mr. F. L. Grundtvigs’s observa-

tions at Shiocton, and mine at West De Pere.

Great value should especially be placed upon the observa-

tions of Mr. F. L. Grundtvig, while at Shiocton, for during

these observations, his whole time was constantly devoted

to the work. The collecting trips, usually made twice each

day, took him through varied places, on both land and

water.

Each arrival was recorded after personal observation and

careful study. Few species escaped his notice, and no arrival

to my knowledge, was omitted from his daily record.

Care should be exercised in using my notes with his.

Although I have been very careful to record each arrival,

and note every fact of interst respecting our birds, yet,

owing to the many hurried trips that I was obliged to take,

arrivals of the more shy and retiring species unquestion-

ably escaped my notice, until increasing numbers made

them more conspicuous. At times, a day or so would pass

without the customary tramp; but afterwards, I was slow

to record any species, whose abundance indicated that they

had arrived during my absence. This partly explains a

number of the instances where “ A” in the following tab le

has been placed among the Brown County arrivals.

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds.

191

ARRIVAL OF MIGRANTS IN BROWN AND OUTAGAMIE COUNTIES

CONSECUTIVELY COMPARED FOR THE YEARS 1882 AND 1883.

: s 5 BS

EAs) ga et an

oD @e > So om Gel =

4 fo} =

a BO WE 0

<4 Oe <5 sg te

reais) ne Bee ne

R65 Z Ad HS Ho

Ee es ea ca

Turdus migratorius........... Feb. 26 | Mar. 10 || Mar. 22 | Mar. 26.

Turdus fuscescens ............ May 10} May 8 || May 22 A.*

Turdus unalasce nanus....... April 10 | April 22 || April 22 | April 5

Turdus ustulatus swainsoni ...| May 10 Bt B. B.

Mimus carolinensis ........... May 9 | May 14 || Mav 8 | May 14

Harporhynchus rufus......... May 7| May 18 B. April 11

Sialliey Giz Nee & cee ee Sone Mar. 3} Mar. 14 || Mar. 29 Mar. 29

Regulus calendula............ April 10 | April 14 || April 11 | April 10

Regulus satrapa .............. April 9 | April 3 || April 9 | April 5

Certhia familiaris............. Mar. 28 | April 6 || Mar. 20]| April 9

Troglodytes domesticus ....... May 5j| May 13 || May 7| May 12

Telmatodytes palustris........ May 30 A, A. B.

Cistotborus stellaris........... May 18 B. A. B.

Anthus ludovicianus.......... May 20 B. B. B.

Mini Opt: VALTIAlce sos «ace May 1{| May 10|| May 6/ May 14

Parula americana............. May 3 A. May 7| May 28

Helmin' hophagachrysoptera..| May 15 | May 10 || May 19 | May 15

Helminthovhaga ruficapilla...| May 4; May 8 || May 7 B.

Helminthophaga celata........ April 30 B. May 1 B.

Helminthophaga peregrina....| May 19 A. May 22 | May 21

Dendroeea aestiva ............ May 3] May 10]| May 7 A.

Dendroeea virens ......-.... May 4] Mey 10/| May 7 A.

Dendreeca caerulescens ....... May 8 B. May 12] May 15

Dendroeca coronata........... April 5 | April 6 |} April12 | April 9

Dendreeca blackburniae’...... May May 10 || May 7] May 15

Dendroeea striata ............. May 10 A. May 18 | May 19

Dendreeca castanea........... May 18} May 8/]| May 20 IN

Dendroeca pennsylvanica...... May 3| May 10/|| May 8 A.

Dendreeca maculusa.......... May 3 A. May 14 A.

Dendreeea tigrina........... -| May 8 | May 9 || May 7] May 15

Dendreeca palmarum ......... May 1 A. May 7 B.

Dendroseapimus 22 3%..5. 56s. May 3) April 21 || April 24} May 15

Siurus auricapillus............ May 9| May 8 || May 9); May 15

SUTEUSPMACVIUIS: wa ifs. ois, 5 Lae dors April 26 A. April 30 Al:

Geothlypis trichas............ May 10} May 31 || May 10 A.

Myiodioctes pusillus.......... May 12] May 18 |} May 18] May 31

Myiodioctes canadensis ....... May 10 A. May i8 B.

Setophaga raticilla ........... May 31] May 10 || May 7] May 15

EP VARA DDI Eso e diel Giese «0: ays feno: May 10); May 18 || May 22} May 20

Hirundo erythrogastra horreor-

RET eree Seika dae sPaldeye Gs oislele hake April 29 | May 15 || May 7] May 10

Iridoprocne bicolor ........... Mar. 29 | April 1 || April 7 | May i

* “A” Through neglect or omission the datas of the first arrivals were not recorded.

+“B.” This species not noticed in the spring of that year.

192 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ARRIVAL OF MIGRANTS IN BROWN AND OUTAGAMIE COUN-

TIES, ETC.— Continued.

es :

me of nS of

Se Bo 3.2 cr

oe oe ae zo

a3 aq z= Hq

2 os cS 5 ol S oad Sp ic a

a28 | 268 || 228 | B22

a Bel eS eee

Petrochelidon lunifrons....... April 25 | April 21 |} April 29 | May 10

Cotilegeipamtanice mere reer cir May 12 B. B. B.

Stelgidopteryx serripennis....| April 24 | May 14 A. May 21

IBOATS SOUS goeactaageneonssr April 10 | April 16 A. A.

Ampelis cedrorum............ ay 19; June 5 Ne Be

Wireovolivaceusin: jcc. se cern May 11/| May 22 || May 18 | May 26

Vireo philadelphicus.......... May 238 | May 31 B. B.

WareoeadiliviSh eye fo ee ee May 9 A. May 8 A.

WVareowlanitrOns ene... ee. May 8} May 26 || May 5] May 14

areoysolitaviussecee6 ee B May 18 || May 7 B.

Lanius ludovicianus excubito-

MIGES ah. idle se et alaiae et seat A. dN A. April 8

Carpodacus purpureus........ Mar. 5 | April 14 || April 9 ; Mar. 14

Passerculus sandvicensis sa-

WebMD et erate tie Garecessechssyee cts s A. A. April 26 | April 28

Pocecetes yramineus.......... April 14 | April 14 || April April 9

Melospiza lincolni ............ May 20 133. B. B.

Melospiza palustrist. << occ.) cele «cteeie is <'-)sals at aye|ll eters | een

Melospiza fasciata .... ....... Mar. 29 | Mar. 28 || April 6 | April 6

Spizelia domestica............ April 20 | April 19 || April 12 | April 18

Zonotrichia albicollis ......... April 25 | May 8 || April 22 A.

Zonotricha leucophrys........ May 18 A. May 12] May 14

Chondestes grammicus....... B. May 3 “Be May 5

agserellailiacaswaaeaa eens April 13 | April 21 || April 9 | April 11

Zamelodia ludoviciana ........ May 9 A. May 16] May 23

Passerina cyanea ............. May 18 | May 17 || May 22 | May 26

Pipilo erythrophthalmus...... April 26 | April 21 |} April 26 | April 11

Dolichonyx oryzivorus ....... May 17 A. May 15] May 15

Molothnus ateny a scsseee eee April 17 | April 14 || May 3 | April 11

Xanthocephalus icterocephalus; May 30 B. 150 13).

Stumellanmaenans- sce eeee Mar. 28 | Mar. 28 || April 2] April 6

Ketexusicalbullay-eesa eae eee May 41] May 51|| May 7] May 18

Quiscalus purpureus.......... Mar. 29 | April 3 || April 6 | April 8

Tyrannus carolinensis ........ May 8] April12 || Msy 7] May 14

Myjarechus erinitus!-. .- 2.5 <a. Miy 14 : May 7 B.

Se. OMTUIS TAIRA aka a. GawsoS April 2 | Mar. 29 || April 6) Apmis

Contopusavirens yan- soos see May 20 A. May 26 A.

Empidonax minimus ......... Mar 5 AG May 7] May 10

Empidonax flaviventris....... May 18 A. May 22 B.

Antrostomus vociferus........ April 28 A. April 26 A.

Chordediles popetue .......... May 19 A. May: 1 A.

Cheetura pelasgica ........... May 9| April 1 || May 7/{| May 10

Trochilusicolubrissemn.- oe. see May 9! May 20 || May 17 A.

Cerylevaleyontewece. 2 1 oe April 1 | April 9 || April 9 | April 11

Coccygus erythrophthalmus ..| May 18 | May 20 | May 296 B.

Sphyropicus varius ........... Mar. 27 | April 7 _| April 9) | 7Apming

Melanerpes erythrocephalus...| May 12 | April 8 || May 8 | May 15

Colaptes auratus.............. April 1 | April 3 || April 9 | April 12

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds. 163

Believing that there exists certain relations between the

dietetic habits of our true migrants and their order of arri-

val, Ihave prepared the following annotated list. I have

chosen the order in which they arrived in the spring of 1882,

as my observations then were more thorough than in 1883:

Turdus migratorius. (Robiz.) Mch. 10.

Its principal food consists of worms, caterpillars and berries.*

Sialia sialis. (Blue bird.) Mch. 14.

Food — Larve and insects.

Sturnella magna. (Meadow lark.) Mch. 28.

Food — Larve and insects.

Melospiza fasciata. (Song sparrow.) Mch. 28.

Food — Seeds and insects.

Sayiornis fusca. (Phoebe.) Mch. 29.

A purely insectivorous bird.

Iridoprocure bicolor. (White bellied swallow.) Apr. 1,|

Also an insectivorous bird.

Quiscalus purpureus. (Purple grackle) Apr. 3.

In the spring its food is mostly worms, grubs and caterpillars.

Regulus satrapa. (Golden crowned kinglet.) Apr. 3.

Food — Small insects and larve.

Colaptes auratus. (Flicker.) Apr. 3.

Food — Ants, beetles and caterpillars.

Certhia familiaris. (Brown creeper.) Apr. 6.

Food — Small beetles and insects.

Dendroeca coronata. (Yellow rump warbler.) Apr. 6.

Food — Caterpillars, small flies and beetles.

Sphyropicus varius. (Yellow bellied wood-pecker.) Apr. 7.

Food — Ants, beetles and small insects.

Tyrannus carolinensis. (King bird.) Apr. 12.

Food is wholly insectivorous.

Regulus calendula. (Ruby crowned kinglet.) Apr. 14.

Food — Larve and small insects.

Carpodacus purpureus. (Purple finch.) Apr. 14.

Food — Seeds, buds, plant-lice and caterpillars,

* The notes respecting the food were mostly taken from Prof. F. H. King’s

work, entitled “The Economic Relations of Wisconsin Birds,” published

in “Geology of Wisconsin,” Vol. I.

194 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Pocecetes gratnineus. (Grass finch.) Apr. 14.

Food — Sees and insects.

Molothrus ater. (Cow bird.) Apr. 14.

Food Is chiefly insects.

Progne subis. (Purple marten.) Apr. 16.

Food wholly insectivorous.

Spizella domestica. (Chipping sparrow.) Apr. 19.

Food — Seeds, worms and insects.

Petrochelidon lunifrons. (Eave swallow.) Apr. 21.

Food wholly insectivorous.

Passerella iliaca. (Fox sparrow.) Apr. 21.

Food — Seeds, bugs and insects.

Pipilo erythrophthalmus. (Chewink.) Apr. 21,

Food — Seeds, insects and worms,

Turdus unalasce nanus. (Hermit thrush.) Apr. 22.

Food — Ants, beetles and caterpillars.

The seed eaters as will be seen by this list, do not appear

to arrive in force, until some time after the insect eaters

have made their appearance. This is quite contrary to some

existing ideas now held by some naturalists respecting these

movements. But why these birds are not among the very

first, appears to me a singular anomaly. In their case, the

temperature must be an important agent in influencing their

movements, for their food, the seeds, are as easily obtained

in the earlier months, as in May or June, no new plants hay-

ing had time to flower before their arrival.

While the food of a few of the earlier migrants consists

chiefly of winged insects, yet the majority of the first comers

subsist upon grubs, caterpillars and worms, that are largely

found in crevices in the bark of trees, under fallen limbs, on

old rails, and in many other similar places. Unless these

birds are gifted with the art of discovering larvee and in-

sects while in their winter quarters, the awakening of articu-

late life must be an important factor in affecting these

migrations.

Mr. F. L. Grundtvig when pursuing his close observation

discovered that the yellow rumps (Dendrceca coronata) when

they first arrived, associated more or less with the wood-

peckers, and like them were successful in obtaining con-

Migration and Distribution of North American Birds. 195

cealed larvee and small insects from under the edges of the

shaggy bark. They were seen to frequent the terminal

branches, and seek their food amidst the starting foliage,

after the only throng of their brother warblers began to

arrive and winge insects were becoming numerous.

This matter of being able to obtain sufficient insect food

in various ways, must give this warbler an advantage over

its allies, which I think may possibly account for its im-

mense numbers as compared with some of the other species.

Does not this rule apply to other birds as well, and in part

explain the reason why our earlier species are among our

most abundant birds?

Birds in districts of homogeneous characters are restricted

to certain areas by isotherms, but in country not entirely

suitable for certain representative species, would not the

isotherm be only a minor consideration as affecting their

distribution ?

Can we properly judge of the extent of the faunal areas

in any specified section, until the whole section is

practically inhabitable for them during the warmer months ?

In other words, as civilization progresses and timbered dis-

tricts and swampy tracts become converted into meadows

and farming lands, may not the avian faunaof an adjoin-

ing southern district extend northward until checked by the

isotherm that constitutes the actual boundary of these divisi-

ons? Brown County at the lower terminus of the Fox

River Valley is the last of a series of counties connecting

with the warmer sections of sonthern Wisconsin and north-

ern Illinois, that are throughout habitable for such birds as

prefer meadows and cultivated fields.

Assingle field sparrows, orchard orioles, and wood thrushes

are found here only at irregular intervals, must we not feel

confident of the close proximity of the northern limit of the

Alleghanian fauna, of which they are representative

members ?

Shiocton, Outagamie Co., the place of Mr. F. L. Grund-

tvig’s diligent.and thorough observations is almost directly

west from us at De Pere, yet notwithstanding this, he has

never on any of his varied excursions found the lark finch,

196 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

field sparrow or orchard oriole. Around Shiocton there are

farms and some meadow lands but they are isolated. For

miles on either side extends a tract of worthless land, once

a forest, but now transformed by destructive fires into an

impenetrable non-productive area. The banks of the Wolf

River are at present wholly covered with green timber

which is well adapted for arboreous species, but not for those

referred to above. With these considerations in mind I be-

lieve that the northern limit of the Alleghanian fauna in

eastern Wisconsin is not far from the southern boundary of

Marinette County or where it meets the waters on the west-

ern shore of Green Bay.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 197

OE VARTATION IN ATTRACTION DUE TO THE

FIGURE OF THE ATTRACTING BODIES.

By D. P. BLACKSTONE, A. M., C. E., Berlin, Wis.

INTRODUCTION.

1. This paper isa part of the investigations that I have

nearly completed on the subject, The Variation in Figure

and in Attraction of a once Fluid Body, due to Rotation,

Law of Density, and Contraction. The portion of the in-

vestigations on that subject pertaining to attraction, herein

given, is abbreviated by the omission of some of the mathe-

matical demonstrations, and some evident deductions. The

results attained by my method give numerical exactness to

any power of the eccentricity of the ellipsoid.

This paper develops by geometrical methods the law of

attraction for spheres, each of homogeneous mass, or each

or either composed of fluid masses of heterogeneous dens-

ities. Italso develops by the same methods the variation in

attraction due to ellipsoidal figure, where one of the attract-

ing bodies is an ellipsoid of homogeneous mass, the stand-

ard for measuring the variation being the attraction of the

mass of the eilipsoid condensed at its own center.

A part of my investigation on attraction, not herein

given, develops the variation in attraction due to ellipsoidal

figure where the ellipsoid is composed of fluid masses of

heterogeneous densities. In this paper I take it as granted

that a fluid mass under the law of the mutual attraction of

its own component particles, takes on the form of an oblate

ellipsoid. In my investigation pertaining to fluid equilibri-

um I demonstrate under what conditions of rotation the

fluid mass assumes the form of an oblate ellipsoid, and also

under what conditions of rotation the fluid mass has not de-

fined mathematical figure, but would go back if expanded

by heat, to nebula, “without form and void.”

In finding the attraction of an ellipsoid on any outside

particle or body I avoid the use of the expedient of

198 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

confocal ellipsoids. In case, however, the outside particle

is in the plane of the equator or line of the poles, it is an

evident inference from my investigation that two confocal

ellipsoids having their foci at the same points, attract the

same particle outside of both, as their masses. In case the

outside particle is otherwise located, I have a short and

simple demonstration which, if put in at the end of Art. 18

of this paper, would prove that confocal ellipsoids attract

any outside particle, as their masses. Todhunter in the

second volume of his History of the Theories of Attraction

and the Figure of the Earth, says, referring to the expedient

of confocal ellipsoids: “Legendre we see arrived at his

theorem incidentally as he was developing anew demon-

stration of Laplace’s theorem; and the improvement subse-

quently effected by Ivory in the treatment of Laplace’s

theorem has probably much diminished the interest which

would otherwise have continued to belong to Legendre’s.

Nevertheless it is to be wished that a simple investigation

could be supplied of the remarkable result; and perhaps this

may be attained in consequence of thus drawing attention

to it.”

It is true that the final results of the investigation of

this paper reduce to the same as those well known by ma-

thematicians. It is also doubtless true that the modern

method of the Calculus is the best for obtaining a specific

conclusion. Butit seems to me that a new and true geo-

metrical investigation on an intricate subject like this, must

furnish another lamp by which can be seen new deductive

truths. However this may be, I feel well compensated for

the brain force expended in the general mental culture re-

ceived, and especially in a sharpened ability to detect the

fallacious logic in my own scientific and philosophic

thought.

2. Two particles at a sensible distance apart attract each

other with a force directly proportional to the product of

their masses and inversely proportional to the square of

their distance. This law is accepted because it is the only

law of attraction that accords with physical phenomena.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 199

INVESTIGATION.

SPHERICAL ATTRACTION.

Tt is proved under Heading I. by demonstration and deduction:

First.— That two homogeneous spheres, or two spheres, each made up in

lamine varying in densities from lamina to lamina, attract each

other directly as product of masses, and inversely as square of

distance from center to center.

Second.— That a mass composed of fluids under the law of the mutual

attraction of component particles, arranges itself, im order of

the densities of the fluids, in a sphere made up in lamine with

the most dense at the center.

3. To find the resultant attraction of an assemblage of particles consti-

tuting a homogenous sphere on an outside particle.

Diagram 1.

In Diagram 1 let C be the center of the sphere, having radius C A, and

P the attracted particle. Also let C B P be a circle described on C P

as diameter, From P draw any two lines, P g and P e cutting the sphere;

also cutting the circumference C B P in points a and b, making the angle

¢ P e infinitesimal. On the radius C A perpendicular to P C, take C 1

equal to chord Ca, and Cn equalto Cb. Through 1 and n draw cherds

hk and op, parallel to CP. Then chord hk equals chord gd, and o p

equalsec. Per law of ultimate ratio when the angle e P g becomes infjn-

200 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

itesimal, the point x of intersection of chord g d with C b coincides with

point a, and a b equals I n.

Draw t a perpendicular to PC, Then angle C PaequalstaC. Letthis

angle be represented by 3. Then is circumference or length of are gener-

ated by point 1 rotated on axis P C for one rotation or an infinitesimal

part of a rotation to circumference or length of arc generated by point a so

rotated, as unity to cosine S.

Divide the equal chords g d and h k each into the same number of equal

and infinitesimal parts, and from the points of division draw lines ass e, f c,

etc., parallel to C a, and y 0, z p, etc., parallel to C A. Then for one or an

infinitesimal part of a rotation, the volumes generated by surfaces having

dimensions a b. s e, f c, etc., each into an equal and infinitesimal division

of length along g d, are directly proportional to squares of distances P a,

Ps, Pf, etc. In case thenof a sphere of homogeneous density each division

along chord g d has a mass directly proportional to the square of its dis-

tance from P. Therefore per law of attraction for particles directly as

mass and inversely as square of distance, the attraction of the mass at any

division along chord g d, on particle P is the same as that at division a.

The attraction then, in direction P a of whole mass between chords e ¢ and

g d, is equal to that of mass at division a into the number of divisions of

chord g d into inverse square of distance P a.

Let mass of sphere between chords op and h k rotated be represented by

m. Then because h k equals g d, and 1n equals ab, and because circum-

ference of point 1 to circumference of point a rotated is as unity to

cosine $, mass of division a into chord g d equals m cos S. In right

angled triangle Pa C let hypotheneus P C be represented by D. Then side

Pa equals D cos. 9.

Attraction of mass (m cos $) on P in direction Pa= ua (GOS) =

D? cos? $

Attraction of mass (m cos §) on P in direction P C= ™ © 7 _™

Dp? cos? S ID

But = equals the attraction of « mass (m) condensed to the size of a par-

ticle at the center of the sphere on particle P.

Because P C is the axis ot rotation of chords e ¢ and g d, particle P must

be attracted in direction P C, and with a force equal to the attraction of

the mass cut from the sphere by one rotation of the chords 0 p and hk,

condensed at the center of the sphere.

Asn lis any part of the radius A C the whole of a homogeneous sphere

attracts an outside particle the same as the mass of the sphere con-

densed to its center.

4, A spherical shell is a sphere less a sphere of smaller radius. In ac-

cordance then, with investigation of Art. 3, a spherical shell attracts an

outside particle the same as the mass of the shell condensed at its center.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies, 201

5. A sphere made up of laminae varying in density from lamina to

lamina is the same as:a sphere composed of shells having densities corre-

sponding to the laminae. The sphere, then, made up of laminae attracts

an outside particle in conformity with the law for spherical shells or a

homogeneous sphere.

6. When attracting sphere is condensed to a particle, the investigation

of Art. 3 applies to the case where atiracted particle P becomes a sphere.

Two spheres, therefore, attract each other with a force directly as product

of masses and inversely as square of distance from center to center.

7. To find the attraction of a sphere on a particle placed within it.

Diagram 2.

Diagram 2 shows particle P within the sphere. It is evident from in-

vestigation of Art. 3 that that portion of the sphere outside of the radius

distance C P attracts particle P equally in opposite directions. The only

uncounterbalanced attraction, then, on particle P is the attraction of that

portion of the sphere inside of radius distance CP. Homogeneous spheres

of same density vary in masses as cubes of radii. The attraction on par-

ticles inside of a homogeneous sphere vary, then, as their distances from

the center of the sphere.

8. When the sphere is fluid and particle P becomes a small solid of less

density than the sphere, then body P placed at the surface of the sphere

floats, and when body P is more dense than the sphere at the surface it

sinks. Its place of equilibrium is at the center of the sphere, in case all

the laminae of the sphere are less dense than the body P, otherwise in a

lamina having the same density as body P.

It is evident that the law of equilibrium requires a fluid mass acted on

only by the force of the mutual attraction of component particles to as-

sume a spherical figure, and in case the mass is composed of fluids of

varying densities the fluids must take positions in spherical laminae in

order of densities, with the most dense at the center.

202 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

II.

Preliminary Demonstrations Developing required New Expressions Per-

taining to the Ellipse.

First: A, = B)/1+4H,? cos* S=Aj/1—E? sin? S$

B — By/1+B? sin? S=Aj/1—E? cos? S.

Et sin? S cos?

Second: sin® w= - z

1—E?+ EH? sin? S cos?S

In the above expressions A and B represent the semi-major and semi-

minor axes of the ellipse, A, any semi-diameter and B, its semi-conjuegate.

yey) 2 P2

E* equals a — and E* equals ae)

5 Angle a is the difference between

the angle made by any diameter with its conjugate and a right angle.

S is further on defined. i

9. To find any diameter and its conjugate, the major and minor axes of

the ellipse being given.

Diagram 3.

In Diagram 3* let A B A B be anellipse having major axis A A and minor

axis B B, and let BbBb beasecond ellipse having BB major axis and

similar in construction to first ellipse; also let BdBd be a circle with ra-

dius B C.

*In center of Diagram 3 C is left out.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 203

Draw the tangent lines Pc, Paand Pl. Through the points of tan-

gency c, a,1 draw linec g so that the part 1g is perpendicular to PC,

Then by known demonstration of conic sections the line c g is straight, and

gaistogcasBtoA,alsogaistoglas AtoB. Since triangles1 Pg, a

P g,andc P g have each aright angle at g and same base P g, the tan-

gents of the angles1 Pg,a Pg, andcP gare directly asgl,ga,andge.

Since the right angled triangles Cl g, Cag, and Cc g have the same per-

pendicular C g, the tangents of the angles Clg, Cag, and Ccg are in-

versely asg]l,ga,andge. But anglea Pg equals Cag. therefore angle

1Pgequals Cc g,and anglecPg equalsClg. Also angle cP a equals

a Cl, and angle a P 1 equals c Ca, and line C1 produced is perpendicular

to tangent line P c.

Produce major axis A A to P’, making distance C P’ toC Pas A to B.

Draw P’m tangent to circle having radius Cm equal to C A, and draw P’B,

tangent to ellipse having axes A A and BB. Through points of tangency

mand B, draw m g’. m g’ is perpendicular to P’ C and parallel to PC. By

constructions angle m P’ C equalsa P Cor Cag. Because then mg" is to

B, g' inversely as A to B, angle C B, g’ equals c P g. Therefore B, C or B, B,

is parallel to tangent line P c, and B, B, is a conjugate diameter to C C,.

The angle c C B, is greater or less than a right angle by the angle c Cl ora.

Let angle Cag be represented by S$, Ce g by S—z, and Clg by S+y.

Hereafter in this investigation S$, or the angle in any ellipse in the situa-

tion of S, is called the Elliptic Augle, ($—z)iscalled the Alpha Elliptic, and

($+y), the Beta Elliptic Angle.

It is now evident that:

Cs— Basins.

Ce — A sim.S;

ap GOSS.

cg=pB cos. 5 = A cos 9.

mg’ = A.cos 9S.

Bg’ =~ A cos $= Beos 9.

In right angled triangle C c g;

Cc=A=//A? cos? S+B* sin? S = V B?+(A?—B?) cos? S=

V A?—(A?—B?) sin? 8.

A,=B //1+E, cos’ 5 = Aj/1—E? sin? 8.

Likewise from right angled triangle C B, g’,

B, =B//1i+E; sin? $ = A 7/1—E?cos?3.

204 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

10. To find an expression for sine square of angle «.

In triangle c Cl,

sin (S+y) cl

Sina — aN

B? cos S— EH? cos $3

: Asin S$

Sin (Say) aa even

eae aie Stal 4 Seco Ss Et sin? S$ cos? S

A? B? 7 (LSE eine S)/ @= nr cosas)

ee EH? sin? $ cos? S$

Sins Ca

1? 28 seine S Gases

Iii.

OUTSIDE ELLIPSOIDAL ATTRACTION IN LINE OF POLES.

First.—An oblate Ellipsoid and an outside particle in line of the poles at-

tract each other directly as product of mass of particle into mass

of Ellipsoid multiplied by (1—2n°E ?+-2n*E *—3n°E *--etc.) and in-

versely as sguare of distance from center of ellipsoid to particle.*

Second.—A prolate ellipsoid and an outside particle in line of the poles at-

tract each other directly as product of mass of particle into

mass of ellipsoid multiplied by (1 + 2n°E?+-2n*E*+ 3n°E*- etc.) and

inversely as square of distance.

In the first case n equals the minor axis of the ellipsoid divided by the

distance and in the second, the major axis divided by distance, E,? equals E?

divided by (1—E”).

11. To find the attraction of an ellipsoid of rotation on an outside

particle in line of axis of rotation.

In Diagram 4 let C be the center of the ellipsoid having major axis A A

and minor axis B B, and let P be the attracted particle.

On P C as minor axis described a semi ellipse, similar to the one

having C for its center. Also with C as the center and nC and1Cas

semi major axes describe two semi ellipses similar to ones already de-

*When not otherwise mentioned the ellipsoid is homogeneous. The

word particle here used represents finite mass condensed to the dimen-

sions of a particle.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 205

scribed. The construction of the remaining portions of the diagram where

not evident is explained. :

Draw B, B, parallel to P a, and draw A, A, through point of tangency

aand center C. A, A, and B, B, are, then, conjugate diameters.

Ordinate a d equals ordinate a g, 1k equalslh. Per known demonstra-

tion of Conic Sections;

@), aadih k <7 'B, : B.

When the angle e P g becomes infinitesimal, A, A, passes through the

points of tangencyaand b. From the similarity of the ellipses having

C1, Cn, and C A for semi major axes; ba:nl:: A,:A. Drawsx

through point a, and perpendicular toPa, Thensa=bacosa

(OMe siaysniless AY cos: as AV.

Diagram 4.

Draw t a perpendicular toP C. Per Art.9,ta=Clcos. S$, Thenfrom

the similarity of the ellipses;

(Cc) tran © 1) 2s"Acos:, S.A.

The product of the proportions (a) (b) (c) gives;

gdXsaXta:hk Xn1lXCl1:: AA, B,cosS3 cosa: A’B:: cos 3:1,

The last ratio is true because A, B, cos a = A B.

In accordance with ademonstration in Art. 3,¢g d x sa X t a represents

amass at point a, that attracts particle P in direction P a the same as the

mass cut from the ellipsoid by rotating chords ec and gd on axis PC;

and hk <n1 Clrepresents a mass (m) from likewise rotating chords

opandhk.

206 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Angle C a P equals (90°—a), and angle a C P equals 90°—(S—z). Let

cos (S—z).

C Pequal D. Then in triangle C a P, Pa—D

COS a

m cos Sicos? a

D? cos? (S—z)

m cos $ cos (S+y) cos 2a

D? cos? ($-z)

Attraction of mass (m cos $) in direction Pa on P =

Attraction of mass in direction P C —

In triangle C ¢ g, Diagram 3.

A cos 3

cos (3—z) enor ae

In triangle C B, g, Diagram 3.

B cos $

COIS =p =e

M A? B cos ?

Attraction, etc., = IX

A? B?

IN 1B) 2 (GOs? @e = ANY IBY Oe sp 5

ei e 2s eWAS ACOs ance

In case then of an oblate ellipsoid,

, a cakon ee B

Attraction of mass (m cos $) in direction P C on P =p xX pe

Likewise for a prolate ellipsoid,

m’ A?

Attraction of mass (m’ cos $) ete., =prXae

ee $—=(1-Bsin’?S)—

B;? B%1+E,sin?S)

(+B sin?3)—?#=1—2 K7sin?S 3.55 gins — 3.5.79 tsin’ S-4-ete,

2 2.4 2.4.6

A’_(1—F'sin’S)—?=1+ 2msin2s + 25 mAgin + 9 429 Teginss + ete,

A; 3 2.4 2.4.6

For oblate spheroid,

Attraction of mass (m cosS)&c= (le E,’sin?S + S48 ‘sinto— etc.

For prolate ellipsoid,

Attraction of mass (m’ cos9)éee. = FE(1 + E’sin? S + =o bisin's +ebe.

12. In the above expressions for attraction any power of E or E, isa

constant for any part or the whole of the same ellipsoid, while any power

of sin S varies from 0 to 1. In case of the oblate ellipsoid having a constant

semi minor axis (B) mass (m) varies as A’, or as the mass of the whole ellip-

soid till the ellipsoid becomes a sphere. The same relation is true of the

The Variation in Attraction Due tothe Attracting Bodies. 207

prolate spheroid. The coefficients, then, for eccentricity square, fourth

power, etc., for the ellipsoid can be correctly computed from a sphere.

If we should represent the mass of the sphere by unity, and compute

the fractional masses cut from the sphere by rotating a system of chords

comprising an infinite number, extending from A to C and perpendicular

to radius A C, and multiply each of the fractions by its requisite sin°S,

the sum of the products would be the value for sin? S for the whole of an

ellipsoid. The same method is likewise true for computing the average

value for any power of sin S. Let sin? #2, sin* 74, sin® we, etc., be the

average values for sin’ S, sin* S, sin’ S, etc., for the whole of a homegen-

eous ellipsoid with the attracted particle at the surface.

By using certain expedients wonderfully abbreviating the just described

system of computation, I get the exact numerical values for sin?7,, sin+y,,

sin*y,, &c., and also for cos 7, cos*7,, cos®~,, &c. Which are:

: 2

*Sin?y,.—= =

Sin*y, = : -

, 2. 4. 6

Simba ng"

et amen A. Goc8

Sin*?, —5 79,11’ &¢. for higher powers.

Cos 7, =n

Cos*7, = =.

Cost, ==

Cos*y i &c. for higher powers.

‘

The expression for the attraction of the whole mass (M) of an oblate

ellipsoid on a re at the pole reduces to:

a Coe ome +s 3 ys 3 E+ ete ).

The expression, &c., ie the prolate ellipsoid becomes:

oa | oe 3 3 )

aa Gee 2B Ee = haa = Be ;

rt + 5 + 7 a 9 E*+ ete

B A

15. Let Dp 7 be represented by n. Since ina right angled triangle

having a constant perpendicular while its hypothneuse and base increase

in length, the sine of the angle at the base diminishes as the hypothenuse in-

creases, and as each and all the angles S$ that make up the angle z are

*How these results are obtained is fully explained in the investigations

on the subject referred to at the beginning of this paper.

208 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

from right angled triangles that have a common hypothenuse and each

continues to have the same length of perpendicular as hypothenuse in-

creases, therefore sin’ y2 representing the average of all the sin? S varies

asn*. It can be shown likewise for sin* 7, etc., which represent the aver-

ages of all sin‘ S, etc., that they vary as n', n°, etc.

The expression, then, for the attraction of an oblate ellipsoid on a parti-

cle outside the pole is:

M 1 3 2#B 2 3 4 1) 4 3 8 6

p: (1-52 +9 05 n’ E? + ete. )

The expression, etc., for prolate ellipsoid is:

M 1 3 2? 3 2) es 3 6 HS

D? ( + pm’H’+ sn’ Eh’ + 9n +ete.)

IV.

OUTSIDE ELLIPSOIDAL ATTRACTION IN PLANE OF THE EQUATOR.

First.—An oblate ellipsoid and an outside particle in plane of the equator

attract each other directly as product of mass uf particle into

mass of ellipsoid multiplied by (1 ae xe n? EK? ea n* Et

+ oo x< ba n° E°+ etc.) and inversely as square of dis-

tance from center of ellipsoid to particle.

Second.—A prolate ellipsoid and an outside particle in the plane of the

equator attract each other directly as product of mass of parti-

cle into mass of ellipsoid multiplied by (1 a2 Ge n’ BK? +

‘3 3 a 4 3.9 2) § 6 7 4, ye

94% 7a EK, 54.6% 9 2 E* + etce.), and inversely as

sguare of distance.

14. This article finds a method of dividing an ellipsoid into an infinite

number of wedges equal each to each, where the edges of the wedges are

in an equatorial diameter.

In Diagram 5 let AB AB bea section of ellipsoid passing through the

center of the ellipsoid and at rightangles to an equatorial diameter. Draw

lines C a, C a!, C a’, etc., so that angles A Ca, A Ca’, A Ca’, etc., can be

represented by the alpha elliptic angles S—z, $,—z,, S.—%s, etc.; also

draw lines C b, C b,, C bs, etc., so that angles BC b, BC b,, BC bg, etc.,

can be represented by the beta elliptic angles $+y, 9,+y1, S2+Ye, ete.

When the elliptie angle becomes 45° then the z angle equals the y angle.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 209

In Diagram 3 angle A C c or Ce g corresponds to angle A C a of Dia. 5,

and angle ACl1 or Clgof Dia. 3, toangle BC b of Dia. 5. In triangles

Ccgand Clg (Dia. 3), cg =A cos 8, and 1g =*- cos 8.

tan Ccg:tanClg Ecos 9 : A cos 9: B? : A’, or tan A Ca: tan BCb

SB? A

Diagram 5.

When the angles A Ca and BC b become infinitesimal they are to each

other as theirtangents. Therefore infinitesimal angle AC a:angle BCb::

BA?

The volume, then, of the wedge of the elipsoid measured by Ax A?

ang. A Ca o., ang. B Cb

se 0e equals that measured by AXB xe a

ellipsoid. Likewise obtained, in the case of the prolate ellipsoid: Bx A’

ang. A Ca —BYB? ang. B Cb

360° 360°

in case of the oblate

In Diagram 6 let A B A B be an ellipse having semi diameter C B, equal

to (B), and Bb, B, b, a similar ellipse having C B, equal to (a), also let

B,aB, beacircle with radius CB. From any point Pin line C B, pro-

duced, draw tangent lines P A,, Pa, Pb,, and from points of tangency A, ,

a,andb,, draw CA,, Ca, and Cb,, Draw C B,, parallel to A,, P, and Ca,,

paralleltob, P. Then C A, (A,) and C B,, (B,,) are semi conjugate diam-

eters in the one ellipse, and C b,, (b,,) and Ca, (a,,) are corresponding semi

conjugate diameters in the other.

210 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Form points A,, a, and b,, draw ordinates to diameter B, B. These

ordinates intersect diameter B, B, in a common point g, and Cag is an

elliptic angle. a g=B,cos $, A, g=A, cos S$, and b, g= 7 cos 9.

Diagram 6.

The ordinate A, g being parallel to to A, C (A,), the angle CA, g is equal

to the angle A, C A, or the angle that A, makes withA,. Also b,, g being

parallel to b, C, the angle C b, g is equal to the angle that b, makes with b,.

Draw A, nandb, m perpendicular to diameter B, B. Then 90° plus or

minus the angle g b, m or g A, n (a) equals the angle that A, makes with

B,. Draw gdand gf each equalin length to g C, having angles d g C and

f g C each equal to angle a. Then from the right angled triangles d A, g

and f b, g having perpendicular d g equal tof g;:

tan d A, g: tan fb, g::4- cos 9: A, cos 9 ::B?:A2

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies, 211

When angle S$ becomes infinitesimal points d and f coincide with point

C, and angled Ag ‘equals C A,g, and fb,g equals Cb,g. Therefore infini-

tesimal angles C A,g: Cb,g :: B?: A?

Form Art. 10,

A? == A’— (A°—B)?) sin? S.

B?=B’+ (A2—B?) sin? $

Then A+B? = A?+B

Angle C A,g represents any of the angles a Ca, a, C a, etc, and Cb,g,

any of the corresponding angles b Cb, b, C bs, etc., of Dia. 5. The vol-

ume of infinitesimal wedge then from an oblate ellipsoid measured by A

; Ang. aCa by aby

360° “B6U"

As A, + B?>—A’* + B’, the iufinitesimal wedges of prolate ellipsoids, the

sums of which make up the oblate ellipsoid are equal, each to each, in

volume. The same can likewise be proved of wedges of a prolate

ellipsoid.

- equals that measured by A < B? x Ang.

15. To find, for any even power, an expression for the average of the ec-

centricities of all the infinitesimal wedges composing an ellipsoid, with

edges in an equatorial diameter.

The edges of the elliptic wedges have a common semi-axis A and

the other semi-axis varies from A to B as A, or B, vary from A to B.

B, for angle S equals A, for angle (90°—S$).

eee ee eee

A? WN

ep cae oe

INET A’

Eccentricity sin?S—E’sin? S=H’cos*(90° — S$).

Eccentricity cos’ S—=E?cos?S—=H’sin?(90°— $),

A’—A?, A2—B?, A’—A} A’—B} , A?—A2, A?—B?

re re re re me 34+-&c, to 45°,

Divided by the number of wedges equals,

E*(sin’S + cos*S +sin’S,+cos’?S,+sin?S, +cos?S, + &c to 45°),

divided by the number of wedges.

Trigonometry gives:

sin? S = 4—40c0829.

cos? S = 4+4+40c08s2 9.

sin? S + cos? $ peat e |) TEEPE

> —— I 4) — COS 4D.

The value } is true for any pair of wedges. It is therefore the true value

for the coefficient of E* inthe expression E’ sin? $ which gives 4 E* for the

average eccentricity squared of all wedges.

Ca a As, Le

Rar ee Ai. + ete., to S for 45,° divided by number of wedges,

equals E*(sin‘ S + cos* S$) + etc, to S for 45,° divided by number of

wedges,

212 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

sint S$ ee! cos2 9 sd

2? 2

5 i cos? 29.

al al il 29

cos? S=— 5 Faces 23+ = cos? 2S.

int 4

sin’ $+ cos* S__ 1 41 Soe ODS,

2 ap Be

The first term G.) of the above result is truefor any value given to 3

from 0° to 45°; therefore 7 is the average for thatterm. It is now required

to find the average of the succession of terms, 5, cos? 2 Sets, cos? 2S, 4h

cos 2 S,+ etc., to S for 45°. When S$ becomes 45°, 2 S becomes 90°; therefore

these terms can be put in shape as follows: siloos" 2S + cos? (90°—2 S$) +

cos’ 2S, + cos? (90°—23,) + cos? 2S. + cos? (90°—28S,)+ ete., to 2S equal

45°], divided by the number of terms. The average value, then, for cos? 2S .

is 3. The average value of

By like computation the average value of

Sin’ Stcos'S 1 3 iB BR

5} 93 t 93 COS’ 2S = geo 7G

Sin’ S+cos’ 33.5.7

2 ~ 2.4.6.8"

Sin!’ S++ cos/S 3.0.7.9

9 9,4.6.8.10 ” etc., for Heer powers.

For each of the infinitisimal wedges of an oblate ellipsoid, mass and dis-

tance squared are constant factors. The expression then for the attraction

of an oblate ellipsoid on a particle outside in the plane of the equator is:

D? tes n? EH? + aXe E'+ete.).

For a prolate ellipsoid, etc.:

MW nanny estan

pr (1 OX BoE, +5 Xan *ete. ).

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 213

COMPARISON OF ATTRACTION AT POLE AND EQUATOR, AND ATTRACTION OF

CONFOCAL ELLIPSOIDS.

First. On an oblate ellipsoid the attraction at the pole exceeds that at the

19 27 163

2 pases ay

equator by re i +589 Hi + 560~ t 7480" +, ) or by

4 1

2 3 —_ h4

malGg? 5 a a eae )

Second. On a prolate ellipsoid the attraction at the equator ede that at

Me fle on. ol 229. ie i

the pole bya Oeste ill ce ee oi) Os hoa (Sb eiioae

Third. Confocal ellipsoids having foci at same points attract an outside

partiele in line of poles or plane of the equators directly as their

masses.

In the above enunciations h equals =

16, The expression for the attraction at the pole of an oblate ellipsoid is

= Us : Hy oo H° +ete. ) By substituting.

or E? equals h (2—h).

[—E for E* and A’ (1—E’) for B’, the expression becomes,

M Bo BLED a

(a) ai (tas tee - Oy Hi+ete. )

The expression for ee same oblate ellipsoid at the equator is:

3 3.5

oad m= (1+5 BGs ee aa a <P + ete, )

Subtract expression (b) from (a) and the difference is:

M ; ee Gee

a (oe + 555 seo * 4460 5

By substituting as above for E?, and for B’, the expression for the pro-

late ellipsoid at the equator becomes:

157 263

oe 2 6 ”

() = (Gi ae Do ape, Wn ae ee) a

The expression for Pole is:

M 3 3 3

(d) 43 (1 + gE + 7 Bit 5 Bit etc. )

M | leet as 2 64"

RING les * 380 380 E+ = 3B Fr

equals difference.

214 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters..

1%. To find the relation in law of attraction existing between two con-

focal ellipsoids having the same foci on a particle outside of both and, in

line of poles or plane of equator.

Let the semi major and the semi minor axes in the one be represented

by a and b, and in the other by A and B.

2__p?

. /\o B?

aay

: a2—b? A?2—B?

e” 3 IDaee ripe oT ten 7

Since the ellipsoids are confocal.

a’—b?=A?—B?’,

. iba

(a) ae Os ‘pF

(b) e} Bay : aa etc. for higher powers.

It is evident from construction of right angled triangle Pa C in Dia. 4

that any sin 3 for ellipsoid having ecentricity e” is to corresponding sin &

for ellipsoid having eccentricity E” as b to B. therefore

(ec) sin? S: sin? S| :: b?: B?

(Gd) S isingeSa-asimaS 7) bt: B,? etc. for higher powers.

Product of (a) and (c) is,

2 2

e, sin? S : KE? sin? §, oo = 1:1,

Product of (b) and (4d) is, :

4 4

Oia S48) 1D) fries S780 Soar el syalls

etc. for higher powers.

e, sin? 3 + e* sin? S + ete: FE? sin? S$, + EH‘ sin* 3’, + ete. :: 1:1.

This proves that confocal oblate ellipsoids attract an outside particle in

line of poles directly as their masses.

Likewise it can be proven that confocal prolate ellipsoids in line of axis

of rotation attract in conformity with law of masses.

As an ellipsoid can be made up of infinitesimal ellipsoidal wedges with

edges in an equatorial diameter, confocal ellipsoids attract an outside par-

ticle in plane of equators as their masses.

It is evident that this law holds true for confocal ellipsoids made up of

laminae varying in density from lamina to lamina providing correspond-

ing laminae of each ellipsoid are of same density.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 215

Wile

OUTSIDE ELIPSOIDAL ATTRACTION IN ANY DIRECTION.

First. — An oblate ellipsoid and any outside partiele attract each other

directly as product of mass of particle into mass of ellipsoid

multiplied by [1—2 n® EB? (1—3 sin? O)—2E# (n?’—# n*+2 sin? O

—# sin‘O—4n? sin?O +3n? sin‘O + 187 n‘ sin?0—$3 n‘ sin‘O) +,]

and inversely as square of distance from center of ellipsoid.

Second — The sine of the angle made by the direction of the resultant at-

traction, and the direction from the particle to the center of the

ellipsoid equals $ n? E? sinO cos O [1+E? ($—2 sin® O—# n’+33

n’ sin’O) +,].

Third — The increase in attraction on an oblate ellipsoid from the equator

to the\poles true to the fourth power of eccentricilty varies as the

square of the sine of the elliptic angle.

In the above enunciations, n equals B, divided by D (distance), and O

represents the elliptic angle used to find B..

18. To find an expression for the attraction on any outside particle, of

any two opposite infinitesimal wedges of an ellipsoid with the edges in

the diameter extending in direction to the particle.

\\p

Diagram 7.

In diagram 7 let B, B, be the diameter of the ellipsoid extending in di-

rection to the outside particle (P), A A and B B being the principal axes of

the ellipsoid. This elliptic section rotated on axis B, B, through an in-

216 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

finitesimal angle represents the two opposite wedges in the plane of the

principal axes. With C asa center and aaand b bas principal axes de-

scribe an ellipse similar to one having axes A A and BB, also describe

circles with radii C b,and C B,. On C P asa diameter corresponding to

B, B, as a diameter describe another similar ellipse. From P draw Ph and

Pi tangent lines to the ellipse having axesaaandbb. Draw diameter

B, B, or b, b, parallel to tangent Ph, also diameter B_,, B,, or b,, b,, parallel

to tangent Pi. Through the points of tangency a, and the center C draw

the diameter A, A, ora,a,, then A, A, and B, B, ora, a, and b, b, are

conjugate diameters. A,, A,, and B,B,, ora,,a,, and b,, b,, are likewise

conjugate diameters. Through the points of tangency a, and a,, draw

line mn, and diameter A, A, parallel to mn, then A, A, and B, B, ora, a,

and b, b, are conjugate diameters, anda, d and a,, d are equal ordinates.

From P draw line Pe tangent to the circle havivg radius C b,, and from

point of tangency g draw line gd 1; then line g lis perpendicular to di-

ameter B, B, and a double ordinate.*

From known demonstrations of Conic Sections, .

Oud Fray deb ciayssiiay eA

Draw radius g C and let angle C g d or its equal g PC be represented by

S. Then because g d = b, cos S$, and a,d = a, cos S,

Thickness of elliptic wedge at a, istothatat a, asa,:a,cos Sorl:cos 9.

Likewise thickness of wedge at a, is to that ata,,as1:cos S.

Through a, and a, draw double ordinates opandrs. These double ordi-

nate are equal because they are equally distant from center C.

Per Conic Sections,

Chord 0 p: chord ht::B, :B,,.

Chord rs: chordif::B,:B,,.

Let a be the difference between a right angle and the angle C a, p or

Ca,s, also let b be the difference between aright angle and the angle

Ca, tand b, that of a right angle and angle Ca,,, f.

The differential width at a, corresponding ton lin Dia. 4 is to differential

width at a, corresponding tos a Dia. 4as A, cos a: A, cos b.

Also the differential width at a, is to that ata, as A, cos @: A,,, cos b,

The product then of thickness at a, into length op into width at a, is to

that of thickness at a,, into length h t into width at a,,

1 cos ah

As B, : 153 2A B icos;@ : Av B cos) Si cosib) = aaeacosese

A, cos @ : A,, cos b J

Because A,B, cos a equals A,B,, cos b the last ratio above is true.

*These double ordinates and line P C should intersect at d.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 217

Likewise the product of the thickness at a, into length rs into width at

a, is to that of the thickness at a,,, into length if into width ata,,.

( HS art Ae 2 Ja )

As rs PCOS Sy Ayr COSIG) a Ds COSsONeCOS yee eL COs Ss

A, cos a@ : A,,,cosb, j

Mass-factor then at a, is to mass-factor at a,, or a,,, as 1 : cos 9,

If in Diagram 7 conjugate diameters A, A, and B, B, were at right angles

the chord element of mass and the wedge mass would be cos? a, to unity

greater. Regardless of the law of variations of the angle a, from wedge to

wedge if we assume a homogenous solid made up of elliptic wedges having,

a common edge length of B, B,, and limited in width by an ellipse with

principal semi-axis A and A, having its plane in center C and at right angles

to diameter B, B,, then we have a volume that can be divided into infini-

tesimal wedges of equal masses in accordance with Art. 14. If the ellip-

soid be divided into wedges having the same angular thicknesses as those

of the assumed solid, then the mass of any wedge of the ellipsoid is to the

mass of the corresponding wedge of the assumed solid as the square of the

cosine of the @ angle (cos’ ~,) to unity. In the assumed solid let m repre-

sent the mass of the chord element, m that of the wedge and M, the mass

of the whole solid; then in the ellipsoid m cos? «, is the mass of the chord

element, m cos’ a, that of the wedge. Let M be the mass of the ellipsoid.

Draw k b, and jb,, parallel to diameter B, B,.. As it was_proven that a,d

equals a, cos S so, by similar construction of diagram with raduus of cir-

clea, C, with a point P, in extension of diameter A, A’ and with points of

tangency corresponding to a, and a,, at b, and b, , it can be proven that

k b, andj b, , each equals b, cos S.

By construction angle Cb, k equals angle a, PC, and Cb,, j equals a,, PC.

Angle b,kC and b,,j C each varies from a right angle by the angle a, Let

angle a, PC be represented by $+u, and a, PC by S—v,

eee cos b

From a, conceive a perpendicular drawn to diameter BB. In con-

struction then we have a right angled trianzle with hypothenuse Ca, or a,

and with perpendicular equal to a, cos S cos a, in which

; a’ cos Scosa A, cos Sccsa

sin a, ¢ P= aaa

; A,

5) eRe wed egos

7 A, cos b

Likewise,

a Eee cos Sicos 2

VARA coaw. on

Draw line P c making an angle (+z) with PC, and let Pc be the result-

ant direction of attraction for the two opposite chord elements. Draw

line v Cu making angle u C k or v C w equal ‘to angle z; and draw lines

218 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters. a

b,, v and b,, z parallel to Pc. Then right angled triangle b,,, vC has angle

Cb,, v equal to S—v+(@+z); and right angled triangle b, z C has angle

Cb,, z equal to $+u—(a+z). Producelineb,, k tou, b,, zuis aright angled

triangle. In triangle u C k angle C k u equals 90°+a, angle k C u equals

zand Cu k equals 90°—(a@+z).

Shay 1 eo A, sin $ sin z

cos s(@LZ)

bial iBilcos ea sin S sin z

cos (@+2Z)

b, Z=B, cos § cos (@#+z)+A, sin S sin z.

Likewise,

b,, V=B, eos $ cos (#+z)—A, sin S$ sin z.

In triangle b, z C,

B, cos $ cos (v#+z)+A, sin $ sin z

cos [S+u—(a+2)]—

In triangle b,, v C,

B, cos S cos («+z)—A,sin 3 sin z

B :

cos [S—v-+(a+z)]=

IN P2—18)2

—B pete

: ‘yi+E

B, cos $ [cos («tz)+)/14-E tan $ sin z

B ‘ong Dae

cos [$+u—(a@+z) |=

Let l=cos (a +z), and n=;/1+E°tan $ sin z.

For mass (m cos S$ cos? @) at a, in direction Pe on particle P.

m cos? a A*, B, cos? b cos? S +n) mA,?B, cos’ b (1+n)

Attraction—=

D? A? B, cos? S$ cos? @ D?A?B,

9) 2 2

iN »_A. B? cos’*a

| B,” cos*b

m B? (1+ n) cos? a

Att., ete., then= ale

C. en D2 B?

Likewise for mass (m cos $ cos? @) at a,,, indirection Pe on particle P

nee m B,' (l= n) cos*@

Ph ED y

Draw C X perpendicular to b,, u, and draw a line from C perpendicular

to b,, j produced. In right angled triangle b,, X C, or ina right angled ~

triangle similar having hypotheuuse B,, C instead of b,, C,

Side for CX = A, sin S cos a

Side for b, X = B, cos S— A, sin Ssin x.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 219

Hyp. B,?=B,2 cos? $ + A,?sin® S sin? a+A,?sin? S cos? a—2A_,B, sin S$ cos

S sin a

=B?[ 14 m sin? 3-2 VIF B®sin 3 cos Ssina |

Likewise,

B,,? =B;? [1+ E? sin? $3+2V1+2H sin S cos § sin a].

dai

Let s = E’ sin? S, andt = 2V1+E’sin ScosSsina By substitution

and reduction.

m m (1+n) cos? &

Att. etc., ata, =

DAs (s—t)P

WMeete aia. el—n)icost a,

EE DE aes (ssi ye

Te} = (+n)[1— 2 @H+S4 (s—t)’—etc].

= (l+n) (1—$ s+3t +,).

For mass at a,, in direction pc on p.

Att. oo Cate

For mass at a,,, etc.

Att. = oes Qe stes4

Multiply the first series by (1+n) and the second by (I—n) and divide the

sum of the results by two and we get

mM COSs?a 3 3.5 3.5 3.5

Average Att.—=—, ese Ils Seppe perin Gh ancy Wier nst—,,).

1 .

l= cos (a+2) = 1—} sin® (a+z) — 54 sin* (w+z)—etc.

Replacing the values of l,s, n and t,

3.0

m cos" & sin? S$ sin? a— a a

(a.) Att.—= z Bee S + Eu ae sint $45

S sin? a +3 sin’,

3. 4. 5.

6 6

Ga pi I ea

S sin esin ia sint (@ + z)—

Let (a+y) be the angle that line PC makes with the resultant direction

of attraction for the two opposite wedges, then any two corresponding

opposite chord elements contribute in the attraction of the two opposite

wedges,

(b.)Att =" oON: ated #2. — £? gin? sie E sin S$ oes sin?.S sin? a—

Ne 1 3.5

4 +9 Siig F : a2, He F

ro S sin? we + 3 sin’ § sine sin y—9sin’ (@ty)—-5 76 E® sin’ $ al

220 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

In the above expression (b), for the two opposite wedges, angles a and

(a + y) as well as eccentricity E are constant quantities. In accordance

then with the expedient of Art. 12 for summation, an expression for the

attraction of the two opposite infinitesimal wedges on particle P is found

by putting

. oe

Sin? s== nm,

Sin? S=;—7n*

Sin’ ee Ktc., for higher power .

For the two opposite wedges in the plane of the principal axes of the

ellipsoid on particle P,

__™ Cos’ & 1 3 2 Sie 4 4 Oe ey) 12 Ae 6 2

Att.= D: —_5W £1 y nt E*+3w sin’ a —z 0 sin’a +50

i 3

sin @ sin y—5 sin’ (@ + y) 9) uh La" =

In any two opposite wedges let H, represent the excentricity and angle

(@,+y,), the direction of the resultant, then for any two opposite wedges:

m cos*a oun *

m 3 3 12

— a oe 24 4 4 in2 2 in2 Los

Tale (rsa Ayes Sa on? sin a, sin v5 sin? (a ty )— nt TDD ete |

19. To find an expression for angle a, and for the eccentricity H? of any

wedge,

Let O be the elliptic angle for the ellipse having A and B for semi major

and semi minor axes, and let é be the elliptic angle for the ellipse having

A and A, for semi major and semi minor axes; also let a, be any semi

diameter of the ellipse having A and A, for semi major and semi minor

axes, and let b be the semi minor axis of the ellipse having A for semi

major axis and a, and B, for semi conjugate diameters.

For any infinitesimal wedze of the ellipsoid having its edge in diameter

BBA

a”? B?—A?’ b?

a2 B? war

B°?=B? + (A?—B?) sin? O.

a? — A? — (A? — B?) sin? O sin? é.

a? + B? =A? + B® + (A? — B?) sin’ O cos’é.

Sin? a=

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 221

Per Conic Sections,

A? +b? =a? + B”.

Therefore b? = B? + (A? — B?) sin? O cos? é

a,? B? — A? b? = (A? — B?) sin? O cos? O sin? &

(A?—B?)? sin? O cos? O sin? é E* sin? Ocos? O sin? &

—<—<—<—

Sin? a ese

‘ TE ~~ (1—E? sin? O sin? €) (1—E? cos? O):

Sin? a, = E'sin? O cos? O sin®é + E® sin? O cos‘ O sin? — + ,

Sin aw, = E’ sin O cos O sin € + } E! sin O cos’ O sin € + 4 E* sin? O cos O

sin’ € + } E® sin® O cos? O sin? €—.

2 Drom) 2 . . ‘ .

EE? Ses cos? O — E? sin? O sin? € + E‘ cost O — E' sin? O cos? O

sin? — + E® cos*O — ,

Et= E# cost O — 2 Et sin? O cos? O sin? € + Et sin* O sin* & + 2 E® cos?

Diagram 8.

To find an expression for angle («,+y,) for any two opposite wedges,

Diagram 8 is constructed in accordance with diagram 7, having lower

part laid over so that point A,,, becomesa,,. A,,nand a,, mare drawn

perpendicular to PC. Anglea,, R A, equals 2 a, C b,R or b, P C equals S,

A,, PR equals ($+) anda,, P R equals (S—v).

In triangle A, Pa,,,

‘ - 2sina. :

—" “sin (3 S—v).

(a). sin A, Pa,, or sin (x+v) cos a Sa ($+) sin (S—v)

Pp i) cos] > Etv— cos *5 = andi b, i — Di sin S cos S.

A : —— ,

AC = a, R=, D sin $ cos S=7/1+ EH? D sin S cos S$

A,, n=a,, M= 71+’ D sin $ cos S cosa,

222 -Wasconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Rn=Rm= /1+ E’ Dsin $ cos 9 sin a’

P n=D cos 3 (cos S— //1+E’ sin $ sin & )

Pm=D cos $(cos S+/1+E sin 9 sin a) !

ap Pn?+A n? = D cos slim sin? sont Lin ScpaSanelle

Went eee t

epee Pm’?+a,m’=Dcos slim sin? Shove P|

: An Aue sin Scosa@

S Ss ay

in ($+u)= —

|e sin?S—2 (1+ E2)* sin ScosSsina |

“Ae sin Scos

Sin (S—y)= 2 SSS,

or 14+ 2 sin?S-12 d+ E22 sin scosseeeedl

Sin ($+) sin peek + i? V REUSa ee

(1+ HE? sin’?S)?—4 (1+ H’) sin’? Scos*®Ssin’a ]

Expand and reduce this value for sin ($+u) sin (S—v), and substitute

the result in expression (a) of this Art.,

Sin(u+ v)=2 sine cosa (sin?S + HE? sin?S—E? sintS—# sin*S + H sin®S

+2 sin* Ssin? a—2 sin® Ssin’a+ H® sin’ S—,).

Sin (u+ v)=2 sina (sin?S + E? sin? S—EH? sintS—H? sin*S+ H* sin®'S—4

sin?S sin?a +2 sin‘S sin? a—2 sin’S sin’a + H® sin®S—,)

tan (u+-v)=2 sin a (sin? $+ E? sin? S— EH? sint S—H? sin* $+ H*sin® S—4 sin?

S sin? a+2 sin* S$ sin? a+ F® sin® S—").

The difference (4 sin® S sin? a) between tan u+-v) and sin (u-+-v) is of the

order of the sixth power of eccentricity, therefore to the sixth power of

eccentricity, per this method of development, the sine, the arc and the

tangent of the angle (u+v) are of the same length.

Diagram 9 is so constructed that triangles A,, P Rand A,,, P R are equal

to triangles like lettered in Dia. 8. In line P A,,, take P B equal to PA,,

and let it be represented by unity. Produce P A,, to D, making P D equal

to P A,,, and let it be represented by (1--a). Produce P D to F making

P F equal to (i+-a).. Complete parallograms P A, C B, P D KE Band

PEGB, and draw diagonals P C, PE and PG.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 223

By construction angles R P C and E P C are equal, and either of these

angles is equal to half the difference of the angles PED and EP D or

EPB. Angle CPG is also half the difference of angles PG Fand GPF

or GPB. Diagonal PG is the direction of the resultant of the two forces

represented by the lines 1 and (1-+a)’.

Diagram 9.

Angle R P E is equal to angle (u-+-v).

In triangle P E D,

= P Dy tan CPH eels ee

In triangle P G F,

The half sum of angles PED and EPD is equal to the half sum of eure

PGF and GPF, therefore

2+2a+a?

2+a

bane CBee x

a= tan CPG Jabal

femme Pern Se Nae BS tint |

fan CPE — 2-28’ +ha'—d alt,

From values of A,P and a,,P already developed in this Art.,

a = 2)/1+ EF’ sin S cos 9 sin a— 2. E*)/1+E? sin’ 3 cos S$ sin a +

(1 +E sin® S cos’ sin? S$ a+,

a? = 4 sin? S cos’ S sin? a+,

The angle CPE is one half of angle RPE or 4 (u+v).

' u+v 1—cos (w+v) Pan hee ee

heron —= ae (Geeta aa (u+yv) + 54 sin (u+v)+ete.

“e. eae u+v

tan CPG=2(1—sin’ $ cos’ S sin? a+,)tan —>

224 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Utv

tan CPG + tan —>—

u+v 2

tan(v+z) = tan ( CPGSF Saas 5) =a rt ae

1—tan CPG tan 5)

} tan (@+2)

Y 1+tan?(a +z)

As the chord elements of attraction from wedge to wedge vary in

mass as m cos? a the above expression for sin(~«+z) must be muitiplied by

m cos? a, Thus modified and expanded,

sin («+z)=3m cos’ a sin a(sin? $+ H? sin? S—,).

sin (@+z2)=—3m sin a(sin? $+ H? sin? S—E’ sint S—H' sin* $+ #' sin®

3 4 23

S—9 sin’ 5 sin’ a---s- sin’ 3 sin’ a——G-sin®s sin’ a+ H* sin'S —,)

‘The letters in the above expression are for the plane of the principal axes.

For any plane substitute ~, #,m, andy, for z. As a, and H, are constant

quantities for any two opposite wedges, summation of chord elements for

Opposite wedges can be made per expedient of Art. 12, by putting;

9 MIO ere

Sinisa Ta n

a4 2.4

Sin S—— 7 , etc., for higher powers.

i 6 i 2 2 4 2 n? 4 4?

SYED (Cay Se i) ae tH SS iy a ai+ £, area n eee

4.6 Bhar WG” 5 2 92 4.6

—_ #4 n*—___ sin’ —==_ n sin? a, ——=" 4 sin? /@) Ee

es oR ee ger TG

Substitute in the above expression the values given for sin a, and eccen-

tricity (#,,) in Art. 19.

non mn’ HK’ sinOcosOsin3 _

5 [(1 —;E? sin? Osin? €) (1 — E? cos? O)]>

(on) Ss sla(@eeayy)—

[i+ E? cos? O (1—4n’) — E’ sin’ O sin? € (1 — 4 n’) + E* cos? O

(1—8n’+ §& n*)— E*sin® O cos? O sin’ é (§ — 32 n? 29 n*)— 4 n?

E! sin* O sin* € (1 — 3 n’) + |].

21. To find the resultant direction of attraction for the whole Ellipsoid.

For any two opposite wedges there are two corresponding opposite

wedges in the adjacent quarters of the Ellipsoid. The resultant for these

four wedges is found by multiplying the expression for the resultant of

either of the two opposite wedges by the cosine of the angle [90° minus

the alpha elliptic angle (€—b)], or the sine of the alpha elliptic angle (¢—b). .

Let (a, + y, be the angle for the resultant of the four wedges,

A, sin n €_ sing (1—E? sin? 0)?

sin (6—b) = ~ (-E' sin? O sin? 2)?"

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 225

Multiply this value for sin (E—b) by expression (b) Art. 20, then the ex-

pression for the resultant of the four wedges is,

sin (a, = y,)= £m n°E’sinO cos O[(1+$ E’—2 E? sin? O—4 n? E?-+4 n?

E? sin® O) siu® € +4 n® E? sin? O sin*?é =, ].

If the attraction of the pairs of wedges were equai, each t» each, then

per Art. 15, the resultant of attraction for the whole ellipsoid would be

found by putting,

)

sin’ €=t

sin*t €=— — etc. for higher powers.

Let (x +'w’) be the approximate angle for the resultant so found.

(a) sin (@ + w’) = 2 Mn? E? sin 0 cos 6,[1 + E?G—2 sin? O—# n? +n’ sin?

OF Er) +e,

To correct this result let (s) be the angle that the resultant of any four

wedges having the angle < greater than 45°, makes with the resultant of

the four wedges so taken that the square of the sine of anzle < in first plus

the square of the sine of angle € in the second shall equal unity. The

correction for any such group of eight wedges is the difference of a cer-

tain two angles the sum of which is a certain angle (s). Let pandr be

these angles. Expressions for the sum and difference of the resultant

attractions for the two four wedge groups are obtainable from expression

the tangent of the half difference of the two angles p and r is:

—r 9

tan Saw MN? EH} sin’ O cos O [(1-+- E7(,) (2 sin? ¢—1)? + |].

(2 sin? ¢—1)* — 1—4 sin” € cos’é.

The expression [sin’? a cos’ a+sin? (45°—a)cos*(45°—a]=14, from well-

known trigonometrical fromule, proves that the value of sin’2 cos’

for any and every group of eight wedges or for the average of all groups

composing the ellepsoid is 1, therefore, for the whole ellipsoid the cor-

rection becomes:

o—1 9 :

tan == <55 Mn! Bi sin’ O cos O [(1+E%,)+,].

—T

sin PF jp men’ E* sin’ O cos O [14+-E*(,)+"].

This correction united additionally, as the conditions require it, to ex-

press‘on (a) of this Art. gives:

sin (a—w) = § Mn? E? sin O cos O [1-++E” ($—2 sin’? O—4n’+ $n? sin’ O)

4B", 421:

“

226 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

This method of correction gives an expression exactly true to the eighth

power of eccentricity. Another order of correction, similar to the one

treated, commences with the eighth power of ecentricity, but its effect is

small when eccentricity is large, owing to the fact that each group of

eight wedges to be combined in the next order of resultants, is so com-

posed of wedges from different parts of the ellipsoid, that the attractions

of all groups of eight are very nearly equal each to each.

M* M

1—sin’a, 1—4 E* sin? Ocos? 07+"

Substitute this value for M in the above expression for sin («—W) and

we get for the whole ellipsoid the angle that the direction of attraction

makes with the direction from the attracted particle to the center of the

eliipsoid.

3 4

(b) sin (@—W) = 5 Mn° E’sin O cos of + E5 —2 sin’ O —>z zn LS

n? sin? O)-+ E!(,)+"

When the attracted particle is at the surface of the ellipsoid n becomes

uni y and the ean is:

sin (e—W) = -M sin O cos of ay oy Gre sy sin’ 0) a EC ary

In the above, in order to get the term depending on E' exact. it is to be

observed that Mf can be used for M, angle é, for (—b) and arc of angle a

for sine or tangent, also so far as theexpression is dependent on attraction

22. To find the attraction of au oblate ellipsoid on any outside particle.

By requisite substitution, expression (c) Art. 18 for two opposite wedges

becomes:

TS 3 3

(a) Att=p U- 5n' Kt cos *O + 50H’ sin*O sin "=n EE! cos*#O + qnE *cos4O

3 ‘ ee A} 3 2

+o n’Esin4Osin 42 — 95 EH sin*Ocos’O sin?é + 5 n’Etsin?Ocos?

198

O sin?— i 2 +H+sin’?O cos”O sin?é+-,).

Expression (b) Art. 20 modified for tangent and reduced gives:

Giatey va oan 4 a a

tan(@,+y,)= 5 n*E’sinOcosO sing(1 + 5 E*cos*O— 7 n’K? cos*O— 5 H’sin*O

ee NN

sin2é + zo’ H’sin’Osin’s—_, ).

* The Italic M represents greater mass than the Roman in this investi-

gation.

The Tariation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 227

Expression (b) Art. 21 gives:

3 aS 3 ¥ 4 23

tan(@—w)= 5 n’E?sin OcosO (1+ 3 K?—2 E’sin ?O— peed 99 DE’

sin?O-+ ,).

(@,+y,) is the angle that D* makes with the resultant of any two opposite

wedges, and (v—w) is the angle that D also makes with the resultant for

the whole ellipsoid. The tangents of the angles having the same radius

(D) are in the same plane perpendicular to D. To determine the distance

of the resultant of any two opposite wedges from the resultant of the

whole ellipsoid, these tangents may represent the adjacent side of a tri-

angle having the included angle [90°—(¢—b]. Let the tangent of angle

(@,+y,) be (b) and that of (w—w) be (a), then the third side (d) is the dis-

tance of the resultant, in tangent of angle. of any two opposite wedges

from that of the whole ellipsoid.

Tugonometry gives:

d=//2?—b?—2ab cos[90°—(E—b)] = V a?—b’—2ab sin(é—b).

3 3 a 23

ol = 5 n’E’sin Ocos O(1+ 5 E?—2 E? sin’?O— zy n? KH? + 50 n’E? sin’?O--2 EH?

in2Osin2é BI eH? sin? Failed ita Me corayat del

sin*Osin’s — yon sin? O sin*=—2 K? sin O sin*s+7

; n°E?sin?Osin#é + _).

Let c?=1-+-tan? (w—w),.

f =1+ tan’ (@—y)).

Let r be the angle that the resultant of any two opposite wedges makes

with the resultant of the whele ellipsoid.

Trigonometry gives:

ofa

COs — 2ef :

Cos r=1—+n* E? sin’? O cos? O (143 E?—4 E? sin? O—§ n? E?+ 33 n? E’

sin? O+12 EK’ sin’ é+4 EK? sin’ O sin? ¢—81 n? E® sin? O sin’ <—4 E’ sin? O

sin’ €+-16 n? E? sin? O sin* €+-,).

Multiply expression (a) this Art. by the above value for cos r and the ex-

pression for the attraction of any two opposite wedges in the direction of

the resultant for the whole ellipsoid becomes:

Att.=pi(l—3 n? E? cos? O-+-2 n? E? sin? O sin? €—3 n? E* cost O—;% n* Et

sin? O cos? O+2 n' E* cos‘ O+2 n‘ E* sin‘ O sint €—42 E‘ sin? O cos? O sin® é

+42 n’ E* sin’ O cos? O sin® €—128 n‘ E# sin? O cos? O sin? £+-_).

For the whole ellipsoid per Art. 15

Sin? é=t,

Sin‘ é 5A, Etc., for higher powers.

* Line D extends from attracted particle to center of ellipsoid.

228 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The expression for the whole ellipsoid becomes:

Att.=pp» UI—F n? E? cos? O+ 3, n? H? sin? O—,).

M=—;—~ =M (143 E' sin? O cos? O+3 E® sin? O cos* O+3 E® sin*

COs” @,

O cos’ O+,).

b. Att. es n? E? co.? O+- 35 n® E? sin? O—2 n? E* cos* O+2 n* E* cos?

O—3z E* sin? O cos? O+£ n? E* sin? O cos® O+ 25 n’* E* sin* O—3$4 n* E* sin?

_O cos’ O+,).

Att =—pr| 1-4 n? FE? (1—2 sin? O)—2 E! (n?-—5 n‘ 12 sin? O—2 sin' O

—4 n? sin? 9+3 n? sin* O+187 n’* sin? O—$} n* sin* @) =

23. To find the increase in attraction in passing on the surface of an

oblate ellipsoid from the equator to the poles.

When the attracted particle is at the surface of the Ellipsoid n equals

unity and D equals B,, and expression (b) Art. 22 becomes

Att a (1—2 E? cos? O ++ 8, E® sin? O—,).

B, a (1—E? cos? 0).

Ayes ate E? cos? O-+ 3, E? sin? O48, E! cos 04-2, E* sint O

% E‘ sin? O cos? O +,)

(a) Att = FE 1_E’sin? O48 E!— 1, E! sin? O—,1,- E sin‘ O+,)

Atthe poles angle O becomes zero, and

() See ee Eo E! + etc)

At the a ae O ee ninety degrees, and

3.3.5

Att= mit? Sippel oe Bete. )

Subtract expression (a) from (b) and the eae is,

: © aE sin’ O + E* sin’? O “0 ws +) sin?0) +, J.

Ie ro ie h sin? O + h? sin? O (> +; eeSin” 0)+ i ].

The increase in attraction then from the equator to the poles varies as

the square of the sine of the elliptic angle, exact for the second power of

excentricity or first power of ellipticity and very nearly true to the sixth

power of eceentricity or the third power of ellipticity.

~The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 22%

VIL.

The gravity and the Firure of a body, due to its Rotation and the attrac-

tion of its Component Particles.

First.—The oblate ellipsoid is the figure of equilibrium due to the rotation

and attractlon of the component particles of a fluid body.

Second.—The increase in gravity from the equator tothe poles uwaries as the

square of the sine of the elliptic angle, or the angle with vertex at

center of figure, and not asthe square of the sine of latitude.

24, To find the combined effect of attraction and rotation on any par-

ticle in the plane of the equator of an oblate ellipsoid.

Case 1st. When the velocity of rotation is just sufficient to counter-

balance the attraction of the ellipsoid on the particle.

ys Diagram 10.

In Dia. 10 let a be the particle and let arc a b be the distance of ro-

tation fur an infinitesimal unite of time (t) or velocity of rotation. Letaf

the versed sine of arc a b in direction A C represent the unite of attraction,

also let f a in direction C A represent the repulsive effect of rotation. As

attraction just couvter-balances repulsion the particle must revolve in the

circumference of a circle of radius aC. As attraction and repulsion act

at a right angle to an infinitesemal portion of the circumference these

forces can neither increase or diminish the velocity (v) of rotation.

Let af, ag, ah, ete., toaC represent the attraction of the ellipsoid for

one, two, three, etc., units of time acting on a particle with a constant

force equal to the attraction of the ellipsoid at distance aC. On the cir-

cumference lay off aros ab, be, ed, ete., to s, each equal to ab; and con-

230 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

nect points f 0, gc, hd, etc.,toCs. By the law of the expedient of this

demonstration the time required for particle a to revolve to s acted on by

the combined forces is that required for a constant force equal to the

attraction of the ellipsoid at distance aC, to move the particle over the

distance aC. Let distance aC be represented by (a) and af by (c). Per

law of ultimate ratio tangent ab,, arca band chord ab are equal each

to each.

Chord a b? =v? =2a xc. 2a e

av?

—e

Chord of a quadrant, a m? = 2a?=

Per law of falling bodies:

am’—v?t. am=vt.

v tis the length of the arc as, and a m is th? chord of a quadrant. The

time required for the particle to revolve over the arc as is Vie V9 is

Vc.

the length of the chord am, when 27 is the length of a circumference

The time (T) r quired for a complete revolution of the particle or the rota-

tion of the ellipse is :

Tee V2a : 2) By ae

Ve T=¢

In case of a homogenious oblate ellipsoid, the mass inside of the layer

having semi-major axis (a), varies as (a) cubed. The attraction, then, of

the ellipsoid on particle (a) in the plane of the equator varies directly as

distance (a). As the ellipsoid rotates as one mass the time of revolution of

all component particles is the same, and all particles in the plane of the

equator rotate without pressure.

Case 2d.—When the repulsion from rotation is not sufficient to counter-

balance attraction,

It is evident from case 1st, without further investigation, that the loss

of p essure fur particle a varies inversely as the time squared of rotation

of the ellipsoid to the time of rotation required squared for repulsion to

counterbalance attraction.

Case 3d.— When the repulsion from rotation is greater than attraction.

In Dia. 11 let arc a b, be the velocity of rotation for an infinitesimal unit

of time. The initial impulse of rotation acting alone would throw par-

ticle (a) in direction of tangent to di-tance ab, equal toarcab,. Letaf

be the attraction for the first unit of time. D aw b, f’ perpendicular to

a C, then a f’ represents the force required acting in direct on a C to make

the particle revolve in a circle. The versed sine f’ a in direction C a is the

The Variation tn Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 231

repulsive effect from the rotation measured by the system of a circle-

Draw f b perpendicular to a C, and from the initial point a, draw diagonals

abandab,. Under the hypothes's that no component particle excep ing

partic’e a, has freedom to change position in the ellipsoid, it is evident that

this exceptional particle actel upon by the forces combined would be at

the end of the first unit of time at b instead of at b, as it was in Case Ist.

Diagram 11.

If during the second unit of time attraction did not act the particle

would continue to move in direction a b toc’ making distance b c’ equal

toab. ltis evident under the action of the forces combined at the end

of the second unit of time, the particle would be found at some point c in

in linec c’ drawn parallel to bC. The position of the particle for the

third or any unit of time in due order can likewise be determ ned.

Triingles C b c and Cbc! are equal from having same base Cb and equal

alt tudes; triangles Cbc' and cab are equal from having equal bases be!

and ab and same altitude; trianzle Cab and Cab, are equal from having

same base Ca and equal altitudes. It is now evident that the triangle

evolved by the forces combined for any unity of time is equal not only to

the one for the first unity of time but also to the one that would be evolved

by the initial impulse of rotation combined with an attraction equal to the

versid sine due to repulsion from rotation.

Measured, with reference to the arc 2b, of the circle attraction is to repul-

sion as af to f'a, but measured withreference to the arc abin the path of the

particle acted upon by the forces combined attraction and repulsion are

equal and in equilibrium in the production of arc ab or any other ar c in

the path of revolution of the particle.

The following is the enunciati n of a proposition well known to be true

from demonstration. “If a body-describes an ellipse, being continually

urged by a force directed towards the focus, that force must vary inversely

as the square of the distance.” In the case, then, under consideration if

232 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

the attraction of the ellipsoid on the particle varied inversely as the square

of the distance, the path of revolution would be an ellipse. in Dia. 11, let

kl be any part of the elliptic path of revolution described in a unite of

time. Take gk to fa inversely as Gk’ to Ga, and draw gl and complte the

parallelogram kglm. Jt is evident that the diagonal kl is the resultant

effect of attraction kg being equal to the repulsicn gk or lm. If the attrac-

tion then varied inversely as the cube or any other higher power of dis-

tance kg would be shorter than in the case just considered and the

diagonal of equilibrium wouid be a line from k to some point between m

and 1. With aspherical central body, then, the path of rev lution of the

particle would be an ellipse, but with an ellipsoidal central body it is other-

wise.

In the expression for the attraction of an oblate ellipsoid in the plane

of the equator (Art. 22) subtitute (A) divided by (n) for (D) and the expres-

sion becomes:

M 3

Att. =45 (n’4+-4X# n'E’4+-5-4X? nL! bete.)

Mn? 3 Mn’E?, :

re Ti) ne — etc., make up the attraction of

The sum of the elements

the ellipsoid. The first element acting alone would cause the particle to

revolve in an ellipse; but the other elements ac ing conjointly would

cause it to move in a path continuously increasing the distance from the

center of the ellipsoid, or tLe path would be a spiral evolved by a radius

vector increasing continuously in length and also decreasing in angular

velocity so as to generate equal areas in equal time. All of these elements

combin+d evolve a resultant path having a radius vector increasing and

decreasing during a revolution as the radius vector of an ellipse would in-

crease and decrease while additionally and continuosly receiving incre-

ments of length. An appropriate appellation for the resultant path is

elliptic spiral. The radius vector of an elliptic spiral generates equ il areas

in equal time. As far as observation has been able to determine each of

the heavenly bodies rotates on an axis; it is, therefore, good common

sense to conclude that every body in the heavens revolves in an elliptic

spiral orbit continually with decreasing increments departing from its

primary. When the particle is an interior one, then its repulsion or out-

ward pressure depends upon the law of the interior attraction of the body.

25. Jt is evident without additional investigation that the repulsive

effect from rotation parallel to the equator, decreases from equator to the

poles as A cos O. Angle O is the elleptic angle measured from the plane

of the equator.

26. To find the figure of a mass of homogeneous fluid due to rotation

and mutual attraction of component particles, also to find the gravity at

any point on the surface or within the rotating body.

From the nature of the case the two parts of the rotating fluid body as

divided by the equatorial plane are similar and equal, and all sections par-

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 233

allel to that plane are circles. The body thus can be conceived, made up

in an infinite number of laminze or layers or shells so that the mass of the

body within any layer may vary as the cube of the equatorial radius of

the layer. The body can also be conceived, made up of an infinite num-

ber of eccentric cones or cones with eccentric bases, having their bases in

the surface of the body and their vertices at the center of the equatorial

section or center of body. These c.nes may be taken with such areas of

base that their volumes shall vary as distince from base to center of body.

In case the body in equilibrium is an ellipsoid, it can be conceived, made

up of an infinite number of elliptic cones or cones with elliptic bass. If

each elliptic cone has an el iptic base with ove principal axis, of length

due it per the system of dividiog the ellipse extending from either pole of

the ellipsoid to the equator per law of alpha or beta elliptic angles (see

Art. 14 and Diagram 5), and the other principal axis of length due it from

proportional distance from center of the ellipsoid, then the cones have

equivolent bases and their volumes vary as distances from bases to center

of body. Per the expedient of the layers and the cones, any layer by the

cones is conceivably cut up into infinitesimal parts, so that each part has

mass proportional to its distance from the center of the body.

Fluid equilibrium, or a state of rest for any and all of the component

particles requires that the pressure from auy infinitesimal part of a layer

on the fluid interior shall just equal that of any other part of same layer

having the same layer surface area.

Such ultimate parts of a layer may be called layer elements of mass.

As all sections of the rotating fluid body, parallel to the plane of the

equator must be circles, and as the equatorial plane must divide the body

into two equal parts whatever the figure of a section in a plane of the axis

of rotation, a line of Jayer elements of mass in either polar radius must

balance a line of elements in an equatorial radius. It is safe thea to take

as granted that gravity at either pole to gravity at the equator is inversely

as polar to equatorial radii. As the sphere is the figure of equilibrium for

a fluid body not rotating, and as a sphere rotated on a center axis gener-

ates a centrefugal or repulsive force in lines of ordinates of axis, propor-

tional to lengths of ordinate, and as the oblate ellipsoid is the only figure

that has the required relations to the sphere to continue a fluid mass in

equilibrium in passing from a state of rest to a condition of rotation, it is

safe to take as granted that such is the figure of equilibrium for a rotating

ing mass, providing it be demonstrated that every element of mass of a

layer presses, each to each, equally on interior mass.

The general expression for attraction on a particle at the surface of an

ellipsoid, is:

M 7s asst) lg BONG 0 ee Re Te Nad

Att =] 14-* n—! h sin? 04 18 h>—_ 28h? sin? O— 1h? sint OF h? ]

we BOmg At “ge aap 50 Or

To satisfy the conditions the elliptic angle (O) in the above must be meas-

234 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ured from the polar axis. The following is an equivelent expression with

the elliptic angle (O) m:asured from an equatorial radius:

peuenee ah’ cost On! (") +"

Att. =a 143 4! bh cos?0-+ 182 23H? cos? O—

5 30 300

Let a represent an equatorial zadius varying from O to A, then for mass

interior to any layer M varies as (a) cube, hence int-rior attraction varies

asa. For iuterior attraction a can be substituted for M divided by A’.

h in the above expression for attraction equals A—B divided by A. To

put the expression in shapeso that h may represent unity divided by A,

the constant terms 1+4h+48h+etc., so far as used in the computation

must be made unity. The same result is obtained by not making this

change, providing due allowances are made for A—B not being equal to

unity.

Att =a[1—th cos’? O — 3, h’ cos’ O —4, h’ cos* O — h3(,) — ,].

The difference in attraction for any point on the polar radius and same

layer point on the equatorial radius is:

i Pee

G a> 35 "++ 35 aan

When the rotating fluid body is in equilibrium the mass from alayer in

any equatorial cone must just balance the mass from same layer in either

of the polar cones. As these masses vary as their distances from the cen-

ter of the body, gravity in the plane of the equator and in the polar axis

must vary inversely as same distances, and the centrifugal force or repul-

sion fr m rotation in the plane of the equator must, in case of equilibrium,

be expressed by,

a = a oe

a h—a (5 h+3 i +,)=a(- = aR —,)

The repulsion from rotation at any point in or 01 the rotating body in

direction parallel to the equatorial plane is per demonstration (Art. 25),

mh.)

Rep. = a cos 0(5h ht —35, he— ,

Gravity is the third sideof a triangle in which the two sides (attraction

and repulsion of rotation) and the included angle [(O—z)+(a—w)] are

given. The third side or

loner 4

Gravity = Ati.?}Rep.—2 Ait. Rep. Cos [(0—2)+(a—w) |?

Gravity =a [ 1—h cos? O+ th? cos? O— 4 h? cos* O+h*(,.)—,, ]

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 235

The expression for any radius of an oblate ellipsoid in terms of ellipticity

and sine of elliptic angle (O) in which angle angle (O) is measured from an

equatorial radius is:

eK [ 1—h sin? O04} h? sin? O—4 h? sin‘ O+h' (,)+,, ]

For any point (a,) on the surface or within the ellipsoid:

ah a[ 1h sin? O+-4 h’ sin? O—4 h? sin‘ O--h’ («|

The above expressions for gravity and radial distance prove that gravity

for all points in the same layer of the ellipsoid varies inversely as distance

from point to center of body. To comprehend how this result satisfies the -

second test for equilibrium in full it must be understood in the expedient

of the infinitesimal layers and zones, that the same system of cones is used

only to divide up one or any one layer. The point now required to be

proven is that when any cone is so moved that its axis is changed to the

normal or direction of gravity, without changing the point of base on the

layer, the cone cuts the same mass from the layer as when in first position.

The expedient used to divide up the layer requires the ellipse to be de-

scribed with a variable radius with the center fixed at the center of the

ellipse. Per law of ultimate ratio the radius is constant ia describing an

infinitesimal arc. The same ellipse can ke conceived described with the

same variable radius, and with that radius kept on the normal or indirect-

ion of gravify, providing the center so vary in locations that the describ-

ing end of the radius be kept on the ellipse to be described. In this case

the ellipse is known, because it is the one describ d by the first method.

For any point of the curve, then, the center in the normal, or in direction

of gravity is known. Per law of ultimate ratio by this method an infini-

tisimal are of the ellipse is described with the same constant radius as in

first instance, and with a fixed center. The same infinitesimal arc of the

ellipse, then, is described by either expedient. Therefore the cone in either

position cuts from the same layer the same volume or mass.

A fluid mass takes on a spherical figure from the mutual attraction of

component particles. If such spherical body receives an initial impulse of

rotation sufficient to cause one complete rotation during infinity of time,

then the ultimate ratios initiated for change of figure are those, and those

only, that are due to change from asphere to an oblate ellipsoid. This

should be taken as demonstrat on that the oblate ellipsoid is the figure of

equilibrium and alone that figure, unless there is real ground for positive

proof otherwise.

236 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

WAND.

ine Figure of Equilibrium, the Density and Temperature of the Earth and —

Other Planets. ;

First.—The oblate Ellipsoid ts the figure of equilibrium of a rotating fluid

mass of heterogeneous density, and all solids manifest the fluid

property in some degree under a reqnisite continued pressure.

Second.—The averuge density of the earth’s crust in depth about 180 miles

is 2.96 times water, and at the center about 3.05 times that of the

crust, or 9 times water. At other points the density is given in

table 4, this chapter.

Lhird.—The temperature of the carth from surface to center at first in-

creases about 1° C. per 90 feet, but this rate of increase so

diminishes that at the depth of 130 miles the temperature

becomes about 3,690° C. Thence to the center the rate of increase

ts so small that the temperature continues nearly uniform.

Fourth.—The earth has yet to cotract, radially, about 150 miles to become

throughout zero temperature. The interior flames will be, con-

tinually, fed by the fuel of pressure of outside loed to a limit

beyond which the earth’s mass cannot compress. The present

interior, at a few miles below the surface begins to get plastic,

and from about 130 miles below the surface to the center it

becomes so plastic that the temperature is kept nearly uniform

by convection of heat.

Note.—The density of a fluid earth composed, throughout, proportion-

ally of the same elements would increase from surface to c:nter, not with-

standing the commotion produced by the heat generated by pressure. In

case of such an earth at 15°C.,if there were no heat from pressure, and

therefore a state of rest, its increase in density would be per law of com-

pression. If heat sufficient to raise the temperature of the whole mass

50° C. were put into such earth so as to leave surface at 15° C., and have

the increase in tempergture from surface to center per law of compression,

then in case no heat escaped, per law of convection there would be no state

of rest tili the whole mass became of uniform temperature, 65° C. It is

evident, then, that an earth having a crust with moulten interior would

be at a state of rest proportionally to the thickness and non-conducting

heat property of its crust. Not with-standing the moulton interior of the

earth (if she has such) is now at temperature nearly uniform, yet I sup-

pose before the crust solidified or become plastic that heat radiated into

cold space so rapidly that in spite of the law of convection, the tempera-

ture at the center of the earth was thousands of degrees higher than at

the surface. The heighth to which material is now being thrown from

the sun, proves that the teraperature at his center is higher beyond com-

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 237

prehension than at his surface. Let those believing solidification com-

menced at the center keep these facts in mind while reading this chapter.

27. To find the decrease in attraction on a rotating fluid oblate ellipsoid

from the poles to the equator.

Conception 1st. Such an oblate Ellipsoid can be conceived made up of

an infinite number of oblate Ellipsoids having a common center, and each

component Ellipsoid of homogeneous density.

Conception 2d: The same oblate Ellipsoid can be conceived made up

also in shells or layers with each shell or layer of homogeneous density.

The surface of the layers in this case would be at the surface of the com-

ponent Ellip-oids of conception first.

The attraction of each component ellipsoid can be computed by formu-

lae airealy developed for homogeneous ellipsoids, and the attraction for -

the heterogeneous mass is equal to the sum of the attractions of the com-

ponent parts.

The attraction of first or leneeat component ellipsoid at pole is:

The attraction at equator of same is:

fo E+, )

Decrease from pole to equator is:

Mm; 9 m

The attraction at the pole of first ellipsoid for the ‘second component

ellipsoid is:

ma, [1 jee OREM 15 ee | — ™,

B’ 5 B? (i—E —E?) BE) 5 Az (1 — BK’)? A?

E peeB es eo? BP il in which me

The attraction at equator for same is:

m £ 9 ”

we [itare +, |.

Decrease is:

™ | 2H—?hw +, ]-

A? » “

Results are thus obtained for all the component ellipsoids.

The decrease in attraction from pole to equator of the heterogeneous

oblate ellipsoid or sum of results for component ellipsoid is:

23 (m + m,+ m,+ m, + etc.) — ate H+m,n?h + m,n?

h, + m, n,* h, + ete.),

238 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The general expression for the attraction of a homogenous oblate ellip-

soid on any outside particle, when ‘modified by the requisite substitutions.

proves that the decrease in attraction from the equator to the pole of the

heterogenous ellipsoid, caused by any of the interior component homoge-

neous ellipsoid, varies in accordance with the law for a homogeneous ob-

late ellipsoid, when the attracted particle is at any point on the surface.

The decrease in attraction then, from the equator to the pole, true for the

second power of eccentricity, varies as the square of the sine of the ellip-

tic angle, or the angle of geocentric latitude.

28. To find the decrease in attraction of an oblate ellipsoid on a particle

in the surface of auy layer from the plane of the equator toa polar ra-

dius.

Under the conditions of this discussion, when a heterogeneous ellipsoid

becomes homogeneous, then all the layers become similar and of equal el-

lipticity. The layers of the heterogeneous ellipsoid can be made similar

by taking away certain crescent pieces. To determine the attraction on

any particle in the surface of any interior layer, the attraction of certain

outside crescent pieces and the interior mass need only be considered, as

all the other exterior mass attracts the particle equally in opposite direc-

tions.

In the last article an expression is developed that can be used to deter-

mine the attraction of the interior mass. A method to find the attraction

of the crescent pieces become manifest from diagram 4. The attraction on

particle P of that portion of the ellipsoid cut out by rotation of the lines

Pe and Pg depends upon the length of chord dg or ce, when angle g Pe is

small or infinitesimal. The point of tangency a bisects chord d g,

The length of chord dg varies as diameter BB. The diameter

B,B, becomes longer by increasing the ellipticity. When point P is

moved to the interior of the ellipsoid, that portion of the chord d g,as

shown in diagram %, by Pd, is equal to gg, in case the ellipsoid is com-

posed of similar layers, or is of homogeneous density. If the ellipsoid is

composed of layers of decreasing ellipticities or with density increasing

from surface to center, then Pd is less than gg. Theangle P ax of dia-

gram 4 is aright angle by construction, and PaC is less than a right angle.

The angle Cax, or angle a, or the angle of the vertical bacomes nothing

when the layer, of which a is the point of tangency becomes a circle.

When the ellipticity of the ellipse havingain point of tangency is less than

that of the ellipse BA BA, then the difference b-tween gg, and Pd of dia-

gram 2, or the attraction for the external crescent pieces is at ained from

the expression already obtained for the sine of angle a or the angle of

the vertical.

sina = E’ sin S$ cos $+,=—2hsin S$ cos $+...

When point of tangency a, of diagram 4, is in the surface of the layer,

and point P is moved in semi axis BC, to the surface of the same layer,

fi! Cg IE EM

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 239

then the radius for the angle a for avy direction of chord dg cutting the

layer, varies in length from zero to semiaxis b. The general expression

for any of the radii is, b sin S.

Let E be the eccentricity and H the ellipticity of the outside layer. The

expression for the sine of the angle of the vertical for the ellipse having

semi minor axis b and ecceutricity E is, sin « = b E? sin? $ cos S$.

The expression for the sine of the corresponding angle of the vertical for

a Jayer having semi minor axis b and eccentricity e is, sin a, = b e? sin®

SaCOSe Se

ge, — Pd =2sin a— 2sinag.

The expression for any chord of a layer drawn from a pole of the layer

is, 2 bcos 9.

ee, — Pd _ (pm — 6?) sin? § —2(H — h)sin’S,

2bcos 9

The attraction of the mass cut from a homogeneous oblate ellipsoid hav-

ing semi minor axis b and eccentricity e, by any two chords drawn from

a pole, the one chord making an infinitesinal angle with the other is:

Att.= 7 (i — 2 e? sin? S +).

The attraction then of the mass cut from the whole ellipsoid having

semi minor axis B and eccentricity E by the two chords extended, ona

particle at the pole of the interior layer, having semi minor axis b and ec-

centricity e, providing the density of the whole mass is homozeneous, is

Att.= = @=

e’ sin? S+ E’ sin? S +,)

To make summation for whole ellipsoid we must put, as hertofore:

sin? $ = 2.

sin? S == — , etc:, for higher powers.

For whole ellipsoid as above described, then, on particle at pole of layer:

Att.= = (tl = ROSE DEE es (ll (0) Sa Dea

Y4 a’

Likewise obtained for particle in equator of same layer:

Att= ™ d+4e2—1E+,).

Attraction at pole, then, less that of the equator, is:

Dif. of Att. = ™ B—de'+,)=B[ph+¢G-)h) +, |.

a” ay

240 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

An oblate ellipsoid having semi-minor axis B, and ellipticity H, and den-

sity increasing from surface to center can be made up of a homogeneous

oblate ellipsoid, having semi minor axis b and ellipticity h, with density

the same as layer having semi minor axis b and ellipticity h, and of other

homogenevus oblate ellipsoids having semi minor axis less than b and el-

lipticities less than h, and also an outside part, composed of layers having

semi minor axes varying from B to b, with ellipticities varying from H

to h.

Let 1 be the density of the layer having semi minor axis b. For the out-

side crescent masses there can be substituted one crescent mass of the same

volume as the sum of the crescent masses, with a density, so as to give an

equivolent attractive effect. Let this density be c times the surface den-

sity of the heterogeneous ellipsoid. Let M be the mass of the whole he-

terogeneous ellipsoid, WZ the mass of the homogeneous ellips>id, having

density 1,and m, m, m,. ete., the masses of the homogeneous ellipsoids

having semi minor axis less than b.

It is now evident frum investigations already made, that for the surface

of any layer, the attraction at the pole of the layer, less that at the equa-

tor, can be expressed as follows:

€

Diff. of At== [4 h +

oe (H—h) ]+2%m +m,+m, + ete)

ml M

= (mh +m,n°h, + m,n? h, + etc.)

The result from the general expression for the attraction of a homogen-

eous Cblate ellipsoid on any outside particle, when the requisite substitu-

tions for the case under consideration are made, proves that the decrease in

attraction on the surface of any layer from its pole to its equator varies in

accordance with the law for the homogereous oblate ellipsvid at its sur-

face.

29. To find the figure of equilibrium of a fluid rotating mass, increas-

ing in density from surface to center.

The attraction at the surface of any layer at its equator being less than

at its poles, the thickness of any layer at its equator _is greater than atits

poles. As the decrease in attraction on the surface of any layer varies per

law for the surface of a homogeneous oblate ellip-oid, the increase in the

‘thickness of the layer as caused by attraction, must follow the law for the

increase in the radii of an oblate ellipsoid. The effect of the centrifugal

force to give its additional increase of ellipticity follows for the layer the

law for the surface of the homogeneous ellipsoid. The combined effects,

then, of attraction and centrifugal force, or gravity, cause each layer to be

an oblate ellipsoidal layer, or the figure of equilibrium of all layers to be,

also that of an ob'ate ellipsoid.

30. To find the density of the earth from surface to center, the mean

density being $9 times greater than that of a surface layer 127 miles deep.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 241

The increase in the density of liquids caused by pressure, as shown by

Oe’ sted’s apparatus and other experiments, varies as the pressure, meas-

ured under the condition of constant temperature. Gasses fsllow the same

law. Deschanel says, “The true compressibility of water, according to re-

cent experiments conducted under the direction of M. Jamin, by Messrs.

Amaury and Descamps, is at the temperature of 15° Centigrade .0000427

per atmosphere.” In these experiments the compressibility of glass was

taken to be 0000029 per atmosphere, The fact that solids can b2 com-

pressed shows that sclids possess the fluid property essential to com pressi-

bility. The fact that rocks are found bent which once were straight, also

that a pane of glass or a slab of marble can be bent by a certain contin ued

pressure demonstrates that the particles of solids can move on each other.

The movements of sulid ice in glaciers is proof in the same direction. The

effect of pressure above and below the columns left for supporis in deep

mines gives like testimony. The deep canyons of Colorado permit the

water to cut so deep and no deeper, because below acertain depth the solid

rock bottom like putty, rises from weights of high banks.

It is the theory of the geologist that the earth, below a thin solid crust,

begins to become plastic, and at certain small depth becomes so p'astic

that the temperature thence to the cent-r can only slightly increase, owing

to the law of convectionof heat. If the theory of the geologist be true,

then the increase in the density of the interior of the earth caused by

pressure varies as out-ide pressure. It is only in the cise the theo y is not

true that we need trouble ourselves about the shadow of a doubt that re-

mains in reference to the law of compressibility of fluids applying to sol-

ids.

If computations made by formulz already developed, modified by the

condition of the theory of the geologist, builds up the earth from center

to surface in layers, giving the difference of gravity of corresponding

layer points in polar and equatorial radius in harmony from center to sur-

face ani exactly meets the observed difference of gravity at the surface,

likewice for ellipticity of layezs so as to meet te observed ellipticity at

surface, also giving a computed direction for gravity at the surface at any

latitude exactly in agreement with the: observed direction, then it seems to

me it must be accepte | that the theory of the geologist is truth, and that

the theory of the astronomer, based on computations made from uncertain

data is a fallacy.

242 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE I,

1. 2% 3. 4 5. 6. 8

E :

S 5 a Y S es 2 iG

a| q A e 4 6. eS A

4 E E D D | a, a

6 Ty Mean ais @ a | ro

ra BS) | A = = es |

Bl o7Gi ae ey. 1.0000 | 9791 | 29791 stz | 0089142

30 | 5048 | .12675| 1.1967] 5687 | 3421 cae 3408

28 4376 2628 | 1.38890 6078 5758 sus € 4875

26 38752 2876 | 1.6765 6291 5058 ahy 38617

24 | 3176 | .3020| 1.9788 | 6284 | 4174 Pease 2501

22 | 2648 | 13012 | 2.2800] 6037 | 3207 ae 1593

20 2168 2841 | 2.5641 5559 2272 aeltcy 923

18 | 1736 | .25°0| 2.8161] 4888 | 1469 ee 480

16 1352 2091 | 3.0252 4090 857 aol 220

14/ 10:6 | 11613 | 3.1865 | 3237 449 ae 86

12| 728 | .1148| 3.3013 | 2403 198 Hee 28

19 488 LOV44 | estou 1647 74. stor ui

8 | 296 .0430 | 3.4187 1012 ODT alt ae eae 1

6 152 .0218 | 3.4400 523 416) | ja Ae eee

4 56 | .4088 | 8.4483 193 Hy nl SPI a. Gicc bob 6

2 8 | .v020 | 3.4503 27 O14 ec Re Seercereret

A AOO TOI alee csers, Pee. Weck 56747 DOWAGen eee —.0049881

The numbersin column 1, table 1, represent the polar radii of similar el-

. liptic layers or shells composing an oblate ellipsoid. The numbers in col-

umn 2are the differences between the cubes of 31 and 30, 30 and 28, 238 and

26, etc. As the volumes of similar oblate ellipsoids vary as the cubes of

their polar radii, the numbers in column 2 are proportional to the volumes

of the component layers. The mean density of the earth as attained by

experiments is, at least very neerly, $9 tim-s that at surface. The whole

mass of the earth, then, may be represented by 31 cubed multiplied by $$,

or 56745, or by 56745 divided by 56745. The first number in column 38 is so

assumed as to give the requisite mass in the earth under the law that the

increase in compression or density varies as pressure, The other numbers

in this column are computed and show the increments in density from

layer to layer. The numbers in column 4 are the computed densities of

' the layers, and those in column 5 divided by 56745, the masses. The pres-

sure of the outside layer compare! with that of any other, varies as the

attraction of the ellipsoid on the masses of these layers. The increment

of den-ity for the pressure of any interior layer is found by multiplying

the assumed increment .12675 by the pressure of the interior layer divided

by the pressure of the outside layer.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies.

243

The numbers in column 6, divided by 56745 are the masses of the humo-

geneous ellipsoids, having radi, 31, 30, 28, etc., composing also the ellipsoid,

and these numbers are found by multiplying the cubes of the nuinbers of

column first by those of column third, excepting the first number, which

is 31 cubed. Tae numbars in column 7 are explained in connection with

table 4.

The formule already developed for the attraction of a heterogeneous

oblate ellipsoid at the pole less that at the equator, is:

. Seal 9 ;

Diff. of Att. = saa m+m +m, + etc)— oe (mH+mn’h

+m,.n7h,-+ etc)

For the purpose of this computation A, andm+m +m, + etc. or M,

can each be made unity, and the formule putin form as follows:

Diff. Att, = 2H —?mH—2m n?h—?2m,n?h, —ete.

The numbers in column 8 are the computed results of — 2m H, — *m,

n*? h — etc

TABLE II.

1 Ly ay 4, 5. 6. 7 8.

s 3 q

BAe nie 5 2 Saal es -

a | 5 lps aes 4 A S a

H 2 Z a n n= a a

SUG! ST anes S @ Fl 2 =n

PAN SES Seer Kel a a a |

Alonl SE) Tae ee ae ee | 1.0000 | 2791 29791 =uF | —.0082142

30 | 2611 11867) 1.1187 | 2921 3202 aos 3190

29 | 2437 1261 | 1.2448 | 3033 3075 B02 2827

28 | 2269 1826.| 1.3774 | 3125 2910 ie 2464

27 | 2107 1878 | 1.5152 | 3192 2712 ah 2112

26 | 1951 1415 | 1.6567 | 3282 2487 = 1779

25 | 1801 1435 | 1.8002 | 8242 2249 sins | 1469

24| 1657 1436 | 1.9438 | 38220 IG}, hy ae 1190

23 | 1519 1418 | 2.0856 | 3168 1725 ae 942

22 | 1887 1379 | 2.2255 | 3084 alas) © |) ea) 729

21 | 1261 1322 | 2.8557 | 2970 1224 | sasz | 551

20 | 1141 1248 | 2.4805 | 2830 998 | sss | 406

19 | 1027 1160 | 2.5965 | 2666 795 aes 2

18| 919 1060 | 2.7025 | 2483 618

tele SUE 0953 | 2.7978 | 2285 468

16| 721 .0842 | 2.8820 | 2077 344

15 | 631 0730 | 2.9550 | 1864 246

14] 547 .0622 | 3.0172 | 1650 170

13 | 469 0519 | 3.0691 | 1439 114

13:| 397 0423 | 3.1114 | 1285 73

acy Sok 0338 | 8.1452 | 1041 51

102) 974. 0262 | 3.1714 | 859 26

91 217 0197 ' 8.1911’ 692 14

244 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE II — continued.

1 2 3 4. 5 6 vl 8.

‘ 3 ® S :

g Fi a 5 L's = A

es | 4g A 2 = Seti No f

H 5 Po iB 5 is a oe

6 ro o 3 ce 5 7

Z > 5 a = = ea |

8 169 .0143 | 3.2054 541 VME RRB SSG cGiad soos 95.0

a 127 .0100 | 3.2154 408 B.4 0 ened alee

6 91 .0066 | 3.22 0 293 1.8 "| .4). CL eee

5 61 .0041 | 3.2261 196.8 5 ls. obs

4 37 .0028 | 3.2284 119.4 Pe MPG ccc. Seo a4 45

3 19 -0O1L | 3.2295 61.4 029) cnn ye ilo eoreaeemee

2 ia .0004 | 3.2299 22.7 OUB)..<..5.5'.0e allaeiieeereeeae peers

1 1 .0002 | 3.2801 3.2 000). fe see

OOM e mi niatsis. gva nae tee 56733.53 | 56750.372]........ —2050643

Tables 2 and 3 are made on plan of table 1. -

2H =, = .0068027.

Table 1 gives: .0068027 — .0049881 — .0018146 for difference in attrac-

tion.

Table 2 gives: .3068027 — .0050648 — .0017384 for difference in attrac-

tion.

Table 8 gives: .0068027 —.0051630 — .0016997 for difference in attrac-

tion.

The difference between first result and second is .0000762, and that of

second and third, 0000384. The first difference is about double that of the

second. From the-e differences we can closely estimate what would be the

result in case the outside layer be kept of thickness one thirty-first part of

radius, and the other layers be reduced toinfinitesimal thickness. The re-

sult in that case for attraction at pole less that at the equator would be

about .001665, or 45.

The observed gravity at the pole, less that at the equator, is ;4;; and the

centrifugal force at the equator is s4,, and nothing at the pole. The ob-

served attraction at the pole, less that at the equator, is: 7}; — sty =

I find by computations that a true result for attraction cannot be at-

tained in accordance with observed and known data, and divide the earth,

from surface so center into layers infinitesimally thin. To meet that data

an outside layer of about

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 245

TABLE III.

aks rss 3. 4. D. 6. ds 8.

31 COIR ee rcsarsesss« | 1.0000 | 2791 29791 a —0032142

39 teagee tol | 1.4151) 1480) |) 3107 as 3095

994 | 12838 | .0620/ 1.1771 | 1510 1519 lie 1523

29 1239% | .0636 | 1.2407 | 1538 1551 ee 1426

283 | 11974 | .0651 | 1.2058 | 1563 1507 ee 1380

28 11554 | .0664 | 1.3722 | 1585 1457 ass 1284.

274 | 11132] .0676 | 1.4389 | 1603 1406 as 1142

27 10732 | .0685 | 1.5083 | 1619 1348 a 1050

264 | 10332 | .0693 | 1.5776 | 1630 1289 mabe 962

26 9942 | .0698 | 1:6474 | 1638 1227 als 876

254 9562 | .0701 | 1.7175 | 1642 1162 a 796

25 918% | .0702 | 1.7877 | 1642 1097 as 719

244 882 0700 | 1.8577 | 1638 1029 oie 645

24 8461 | .0696 | 1.9273 | 1630 962 ee 576

234 | 8102 | .0689 | 1.9962 | 1618 894 i 512

23 7762 | 0680 | 2.0642 | 1602 827 ae 452

224 7423 | 0669 | 2.1811 | 1582 762 see 397

2 7093 | .0655 | 2.1966 | 1558 697 se 346

214 6772 | .0639 | 2.2605 | 1530 635 ae 300

21 6452 | .0623 | 2.38228 | 1500 577 eee 260

204 | 6154 | .0602 | 2.3830 | 1465 518 aes 222

20 5854 | .0581 | 2.4411 | 1428 | 465 2s 189

194 555% | .0558 | 2.4969 | 1888 | 418 sire 159

19 5272 | 0534 | 2.5508 | 1345 | 366 ree 133

183 | 499% | .0509 | 2.6012 | 1299 322 ia ae 111

18 4728 | 0483 | 2.6495 | 1252 281 ee liah 92

174 4468 | .0450 | 2.6951 | 1203 244 oe 75

17 4202 | .0429 | 2.7880 | 1152 211 enous 61

164 3:64 | .0402 | 2.7782 | 1100 180 ania 49

16 3724 | .0375 | 2.8157 | 1048 153 ca 39

154 3482 | .0348 | 2.8505 | 994 129 baa 31

15 326% 0322 | 2.8827 | 941 108 S| 24

144 | 304g | .0297 | 2.9124 | esi 90 pa | 19

14 2832 (1272 | 2.9396 | 834 74. aes 14.

134 2622 | .0248 | 2.9644 | 781 61 basis 11

13 213% 0224 | 2.9868 | 728 49 heise 8

124 2254 0202 | 3.0070 | 677 39 sue | 6

12 2074 | .0182 | 3.0252 | 627 31 nase 4

114 189% | .0161 | 3.0413 | 577 24 nes as k

11 1738 | .0143 | 3.0556 | 53 19 ae |

104 1572 | .0126 | 3.0682 | 484 15 Shi ee EER meen

10 1428 | .0109 | 3.0791 | 43% Litto | espe =

94 | 1288] .0095 | 3.0886 | 396 Staelin P|

9 | 114%] .0081 | 3.0967 | 356 ROSS

84} 10241 .0069 | 3.1036 | 317 Uh AES N bet bk, GN

8 | 901] .0058 | 3.1094 | 281 5 abel Ode ete

it | 782) .0048 | 3.1142 | 246 A ed | ie ok ed UM se ORRIN oF

7 688 | .0040 | 3.118% | 218 Teoh, ace E

61 582 | .00383 | 3.1215 | 183 OO an ets:

Oerhe agen 0026 | 321941 -| 155 BOL tetas

5} | 412} .0020 | 3.1261 | 129 SOON. Lone.

& | 83%) 0016 | 3.1277 | 106 110) aes ee

43 974 | .0011 | 3.1288 84.9 wIOhincennie:

4 214 | .0v08 | 3.1296 | 66.1 .05

246 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters. ~

TABLE III — continued.

1 | 2 3 4, 5 6 7 8.

35) 15¢ , 0006 | 8.1309 | 49.7 Ol... ee

3 112 | 10004 | 3.1306 | 35.6 O14 ee

21 7 |, 0002 3.1208 | 28/811...

2 A (6001) 2718008) idiot eal ee

14 Sie mee 3 13090| 7.8. ee, ee

1 Woe ae Bode00| Wla7al: nee el eee

1 ats 21310 asl oe 2 eee ia

elie p0701 | eS semas | | ae ee

Fy 1 2 oO } 4 ae 5

-| a | a aes = ea 6:5 s

4 mn mM wa Hy e 1s a aS 3S

2D Q Sialic S $ iS s 33 =

fo) 3 Sy o | 2 ® ne ui oS oo =

he Shey Odeon ves bh S ov rej a

Tae B14 S| Fai anG 7 8 9 10 11

31/2791) 29791|1.00/1.00) styl ste} roi-s| 8959.0000! 3943.5136| sy4-5

30/3058) 6235/1.11/1.05] s4-s| cts| sotcs| 8822.5806| 3835.4641| sot,

29| 3168| 3026|1.24|/1.11| srtar| sts| oztcg| 3695.1612| 3707.4496| 5,42

98] 3250] O'787/1.37|1.16] ast-5| giel . etp| 0567. 7418) 35794618) em

97) - 3303) 2543/1.50/1.21| set] <ic| sf] 8440/8994) 9451.4991| sot

96| 3826| 2265/1.64|1.26] ..t-.| isl sqi-y| 3812.9030| 8323.5579| 72

25| 8316] 1997/1.78/1.31] seiss| sts) 254-5] 818.4836] 3195.6365] 7

24) 8274) 1719/1.91/1.35| “yf5| o4z| zutze) 8058.0642) 3067.7819 sts

93| 3198] 1449/2.04/1.38] sete) isl ote] 2930.6448) 2989.8495]

99] 3091/ 119612.17/1.42| scter| ate) tg) 2803.2204| 2311.9667| 5.1-,

21] 2960] 963)2.2911.45] yot-y| rulos| vex) 265.8060) 2684. 1058) ya}

20/2802, 768/2.40/1.48| 57355] rulse| wot) 2548-3866] 2596.2021/ | af

19] 2622) 591/2.51/1.50) ats] ross] sotze) 24209672] 2428.4080| sat

18} 2427| 446)2-60]1.52| c55s| rosa] aude) 2298-5478) 280.5725) sat,

V7] 2220) 823)2.87/1.43) Z1) salva] srice| 2166.1284) 2172.7420| Sah,

16, 2006] 226/2.76/1.54| 771] sr55| siizg| 208.7090] 2044.9179| oi

15| 1791| 157|2.82|1.55| <1 | gaes| gotcs| 1911-2896) 19170977) eae

14) 1589) 103]2.87]1.56) F515] ailrs| sfs) 1783.8702) 1789.2810 vas

11] 980 gale 9aii_o7) foe] Tate] 221s Pane gree eee

40| 813} 11/3.00/1.57| 72r°| et] °*°r") 1974.1996) 1278.0406| =a

9| 656] 618.08/1.57| ae) faa) Se) 1146 77selt tides ae

S| Sas] alscoaltcey] THE*] 7] 55*] “por lonaal sooner] SBE

6 bed ait si Z6123| L183] BSS i=d -9344) 894.6247 Bseo5

B76| on. -(B.041.0.0| cette ‘a dee ll seweel 64 5100| moonee0s lemme

5 185 aN 3.05), ye) Sa ie 63720956) 630) Olea meee

AS .05 SE Noh aS RS en LTE eee a |

BeBe ee 5.05 cake al OG RNAI Ser Mc,

Bers on WORE 3.05 eee AIGA NAL Ng Rg ea at scene ata

1 San 3.05 cha cad Ne ON POON |

ON gall EES a ean NGA Oe 0 Oa ee

56743) 56745) ee ee AN os es ee ees ee

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 247

130 m'les thickness must be kept intact, while the interior layers are

made infinite in number. This shows that the law of compressibility is

inapplicable to the crust on account of increase in temperature, while it is

applicable t» the interior from uniformity of temperature.

The numbers in column 2, table 4, divided by 56745 are the proportional

masses C )mposing the earth taken in thirty-one layers, the outside liyer

having an assumel average density of unity, or 2.96.times that of water,

the mean density of the carth being 5.65 times thit also of water. The

other layers have masses the same as if earth were taken in layers infinit-

esimally thin. The numbers in column 3, dividet by 56745 are the pro-

portional masses of thirty-one ellipsoids composing the earth under condi-

tions explained for second column. The first number in column 4 is the

average deusity of layer 31, and the other numbers of the column taken -

in order are the densities at division surfaces between the layers The

fractions in column 6 represent the quotients of centrifugal force divided

by attraction at the surface of each layer. These results are easily at-

tained, the one at the surface of the earth and the masses of layers being

known.

Column 9 gives the polar radii of the thirty-one layers, the polar radius

of the earth being ahout 3,950 miles.

The formulz already develo,ed for the attraction at the pole of any

layer less, that at the eauator is:

Dif PAT. —— vil 3 a+ 5A _ )| oh (m+m_+ete.)—j7(mh+m, n*h +etc.)

The values for c are given in column 5. These numbers are easily com-

puted when the densities and the ellipticities of the layers are known.

Before making Tab'e 4, I had so unraveled its net-work by a system of

assumptions and corrections that I knew to a close approximation each

result. The values for 1 are given in column 4. M of the formule for the

surface of any layer is found by adding numbers in column 2 from layer

1 to the layer required inclusive. JW equals M less the sum of numbers in

column 3 not inclusive of the required layer, m, m,, m,, etc., are given in

column 3. For the surface of any layer H equals 54,, and for any layer

from 1 to 5 M equals M, 1 equals 3.05; c, 1.57; and m, m, etc., are each

zero. For the fifth layer the fraction for ellipticity equals that for gravity;

and the fraction for gravity equals the sum for attraction and centrifugal

force. For fifth layer, then,

1.576

— nae Se (aie ere ee IB

S=h=Fh + 3 O55 (ets h) + ste3 ieee

Equatorial radius = 637.0956 x 282-8 — 639.0165.

For layer sixth:

|= eee, C=—1.57,1—3.04 Assume zi, ;; for h.

332 66

248 Wisconsin Aademy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Com outation now gives for attraction ;445, g = diss + worD muse 5°

Average g for the layer equals a trifle less thay $ (gs5 55+ 35 te OF ges gs:

Equitorial radius of sixth layer less that of fifih equals 127 4194 x 332.4—

127 8038, or equitorial radius of sixth layer is 766.8203 miles. The MeO

and equitorial radii now found for sixth layer tests the assumption for

ellipticity. Thus the process is continued from layer to layer in order.

For the surface of the earth, Table 4 gives attraction ;4,. oe ahi

and eae, syzg- It is accepted that attraction is ;4,, gravity ;1; and

el ipticity s4;. It is accepted also that the m an density of the earth is

5.65 times that of water, and that the surface crust density is not far from

one-half of the mean. Further, itis accrpted that a fluid of uniform ‘em-'

perature is compressed directly as applied pressure. Table 4 is made up

in accordance with these known facts, making a due allowance for an in-

crease in crust temperature. It seems reasonable, then, to accept the re-

sults of the Tables.

The expression already developed for the sine of the angle made by

radial direction with the direc ion of attract'on is, $ h n? m sinO cos O.

Columns 8, of Tables 1, 2 and 3, gives the values for 2h n’? m. From these

results the direction of attraction at any peint on the surface of the earth

is, 005187 x? sin Ocos O. When angle O becomes 49°,

.005137 x2 sin O cos O =.001712.

At 45° the centrifugal force changes the direction of attraction‘

2X 380 = srs = -001780.

The direction of gravity or of normal thus computed is:

.001712+.001730 = .0038442.

The direction of the normal for 45° is:

sbqz = .008401.

The error is ,';, while the limit of error in the results attained by exper-

iments for the mean density of the earth, or the ratio of surface density

to mean isa fraction greater than this The tables can be adjus’ed to

meet the discrepancy ,, but it would add nothing to accuracy as long as

the sccepted results of observation are equally uncertain.

To one now doubting the theory of the geologist, I have to say in due

time, I shall give hima result for the precession of the equinoxez, com-

puted from the data of Table 4, agreeing with observation.

Tie one effect of the attraction of the sun and moon on the earth wholly

liquid, is changeable figure; the other effect on the earth wholly solid, is

precession of equinoxes. The effect of the avtraction on the particles of

a liquid or solid just filling the solid unyielding crust container is the

same. To be otherwise the container must instantaneously yield to certain

changes of figure due certain effects of the attraction on the particles of

the enclosed liquid. In such event the container has the liquid property

and from the logic of the astronomer there should be no precession.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 249

The component of the moon’s attraction that produces the ocean tides,

is only a small fraction of the whole, and this component decreases to

nothing at the center of the ear h, The slowness of the action of this

component force and the cohesion of the p:rticles of water are such that

the tide at any meridan does not appear till two hours after the moon has

passed that meridan. If the tidal work was done instantaneously the

tide would appe:r directly under the moon. A less component of attrac-

tion and a greater c hesion of particles results in slower tidal work. Such

a decrease in the component attractions and such an increase in the cohe-

sion of the particles from the surface of the earth to its center can be con-

ceived from which the tidal «ffects would be wholly neutralized. Itis at

least evident in case of days of one Lour instead of twenty-four, suppos-

ing no change of figure from change of rotation, that the ocean tides

would glide to the condition of no tides as effectuaily as a boy slides over

a thin scale of ice. The astronomer seems to have forgotten that it takes

time to break ice. What is true of a water ocean and days of one hour

is true of a plastic ocean and days of twenty-four hours. A crust that

would be perceptibly flexible if the day were a month, might be imper-

ceptibly so for a day of twenty-four hours. In case then, of the one

hundred and twenty seven miles of solid rock crust and the plastic moul-

ten interior what more could be, reasonably expected for tides on the

continents than infinitesimal vibrations.

ol. The density or sp cific gravity of tne original crust of the earth at

the temperature of 0 Centigrade.

Tae order of evolution is froma condition of homogeneity to that of

heterogeneity. To meet the results of the requisite test observations and

experiments, the computations of the last article require the plastic inte-

’ rior of the earth to be homogeneous excepting the effect from the varia-

tion ef pressure. That portion of the primitive crust no: yet disintezrated

by the action of water or otherwise is likewise homogeneous, and the re-

sults of the best investigations point it out to be a neutral rock, largely

basic, such a rock as would be formed from the disintegrated material, not

includi:g the elements gathered in from the pristine heterogeneous atmos-

phere. Lyell, in speaking of trappean or volcanic rocks, says: “Abich has,

therefore, proposed that we weigh these rocks in order to appreciate their

composition in cases where it is impossible to separate their component

minerals. Thus basalt from Staffa, containing 47.80 per cent. of silica, has

aspecific gravity of 2.95; whereas trachyte, which has 66 per cent. of silica,

has a sp. gr. of only 2.68; trachytic porphyry, containing 69 per cent.

of silica, asp. gr of only 2.58, If we take a rock of intermediate com-

position, such zs that prevailing at the Peak of Teneriffe, which Abich

calls Trachyte-dolerite, its proportion of silica being intermediate, or 58 per

cent, it weighs 2.78.” On this principal a trappean rock thrown up from a

depth of 88 per cent. of silica would havea specific gravity of 3.12.

For each degree Centigrade granite expands in volume .000026, marble

250 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

‘000080, and French glass .000026. In using either of these fractions for

primitive crust rock the margin of error is doubtless not large.

Deschan+ll says the compression for glass per atmosphere is about

.0000029. Using for apparatus the moon and Mars instead of Oersted’s

Piezometer in experiment on the moon’s crust and the crust of Mars, in-

stead of ona piece of glass, I find crust rock material is compressed

.0000037 per atmosphere. To one understanding the conditions, the results

disagree within the limits of a good corroboration of the reliability of the

apparatus.

Using for expansion .00003, and for compression .0000037, the computed

temperature at 127 miles below the surface of the earth is about 3600° C.

Per observations near the surface the increase in temperature is about one

degree Centigrade in 90 feet, or 58 degrees in a mile. The average temper-

ature of the crust, then, can not be far from 2500° C. The crust, then, in

cooling to zero would contract about seven and one half per cent. This

would make the density or specific gravity of crust rock about 3.20.

Lyell’s table for “‘ Analysis of Minerals most abundant in Volcanic and

Hypogene Rocks,” gives the following specific gravities: Hornblerde-

Faymont, in diorite, 3.20; Hornblende-Etna, in volcanic, 3.01; Uralite Ural,

3.14; Angite-Bohemia, 3.35; Angite-Vesuvius, in lava, 3.25; Diallage-Hartz,

n Gabbro, 3.28; Hypersthene-Labrador, 3.39; Bronzite-G eenland, 3.20,

Olivite Carlsbod, in basalt, 3.40; Olivite-Mt. Somma, 3.33. The metals are

developments from the disintegrated portion of the primitive crust. Duly

considered in all directions it seems not unreasonable that crust rocks have

a specific gravity of 3.20 at zero Centigrade.

32. The interior density and temperature of the moon.

The moon is admitted to be the direct and the only satellite offspring of

the earth, and under the accepted law of its evolutiun, positive evidence is

required to prove its component materials in like proportions, to vary from

those of the earth. The mean density of the moon is about three fifths

that of the earth, or 3.88 times that of water. In accordance with the

method used in computing the interior density of the earth, to keep up a

suitable degree of consistency and harmony with known facts, a crust or

outside layer density of 3.20 must be used. If the mean density, 3.38, be

a trifle small, or the surface density, 3.20, a little large, the remedy is to

increase the factor .0000037 for compression, or to freeze the naoon to 100

or more degrees below zero. As the factor .0000037 satisfies the conditions

of Mars, that factor should not be changed. The freezing out process,

then, is the only antidote. Computation gives the center density of the

moon 3.52. The compression for a twenty-seven miles crust, or for about,

2,320 atmospheres, is .0086, or .0000037 per atmosphere.

It may be that the water and the air of the moon, chemically, have not

yet wholly found quiet resting places, and here and there in its interior

chemical action is generating heat. Doubtless, however, the moon, to

the center, is solid, practically dead and colder than ice.

The Variation in Attraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 251

33. The interior density and temperature of Mars.

Newcomb says the mean density of Mars is 4,17 times water. Using 3.20

for the crust, the center density figures out 5.10. The compression for a

fifty-six miles crust, or about 11000 a'mospheres is .041, or .0000037 per

atmosphere. These results are claimed to be only rough approximations,

From them, nevertheless, it is doubtless safe to conclude that Mars isa

solid to the center, that his interior heat has nearly all escaped and that

the water and the air has been considerably absorbed in the interior of the

planet.

34. The interior temperature of the earth.

The variation in the censity of the carth from surface to center is given

in Table 4, which has alrezdy been described. The conditions of this table

require that the temperature of the interior layers be the same, which

would be practically so in case of a moulten or liquid interior per law of

conveciion. The compression for the one hundred and twenty-seven miles

crust, or about 600U0 atmosphere on the interior at temperature zero,

should be .0000037 multiplied by 60000, or .222. The compression for the

same crust of the earth in its presents condition given in Table 4 is only

.11, or computed to three decimal places is .114. The difference .108 is

caused by internal heat. This difference, .108 divided by .00003 gives the

interior temperature to be 38600° Centigrade.

34. Interior density and temperature of Venus.

Newcomb gives 4.81 for the mean density of Venus, and 7,660 miles for

her mean diameter or 258 miles less than the mean diameter of the earth,

On the hypothesis that Veous has a moulten interior and a crust about

the thickness of that of the earth, by using 3 for the crust density we get

the required mass into the planet with a center density of 7, and a crust

compression factor of .09138. Tae compression for one hundred and twenty

three miles crust or about 49,000 atmospheres is at temperature zero .1818.

The difference between .1813 and .0913 divided by .00003 gives for the in-

terior temperature of Venus 3000° Centigrade. Per Newcomb the gravity

on the surface of Venus is .82, Mars .389, Earth 1.

35. The interior density and temperature of Mercury.

Mercury has a mean density, per Newcomb), 6.85, and a diameter of

about 3000 miles, and also a surface grivity .46. The Moou’s diam ter is

2160 miles, mean density 3.38. crust densi y 3.20 and center density 3.52.

Mars diameter is 4211 miles, inean density 3.17, surface density 3.20, center

density 5.10, and surface gravity .39.

Without computation judging by a glance from the figures from the

Moon and Mars, the crust density of Mercury must be from 5 to 5.50.

Proctor thinks that 6.85 is too great for the mean density, and that it

should be about that of the earth, 5.65. Under this condition Mercury's

crust density would be from 4 to 4.30. The smallness of the diameter of

this planet indicates that its interior heat has all or nearly all escaped. In

252 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

case its interior heat has not escaped the figures above given for crust den-

sity must be made larger.

36. The crust density of Jupiter’s satellites.

The diameters of Jupiter’s sa'ellites in orders of Nos. per Loomis is in

miles, 2486, 2187, 3576 and 3057, There is some uncertainty about these di-

ameters, and Newcomb says they vary from 220) to 3700 miles. The mean

densities of these satellites in order, per diameters of Loomis is, 1.05, 1.90,

1.70 and 1.82. The averages of these mean densities is 1.49, or a little

more than the mean density of Jupiter, which is 1.38. The surface gravity

of these satellites is very small, hence the center density can not be very

much greater han the crust density. The average crust density can not

vary much from 1.30.

37. As already obtaine], the near surface or crust density of Mercury

is about 5, Venus at present average temperature, 3, or at zero 3.29, the

Earth at present average temperature, 2.96, or at zero 3.20, the Moon at zero

3.20, Mars at zero 3.20, and the average of Jupiter’s satellites 1.20. From

these results I see away back in the past a large ring around the sun; this |

ring separated into three, like the rings now around Saturn; and from

these three came the triplet planets, Mars, the Earth and Venus.*

CONCLUSION.

During the delay of two years in the publication of this

Report of the Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters, I

have added three chapters to this paper. As it stands the

title is inappropriate, and the introduction fails to give due

credit to the paper as presented. The Attraction and the

Figure of Equilibrium of a Rotating Fluid Mass, and the

Interior Density and Temperature of the Earth, is a more

appropriate title. Measured by my reading of what has

been written on the subject, this investigation attains not

only some new final results, but it opens, by its new meth-

ods, a new field for valuable deductions. The new way of

finding any diameter of the ellipseis a change from the com-

plex to the simple. The system using chord and wedge ele-

ments of attraction instead of shell elements is a grand step

of advance in simplification. By the new system mathe-

* Tt is due the author to say that the chapters of this paper were written

at periods separated by months. The last chapter was composed after the

previous ones had passed from his hands, and he was forced to keep up the

connection with the other chapter-, partially from memory. His excuse

for not unifying the piper under an appropriate title is want of time.

The Variation in Atiraction Due to the Attracting Bodies. 253

matical expressions are attainable, easy to integrate, while

by the old method complex expression are unavoidable, re-

quiring the ability of a Legendre, a Laplace, or an Ivory to

integrate.

In Article 12 I have given the fractional numbers for in-

tegrating the chord elements of attraction for an ellipsoid.

If every man and women, from Adam and Eve to the last

born of their posterity, had been engaged in the work of

making the computations for these fractional numbers by

the method outlined in Article 12, the end in view would

now be unattained. Such being the impossibility in the

way of that method, I will now give my other method in

brief. It is as follows:

In diagram 1, Art. 3, let particle P be at the surface of the

sphere having center C,in line PC of the diagram, then

secant line P d a g becomes chord P a g and equals to chord

k 1h or 2rcos%. Likewise chord pno equals 2 r cos S$.

Let radius A C perpendicular to the axis of rotation be di-

vided into n parts by a system of chords drawn parallel to

axis P C, and also let these chords vary in length from chord

to chord by a common difference 2 r divided byn. Letlines

pnoand klh be any two adjoining chords of the system.

The mass cut from the sphere by a rotation of these chords

equals ¢ z r* (cos*>—cos*s,). As the increments to the

cosines used in this computation vary from cos. to cos. as 2r

divided by n, cos. S may be represented by any simple va-

riable quantity (y). When n becomes infinite or 2 r divided

by n, infinitisimal, then the differential mass or,

dm=47r°3 y’ dy.

Multiply each chord element of mass making up the

sphere by its requisite cos *, cos’ 5, cos’, and so on to cos.

having anexponent infinite. It is nowrequired to intigrate

the expressions y dm, y’d m, y’ dm, etc., between the limits

zero and unity.

fiydm={72 1 fisyidy=trr xt.

fiydm=j7r fisytdy=trr xe

fivdm=grr [i8yidy=srrx}.

254 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Etc., to exponent infinite.

3 7 x¥* represents the mass of the whole sphere. The values,

then, for :

Cos. 3 = 3,

@os:7S7— 33

Cos.* S= 2. etc., to cos. with exponent infinite.

Sin?S = 1—cos?S = 2.

Sin4S = (1—cos?S)? = 1—2 cos’S + cos'?S = 2-4.

Sin®S = (t—cos’S)* = 1—4 cos*S + 6 cos*S—4 cos*S + cos*S = 24,

Etc. for higher powers.

The truth contained in the celebrated proposition of the

square of the hypothenuse was doubtless well known long

before the time of Pythagoras. Pythagcras in joy from the

simplicity and the exactness of his demonstration of the

celebrated proposition gave exclamation to the Greek word,

Eureka. The memoirs of Legendre, Laplace and Ivory on

attraction do not contain Huwreka demonstrations. It re-

quires inventive genius as well as mathematical ability to

make such demonstrations. For borrowed knowledge on

the subject of my writing to Sir Isaac Newton, I am in-

debted more by far than to all the rest combined.

Genera of the Family Attidae:

WITH A PARTIAL SYNONYMY.

GEORGE W. ano ELIZABETH G. PECKHAM.

INTRODUCTION.

In the following paper we have endeavored to bring to~

gether the definitions of those genera of the family Attidae

which have been generally received, and also of those which

are part of the synonymy of the received genera. Up to this

time these definitions have been so widely scattered through

different works and periodicals that it has been a matter of

great practical inconvenience to study and to compare

them. It is probably due, in a measure, to this fact that

many species have been placed in genera from which a mod-

erate regard for the generic definitions would have excluded

them; although perhaps a further difficulty may have arisen

from a confusion of the two modes of classification, the one

based on a type, and the other based on a general definition.

To make clear the distinction between these two modes, we

quote from Whewell', “ Natural groups given by type, not

by definition . . . . . the classis steadily fixed, though

not precisely limited; it is given, though not circumscribed:

it is determined, not by a boundary line without, but by a.

central point within; not by what it strictly excludes, but by

what it eminently includes; by an example, not by a pre--

cept; in short, instead of a definition we have a type for our

director. A type is an example of any class, for instance, a.

species of a genus, which is considered as eminently possess--

ing the character of the class. All the species which have:

a greater affinity with this typ9-species than withany other,

form the genus and are ranged about it, deviating from it in

various directions and different degrees.” On the other side

we have from Mill?“ .. . . . the next step is to ar-

'The Philosophy of the Inductive Sciences, Vol. 1, pp. 476, 477.

2 A System of Logic, pp. 504, 505. Huxley, also says: “It is siid, in

short, that a natural history class is not capable of being defined — that

the class Rosaceze for instance, or the class Fishes, is not accurately and

258 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Lefters.

range those infimae species into larger groups ... . .

and in doing this itis true that we are naturally and properly

guided, in most cases at least, by resemblance to a type.

. . . . . But though the groups are suggested by types,

I cannot think that the group, when formed, is determined

by the type; that in deciding whether a species belongs te

the group, a reference is made to the type and not to the

characters. . . . . . The truthis, on the contrary, that

every genus or family is framed with distinct reference to

certain characters, and is composed, first and primarily, of

‘species which agree in possessing all those characters. To

these are added, as a sort of appendix, such other species,

generally in small number, as possess nearly all the proper-

ties selected; wanting some of them one property, some

another, and which, while they agree with the rest almost

as much as those agree with one another, do not resemble

in an equal degree any other group. Our conception of the

class continues to be grounded on the characters; and the

class might be defined, those things which evther possess

that set of characters, or resemble the things that do so,

more than they resemble anything else. And this resem-

blance itself is not, like resemblance between simple sensa-

tions, an ultimate fact unsusceptible of analysis. Even the

inferior degree of resemblance is created by the possession

of common characters. . . . . . Norcan there be any

real difficulty in representing, by an enumeration of char-

acters, the nature and degree of the resemblance which is

strictly sufficient to include any object in the class. There

absolutely definable, inasmuch as its members will present exceptions to

every possible definition; and that the members of the class are united to-

getheroa'y by the circumstance that they are all mor2 like some imagi-

nary average race or average fish, than they resemble anything else. But

here, as before, I think the distinction has arisen eatirely from confusing

a transitory imperfection with an essential character. So long as our in-

formation concerning them is imperfect, we class all objects together ac-

cording to resemblances we feel, but cannot define; we group them around

types, in short. Thus, if you ask an ordinary person what kind of ani-

mals there are, he will probably say beasts, birds, reptiles, fishes, insects,

etc. Ask him to define a beast from a reptile and he cannot do it; but he

says, things like a cow or a horse are beasts, and things like a frog or a

Genera of the Family Attide. 259

are always some properties common to all things which are

included. Others there often are, to which some things,

which are nevertheless included, are exceptions. But the

objects which are exceptions to one character are not excep-

tions to another; the resemblance which fails in some par-

ticulars, must be made up forin others. The class, therefore,

is constituted by the possession of all the characters which

are universal, and most of those which admit of exceptions.

If a plant had the ovules erect, the stigmata divided, pos-

sessed the albumen, and was without stipules, it possibly

would not be classed among the Rosacew. But itmay want

any one, or more than one, of these characters, and not be

excluded. The ends of a scientific classification are better

answered by including it. Since it agrees so nearly, in its

known properties, with the sum of the characters of the

class, it is likely to resemble that class more than any other

in those of its properties which are still undiscovered.”

A further confusion has arisen from certain authors mak-

ing their generic definitions descriptive rather than compar-

ative. For example, the definition of the genus Maratus

Karsch is doubtless a good description, so far as it goes, of

the species for which the genus was formed, and yet is

equally applicable to many other genera, and in no way

assists in organizing knowledge, nor in facilitating identifi-

cation, which should be the two-fold purpose of a classifica-

tion.

The synonymy of the genera is only partial; and those

who have had most experience in the difficulties of this

lizard are reptiles. You see he does class by type, and not by definition.

But how does this classification differ from that of the scientific zoolo-

gist? how does the meaning of the scientific class-name of ‘‘ Mammalia”

differ from the unscientific of *‘ B2asts?’ Why, exactly because the for-

mer depends on a definition, the latter on a type. The class Mammalia is

scientifically defiaed as “all animals which have a vertebrated skeleton

and suckle their young.” Here is no reference to type, but a definition

rigorous enough for a geometrician, and such is the character which every

scientific naturalist recogeizes as that to which his classes must aspire —

knowing, as he does, that classification by type is simply an acknowledg-

ment of ignorance and a temporary device.” Educational Value of Nat-

ural History Sciences; Lay Sermons, Addresses and Reviews, pp. 82, 83.

260 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

class of work will be least harsh in their criticism of its

defects.

The key is based almost entirely on the generic descrip-

tions, and is designed not only to aid in the identification of

genera, but also, in a general way, to group together those

genera which have common characteristics, and thus to aid

in a comparison of the different groups. Its usefulness

must be lessened by the fact that the generic position of a

species has been commonly determined merely by its pos-

sessing a greater number of the characteristics of one genus

than of any other. For example: Cyrba Simon has legs

4,1, 3,2. The greater number of characteristics of C. bi-mac-

ulatu Keyserling carry that species to the genus Cyrba, al-

though it has the leg-formula 4, 3, 1,2. Ifin the key Cyrba

has been distinguished from other genera by the fact that its

leg-formula is 4, 1, 3,2, bi-maculata must go elsewhere.

We have also, for the purpose of facilitating comparison,

arranged the characteristics of the different genera in the

form of a table.

We have been perplexed by a lack of precision in the

stating of characteristics. We venture to suggest that it

would be well to express the dimensions of parts in terms of

other parts of the same species. For example, the clypeus

should be described not as “ very low,” or “rather high,” but

as one fifth or one half as wide as the middle anterior

eyes. We believe that Menge is the only author who states

definitely the height of the cephalothorax. He does so by

comparing the height with the width.

Not having the work in which it is described, we have

omitted the genus Portia Karsch. In his Arachnol. Blatter

V. Gur Attiden-Gattung Portia, Dr. Karsch says that this

genus resembles Eris (C. Koch) Simon, but differs from it in

that the first pair of legs is not much more robust than the

others; metatarsus+ tarsus of the fourth are longer than

patella + tibia of fourth, not equal or shorter as in Hris); and

the spines on the tibiae and metatarsi of the hind legs ex-

tend to the base. The quadrangle of the eyes, also, is not

wider behind than in front.

As we have undertaken to prepare a monograph of this

Genera of the Family Attide. 261

family, we shall be very glad to reccive Attidae from any

part of the world, and to send in return spiders of the

United States.

We give below a brief account of the Attid genera.

Milwaukee, Wisconsin, March, 1854.

THE ATTID GENERA.

- From Latreille to Walckener, inclusively, the whole fam-

ily constitutes but one genus, Salticus Latr. or Attus Walck.

In 1852 Hentz detached the genera Lyssomanes, Synemosyna,

and Epiblemum; Lyssomanes having the eyes in four rows;

Synemosyna corresponding in part to Salticus (Latr.) C.

Koch, or Leptorchestes Thorell, 1870; and Epiblemum in

part to Calliethera C. Koch, 1837. In 1833 Sundevall divided

‘Attus Walck. into two genera, Salticus and Attus. Salticus

having the cephalic abruptly higher than the thoracic part,

and the quadrangle of the eyes nearly square. Between

1855 and 1850 twenty-four genera were formed by C. Koch,

most of which were so poorly defined by their author that

their identification has been difficult or impossible. These

' genera, however, have been used as a basis of work by later

authors who have redefined and united them, so that eighteen

out of Koch’s twenty-four genera are still used, beside

some of his sub-genera which have been raised to the rank

of genera by Thorell. A short history of C. Koch’s genera

would run as follows: Heliophanus, 1833; Euophrys, 1834;

Dendryphantes, 1837; Pyrophorus, 1837; (the name Pyro-

phorus had already been used, and the genus was identical

with Salticus (Latr.) Sund., 1833); Toxeus, 1846; (probably

also included in Salticus (Latr.) Sund.; Janus, 1846; (the

name Janus was preoccupied; the genus is in part Synemo-

Syna Hentz, 1832, and in part Janigena Karsch, 1880);

Philia, 1846, (the name Philia was preoccupied, and for it

Thorell substituted, Philzeus in 1870); Hyllus, 1846; (identi-

cal with Dineresus White, formed in the same year); Thiania,

1846; Marpissa, 1846; (the name Marpissa was preoccupied;

262 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Thorell substituted Marptusa in 1877); Cocalus, 1846; Plexip-

pus, 1846; Phidippus, 1846; Amycus, 1846; Alcmena, 1846;

Asaracus, i846; (this genus, without any striking character-

istic, and formed for one imperfect individual, has’ never

been used); Phyale, 1846; Eris, 1846; Ciris, 1848; Mzevia, 1848;

Rhanis, 1848 (identical with Homalattus White, 1841); Psecas,

1850; (this vaguely characterized genus has not been adopted

by later authors); Icelus, 1850; (the name Icelus being preoccu-

pied Simon substituted Icius in 1873); Ballus, 1850; (this was

a sub-genus of Attus, made a genus by Thorell in 1870); Dia

and Parthenia, two sub-genera of the genus Kuophrys, were

combined and made a genus with the name Atlurops (both

Dia and Parthenia being preoccupied) by Thorell also in 1870.

During this period only one author, beside Koch, made

any genera inthe family Attidae. This was A. White, who,

in 1841, made Homalattus; and in 1846 Dineresus, of

which Hyllus GC. Koch, takes precedence; and after 1850:

no new genera were formed for many years. Of West-

ring and Blackwall, both writing in 1861, the former fol-

lowed Sundevall’s division (1833), into Salticus and Attus,

while the latter used only Salticus Latr. unmodified. In

1864, Simon combined the Attid genera to form five:

Rhanis C. Koch, Attus Walck, Cyrtonota Sim., Heliophanus

C. Koch, and Salticus (Latr.) This arrangement, which was

not generally adopted, seems not to have satisfied its au-

thor, as in 1869, Simon made an entirely new classification

of the Attidae, recombining them into ten genera of which

two, Menemerus and Yllenus were new.

We now come to 1870, in which year Thorell published

the first part of his work on the genera and species of Ku-

ropean spiders, probably the most important contribution

thus far offered to arachnological literature in the depart-

ment of classification. In so far as the Attidae are con-

cerned his most valuable work was the unravelling of C.

Koch's European genera. He resolved the family into thir-

teen provisional genera, one of which, Leptorchestes, was

new. He also formed the genus Diolenius for the species

A. phrynoides Walck.; and he made the changes in the

Genera of the Family Attide. 263

nomenclature of some of ©. Koch’s genera which have al-

ready been mentioned.

In 1871, the genus Hasarius was formed by Simon. In

1872, Taczanowski described a new genus, Jelskia, which he

placed under the family Dinopidae, but which seems to us

to belong to the Attidae, since although the eyes are in four

rows, (as in Lyssomanes Hentz), the eyes of the third row,

are small, not as in the Dinopidae, larger than the others.

In 1873 Simon substituted the name Icius for Icelus C.

Koch.

In 1876, Simon modified his classification of the Attid

genera, and succeeded in making an arrangement se good

thatas Dr. L. Koch remarks, it will form the basis for all

future work. The new genera which he formed in this year

were Synagles, Neera, Neon, Hyctia, Thya, Saitis, Pellenes,

Habrocestum, Cyrba and Phlegra.

In 1877, Thorell made the genera Agorius and Viciria, and

substituted the name Marptusa for Marpissa C. Koch. In

the same year Simon formed the genus Bavia, and Simon

and Cambridge each described a genus having the eyes in

four rows; these are Evenus Simon, and Athamas Cam-

bridge. Also in 1877, the genera Oedipus and Scartes were

formed by Menge.

In 1878, Thorell formed the genera Boethus and Sinis;

Karsch, the genera Lycidas, Ligonipes, Ligurinus, Maratus,

Ascyltus and Mopsus; and Taczanowski, the genus Chiro-

thecia.

In 1879, L. Koch formed the genera Astia, Scirtetes,

Rhombonotus, Scaea, and Lagnus, and in 1880, Opisthoncus.

In 1880, also, we have the genus Janigena Karsch. In

1881, Keyserling formed Jotus,and Ergane, and Thorell,

Simaetha, Discocnemius, Ephippus, EKuryattus, Omoedus and

Coccorchestes.

In 1882, Keyserling formed Thorellia (which afterwards

proved to be identical with Saitis Simon), Kulabes, Tanypus,

Acmaea (these three names being preoccupied they were

afterward supplanted, Eulabes by Pirithous, Tanypus by

Sinnamora, and Acmaea by Drepanephora); Morgaromma,

Erasmia, Sobara, Selaophora, Prostheclina, Cytaea, Atry-

» 264 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

tone, Hadrosoma and Therosa; and Cambridge formed the

genus Mago. This latter author, who has described a large

number of species, has, with a few exceptions, included

them all in the genus Salticus Latr.

In 1883, Keyserling formed the genera Lauharulla, Scy-

thropa and Sandalodes, and substituted the names Pirithous,

Sinnamora, and Drepanephora for Eulabes, Tanypus, and

Acmaea. |

In 1884 Simon formed the genera Mithion, Lystrocteisa

and Chalcolecta.

Finding that several generic names now in use are preoc-

cupied we make the following substitutions:

For Evenus Simon 1877, “ Epeus.” (Kvenus Hiibu. Lep.

1816. Agassiz’ Nomencl. Zool. Kvenus Lap. Col. 1836.

Agassiz’ Nomencl. Zool.)

For Sinis Thorell 1878, “Linus.” (Sinis Heer. Col. 1862.

Scudder’s Nomencl. Zool.)

For Scirtetes L. K. 1879, “ Damoetas.” (Scirtetes Wagn.

Mamm. 1841. Agassiz’ Nomencl. Zool.)

For Ephippus Thorell 1881, “Zenodorus.” (Ephippus Cuv.

Pisc. 1829. Agassiz’ Nomencl. Zool.)

For Erasmia Keyserling 1882, “Iona.” (Krasmia Hope.

Lep. 1840, Agassiz’ Nomencl, Zool. Erasmia Heine. Aves

1863. Scudder’s Nomencel. Zool.)

For Atrytone Keyserling 1882, “Tara.” (Atrytone Scud.

Lep. 1872. Zool. Record.)

For Hadrosoma Keyserling 1882, “ Bootes.” (Hadrosoma

Fieb. Orth. 1853. Scudder’s Nomencl. Zool.)

For Scythropa Keyserling 1883, “Bianor.” (Scythropa

Chand. Col. 1871. Zool. Record.)

For Drepanephora Keyserling 1883, “ Hypoblemum.”

(Drepanephora Loew. Dipt. 1869. Zool. Record.)

We divide the family Attidae into two sub-families, the

Attinae, having the eyes in three rows, and the Lysomanae,

having the eyes in four rows.

Genera of the Family Attide. 265

KEY TO THE GENERA OF THE FAMILY ATTIDAE.!

eC EMMR TMNT ECE LOWS. «0.5101 cle «cos, spelepessuticreens ois cade c atelb Sata ci cuales suas ein ona 3

PPE CRMITIGLO UIT LOWS «5 «0's, via.5 sl tetate emeatetedlt cleat chee alreieerac bisa sta aig clavate: 6 161

3. *Trochanter I elongated much eee gonthan thelophers... 5.4.42. 5

AMbrochanien benoit eloneated. . ome see sic este wslclecciel. ocidie sl sievet nick 13

5. Trochanter I much longer than coxa, shorter than femur ........ 7

6. Trochanter I shorter than cox.1 (especially ?), much shorter than

PRE RR LTUege say oie oo: «ane, ~\ asp ciove ete PORE P EOEES ML neresees ere orale aie eve ec oecaratanote 9

7. Cephalothorax low; quadransle of eyes wider than long; tibia I

slenacmana parallel..; -satc.somerosae once eile * Tara Peckham.

8. Cephalothorax rather high; quadrangle of eyes almost equal in

length and breadth; tibia I more or less dilated.... Diolenius Thor.

9. Quadrangle of eyes much longer than wide,and much longer than

thoracic part; eyes of second row much nearer lateral than dor-

BRE VC Syareyem oe ot n.a) cre) cia anc. cies oisishelancreye he ev ena we ore Lystrocteisa E. 8S.

10. Quadrangle of eyes almost equal in length and breath; thoracic

and cephalic parts almost equally long; eyes of second row

scarcely further from dorsal than from lateral.... ............ 11

11. Legs short; anterior tibia strongly compressed and dilated, and

conspicuously furnished below with two rows of strong spines,

and in the middle line with thick hairs........ Discocnemius Thor.

12. Legs long; anterior tibia compressed, parallel, not dilate1; armed

below with numerous and strong spines in a double row.

Chaleolecta E. 8.

13. Cephalothorax distinctly wider in the middle than at the ends.

Rhombonotus, L. K.

14. Cephalothorax not distinctly wider in the middle than at the

EDGE schol GRICE BR RIE ci de Ee ah A Se ed i amend 1 15

iasbdwyesionder cantlike; lees weale sess cide Chk hol eee tbh b. Seek: 17

Hea SUCNe On AMEE IM: LOD, . .2 2 sa0s cela cidade w clea coma otehe ales os 29

17. Cephalic part higher than thoracic..... Kees ege erat sean, SPAS Salticus Latr.

isCephane pars not higherthan thoracic... 3... .: ccs... cscs cscs 19

19. Abdomen with a distinct constriction.....................--.+20- 21

20. Abdomen without, or with a very slight constriction.............. 23

21. Cephalic and thoracic parts separated by a constriction.

Janigena Karsch.

*On account of the vagueness of their definitions, we have been obliged

to omit from the Key the genera Phyale, Asaracus, Alemena, Psecas, end

Thiania of C. Kocb, and Lycidas, Ligurinus, and Maratus Karsch.

> We have here made use of the table given by M. Simon in his Note

sur le Groupe des Diolenii, This group, so far as is yet known, is confined

to Australian and Malesian islands.

* Tara = Atrytone Keyserling, preoccupied.

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

266

22, A constriction dividing the thoracic part into a shorter anterior

and a longer posterior portion............. ..-.Synemosyna Hentz.

23. Sternum prolonged: between coxae VU... .:.. 2.5. 2. oe ee eee eye 25:

24. Sternum not prolonged between coxae I............... Agorius Thor.

25. Pedicle of the abdomen not visible from above. .' Damoetas Peckham.

26: Pedicle visible. from above. iriciec,. cs eects dc sic.s ware) eke ete ae 27

27. Sternum scarcely as wide as intermediate coxae; labium at least

twice astones asewide visit. eescice eeteve = /ar she eet Leptorehestes Thor.

. Sternum wider than intermediate coxae; labium as long as wide.

Synageles F. S.

. Clypeus very low in front, high below anterior lateral eyes, ex-

tended and alittle curved backward on the sides, forming au

acute angle below the eyes of the second row....Aseyltus Karsch.

30. Sides of clypeus forming no acute angle.................2.22e00e- 31

31. Body short, convex, beetle like; cephalic part not, or scarcely so

lon gas CHOFAGICS sa. era Liars ole sh erstevegece ere ee taue elev ep oe ne 33

32. Body not beetle liken form ie. ysis ls se oes ctacise see eee 35

33. Body strongly convex both longitudinally and transversely; abdo-

34.

30.

36.

3%.

38.

39.

40,

41.

42.

43.

44,

45.

46.

men high and widely truncated in front, where it is received

into an excavation of the cephalothorax; eyes of the second row

further from the dorsal than f.0m the lateral eyes.

Coccorchestes Thor.

Anterior part of abdomen not overlapped by cephalothorax; eyes

of second row half way between dorsal and Jaterai eyes.

Omoedus Thor.

C-phalic part as long as, or longer than thoracic ................. 37

Cephalic part shorter than thoracic: 2..-<.- 4.4. eee see aeeeeiae 61

Eyes of the second row at least half as large as eyes of the third

BO Wa tieracyste tile ase al enema elec rele ees eve cioael oe Gere oie ee arene Cocalus C. K.

Eyes of second row less than one half as large as eyes of the third

TOW ee fs ePE Sw. cies ef bi tae) Sos aslo aero aoe hese ui usiene Siena hte at ets toate ae ean 39

Quadrangle of eyes longer than wide; tibia I greatly dilated.

Chirothecia Taez.

Quadrangle as wide as, or wider than long; tibia I not dilated.... 41

Cephalic and -thoracic parts equal...............2..-0eeeeee eerste’ 43

Cephalic part longer than thoracic.............2.--- 0-4: 05-490 = 55

segs Dktand- 1Vi without spinesii))2.).9--.4.----46 Renee Ballus C. K.

Spines;onythe {ourpairsteee eee eee eee ae eer citaye bree Sane OSS 45

Third leg longer than-fourth << .02.3. 4. ...201.205 5-0? sae AT

Thirdvlessshorter thantfourthye see aleeeos see eee eee 49

1Damoetas—Scirtetes L. K., preoccupied.

*Some of the species of Homalattus White resemble beetles, but in this

genus the cephalic part is longer than the thor icie.

53.

54.

Genera of the Family Attide. 267

. Quadrangle of t'\e eyes wider behind: third leg much longer than

fourth... Alice Bites AAT ae Ae ne eats Ratt teak Se Spe "Neactha E. 8.

Quadrangle of eyes wiler in front; third leg but little longer than

| FICO sig 3d ae de te Sk AE A eae SE Ld PN Ciris C. K.

. Cephalothorax not wider than third row of eyes at that place ... 51

. Cephalothorax wider than third row of eyes at that plice; lateral

eyes of first row well separated from middleeyes...Pirithous Keys.

. Anterior row of eyes curved; later4l widely separate 1 from middle

EROS Cicteleie OIG BIS Sogn crecs Ee ii nen SIMMS ral AES Re cetiir 6 tha 53

. Anterior row of eyes almost straight; lateral but little »emoved

AMON CC TOE VES ies create tienes eis heres onl eras ? Bianor Peckham.

Quadrangle of eyes equally wide in front and behind: metatarsus

+tarsus IV longer than patella+tibia; tibial and metatarsal

spines to the base, on legs Il and 1V.............. Portia Karsch.

Quadrangle of eyes wider behind than in front; metatarsus + tarsus

IV, equal to or short-r than patella + tibia; only circles of spines

at the extremities of the tibiae and metatarsi of legs III and

UID S 68 oh et CRN RN ated ia hee hea oa Eris, C. K.

55. Quadrangle of ey+s wider in front than behind....... 3 Jona Peckham.

56. Quadrangle of eyes not wider in front .....................0..00- 57

57. Cephalothorax as high behind as itis long ......... Mago Cambridge.

08. Cephalothorax not as high b-hind aslong ......................-. 59

59. First row of eyes straight, touching. ......2...)..0.5..05...% Neon E£. S.

60. First row of eyes curved, sepa ated by nearly equal distance s from

CAC IBOLMER tin se Pevchidc coils Wiehe s dee we Pitti tates ay Homalattus White.

61. Quadrangle of eyes longer than wide.......... Rabie Foe tots eit oe 63

625 Quadraue lef “eyes widerithan lone e522 5555. eS. 65

68.

69.

. Quadrangle of eyes more than twice as long «as wide..

g g

Ligonipes Karsch.

Quadrangle of eyes one fourth or one fifth only longer than

SARIN ES cman ot ent cha) Later Mh actA s Yc wluly geen ha ceil aMe ety Wee rei ote *Plexippus C. K.

. A more or less prominent tubercle between the dorsal eyes.

Opisthoneus L. K.

PPM OMATUERELO HTESEMD A cel ss Coa eek ee lees wee eed 67

- Cephalothorax short and very high, thoracic part much dilated

and falling steeply from cephalic p'ate; cephalothorax wider

thanthe third row of: eyes... 0 eect tk ecw ees *“Amycus C. K.

Form of cephalothorax unlike the above........................ 69

? Bianor == Scythropa Keyserling, preoccupied,

*Tona=Erasmia Keyserling, preoccupied.

+See genus Plexippus.

° The face in Amycus is very high, but not equally high in the different.

species.

268 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

70. Quadrangle as wide or wider behind......................... pee es)

71. Tibia + patella III shorter than tibia + patellaIV............... ey te)

72. Tibia + patella III longer than tibia + patella IV............... Fossil

73. Metatarsus + tarsus IV equal to or shorter than patella + tibialV. 75

74, Metatarsus + tarsus IV longer than tibia + patellalV............ V7

75. Metatarsus IV spined only at extremity ............ Lauharulla Keys.

W6. Metatarsus DV spined toibases-s-ssns. casei sence ee eee Astia L. K.

77. Cephalothorax wider than third row of eyes ............. ....... 79

78. Cephalothorax not wider than third row of eyes....Sinnamora Keys.

79. Legs moderately long; metatarsus IV with spines...... Boethus Thor.

80. Legs extremely long; metatarsus IV without spines ..... Lagnus L. K.

81. Eyes of the second row more than + as large as dorsal eyes; tibize

SPI CMsADOVE jece Gegei se en. era cin pelos teuepeeeeniare: Melo ae ioete ' Linus Peckham.

82. Eyes of second row less than 4 as large as dorsal eyes; tibiz not

NOL SpIned Abave. wc ici vase cis cw es aoe & seu slo s/he eRe 83

83. Cephalothorax not wider than third row of eyes ................. 85

84. Cephalothorax wider than third row of eyes ..............2) «.«. 87

85. Cephalothorax narrow in front, wider and rounded behind; quad-

rangle of eyes scarcely wider than long ........ Prostheclina Keys.

86. Cep>alothorax with sides nearly parallel; quadrangle of eyes one-

third wider than lomo hemsc reece anc. ae See eee eee Saitis E. 8.

87. Abdomen very Jong and slender, much longer than cephalothorax ;

cephalothorax much wider than third row of eyes ... Viciria Thor.

88. Abdomen rather short; cephalothorax but little wider than third

TOWAOLICYVES, ac ainiiacyan labs dass eibeies Ryan ntolsuaena eS agen en eee 89

89, Abdomen about as wide as long; eyes of second row further from

lateral than from dorsal eyes ................-. Margaromma Keys.

90. Abdomen slender ; eyes of secoad row half way between lateral

and dorsal! eyes Rise Buen aac ate ake © ciclo une nee Therosa Keys.

91. Quadrangle of eyes equally wide in front and behind; tibia +

patella III longer than tibia + patellalV...................... 93

92. Quadrangle of eyes wider behind ; or equally wide in front and

behind, with tibia + patella III equal to, or shorter than tibia

qe ppartellaa TV. auc isle ainlarn 2 Scenes ba Havstene rule ae Ae EG A ee 99

93. Eyes of the third row distant by at least double their diameter

from the margin of the cephalothorax ...... 2 Zenodorus Peckham.

94, Eyes of the third row not, or only a little removed from the mar-

ginrof the:cephalothona xin... tee seis tel-teleinelsie oie keene een 95

95. Metatarsus + tarsus IV equal to, or shorter than, tibia -+ pa-

tela PVG oe inicio CAM ete ein Ane at er ROT

96. Metatarsus + tarsus IV longer than tibia + patella IV.

Ergane Keys.

1 Linus —Sinis Thorell, preoccupied.

* Zenodorus=Ephippus Thorell, preoccupied.

Genera of the Family Attide. 269

97. Legs III and IV nearly equal; eyes of third row further from each

other2than from lateral borders; anterior lateral well separated

HEAT Laree. HIG CGC Yess s 2 os ccoee oe vie ole des dieale we sees Cytaea Keys.

98. Third legs longer than fourth ; eyes of third row equally far from

each other and from lateral borders ; anterior lateral very near

PEEACHHIG CLC CYOSS (5. Sia es a's ety oaaihe eee ta an eos Habrocestum E. S.

99. Quadrangle of eyes equally wide in front and behind; anterior row

OE QVOs SICA Ee ae oe ees CR MERE SAIS A OAs HE, 101

100. Quadrangle wider behind; or, if equally wide in front aiid behind,

SUPULTLO TNO Wa GUT VOU. sscls-are a cd clay sine nlace ale ebiaee yu eioveltiste yee re ees 117

PMI aee LOUCHING: lati lac st ce Se Oakley «oBiaeeecienas add Hyctia E. 8S.

Meeexae Lseparated by width of labium:. :..2 0a. Suess. 006 see cee 103

103. Tibia IV as large as patella at base, cylindrical, parallel or a little

EEC Esl CXUTOIUUGY sae, wai setae coe oie 6 Risin Soret mieaverte a vet wee 105

104, Tibia IV narrower than patella at base; slightly enlarged and a

imitlercompressed at extrenilty:.62.. 00. occ ed cise cece enels oe celedene 109

105. Quadrangle of eyes as Jong as wide ; fore central eyes excessively

large, at least five times as large as the lateral......... Mithion E. 8.

106. Quadrangle of eyes wider than long ; fore central eyes not exces-

EBM ae Soares as cic coh aise Ree ctar ales oo Gio dn Swe & Bimale erolhe Lise a oeae 107

107. Thoracic part a little dilated; coxee IV longest...... Weneiner us E. S.

108. Thoracic part parallel; cox I largest...................0. Bavia E. S.

109. Patella Ill as long as or longer than patella IV; tibia IIIT much

Shorter phan tibia LV, but more robust... <2... cnc... see ee ce 111

110. Patella III shorter than Patella IV; tibia III more slender than

TDI LY so Ge ae See tes eS nN POR RE Ae ELAN ea 113

111. Clypeus atleast } as wide as large middle eyes; patellae always

SPOR ENUNDESPVITIOS 21 <csrcic\- siete « «dis cies scl ale aus: cneis « Sveeiale. welsie's Euophrys C. K

112. Clypeus very narrow, scarcely 1 as ois as large middle eyes;

Paiellaciarmed with GWOUSPINEGS <2 32.5. ssc cre ccc cs cae. Cyrba E. 8S.

118. Sternum wider than intermediate coxae; (¢) femur of palpus

armed with a strong apophysis................. Heliophanns C. K

114. Sternum of same width or narrower than intermediate coxae;

PM EAO Me ALBUS UM ANONOG . fee ecetcn aise «aime cele wre eh oebinie wk ohaie%s 115

115. Thoracic part twice as long as cephalic......... Bnei Phlegra, E. S.

116. Thoracic part only 4 longer than cephalic...............4 Attus Walek

117. Quadrangle of eyes equally wide in front and behind........... 119

HS. Quadrangle of eyes wider behind... 00... 2s ccs Cove esseenece 133

119, Anterior row of eyes strongly curved, a straight line from the

summit of the middle eyes cutting the lateral eyes through, or

BsterUTCONHLG UGS ot ae sa se atertaidnn bales ea cieiesan,« sak Seaea C. K.

120. Anterior row of eyes slightly curved, a straight line from sum-

mit of middle eyes cutting lateral eyes above the middle....... 121

121. Legs without fem ral and tibial spines; (4) falces long and hori-

VAG TINTED FUER se ec Sie 8s We let A” ee alle a Epiblemum Hentz

134.

135.

136.

137,

138.

139.

140.

141,

142.

145.

144,

145.

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

. Legs having femoral and tibial spines on the four pairs.......... 123

. Eyes of the third row nearer to each other than to lateral bor-

COTS. sce Lis ces orca a ieesyene ce to asa eee Maevia E. S.

. Eyes of the third row equally distant from lateral borders and

from each other...... PE OAD OE OE Nea dO cods Socdec as 125

. Eyes of the second row nearer the dorsal than the lateral eyes,

Selaophora Keys.

. Eyes of second row half-way between dorsal and Jateral eyes, or

nearer thetlaterall..cccncc. occ ne 6 aban oes Ce eee nee

. Cephalothorax only + larger than wide; scarcely wider than third |

row of eyes; first legs not stouter than the others,

1 Bootes Peckham,

. Cephalothorax at least } longer than wide; first legs stouter than

hE] OV = 0) (OY 2) Re en a a I at APRON SS So oOnuc us 129

. Cephalothorax eofisiderably wider than third row of eyes; moder-

ately WISW oo... es cree nie, sie <nscoe A erewigie) ole ant 9) eh ee 131

. Cephalothorax only slightly wider than third row of eyes; very

pi liig ncandcomiy Ox acu .i siete uevetotels ine eicieue oleh ete eee Jotus Keys.

. Second row of eyes half-way between dorsai and lateral eyes;

PACES MICE SIVET OTP ners ccvcke ieregs ¢ cievecersie Cee eee Sandalodes Keys.

. Second row of eyes nearer the lateral than the dorsal eyes; falzes

CON Eh fea 10) <a en ee ate emer nO UMAR arya Os Meee BENET Hyllus €. K.

. Anterior row of eyes very strongly curved, a straight line from

the summit of the middle eyes cutting only the lower borders

Ofgthe Materall Gyess ls. accent Ee eee > Hlurillus E. 8

Anterior row of eyes straight or only moderately curved, a |

straight line from the summit of the middle eyes cutting the

lateral eyes not. below the middle......:.. 2... 50.259 135

Clypeus as wide as large middle eyes...................000-0ue- 137

Clypeus not so wide as large middle eyes.....................s. 139

Cephalothorax as wide as or barely narrower than long. Sobara Keys.

Cephalothorax at least 4 longer than wide.......... Mopsus Karsch.

Tibia + patella III shorter than tibia + patellaIV .............. 141

Tibia + patella III as long as or longer than tibia + patella IV .. 153

Coxae I separated by width of labium at base... 5.25.4 -ee eee 145

Coxae I touching or nearly touching. ~.2....-.0s0) eon eee 148

Cephalothorax short, high, convex; relative length of legs 1, 4, 2,

3; ADC OMENESHOTE. vali cae lec dante \ape enna tench ee Simaetha Thor.

Cephalothorax elongated, festioracedl relative length of legs 1, 2, 3,

4 alodomen slong <tc ase aera iene eee ae Marptusa Thor.

Trochanter IV very long, diverging, visible from above; tarus and

metatarus IV as thick as tibia and patella............ Ylenus E. S.

'Bootes=Hadrosoma Keys<rling, preoccupied.

> Allurillus—Aelurops Thorell, preoccupied.

Genera of the Family Attide. a1

146. Trochanter IV short, not visible from above; metatarsus and tar-

sus IV more slender than tibia and patella ..................... 147

147, Metatarsus IV havirg only a circle of spines at extremity (some-

CITES MLC MM SMUNECSO) ian tte aeuvetare soe epsreictclcre). iclatens(eraneycre Gilets, etons! siorels 149

148. Metatarsus IV armed to base ........... .. tM HE aethenie area cbacentiitre tact « 151

149. Anterior row of eyes rather strongly curved; l-gs very hairy,

Dendryphantes C. K.

150. Anterior row of legs straight or almest straight; legs almost glab-

CORNERS Se A ee CCEA SAB Sixty chin Nae ley sh ene eiste my aatevaume eae Icius E. S.

151. Eyes of second row double as far from dorsal as from lateral

PSTES: low see acne genera haere Sohne are neryeaintnmr si Phidippus C, K.

152. Eyes of second row almost half-way betweea dorsal and lateral

ESTEE a 0 Ditch ERC RHE ROTI ECHO EEE SeLOION orizean ePECE oi aL Philaeus Thor.

153. Interval between lateral and middle eyes of first row as wide or

nearly as wide as the diameter of the lateral................... 155

154. Lateral separated by aspace not more than }4as wide as their

digmeter trom) theymiddleieyeses 4. 6 sles ldsisaten acl ese ati ee 157

155, Cephalothorax dilated toward the front; clypeus very low, less

than + as wide as the laree middle eyes ........... Euryattus Thor.

156. Cephalothorax with thoracic part very strongly dilated; clypeus

about 4 as wide as large 1aiddle eyes.................. 'Thyeune E. 8.

157. Metatarsus + tarsus IV equal to tibia + patellalV ......... .... 159

158. Metatarsus + tarsus IV shorter than tibia + patella IV.

Pellenes E. S.

159. Seconda Jegs longer than the first ........... *"Hypoblemum Peckham.

160 Pirstiesslourer than the second. . 026 ..et. ee esse eee Hasarius F. 8.

161. Cephalic and thoracic parts on the same plane................... 163

162. Cephalic and thoracic parts on different planes......... Jelskia Taez.

163. Thoracic part but little longer than cephalic........ ............ 165

164, Thoracic part much longer than cephalic’........ Lyssomanes Hentz.

165. First pair of legs longest; cephalic part very convex, sides par-

UIE ier aee = retcicrede orem tae acd Fs Gl ethals dy Stshaletre Mob. Athamas Cambridge.

3. Third pair of legs longest; cephalic part plane, sides converging

PRETORIA Matec ens clap a's wisn stay grayciens Sheree es es *Epeus Peckham.

1 Thyene—Thya Simon, preoccupied.

* Hypoblemum—Drepanephora Keyserling, p: euccupied.

* Wpeus=Evenus Simon, preoccupied.

272 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

SUB-FAMILY ATTINA.

DIOLENIUS THOoRELL, 1870.

Syn.: 1870. Diolenius THORELL, on Europ. Spid. Part I, p. 203.

1878. ‘ Ip., Ragni Malesi e Papuani, Part II, p. 215.

1881. ss L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1240.

Thorell (in Europ. Spid., Part I, p. 203,) says that this genus is character-

ized by the long trochanters of the fore legs.

* TARA WN.

Syn.: 1882. Atrytone KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1378.

Cephalothorax low; one quarter longer than wide, in front moderately

contracted, behind rounded, wider at the third row of eyes, plane

above.

Clypeus very low.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, as wide before as behind, placed in

front of the middle of the cephalothorax. Dorsal eyes further from

each other than from the margin of the cephalothorax. Anterior

row of eyes moderately recurved, eyes close together; small medium

eyes further from the dorsal eyes than from the lateral anterior

eyes. :

Falces wide, short, not diverging.

Maxillae dilated in front.

Sternum plane, longer than wide.

Abdomen elongated, above level.

Legs 1, 4, 2, 8, Coxa and trochanter of first pair very much elongated. Pa-

tella and tibia of the third shorter than patella and tibia of the fourth;

Metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth shorter than the patella and

tibia.

LYSTROCTHISA Simon, 1884.

Lystrocteisa E Simon. Note sur le Groupe des Diolenii; Comptes Reidus

de la Société Entomologique de Belgique. 1884.

Related to Diolenius, but distinct by the following characteristics: ocu-

lar qualrangle longer than the thoracic part, much ionger_thaa wide, con-

vex in front, flattened in the middle; eyes of the third row very prominent,

larger and plainly further apart than the lateral anterior; eyes of the sec-

ond row much nearer the lateral anterior; trochanter J cylindrical, a little

*Tara is substituted for Atrytone, the latter name being preoccupied.

Genera of the Family Attide. | 273:

shorter than the coxa, much shorter than the femur; femur very wide,

claviform; tibia almost globular, compressed below with two rows of long

spines; metatarsus slender, with two pairs of long spines.

CHALCOLECTA Simon. 1884.

Chaleolecta E Simon. Note sur le Groupe des Diolenii; Comptes Rendus.

de la Societe Entomologique de Belgique. 1884.

Ocular quadrangle at least as long as the thoracic part, of the same form

as that of Diolenius; anterior row of eyes less curved than in that genus.

Trochanter I shorter than the coxa (particularly ? )and much shorter than

the femur; femur and tibia I very long, compressed, parallel, not dilated,

and tibia provided below with two rows of at least 10 + 10 strong spines,

alternat-ly shorter and longer; metatarsus shorter than the tibia, ¢ shor-

tened, compressed and angular’, 2 cylindrical and provided below with

three or four pairs of long spines; relative length of legs 1, 4, 3, 2.

DISCOCNEMIUS THORELL. 1881. '

Discocnemius THORELL, Studisui Ragni Malesi e Papuani, III, p. 428.

Cephalothorax long, moderately high, cephalic part not abruptly higher

than thoracic, limited by a transverse depression.

Clypeus very low.

Sternum not narrower than the coxae, not usually projecting between

those of the first pair.

Eyes area occupying about half the length of the cephalothorax; ._quadran-

gle at least as wide behind as it is long; anterior middle eyes very

large; eyes of the second row almost in the middle, between the pos-

terior and the anterior laterai eyes; posterior eyes scarcely or not

higher by their own diameter than the anterior lateral eyes.

Mazxillae sub-parallel, about twice as long as wide, and about twice as

long as the lip. Lip longer than wide, sub-truncated at the extrem-

ity.

Legs 4,1, 2, 3, slender, except the first pair, which is robust (excepting

the metatarsus and tarsus); tibia especially wide and compressed,

and underneath furnished with a medium longitudinal fascia of

dense, long hairs, and two rows of spines, patella and trochanter

not usually longer.

Abdomen long.

Spinnerets six, superior and inferior not differing much in length, last

joint short.

Type: D. lacertosus.

Related both to Diolenius Thorell and Chirothecia Tacz.

'Tn the original this sentence reads “ metatarse plus court que le tibia,

é mutique comprimé et auguleux,” etc.

274 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

SALTICUS (Latr,) 1804. Simon.

Syn.: 1804. Salticus Latr., Nouv. Dict. d@Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 185, (ad

partem).

1805. Attus WALCcK., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 22 (ad partem).

1837. Pyrophorus C. Kocu, Ueters. d. Arachn.—Syst., 1, p. 29.

1846. Toxeus C. Kocu, Die Arachn., XIII, p. 19.

1864. Salticus [SaLtica]: Sub-gen. Pyrophorus [Pyrophora] Sim.

H. N. D. Araignees, p. 336.

1869. Pyroderes Ib., Monogr. d. Attid., p. 248 (714).

1870. Salticus THORELL, On Europ. Spid. I, p. 208.

1871. ¢ Sim., Révis. d. Attid.

1876. rs Ip., Arachn. de France, III, p. 6.

1877. ss THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuani, I, p. 213.

1878. es LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 296.

1878. ce Tacz., Aranéides du Pérou, Bull. Soc. Imp. des Nat.

de Moscou, LIII, 4, p. 371.

1879. $F L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1055.

1880. $f KarscH, Arachnol. Blatter VIII, Zur Kenntniss der

Attiden, in Zeitsch, f. d. gesammt. Naturwissensch., LIIT

p. 395.

1880. Toxeus ID, ibid., pp. 393, 394.

Cephalothorax elongated; cephalic part high, parallel, level, almost as

wide as long, its posterior angles rounded; thoracic part narrower,

lower, on a different plane, rounded or obtusely truncated behind.

Clypeus very narrow, with sparse hair.,

Eyes of the face very unequal, sub-touching, in a straight line, with some

hairs around them; dorsal eyes as large as the lateral, a little further

apart, forming with them a group wider than long, not, or scarcely

projecting.

Sternum very narrow, projecting between the anterior coxe.

Falces (4) very long, flat above, horizontal; inferior border of the groove

with a continuous row of strong teeth. (2) Falces short, robust,

vertical.

Mazxillc long, square at the extremity, with the superior external angle

projecting a little.

Lip much longer than wide, almost parallel, truncated or slightly hol-

lowed.

Palpus (é) slender; tibia as long and wider than the patella; tarsus oval,

rather narrow, and truncated; bulb discoidal, occupying only the

inferior part of the tarsus. (9) Palpus with the tibia and tarsus en-

larged in the form of an oval palette.

Genera of the Family Attide. 275

Legs 4, 1, 3, 2: Third and fourth pairs unarmed; tibiz and metatarsi of the

first and second pairs with two rows of inferior spines; tibia of the

first much longer than the patella; patella and tibia of the third

much shorter than the pateila and tibia of the fourth; tarsus and

metatarsus of the fourth a little shorter than the patella and tibia.

LEPTORCHESTES (THORELL) 1870. Srmon.

Syn.: 1832. Synemosyna HENTz, On North Amer. Spid., p. 108 (ad

partem),

1837. Salticus C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.—Syst., 1, p. 29 (ad

partem.)

1869. ss Sim. Monogr d. Attid., p. 6 (16), 241 (707) (ad partem),

1870. Leptorchestes THORELL, On Europ. Spid., I, p. 209 (ad partem).

1871, se Sim., Reévis. d. Attid. (ad partem).

1876, sf Ip., Arachn. de France, III. p. 10.

1878, “ LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 297.

1879. se L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1057.

Cephalothorax plane, but little elevated, ,arallel, rounded or obtusely

truncated behind; a slight transverse depression separating the

cephalic part.

Ciypeus very narrow.

Eyes of the face very unequal, in a straight line, touching. Dorsal eyes of

the same size or barely smaller than the lateral, forming with them

a group much longer than wide.

Sternum at least as narrow as the intermediate coxe, projecting between

the anterior coxe.

Lip almost twice as long as wide, parallel, terminating in an obtuse point.

Falces robust, short, vertical in both sexes,

Palpus (4) not robust; tibia short with an external apophysis; bulb simple.

Legs 4, 1, 3, 2; third and fourth pairs unarmed: (4) metatarsi of the first

and second with some inferior spines; (2 ) tibia and metatarsi of the

first and second presenting two rows of inferior spines; patella and

tibia of the third much shorter than patella and tibia of the fourth;

metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth shorter than the patella and

tibia.

SYNAGELKES Simon. 1876.

Syn.: 1837. Saitieus C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.—Syst., I, p. 29 (ad

; partem).

1869. ** Srm., Monogr. d. espéces Europ. dela fam. d. Attides,

p. 241 (707) (ad partem).

1870, Leptorchestes THORELL, On Europ. Spid. I, p. 209 (ad partem)

1871. “ SIM.

1876. Synageles Ip., Arachn, de France, III, p. 14.

1883. Wie Ip., Arachn. de L’Ocean Atlantique, Ann. Soc, Ent.+

de France 1862, p. 261.

276 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Cephalothorax flat, but little elevated, very much elongated, parallel, ob-

tusely truncated behind; a slight horizontal depression separating

the cephalic part.

Fyes: The dorsal eyes situated a little beyond the middle of the cephalo-

thorax, scarcely projecting above, of the same size as the lateral,

and forming with them a group much longer than wide. Eyes of

the face very unequal, touching, forming a straight line, surrounded

by fine circles of hairs.

Clypeus very narrow; hairs forming the beard sparse.

Sternum oval, more slender at the two extremities, wider in the middle

than the intermediate coxae, projecting between the anterior

coxae.

Lip at least as wide as long, semi-circular, or in a very obtuse triangle.

Maczxillcee extending much beyond the lips but nevertheless rather short and

very wide. Square at the extremity.

Legs: Fourth legs the longest; the three anterior pairs equal or almost

equal; the two posterior pairs unarmed; (4) metatarsi of the first

and second alone provided with some inferior spines; (9? ) tibiae and

metatarsi of the first and second presenting two rows of inferior

spines; tibia of the first robust, of the same length or scarcely

shorter than the patella; patella and tibia of the third much shorter

than patella and tibia of the fourth; metatarsus and tarsus of the

fourth shorter than patella and tibia.

Falces (4 °) robust, short, vertical.

Palpus (¢) not very robust; tibia very short, provided with an external

apophysis; tarsus obtuse oval; bulb simple, reaching at least the

superior third of the tarsus; (2?) rather slender; tarsus slightly en-

larged and cylindrical.

AGORIUS THORELL. 1877.

Agorius THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani, I, p. 216.

Cephalothorax about twice as long as wide, the posterior part plainly

narrowing a little, almost vertical towards the sides, rather low,

the cephalic part scarcely higher than the thoracic.

Clypeus very low, less than 4 the diameter of the anterior middle eyes,

without thick hairs.

Sternum much wider than the coxe, not projecting between the coxze of

the first pair.

Eyes: Are a large, occupying almost half the length of the cephalothorax.

Quadrangle only a little wider than long, at least as wide in front as

behind. Anterior row of eyes rather strongly curved upward, mid-

dle eyes plainly visible when the cephalothorax is looked at from

above, touching, the lateral well separated from the middle, eyes

of the second row small, and a little further from the posterior eyes,

Genera of the Family Attide. av’

which are but little smaller than the anterior lateral eyes, than from

these; posterior eyes further from each other than from the margin

of the cephalothorax.

Falces small, vertical (at least in ?).

Macxillae diverging a little, sub-ovaté, the extremities appearing rounded,

almost twice as long as the lip, which i: a little wider than long,

narrowing toward the apex.

Legs exceedingly slender, long: 4, 1, 3, 2; trochanters, at least of the

fourth pair, much longer than thick; space between the coxee of the

first pair nearly as wide as the sternum; posterior tibize and

metatarsi without spines. First pair with patellae very long, almost

as long as the femora, and the tibiz and metatarsi, on the contrary,

very short. Two claws, small, slender, bent, strongly curved at the

apex, armed with teeth, especially small and short in the tarsi of

the first pair; claw tufts distinct.

Abdomen slender, sub-cylindrical; pedicle short, not articulated.

Mawxillae longer, sub-cylindrical.

Pubescence fine and sparse.

Type. A. gracilipes.

This genus is related t» Synemosyna Hentz, Salticus Latr., Leptorchestes

Thor., and especially to Synagels Sim., differing from this genus in not hav-

ing the sternum produced between the coxae of the first pair, in the quad-

rangle of the eyes being shorter, and in the structure of the first pair of

legs, which resemble those of Diolenius Thor. However, in Diolenius, it is

the trochanters which are elongated, not, as in Agorius, the patellae.

*DAMCITAS N.

Syn.: 1879. Scirtetes L. Kocu, Arachn. Australiens, p. 1070.

Cephalothorax almost twice as long as wide, slightly rounded on the sides

contracted equally toward the anterior and posterior, convex above.

Clypeus low, equaling in h-ight the radius of the lateral eye of the

first row.

Quadrangle of eyes longer than wide, wider behind than in front; third

series of eyes as wide as cephalothorax. First row of eyes slightly

recurved, placed close together. Eyes of the third row more widely

separated from each other than they are separated from the margin

of the cephaiothorax. The middle eyes are much furtber from the

posterior eyes than they are from the lateral eyes of the first row.

Mazxillae convex, margin in fro.t a little rounded. Lip scarcely equals

half the length of the maxilla, convex, contracted toward the ante-

rior, the tip rounded and swollen.

Sternum long and contracted, convex, projecting between the first pair of

thighs.

" Dameetas is substituted for Scirtetes, the latter name being preoccupied.

278. Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Abdomen twice as long as wide; anterior part limited by a transverse im-

pression, covered by a thin skin; posterior part convex, clothed with

a hard dorsal integument.

Legs spined, 1, 4, 2, 8; 1 and 4 equal, and 3 and 4 differ slightly in length;

first pair stouter than the others. Patella with the tibia of the third

pair shorter than the same articulations of the fourth pair; the

metatarsus and the tarsus of the fourth pair are shorter than the

patella with the tibia.

JANIGENA KarscuH. 1880.

Syn.: 1846. Janus C. Kocu, Die Arachn., XIII, p. 21. (ad partem).

1880. Janigena Karscu, Arachnol. Blatter VIII, Zur Kennutniss der

Attiden, in Zeitschr, f.d. gessammt. Naturwissensch., LILI p. 393.

The cephalic part sharply marked off, but not higher than the thoracic

part, very flat and wide. The quadrangle of the eyes is wider behind than

in front, the palpus over-reaches the very short mandible, also in the male

in length in wide contrast to Toxeus and Synemosyna. The two single

barren typical specimens do not admit of a more exact definition. Type,

Janus melanoc: phalus (K). As the generic name Janus was preoccupied,

(Verany, 1844, Gastropoda) Karsch proposed the name Janigena.

Thorell, in his review of the genera of European spiders, p. 36, had

called attention to the fact that the name Janus was preoccupied, even

before Verany, 1844. (Janus Steph. [Hymenopt] 1835), See remarks on

the genus Syneoiosyna under that genus.

SYNEMOSYNA HEnrz. 1832.

Syn.: 1832. Synemosyna HENTZ, on North Amer. Spid., p. 108.

1846. Janus Kocu, Die Arachn., XII I, p. 21 (ad partem).

1870. Leptorch+stes THORELL, on Europ. Spid., I, p. 209 (ad partem).

1876. “ Sim., Arachn. de France, III, p. 10 (ad partem.)

1877. Synemosyna THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuaui, I, p.

198.

1878. Janus Tacz., Arané'des du Pérou, Bull. Soc. Imp. des Nat. de

Moscou. L. III, 4, p. 372.

1879. Synemosyna L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1052.

1880. Synemosyna KarscuH, Arachnol. Blatter VIII, Zur Kenntniss

der Attiden, in Zeitschr. f. d. gesammt. Naturwissensch.,

IDS AWOL oy, SORy,

1881. ss THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuani, III,

p. 406.

Eyes eight, unequal, in three rows, the first composed of four eyes, the

two middle ones largest, the second composed of two small ones

placed nearer the first than the third, which is composed of two

larger eyes.

Genera of the Family Attide. 279

Falces short in the females.

Mazillae slightly inclined toward the lip, truncated at the tip.

Lip short, rounded.

Legs slender, fourth pair longest, the other three variab!e.

Abdomen contracted near the middle: body nodose, elongated.

Type, S. formica Hentz.

S. formica, upon which species Hentz founded this genus, is undoubtedly

identical with Janus gibberosus Koch, which was used to form the genus

Janus. Both Hentz and Koch had the spider from Pennsylvania. The

other species of Janus described by Koch, J. melanocephalus, has been

made the type of the genus Janigena by Karsch.

Hentz, when defining his genus Svnemosyna, wrote “ cheliceres short in

emale,” and in contrasting it with Myrmecia notes that in the genus (Myr-

mecia) ‘‘the cheliceres are large in this, (Synemosyna) they are small at

least in the female.” When describing his typicil species —S. formica —

he states that “the cheliceres are large only in the male.” All the other

species placed by him in this genus, both in the male and fema'e have

the cheliceres short. Now as a matter of fact both sexes in 8. formica

have short cheliceres. Mr. Emerton first called attention to the error in his

notes to Burgess’ edition of Hentz’s arachnological writings. We have

seen a good many males of this spider and all had the short falces. If

S. formica represents Hentz’s genus, then nearly, if not all, the species

placed here by Messrs. L. Koch, Thorell and Karsch, belong in another

genus.

RHOMBONOTUS L. Kocu. 1879.

Rhombonotus L. Kocuw. Arachniden Australiens, p. 1067.

Cephalothorax almost twice as long as wide, coatracted equally in front

as behind, slightly convex.

Clypeus about the radius of the middle eyes of the first row.

Quadrangle of eyes longer than wide, narrower in front than behind; the

third row of eyes placed behind the mildle of the cephalothorax

and above the lateral declivity of the same, more widely separated

from one another than from the margin of the cephalothorax. The

first row of eyes slightly recurved and close together. The middle

eyes are nearer the lateral eyes of the first row than the eyes of the

third row. j

Mazxillae moderately convex, anterior margin round.

Labium half as long as the maxilla, a little contracted toward the anter-

ior, the tip rounded.

Sternum convex, long, contracted, projecting between the anterior thighs

Legs 4,1, 2, 3.: the second and third pairs of equal length, the first pair

more robust than the others. Patella with the tibia of the third

shorter than the patella with the tibia of the fourth. The fourth leg

has the metatarsus with the tarsus longer than the patella with the

tibia.

280 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Abdomen cylindrical, constricted in front of the middle by a transverse

impression,

OMOEDUS THoRELL. 1881.

Omoedus THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani, III, p. 668.

Cephalethorax high behind, anteriorly a little dilated above, the back

therefore wide, slanting in front of the posterior eyes, behind them

nearly level, strongly rounded behind, when looked at from above,

only slightly convex transversely; the posterior slope almost verti-

cal, and transversely concave.

Clypeus rather high.

Eyes quadrangle much wider than long, not occupying half the length of

the cephalothorax; almost rectangular; anterior row usually curved;

eyes of the second row half-way between the posterior eyes and the

anterior lateral eyes; posterior eyes at least their own diameter

higher than the anterior lateral eyes, and further from each other

than from the lateral borders.

Sternum wider than the coxae, not projecting between the widely sepa-

rated coxae of the first pair.

Falces short, sub-vertical.

Mawxillae long, narrow at the base, sub-ovate. Lip scarcely ox not wider

than long, apex somewhat rounded.

Palpi those of the female not dilated nor flattened toward the apex.

Legs rather short, (2) 4, 3, 1, 2 (or 2, 1?); tibia with patella of the fourth

pair longer than tibia with patella of the third.

Abdomen short, a little flattened, the anterior margin truncated, covered

with delicate skin.

Spinnerets six, the superior much more slender then the inferior.

Type O. niger.

This genus resembles Coccorchestes Thor., differing from it especially in

having the body sub-flattened, not strongly convex. It differs from ordi-

nary Attidae much less than Coccorchestes.

COCCORCHESTES THORELL. 1881.

Coccorchestes THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani, III., p. 671.

Cephalothorax slanting in front of the posterior eyes, very high behind

them and nearly level or ascending, the posterior margin of the

back widely truncated.

Clypeus high, inclined backward.

Eyes quadrangle wider than long, scarcely or not occupying half the

greatest length of the cephaluthorax; anterior row with the eyes

sub-touching, only slightly curved upward, eyes of the second row

further from the posterior eyes than from the anterior lateral eyes;

posteriur eyes more than their own diameter higher than anterior

Jateral eyes.

Genera of the Family Attide. 281

Sternum wider than the coxae, not projecting between the separated

coxae of the first pair.

Falces short, sub-vertical.

Mazxilllae short, narrow at the base, wide at the apex, almost ovate trian-

gular. Lip a little longer than wide, roundel at apex.

Palpi of the female a little dilated and usually convex toward the apex.

Legs moderately short, 4, 1, 2, 8 (8, 2), femora robust and compressed.

Abdomen short, almost ovate triangular, high and widely truncated in

front, anterior slope convex, and received into the excavation of

the cephalothorax, covered with hard shining scales forming a

shield.

Spinnerets six, the superior long r and more slender than the inferior.

The whole spider is very convex, both longitudinally and transversely

when looked at from above strongly resembling a beetle. |

HOMALATTUS Wuitse. 1841.

Syn.: 1841. Homalatius WHITE, Description of new or little known Ara-

chn., in Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., VII, p. 476.

1848. Rhanis C. Kocu, Die Arachn., XIV, p. 86.

1870. Rhene THORELL, on Europ. Spid. I, p. 37.

1877. Homalattus Ib., Studi sui Ragni Mal. e Pap., I, p. 289.

1878. Rhene Tacz., Aranéides du Perou, Bull. de la Soc. Imp. de

Moscow, LIII, 4, p. 289.

1879. Homalattus L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1083.

1880. sf KarsScH, Arachnol. Blatter VIII, Zur Kenntniss

der Attiden, in Zeitsch. f.d. gesammt. Naturw:ssensch.,

LIII, p. 396.

Cephalothorax flat, transverse, not so wide as the body, covered like it with

papillae.

Eyes eight, on short elevations of thorax; may be considered as placed in

three lines, two of which are approximate, the third bein’; distant;

the first line, which is somewhat bent, contains four eyes, placed on

the front margin of the cephalothorax at nearly equal distances from

each other, the two intermediate eyes are much the largest. The

second line contains two very minute eyes, somewhat removed from

the edge of the thorax; they are placed rather nearer the outer eye

of the first line than the outer is to the intermediate; the third line

contains two eyes, one on each side of the margin of the thorax, the

space between the outer eye and the first line being equal to the dis-

tance between the outer eyes of the first line.

Abdomen as broad as long; in front straigbtish; behind somewhat pointed;

the sides rounded; it is flat and compressed, and somewhat convex

above.

282 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

NEON Simon. 1876.

Syn.: 1869. Attus Sim., Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d. Attides,

p. 14 (24) (ad partem).

Sills cs Ip., Revis d. Attid.

1872. Euophrys THORELL, on European Spiders, II, p. 404.

1876. Neon Sim., Arachn. de France, III, p. 208.

1880. * KarscuH, Arachnol, Blatter VIII, Zur Kenntniss der

Attiden, in Zeitsch. f. d. Na:urwissensch., LIII, p. 397.

Cephalothorax not high; cephalic part a little longer than the thoracic:

the latter very slightly contracted and widely truncated.

Eyes of the face touching, forming a straight line. Dorsal eyes at

least as large (often larger) than the lateral, very convex, not promi-

nent; as far apart as the lateral eyes, since the sides of the quad-

ralgle are parallel.

Clypeus less than half as wide as the middle eyes, almost glabrous.

Sternum triangular, much wider than the intermediate thighs.

Legs short; those cf the fourth pair the longest; those of the first and third

pairs nearly equal; those of the second pair the shortest; first pair a

little thicker than the others; third and fourth pairs without spines ;

first and second pairs presenting below two rows of tibial and meta-

tarsal spines usually long and bristle-like.,Tibia and patella of the third

shorter chan tibia and patella of the fourth; tarsus and metatarsus

of the fourth very slightly shorter than the patella and tibia.

Falces obliquely inclined, short, slender, taken together narrower than the

two nuiddle eyes.

Integument ornamented.

Spinnerets the superior ones longer than the inferior, and more slender;

very far apart, leaving visible the inferior ones to the base, formed

of two articulations, the second very short.

TOINAGING

Syn.: 1882. Erasmia KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1350.

Cephalothorax one third longer than wide, a little contracted toward the

front, behind rounded, not wider at the dorsal eyes a above plain.

Clypeus half the diameter of the large eyes.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long; wider in front than behind; dorsal

eyes placed a little behind the middle of the cephalothorax, almost

further from-each other than from the margin of the cephalothorax.

First row of eyes slightly recurved and very close together. Small

median eyes half way between the anterior lateral and the dorsal

eyes.

*Tona is substitued for Erasmia, the latter name being preoccupied.

Genera of the Family Attide. 283:

Falces short, not diverging.

Labium half as long as the maxilla; slightly contracted anteriorly.

Sternum oval; one third longer than wide.

Legs 1, 4,3, 2. Third and fourth equally long. First pair as ait or a

little stouter than than the others. Patella and tibia of the third

longer than the patella and tibia of the fourth. Metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth longer than the patella and the tibia. Metatar-

sus of the fourth without spines.

Abdomen long, ovate.

MAGO CAMBBIDGE. 1882.

Mago O. P. CamBrIDGE. Proc. Zool, Sos., London, May 16, 1882, p. 432.

Cephalothorax as high behind as it islong; the posterior slope curved in-

wards, but almost perpendicular; profile of upper side’ of caput

slightly convex, and sloping a little forward. The caput is exceed-

ingly large, absorbing, ia fact, almost the whole cephalothorax.

Looked at from above, its upper surface forms nearly a square; the

sides are perpendicular.

Height of clypeus less than the diameter of the fore central eyes.

Ocular area slightly broader than long, and equal in breadth before and

behind; fore central pair of eyes very large, and of a dull, pearl-grey

hue; fcre laterals ina line with base of fore centrals,and of same

color; posterior pair a littlesmaller than fore laterals, and as nearly

as possible equally divided from them by the minute, intermediate

eye, which is placed a little inside of their straight line.

Legs moderately long, tolerably strong, 1, 3, 2, 4; first pair much the

strongest. Armed with spines, and with a small claw-tuft beneath

the terminal tarsal claws.

Falces long, straight, divergent, and directed forward; denticulations small;

fang of moderate length and strength.

Mazillae long, strong, straight; widened on both sides at the extremities,

which are rounded.

Labium long, about two thirds the length of the maxillae, and narrower

at the apex than base; apex rounded. The direction of the maxillae

and labium is very nearly perpendicular (or at right angles) to the

sternum, which is small, nearly round, slizhtly pointed behind and

truncated in front; the truncation is very gently curved, the con-

vexity of the curve directed backwards.

Abdomen small, short, oval, very convex before, and fitting up pretty

closely to the incurved thorax.

284 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ERIS (C. Kocu). 1846. Sion.

Syn.: 1846. Eris C. Kocu, Die Arachn., XIII, p. 189.

1850. “* Ip., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 59.

1869. Attus Stm., Monogr. d. Attid., p. 6 (16) 14 (24) (ad partem).

1871. ‘* Ip., Révis, d. Attid. (ad partem).

1876. Eris Ip., Arachn. de France, III, p. 197.

1880. “ KarscouH, Arachnol, Blatter VIII, Zur Kenntniss der

Attiden, in Zeitsch. f. d. gesammt. Naturwissensch.,

LIT, p. 397.

1883. * Sim., Arachn. de l’Ocean Atlantique. Ann. Soc. Ent. de

France, 1882, p. 303.

‘Cephalothorax moderately high, wide, and short; cephalic and thoracic

parts of the same length; the latter very much inclined, contracted,

truncated or slightly hollowed.

Clypeus moderately high, with hairs.

Eyes of the face very unequal, in a curved line; the lateral widely sep-

arated. Dorsal eyes scarcely smaller than the lateral, situated at

the widest point of the cephalothorax, and not prominent.

-Sternum short, as narrow or narrower than the intermediate coxae. In-

terval between the anterior coxae often less wide than the lip at the

base.

Falces vertical, short, thick.

Legs 1, 4, 3, 2, or 4, 1, 3, 2: first pair more robust than the others, often, in

the males, its femur and tibia dilated. Tibia and patella of the third

plainly shorter than tibia and patella of the fourth. Tarsus and me-

tatarsus of the fourth of the same length as or scarcely shorter than

patella and tibia. Tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs;

less numerous, and only appearing at the extremities of the articu-

lations on the posterior pairs.

*BIANOR N.

Syn: 1883. Seythropa KeyseR.ine, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1446.

‘Cephalothorax a little longer than wide, sides rounied, before and behind

equally contracted, high and convex, not wider than the dorsal row

of eyes.

Clypeus low.

Quadrangle of eyes behind wider than long, in front contracted, reaching

the middle of the cephalothorax. Anterior row substraight; the

lateral a little separated from the middle eyes. Dorsal eyes further

from one another than from the margin of the cephalothorax. The

small median eyes are nearer the anterior lateral than the dorsal

eyes.

* Bianor is substituted for Scythropa, the latter name being preoccupied.

Genera of the Family Attide. 285.

Falees vertical, not diverging. ;

Mazxillae twice as long as the labium, dilat:d and rounded in front.

Labium not longer than wide.

Sternum twice as long as wide.

Legs 1, 4,5, 2. First pair stouter thanthe others. Patella and tibia of the

third shorter than the patella and tibia of the fourth; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth a little shorter than the patella and tibia. Me-

tatarsi of the fourth spimed only at the apex.

Abdomen oviform; one fourth longer than wide.

Spinnerets as usual; superior and inferior equally long.

PIRITHOUS KEYSERLING. 1883.

Syn.: 1882. Eulabes Keyser.ine, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1387.

1883. Pirithous KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1477. °

Cephalothorax a little longer than wide, sides rounded, behind slanting

and contracted, above moderately high and plane, wider at the dor-

sal row of eyes,

Clypeus low.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, behind wider than in front, almost.

reaching the middle of the cephalothorax. First row of eyes strongly

recurved, lateral eyes from the large middle eyes widely separated.

small medium eyes further from the dorsal eyes than from the an-

terior lateral. Dorsal eyes further from one another than from the

marzin of the cephalothorax.

Falces diverging.

Mavillae long, a little dilated in front.

Labium longer than wide, not longer than half the length of the maxilla,

Sternum small and a little longer than wide.

Abdomen oval.

Legs spined, 1, 2, 4, 3, or 1, 4, 2, 3; first pair stouter than the others; patella

and tibia of the third shorter than the patella and tibia of the fourth.

Metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth shorter than the patella and the

tibia. Metatarsi of the fourth spined.

The generic name Eulabes was preoccupied.

*NEAETHA Simon. 1885.

Syn: 1869. Attus Srm., Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam, d. Attides,

p. 14 (24) (ad partem),.

1871, “* ID., Revis. d. Attid.

1876. Neera1p., Arachn. de France, ITI, p. 199.

1885, Neaetha 1p., Etude sur Arachn. recueillis en Tunisie, Paris,

Imp. Nat. 1885.

' Neatha= Neera, preoocupied.

286 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Cephalothorax high; cephalic and thoracic parts of the same length; the

latter very much inclined, contracted, truncated, or slightly hol-

lowed.

Hyes: those of the face but little separated, forming a straight line. Dorsal —

eyes a little smaller than the lateral, not prominent, situated at the

widest point of the cephalothorax, further apart than the lateral

since the sides of the quadrangie diverge behind. *

OClypeus almost half as wide as the middle eyes, with thick hairs.

Sternum oval, of the same width as the intermediate thigns.

Legs 3,1, 4, 2, or 1, 3, 4, 2; firsts pair much more robust, with the femur

compressed, dilated above, and claviform; patella and tibia of the

first thick and cylindrical. Tibia and patella of the third much

longer than tibia and patella of the fourth; metatarsus znd tarsus

of the fourth as long or scarcely shorter than the tibia and patella.

Tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; the metatarsus of the

fourth having only a circle of terminal spines,

Falces vertical, not long.

CIRIS C. Kocw. 1848.

Syn.: 1848. Ciris C. Kocu, Die Arachn., 14, p. 85.

1850. ‘© Ip., Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst., 5, p. 69.

1877. ‘** THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuani, L, p. 288

Cephalothorax short, flat above, scarcely longer than it is wide.

Eyes of the face in a straight row.

Falces strong, thick, not long, wrinkled, shining, vertical.

Palpus of the f«male of not unusual form, the tarsus tapering oval.

Legs short, nearly equally long,

Abdomen very short, almost circular.

Spinnerets drawn in and svarcely visible.

Thorell remarks that Ciris is near to Ballus (C. Koch) and more espe-

cially to Neera Simon, in that the eye area is large, occupying one half the

cephalothorax; while it differs from Neera in having the quadrangle of

the eyes not wider, but a little narrower hehind than in front, and the

third pair of legs only a little longer than the fourth. Studi Ragni Malesi

e Papuani, I, p. 285.

BALLUS (C. Kocu). 1850. Simon.

Syn.: 1837. Euophrys C. Kocn, Uebers, d. Arachn. Syst. I, p. 33 (ad

partem.

1846. Marpissa Ip., Die Arachn. XIU, p. 58 (ad partem).

1850. Attus: sub.-gen. Ballus Ip., Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst., 5 p. 68.

1869. ‘“ §r., Monogr. d. Attid., p. 6 (16) 14 (24) (ad partem).

1870. Ballus THORELL, On Europ. Spid., I, p. 212.

Genera of the Family Attide. 287

1871. Attus Smw., Révis d. Attid.

1876. Ballus Ip., Arachn. de France, III, p. 201.

1876. Oedipus MENGE, Preussische Spinnen, IX, p. 482.

1877. Ballus THORELL, Ragni Malesi e Papuani, p. I, 286.

1878. ‘* _LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 301.

1881. “ THORELL, Ragni Malesi e Papuani, III. 665.

1882. « _ L. KocH and KEYSERLING, Arachn.’Australiens, p. 1335.

Cephalothorax flattened: cephalic and thoracic parts of the same leugth;

the latter contracted, inclined, truncated: or slightly hollowed

behind.

Clypeus less than half as wide as the large middle eyes.

Hyes of the face sub-touching, forming a straight or barely curved line,

Dorsal eyes of the same size as the lateral, not prominent, situated

at the widest point of the cephalothorax, much further apart than

the lateral.

® Sternum attenuated at both extremities, a little wider than the intermedi-

ate coxae.

Failces short, plane, or a little flattened in front.

Palpus (¢) not very long, and not robust; tibia shorter than patella, with

an external terminal apophysis, slender, tarsus oval, relatively nar-

row.

Legs short; the fourth pair longest, the first pair much the most robust,

with femur and tibia much dilated, often flattened and claviform.

Tibia and patella of the third much shorter than tibia and patella of

the fourth; metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth usually shorter than

tibia and patella. Legs of the two posterior pairs entirely without

spines (except zenesiens); legs of the two first pairs having below

two rows of tibial and metatarsal spines.

Integument covered with moderately long pubescence, simple, rarely scaly.

CHIROTHECIA TaczAnowskI. 1878.

Chirothecia TAcZANOWSKI, Bulletin de la Société Impériale des Natur-

alistes de Moscou, Tome LIII, 1878, No. 4, p. 362.

Cephalothorax low, flattened on the back; head much longer than wide,

perfectly plane above; thoracic part shorter thar the cephalic, a

little lower behind.

Eyes of the third row placed very far back; those of the second row

nearer the anterior than to the posterior eyes, and nearer each other

than are the anterior and posterior lateral eyes. The tops of the an-

terior eyes are in a perfectly straight line; the middle eyes are very

large, occupying the entire width of the face; the external eyes of

this row are considerably larger than the eyes of the other rows.

Falces large, short and almost vertical in the female; long, horizontal,

and armed with a long recurved hook in the male,

288 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Legs ordinary and slender excepting those of the first pair which are

thicker than the others, with the tibia enlarged and hollowed on its

internal border toform a moderately deep groove; each of the borders ~

of this groove has three long spines each articulated on an elevation

which is low but much larger than the spine, and some irregularly

distributed bristles; at the bottom of the groove is found a comb

composed of wide, flattened hairs, which are crowded closely to-

gether, and disposed in a simple row.

Figure small.

This curious genus, in which the first legs are much thicker than the

others, with the tibia greatly enlarged, resembling at the first glance the

claws of crayfish and yet more those of chelifers, is characterized also by

the extreme flatness of the cephalothorax, by the length of the cephalic

part, and by the eyes of the last row being placed very far back.

COCALUS C. KocH. 1846.

Syn.: 1846. Cocalus C. Kocu, Die Arachn., 13, p. 180.

1850. “ Ip., Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst., 5, p. 48.

1877. ch THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuaniy, I, p. 254.

1878. fe Ip., ibid., II, p. 283.

1881. ss Ip., ibid., III, p. 492.

Eyes of the first row all close together in a straight line. The two middle

eyes are large, the outer, in diameter, scarcely half as large as the

middle eyes; the eyes of the third row looking sideways, standing

in a quadrangle with the first row, and as large as the lateral eyes of

that row; the eyes of the second row only a little smaller than these,

and placed half way between them.

Falces long, slender, vertical, cylindrical, with a rather short fang.

Palpus rather long, the first three joints slender, the fourth wide and

short, the tarsus large, swollen, the bulb entirely covered; the bulb

simple, with protuberances (einfach knotig), projecting a little

forward.

The cephalothorax of this spider departs from all known species. The

headplate forms an ascending slope from the first row of eyes, and ends

in a roof-shaped ridge from which the thorax falls in a steep slope, to the

hinder edge; the sides of the cephalothorax. however, are almost vertical,

and therefore when looked at from above, it appears narrow. The abdo-

men is much narrower than the cephalothorax and cylindrical. The spin-

nerets are, in comparison with other genera, long and slender, the two

upper and the two lower however, have but half the length of the two

middle ones. The legs are rather long, the first and fourth pairs almost

equally long, the second pair somewhat shorter than the first, and the third

somewhat shorter than the second. All are rather slender.

Genera of the Family Attide. _ 289

SE INGUS ANG

Syn.: 1878. Sinis THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani, II p. 269.

Cephalothorax not much longer than wide, and very high, sloping steeply

in front.

Clypeus at least half as high as the middle anterior eyes.

Sternum sub-ovate, wider than the coxae.

Hyes; quadrangle rather large, occupying about of the length of the

cephalothorax, not much wider than losg, a little narrower behind

than in front, and but little narrower behind than the cephalothorax

at that place. The anterior row of eyes, which is plainly visible

when looked at from above, is a litt'e curved upward. Middle an-

terior eyes very large, at least three times larger than the lateral

eyes, and separated from them by only a small interval; eyes of the

second row rather large, more than a third as large as the posterior

eyes, and placed half-way between these, and the anterior lateral

eyes; the posterior eyes, which are placed more than their own di-

ame’er higher than the anterior lateral eyes, are further from the

lateral borders than from each other.

Falces short, not.

Maxillae sub-ovate, diverging, narrow at the base, almost twice as long

as the lip; lip a little longer than wide.

Legs long, 1, 4 (in 9 4, 1), 2, 38, metatarsi and tarsi very narrow; first pair

only a little more robust than the others, tibiae much longer than

patallae; tibiae also spined above; posterior metatarsi with spines

throughout their length.

Abdomen sub-ovate. ,

Spinnerets ordinary, two articulations, the superior the longer.

Type: 5, fimbriatus (Dol.).

This genus is nearly related to Cocalus (C. L. Koc).

HYCTIA Simon. 1876.

Syn.: 1869. Marpissus Simm, Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d.

Attides, p. 7 (17) (ad part.).

1871. Us Ip., Révis. d. Attid.

1876, Hyctia Ip., Arachn. de France, III, p. 18,

Cephalothorax elongated, almost parallel; thoracic part scarcely at all

enlarged, at least a third longer than the cephalic part. Cephalic

part flat, not inclined, limited by a wide depression, not deep, bent

behind.

' Linus is substituted for Sinis, the latter name being preoccupied.

290 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Eyes of the face very unequal, touching, at least the middle eyes, forming

a straight line; dorsal eyes almost as large as the lateral, no’ further

apart, the sides of the head thus being parallel; the square almost as

long as wide; th2 dorsal eyes much further from each other than

from the lateral borders.

Clypeus scarcely a third as wide as the middle eyes.

Sternum smali, narrow, twice as long as wide, thighs longer than wide,

those of the first pair much thicker and longer thac the others,

tou hing.

Legs 1, 4, 2, 8; first pair very long and robust; femur dilat-d and com-

pressed; patella and tibia cylindrical, the latter always a third the

longer; these two articulations longer (¢) or almost as long (2?) as

the cephalothorax; tarsus and metatarsus slender, shorter than the

patella and tibia; tarsus a third shorter than the metatarsus.

1 Second, third, and fourth legs short and. slender. Tarsus and

metatarsus of the fourth shor er, or almost as long as the patella and

tibia. On the anterior pairs two inferior rows of tibiae andjmeta-

tarsal spines; on the posterior pairs two inferior tibial spines, and

one or two metatarsal spines. |

Falces robust, longer than the face, (?) vertical, (¢) lightly inclined for-

ward.

Palpus (4) slender; femur narrow anda little curve}; tarsus o-al, not,

large; bulb simply rounded above, prolonged into a point behind.

Abdomen narrow, elongated.

MITHION Srwon. 1884.

Mithion E. Stmon, Arachnides recueillis a Khartoum; Bulletin de la So-

ciété Zoologiqne de France, T. IX.

Cephalothorax much elongated, almost parallel; thoracic part at least a.

third the longer; cephalic part almost plane, little elevated, not in-

clined, with posterior depression lacking, or very slight.

Eyes of the face touching, with their tops in a straight line, extremely un-

equal, the median at least five times the larger, very convex and

prominent. Dorsal eyes as large as the lateral, not, or scarcely

further apart. Quadrangle as long as wide, parallel. Dorsal eyes.

much further from one another than from the lateral borders.

Clypeus having scarcely a quarter the diameter of the midde eyes.

Falces (2) very short, almost square and vertical.

Sternum oblong oval, narrowing in front and behind, of the same width

in the middle as the intermediate thighs. Thighs I separated by the

width of the labium at the base, much thicker than the others;

thighs If thicker than III; III and IV almost equal.

'Simon’s description reads “ first, third and fourth;” doubtless an error.

Genera of the Family Attide. 291

Patella and tibia I shorter than the cephalothorax, tibia scarcely longer

than patella and as thick; tibia and patella IV a little longer than tibia and

patella III; tarsus and metatarsus IV almost as long as patella and

tibia; tibia IV at least a third longer than patella, cylindrical, neither attenu-

ated or enlarged at the extremity. Spines short and serial on the tibiae

and metatarsi I and II; slender on pairs III and IV; metatarsi III and IV

with a whorl of terminal spines; and with two or three small spines to-

ward the middle; spinnerets very long, particularly the superior ones, cyl-

indrical.

This new genus resembles Marpissa, and still more Hyctia, differing from ~

them in having the anterior thighs separated at the base by the width of

the labium. It is closely related to the genus Icius E. S, but is distin-

guished from it by the quadrangle of the eyes being as long as wide and

parallel, while in Icius it is plainly wider than long, and a little wider be-

hind than in front, by the anterior me lian eyes being yet more large and

prominent, and finally by the presence of several spines (one underneath

and two internal lateral) on the posterior metatarsi, besides th2 terminal

circle. It presents also a certain resemblance to the genus Thya, having

the same kind of coloring, the scaly hairs, and the tufts of hairs in the

form of horns on the cephalothorax, but it is far removed from it by the

form of the cephalothorax and the proportions of the articulations of the

two pairs of posterior legs.

MARPTUSA (THORELL), 1877. Simon.

Syn.: 1837. Dendryphantes C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 31

(ad partem).

1846. Marpissa Ip., Die Arachn., XIII, p. 56 (ad partem).

1869. Marpissus Sim., Monogr. d. Attid., p. 6 (16), 7 (17) (ad par-

tem).

1870. Marpessa THORELL, on Europ. Spid., I, p. 213 (ad partem).

1876. Marpissa Sim , Arachn. de France, III, p. 238.

1877. Marptusa THORELL, Ragni Malesi e Papuani, I, p. 221 (ad

partem).

1878. as Ip., ibid., II, p. 24 (ad partem).

1878. Marpessa LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 201 (ad par-

tem).

1878. Marpissa Tacz., Aranéides du Pérou, Bull. Soc. Imp. d. Nat.

de Moscou, LIII, 4, p. 217.

1879. Marptu-a L. Kocu, Arachnidea Australiens, p. 1092 (ad par-

tem).

1881. $ THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuani, ITI, p. 432

(ad partem),.

Cephalothorax long; thoracic part a little dilated, at least a third the

longer; cephalic part entirely plane, limited behind bya transverse

depression.

292 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Clypeus about half as wide as the middle eyes.

Eyes of the face rather unequal, forming a straight or scarcely curved line,

a little separated; interval of the lateral wider than that of the mid-

dle, and yet not more than half their diameter. Dorsal eyes as large

or almost as large as the lateral, a little further apart, since the sides

of the head diverge a little behind; quadrangle at least a quarter

wider than long; dorsal eyes much further from each other than

from the lateral borders.

Sternum narrow, txice as long as wide. Anterior coxae almost touching,

their int-rval much less wide than the lip; all the coxae longer than

wide, those of the first pair thicker and a little longer than the

others.

Palpus (4) with the tarsus much enlarged in the form of a palette, and

projecting beyond the bulb on all sides.

Legs of the first, and second pairs equal or almo:t equal; those of the third

and fourth a little shorter, equal 0: almost equal. First pair very

robust; femur dilated and compressed; patella and tibia cylindrical,

equal, or tibia barely longer (M. radiata ¢); these two articulations

always shorter than the cephalothorax; tarsus and metatarsus more

slender and shorter than patella and tibia; tarsusa little shorter than

the metatarsus. Tarsus and metatarsus of the fourth shorter than

the patella and tibia. Continuous inferior rows of tibial and meta-

tarsal spines; tibial spines less numerous and less regular on the pos-

terior pairs; usually the metatarsi of the fourth with only a terminal

circle of spines.

In the Arachniden Australiens (p. 1093) Koch has used this genus in a

different sense from bota Simon and Thorell, The two latter define the

clypeus as about half the middle eves of the first row. Dr. Koch on the

contrary extends the definition t» include species where the middle eyes

are equal to the clypeus or even overhanging the falces. Judging from

the excellent figures which Koch gives, the spiders included in this genus

form a very heterogenous group.

MENEMERUS Simon, 1869.

Syn.: 1848. Euophrys C. Kocu, Die Arachn., XIII, p. 200 (ad partem).

1869. Menemerus Sim., Monogr. d. Attid., p. 6 (16), 196 (662).

1870. es THORELL, On Europ. Spid., I, p.214 (ad partem).

1870. Marpessa ID.. ibid., p. 218 (ad partem).

1876. Menemerus Sim., Arachn. de France, III, p. 30.

1877. ss THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesie Papuani, I, p .228

(ad partem).

1878. ge Ip., ibid., IL, p. 237 (ad partem).

1879. es L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1123.

Genera of the Family Attide. 293

1881. Menemerus THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesie Papuani, III, p-

500 (ad partem).

1883. oe L. Kocu and KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens,

p. 1461.

1888. Pc Siw, Arachn., de ’Ocean Atlantique. Ann. Soc.

Ent. de France, 1882, pp. 261, 284, 503.

Cephalothorax elongated; thoracic part a little dilated, at least a third the

longer; cephalic part flat, or very slighily convex, limited by a wide

and shallow transverse depression.

Clypeus scarc-ly half the anterior middle eyes.

Eyes of the face rather unequal, forming a line slightly curved (rarely

straight), a little separated, particularly the lateral eyes. Dorsal

eyes a little smaller (sometimes as large; M. falsificus) than

the Jateral, not further apart, since the sides of the head are straight;

quadrangle a quarter or a fifth only (M. semilimbatus) wider than

long; dorsal eyes as far from one another as from ‘the lateral borders

(M. semilimbatus) or further from one another.

Sternum almost twice as long as wide; attenuated in front. Anterior

thighs separated by the width of the lip at the base; all the thighs

longer than wide; those of the first pair the longest.

Legs( 4) 1, 4, 2,3, or4, 1, 2, 3;( 2) 4, 1, 2,3. Lezs of the first pair thickest; femur

compressed; patella and tibia cylindrical, the latter longer (except M.

falsificus); tarsus and metatarsus more slender and much shorter

than the patelJa and tibia; tarsus shorter than the metatarsus.

Tarsus and metatarsus of the fourth shorter than patella and tibia;

patella and tibia of the fourth much longer than patella and tibia of

the third: tibia of the fourth cyliadrical and parallel. Tibial and

metatarsal rows of inferior spines on the four pairs.

Palpus short; femur very much dilated, almost as wide as long; convex

above; patella and tibia short and almost equal; tarsus rather small,

very convex.

Abdomen oval, a little flattened.

This seems to differ from Attus only in tke slightly lesser width in pro-

portion to th2lenzth of the quadrangle of the eyes.

DENDRYPHANTHS (C. Kocs), 1837. Sion.

Syn: 1837. Dendryphantes C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., I, p. 31

(ad partem).

1850. ce Ip., ibid., 5 p. 60 (saltem ad partem).

1869. Attus Stu., Monogr. d. Attid., p. 6 (16), 14 (24) (ad partem).

1870. Dendryphantes THORELL On Europ. Spid., I, p. 214.

1870. Marpessa Ib., ibid., p. 213 (ad partem).

1871. Attus Smo., Révis. d. Attid. (ad partem).

294 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

1876. Dendryphantes Sim, Arachn. de France, ITI, p. 35.

1878. fs LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 303 (ad

partem). 2

1878. ee Tacz., Aranéides du Pérou in Bull. Soc. Imp.

d. Nat. de Moscou LIII, 4, p. 309.

1880. ce KarscH, Arachnol Blattter VIII, Zur

Keuntniss der Attiden, im

Zeitsch. f.d. gessamt. Natur-

wissensch., LIII, p. 397.

1883, ee Sim., Arachnides de Tl Ocean Atlantique,

Ann. Soc. Ent. de France, 1882, p. 260

‘Cephalothorax moderately high; thoracic pirt plainly dilated, at least a

third the larger; cephalic part level, often a little limited by a trans-

verse depression.

Clypeus less than half as wide as the large middle eyes.

Eyes of the face rather unequal, in a line considerably curved; the middle

eyes not touching; the lateral separated by an interval often

cqual to half their diameter. The dorsal eyes almost as large as the

lateral, a little further apart, since the sides of the head diverge

i behind. Quadrangle a third wider than long. Dorsal eyes further

from one another than from the late: al border:.

Sternum elongated, rather narrow. Anterior coxae separated by the

width of thelip, and much thicker than the otbers; coxae of the

fourth pair a little longer than the intermediate pairs.

Falees robust and vertical in both sexes.

Palpus (é) rather slender; patella longer than tibia; tarsus narrow, oval,

truncated at the extremity.

Legs (4) 1, 2. 4, 8, or 4, 1, 2, 3; (2) 4, 1, 2, 3, or rarely 4, 1, 3, 2; the first and

(som times) second pairs more robust with compressed femora.

Tibia and patella of the first shorter than the cephalothorax; ( 4 ) tibia

longer; (9) tibia and patella equal. Tibia and patella of the third

much shorter than tibia and patella of fourth. Tarsus and meta-

tarsus of the fourth plainly shorter than tibia and patella. Tivia of

the fourth cylindrical and parallel; metatarsus of the fourth with

only a circle of spines at the extremity.

PSECAS C. Kocu, 1850.

Psecas C. Kocu, Uebers. d Arachn. Syst., 5, p. 49.

Eyes like the genus Marpissa.

Falces rather long, cylindrical, vertical.

Palpus in the male rather short, the tarsus glossy, the bulb pointed at

the extremity.

Head and thorax nearest in form to the genus Marpissa. The face in

front is as low, and is scarcely higher than the middle eyes cf the first

Genera of the Family Attide. 29

row. The falces are somewhat longer and in the only example that I have

seen somewhat hidden under the palpus, so that the form is only imper-

fectly to be seen. The legs differ essentially from all the genera of the

Salticidae, in that the tarsal joint is very short in proportion to the meta-

tarsal. The legs are somewhat robust, the first and fourth pairs the longest

and about equal in length, the second and third pairs growing somewhat

shorter by degrees. The middle spinnerets are long, decidedly longer than

usual, the others only half as long; in this the genus unites with Cocalus,

to which altogether, it bears sorse likeness.

BCTHUS THORELL, 1878.

Syn.: 1878. Bothus THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani, II, p. 220.

1881. oa LD DIG hl paaole

Cephalothorax short, high, sloping steeply in front, the cephalic part not

narrower anteriorly.

Clypeus about + as high as the middle eyes.

Sternun much wider than the coxae.

Eyes: quadrangle large, occupying more than 2 (not indeed half) of the

length of the cephalothorax, a little wider than long, wideri. front

than behind, where it is only a little narrower than the cephalotho-

rax at that place. The anterior row of eyes, which is pliinly visible

when the cephalo horax is looked at from above, is only slightly

curved upward; the middle anterior eyes are large, very prominent

and sub-touching. the lateral much smaller, and a little larger than

the posterior eye-, which are placed more than their own diameter

higher than the lateral eyes, and are a little further from the lateral

borders than from each other. Eyes of the second row rather large,

placed almost in the middle between th2 posterior and the lateral

eyes, and as high as the latter.

Falces as usual, sub-vertical.

Mazillae long and narrow, more than twice as long a3 tke lip. Lip almost

equally long and wide, widely truncated at extremity.

Legs moderately long, rather slender, 4, 1, 2,3. First pair a little more ro-

bust than the others, tibiae and metatarsi with a few spines under-

neath, which are long and adpresse!; tibia but little longer than

metatarsus. Tibia with patella of fourth, longer than tibia with

patella of third. Posterior metatarsi with spines throughout their

length. The two tarsal claws moderate, not curved, slightly con-

vex on the back, pectinated with many short teeth. Scopula dilated

a little at the apex.

Abdomen long, a little flattened.

Spinnerets the superior, rather long, with two joints, which are conical,

and at least as long as wide, the inferior ones sub-conical thicker

and shorter than the superior.

Type: B. spinimanus,

296 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

In the general form of the body this genus stands about half-way be-

tween Attus (Walck) Thorell and Euophrys (C. Koch) Thorell, being dis-

tinguished from the former by its low clypeus, and from the latter by the

posterior eyes being a little further from the margin of the cephalothorax

than from each other; and agreeing in the form of the abdomen more

with Marptusa Thorell ; the form and armature of the first pair of legs,

however, separates it widely from these genera; in this respect it is more

like Synemosyna and Diolenius.

PLEXIPPUS (C. Koow), 1843. K&YSERLING.

Syn: 1846. Plexippus C. Kocu, Die Arachn., XIII, p. 93.

1877. at THORELL, S udi Ragni Malesi e Papuani, I, p. 262.

1878. ee Ip., ibid., II, p. 240.

1880. ee KaARSCH, Arachnol. Blatter, VIII, Zur Kenntniss

der Attiden, 7m Zeitsch. f. d. Naturwissensch.

LITT, p. 398.

1881. ss THORELL, Studi Ragni Mal-si e Papuwani, III,

p. 526.

1883. L. KocH and KEYSERLING, Arachniden Austra-

liens, p. 1425.

Cephalothorax moderately high, descending steeply to the posterior border,

slightly convex over the back, a fourth or a fifth longer than wide,

gently rounded on the sides, and only a little wider at the third row

of eyes. i

Hyes of the face in a moderately bent row, the lateral half as large as the

middle eyes and only slightly separated from them. The eyes of

the third row smaller than the lateral eyes of the first row. The

small n.edian eyes nearer the anterior than the posterior lateral eyes.

1The quadrangle longer than wide, snd a little wider behind than in

front, not reaching the middle of the cephalothorax. The eyes of

the third row further from each other than from the lateral borders.

Sternum somewhat wider than the coxae of the second pair.

Falces rather long, stout, vertical, locked together, almost cylindrical,

rough with transverse wrinkles, and having a dull lustre; the fang

rather short and bent.

Lip not longer than wide.

Palpus rather long, somewhat slender ; ( ¢ ) the tarsus scarcely longer than

the metatarsus, but little swollen, with the extremity directed down-

ward, and with a moderately large bulb.

1Tn all the species described by Keyserling under this genus the quad-

rangle is wider than long.

Genera of the Family Attide. 297

Legs: patella and tibia of the third shorter than those joints in the fourth

pair ; metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth somewhat shorter, or

more often as long as patella and tibia of the fv-urth. Spines on all

the legs, those on the metatarsi of the fourth throughout their

length.

In this genus the relative length of the legs is very variable. In the

species described by Thorell (Studi Ragni, III, pp. 526-642) we find the

folovgnestormulcs: 4 1,3), 4, 2343, 4y tyes Bile 4s 2is 1, 3,2, 4ea149 12)

1, 2, 3,4; 9 3,4,1,2; 1,4, 3,2; 1,4,3,2. Thesame is true of the height

of the clyp-us. In these species the height varies from less than } to 4,

to 4and in one spider almost equals the diameter of the large middle

eyes.

*ZENODORUS N.

Syn.: 1881. Ephippus THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Male.i e Papuani, II{,

p. 643.

1883. oc KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1422.

Cephalothorax high, on both sides in front, especially in the male, dilated

and inflated.

Clypeus at least half as high as diameter of middle eyes. Quadrangle of eyes.

usually occupying 4 of the length of the cephalothorax, nearly

equally wide in front and behind, about a quarter wider than long,

and narrower than the cephalothorax at that place by three or fcur

times the diameter of the posterior eyes. The line bordering on the

upper edges of the anterior eyes is more or less strongly curved up-

ward ; the lateral anterior eyes separated by less than their diameter

from the large middle eyes, eyes of the second row almost in the

middle b. tween the anterior lateral and the yosterior eyes; poste-

rior eyes further from the lateral borders than from each other.

Sternum rather short, wider than the coxe, not projecting between the

cox of the first pair.

Falces vertical, ordinary.

Mazxille parallel, sub-ovate, at least half longer than the lip.

Legs: third pair lonyer than the others (-xcept in some males which have

the first leg longer than the others), much longer than the fourth

pair; patella with the tibia of the third longer than patella with the

tibia of the fourth. (In the males the first pair of legs is enlarged,

and densely haired, at least underneath.)

Abdomen sub-ovate.

' Zenodorus is substituted for Ephippus, the latter name being preoc-

cupied.

298 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Spinnerets ordinary: the second joint of the superior, wider than long,

and obtuse. .

Type: Z. A Urvillei (Walck.).

EKURYATTUS THORELL. 1881.

Euryattus THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani III, p. 660.

‘Cephalothorax short, dilated anteriorly, not high.

Clypeus very low,not + of the diameter of the middle eyes.

Eyes small; quadrangle very short, about twice as wide as long, and a

litt'e wider behiud than in front. The anterior row usually curved

upward, the middle eyes wid ly separated, the lateral eyes separated

from the middle eyes by their own diameter; eyes of the second

row a little further from the posterior eyes than from the anterior

lateral eyes; the posterior eyes are placed much higher than the

lateral anterior eyes, and are as far or farther from each other as

from the lateral borders.

Sternum not much wider than the coxae, not projecting between the

coxae of the first pair.

Falces ordinary, sub-vertical.

Masxillae parallel, sub-ovate; lip longer than wide, rather widely trun-

cated at the apex.

Legs those of the first pair longer than the others; the third pair not

much longer than the fourth; tibia with the patella of the third

longer than tibia with patella of the fourth. The tibiae have spines

above; the posterior metatarsi have spines throughout their length.

Abdomen sub-ovate.

Spinnerets: ordinary, the second joint of the superior one being the

shortest.

Type: E. porcellus (Thor.).

By the greater space, says Thorell, b2tween the anterior middle and

lateral eyes and by the line which touches the upper borders of the

first row of eyes being straight and by the lownaess of the clypeus this

genus is easily distinguished from Ephippus Thorell.

PHIDIPPUS C. Kocu. 1846.

Syn.: 1846, Phidippus C. Kocu, Die Arachn., 13, p. 125.

1850. ss Ip., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 53.

1864. Crytonota (sub.-gen. Phidippus) Smm., H. N. d. Araigneées,

p. 3824 (ad partem).

1877. Phidippus THORELL, On Ara-eae of Colorado, Bull. U. S.

1878. es Tacz., Les Aranéides de Pérou, Bull. de. la. So-

ciété Impériale des Naturalistes de Moscou,

LIII, 4, p. 338.

Genera of the Family Attide. 299

Eyes: The first row rather strongly bent, the two middle eyes moderately

large, somewhat smaller than is usual, near together, the outer ones

in diameter scarcely half as large, placed somewhat away from the

middle eyes. The eyes of the third row nearly as large as the outer

eyes of the first row, on little hills; the eyes of the second row very

small, near to the outer eyes of the first row.

Mandibles stout, standing away from each other toward the extremity,

wrinkled transversely, somewhat shining; the fang nearly as long

as the upper part of the mandible, strong and bent.

Palpus: That of the female rather long, not stout, entirely of the custo-

mary shape, well covered with long hairs; the male palpus moder-

ately stout, shorter jointed, the tarsus oval, thick, bent, the bulb pro

jecting strongly in front.

The species belonging to this genus are all handsome, the mandibles of all

having more or less metallic reflections. The head is high, the sides

dilated with a short angular plate. The thorax is short and steeply slop

ing, in most examples, when not rubbed one notices upright brushes or

fringes of hair between the upper eyes. The abdomen is rather large in

the female. but in the ma’e narrower than the cephalothorax. The spin-

nerets do not stand far forward. The legs are rather stout, the two first

legs the longest, particularly long in the male; the second and fourth

pairs are about equally long, the fourth being a little the longer; the third

pair is the shortest.

PHILAUS THORELL 1870. SIMON.

Syn.: 1837. Dendryphantes C. Kocu, Uebers.d. Arachu, Syst., 1, p. 31 (ad

partem).

1837. Calliethera Ip., ibid., p. 80 (ad partem),

1846, Philia Ip, Die Arachn., XIII, p. 54, 56.

1846. Phidippus ID., ibid., p. 125 (ad partem).

1846. Plexippus Ib., ibid., p.93 (ad partem).

1869. Attus Stm., Monogr. d. Attid, p. 6 (16), 14 (24) (ad partem).

1869. Wendryphantes Ip., ibid., p. 168 (634), (ad partem).

1870. Phileus THORELL, on Europ. Spid., I, p. 217 (4).

1870. Attus ID., ibid., p. 218(?).

1876. Phileus Sim., Arachn de France, III, p. 45.

1877. : KEYSERLING, Spinnen aus Uruguay. Vienna, 1877

78. p.6lir.

1878. ie LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 305.

1879. ss L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1080.

1880. cf K.arscH, Arachnol. Blatter VIII, Zur Kenntniss der

attitden, in Zeitsch, f. d. Naturwissensch, LIII,

p.397.

300 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Cephalothorax very high; thoracic part dilated, at least a third the longer;

cephalic part plane or slightly convex, inclined, limited by a very

weak transverse stria.

Clypeus less than half as wide as the middle eyes.

Hyes of the face rather unequal, in a moderately curved line; the middle

not touching; the lateral separated by an interval equal to half their

diameter. Dorsal eyes almost as large as the lateral, scarcely further.

apart. Quadrangle at least a third wider than long. Dorsal eyes

equally distant from each other and from the lateral borders,

Sternum long, rather narrow. Anterior coxae separated by the width of

the lip, thicker than the others.

Falces robust, longer and often a little oblique in the males.

Palpus (2) very slender; patella and tibia equal or the latter the longer |

tarsus oval, narrow. obtusely truncated at the extremity.

Legs. (¢é)1,2,4,3,(9)4,1, 3,2. Anterior pairs more robust. Tibia and

patella of the first male almost as long, female shorter than the ceph-

alothorax; male tibia longer, female tibia and patella equal; tarsus and

metatarsus more slender and shor er than the tibia and patella. Tibia.

and patella of the third much shorter than tibia and paiella of the

fourth; tarsus and metatarsus of the fourth plainly shorter than pa-

tella and tibia (sometimes of the same length in the males). Meta-

tarsus of the fourth armed wit. spines to the base. Tibia of the

fourth cylindrical and parallel.

SIMA TEA THoREEL. WSssi!

Simaetha THORELL, Studi Sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani III, p. 520.

Cephalothorax short, high, the dorsum strongly convex longitudinally,

above, toward the middle dilated and very wide, in front moderately

wide, posteriorly very perceptibly narrower.

Clypeus low.

Eyes : area occupying about 2 of the length of the cephslothorax; the

quadrangle very wide, much wider than long, wider behind than in

front; ante ior row of eyes curved upward; middle eyes not touch-

ing, separated from the lateral eyes by an interval at least equal to

their diameter; eyes of the second row further from the posterior

eyes than from the anterior lateral eyes; posterior eyes not further

from the lateral borders than from each other. ;

Sternum scarcely or not wider than the coxae of the first pair; these coxae

separated by less than the width of the lip.

Legs (é)1, 4, 2, 3; rather robust, without many spines; legs of the first

pair more robust than the others, femora compressed anteriorly and

and strongly bent above; tibia with patella of the fourth leg longer

than tibia with patella of the third.

Abdomen short.

Genera of the Family Attide. 301

Spinnerets as usual, superior longer and more slender than the inferior;

with two joints, which are sub-cylindrical, about as long as wide.

Type: S. thoracica.

This genus, says Thorell, agrees with Philaeus in the distance between

the middle and lateral eyes of the first row, but differs from it especially

in the form of the cephalothorax; in the latter respect it approaches Bellus

(C. L. Koch) and Homalattus (White), but differs from them since the

quadrangle of the eyes only occupies 2, not 4, the length of the cepha-

lothorax.

‘THYENE SIMON, 1885.

Syn.: 1850. Plexippus C. Kocu, Uebersd Arachn.-Syst. 5, p. 51 (ad partem.)

1869. Attus Sia, Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d. Attides,

‘p. 14, (24) (ad partem).

187i 2.) Ips Revis'd. Attid.

1876. Thya Ip, Arachn. d. France, IU, p. 51.

Cephalothraax but slightly elevated; thoracic p rt ve y strongly dilated

3 and rounded, at least a third the longer; cephalic part plane and in-

clined, not limited behind; a very short and fine longitudinal stria

between the dorsal eyes,

Hyes of the face very unequal, forming a line slightly curved; the median

eyes not touching; the lateral eyes separated by an interval almost

as wide as their diameter. Dorsal eyes scarcely :maller than the

lateral, much further apart, since. the sides of the head diverge be-

hind; these eyes p ojecting widely above; quadrangl-> at least a

third wider than long; dorsal eyes further from one another than

from th3lateral borders. Clypeusabout half the diameter of the mid-

dle eyes.

Sternum elongated, contracted in front; anterior thighs separated by the

width of the lip; the two anterior pairs (particularly the first), the

thickest; the fourth a lit:le longer than the third.

Legs (4) 1, 3, 4, 2; (2) 4, 3, 1, 2; first pair the most robust; femur com-

pressed and claviform; tibia and patella very thick and cylindrical,

male as long, female shorter than the cephalothor:x, male tibia a lit-

tle longer, female tibia and patella equal. Tibia and patella of the third

at least as long as patella and tibia of the fourth (only by the greater

length of the patella). Tarsus arid metatarsus of the fourth a little

shorter than the tibia and patella. Tibia of the fourth cylindrical

and parallel. Short, robust, conical tibial and metatarsal spines

on the two first yairs, forming inferior rows; spines equally short,

more slender, and not serial on the posterior parts; meta‘arsus of

the fourth provid-d with spines throughout the length.

'Thyene is substituted for Thya, the latter name being preoccupied.

302 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Falces robust, short, conical and vertical in both sexes.

Palpus rather slender; tibia and patella almost equal; tarsus oval; narrow.

AMYCUS C. Kocu. 1846.

Syn.: 1846. Amyeus C, Kocu, Die Arach»., 13, p. 182.

1878. ee Tacz, Araneides du Pérou, Bull. de la Soc. Imp. des

Nat. de Moscow LIII, 4, p. 345.

1880. ik L. Kocu Arachniden Australiens, p. 1170.

Eyes: the first row is high over the mouth and strongly b-n*, the two mid-

dle eyes large, the side eyes in diameter not half as large. The eyes

of the third row just as large as the side eyes of th fir-t; those of

the second row very small, half way between these two.

Mandibles very long, nearly equally thick, somewlat curved on the inner

corn r of the extremity, toothed, the fang rather large.

Palpus: -hat of the maleslender, the second joint bent, the third cylindrical,

plainly longer th.n the fourth, the tarsus long in front, swcllen, the

bulb covered fr. m above.

Cephalothorax short and very high, falling steeply from the cephalic plate,

rather flat, with distinct elevations at the eyes; also the face is very

high, but not equally high in the different species, and the first row

of eyes high above the mouth. The abdomen is somewhat longer

than the cephalothorax, narrow, oblong oval, and equally with

the cephalothorax, (the letter, however, only partially) covered

thickly with scaly hairs. The spinnerets a e slender and rather

long, the legs also are 1 ng; of these the third pair is the longest,

then follows the first, then the seco:d and after this the fourth.

One of the species described by C. Koch and all the Australian species

described by L. Koch und r this genus have the eyes of the second row

nearer the anterior than the posterior side eyes and the legs 1, 3, 2, 4, not

3, 1, 2,4. See note by Dr. Koch, p. 1170 of the Arachniden Australiens.

The species pl ced in this geaus by Dr. L. Koch seem to us (judging by his

plates) to belong to at least two ‘f not three different genera.

ASARACUS C. Kocu. 1846.

Asaracus C. Kocu, Die Arachn., XIII, p. 188.

Hyes form and position as in Phidippus.

Palpus of the male slender, rather long, the second joint long gently,

slightly bent, the third and fourth short, not longer than thick, the

tarsus moderately long. humped at the proximal end, somewhat

raised in knots, in the middle on the back somewhat contracted, the

bulb covered from above.

Genera of the Family Attide. 303

Falces very stout, very iridescent, large, strong, convex in front, the sides.

somewhat widened into a corner, standing away from each other at

the extremit'es, with a long, strong fang.

This genus has a likeness to the genus Amycus; but the palpus, and par-

ticularly the falces are differently shaped; a!so the third pair of legs is not

so long as the last pair. The first pair was broken, in the only example

that up to this time has come under my observation. Head, thorax, and

abdomen agree with those of the above mentioned genus,

LIGONIPES Karscu. 1878

Ligonipes Karscu, Diagn. Attoid. aliquot nov. Novae Holl., cet., in Mittheil.

d. Miinchener Entom. Ver., 1878, p. 26.

Cephalothorax more than twice as long as wide, not high, Jevel.

Eyes of the third row not far in front of the middle of the ceph :lothorax,

Legs of the first pair remarkable; femora, patellae, and ti'iae very much

dilated, compressed, the tibiae having stiff short hairs on the inner

side, their form being that of a hoe. Second, third and fourth

pairs more slender.

Abdomen narrow.

LIGURINUS Karscu. 1878.

Ligurinus Karscu, Diagn. Attoid. aliquot nov. Novae Holl., cet., in Mittheil

d. Muinchener Entom. Ver., 1878. p. 27.

The genus Ligurinus is much like genus Hyllus C. Koch, and yet is.

easily distinguished from it; the forehead isa little higher than the anterior

eyes, and is so widely ornamented with dense oblique hairs that if the

cephalothorax is looke at from above the eyes are entirely hidden.!

LYCIDAS Karscu. 1878.

Lycidas Karscu, Diagn. Attvid. aliquot nov. Novae Holl., cet., in Mittheil.

d. Miinchener Entom. Ver., 1878, p. 25.

Cephalothorax high, gradually descending in three parts, cephalic part

level. Posterior part sloping obliquely, rounded on the sides.

Eyes: quadrangle wider than long; eyes of the first row touching, the lat-

eral being about a quarter smaller than the middle eyes, but a little

larger than the eyes of the third row; eyes of the second row the

smallest of all.

Clypeus: middle eyes of the first row distant from the margin of the clypeus

by a space which nearly equals their diameter.

Legs: anterior legs short, robust; posterior legs more slender, those of the

tnird pair longest.

Abdomen looked at from above, almost triangular, pointed behind.

‘The presence of dense hairs ornamenting the forehead, would seem to

be so completely adaptive a characteristic as scarcely to be a sufticien t

basis upon which to found a genus,

304 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

MARATUS KarscuH. 1878.

Maratus Karscu, Diag. Attoid. aliquot nov. Novae Holl., cet., in Mittheil.

d. Miinchener Entom. Ver., 1878, p. 27.

Cephalothorax not long, high.

Eyes: those of the third row, a little in front of the middle of the cephalo-

thorax. Eyes of the second row half way between the posterior

and the anterior lateral eyes. Quadrangle of the eyes a little wider

in front than behind.

Legs slender.

Abdomen flat, with parallel sides, quadrangular, longer than wide.

Body hairy.

MOPSUS Karscu, 1878.

Syn: 1878. Mopsus Karscu, Diagn. Attoid. aliquot nov, Novae Holl., cet. i,

Mittheil d. Miinchener Entom. Ver, 1878.

oe ills ;

1881. Ss THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Mal. e Pap., III, p. 462.

Mopsus is very like the genus Ascyltus in appearance, but the clypeus is

not dilated on the sides, is higher and not so wide, grows a little narrower

above, and is covered above on the anterior cephalic margin and on the

sides, with long, slender hairs.

Cephalothorax: Cephalic part higher and shorter thanin Ascyltus. Thorax

sloping obliquely behind the dorsal eyes.

Eyes: Those of the first row curved backward, touching, placed below

the frons. Those of thesecond row placed further from the lateral

eyes and a little within the quadrangle.

Falces nearly perpendicular to the face.

The species placed by Koch & Keyserling (Archinden Australiens, p.

330) in this g-nus were subsequently made the basis of the genus Sanda-

lodes, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1476.

ASCYLTUS KarscuH. 1878.

Syn: 1878. Aseyltus Karscu, Diagn. Attoid. aliquot nov. Holl.. cet. in

Mittheil. d. Mitnchener Entom. Vor.,

1878, p. 29.

1881. es L. KocH and KEYSERLING, Arachniden Aus-

traliens, p. 1319.

Cephalothorax not high, rounded, wider in front, narrow behind, cephalic

part not inclined.

Clypeus transversely vertical on the sides, somewhat extended, forming an

acute angle, dilated, the extreme edge of the dilatation ornamented

with some long hairs.

Genera of the Family Attide. 305

Eyes of the first row placed in front of the forehead. Quadrangle wider

than long.

Falces nearly straight; (?) rounded, smaller. (4) longer, a little flattened

bove, sharp on the edges, diverging.

Zegs:! first and second pairs more robust and louger taan the others; third

and fourth pairs more slender, shorter, having spines.

Abdomen narrower than the cephalothorax; elongated.

Spinnerets long.

HYLLUS (C. Kocu). 1846. K#yYSERLING.

Syn; 1846. Hyllus C. Kocu, Die Arachn., xiii, p. 161.

1846. Deineresus WHITE, Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 18, p. 179.

1877. Hyllus THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuani, I, p. 258.

187. Seema [sD ey do) Co Et Ly oY 0)- 2

1878. “« Taoz., Aranéides du Pérou Bull. Soc. Imp. des

Nat. de Moscou, LITI, 4, p. 336.

1882. “ L. KocH and KE&YSERLING, Arachniden Australiens,

p. 1339.

Cephalothorax low and flat, a fifth longer than wide, much wider at the

third row of eyes, rounded behind, convex on the back.

Clypeus one fourth as wide as the large middle eyes

Ey yes of the face in a line a little curved backward, lateral half as large as

the middle eyes and separated from them. Eyes of the second row

fur.her from the dorsal than from the lateral eyes. Quadrangle

wider than long, equally wide in front and behind, placed before

the middle of the cephalothorax. Eyes of the third row further

from each other than from the lateral borders.

Sternum moderately convex, a third longer than wide.

Falces large, long, somewhat curved, diverging; the fang very long, some-

what fine, very pointed; on the inner side, before the bent point, a

little corner.

Mawxillae rounded at the extremity.

Lip more than half as lonz as the maxillae, growing narrower toward the

extremity.

Palpus (2) slender, almost filiform, the second joint the longest and

somewhat bent; the third and fourth equally long, both conical;

the last joint bent; the bulb covered from above.

Legs (4) 1,2,4,3,(9) J, 4,2, 3; the first legs much longer and thicker

than the others, which are nearly equal. Patella with tibia of the

third not lowger than patella with tibia of the fourth; metatarsus

with the tarsus of the fourth shorter than patella with tibia. Meta-

tarsus of the fourth with Sobes throughout its length.

1 Ascyltus pencillatus Karsch, has the legs (¢) 1, 4, 3, 2, (9) 4, uf 3, 2.

L. Koch and Keyserling, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1319.

306 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ICIUS Simon. 1873.

Syn.: 1850. Marpissa C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.—Syst., 5, p. 47 (ad

partem).

1850. Icelus Ib., ibid, p. 55.

1869. Attus Sim., Monogr. d. Attid., p. 14 (24) (ad partem).

1870. Marpessa THORELL, on Europ. Spid., I, p. 213 (ad partem).

187i. Attus So, Révis. d. Attid.

1873. eins Ib.

1876. « Ip., Arachr. de France, III, p. 54.

1877. ‘* KEYSERLING, Spinnen aus Uruguay. Vienna, 1877-78,

p. 621.

1878. ‘* THORELL, Studi Ragni Mal.si e Papuani, II, p. 282 (ad

partem) .

1879. “ L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1127.

1881. “« THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuani, III, p. 461 (ad

partem.)

Cephalothorax rather elongated; thoracic part parallel, or very slightly

enlarged, at least a third the longer; cephalic part piaue, slightly

elevated, often inclined, limited by a transverse depression which is

straight or slightly tent forward.

Clypeus scarcely a quarter as wide as the lar.e middle eyes.

Hyes of the face very unequal, touching, or the lateral ones a little sep-

arated, forming a straight line. Dorsal eyes as large, or almost as

large as the lateral, a little further apart since the sides of the quad-

rangle diverge very slightly behind; quadrangle only a quarter

wider than long; dorsal eyes much further from each other than

from the lateral borders.

Sternum contracted in front, scarcely wider than the intermediate thighs.

Anterior thighs separated by the width of the lip, much thicker than

the others; thighs of the second and third pairs eyual, thos; of the

fourth a little longer.

Fatces (9) short, rather thick, almost square, vertical ; (4) longer, a little

inclined forward, their external border presenting an elevated, lon-

gitudinal ridge.

Palpus (4) slender ; tibia shorter than the patella, provided with a small

superior external apophysis ; tarsus narrow and long.

Legs (4) 1, 4, 8, 2; (4) 4,1, 3, 2; those of the first pair more robust; tibia

and patella at least a quarter shorter than the cephalothorax ; tibia

the longer, and sleoder. Tibia and patellaof the fourth much longer

than the tibia and patella of the third; tarsus and metatarsus, male,

almcst as long, female, sensibly shorter tibiaand patella. Tibia of the

fourth scarcely a quarter longer than the patella, cylindrical, and a

little more slender at the extremity. Spines short, rather robust,

Genera of the Family Attide. 307

and serial on the tibia of the first ; sleader and very far apart on the

second, third and fourth legs ; metatarsiof the third and fourth havy-

ing only terminal spines.

SANDALODES KEvYSERLING. 1883.

Syn.: 1882. Mopsus Keysertine, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1333 (ad

partem).

1882. Acompse ID., Arachniden Australiens, p. 1326 (ad partem).

1883. Sandalodes Ip., fa s p. 1476.

Cephalothorax scarcely a fifth longer than wide, moderately high, rounded

on the sides, considerably wider than the third row of eyes, becom-

ing gradually smaller behind and in front, ascending s*eeply from

the posterior margin to the third row of eyes, the cephalic part slop-

ing forward. The middle line is just behind the third row of eyes ;

the clypeus is one fourth as wide as the anterior middle eyes.

Quadrangle of the eyes wider than long, as wide in front as behind, reach-

ing only to the first thir! of the cephalothorax. The first row mod-

erately bent, and the eyes rather near together. The eyes of the

second row half-way between the posterior and the anterior lateral

eyes. The posterior eyes further from each other than from the

lateral b rders.

Falces vertical, not diverging, and short.

Mazxillae widely separated at their extrem'ti s, only a third longer than

the lip.

Lip longer than wide.

Sternum long and narrow, narrower than the coxae of the secoad pair.

Legs, 1, 4, 3, 2; all set with spines, the first pair thicker than the others,

Patella and tibia of the third shorter than patella and tibia of the

fourth; metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth also shorter than the

patella and tibia of the fourth; metatarsus of the fourth with spines

throughout its length.

Abdomen fully twice as long as wide.

This genus has great similarity to Jcius, and is distinguished from that

genus principally by its narrow sternum.

BAVIA Simon. 1877.

Syn: 1877. Bavia Simon. Amm. Soc. Entomol, de France, (5), vii. pp

60-62. 4

1879. Acompse L. Kocu. Arachniden Australiens, p. 1352.

Cephalothorax not very \long; thoracic ;-art a little longer, not dilated

rounded; cephalic part plane, but slightly elevate], almost a regular

quadrangle; the swellings above the eyes strong.

308 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Eyes of the face very unequal, almost touching, in a straight line. Dor-

sal eyes as large as the lateral, not further apart since the sides of

the head are straight.

Clypeus scarcely a third as wide as the middle eyes.

Sternum scarcely wider than the intermediate thighs. Anterior coxae

separated by the width of the lip, much longer and more robust than

the others.

Falces rather short, a little projecting, not ridged.

Lip twice as long as wide.

Legs (@) 4,1, 2, 3, those of the first pair much more robust; patella and

tibia of the first as long as the cephalothorax, tibia much longer

than patella; patella and tibia of the fourth much longer than pa-

tella ard tibia of the third, much more slencer; tarsus and metatarsus

of the fourth a little shorter than patellaand tibia; patella and tiba of

the third equal; tibia of the fourth much longer than the patella; tro-

chanters of the fourth long and diverging. On the first pair two infer-

ior rows of sbort and robust tibial and metatarsal spines; on the sec-

ond pair a single row of two internal tibial spines coming near together

at the top; on the third pair two rows of lateral spines; the anterior

having a single one, the posterior two; all the patellae, the me!atarsi

of the third and fourth, and the tibia of the fourth completely un-

armed.

This genus is near Maevia and Icius; it is distinguished from them by

the form of the cephalothorax, of which the {cephalic part is relatively

much longer, and by the posterior legs, which lack spines on the tibiae and

metatarsi.

MAEVIA (C. Kocw) 1848. Simon.

Syn.: 1848. Maevia C. Kocu, Die Archn., XIV, p. 69 (ad partem).

1876. * Sim., Archn. de France, III, p. 60.

1877. “ THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesie Papuani, I, p. 241

(ad partem).

1878. OC Tacz., Aranéides du Pérou, Bull. Soc. Imp. des Nat.

de Moscou, LIII, 4, p. 227.

1880. i Karsou, Arachnol. Blatter VIII, Zur Kenntniss der

Attiden, in Zeitsch. f. d. Naturwissensch., LIII,

p. 398.

1881. is THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuani, III, p. 467

(ad partem).

Cephalothorax elongated, very high; thoracic part enlarged, at least a third

the longer; cephalic part slightly convex, and a little hollowed be-

tween the dorsal eyes.

Clypeus narrow, rarely + as wide as the large middle eyes.

Genera of the Family Attide. 309

Eyes of the face very unequal, forming a straight or almost straight line;

the middle touching, the lateral well separated. Dorsal eyes as

large as the lateral, equally far apart, quadrangle scarcely a quarter

wider than long. Dorsal eyes nearer one another than the lateral

borders.

Sternum almost rounded, wider than the intermediate coxae. Anterior

coxae separated by at least the width of the lip.

Falces (¢) much longer than the face, vertical, parallel, a little diverging

only at the extremity, cylindrical, not ridzed.

Palpus (4) short, resembling that of Heliophanus except the femar which

is unarmed.

Legs 1, 4, 3, 2; the first and second pairs a little more robust; tibia of the

first longer than patella, these two articulations at least as long as

the cephalothorax. Tibia and patella of the fourth much longe!

than tibia and patella of the third; tarsus and metatarsus, male, as

long as patella and tibia. Posterior legs having only very few spines

aterminal circle only on the metatarsus (sometimes however a

pair of median spines on that articulation),

In the species placed by Thorell in this genus (Studi Ragni Malesi e

Papuani, III, pp. 467-492) the legs vary as follows: (¢) 2,1, 4, 3;1, 4 3, 2;

4, 3, 1, 2; 4, 1, 8, 2;(9)4 3, 1,2. The firrt formula, 2, 1, 4,3, makes the

second leg the longest. Simon in his Arachnides de France, III, p. 1, gives

as one of the characteristics of the family Attide, “2d -pair of legs never

the longest.” We fiad the variation in the clypeus of Thorell’s species to

run from scarcely + to about 4 the height of the la~ge middle eyes.

OPISTHONCUS L. Kocu. 1880.

Opisthoneus L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1184.

Cephalothorax longer than wide, high, declining toward the posterior, sides

molerately rounded, cephalic part slightly contracted in front, hay-

ing a smoo h, low protuberance, between the third row of eyes, more

or less prominently adorned.

Olypeus very low.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, behin 1 and in front equally wide, or

behind a little wider. Virst row of eyesalmost straight or slightly

curved, middie eyes close to the lower margin of the clypeus,

close to each other, and moderately distant from the lateral.

Second row of eyes smallest, and from the lateral eyes of the first

row less distant than from the eyes of the third row, and placed

either not high r, or only a little higher than these; eyes of the third

row, more widely separated from each other tha2z from the margin

of the cephalothorax.

Sternum long, contracted.

310 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Maszxillae long, contracted at the base, dilated toward the anterior; anterior

margin rounded.

Labiwm more than one half the length of the maxillae, contracted toward

the anterior, apex truncated.

Legs 1, 2, 4, 3 or 1, 4, 2, 3: 2, 3, 40f almost equal length. First pair of legs

more robust than the others, and in the male much longer than in

the female. Patella and tibia of the third pair shorter that these

joints in the fourth pair; the patella with the tibia is longer than the

metatarsus with the tarsus in the fourth pair.

VICIRIA THORELL. 1877.

Viciria THORELL, Studi Sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani, I, p. 238.

Cephalothorax about a third longer than wide, moderately high.

OClypeus at least half as wide as the anterior middle eyes.

Sternum rather short, not twice as long a3 wide, wider than the coxae, not

projecting between coxae of the first pair of legs, which are sepa-

rated by at least the width of the lip.

Eyes: those of the first row plainly visible when the cephalothorax is looked

at from above; this row slightly curved upward. Middle anterior

eyes large, very pro ninent; the lateral eyes are rather small, and

are separated by an interval greater than their owa diameter from

the middle eyes. Quadrangle of the eyes a little wider in front than

behind, not occupying half the length of the cephalothorax, much

narrower behind than is the cephalotiorax at that place. Eyes of

the second row miaute, about in the middle, ora little in front of

the middle, between the anterior lateral and the posterivr eyes. Pos-

terior eyes placed about their own diameter higher than the anterior

lateral eyes, and further from the lateral borders than from each

other.

Falces directed downward and more or less forward.

Mawillae long. diverging a little, and slightly curved outward, about half

longer than the lip; lip nearly half longer than wide, plainly nar-

rowing toward the rounded or suh-truncated extremity.

Palpus slender, in the female neither dilated nor flattened at the extremity.

Legs rather long, slender or moderately stout, first pair, at least in some

cases, more robust than the others; third pair (sometimes excepting

the first), longer than the others; tibia with the patella of the third

longer, or at least not shorter than tibia with patella of the fourth.

Tibiae much longer than patellae. Metatarsi of the fourth spined

throughout their length.

Abdomen long and slender.

Spinnerets six, long and cylindrical.

Type: V. Pave3ii.

Genera of the Family Attide. 311

Viciria differs from Maevia (Koch) Sim. in the tibia and patella of the

third being longer or at least not shorter than the tibia and patella of the

fourth, and in the gr:ater prominence of the larg2 middle eyes, and the

greater space between them and the lateral eyes.

EPIBLEMUM (HEntTz) 1882. THORELL.

Syn.: 1832. Epiblemum HENtTZz, On North America Spiders, p, 108 (ad

partem).

1837. Calliethera C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst. I, p. 30 (ad

partem).

1850. Ip., ibid, 5, p. 45 (ad max. part.).

1864. Cyrtonotasub-gen. Calliethera Sim., H. N.d, Araignees, p. 324,

827 (ad part.).

1808. Calliethera ialigtnee as] Ip., Monogr. d, espéces Europ. de la

fam. d Attides, p. 6 (16) 180 (646

(ad max. part.).

1870. Epiblemum THORELL, on Europ. Spid. I, page 210.

1876. Bs LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 297.

1876. Calliethera Sim., Arach. de France, III, p. 62.

1883. $s $3 i de l’ ocean Atlantique, Aun. Soc,

Ent. de France, 1882, p. 261.

Hyes eight, unequal, in three rows, the first composed of four, the two

middle ones somewhat larger, the second composed of two very

small ones placed nearer the third row, which is composed of two

larger ones.

Falces very long, slender, horizontal, in both sexes, fang nearly as long.

Mazxillae parallel, wide at base, narrow above the insertion of the palpi, cut

obliquely on both sides toward the point.

Lip conical.

Legs 1,4, 2,3 or 1, 4, 3, 2.

Type: K Scenicum (faustum) Cl.

When Hentz, in 1832, formed the genus Epiblemum, he founded it on

Epiblemum faustum: while Koch in 1837 founded the genus Calliethera on

Aranea scenica. E. faustum and A. scenica are undoubtedly identical.

This species is probably a comparatively recent importation f om Europe.

Hentz is wrong insaying that the falces are horizontal in both sexes, They

are vertical in the female of E. faustum.

THIANIA C. Kocw. 1846.

Syn.: 1846. Thiania C. Kocu, Die Arachn., XIII, p. 171.

1877. ss THORELL, Studi Ragni Malesi e Papuani, I, p. 251.

312 - Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Eyes of the first row close over the front edge of the head. Tne two

middle eyes of this row very large, occupying nearly the whole

height of the head. The eyes of tne third row smaller than the

lateral eyes of the first row; the small median eyes placed a little be-

yond the middle, nearer the hind eyes.

Falces of the male somewhat short, rather flat above.

Palpus moderately long and somewhat stout, the two first joints as usual,

the third and fourth very short, oval, the small bulb covered from

above.

The species belonging to this genus resemble those of the genus Callie-

thera, Eyes, falces, and palpus, however, make a plain and constant

division. The scaly covering of the abdomen is hizhly colored, taking the

form of transverse bands.

HASARIUS Simon. 1871.

Syn.: 1846. Plexippus C. Kocu, Die Arachn., XIII. p. 93 (ad partem).

1850. KEuophrys Ip, Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst., 5, p. 60.

1850. eS sub-gen, Maturna ibid., p. 65.

1869. Attus Stmv., Monogr. d. Attid., p. 14 (24).

1869. Plexippus Ib., ibid., p. 177 (648).

1870. Attus THORELL, on Europ. Spid., I, p. 218 (ad partem).

1871. “« Sr., Revis. d. Attid,

1871. Hasarius ID., ibid.

1876. s Ip., Arachn. de France III, p. 77.

1880. sf Karscu, Arachnol. Blatter VIII, zur Kenntniss der

Attiden, in Zeitsch. f. d. Naturwis ensch.

LIII, p. 398.

1881. se L. KocuH and KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens,

p. 1272.

1883. sé Sim., Arachn. de Il’ Ocean Atlantique, Ann. Soc. Ent.

de France, 1882, p. 284.

Cephalothorax rather long, high. Thoracic part sensibly dilated, at least a

third the longer. Cephalic part slightly convex and inclined, limited

by a very faint depression, which is straight or bent forward.

Eyes of the face rather unequal, forming a line very slightly curved; the

middle eyes scarcely separated, the interval of the lateral, wider.

Dorsal eyes a little smaller or as large as the lateral, a very little

further apart, since the sides of the quadrangle diverge a little be-

hind; quadrangle at least a third wider than long; dorsal eyes a

little further from each other than from the lateral borders.

Clypeus usually wider than half the middle eyes, with thick hairs.

Genera of the Family Attide. - 313

Sternum elongated, rather parrow. Anterior thighs separated by the

width of the lip; all the thighs longer than wide, those of the first

pair thicker and sometimes longer than the others, which are almost

equal. ;

Legs usually (¢) 1, 8-4, 2; (9) 3-4, 1, 2; the first and second pairs more

robust, with femoral joints compressed. Tibia and patella of the

first a little shorter than the cephalothorax, these two articulations

equal, or the tibia a little the longer; tarsus and metatarsus shorter,

more slender, almost of the same length. Kemora of the third and

fourth equal; tibia and patella of the third a little longer

than tibia and patella of the fourth or often of the same,

length. Tarsus and metatartus of the fourth of the same length as.

the tibia and patella. Tibia of the fourth parallel, or slightly en-

larged at the extremity. Femoral, tibial, and metatarsal spines on

the four pairs; metatarsus of the fourth with spines throughout its

length.

Falces as long or longer than the face, vertical, often deep set! in both

sexes, never ridged.

Palpus (4) robust and short (except H. Adausoui); tibia shorter than

patella and provided with external apophyses; tarsus longer than

the preceding articulations and wide (except H. Adausoni); bulb

simple, reaching almost the extremity of the tarsus; hook rarely

apparent.

The species described by Messrs. Koch and Keyserling under this genus

have the following variations in the leg formula: female, 1, 2, 3, 4; 1, 2, 3, 4;

fee olay os) 11009) 4: 4, 8, 1,0: AGah 1) 9- male, 1,2, ade 1,13, 2549 135

A, 2. 1,4, 3, 23 1, 43, 2: 174, 3, 2;°4. 3, 1, 25 48) 1, 2; 3, 4,1, 2; 4, 1,3,2 In

the same species the clypeus varies in height from } to 4 the large middle

eyes. It is interesting to note that while in the species described by Key-

serling there s-ems to be a very constant relation b-tween the length of

the whole body and the longest pair of legs, the length of the longest legs

being ouly very little greater or less than the total length, H. chrysostomus,

male, has its total length 7 mm., and its longest leg 11.6 mm. H. vittatus,

male, a fair representative of the ether species, has its total length 4.2 mm.,

and its longest leg 3.8mm. The greater proportional length of the long-

est legs ia H. chrysostomus is correlated with other structural modifica-

tions which seem to separate it from the other species of this genus. The

Same remarks are applicable also to H, lautus.

1 The French word is ‘‘ renfoncée.”

314 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

PELLENES Simon. 1876.

Syn: 1850. Kuophrys: sub. gen. Pales C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst.,

5d, p. 64.

1869 Attus Sim., Monogr. d.espéces Europ. de la fam. d. Attides

p. 14 (24) (ad partem.)

1870 ‘¢ THORELL, On Europ. Spid. 1, p. 218 (ad partem).

1871. “ Sm., Revis d. Attid.

1876. Pellenes Sim, Arcahn. de France, III, p. 90.

Cephalothorax rather long, high; thoracic part distinctly dilated, at least

a third the longer; cephalic part sightly convex; inclined, limited

by a depression which is bent forward.

Hyes of ihe face rather unequal, forming a line which is straight or

slightly curved forward; the middle eyes but little separated; the

interval of the lateral eyes wider. Dorsal eyes a little smaller than

the lateral and further apart, since the sides of the quadrangle

diverge behind. Quacrangle about a third wider than long. Dorsal

eyes further from one another than from the lateral borders.

Clypeus at least half as wide as the middle eyes.

Stermum long; anterior thighs separated by the width of the lip and

thicker than the o:hers; the lateral almost equal, longer than wide.

Legs (2) 1, 3, 4, 2; (2) 3,1, 4. 2; firet legs much the most robust, with com-

pressed femora; tibia and patella of the first shorter than the ceph-

alothorax; male, these two articulations equal; female, tibia a little the

longer, tarsus and metarsus more slender and shorter than the two

preceding articulations. almost equal. Femur, patella, and tibia of

the third much longer and a little thicker than the femur, patella

and tibia of the fourth; tarsus and metarsus of the fourth generally

a little shorter than the patella and tibia of the third strongly en-

larged, from the b.se of the extremity tibia; tibia of the fourth almost

parallel or a little enlarged. Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines

on the four pairs, very short, and serial on the tibiae and metatarsi

of the first and second; metatarsus of the fourth, with spines to

the base.

Falces as long, or a little shorter than the face. Vertical or inclined back-

ward in both sexes.

Palpus (é) robust and short; tarsus oval, wider and at least as long as the

two preceding; bulb generally simple. reaching almost tbe end of

the tarsus; tibia shorter than the patella, provided with a superior

external apophysis, directed forward, usually received into a little

depression of the tarsal border and hidden from above.

Genera of the Family Attide. 315

ERGANE KEYSERLING. 41881.

Ergane KEYSERLING, Arachniden Austrolians, p. 1260.

Cephalothorax longer thn wice, a little wider in the middle than in

front, behind rounded, above high and convex, sloping in front.

Clypens less than half the diameter of the large eyes.

Quadrangle ofeyes wider than long, placed b-fore the middle of the cephal-

otherax, as wide iu fronts behind. Dorsal eyes from one another

and from the margin of the cephalothorax almost equally distant.

Small median eyes half way between the dorsa! eyes and the lateral

eyes of the first row. First row of eyes curved. :

Sterum oblong. °

Falces short and tcuching.

Mawxillae dilated in front, not twice longer than the lip.

Legs spined. 1-3, 4, 2, 3, 1, 2,4, 1, 4, 3, 2, or 4,3, 1, 2. Legsof the first pair a

little stouter than the others. Patella and tibia of the third longer

than the patella and tibia of the fourth. The fourth pair has the

metatarsus and the tarsus longer than the patella with the tibia.

Abdomen ovate, longer than wide.

Spinnerets, inferior and superior equal’y long.

PHYALE C. Kocw. 1846.

Syn.: 1846. Phyale C. Kocu, Die Arachr., XIII, p. 193.

1878. - Tacz., Aranéides du Pérou, Bull. Soc. Imp. des Nat.

de Moscou, LIII, 4, p. 315.

Eyes of the first row bent, the two middle eyes nearly touching. very large,

close over the front edge of the head, the side eyes of this row in

tkeir diameter not half so large as the middle eyes; the eyes of the

third row somewhat smaller than the outer eves of the first row

and almost forming a square with them; the eyes of the second row

unusually small, half way between the eyes of the third row and

the outer eyes of the first row.

Falces short, stout, swollen, shining, scarcely longer than thick, fang not

long.

Palpus of the female of the customary form, somewhat covered with

short hair; that of the male unknown.

All high colored beautiful little spiders. The head is flat above and

rather long, the cephalothorax usually nearly as long as wide; the sides of

the cephalothorax are gently rounded, and steeply falli g; the head is not

much higher than the middle eyes in front, the clypens being na:row and

somewhat retreating. The abdomen is usually oval, almost always rather

316 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

short, not thicker than cephalothorax. Cephalothorax and abdomen are

closely covere1 with scaly hairs above, these giving the color. The spin-

nerets are very short. The legs are moderately long, the first and second

pairs being the shortest, but the stoutest, usually having the femur

thickened; they are about one and a half times as long as the thorax; the

third pair somewhat exceeds the second in length, and the fourth is plainly

longer than the second; above, the first joints, and in part the tipiae are

covered with brightly colored scaly hairs; the hair of the other joints is.

fine and light, and the spines very fine. '

JOTUS KEYSERLING. 1881.

Jotus KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1248.

Cephalothorax about one-fifth part longer than wide, in fronta little more.

contracted than in the middle, rounded behind, above high and

convex.

Clypeus less than half the diameter of the large eyes.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, equally wide in front and behind and:

not occupying half the length of the cephalothorax. Anterior eyes.

near together, forming a row slightly curved upward. Small me-

dian eyes half way between the dorsal eyes and the lateral eyes

of the first row. Dorsal eyes almost as far from each other as.

from the margin of the cephalothorax.

Sternum slightly convex, ovate, much longer than wide.

Falces short and diverging, in front commonly plane.

Mazxillae rather long, in front dilated and rounded.

Labiwm more than half the length of the maxilla.

Legs moderately long, spined, 4, 3, 1, 2, or 4, 1, 3, 2, or 1,4, 3,2. First pair

alittle stouter than the others. Patella and tibia of the third shorter

than the patella and tibia of the fourth. The fourth pair has the

metatarsus and tarsus not longer than the patella and tibia.

Abdomen longer than wide, rounded in front, behind pointed.

Spinnerets rather long, inferior and superior equally large and long.

HABROCESTUM Simon. 1876.

Syn.: 1869. Attus Sim., Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam d. Attides. p.

14 (24) (ad partem).

1871. ‘“* Ipb,, Revis. d. Attid.

1876. Habrocestum Ip., Arachn. de France, III, p. 131.

1882. iH KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1401.

Genera of the Family Attide. 317

Cephalothorax rather short, very high; thoracic part often convex, but

slightly dilated on the side, only a third the longer. Cephalic part

slightly convex, very much inclined, limited by a faint depression

which is straight or bent forward.

Eyes: these of the face, rather unequal, but little separated, forming

a line straight or slightly curved forward. Dorsal eyes a little

smaller than the latteral, not further apart, little or not at all promi-

nent above; quadrangle scarcely a third wider than long; dorsal

eyes almost equally distant from each other and from the lateral

borders. Olypeus about half as wide as the middle eyes.

Sternum small, long. narrower than the intermediat> thighs. Interval

between the anterior thighs less than the width of the lip at the

base.

Legs 3, 4, 1, 2; the first legs like those of Ai lurops. Femur, patella and

tibia of the third much longer than the same articulations in the

fourth pair. Tibiae of the third and fourth much ealarged from the

base to the extremity and a little compressed. Tarsus and metatar-

sus of the fourth as long as patella and tibia.

Falces weak, scarcely as long as the face, vertical or obliquely directed

backward in both sexes.

Palpus short and robust as in A‘lurops.

HELIOPHANUS (C. Kocu.) 1833. Simon.

Syn.: 1833. Heliophanus C. Koon, in Herr.-Schaeff , Deutschl. Ins., 119,

5 2

1837. a Ip,, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., p. 29.

1864. és [Heliophana] Sim., H. N. d. Araignees, p, 332.

1868. & Sim., Monogr., d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d.

Attides, p. 6 (16), 201 (667).

1868. Callethera [Callietherus] Ip., ibid., p. 6 (16), 180 (646) (ad

partem).

1870. # THORELL, Europ. Spid. I, p. 211.

1876. ss Sim., Arach. de France, III, p. 140.

1878. i LEBERT Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 298.

Cephalothorax high; thoracic part dilated, at least a third the longer. Ce-

pholic part slightly convex, a little inclined, limited by a depression

which is usually wide, straight, or bent backward; thoracic part

presenting indistinct diverging striae.

Clypeus scarcely one fourth! as wide as the large middle eyes, without

hairs.

Eyes of the face very unequal in a straight or slightly curved line; dorsa

eyes a little smaller than the lateral and not further apart.

Quadrangle a third or a quarter wider than long.

318 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Sternum wider than the intermediate coxae, often unequal. Anterior coxae

separated by the width of the lip at the base.

Falces rather robust, vertical, never ridged.

(4) Maxillae wide at the extremity; their superior external angle present-

ing one or two conical projections.

(3) Palpus short; femur, robust, armed below with a simple or bifid

apophysis; patella Jong and a little convex; tibia shorter armed with

external apophyses, siender and slightly developed; tarsus narrow

and elongated, terminating ina point, projecting beyond the bulb.

Legs 4, 1, 2, 3, or 4, 1, 8, 2, slightly unequal. Tibia aud patella of the first

shorter than the cephalothorax; metatarsus more slender than tibia

and patella of the fourth. Patella (a'one) of the third as long and

often a little more :obust than patella of the fourth; tibia of the

fourth almost parallel and cylindrical. Femoral, tibial, and meta-

tarsa] spines on the four pairs; no patellary spines.

CYRBA Simon. 1876.

Syn.: 1869. Attus St., Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d. Attides,

14 (24) (ad part )

1871. « Ip., Révis d. Attid.

1876. Cyrba Ip., Arachn. d. France, III, p. 165.

1883, “« _KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1436.

Cephalothorax but slightly elevated; thoracic part not dilated, a little con-

tracted, about a third the longer; cephalic part plane, inclined,

limited by a very faint transverse depres-ion, cut by a longitudinal

stria.

Eyes: those of the face very unequal, almost touching, forming a straight

line. Dorsal eyes scarcely smaller than the lateral, not prominent;

and not further apart. Quadrangle almost a third wider than long;

dorsal eyes further from each other than from the lateral borders.

clypeus very narrow, with hair.

Sternum oval, wider than the intermediate thighs. Anterior thighs sep-

aparated by at least the width of the lip; thighs of the fourth

longer.

Legs 4, 1, 3, 2; first pair much more robust, particularly the femur and the

tibia. Tibia of the first a little longer than the patella; the two

articulations shorter than the cephalothorax; tarsus and metatarsus

more slender and almost as long as the two preceding articulations.

Tibia and patella of the third much shorter than the tibia and patella

of the fourth. Tibia of the fourth almost parallel; tarsus and meta-

tarsus of the fourth as long or almost as long as tibia and patella.

Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; two patellary

spines on the two posterior pairs.

Genera of the Family Attide. 319

Falces rather weak, vertical, of the same length as the face.

Palpus (4) femur slender; tibia with apophyses; tarsus oval. (9) Tibia.

and patella a little dilated; tarsus pointed.

The species placed by Keyserling in this genus have tlie legs 4, 3, 1, 2, or

4,3, 12.

7 /AALURILLUS Simon. 1885.

Syn.: 1850. Euophrys (Sub-gen. Dia) C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst., 5,

p. 64.

1869. Attus (6ih gr.) Sim, Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d.

Attides, p. 54 (44).

1870. Hlurops THORELL, on European Spiders, I, p. 219.

1871. Attus (6th gr.) Stm., Révis d. Attid.

1876. Elurops Ip., Arachn. de France, III, p. 134.

1876. . LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 3809 (ad

partem).

* Cephalothorax very high; thoracic part strongly dilated, twice as long as.

the cephalic. Cephalic part slightly convex, inclined, limited by a

slight transverse depression, generally straight.

Clypeus as wide or almost as wide as the middle eyes.

Eyes of the face rather unequal, well separated, particularly the lateral,

ina line so much curved that a straight line from the top of the

middle eyes cuts the lateral eyes below the center. Dorsal eyes

smalier than the lateral, further apart. Quadrangle at least a third

(often more) wider than long. Dorsal eyes as near or nearer to one

another as to the lateral borders.

Sternum long, very narrow, particularly in the males. Anterior coxae

separated by about the width of the lip. Coxae of the first, second,

and third pairs equal in length and thickness, and a little longer than

wide; coxae of the fourth a little longer than the others.

Failces not very robust, shorter than the face, inclined backward in both

sexes,

Palpus (¢) short and thic’; femur compressed; patella and tibia short

and almost equa!; tibia always with two small superior external

apophyses; tarsus wider, oval and a little compressed, passing be_

yond the bulb.

' Alurillus is substituted for Zlurops, the latter name being pre-

occupied.

* This is Simon’s definition of the genus lurops Thorell.

320 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Legs 3, 4, 1, 2, or 3,4, 1, 2, rarely 4, 3, 1,2. The two anterior pairs shorter

and more robust; tibia and patella of the first equal and much

shorter than the cephalothorax; tarsus and metatarsus almost equal,

a little (scarcely in the males) shorter than the patella and tibia.

Femur patella and tibia of the third, of the same length or scarcely

longer than the same articulations in the fourth pair. Tibia of the

third (and of the fourth, though less) enlarged from base to ex-

tremity; tarsus and metatarsus of the fourth as long as patella and

tibia. Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; patel-

lary spines on the third and fourth. Metatarsus of the fourth with

spines to the base.

YLLENUS Simon. 1869.

Syi.: 1869. YVilenus Simm., Monogr. d. Attid., 166 (632).

1870. es THORELL, On Europ. Spid., I, p. 219 (ad partem),.

1876. os Sim., Arachn. de France, III, p. 127.

1878. LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 313 (ad

partem).

Cephalothorax rather long; very high; thoracic part strongly dilated,

twice as long as the cephalic. Cephalic part slightly convex, in-

clined, limited by a very slight depression.

Clypeus almost as wide as the middle eyes, with thick hairs.

Hyes of the face quite unequal, well separated, particularly the lateral

forming a line strongly curved, the summit of the middle eyes

being on a level with the center of the lateral eyes,

or very slightly high«r. Dorsal eyes smaller than the lateral,

and further apart, not prominent. Quadrangle at Jeast a third

wider than long; dorsal eyes further from each other than from the

lateral borders.

Sternum short, narrower than the intermediate coxae. Interval between

the anterior coxae not quite so wide as the lip. Anterior coxae

thicker than the others; s:cond, third and fourth coxae equal in

thickness; fourth coxae longest.

Falces weak, shorter than the face, vertical in both sexes.

Palpus short, very robust and massive; patella and tibia well ceveloped

tarsus relatively small, often compressed and raised into a ridge.

Legs 4, 8, 1, 2; first and second pairs shorter and much more robust, par-

ticularly the first; tibia and patella of the first equal, and much

shorter than the cephalotborax: tarsus and metatarsus equal and

much shorter than patella and tibia; femur, patella and tibia of the

third much shorter than the same articulations of the fourth pair.

Tibia of the fourth a good deal enlarged from base to extremity,

and compressed; tarsus and metatarsus of the fourth much shorter

Genera of the Family Attide. 321

than patella and tibia; trochant rs of the fourth ley very long, visi-

ble from above. Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four

pairs; patellary- spines on the third and fourth; metatarsus of the

fourth with spines to base.

Integument entirely covered with thick pubescence.

Nearest A4lurops Thorell, agreeing with that genus in having the upper

part of the frons so prominent that the anterior eyes are hidden from

above; and differing from it in that the tibia of the fourth leg is at least

as long as the metatarsus with the tarsus.

SAITIS Simon. 1876.

Syn.: 1869. Attus (gr. 10) Sim., Monogr. d, espéces europ. de la fam. d. At-

tides, p. 96 (562).

1876. Saitis Sim., Arachn. de France, III, p. 168.

1877. ** THORELL, Studisui Ragni Mal. e Pap. I, p. 225.

1882. Thorellia L. KocH and KEYSERLING, Arachniden Austra-

liens, p. 13852.

1883. Saitis Ip., ibid., p. 1434.

Cephalothorax moderately long, almost parallel; thoracic part a third the

longer, not dilated; cephalic part plane and a little inclined, limited

by a very slight depression.

Clypeus very obliquely inclined, scarcely half as wide as the middle eyes.

Eyes of the face very unequal, scarcely separated, in a’straight line. Dor-

sal eyes very convex, scarcely smaller than the lateral, and a little

nearer together. Quaijrangle a third wider than long; dorsal eyes

further from each other than from the lateral borders.

Sternum moderately wide, contracted in front. Anterior coxae separated

by the width of the lip; fourth coxae a little the longest.

Falces a little shorter than the face, and narrower, not robust, and in-

clined.

Legs (4) 3,4,1,2; the firsttand second pairs almost equal and much shorter

than the others; (2) 4-3,1,2. Tibia and patella of the first a third

shorter than the cephalothorax and almost equal, of the same length

as the tarsus and metatarsus which are equal. (4) Femur, patella,

tibia and metatarsus of the third longerand much more robust than

those of the fourth pair, ornamented with long hairs, which are very

thick and disposed in longitudinal lines; (2?) third and fourth legs

a little more alike. Tibia and patella of the fourth a little longer

than the metatarsus, tibia of the fourth longer than the patella,

parallel and cylindrical. Very long femoral, patellary (? on the

posterior pairs), tibial and metatarsal spines; on the fourth pair met-

atarsal spines throughout the length of the articulation.

322 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ATTUS (Watck.) 1805. Simon.

Syn.: 1805. Attus WALCK., Tabl. d. Aran. p. 22 (ad partem).

1850. Europhrys C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst., 5, p. 60 (ad

partem).

1869. Attus Smv., Monogr. d. espéces europ. dela fam. d. Attides,

p. 6 (16), 14 (24), (ad partem).

1870. “ THORELL, On Europ. Spid., I, p. 218 (ad partem).

1870. Hlurops ID., ibid. p. 219 (ad partem).

1871. Attus Sim, Reévis. d. Attidae (ad partem).

1876. ‘* Ip., Arachn. de France, III, p. 101.

1877. ‘* THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani, I, p. 280

(ad partem),

1878. “* ID.. ibid. II, p. 290 (ad partem).

1878. ** LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 306 (ad partem).

1881. ‘* THORELL, Studi sui Ragni Malesi e Papuani, III, p. 509

(ad partem).

Cephalothorax high; thoracic part a little dilated, a third, or only a quar-

ter (A. saltator) the longer. Cephalic part plane or a little convex,

inclined forward, limited by a slight depression which is straight or

slightly bent.

Clypeus equal to half the large middle eyes, or a little narrower, rarely

wider (A, floricola ¢).

Eyes of the face rather unequal, a little separated, at least the lateral, and

usually in a slightly curved line; dorsal eyes usually a little smaller

than the lateral, as far or a little further apart; quadrangle scarcely

a third wider than long; dorsal eyes equally far or a little further

from each other than from the lateral borders.

Sternum elongated, as narrow as the intermediate coxae (except A. attel-

lanus ¢). ‘

Falces weak, vertical, as long or shorter than the face.

Palpus normal.

Legs 4, 1, 2, 3, rarely 1, 4, 2, 8; remarkable for the pre-eminence of the sec-

ond pair over the third. Tibia and patella of the first as long (A.

Wage, frigidus) or most often shorter than the cephalothorax; (? )

these two articulations equal; (4) tibia longer; tarsus and metatar-

sus more slender (except A. cingulatus) and shorter (often barely)

than the two preceding articulations. Fourth legs much longer

than the third in all their articulations, principally the femur and

the tibia; tibia at least a third longer than the patella, slightly en-

larged from the base to the extremity and.a little compressed; tar-

sus and metatarsus of the fourth much shorter than the patella and

tibia (except some males: A. floricola, etc.). Femoral, tibial and

metatarsal spines on the four pairs and throughout the length of the

articulations.

Syn:

Genera of the Family Attide. 32

PHLEGRA Simon. 1876.

1850. Eunophrys (sub-gen. Parthenia) C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-

Syst. 5, p. 65.

1869. Attus (9th gr.) Sim,, Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d..

Attides, p. 55 (551).

1870. Mlurops THoR., On European Spiders, I, p. 219 (ad partem)..

1871. Attus (10th gr.) Stm.; Réevis d. Attid.

1876. Phlegra Ip., Arachn. de France, III, p. 120.

Cephalothorax very long, parallel in the cephalic part, a little dilated be-

Eyes:

yond; thoracic part at least twice the longer. Cephalic part plane

and inclined not, or barely limite 1 behind.

those of the fase very unequal; the middle eyes almost touhcing;.

the lateral a little separated, forming a line almost straight, or per _

ceptibly curved. Dorsal eyes a little smaller than the lateral eyes,

not, or very slightly further apart. Quadrangle a quarter wider

than long; dorsal eyes a little further from one another than from:

the lateral borders.

Clypeus always more than half as wide as the middle eyes, often fully as.

wide (4), with hairs.

Sternum contracted in front, at least twice as long as wide, as wide or slight-

ly wider than the intermediate thighs. Anterior thighs separated by

the width of the lip; thighs of the first, second and third legs al-

most equal; those of the fourth longer.

Legs 4, 1, 3, 2, or 4, 3,1, 2. Tibia and patella of tha first at least a quarter

shorter than the cephalothorax, these two articulations being equal

in length and thickness, and a little longer than the tarsus and met-

atarsus, the latter being equal and more slender. Femur, tibia and

patella of the fourth much longer than those of the third pair, ex-

actly of thesame length as the tarsus and metatarsus; tibia of the

fourth much longer than the patella, slightly enlarged and com-

pressed at the extremity. Posterior metatarsi armed to the base.

with very long spines.

Falces vertical or obliquely inclined backwards, shorter than the face in.

Syn. :

both sexes.

OEDIPUS MENGE. 1877.

1869. Attus Sim., Monogr. d. Atfid., p. 6 (16) 14 (24) (ad partem).

1876. Ballus Ip., Arachn. de France, III, p. 201 (ad partem).

1877. Oedipus MENGE, Preussische Spinnen, IX, p. 482.

Cephalothorax oblong; higher than wide between the dorsal eyes; the

convex cephalic part inclined forward, the hind part descending

abruptly. The forehead and large middle eyes are so oblique that

from directly above only the upper margin of the eyes is visible,

324 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The clypeus is still more obliqua.

Hyes like those of Dendryphantes.

Legs als» like Dendryphantes except that the femur and tibia of the first

pair are more rebust. Number of claw-teeth small.

_ Palpus (¢) with a sharp apophysis on the inner side of the fourth joint_

The palpal tube makes a single turn and then passes into the sac

like bulb. The point of the hook lies on a small tongue-shaped leaf.

Epigynum (¢?) closely resembling D. rudis; the openings of the sperma-

thecal tubes lie on the inuer half of the chitinous arched enclosure ~

and end, after many turnings, close to the outer half of the orifice.

Spinnerets like those of Dendryphantes.

The species live in moss under fallen leaves and bushes.

SCARTES MENGE. 1877.

Seartes MENGE, Preussische Spinnen, IX, p. 494.

Cephalothorax oblong; the cephalic part with the forehead widely pre-

jecting; higher than wide, rounded on the sides, sloping steeply be-

hind, the margin marked with a slight furrow.

Clypeus strongly retreating.

The Jarge miadie anterior eyes stand forward, the lateral anterior in a

.curve, some what removed from them. The small median eyes and

tthe hind side-eyes stand rather on the side than on the top of the

head.

The palpus(¢)has on the lower edge of the inner side of the second

joint a deep-lying hook shaped apophysis with one small and one

large tooth at the end. The fourth joint has on the inner sidea

short leaf-like apophysis; the fifth joint is long and has a small oval

depression for the palpal organ, and the forepart long and curved

over, the end of the palpal organ has four rounded corners, and is

extended at one corner into a long awl-shaped projection, which

consists of the palpal tube (Hindringer) and the covering which ac-

companies it to the very point. The awl-shaped projection is at one

place narrowed; the palpal-tube passes, after a short winding course,

into the sack-like bu b.

J have found the female only in the immature stage, where the epigynum

shows only two openings for the future spermathecal tubes.

Abdomen oval. The whole body finely haired.

Legs 4, 3, 1, 2, with long slender claws and two pairs of spines on the me-

tatarsi of both first legs. :

Spinnerets with small tubes.

They live under heath plants.

_ Genera of the Family Attide. 32:

ra)

KUOPHRYS (C. Kocw) 1834. Simon.

Syn.: 1834. Euophrys C. Kocu, in Herr.-Schaeff., Deutschl. Ins., 123, (ad

part.:) 7, 8.

1837. a Ip., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 33 (ad partem):

1848. Attus ID., Die Arachn., XIV, (ad part.:) p. 44-49.

1850. “ Ip., Ueb-rs. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 68 (ad: partem).

1869. “Smt, Monogr. d. Attid., p.6 (16), 14 (24) (ad pa: tem).

1870. Euophrys THORELL, on Europ. Spid., I, p. 216, (ad partem)..

1871. Attus Sim., Revis. d. Attid. gr. 15 (ad partem).

1876. Euophrys Ib., Arachn. de France, ITI, p. 170.

1878. us LEBERT, Die Spinnen der Schweiz, p. 302.

1878. a Tacz, Araneides du Perou. Bull. Soc. Imp. des:

Nat. de Moscou, LIII, 4, v. 280.

1883. Le L. KocH and KEYSERLING, Arachniden Austra-:

liens, p. 1480.

1883. ss Sim., Arachuides de Ocean Atlantique, Anm. Soc.

Ent. de France, 1882, p. 261.

Cephalothorax rather high; thoracic part dilated, a third or a quarter

longer than the cephalic which is usually plane, little inclined, lim-

ited by a badly defined impression, cut by a small, very short longi-

tudinal stria; thoracic part often having some diverging striae *

faintly indicated.

Clypeus half the middle eyes, or wider, with, usually, sub-ocular, and lonzer

buccal hairs; the latter are often rooted ina membranous part which

separates the border of the clypeus from the falces.

Eyes of the face very unequal, forming a straight, or rarely, a slightly

eurved line; dorsal eyes of the same size, or a little smaller than the

lateral, not or scarcely projecting, and not further apart, since the

sides of the square are straight; square a quarter wider than long:

dorsal eyes further from one another than from the lateral borders.

Sternum oval, usually wider than the interme jiate coxae. Anterior coxae

separated by at least the width of the lip: coxae of the fourth paix

longest.

Falces weak, vertical or incl ned backward (renfuncees), shorter than the

face.

Legs 4, 3,1, 2 or 4, 1, 3, 2, rarely 1,4, 3,2. First and sometimes seco.d pairs

more robust than the others, particularly in the males, the femora

being compressed and claviform. Patella and tibia of the first almost

always shorter than the cephalothorax and slightly unequal; tarsus

and metatarsus shorter and more slender than the two preveding

articulations. Tibia and patella of the third (together) a little, (often

scarcely) shorter than the tibia and patella of the fourth; tibia of tke

(oF)

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

third much shorter, and a little thicker, than tibia of the fourth;

patella (alone) longer than patella of the fourth; tarsus and meta-

tarsus of the fourth as long or scarcely shorter than patella and

tibia; tibia of the fourth, slightly enlarged at the extremity and a

little compressed. Femoral, tibial, and metatar-al, but no patellary

spines.

ALCMENA C. Kocu. 1816.

Syn.: 1846. Alemena C. Koou, D‘e Arachn., XIII, p. 176.

1880. a Karscu, Arachnol. Blatter VIII, Zur Kenntniss der

Attiden, in Zeitsch. f. d. Natur Wissensch., LIII,

p. 397.

Hyes of the first row asin Euophrys. The eyes of the third row plainly

smaller than the outer eyes of the first row, and further removed

from them, the eyes of the secon} row very small, nearer to the

outer eyes of the first row than to the eyes of the third row.

Falces in the male large, convex, smooth, twice as long as the face; in the

female smaller.

Palpus without distinctive characteristic.

This genus stands very near to the genus Euophrys, but the position of

the eyes and the large falces separate it essentially. Moreover the cephalo-

_ thorax and abdomen are thinner, that is to say narrower and longer, and

. also are covered closely with shining scales, which give the color and

marking. The female palpus has nothing unusual; that of the maie I

know only from young animals with immature bulbs; these are not dif-

ferent from those of Euophrys.

*HYPOBLEMUM. N.

Syn.: 1882. Acmaea KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1420.

1883. Drepanephora Ip., Arachniden Australiens, p. 1477.

Cephalothorax ox1e-third or one-fourth longer than wide, sensibly con-

tracted toward the front, behind rounded, wider at the dorsal eyes,

rather low, slightly convex above.

Clypeus low.

Quadrangle of Eyes, wider than long, in front moderately contracted, not

reaching the middle of the cephalothorax. First row of eyes curved

upward; the lateral are separated by half their own diameter from

the large eyes. Dorsal eyes are further from one another tnan from

the margin of the cephalothorax, small median eyes are half way

between the lateral anterior and the dorsal eyes.

Falces short.

Mawillae dilated and rounded in front.

Hypoblemum is substituted for Drepanephora, the latter name being preoccupied.

Genera of the Family Attide. 327

Labium contracted toward the front, a little longer than wide, scarcely

longer than half the length of the maxilla.

Sternum convex, v=e third longer than wide, toward the posterior dilated.

Legs spined, 3, 4, 2,1. Fourth psir more slender than the others. Patella

and tibia of the third longer than the patella and tibia of the fourth;

metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth not longer than the patella and

the tibia, metatarsi spined throughout their length.

Abdomen sub-ovate, twice as long as wide.

Spinnerets moderately long, superior and inferior of equal length.

SELAOPHORA KEYSERLING. 1882.

Selaophora KEYSERLING, Archniden Australiens, p. 1374.

OCephalothorax not high, about one-third longer than wide, contracted in

front, behind wide and rounded, scarcely wider than the dorsal row

of eyes, convex above.

Clypeus scarcely as high as half the diameter of the large eyes.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, as wide before as behind, situated in

front of the midile of the cephalothorax. Anterior row of eyes

nearly straight, not touching. Small median eyes a little nearer

the dorsal eyes than the lateral anterior. Dorsal eyes further from

each other than from the margin of the cephalothorax.

Falces short and not diverging.

Mazillae twice as long as the labium.

Labium contracted in front and not longer than wide.

Abdomen long.

Legs spined 4, 3, 1, 2. Patella and tibia of the third shorter than patella and

tibia of the fourth. Metatarsus aud tarsus of the fourth not longer

than the patella and tibia.

SOBARA KEYSERLING. 1882.

Sobara KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1365.

Cephalothorax longer than wide, contracted toward the front, rounded

behind, moderately high, cephalic part plane,

Clypeus as high as the diameter of the large eyes.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, wider ‘behind than in front not so

long as the half of the cephalothorax, anterior row of eyes a little

curved upward, middle eyes not touching, lateral eyes separated

from these; small median eyes half way between the anterior lateral

and dorsal eyes; dorsal eyes from each not wider than from the

margin of the cephalothorax.

Faices rather long and slender, not diverging.

Maillae wide at apex, contracted at the base.

328 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Labium contracted in front, longer than half the length of the maxilla

margin in front straight.

Sternum plane, rounded,

Abdomen long and contracted.

Legs spined, 1, 4, 2, 38 or 4, 3,.1, 2. First pair of legs scarcely stouter than

the others. Patella and tibia of the third shorter than the patella

and tibia of the fourth. Metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth not

longer than the patella and tibia.

THEROSA KEYSERLING. 1882.

Therosa KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1413.

Cephalothorax one quarter longer than wide, not contracted in front

rounded behind, a little wider at the dorsal eyes, above convex.

Clypeus very low.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, wider in front than behind, and placed

far in front of the middle of the cephalothorax. Dorsal eyes a little

further from one another than from the marzin of the cephalothorax.

First row of eyes curved, close together; small median eyes half way

between the anterior lateral and the dorsal eyes.

Falces short and not diverging.

Macxillae dilated and rounded in front.

Labium rounded in front and half as lone as the mawyilla.

Sternum twice as long as wide, contracted more in front than behind.

Abdomen long and contracted. Shieh

Legs spioed 4, 3. 1, 2. First pair not'shorter than the others. Patella and _

tibia of the third as long as the patella and tibia of the fourth; meta- _

tarsus and tarsus of the fourth not shorter than the patella and tibia.

MARGAROMMA KEYSERLING. 1882.

Margaromma KEYSERLING,Arachniden Australiens, pp. 1847, 1466.

Cephalothorax one fifth part longer than wide, c »ntracted in front, behind ~

wide and rounded, high above, wider at the dorsal eyes.

Clypeus half the diameter of the large eyes.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, forming a trapezium, contracted

behind. Dorsal eyes almost as far from each other as from the

margin of the cephalothorax. First row of eyes recurved and near

to each other. Small median eyes further from the anterior lateral

than from the dorsal eyes.

Falces short and not diverging.

Mazxillae rather long in front, dilat:d and rounded.

Labium contracted in front, not more than half the length of the maxilla.

Sternum sligtly convex, a little longer than wide.

Genera of the Family Attide. 329

Abdomen short and ovate.

Legs spined, 3, 4,1, 2. First pair not stouter than the others. Patella and

tibia of the third a little longer than the patella with the tibia of the

fourth. Metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth not longer than the

| patella and tibia.

PROSTHECLINA KryYserLinec. 1882.

Prostheclina KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens p. 1368.

Cephalothorax one fi'th longer than wide, contracted in front, a little wider

and rounded behind, equally wide at the dorsal eyes.

Clypeus half the diameter of the large eyes.

Quadrangle of eyes scarcely wider than long, behind a little contracted

and almost reaching the middle of the cephalothorax. Anterior

row of eyes almost straight, eyes close together. Dorsal eyes from

each other scarcely further than from the margin of the cephalo-

tho:ax; sma!] median eyes half way between the anterior lat-ral

and the dorsal eyes.

Falces short, not diverging.

Mavzxiilae dilated and rounded in front.

Labium contracted in front, half as long as the maxilla.

Sternum oval and moderately convex.

Abdomen ovate.

Legs 4, 3,1, 2o0r 1,4,3,2. Patella and tibia of the third as long as the

patella and tivia of the fourth.! Metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth

longer than the patella and tibia.

LAGNUS L. Kocu. 1879.

Lagnus L, Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1073.

Cephalothorax a little longer than wide, high; lateral und posterior, mar-

gins rounded. Cephalic part convex.

Clypeus low.

Quadrangle of eyes in front a little wider than long and wider than behind;

first row of eyes recurved, ch se together, the median very large.

Middle eyes equally distant from the lateral anterior and the pos-

terior eyes. Eyes of the third row placed in front of the middle of

the cephalothorax and less distant from each other than from the

margin of the cephalothorax.

Mazxillae dilated toward the front, lateral margin with the anterior mar-

gin being lengthened to form an angle.

Lip convex, contracted in front, longer than half the length of the max-

illa, lip rounded.

‘Written “third” but evidently a misprint for fourth.

330 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Sternum hardly longer than wide, plane.

Abdomen long, sensibly narrowed toward the posterior.

Palpi (4é) elongated, equal in length to the first pair of legs.

Legs spined 1, 4, 3, 2, first pair stouter than the others. Patella and tibia

of the third shorter than the patella and tibia of the fourth. Meta-

tarsus and tarsus of the fourth evidently longer than the patella and

the tibia.

SCAEA L. Kocu. 1879.

Scaea L. Kocw. Arachniden Australiens, p 1142.

Cephalothorax longer than wide, slightly contracted behind, high and con-

vex, toward the anterior declining, third row of eyes high above the

sides.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, equally wide in front and behind, and

placed in front of the middle of the cephalothorax. Middle row of

eyes as far from the lateral eyes of the first row as from the eyes of

the third row and placed not higher than these; eyes of the third row

further from the margin of the cephalothorax than from each other.

Sternum ovate cvrdate.

Abdomen broadly ovate.

Legs patella with the tibia of the third pair shorter than the same joints

of the fourth pair. The metatarsus with the tarsus of the fourth

pair are shorter than the patella with the tibia.

‘BOOTHS N.

Syn: 1882. Hadrosoma KEYSERLING. Arachniden Australiens, p. 1418.

Cephalothorax short, one-sixth longer than wide, in front not contracted,

behind rounded and a little contracted, scarcely wider at the dorsal

eyes, above convex.

Clypeus more than half the diameter of the large eyes.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, as wide before as behind, almost

reaching the middle of the cephalothorax. Dorsal eyes further from

one another than from the margin of the cephalothcrax. Small me-

dian eyes half way between the anterior lateral and the dorsal eyes.

First row of eyes slightly recurved and the lateral eyes separated

from the middle eyes. /

Falees short and not diverging.

Mazillae dilated and rounded in front.

Labium rounded in front, not longer than wide, half as long as the maxilla.

Sternum ova! and a little convex.

Abdomen level, a little longer than wide.

1 Bootes is substituted for Hadrosoma, the latter name being preoccupied.

Genera of the Family Attide. 331

Legs spined 4, 1, 3, 2. First pair not stouter than the others. Patella and

tibia of the third shorter than the patella and tibia of the fourth.

Metatarsu and tarsus of the fourth not larger than the patella and

tibia.

CYTAMA KEYSERLING. 1882.

Cytwa KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1380.

Cephalothorax one-third or fourth part longer than wide, slightly con-

tracted toward the front, behind rounded, a little wider at the third

row of eyes, above slightly convex, not high.

Clypeus a third of the diameter of the large eyes.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, behind and in front equally wide or

a little narrower behind, placed far in front of the middle of the

cephalothorax. Dorsal eyes further from each other than from the

margin of the cephalothorax. Anterior row of eyes recurved and

more or less close together. Small median eyes half way between

the anterior lateral and dorsal eyes.

Falces short and not diverging.

Mazillae dilated and rounded 1n front.

Labium rounded in front, not more than half as long as the maxilla.

Sternum oval, longer than wide.

Legs spined. 1, 3, 4, 2, or 4, 3, 1, 2; first pair stouter than the others.

Patella and tibia of the third longer thau the patella and tibia of the

fourth; metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth not shorter than the

patella with the tibia. Metatarsus of the fourth spined to the apex.

SINNAMORA KEYSERLING. 1883.

Syn.: 1882. Tanypus ‘ KEYSERLING, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1415.

1883. Sinnamora Ip., Arachniden Australiens, p. 1477.

Cephalothorax about one-fifth longer than wide, toward the posterior mod-

erately dilated, contracted in front, a little wider at the dorsal row

of eyes, above high, slanting before and behind.

Clypeus as high as one-fourth the diameter of the large eye.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, wider in front than behind, almost

reaching the middle of the cephalothorax. First row of eyes re-

curved, close together. Dorsal eyes less distant from one another

than from the margin of the cephalothorax. Small median eyes

half way between the anterior lateral and the dorsal eyes.

Falces short, not diverging.

Mazxillae dilated and rounded in front.

Labium longer than wide, more than half as long as the maxilla.

i Y

'The generic name ‘* Tanypus” was pre-occupied.

332 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Sternum rounded, plane and a little longer than wide.

Abdomen long and contracted.

Legs spined, 4, 1, 3,2. First pair hardly stouter than the others. Patella

and tibia of the third shorter than the patella and tibia of the fourth;

metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth a little longer than the patella

and the tibia. Metatarsus of the fourth commonly spined through--

out its length.

LANUARULLA KEYSERLING. 1883.

Lauharalla KeyseruineG, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1431.

Cephalothorax one-fourth longer than wide, not wider in the middle than

in front, scarcely wider at the third row of eyes, high and convex.

Clypeus very low.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, a little contracted behind, almost

reaching the middle of the cephalothorax. Eyes of the first row

close together, slightly curved or almost straight. Dorsal eyes a

little smaller than the anterior lateral and further from one another

than from the margin of the cephalothorax. “Small median eyes are

nearer the anterior lateral than the dorsal eyes.

Sternum heart-shaped, scarcely longer than wide.

Falces vertical, short, and not diverging.

Mazxillae more than twice as long as the /abium.

Labium wider than long, rounded in front.

Legs 4,1, 3,2. First pair not stouter than the others. Patella and tiba

of the third shorter than the patella and tibia of the fourth. Me-

tatarsus and tarsus of the fourth not longer than the patelia and

tibia. Matatarsi of the fourth pair spined only at the apex.

Abdomen short, as long as wide.

Spinnerets as usual, superior not longer than the inferior.

ASTIA KocnH. 1879.

Astia L. Koch. Arachn. Australiens, p. 1152.

Cephalothorax contracted in front, wider and rounded toward the poste- ©

rior, opposite the third row of eyes wider, one quarter longer than

wide.

Quadrangle of eyes wider than long, forming a trapezium contracted be-

hind. Third row of eyes as far from one another as from the mar-

gin of the cephalothorax. Middle row of eyes nearer the front

lateral than the posterior eyes, and placed perceptibly higher than

these.

Sternum ovate-cordate.

Abdomen ovate, truncated in front, sensibly contracted toward the apex.

Patellu and tibia of third pair shorter than the patella and tibia of the

fourth pair. Metatarsus with the tarsus of the fourth pair shorter

than the patella with the tibia.

Genera of the Family Attide. 333

SUB-FAMILY LYSSOMANAE.

LYSSOMANES HEntTz. 1832.

Syn: 1832, Lyssomanes Hentz. Sillimsn’s Journal of Science and Arts

XXI pp. 99-152.

1844, Eh a Journal Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.. TV pp.

386-396. le

1875. MS ‘as Occasional Papers Boston Soc. Nat.

Hist. I]. The Spiders of the United

States, Edited E. Burgess, p. 48.

Cheliceres moderately strong; maxillae parallel, short, rounded.

Lip conical, slight!y truncated at tip.

Eyes eight, unequal in four rows, the first composed of two very large eyes

the second of two smaller ones, placed farther apart, on a common

elevation with the two forming the third, whichis narrower, the

fourth about as wide, composed of two eyes placed on separate ele-

vations

Feet, first pair largest, then the second, then the third, the fourth being the

shortest.

JELSKIA TaczZANowskIi. 1872.

Syn.: 1872. Jeiskia Tacz, Aran, de la Guyane frangaise, Horae. Soc. Ent.

Rossicae, VIII. 1871, pp. 128-132.

1878 : Ip., Aranéides du Pérou, Bull. de la Soc. Imp. des

Nat. de Moscou, LIII. 4, p. 378.

Cephalothorax long, with the cephalic part distinct from the thoracic, and

higher.

Eyes eight, in four rows; the first pair very large, occupying the entire

height of the face, very near together but not touchiog, directed for-

ward; eyes of the second row half as large, situated above those of

the anterior row, a little further back, and separated from each

other so as to form an almost regular quadrangle with the anterior

eyes; like them directed forward and a little upward: the eyes of

the third row small, situated on the horizontal face of the back, nearer

to one another than the others, and directed upward; those of the

fourth row as large as those of the second, placed behind on the mid-

dle of the back. not quite so far apartas these last, directed obliquely

backward.

334 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Falces cylindrical, slender, short, and vertical, with the hook short and

strongly bent.

Palpus long and slender; the femur as Jong as the tarsus; the patella and

and tibia equal, as slender as the femur, and not so long; the tarsus

long, passing considerably beyond the bulb, which is globular, ter-

minating in a curved hook which is coverrd above by the tarsus.

Legs very long, slender, and unequal; relative length 1, 4, 2, 8; the first

pair much longer than the others, between which the difference is

slight.

Abdomen long, slender, cylindrical, with short spinnerets.

‘HKPEUS N.

Syn: 1877. Evenus Simon, Am. Soc. Entomol de France, (5), vii, pp. 58-58

Cephalothorax moderately long; thoracic part scarcely the longer, plainly

dilated and rounded, cephalic part plane, high behind, inclined in

front, longer than wide.

Eyes: the median anterior eyes very large, almost touching, the «ntire

width of the face; the lateral eyes much smaller, separated, further

back, forming a second line. Dorsal eyes as large as the lateral, a

little nearer together since the sides of the head converge behind.

Clypeus almost as wide as the radius of the m »dian anterior eyes.

Sternum scarcely wider than the intermediate coxae, rounded above, an-

terior coxae separated by at least the width of the lip, of the same

length as the others.

Falces short, vertical, not ridged.

Legs 3, 1, 2, 4, long, the three first pairs of equal thickness, the fourth

pair more slender, patella and tibia of the first longer than the

cephalothorax, tibia much longer than the patella; patella and tibia

of the fourth much shorter than patella and tibia of the third, and

more slender; metatarsus and torsus of thefourth atleast as long as

the patella and tibia; on the first two pairs twoinferior rows of very

long tibial and metatarsal spines; tibae and metatarsi of the two pos-

terior pairs with slender spines throughout their length. Long tar-

sal claws, regularly bent, the external one provided with a series of

. five teeth, longer, more slender, equal, crowded together.

This genus makes the transition from the ordinary Attidae t» Lysso-

manes of Hentz.

ATHAMAS CAMBRIDGE, 1877.

Syn: 1877. Athamas CAMBRIDGE, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, pp. 575-7.

1879. #6 L. Kocu, Arachniden Australiens, p. 1076.

Cephalothorax short, massive, quadrate. Very convex above; the side and

hinder slope almost vertical.

1 Hpeus is substituted for Hvenus, the latter name being preoccupied,

Genera of the Family Attide. 335

Eyes very uneqval in size, disposed in four transverse lines of two each,

and almost of same length,

Mazillae rather short, slighty divergent, and much the broadest at their

extremities, which are rounded.

Tip short, small, and of a somewhat curviangular form.

Legs rather slender and moderately long; those of the first pair longest;

and of the second pair shortest.

Abdomen small, short, oval, and sloping from its most convex part, near

the margin to the spinners.

This genus is closely allied to Lyssomanes Hentz, as well as to Jelskia

Tacz. It differs, however, from both in the shortness of the cephalo-

thorax and also of the abdomen. From Lyssomanes Hentz it differs in the

superior and inferior spinners being of equal length, whereas, in that

genus, those of the superior pair are much longer, slender and three-

jointed.

Dr, L. Koch’s suggestion that Athamas is probably identical with Evenus

of Simon (Arachniden Australiens, p. 1076), seems to us an error, since the

genera differ in several characteristics. In Cambridge’s genus the cepha-

lothorax in front is very convex; the sides of the heaa are parallel, the cly-

peus as wide as the middle eyes of the first row; the first leg longest. In

the genus of Simon, the cephalic part is plane, the sides of the head con-

verge behind, the clypeus is only one-half the diameter of the large middle

eye; the third leg longest.

336 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

APPENDIX.

We give below definitions of those genera which have

been formed since the completion of the preceding paper.

Those of Mr. Simon and Count Keyserling we have trans-

lated with their notes. We wish, also, to refer toa genus

which had heretofore escaped our notice, and of which we

have not yet the definition. This is Chalcoscirtus Bertkau,

formed for Calliethera infima E. Sim., cf. Ver. d. Nat. Ver.,

XOXEXG 1883, p. 207.

PSEUDICIUS simon. 1885.

Syn.: Attus auct (ad part.). Dendryphantes EH. Sinn., Ar. Fr., III (ad part.

eucarpatus, ete.) + Calliethera E. Sim,, Ar., Karth., 1884 (ad —

p. ictoides). Pseudicius E. Sim, Faune Arach. de Vasie Merid.,

Bulletin de la Soc. Zool. de France, t. x. 1885.

Related to the genus Jciuws KE. Sim., differing in having the eye area par-

allel above, and the falces in ¢ and ¢? not grooved in the outer sides;

tibiae I-and II unarmed, or with one spine (P. badius), or provided with

two minute spines on the inner side; tibiae and metaiarsi III and IV un-

armed, (excepting with the ordinary terminal spines); 4 with femur and

tibiae I very stout.

I believe it necessary to create this genus for a certain number of : spe-

cies whose characteristics are intermediate between those of Jcius, and

those of Dendryphantes and Calliethera, but which does not agree entirely

with any one of these. The cephalothorax is long and low as in Calli-

ethera and Icius, the first row of eyes is equally straight, this being the

point which separates these genera from Dendryphantes, the ocular qua-

drangle is parallel above, as in Calliethera; the armature of the anterior

legs is very peculiar; the tibiae are unarmed with the exception of one or

two small internal spines on the first pair, but the metatarsi have two pairs

of small spines. The integument is covered with simple hairs, never with

scales.

This genus has for its type P. (Dendryphantes) encarpatus Walck.; it in-

cludes beside, P. badius E. Sim., P. picaceus E. Sim , from the south of

Rurope, and P. (Calliethera) icicides E. Sim., from Khartoum.

Genera of the Family Attide. 337

PSEUDAMYCUS Simon. 1885.

Amyeus V. HASSELT, (albomaculatus) (non C. Koch nec L. Koch).

Pseudamyecus E. Sia, Arachn. recueillis par M. Weyers a Sumatra, Ex.

des Comp‘es-rendus de la Soc. Ent. de Belgique,

1885,

Very closely related to the genus Hphippus Thorell, the cephalothorax

and eyes being almost the same, the falces being furnished with onestrong

tooth on the inferior margin of the groove, and with two, the second be-

ing the smaller, on the superior margin (in Hphippus the inferior has 1,

and the superior 3 or 4 minute teeth), the metatarsi and tarsi III and TW;

being a little shorter than the patellae with the tibiae (they are a little

longer in Hphippus), and the tibiae II] and IV armed with a dorsal spine

below the base.

' The genus Amycus C. Koch (type igneus), found in South America, is

easily distinguished by its clypeus being as wide as, or wider than the an-

terior eyes, and by the inferior margin of the falces being provided with

from 3 to 5 teeth.

PTOCASIUS Simon. 1885.

Ptocasius Sim., Arach. recueillis par M. Weyers,a Sumatra, Ex. des

Comptes-rendus de la Soc. Ent. de Belgique, 1885.

Related to the genus Hasarius, the cephalothorax being almost the same,

but the occular area being a little longer above, scarcely one fourth wider

than long, parallel or barely wider behind, convex on both sides behind

the eyes; eyes as in Hasarius excepting that those of the second row are

more widely removed from the posterior than from the anterior eyes;

labium more attenuated, falces with a pair of teeth (or a bifurcated

tooth) on the inferior margin of the groove. which are very unequal, the

first being much smaller than the second, the maxillae in the 4 denticu-

lated on the outer side behind the corner. Lcgs as in the genus Hasarius

but with the tibiae and metatarsi I and II armed on botk sides with lat-

eral spines, tibiae I and II without dorsal spines, III and IV with a smaller

dorsal spine placed behind the base, integuments covered with simple

hairs, not with scales,

Equally near to the genus “ytaea Keyserl. (in L. Koch, Ar. Austr.) but

differing from it in having the cephalothorax shorter and higher, by the

superior margin of the falces being provided with two teeth, as in

Hasarius, whilein Cytaea there are four small ones, by the two teeth of the

inferior margin being very unequal, and finally by the integument being

covered with simple hairs, while the Cytaea of tbe hairs are scale-like.

338 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Salticus sinuatus Doleschall (Plexippus Th.), Plexippus laticeps Thorell,

and probably many other species described by Dr. Thorell under the

generic name of Plexippus belong to the genus Cytaea.

It is probable that several of the species described by Keyserling under

the name of Hasarius, belong in the genus Ptocasius, particularly linea-

tus, albocinctus, insularis, chrysostomus, and mulciber, which are unknown

to us.

STAGETILLUS Simon. 1885.

Siagetillus E. Sim., Arach. ‘recueillis par M. Weyers 4 Sumatra, Ex. des

Comptes-rendus de la Soc. Ent. de Belgique, 1885.

Near the genus Bavia, but having the cephalothorax much longer; the

thoracic part almost 4 longer than the cephalic, the ocular area longer

above, a little narrower behind than in front, the sternum plainly wider

than the intermediate coxae, and very much narrower in front, the space

between the anterior coxae not narrower than the width of the labium,

legs 1, 4, 2,3, the first much stouter that the others, and compressed, tibiae

and metatarsi I and II furnished with stout spines disposed in two inferior

rows, the posterior legs unarmed, the metatarsi with the tarsi III and IV

longer than the patellae with the tibiae, trochanter IV cylindrical and —

long, scarcely shorter than the coxae, falces short, parallel, almost plane in

front, the inferior margin of the groove with 8 or 4 teeth.

AGOBARDUS KEYSERLING. 1885.

Agobardus KEYSERLING, Neue Spinnen aus Amerika, VI, p. 88.

Cephalothorax about 1 longer than wide, nearly vertical on the sides,

narrower in front and behind, and not wider than the third row of

eyes, very convex above, falling steeply to the posterior border, and

haying the cephalic part strongly inclined forward.

Quadrangle of the eyes equally wide in front and behind, and much wider

than long, reaching behind to the middle of the cephalothorax.

Looked at from in front the first row of eyes seems to be strongly

curved, and the side eyes to be separated from the middle eyes by

more than their own radius. The small eyes of the second row are

about halfway between the fore side eyes and the eyes of the third

row, which are equal'y distant from each other ani from the lateral

borders.

Falces a little diverging, and as long and stout as the patellae of the first

pair of legs.

Labium not longer than wide, and only half as long as the maxilaee which

are rounded in front and moderately wide.

Sternum only a little longer than wide, and plainly wider than the coxae.

Genera of the Family Attide. 339

Legs (é 1, 4, 3, 2, and 9 4, 3, 1, 2), moderately long, the first pair scarcely

stouter than the others, thinly haired and with spines on all the

joints; the metatarsus of the fourth has several at the beginning

and end. Metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth a little longer than

patella and tibia of the fourth, and these joints as long as the patella

and tibia of the third.

Abdomen not much longer than wide.

WALA KEYSERLING. 1885.

Wala KEYSERLING, Neue Spinnen aus Amerika, VI, p. 30.

Abdomen long and slender.

Cephalothorax scarcely wider than long, strongly rounded on the sides,

much wider than the third row of eyes, contracted behind, not high

above, and rather flat. The cephalic part slightly inclined forward.

Clypeus very low.

Quadrangle of the eyes wider than long, somewhat narrower in front than

behind, occupying only about 4 ef the cephalothorax. Anterior

row slightly bent, with the eyes rather near together. Eyes of the

third row further from each other than from the lateral borders.

Falces (24) rather slender, long, and diverging.

Labium longer than wide, 2 as long as the maxillae.

Sternum scarcely longer than wide and scarcely narrower than the coxae

of the first pair of legs, much wider than those of the second.

Legs (4) 1, 4, 3, 2, first pgir in the male much longer and stouter than the

others. Femur, tibia, and metatarsus of the first and second pairs

with spines, which are found only on the femur and at the extremity

of the metatarsus on the third and fourth pairs. Patella and tibia

of the fourth longer than the patella and tibia of the third; also’

longer than the metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth.

This genus stands very near to Hyllus C. K., but is separated from it by

the still shorter cephalothorax, by the absence of spines at the beginning

of the metatarsus of the fourth‘leg, and chiefly in that the patella and

tibia of the third are shorter thap the patella and tibia of the fourth, and

that the quadrangle of the eyes is a little wider behind than infront. It

is also somewhat like Sandalodes Keys., but is separated from it by the

short, wide sternum, and the absence of spines at the beginning of the

metatarsus of the fourth. As to Mospus Keruli it offers, beside other

differences, the height of the clypeus in relation to the eyes, which is the

principal difference. (Bei Mospus Keruli bietet ausser anderen Verschieden-

heiten die Hohe des Clypeus das am meisten in die Augen tretende Merk-

mal der Unterscheidung),

340 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

GANESA PECKHAM. 1885.

Gianesa PECKHAM, Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. of Wisconsin, March, 1889.

Cephalothorax very low and fiat, slightly contracted in front and behind,

twice-as long as wide, and a little wider than the third row of eyes,

with a depression limiting the cephalic part. Thoracic part twice

as long as cephalic, truncated behind.

Eyes forming a quadrangle a little more than + wider than long and equal-

ly wide in the front and behind. Anterior eyes all separated, form-

ing a line slightly curved ' downward, the middle nearly three times

as large as the lateraleyes. Eyes of the second row halfway between

the dersal and lateral eyes. Dorsal eyes further from each other

than the lateral borders.

Clypeus very low.

Sternwm wide and oval, narrower behind than in front. Anterior coxae

separated by the width of the labium.

Mavillae. less than twice as long as iabium, wider at the extremity, par-

allel.

Labium a little longer than wide, rounded at tip.

Falces nearly vertical, not diverging, robust, short, ab-ut as wide as long,

narrower at the insertion of the fang.

Legs 1, 4, 2, 3,in both sexes. First leg much the stoutest, with the femut

and tibia greatly enlarged, and patella slightly enlarged in both

sexes. The patella with tibia of the third shorter than patella with

tibia of the fourth; metatarsus with tarsus of fourth sherter than

patella with tibia. The third and fourth pairs have no spines.

Abdomen long and slender, flattened above.

ASAMONEA (CAMBRIDGE). 1869. SIMON.

Syn., 1869. Asamonea CAMRR, Ann. Mag. nat. hist., 1869, p. 14.

1885. se - K. Sim., Faune Arachnologique de lAsie Meérid.,

Bull. de la Soc. Zool, de France; t X., 1885.

We transcribe the following remarks on the genus Asamonea, from E.

Simon, (Materiaux pour servir a la faune Arachnologique de Asie Mérid-

ionale Bulletin de la Société Zoologique de France, t. X, 1885.)

1 We speak of the anterior row of eyes as straight when a straight line

from the top of the middle eyes touches also the top of the lateral eyes;

curved, when a straight line from the top of the middle eyes cuts the lat-

eral eyes; curved downward, when a straight line from the top of the mid-

dle eyes passes above the lateral eyes.

Genera of the Family Attide. 341

The typical specics A. tenwipes has been described by the Rev. O. P.

Can.bridge under the generic name of Asamonea, but the .characters of

the genus have never been formulated, the author having been of the

opinion, even at the time of its publication, that this new genus was sim-

ply synonymous with Zyssomanes Heutz. It seems tous that the genus

Asamonea ought to be re-established, as it differs greatly in reality from

the genus Lyssomanes by the proportion and the disposition of the eyes

and the form of the labium; in Asamonea the region occupied by the six

dorsal eyes is much wider than long, and the eyes are almost equal, the

scarcely smaller ones of the third pair are placed much within and near

those of the second, the labium is as wide as long, while in Lyssomanes

the dorsal ocular arza is as long as wide or scarcely wider, the eyes of the

third row are much smaller than the others, placed equally far in, but

much more behind the eyes of the second row, finally the labium is much

longer than wide.

The characters of the genus Asamonea may be thus formulated:

Cephalothorax low almost plane above, dorsal eyes 2, 3, 4, occupy a

trapeziform area much wider than long, eyes of the third row scarcely

smaller than the other eyes, and placed within and behind the eyes of the

second row. Maxillae short, almost quadrate. Labium not longer than

wide, a little attenuated and truncated. Superior spinnerets much longer

thau the inferior, biarticulate, the first articulation scarcely shorter than

the second. Legs slender, rather long, 1, 4, 2, 3, furnished with long spines;

me‘atarsus [TV much longer than the tibiae.

SIMONELLA PrEcKHAM. 1885.

Simonella PecKHAM, Proc. Nat. Hi:t. Soc. of Wisconsin, March, 1885.

Body long, slender, nodose.

Cephalothorax more than twice as long as wide, convex above, constricted

near the middle; thoracic part twice as long as cephalic.

Eyes very unequal in size, ‘placed in four transverse rows of two each.

those of the anterior row almost touching. The quadrangle formed

by the second and fourth rows is wider behind than in front, and

wider behiad than long. Eyes of the third row very small, and

nearer to the second than to the fourth row. Eyes of the fourth row

on the upper margin of the cephalotborax.

Clypeus less than 4 as wide as the anterior eyes, retreating.

Sternum long, narrow behind. Anterior coxae separated by the width of

the labium.

Mazwxillae twice as long as labium, wilest in the middle, tapering toward

apex. ‘

Labium as wide as long, truncated at tip.

Falces stout and long, vertical, slightly diverging.

342 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Legs 4,8,1,2, slender, differing but little in thickness, the third and fourth

pairs unarmed. Patella with tibia of the third shorter than patella

with tibia of the fourth; metatarsus with tarsus of the fourth shorter

than patella with tibia.

Abdomen long, slender, much narrower in the middle.

Including Asamonea Cambr., Simonella makes thé sixth genus of the

sub-family Lyssomanae, which includes those attidae which have the eyes

in four transverge rows. Janus myrmaciaeformis Tacz. is nearest to Sim-

onella, and Dr. Taczanowski, in describing that species, suggests that it

ought to constitute a new genus. It differs, however, from Simonella, in

that the first row of eyes occupies the whole of the face, and in the quad-

rangle of the eyes being longer than wide. Simonella is easily distin-

guished by its nodose form from the other genera of this sub-family. In

general appearance it most resembles Synemosyna Hentz.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY SINCE DECEM-

BER, 1881.

REPORT OF THE SECRETARY.

TWELFTH REGULAR ANNUAL MEETING,

Held at Madison, Wisconsin.

——_—_

Rooms OF WISCONSIN ACADEMY OF

SCIENCES, ARTS AND LETTERS,

CAPITOL, MADISON, WISCONSIN.

FIRST SESSION.

TUESDAY EVENING, December 27th, 1881.

Prof. Davies, General Secretary, read the minutes of the

last meetings. Minutes were accepted and adopted.

Profs. W.F. Allen, E. A. Birge,and 8. D. Hastings were

appointed a committee to whom was referred all nomina-

tions for membership.

The Treasurer’s report was then read and referred toa

committee consisting of Profs. W. F. Allen, A. O. Wright,

and R. C. Hindley.

The Treasurer also read the number of years that each

member was in arrears for his dues, or also inadvance upon

his dues in virtue of the arrangement of dues made at the

Eleventh Regular Annual Meeting; also the list of members

who had failed entirely to respond to the demand for dues,

was read,

Professors Butler and Birge and Hon. 8. D. Hastings

were appointed a committee to consider the legality of the

B44 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

action of the Academy in appointing Prof. Davies, who has

been for nine years General Secretary, and George P. Dela-

plaine who was for eight years Treasurer, of the Academy,

Life Members, in virtue of long continued and unremu-

nerated services in their respective offices.

Academy adjourned until 9 o’clock, Wednesday morning.

SECOND SESSION.

December 28, 1881.

Academy met at 9:30 A. M.

As the Secretary was unable. to be present on account of

sickness, Prof. A. O. Wright was elected Secretary pro tem.

The committee on nominations reported, recommending

the following persons:

Prof. EK. G. Smith, Beloit College.

Prof. W. R. Higby, Lake Geneva Seminary.

F. J. Lamb, Esq., Madison.

Prof. R. D. Salsbury, Beloit.

Who were duly elected.

The following report was presented:

To the Wisconsin Academy of Jciences, Arts and Letters:

The committee to whom was referred the constitutionality of the reso-

lution presented at the last Annual Meeting of the Academy, constituting

Life Members of the Academy in consideration of.some eight years of

valuable official service, would respectfully report: that they do not regard

the resolution as conflicting with the constitution, and tkey would there-

fore recommend its adoption.

Respectfully submitted,

SAMUEL D. HASTINGS,

EK. A. BIRGE,

JAMES D. BUTLER.

MADISON, December 28, 1881.

This report was accepted and the resolution making Gen-

eral Delaplaine and Prof. Davies Life Members was then

adopted.

The Auditing Committee reported approving the Treas-

urer’s report.

Report adopted.

Report of the Secretary. 34

Report adopted and the names so dropped are:

Prof. W. F. Allen then read a paper on “ Land Communi-

ties among the Ancient Germans.”

Prof. H. A. Birge gave a verbal account of a paper on

“The Distribution and Function of the Large Ganglion Cells:

of the Frog’s Spinal Cord.”

Prof. J. D. Butler read a paper on “Mediaeal German.

Schools.” Discussed by Prof. O. M. Conover and others.

Prof. A. O. Wright, Secretary of the State Board of Chari-

ties and Reforms read a. paper on “The Increase of In--

sanity.” Discussed by several.

President Chapin gave a brief address relating to the

work of the Academy.

The following resolution offered by the Treasurer was

adopted:

WHEREAS, Thirty-one members of the Academy have this morning.

been suspended from membership, for non-payment of annual dues under

the rules of the Academy,

Resolved, That any of the persons thus suspended may be restored to

membership at any time by paying into the treasury the amounts due at.

the time of suspension.

The Academy then proceeded to the election of officers.

with the following result:

President — Prof. R. D. Irving.

Vice-President of the Department of Science — Professor

T. C. Chamberlain, of Beloit.

Vice-President of the Department of Letters — Professor

W. C. Sawyer, of Appleton.

Secretary — Prof. EK. A. Birge, of Madison.

Librarian — Prof, A. O. Wright, of Madison.

Curator of the Musewm— Prof. R. C. Hindley, of Racine.

Treasurer — Hon. 8S. D. Hastings, of Madison.

Prof. W. F. Allen proposed the following amendment to

the constitution, which under the rules lies over until the

next meeting.

Resolved, That the constitution be amended so as to:abolish the Depart-

ment of Arts.

The election of Vice-President for the Department of Arts

was suspended.

346 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

The following resolution offered by Prof. W. F. Allen was

adopted:

Resolved, That Secretary, Librarian and Curator compose a committee

to have charge of the books and collections of the Academy.

The following resolution offered by Prof. R. C. Hindley

was adopted:

Resolved, That the Academy favors and will foster to the best of its

ability the establishment of Local, Literary and Scientific societies

throughout the state.

Resolution offered by Prof. O. M. Conover was adopted, as

follows:

Resolved, That the officers of the Academy be requested to unite with

those of the State Historical Society in urging upon the Legislature at its

next session the importance of providing a suitable fire-proof building for

the u:e of the Historical Library and the collections of the Academy and

of the other State Societies.

Academy adjourned for dinner.

THIRD SESSION.

Wednesday afternoon, 2:30 P. M.

In the lecture room of Natural History of Science Hall,

University of Wisconsin.

President Irving in the chair.

The following papers by Rev. S. D. Peet, were read by

title:

1. On Animism among the Emblematic Mound Builders.

2. On the Fetichism Exhibited in the Village Sites and

Burial Places of Emblematic Mound Builders.

3. On the Tablets and Inscribed Plates of the Mound

Builders of Ohio and Iowa compared with Aztec, Persian

and Hindoo symbols.

4, The Theory that the Mounds of the Ohio Valley were

the Foundations of Communistic Houses Refuted.

A paper was read by Mr. R. D. Salisbury, assistant to Prof.

Chamberlin, of Beloit, on “The Dispersion of Drift Copper.”

Discussed by Professors Irving, Butler and Chamberlain.

Prof. Birge gave an extempore lecture on “ Recent Ob-

Report of the Secretary. 347

servations on Nuclear Division and their Relation to Theo-

retical Zoology.”

Prof. Chamberlin then gave an interesting talk on

“American Glacial History in the Light of Recent Investi-

gations,” and the “ Harmony of Certain Observations with

Croll’s Hypothesis of the Origin of the Glacial Epoch.”

Mr. George Schumm, editor of the Radical Review, read a

paper on “Proportional Representation in Legislation,”

which was warmly discussed by many members.

The following resolution was adopted:

Resolved, That the General Secretary be requested to prepare a corrected

copy of the constitution and by-laws for publication in Volume V of the

transactions, and that he also prepare for publication a copy of all resolu-

tions which refer to the management of the affairs of the Academy that

will be of general interest tothe members.

Academy adjourned.

EVENING SESSION.

Held in the senate chamber of the capitol.

A large audience greeted Prof. Butler, who kept his hear-

ers interested in his description of his “Visit to the Hawaiian

Volcano.” This paper was followed by a paper on “ Human

Liberty Empirically Considered,’ by Dr. John Bascom.

Adjourned.

348 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

THIRTEENTH REGULAR ANNUAL MEETING.

Held at Madison, Wisconsin, December 26th, 27th and 28th, 1882.

Rooms oF THE AGRICULTURAL SOCIETY,

TuEsDAY, December 26th, 7:30 P. M.

The Academy was called to order by Pres. Irving.

The minutes of preceding meeting read and approved.

The Treasurer’s report was given, as follows:

Balanceyonvhands 188 cee ciie tastes ac etaeees 4 ly See ea $826 49

Recenvedetromannuwalidwessaase eee eee ESR ey N50, b 31 00

Received! from! lite member (Gs Paul)p252).2-.- soe cee eee eases 100 00

MGtalive: pice BUCH aA dic ty lel 0 $957 49

Paidsoutonwarramtsic aan ous bis HA eRe Eee 70 08

p balanceWecemiberr S32 eee eerie ele eer ee eee $887 41

The report was referred to Mr. Lamb, Prof. Butler and

Dr. Hoy, who reported favorably on it, and it was received

and adopted. |

The Publishing Committee reported the publication of

Vol. V of the Transactions, that the state had furnished $90

for cuts, which sum was sufficient to pay the expenses of

those in the volume.

~ The President and Secretary made brief verbal reports of

matters in their respective offices.

The amendment to the constitution abolishing the Depart-

ment of Arts was lost, (see p. 345).

The matter of publishing Vol. VI was referred to a special

committee consisting of Profs. Irving, Wright, Allen and

Dr. Hoy, and their report made the order of business for

Thursday morning.

Dr. Hoy, Prof’s. Allen and Pecknam were appointed a

committee on nominations.

Mr. 8. W. Willard, of DePere, was elected as an annual

member.

Capt. John Nader was unanimously elected Vice Presi-

dent for the Department of Arts.

Adjourned.

Report of the Secretary. 349

‘WEDNESDAY MORNING, 9:30.

President Irving called the Academy to order.

Messrs. C. R. Vanhise and Wm. Trelease, of Madison,

were elected annual members.

Voted: that G. D. Swezey, of Doan College, Crete, Ne-

braska, have twelve copies of Vol. V., of the transactions.

Voted: that Dr. Hoy have six each of Vols. IV and V.

Voted: that parties applying for copies of the transac-

tions be required to pay postage on the same.

Voted: that each contributor be entitled to eight copies of

the volume wherein his paper appears.

Voted: that the Secretary prepare and send to each con-

tributor with his proof sheets a blank to be filled out by him,

indicating the number of extra copfes of the paper to be

printed at the expense of the author.

Voted: that a committee of two be appointed to consider

the formation of branch societies, to report pia even-

ing.

Dr. Elmendorf and Prof. Emerson appointed as such com-

mittee.

The following papers were then read:

“Who Built the Mounds,” and “Who made the Copper

Tools,” by Dr. P. R. Hoy, of Racine.

“The Mound Builders,” by Dr. Day, of Wauwatosa. Dis-

cussed by Dr. Butler, Prof. Allen and others.

Mr. D. P. Blackstone, of Berlin, elected an annual mem-

ber.

AFTERNOON SESSION.

2:50 be

Vice President Sawyer in the chair.

Prof. Emerson’s paper on Greek Religion was read and

discussed.

Adjourned, 4:30.

350 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

EVENING SESSION.

Supreme Court Room, 7:30.

President Bascom in the chair.

Paper, “The Unity of Moral Ideas,’ by Rev. C. Caverno,

Lombard, lll. Discussed by President Bascom and Mr.

Richards.

Adjourned.

THURSDAY MORNING.

! 9:30.

President Irving in the chair.

Messrs. G. E. Brown, Madison, Wis.; D. H. Morgan, AI-

bany, Wis.; R. G. Norton and §S. Mills, Madison, Wis., elected

annual members.

The committee on publication of Vol. VI reported and

their report was unanimously adopted by article as follows:

RESOLUTIONS.

1. The Standing Committee on Publication are authorized to proceed at

once ‘o the preparation of Vol. VI of the Transactions of the Academy.

Said volume to have its contents arranged according to meetings and not

according to departments.

2. The Secretary of the Academy shall be charged with the special duty

of overseeing and editing the publication of future volumes of the Tran-

sactions.

3. The Transactions of the Academy hereafter published shall contain:

(a) a list of officers and members of the Academy; (0) the charter, by-laws

and constitution of the Academy as amended to date; (c) the proceedings

of the meetings; and (d) such papers as are duly certified in writing to the

Secretary as accepted for publication in accordance with the following

regulations, and no other:

(4.) Hereafter every author of a paper, whether it is to be read by title

only, or in full, shall submit, at the time of reading, a brief abstract in

writing, of the contents of the paper (not to exceed one half printed page

in extent), which abstract shall in all cases be printed in full in the pro-

ceedings of the meetings of the Academy; and no paper shall be received

for reading that is not accompanied by such abstract. Provided that for

Vol. VI. of the Transactions the Secretary shall procure such abstracts of

papers hitherto read.

(5.) Papers to be printed in full or in part in the Transactions must be

requested of their authors by a Sub-Committee of the Standing Committee

Report of the Secretary. 351

on Publication, which Sub-Committee shall consist of the President and

Secretary of the Academy and the Vice-President of the Department in

which the paper fa'ls; this Subcommittee to have the authority to request

for publication portions only of papers, when it shall deem desirable to

them to do so.

(6). In deciding as to the papers to be called for for publication, the

committtee shall have spcial regard to its value as a genuine, original

contribution to the knowledge of the subject discussed.

(7.) In case the committee shall not feel competent to decide as to the

value of a paper, on account of its special or technical character, it shall

be their duty to call upon the author to agree with them uponsome prom-

inent specialist or specialists, whose opinion as to its value shall be asked,

and shall decide the question of its publication.

(8.) These resolutions shall not be constrned so as to restrict the present

freedom of members in reading papers before the Academy.

(9.) The Sub-Committee on Publication shall be charged with insisting

upon the correction of errors in grammar, phraseology, etc., on the part of

authors, and shall call the attention of authors to any other points in their

papers, which in their judgment appears to need revision,

(10,) The Publishing Committee are authorized to expend not to exceed

one hundred dollars for illustrations to Vol. VI of the Transactions.

ROLAND D. IRVING,

WEY ALDEN, \ Committee

Para EuANye :

A. O. WRIGHT, J

Papers read:

“The effect of local attractions on tne Plumb line and Sea

Level,” Prof. J. E. Davies, Madison.

“Time and Tide,” Capt. John Nader, Madison.

* Nature and Freedom,” Prof. J. J. Elemendorf, Racine.

“ Sorghum Sugar,” M. 8. Swenson, M. 8., Madison.

Adjourned, 12:30.

AFTERNOON SESSION.

President Bascom in the chair.

Prof. Elmendorf read a paper entitled “The Ideal Man.”

Prof. A. O. Wright read a paper on “ Pauperism.”

Prof. Allen read a paper on “ The Sochemanni.”’

Read by title:

D. P. Blackstone, “ The Variations in the attractions due

to the figure of the attracting Bodies.”

K. A. Birge, “Embryology of Panopaeus Sayi.’

B52 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

THURSDAY EVENING.

7:30 P. M.

President Bascom’s paper, “The Universality of Law,”

read and warmly discussed by many members.

Mr. Lamb was elected chairman of the meeting.

Report of the Committee on Branch Societies was accepted

as follows:

Article one favoring the formation of such societies was

adopted and the remainder was referred to a. committee

consisting. of the council and Professors Elmendorf and

Emerson to report at the next annual meeting.

Voted: that the Secretary of the Academy be and hereby

is instructed to convey to the parties of the Supreme Court

the thanks of the Academy for their kindness in opening

‘the court room to its meetings.

Voted: that the Publishing committee be authorized to

stitch and cover, at the expense of the Academy a sufficient

number of the Transactions of each meeting when printed,

to supply exchanging societies, 1f the same shall appear

necesssary to said Committee.

Adjourned 9:30.

MEMBERS OF THE WISCONSIN ACADEMY OF

SCIENCES ARTS AND LETTERS.

LIFE MEMBERS.

Dewey, Nelson, Cassville, Wis.

Davies, J. E., Madison, Wis.

Delaplaine, G. P., Madison, Wis.

Case, J. I., Racine, Wis.

Hoyt. John W., Wyoming.

Lawler, John, Prairie du Chien.

Mitchell, J. L., Milwaukee, Wis.

Paul, Geo. H., Milwaukee, Wis

Thorpe, J. G., Eau Claire, Wis.

ANNUAL MEMBERS.

Allen, Wm. F., Madison, Wis.

Allen, W. C., Racine, Wis.

Adsit, Mrs. C. D., Milwaukee, Wis.

Armsby, H. P., Madison, Wis.

Baetz, Henry, Milwaukee, Wis.

Bundy, W. F., Chicago, Ill.

Buck, J. 8., Milwaukee, Wis.

Bate, Mrs. Amelia W., Milwaukee, Wis.

Buell, Ira M., Sun Prairie, Wis.

Birge, E. A., Madison, Wis,

Bartlett, E. W., Milwaukee, Wis.

Bascom, John, Madison, Wis.

Butler, J. D., Medison, Wis.

Bashford, R. M., Madison, Wis.

Beach, W. H., Madison, Wis.

Blackstone, D. P., Berlin, Wis.

Chamberlain, T. C., Beloit, Wis.

Chapin, A. L., Beloit, Wis.

Cass, J. E, Eau Claire, Wis.

Conover, Mrs. Sarah F., Madison, Wis.

Daniels, W. W., Madison, Wis.

Day, F. H., Wauwatosa, Wis.

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Doyle, Peter, Prairie du Chien, Wis.

Draper, L. C:, Madison, Wis.

Dudley, Mrs. Marian V., Milwaukee, Wis.

Elmendorff, Dr., Racine, Wis.

Emerson, Joseph, Beloit, Wis.

Fiske, E. O., Milwaukee, Wis.

Foye, J. C., Appleton, Wis.

Frankenburger, D. V., Madison, Wis.

Freeman, J. C., Madison, Wis.

Gapen, Clark, Madison, Wis.

Giles, Miss Ella A., Madison, Wis.

Gordon, Mrs. Geo., Milwaukee, Wis.

Greene, Thos. A., Milwaukee, Wis.

Holton, HE, D., Milwaukee, Wis.

Hoy, P. R., Racine, Wis.

Hardy, Albert, La Crosse, Wis.

Heritage, Lucius, Madison, Wis.

Hastings, 8. D., Madison, Wis.

Hutchinson, B. E., Madison, Wis.

Hindley, R. C., Racine, Wis,

Higley, W. K., Chicago, III.

Holden, E. 8., Berkeley, Cal.

Irving, R. D., Madison, Wis,

Jones, Burr W., Madison, Wis.

Kerr, Alex., Madison, Wis.

King, F. H., River Falls, Wis.

Kumilin, Thure, Busseyville, Wis.

Lamb, F. J., Madison, Wis.

Lapham, Mary S., Oconomowoc, Wis.

Marks, Solon, Milwaukee, Wis.

McLaren, W. P., Milwaukee, Wis.

Meacham, J. G., Sr., Racine, Wis.’

Meacham, J. G., Jr., Racine, Wis.

Morgan, D. H., Albany, Wis.

Morris, W. A. P., Madison, Wis.

Mills, Simeon, Madison, Wis.

Nader, John, Madison, Wis.

Norton, R. G., Madison, Wis.

Olin, Mrs. D. A., Racine, Wis.

Orton, H. S., Madison, Wis.

Peckham, G. W., Milwaukee, Wis

Peet, S. D., Clinton, Wis.

Perkins, H. B., Appleton, Wis.

Raymer, Geo., Madison, Wis.

Salisbury, R. D., Beloit, Wis

Sawyer, W. C., Oshkosh, Wis.

Report of the Secretary. 355

Smith, E. G., Beloit, Wis.

Sneiding, Henry, Racine, Wis.

Sprague, A. R., Racine, Wis.

Stair, W. P., Black Earth, Wis.

Swenson, Magnus, Hutchinson, Kan.

Tatlock ,John, Jr., New York, N. Y.

Trelease, Wm., Madison, Wis.

Van Hise, C. R., Madison, Wis.

Van Velzer, C. A., Madison, Wis.

Viebahn, C. Z., Watertown, Wis.

Westcott O.S., Racine, Wis.

Weyburn, L. A. Rockford, Ill.

Whitford, W. C., Milton, Wis.

Williams. 8. W., West Depere. Wis.

Willis, Mrs. O. B., Racine, Wis.

Winship, E. B., Racine, Wis.

Wooster, L. C., Whitewater, Wis.

Wright, A. O., Madison, Wis.

Young, A. A., New Lisbon.

DECEASED MEMBERS.

Armitage, W. E., Right Rev. Bishop P. E. Church, Milwaukee, Wis,

Carpenter, S. H., LL.D., Prof. English Language, University of Wis-

consin, Madison, Wis.

Conover, O. M., LL. D., Madison, Wis.

De Koven, J., 8. T. D., Warden Racine College, Racine, Wis.

Dudley, Wm., Madison, Wis.

Eaton, J. H., Ph. D., Prof. Chemistry Beloit College, Beloit, Wis.

Engelman, Peter, Director German and English Academy, Milwau-

kee.

Feuling, J. B.,, Ph. D. Prof. Philology, University Wisconsin-

Hawley, C. T.. Milwaukee, Wis.

Lapham, I. A., LL. D., State Geologist, Milwaukee, Wis.

Little, Thos. H., Supt. Institution for the Blind, Janesville, Wis.

McDill, A. S., M. D., Supt. State Hospital for the Insane, Madison,-

Wis.

Nicodemus, W. J. L., A. M. C. E. Prof. Engineering, Uniy. Wis.

White, S. A., Hon., Whitewater, Wis.

Wolcott, E. B., M. D., Surgeon General, Milwaukee, Wis.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS,

Abbott, C, C., M. D., Trenton, New Jersey.

Andrews, Edmund, A. M. M. D., Prof. Chicago, Medical College

Chicago, Ill.

Barrow, John W. 113 Fast Seventeenth St., New York City.

Bridge, Norman, M. D., Chicago, III.

356

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Benton, J. G., M. D., Philadelphia, Penn.

Buchanan, Joseph, M. D., Louisville, Ky.

Burnham, S. W., F. R. A.S, Chicago, Ill.

Byrness, R. M., M. E., Cincinnati, Ohio.

Carr, E. S., M. D., Supt. Public Instruction, California.

Caverno, Rev. Chas,, Lombard, IIL.

Ebener, F., Ph. D., Baltimore, Md.

Fallows, Right Rev. Sam’!, Chicago, III,

Gatchell, H. P., M. D., Kenosha, Wis.

Gill, Theo., M.D., Smithsonian Institute, Washington, D.C.

Gilman, D. C., Pres. Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.

Harris, W. T., LL. D., Concord, Mass.

Hopkins, F. N., M. D., Baton Rouge, La.

Holland, Rev. F. M., Concord, Mass.

Horr, M. D., Pres. Iowa Institute of Arts and Sciences, Dubuque,

Towa.

Hubbell. H. P., Winona, Minn.

Jewell, J.S., A.M. M. D., Prof. Chicago Medical College, Chicago,

Illinois.

Le Barron, Wm., State Entomologist, Geneva, N. Y.

Marcy, Oliver, LL. D., Prof. Northwestern University, Evanston,

Illinois.

Morgan, L. H., LL. D., Rochester, Illinois.

Newberry, J.S., LL. D., Prof. Columbia Colleg3, New York,

Orton, E. A. M., Pres Antioch College, Yellow Springs, Ohio.

Paine, Alford S. T. D., Hinsdale, Ill.

Swezey, G. D., Prof., Crete, Neb.

Porter, W. B., Prof., St. Louis, Mo.

Safford, T. H., Director Astron. Observatory Williams College, Wil-

liamstown, Mass.

De Vere, Schele M., LL. D., Prof. University of Virginia, Charlotte-

ville, Va.

Shaler, N. S., A. M., Prof. Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

Shipman, Col. S. V., Chicago, Ill.

Steele, Rev. G. M., LL. D., Principal of Wilbraham Seminary, Wil-

braham, Mass.

Trumbull, J. H., LL. D., Hartford, Conn.

Van de Warker, Eli, M. D., Syracuse, N. Y.

Verrill, A. E., A. M., Prof. Yale College, New Haven, Conn.

Whitney, W. D., Prof. Yale College, New Haven, Conn,

Winchell, Alex., LL. D., Ann Arbor, Mich.

Winchell, N. H., Prof., Minneapolis, Minn.

HONORARY MEMBERS.

Baird, Spencer F. M., M. D., LL. D., Washington, D. C.

Hamilton, Joseph, Hon., Milwaukee, Wis.

\ TABLE I.

ANALYSIS OF GENERA OF THE FAMILY ATTID®,

HeietH, LENGTH, AND WipTH OF CEPHALOTHORAX, SIDES or CePHALOTHORAX. Posterior Parr. Dorsum. CEPHALIC Part. THORACIC Parr. CLYPEUS.

As wide as o1 Contracted

é a Parallel és | Dilated in front or {Dilated in or behind the! Vertical or Slanting, rounded or A i Li vit! ic] Height coupared

Height. Tength wider than 84) “Gr not. | in froubor behind. uiddle. rounded, uuncated. | {Plane or convex. SRI [ge ec He conic eer an

row of eyes. behind. p terior eyes

Pas Not high z. ee Rather long. tee Sometimes), . metimes behind. Naa g ree Otten inclined.| At least 4 longe: Eas 2

Marptusa bo0 Long tee 0 At last } luuger . About 4.

Epiblemum . arse eee Bas ehobeoobenscesorn js aconor or o°conoccnda boecna ste eoceracenced eecercccces eeceeec a a ei ae or eoenlenaticccaelfprnonaanocsoocssasaps (hogpaccttcctenence teehee eee allay

Philaeus Very high : a O46 x «| At least 4 longer .

JEG soo soared Pagegpen59 056600 Pandaca nob 5060000 D5Nsn0004 bboc7c0000 oan, boaenonesoed hpBoadtindccd badaccsecacenem eee dl ae ceteeee : 5 4 -| Equal to ceph Less than 4.

Simetha F lel acs ite d tows

endryphantes Moderate! ! Apso A s 1,

Rane = High... u b : Behind. .| Plane or cony dort longer . Rone +

Pellene: High. Rather long. Behind. Convex ., Inclined t longer... At least 4,

Menemerus 250 Long...... Behind. sae Plane or ¢ SiO At least } longer Searcely 4.

Hasarius High.. Rather long. In and behind Convex Inclined At leust $ ionger .. Often more than 4

Boethus. High.... Re Ttiiporse és to oppanbopo70m4 haspacosana 8ho: |boonsecdacnd| SCI HV I bacnsegedoncoesedoed bheecccken cia Bec LAOIIEG s.acnd baeoseacaogase About 3, <

Aclurillus Very high . Behind middle . Inclinea ‘Twice as long . As wide or almost.

Yilenus . Very high . Behind middle . Inclined Twice as long . Almost as wide.

Very high . Behiod. p00 b At least + longe: Rarely }.

Mod ely high. Little louger At least 4.

Pe Bee enc h tongrccdenocaor poor vsccccseed Recreate Eeeeteseecree her cacecaccre coi cea To eee aoc | Use ocenereoneorcenarsaereceeend TET qoecoss esc omenfpoecene ecocosod | OU MoNge Scurcely 3,

or } Jonger

Iqual to cephalic

At least 4.

Moderately high.

Less than 4.

‘| Behind,

Slanting .

Behind,

‘| Very high “Behind middle

Habrocestum .... Oe : . 0 3

d| 4 Moscucodsccedbuose é z : - dla | Middle.

Heliophanus

Hyctia

Inclined

Level

At least ¢ longer .

Atleast } longer .

yrba.. e506 About } longer...

Phlegra Very long Af leust Wwice as long. More than 4.

Saitis Moderately long. Almost. ‘ Plane i longer Scarcely 4.

Neetha igh o Truncated . as loug as cephalic Almost 4.

Aegon .. Not high. a Middle, Rounded......}...... At least } louge About

Plexippus .| Moderately high.! Middle Rounded | Slanting .

Zenodorus High... r 20 In front. - 2s

EBuryattus Not high .| Short In front.

di ig! .| Short 5 anting

O80 000 d Slanting 906 o : 6 || Inclined

Secoosne9 «| Inclined

Level .

Little wide:

Much wider

-| Llomger than wide........, les ole i fal

meee -| hort . : d é f ON

Amycus. si Slanting

Phyale Nearly as long as wide.

Thiania BOERS EEE Sone SCeGEK ee ce" f.coc oacscucaebe| Kose oeeeted bgetsacer cal Rote eer cago NicLiats | nencod benrapbarrobod naa opiGuauoedeceecml tice cae pecod

Chirotheci: lle Plane. Shorter than cephali

Discocnemius Moderately high.| £ 2 x

Diolenius. AeA ++

Ascyltus . [Not hig Tn front. Bpo0

Mopsus. Moderately ooo Slanting bo

Coccorcheste« ip heres Truncated. e High.

Omoedus. .f 3 b Truncated. Inclined . Rather high.

Rhomboyotus Almost twic long as wide}... Middle . Convex . boa Abou 4

Damogtas .. d 5 -| Almost twice as long as wide} As Middle . Rounded. Less than 4.

Syn€mosynase ee! | ones sears abe eos Z b pain ond

Leptorchestes arallel : Very low,

yo Snageles an Parallel ,./.... Truncated... - Very low.

Ay Tease : ‘Less than }.

Sulticus.... Very low.

Selaophora . : Convex ~ Searcely J,

Hypoblemum } or ¢ longer than wide. Rounded. Convex . Low.

Tona fr ogebsthantwilel-Pe-eerr-.| NOt Wider ej seeceersae:|(uifronte.|/aci2i2) isso ole Rounded, Plane be

Therosa . 4 longer than wide . Middle. Rounded, Conyex , Very low.

Cytea -| 4 ord longer than wide. Middle Rounded. . Convex , ‘a

Tara +} ¢ longer than wide . Middle. Rounded. Plane Very law.

Sauharulla 0 -| ¢ longer than wide .. es Convex . Very low.

Pirithous.. Moderately high.| Little longer than wide. Low,

Sinnamora . igh. 2 £1 pger than wide . Behind. Inclined +.

Bianor Little louger than wide. 5 Aboaacensa BS Low.

Astia + longer than wide . -| Behind On Bosse soncosend bescoesmstuasasusbauscedocridlhacmudareconco [hoosdcohabae corona EAOOO. Kod 6

Jotus i longer than wide . ba Rounded Less than 4.

Margom: 3 longer than wide . Middle Rounded =

Bel :

} longer than wide . Behind,

3 Rounded

Sobara .. Moderately high.) Longer than wide

As wide,

Ergane High Longer than ide .| Inclined Less than 4,

Screa High. TE aR eeRSoHnce dP oc>> coon cosrsed berlcosibnd pdotcenesdad | Soccosmuonmsescaredl Gecoceca oo cle ee oe v .| Inclined

Lagnus High. Little longer than wide. Roun ed is

Opisthonocus High. L nger than wide AiClesod Lo cae tok 20m000H Baa08GdG) SonaGoq9se0bcGa Goda HcDaceo God baondadcsbatonoadocos ued baconce

votes i longer than wide , -.| Behind. Convex

Mago pad dbs Truncated Convex

Oedipus Slanting .. Convex

Scartes Slanting

Janigeua . iar ae 3

Mithion .. Very long. ephalic part almost plane.| Not inclined

Lystrocteisa. bac ‘

Chaleolecta .

Lyssomanes . hanes

Jelskia . Long. i : $

Dpeus . Moder Bivens .| Behind miudle on 6 Cephalic part*plane.

Athamas Short quadrate. .... .. Heer a0 6 Almost vertical. . RGN ACLUN tneerneca OOOH bdas:c)iconocnaoe|PonGuReboahoN cenhitacanreae cin

TABLE II.

ANALYSIS OF GENERA OF THE FAMILY ATTIDAS—Continued,

QUADRANGLE OF EYES.

First Row oF EYEs.

Seconp Row oF Eyes.

Tarp Row or Eyes

Eyes

ase Width Lin |O. hat Middl 1 b Equally distant

4 5 2 Baca. idth equal in | Occupying wha . iddle eyes ‘ Halfway betwee =, quailty distan|

Laie As long Op Gage than How musliadey Biagori acronis or | front and be-| proportion of In se ounved Onin 4) ‘touching yes ater eyes touching or Nearer to! anterior or! See andl i Size compared |Further from each other| from each oth-

wide. i. is hind: Cephalot’rax, ig separated. p h posterior eyes, terior eyes, with lateral eyes.| or from lateral borders er on lateral

orders.

sg. Sandalodes. 3 |, Wider .. Equal. . Curved... Separated ....| Separated Haltwaygencernmen| tceeeies cess cececs Each other

cane 3 + wider “Behind. 4 Straight. .| Touching. Touching or separated]. Smaller or equal.| Each other

Marptu B} At least } Behind. traight or curved.) Separated . eebarated Smaller or equal.) Each other.

BPpiblemui 3 pea.

Philaeus

Ballus

Simeetha

Dendryphautes. : J

Attus

Pellene:

Menemerus.

Hasarius

Boethus.

Blurillus

Yilenus .

May

Vie

Bavia.

Buophyrs

Eris.

Neon

Homalattus

Habrocestum

See

Gy r bat

Phlegra

Saitis

Newtha

‘Thyene ..

Plexippus

Zs enodorus

Bhidippu

Cocalus

Chirothecia .

Discocnemius

Diolenius.

Ascyltu

Mopsus. :

Coccorchestes .

Omoedus.

Rhombon

Damoetas ..-

Synemosyna

Leptorchest

te sTgcles .

Agorius «

Salticus ,

Selaophora

THypoblemum .

Jona .

hero:

Lauharulla .

Pirithous..

Sinnamora

Margaromma ...

Prostheclina

Sobara

Ergane

Scwa..

Mago..

Oedipus

Scartes.

Janigena

Mithion .. .

Lystroctoisa

Chalcolecta

Lyssomanes:

Jelskia

pous ..

Athamas .

coco cossener cots nes co eee ea cote eh coca ocx co aco ente eon co men coun cacsee escncoes ce commences

fay a a co CoCo COCO CSCO CoCo COC

As long as wide .

“As long as wide.

“Longer than wide

As wide behin

Bi 0

Longer than wide .

Longer than wide

About as long as wide.

“Ns long as wide .. a

About +

Much longer than wide}.

Little behind,

Sometimes behind.

Behind. E

A little. .

At least } ¥

At least H

Little in front

Much behind.

Sometimes behind.

Little in front

Much bel

Little behind.

Sometimes

‘About twice as wide Tittle behind.

A little,

ar in front.

Wider . .

“Equal .

Wider .

Behind.

ais in front

pel hind...

Sometimes

Equal

Scarcely

Wider

Equal.

Sometimes

Equal.

Little wider.

-| Sometimes

In front, -| About equal.

.| In front.

About

More than-4,

Almost +

More than §.

Atleast | .

‘{] Much curved

ot4.. .

More than 4...

Straight or curved,

.| Straight or curved.

Straight or curved.

Little curved.

-| Much curved,

Straight or curved.

Little curved.

Straight

Q Straight or curved.

Curved J

Straight or curved.

4 Straight.

Curved

‘| Straight. ¢

Nearly straight

Curved

Curved. .

Little curved

sae

Curved

Sub-touching.

.| Separated ..

.| Touching -....

.| Sub-touching. .

'| Close together:

.| Close together.

.| Separated ...

Close together.

“Separated

Little separated|

.| Separated .....| Separated .

Near together.| Separated .

Little separated] Separated .

.| Littleseparated| Separated .

.| Sub-touching..].........-.

Separated ....| Separated .

Separated . Separated .

Touching. Separated .

dvianooer Widely separated

Separated A Separated .

.| Straight. 3 7 .| Touching ..

Curved... .| Separated . Separated

.| Straight or curved.) Separated . Separated .

Touching .

ve. 3

Touching

ee} parate

J See

Separated

eenartied

Separated

Separated -

Separated .

Sub‘ touching. .

Widely separated

Widely separated . .

.| Separated .

Sub-touching.

ogethe

Close together

-touching:

.| Separated ..

Close together.

Videly separated.

Close together.

Separated Saee

.| Anterior

Straight . .| Touching q

.| Straight. .| Separated ....] Separated .

.| Curved .| Near together.| Separated .

Straight. .| Separated ....| Separated .

Straigh' .| Separated ....| Separated .

Curved .| Separated . Widely sepa

.| Curved Separated ...

Curved. . d eed REEVE AGE Geboonaadond bos oonu|S

Usually curved. ...| Much separated] Much separated. Anterior

.| Curved. . .| Near together.| Separated ... Anterio?

.| Straight. Near together.) Near together

. Separated .

Anterior .

Posterior.

Anterior .

Posterior.

A ior .

Anterior .

Posterior.

Anterior .

.| Anterior .

Anterior .

Posterior.

.| Halfway

“Halfway

Halfway .

Halfway

Hallway .

Halfway .

Sometimes .

-| Smaller

‘Smaller .

Equal .

Smaller .

Smaller or qual.

Smaller or ea

Smaller .

Scarcely smaller,

At least as large.

Smaller .

-| Smaller .

.| Smaller

.| Scarcely smaller.

-| Smaller.

-| Smaller

-| Smailer ,

-| Smaller

Equal.

qual.

Smaller

Usually sm aller.

:] Bach other s

Each other

Each other. .

Bach other... .

Lateral borders

Each other.... .

Lateral borders

Each other.

Each other,

ner,

Each other.

Sometimes each other,

Lateral borders.

Sach other...

Bach

Each other

Bach other

‘Bach other.

Each other.

Lach othe

Each other,

Each other.

Lateral borders,

Each other...

Sometimes each other,

Lateral borders

Lach other,

‘Lateral borders

Lateral borders ,

ach other. .

Rach other.

Each other sometimes.

Each other sometimes,

Sometimes lat'l borders

Sometimes,

Sometimes

Sometimes,

Equally.

Sometimes,

ch other

hh other.

Shape.

2a POS ger aa ADS

Eee pete aids ol

OTS sea;

reich cise eliay cts

ee ee

ae SNe pete at oa

CIS ach

eer eee NEA

Nahe

]

Ses Bre a SR

Le =

TABLE III. :

, : ANALYSIS OF GENERA OF THE FAMILY ATTIDAE— Continued.

= = = —] ————————————— = —

STERNUM, Coxae. Ma q cnn

4 | Ist pair separated by

Length. Width. Shape. width of lip or by

’ less.

thickest,

longest.

Length. Shape.

Which pair

| Which pair

Length, Shape,

)

Sandalodes....... vet eecseerecssecesee-( Narrow .......... oosead : ++) 3 /onger than lip ........... = : |

Tcius ..... F i :

Marptusa . a : :

., Longer than wide

Epitlemum os a a9 O90 : ;

Philaeus ..

Ballus .. :| Wider than 2nd and 3d coxae i

Simatha .

B Asi widelas|theisticoxasusmmmmmescl| eee ae eeoe Nomoseay[ruicr tiezereer scien ssocee|seen\:|ssencnee ’

Dendryphantes, Rather narrow ....

Attus......

Pellenes ..

Menemerus

Hasarius .

Boethus... nlotone o|p2o sb spendessbonsaasaudGad EobsaBnaaaoen

MDMlurilus Long disoa.a About the width .. . d Bes 5 Mec.

Yilenus . Short . 4 ed By less.... Ly 5 9 desea

Viciria . Rather short , a x: E ; At least by width ae 2 E aren Nrarly } longer ¢

Bavia... Rather short . .| About width of 2d and 3d coxae. Alves 5 ..| By width at least. 5 Twice as long as wide

Luopbyrs . Often wider than 2d and 3d voxae : .| By width ..... 2 if

Eris... As narrow as 2d and 8d coxae ,

Neon...... ; Wider than 2d and 8d coxae,

Homalattus

0, | PRO DopnSoecreonopdcopadaG0 i b6.0 0c pdebusd baepaBBAE 6 u =e 4 i Broad as long .

Habrocestum, a6 ; a .| By Jess... ci dls é x A A, M a boat ebac ands

Heliophanus , ies ! i B q ....| By width . 5 dbecaesco 5 a cl . e RK TANNIN ODOR Te

Hyctia .. .. dteSEty eosin osudteds sdacne- -| Ist coxae touching. i 4 PaspeeoRB aoa a Braa a % ’ Narrow, long...) 6.

Cyrba, e 4 ¥ 4¢ -| At least by width ..... F 5 ;

Phlegra . ; d in front .| By width .. g ait i

Snitis ...

Twice as long as wide .......

SRS OnCnCnnT

a 6 iy hh.

Contracted in front. By width .

By width .

More t han twice as long as ° : About as long ‘as Wid eh ece sete cmeneal AVY ng and flattened

-| Moderately wide ......... .| Contracted in front .| By width

Newmtha , . 4 q| Ok coesesnca seacs

HINES) cocnooanal)| 1M] 9 ase peciaaedecGeeacunc’ eBeises Siero eee

Ploxippus . pote Go Banc « . . sfenee : .

Zenodorus . Parallel, sub-ovate. “ & »| Subsovate...,

Buryatus ., Parallel, sub-ovate. F A ov) Subsovate ,

Phidippus, : poo 5 3 a Ih “ : .

Cocalus . A poo

VEG) 32 cdoonecd he acacinoeayaadendaeneBcraed PAMUNORSROBERSeRe Ere concn coo pmounaabas Bo

Hyllus ide all o O60 4

Widerthun:2d) coxachs yt eemmeamnee rete mnraswec es azceea[ eat Wieland:

Wider than coxae . 59006

Wider than coxae .

+} A little longer than wide ...

te More than } as long as maxilla

Amyeus i 5 : P “ie i ; Narrow, oblong-oval

Phyale . 5 EA : O50 i ¢ 3 DUNO RHONAAC KOCK Orn oanA

Thiania i 5 é 9 +e 0 : oi

CITCUICTETO cca lasers aes eORo Sie ancaaee eee Imeeeoeae 5 5 Screen : cle

Discocnemius , 4 x

Diolonius , ,

Ascyltus .,

Mopsus ..,

Cuccorchi ste

Omoedus ,

ny at tip.

Wider than coxae.. .

: i ee : : : Narrow at base, wide at ti Longer th , Seite: .| Rounded at tip, Fi Truncated in front, high,

“i Wider than coxae Widely separated od annde Narrow at base, sub-ovate . scarcely or not wider thin long , .| Rounded at tip. A Short, truneatod in front

Rhombonotus ..., .| Narrow .... eae a0 : Convex, tip rounded....., Half as long as maxillae »o.,/ Rounded at tip, ; Oylindvion), conatrioted

Damoctas ...,,, - ...| Narrow 5 iS .| Convex, tip rounded, .. Scar Rounded at tip... .. Long, constricted, on

Synemosyna ate dhesane F * :] Tipitruncated) Sic. cseceecece sn dase ue aeeamitS HOT ERE fingee st eae Rounded at tip ‘ Long, constricted,

Loptorchestes 4 2d and 3d coxae. i q Seen A see . : Obtuse at tip

Syuugeles,, r Wider in middle than ¢d and 8d coxae, Bide 4 Rather short . of Me yuare a «| As wide as long ....... : Somb-ciroular

Agorius ... Much wider than coxae,......, Widely separated : Twice as long i S ; A

Saltious ... Very narrow a Fi a ewer r coe ee vise cangson soso ces s|| Tip\truncated! 0.41. ss.) .400 eee

Selaophora ng dl 7 = 7 y

Hypoblemum } longer than wide F

lona., } longer than wide . 7 5 a ad ce .

Therosa . -| Pwico as long as wide . i ea = s Z .| Dilated, rounded at tip : ‘ ne |

Oytwa .. | Longer than wide ., ae i ‘al . ‘i ) Dilated, rounded at tip - | maxilla

WON Gh .| Longer than wide . i a "| A joncaces boeaatoc +c. keeaaee Dilated at tip... fe AON Cases euninsees on Poteet eee eeens

TLauharntla, »| Longer than wide , e aay Heart-shaped. . F i denne Wider than Hea Rounded at tip Orel

Pirithous .. | Longer than wide . . 5 Small 5 j 2 of. i : - | Dilated at tip .... Longer than w . A f VOM ie eeesces

Sinpanora . Longer than wide . Selene ef d : 4 . Pome is rsa iclececys cic | Dilated, rounded a

Bianov,, ‘Twice as loog as wide... .).. : ij i i

Asta. ci y

Longer than wide

Not longer than wide

aiuereMipiebi[alelce'elevsy, cle ele ate cordate .

Jotus ., | Much longer than wide , : F «| Ovate conve:

Mar.omma .. Longer than wide...

Prosthoclina ,

Sobarn .,

Long, narrow .

Jonger than wide...

vate, (eunouted in front

one F eban Rounded in front, pointed Hwhind,

{as lon: eat tip... ....] Short, ovate

ler if.

Rather long.

Oval convex ,

4 as long ns maxilla ........., ? Narrowing it tip..cesscceesses ses] Ovato .,,

0 vies i] Plane rounded -.| Wideattip....... > - «.| More than 4} a8 long as maxillae Narrowing and truncated at tip..J Long, na

Brgine ves : : Bencuisamcsac ; i long as lip . ; Bu hE cig net Rie ; witewallef RO sree eens

Sowa... aga ‘ .| Ovate corda: y a . : aie

TLagnus .... Short . arte a : .| Plane .

Opisthonus .....| Long , 7

Bootes ,

ong as lip... ted ant. and lat. margins form «| More than § as Jong os maxillae

' d p

Dilated and rounded at tip.. More than } a8 long as maxdine, y dand truneated at tip ..

Dilated and rounded at tip .

i vex .

Nearly round.

length of maxill.e not longer tha OEP ssccosseenae

Dilated and rounded at tip . ri bout } a8 long us maxillae,.. Contracted and rounded at tiy

Jonigona, cave vs Gntea Pook ei he a bere

Mithion ... d 4 i

Lyastrocteivn

Chalooloeta

Lysaomanes

folsttin ....., Sites os ae

Bpous........ ‘ - -| Scarce wider than coxae 9d a

Athamas..... .. apaon

Vertical, jaclined or Vert!

horizontal,

--| Vertical.

Vertical.

‘Hub-verticnl

Inclined backward

Vertical. ,

Sul

| orward,.

Inclined forwara.,

Vertical

» Vertion

Inclined ,

Vertical or oblique.

Vertienl,, F

Inchinet,

Vortloal, vccivuevas

Vertical of inselined

Tnelincod Ar

, Yeristoat.

Vertical...

Vertical,

Alinoat vertical .

it v ‘

Altiost vertioal .

Sub-vertioal

Vortival

TABLE Iv.

ANALYSIS OF GENERA OF THE FAMILY ATTID-E—Concladed.

ical, inclined or Diverging or not

horizontal. diverging.

Robust or weak.

.| Not diverging

p-vertical.

Inclined backward).

Vertical,

Vertical or oblique |...

Vortical........-

Vertical...

Vertical

Vertical or inclined ...

Inclined ..

Vertical,

Vertica!

Vertica

Vertical,

Robust....

Not robust .

arly vi .

Robust .

Slender .

extended , s Reeae sens

».| Robust

Robust

Vortloal. veces EM

De.

Not diverging.

.| Not diverging.

Diverstog. aA

.| Not diverging.

Not diverging.

Relative length of legs, Relative length of legs, Which leg or legs

&. 3. most robust.

Shorter than face.

| Shorter than face

4 much l'ng’r than face

-| Rather short

+) Shorter than face

Short...

»| Short

. About as long as face...

Longer than face

«| As long os face...

«| Shorter than face

+| Shorter than face

Not long ...

Rather long

+| Long ..

«| Shore ..

Long ..

Short ..

-| Short ..

«| Short ..

«| Short

Short

+, Short

«| Short

+) Short

| Short

+ Short

+) Short

Length of tibia and!

1482...

Urd or 1

«| 4

©) 4312 4189 or 1459

~-2.{ 1483 of 4189.

«| 4183.

~ BH2..

«| 4128 or 4132 ++) 4123 or 4182

+] 1423. «} 1423..

Pht: Pass «| 4182,,,

4182 or 4312 «| 4182 or 4312

Bale. 9) ABI. conan nvnone

Ble «| SI2 or 1542

142.

I :

{| 1482 or 4132 .... 4 ranaaeie

4182.

“Bal

‘lst

142.

1423,

1428.

1243.

.| Short, nearly equal

13M or 3124.

4912 or Ale.

IEW aces vs

| 4th longest .. .

Much shorte)

Much aborter,

: aah

1] Uwually bongs.

-+>| Longer or equal.

equal

trans,

These

Tham

Thee

ort or equal Aborto...

etereee

Sef We eereeeeeey

dee reetbeneneen

sph eter eeheeevene

ewatus “

Shorter or equal, .

"a ee hast"

Sep ee ee ene re®

TRANSACTIONS

OF THE

WISCONSIN ACADEMY

sciences, Arts, and Letters.

MOL. Mil. LSss=si7.

MADISON, WISCONSIN:

DEMOCRAT PRINTING COMPANY, STATE PRINTERS.

1889.

TABLE OF CONTENTS TO VOL. VII.

Attida of North America, by George W. and Elizabeth G. Peck- ee

Recimn weEtiia, Plates de Vibe) oi c6 se Vre wrkyeld Sialic scabs) ne ebotaterneeoa eeageen 1-104

The Morels and Puff-Balls of Madison, by William Trelease

Roh de deatet) Vale TOK yor os Ginie we wists ava avalarm walete ote les d ehaver a tMotey olny aeietenaes 105-120

The Working of the Madison Lakes, by William Trelease (with

PAM? Soc hea Gon ests adad vein WNT HUN aig 121-129

Village Community and Serfdom in England, by Wm. F. Allen.. 130-140

Town, Township and Tithing, by Wm. F. Allen.................. 141-154

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin, by W. K. Higley.......... 155-176

Raised Beaches of Lake Michigan, by Frank Leverett.......... 177-192

On the Employment of the Method of Least Squares in the Re-

duction of Transit Observations, by T. H. Safford............. 193-204

The So-called Elephant Mound in Grant County and Effigies in

the Region Surrounding it, by S. D. Peet ................0.... 205-220

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomanz, by G. W. and E. G. Peck-

ham and Wm. H. Wheeler (with Plates XI. and XII.).......... 222-256

avi wonover, Dy Wars Ho Allene sain lata brews send siete ameter 257-258

Proceedings of the Academy since December, 1883.............. 259-268

PESTER EEC IIUO OL Sie Als os oe aa ocaiaie sicaiinte BOO Gialic aba tatate aver wwheustovateve's heveies 269-270

OFFICERS

OF THE

WISCONSIN ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, ARIS AND LETTERS.

Term expires December 27th, 1890.

PRESIDENT:

WM. F. ALLEN,

Professor of History, University of Wisconsin.

VICE-PRESIDENTS:

Department of Sciences —F. H. KING, i

Professor of Agricultural Physics, University of Wisconsin.

Department of Arts— A. J. ROGERS,

Department of Physics, Milwaukee High School.

Department of Letters —J. J. BLAISDELL,

Professor in Beloit College.

SECRETARY:

GEO. W. PECKHAM,

Principal Milwaukee High School.

LIBRARIAN:

E. A. BIRGE,

Professor of Zoology, University of Wisconsin.

CURATOR OF MUSEUM:

C. R. VAN HISE,

Professor of Geology, University of Wisconsin.

TREASURER:

Hon. 8S. D. HASTINGS,

Madison.

ATTIDAZ OF NORTH AMERICA.

GEORGE W. anp ELIZABETH G. PECKHAM.

INTRODUCTION.

On account of the habits of the Attide they are, in comparison with

other families, poorly represented in collections. The most important con-

tribution to the knowledge of North American species is the work of N. M.

Hentz, his studies having been largely carried on in the southern states.

The papers of Hentz were originally published in the Journal of the Boston

Society of Natural History, from 1842-45, but are found in more convenient

form in the collection made by Burgess in 1875. The works of Baron

Walckenaer, 1837-47, and that part of Die Arachniden, by C. Koch, pub-

lished in 1846, contain discriptions of many American Attidze, but owing to

the vagueness of the descriptions comparatively few can be identified with

certainty. So far as Koch is concerned this is of slight importance, as his

work was preceeded by that of Hentz. But with Walckenaer the question

of priority comes up, as doubtless many of the species commonly ascribed to

Hentz were first published by him, and he should be credited with ail such

species as can be identified from his descriptions. The important question

is, what species can be identified by Walckenaer’s descriptions?

We have made a very careful study of the descriptions of Walckenaer’s

sixty-four species, comparing them with nearly all Hentz’s species and

with many others from different sources and we have been able to identify

only four.

On the subject of priority we agree with Dr. Thorell that ‘‘ to reject a

name, as some have proposed to do, on account of ‘defectiveness in the defi-

nition, would seem not to be right, as leaving room for much arbitrariness.

What seems to one good enough may to another appear insufficient or faul-

ty. When one only knows with certainty what is to be understood by such

a name, every one can either alter or improve the characterization for

himself.!” We wish it to be understood that we reject none of Walck-

enaer’s species on account of defectiveness of definition. We accept them

whenever we are able to identify them.

Walckenaer’s work on North American species was largely based on the

manuscript plates of Abbot. He does not, so far as we know, state express-

ly that he has seen any of the specimens, but that he has examined most

of them must be understood from the following statement which he makes

before enumerating thirteen ‘species. «Les espéces suivantes n’out pas été

observées par nous, et ne sont placeés dans cette section que sur les indica-

tions fournies par les figures de l'ovurage MSS. d’Abbot, intitulé: Georgian

Spiders. ” -

1 On European Spiders, I., p. 5. The italics in the concluding sentence are ours.

4 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters

Had Walckenaer published Abbot’s plates in connection with his descrip-

tions it would doubtless have been easy to identify many-of his species, but

as the law of priority deals only with published matter, his claim to species

must rest upon his descriptions alone, although Abbot’s manuscript plates

may be seen in the British Museum. In the event of their publication at

some future time, such species as are identifiable, for the first time, through

the figures, must be ascribed to Abbot at that date, and not to Walckenaer.

A good example of the difficulties of dealing with Walckenaer may be

found in a species which he published in his first volume as Attus proter-

vus, a black spider with black legs and palpi. In his fourth volume he

refers to this species, saying: ‘‘ Add to the synonymy Plexippus undatus

Koch.” Now there is no doubt that this last mentioned spider is identical

with Attus vittatus (é) Hentz, one of our most common species. The de-

scription and figure of Koch represent it fairly well as a dark spider with

chevrons of white hair, and yellow legs and palpi. Asa matter of fact the

general appearance is very seldom so dark as would appear from Koch,

who seems to have described from a single specimen. If, indeed, Walcke-

naer’s A. protervus and Koch’s Pl. undatus are identical, Walckenaer’s de-

scription is absolutely false and bears no resemblance to the species. We

can only suppose that Walckenaer was mistaken in thinking them identical.

We have callections from various parts of North America. Those of

Count Keyserling (containing a number of type-specimens) and of Mr. Nic-

olas G. Pike have been of especial use to us. We are also indebted for

specimens to the following persons. The locality in which each collection

was made is indicated after the name of the sender.

Miss Edith Gifford, Mexico; Mr. Chas. Mann, Louisiana, Florida; Mr. Fr.

Rauterberg, Texas; Miss Augusta Tovell, Texas; Mr. Thos. Gentry, North

Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia; Mr. F. 8. Risley, Florida; Col. J. J.

Young, Pennsylvania; Mr. Philip Nell (for many specimens), Pennsylvania;

Mrs. Mary B. Putnam, Iowa, Utah; Mr. Aurelius Todd, Oregon; Miss Mur-

ray, California; Mr. L. E. Ricksecker, California; Prof. J. J. Rivers, Cali-

fornia; Mr. W. G. Harford, California, Washington Territory; Mr. W. G.

Wright, California; Prof. O. B. Johnson, Washington Territory; Dr. F.

Brendel, Illinois; Mr. Philip Abbot, Massachusetts; Mr. H. Van Rensselaer,

Connecticut; J. B. Tyrrell, Esq. (Geol. Survey of Canada), Canada, Rocky

Mountains; Rev. H. C. McCook, various parts of United States; M. BH. Si-

mon, Mexico; Dr. Ferdinand Karsch, collection of Attidee of Royal Mu-

seum of Berlin (containing many North American specimens. )

North American Attidz have been described by the following writers:

WALCKENAER: Hist. Nat. des Insectes Aptéres, 1837 ?-47.

N. M. Hentz: Occasional Papers, 1842-45.

C. Kocu: Die Arachniden, 1846.

GIEBEL: Illinois Spiders, Zeitschrift fur Gesammten Naturwissenschaften,

1869.

J. BLACKWALL: Spiders from Canada, Ann. & Mag. of Nat. Hist.

Attide of North America. 5

T. THORELL: Spiders of Colorado, Bull. of Hayden's U. S. Survey of the

Territories.

E. KEYSERLING: Neue Spinnen aus Amerika, VI.

H. C. McCook: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. of Philadelphia, 1883.

PeEcKHAM: Descr. new or little known Attidee, 1883.

The Attide have usually a high cephalothorax with almost vertical sides,

and short and thick extremities, although there are many exceptions. Per-

haps the position and relative size of the eyes —in which they most nearly

approach the Lycosidee—is of most value in defining the family. The

eyes are arranged in three or four transverse rows, three in the sub-family

Attinee and four in the sub-family Lyssomanz. In the former the first

row is composed of four eyes, the middle ones being the largest; the second

row is composed of two very small eyes, and the third of two of medium

size. In the Lyssomanae, the two outer eyes of the first row are placed so

far back as to divide it into two transverse rows; otherwise the eyes are

alike. The spiders are, many of them, very brilliantly colored —as much so

as are the humming birds or beetles. As the markings are commonly

formed of colored hairs or scales, they change considerably when the spider

is wet, and are moreover, very easily rubbed off. The entire appearance of

a spider may thus be changed, and its identification rendered difficult, if

not impossible. The Attide, like the birds, moult frequently, and at each

moult the markings may change, so that some of the older writers have

formed several species for the different moults of one. These difficulties are

increased by the fact that the adult males and females of a species usually

differ considerably in appearance.

Although a great many species have been described, we have been able to

identify but a limited number. The Attidee live on the ground, on plants,

and on trees, jumping on their prey. They form no web, but generally at-

tach a line when they jump, to save themselve in case they miss their aim.

The females place the cocoon under leaves or bark and spin some cross lines,

under which they stand until the eggs are hatched.

Of the fifty-five species described by Hentz, we have identified forty-five.

Of the ten remaining, probably five or six are varieties of those that we

have described, but this being uncertain, we have not included them.

The key which follows is useful only in determining the species described

in this paper:

KEY TO GENERA OF NORTH AMERICAN ATTID.

Me ERY CHS IEA MEAL ONES 0.0 1s 215'c'n wvag oltisie ie etna Mela Siism sic calele 6 LYSSOMANES.

Poe ELV GSPLE RECON TOW su .c id 00 sie sere cere era DEG were aie ciocb SNe StS «cae 3

Ue ody slender, ant-lke, legsiweaki. 0. jess ace coos cece nase dened 5

POU Ye NOt SLONGSr IEOR ANU -LUKO 4 d,s oo .sre Sin felercid winlale os ora eee oe aise 9

5. Cephalic part higher than thoracic; lip much longer than wide

SALTICUS.

6. Cephalic part not higher than thoracic: lip as wide as long 7

oS t=]

6 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

7. Thoracic part divided by a marked constriction into a shorter an-

terior and a longer posterior portion; quadrangle of eyes wider

than long........ Se aadlehy NS dans ooo eh see eye nerey ees CiLam ele eae SYNEMOSYNA.

8. Thoracic part not divided; quadrangle of eyes much longer than

WLGE's ciel Bisa clelsie re Be siece sitmoteneie 6 Grains gee cere ee tien eh ee ae SYNAGELES.

92) Cephalic partiay least as long as thoracic ea). eee i6f

10) “Cephalic partishorter than thoraciens- seas. e ee eee 21

11. Cephalic part occupying 3 of the cephalothorax........ * HOMALATTUS.

12. Cephalic part occupying plainly less than 3 of cephalothorax..... 13

13. Spiders very small—not so much as 3 mm. long................. 15

14) © Spiders'* not very Small. coe nie. - ject ut cie ates er- cist clei eee 17

15. Quadrangle of eyes equally wide in front ard behind, legs 4, 3, il, 2

4 NEON.

16. Quadrangle of eyes wider behind, legs 4, 1, 2,3.............. BALLUS.

17. Quadrangle of eyes equally wide in front and behind; first row

strongly curved; cephalothorax very convex, with cephalic part

strongly inclined forward, and falling steeply behind... AGOBARDUS.

18. Quadrangle of eyes wider behind; first row straight or very

slightly curved; shape of cephalothorax unlike the above....... 19

19. Cephalothorax high, nearly as wide as long; dorsal eyes at widest

point of cephalothorax, opposite a corner, and projecting; quad-

drangle of eyes, looked at from above, seeming to occupy # of

Cephalothoraiey nt ..i8s yeni eh teemerse crease tla On Carne eee ZYGOBALLUS.

20%) MUmiltke the above: csc sels Ge cele, suey a ind tee eee ERIs.

21. Quadrangle of eyes wider in front..................-0ceeeeeeeeess 20

22. Quandrangle of eyes wider behind, or equally wide in front and

| cfc) dUbGYS PARAS ener Seta it RACER aol HOME neh art La lc Glo. o' Y.0.0.0.0 a7

23. First row of eyes straight; patella + tibia III shorter than patella

feb MOT TV a cece sche bieevelaayeleysre have ele dinuele neti telle 4ltgs anes aaet ey ae ASTIA.

24, First row of eyes curved; patella + tibia III equal to patella +

tibia VE eer BUS ON An Mu or nMOS MO NOHIIEGE Haha 1455 0 90.06 0 25

25. Dorsal eyes nearer to each other than to lateral borders; legs (¢)

RE S-BUS ten eee MN iy uals GI ia hc PROSTHECLINA.

26. Dorsal eyes further from each other than from lateral borders;

Less Gs no!) AB) NON Ve NS aaa 5 SAITIS.

1The cephalic part extends from the anterior margin of the lateral eyes of the first row

to the posterior margin of the eyes of the third row.

2The only North American species of this genus yet known has metallic reflections, and

when the spider is looked at from above the cephalic part seems to occupy nearly the whole

cephalothorax.

3 Zygobullus sexpunctatus H. is only 3mm. long, but is distinguished from Neon and

Ballus by its peculiar falces, as well as by the shape, and greater height of its cephalo-

thorax.

4In Neon the dorsal eye is plainly larger than the anterior lateral.

5In Saitis legs III and IV are much longer than I and II, while in Prostheclina the differ-

ence is not so marked.

of.

45,

46.

47.

48.

49,

Attide of North America. a

1Cephatolthorax high, massive; quadrangle of eyes plainly wider

(often much wider) behind; first row of eyes usually curved;

Reon Aros ope 1 4 OY Aa Sen OR ae Se We Bisas ons eile acess ap 29

Hlirat cer ETes AO MON a: och) coe eaNelanctanehe tsp ah cuaisvopasne sh o)eia stesso eaters eleven eh etanecese 33

MCC SMa ome UA Oy SHOR Aw Ue Sue any salle bves osc; svaralwilsietherste 31

ee emeh Meee nae. OAc ous. ciw aston aroha ete iets eens re suse wccustdueleierdt a! PLEXIPPUS.

Eyes of second row twice as far from dorsal as from lateral eyes.

PHIDIPPUS.

Eyes of second row halfway or about halfway between lateral and

GOESASVOS roi Ae epee iets cake sell ey cksbe Le eee ey eee Oe etre PHILZUS.

hurdilesslongest. fowrbthy next. aye <.)2ie<)oc-are ota ee HABROCESTUM.

[salle cup ON Ours seve ete rssh ay verso Serd sisters WS aval els oh care eae ee 3D

Cephalothorax convex, and high, or moderately high............ 51

Apa OvMOKA Rs LO Waam cl flats es. Sects cele) c + sicleis «dsl; ¢ a cidvemevaees sere 37,

Abdomen at least four times as long as wide; cephalothorax low

and flat, not wider than third row of eyes; legs of first pair very

EROS ey ee a ore a cf Ss cies oy sate aay olay ea cp apevetavo}rys cuapanateeara akc id ah cleupatsteparens Jahyosu le

Winlike the above’ < ci. <)s.24.. susie sleicls oss goeceoaoucobodsnobeoossosuc 39

Spines only on metatarsi of first pair...................- ? ADMESTINA.

Hee Al Me PUINC OLS so) - atic sieve cain) tavatstne elai si clole eo akeela a otal aatnctales sistem ele Al

Cephalothorax plainly wider than third row of eyes, quadrangle

equallyawide im front ands behind yeeno. nea Sos Suis ate 43

arte URS AONE 25 oad iciS «1. anni Maushsn sehage slaje Sate Satets leva suelo: Golaletemaiauwa teke 45

Quadrangle of eyes 4 wider than long, occupying 2 of cephalo-

thorax; lateral eyes of first row separated by not more than +

their own diameter from middle eyes.................- MENEMERUS..

Quadrangle of eyes } wider than long, occupying 4+ of cephalo-

thorax; lateral eyes of first row separated by at least + their own

diameter from middle eyes . TBO MEE SHER eR aoe noe .. MARPTUSA.

Middle eyes of first row three ides as ee ge as later nike eyes; quad-

rangle of eyes nearly twice as wide as long. ............ SSADALA.

Middle eyes of first row about twice as large as lateral eyes; quad-

rangle of eyes not more than 4 wider than long................ AX

Metatarsi III and IV with spines only in terminal circles; legs never

(CA) aE as 2 GY aoeals ey 2 C(O) Zot Bh PA wae cigh ll, oo en cdeoc Ictus.

Metatarsi III and IV with spines throughout their length; legs (4)

Pad OD orult 85.9) /A=\( Or) Ae eae Oro a vote 2k ek. fake ye 4D

Coxae I nearly touching; legs (4) 4, 1, 2, 3;(¢)4, 1, 3, 2; quadran-

1 Spiders in this group except Phidippus rufus, Phileeus militaris, and Plexippus puer

perus are large, from 8 to 16 mm (commonly about 10 mm) in length. The sides of the

cephalic part are usually much swollen.

2 Our only species of Admestina is small, not more than 4m m long.

3 Sadala is distingulshed from Jcius by having spines throughout the length of the meta-

tarsi of the third and fourth legs, and by having the leg formula 1, 4, 2,3. Our only species

of Sadala is from Mexico.

8 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

gle of eyes 4 wider than long; middle anterior eyes touching;

eyes of second row a little nearer the lateral than the dorsal eyes,

Mt CYRBA.

50. Coxae lI separated by width of labium; legs (¢) 1, 8, 2, 4;(?) 4,8,

1, 2; quadrangle of eyes less than one third wider than long; mid-

dle anterior eyes subtouchinz; eyes of second row halfway be-

tween lateraltanddorsalveyesancrece asses ee een CYT A.

ole” Birsterow,or (eyes sbralehtit i jas. tee secre aac On ees 35

52. Mirstrow Of eyes Curved ica. eau coh el os aahe eee eee 59

538. Middle eyes of first row touching.........................+++-.- 3)

54. Middle eyes of first row not quite touching ...................... dT

55. Metatarsi III and IV with spines only in terminal circles; quad-

rangle of eyes equally wide in front and behind; eyes of second

row half way between lateral and dorsal eyes........... EPIBLEMUM.

56. Metatarsi ITT and IV spined throughout their length; quadrangle

of eyes wider behind; eyes of second row nearer the lateral than

the dorsalieyes. cent cnten ehae cele ae eee coe e ER OeEe AttTus E. 8.

57. Lateral eyes of first row nearly touching middle eyes; eyes of sec-

ond row nearer lateral than dorsal eyes; legs (¢) 1, 4, 2, 3; (2)

AR WAG Be NO lala Cae sigce dat Shad Wie Weta: At a a a0 44) Ao a PSEUDICIUS.?

58. Lateral eyes of first row separated by + their own diameter from

middle eyes; eyes of second row not nearer lateral than dorsal

eyes; legs (¢) these AN (sO! Ae 23. wallet kara 8 eels eo ee HASARIUS.

59. Dorsal eyes nearer to each other than to lateral borders....... MAVIA.

60. Dorsal eyes further from each other than from lateral borders.... 61

61. Quadrangle equally wide in front and behind; legs 4, 3, 2,1......

ATTus W.?

62. Quadrangle wider behind; legs not 4, 3, 2,1......... DENDRYPHANTES.

The following tables are useful only for spiders described in this paper.

They are designed to furnish an easy method for determining species. To

use them, determine the relative length of the legs of the spider in ques-

tion and find the corresponding formula in the tables. This will usually

place the spider in a group of four or five genera, rendering it a compara-

tively easy matter to determine the genus. When the difference between

two legs is extremely slight they are placed together with a dash above.

The tables do not include the genera Synemosyna, Synageles, Salticus and

Lyssomanes; Dendryphantes multicolor also does not appear since our only

specimen has but three legs.

1 It requires practice to distinguish a straight from a slightly curved row of eyes, but

since these genera are only represented by three species the difficulty will be inconsider-

able. E. scenicum is a dark spider with two oblique white bands on each side of the abdo-

men; A. palustris has two white spots near the center of the dcrsum of the abdomen;

A. imperialis has four snowy white oblique bands on the face and falces and a ring of white

on the distal end of the femur of the palpus.

41 Our only species of this genus is from west of the Rocky Mountains. °

3 The species which we leave in Attus Walck. It being only represented by an immature

specimen we do not determine its genus.

Attide of North America.

TABLE OF LEG FORMULZ FOR MALES.

1234

PLEXIPPUS puerperus.

1324

CyYT2ZA minuta.

a 2s

PHIDIPPUS Mexicanus.

PHIDIPPUS arizonensis.

PHIDIPPUS insolens.

PHIDIPPUS johnsonii.

PHIDIPPUS octopunctatus.

PHILAUS chrysis.

DENDRYPHANTES capitatus.

DENDRYPHANTES flavipedes.

AmTtus palustris.

ATTUS imperialis.

Ictus albovittatus.

Icrus palmarum.

Hyctia pikei.

MARPTUSA familiaris.

MarptTvsa californica.

MENEMERUS melanagnathus.

HoMALATTUS cyaneus,

ZYGOBALLUS sexpunctatus.

ZYGOBALLUS bettini.

SADALA distincta.

1432

Ictus piraticus.

Icrus mitratus.

MENEMERUS paykullii.

AGOBARDUS anormalis.

CYRBA teeniola.

BALLUS youngii.

431%

SAITIS pulex.

13542

HASARIUS hoyi.

PROSTHECLINA cambridgii.

1423

PHIDIPPUS rufus.

PHIDIPPUS morsitans.

PHIDIPPUS cardinalis.

PHILAUS niilitaris.

DENDRYPHANTES elegans.

MviA californica.

EPIBLEMUM scenicum.

eA eoRS

PSEUDICIUS harfordii.

14 3 2

ASTIA morosa.

ao412

HABROCESTUM coronatum.

HABROCESTUM viridipes.

HABROCESTUM peregrinum.

HABROCESTUM auratum.

HABROCESTUM hirsutum.

HABROCESTUM splendens.

HABROCESTUM oregonense.

Ayivon 2

ASTIA vittata.

ADMESTINA wheelerii.

4312

PLEXIPPUS putnamii.

NEON nellii.

—_

ATTUS cautus.

10 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

TABLE OF LEG FORMULA FOR FEMALES.

1423 tS 2

ERIS octavus. PHILZUS mexicanus.

ERIS nervosus. Icrus palmarum.

Hyctia pikei.

148.2 428

DENDRYPHANTES flavus. PSEUDICIUS harfordii.

3412 4123

HABROCESTUM coecatum. PHIDIPPUS morsitans.

HABROCESTUM Viridipes. PHIDIPPUS galathea.

HABROCESTUM cristatum. PHIDIPPUS m’cookii.

HABROCESTUM auratum. PHIDIPPUS opifex.

HABROCESTUM splendens. DENDRYPHANTES alboimmaculatus.

he ATTUS palustris.

4123 Ictus lineatus.

ZYGOBALLUS bettini.

A BB AW BS

PHIDIPPUS rauterbergii. Ictus mitratus.

PHIDIPPUS miniatus.

PHILAUS fartilis. 4132

PHILZUS militaris. PHIDIPPUS rufus.

DENDRYPHANTES capitatus. PHIDIPPUS obscurus.

CYRBA teeniola. PHIDIPPUS insolens.

MARPTUuSA familiaris. PHIDIPPUS albomaculatus.

MARPTUSA californica. PHIDIPPUS johnsonii.

BALLUS youngil. PHIDIPPUS otiosus.

PHILAUS farneus.

4312 PHILZUS chrysis.

HASARIUS hoyi. PHILAUS princeps.

PROSTHECLINA cambridgii. PHILZUS rimator.

ASTIA vittata. DENDRYPHANTES elegans.

CyT#A minuta. ERIS barbipes.

MENEMERUS melanognathus. EPILBEMUM scenicum.

AGOBARDUS anormalis.

LS 02

4312 SAITIS pulex.

ASTIA morosa.

4312

PLEXIPPUS puerperus.

Attide of North America. lt

PHIDIPPUS (C. KOCH.)

Cephalothorax high and convex, contracted in front and behind, sides

Syn.:

usually widely rounded, especially in ¢, cephalic part inclined for-

ward, and separated from the thoracic by a depression; thoracic part

slanting, at first gradually and then more steeply from the dorsal eyes.

Quadrangle of eyes + wider than long (excepting arizonensis, which

is + wider than long, and opifex which is } wider than long), wider

behind than in front; anterior eyes small, in a curved row, the mid-

dle not more than twice as large as the lateral, and but little separ-

ated; the lateral separated from them by from 4 to 3 their own

diameter; eyes of second row twice as far from dorsal as from lateral

eyes; eyes of third row about as large as lateral eyes, at least as

far from each other as from the lateral borders. Third row of eyes

narrower than the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus from } to

4 as high as large middle eyes, vertical. Falces usually stout and

nearly twice as long as face. Labium longer than wide, about 4 as

long asmaxillae. Sternum deep set, projecting between the anterior

coxee which are separated by width of labium or a little less. Legs.

(¢)1, 4, 2, 3;(2)4, 1, 2, 8, or 4, 1, 3, 2; first lee stoutest, with femur

and tibia enlarged and compressed, stouter than patella, and much

stouter than metatarsus and tarsus. Tibia and patella of the first

usually a little shorter than cephalothorax; tibia and patella of the

third shorter than tibia and patella of the fourth; tibia and patella of

the fourth at least as long as metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth.

Femoral, tibial, metatarsal and sometimes patellary spines on the

four pairs; metatarsi of the fourth, spined throughout their length.

PHIDIPPUS MORSITANS WaALCKENAER.

Plate I, figures 1,1a. Plate 11, figure 1.

1837. ? ATTUS morsitans Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insectes Apteéres, I. p.

432.

1844. es audax Hentz, Journal Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. IV.

1845. és tripunctatus id., ibid., Vol. V.

1846. PHIDIPPUS variegatus C. K., Die Arachn., XIII, p. 125.

1846. ‘“ purpurifer id., ibid., XIII, p. 127.

1846. * smaragdifer id., ibid., XIII, p. 128.

1846. “ alchymista id., ibid., XIII, p. 131.

1846. “ rufimanus id., ibid., XIII, p. 182.

1846. * lunulatus id., ibid., XIII, p. 133.

1846. * mundulus id., ibid., XIII, p 137.

12 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Syn.: 1847. Artus morsitans Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insectes Aptéres, IV,

p. 419.

1875. AtTTUS audax HENTZ, Coll. Arachn. Writings ed. by Bur-

gess, Boston, p. 50.

1875. “ tripunctatus id., ibid., p. 58.

1883. aS fs Peckham, Descr. new or little known,

Attidee, p. 33.

6. Total length 11mm. Width of abdomen 4.3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 5.3; width 5.1; height 2.8. Legs: 11, 9.1, 9.1, 10.7;

patella and tibia of the first, 5.5; patella and tibia of the third, 3.2;

patella and tibia of the fourth, 4; metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth, 4.

Lateral separated from middle eyes by } their diameter. Clypeus 4 as

high as large as middle eyes. Maxille slightly diverging, wide at

extremity, with a projection at the outer corner, inner margin slant-

ing toward Jabium. Labium 4 as long as maxille, contracted and

rounded at tip. Sternum convex, oval. Anterior coxee separated by

width of labium.

¢. Total length 15mm. Width of abdomen 5.6 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 5.5; width 4.4; height 2.2.

Legs 10.6, 9, 9, 12.1; patella and tibia of the first, 4.2; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.4; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.2; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 3.2.

Relative length of legs 4, 1, 2, 3.

Coloration. 6.92. Cephalothorax black, covered with short black and

gray hairs, and having some long black hairs on the sides near the

small median eyes; there are sometimes white bands on the sides.

Clypeus covered with white hairs. Femur of palpus reddish, with a

black band on inner side, three black spines, and some black and white

hairs. The falces are bright iridescent green, with reddish fangs.

The sternum and venter are black, the venter having two whitish lon-

gitudinal bands which approach each other, but terminate near the

apex without meeting. The abdomen is black, with thick, short,

black hairs, and some long white hairs; at the middle point isa large,

more or less triangular, white spot; posterior to this are two smaller,

somewhat oblique, white spots; lower down, and nearer the apex

than these, but ina line with them, are two minute white dots. The

spots are formed by scales, which, through the microscope, look like

grains of rice. In some specimens there are two oblique white bands

on each side, and a white band at the base. Immature specimens

frequently have the spots orange-colored instead of white. The legs

are black and hairy, barred with rufus in young specimens; on the

inner side of the patella of the first leg is a brush of white hairs.

Habitat. United States.

Although the markings of this spider are similar to those of P. miniatus,

it has no red hairs when adult, and is thus easily distinguished from that

Attide of North America. 13

species. It is possible that morsitans grows larger in the western than in

the eastern states, as Emerton gives 8.6 mm. as the total length of the ?.

A period of from fourteen to fifteen days is required for the development

of the eggs of this species.

PHIDIPPUS RUFUS HENTz.

Plate I, figure 2a. Piate II, figure 2.

Syn.: 1845. AtTTus rufus H., Journal Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1845. ‘© eastaneus id., ibid., Vol. V.

1846. PLEXIPPUS rufus C. K., Die Arach., XIII, p. 120.

1846. a bi-vittatus id., ibid., XIII, p. 120.

1875. ATTuUS rufus H., Coll. Arachn. Writ., ed. by Burgess, Bos-

ton, p. 60.

1875. “© eastaneus id., ibid., p. 55.

1885. PuHiprppus ruber Keyserling, Neue Spinnen aus Amerika, VI,

Verhandlungen Zoologisch — botanischen gesellschaft, p. 7.

4. Total length 8.5mm. Width of abdomen 3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.1; width, 3.4; height 2.5.

Legs, 9.9, 7.3, 6.8, 9.2; patella and tibia of the first 4.2; patella and tibia

of the third 2.4; patella and tibia of the fourth 3.4; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth 3.

Lateral rather more than one-half as large as middle eyes, separated from

these by two-thirds their own diameter. Clypeus one-fourth as high

as middle eyes. Mavxille nearly parallel, enlarged at extremity, with

projection at outer corner, slanting within toward labium. Labium

a little more than one-half. as long as maxilla, contracted at tip.

Sternum oval, convex, nearly twice as long as wide. Anterior coxz

separated by width of labium. Legs without patellary spines.

g. Totallength 11.8mm. Width of abdomen 4.8.

Cephalothorax: length 5; width 3.8; height 2.7.

Legs 9.4, 8.1, 8.4, 9.9; patella and tibia of the first 3.8; patella and tibia

of the third 8; patella and tibia of the fourth 3.5; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth 3.4.

Maxillze rounded at extremity; labium two-thirds as long as maxille; rela-

tive length of legs 4, 1, 3, 2.

Coloration, ¢. The cephalothorax is covered with bright yellowish-red

hairs, excepting the lower sides which are white; there are some

long black hairs in the eye region. The face, clypeus and palpi are

covered with white hairs; the falces are dark iridescent green; the

mouth parts and coxe are dark reddish brown; the sternum is black

“with white hairs; the venter is black, with two longitudinal lines of

white hairs which converge behind. The abdomen is covered with

14 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

red hairs like those on the cephalothorax; it has a white basal band

which extends on to the sides, and four indented dots. The legs are

dark reddish brown, with many white hairs.

9. The color is much.less brilliant than in the ¢, being usually of a dull

brick-red hue. The abdomen, besides the white basal band, has an

oblique white band on each side, and two black bands on the poste-

rior dorsal parts; these black bands reach the apex, and curve toward

each other anteriorly; each has a white dot at its anterior, and one

at its posterior end, and a transverse white line across the middle,

where it is widest. The legs are reddish brown with black rings.

In cardinalis, with which it might be confused, the clypeus is one-third

not one-fourth, and the lateral anterior eye isseparated by one-half not two-

thirds of its own diameter from the large middle eye. The second and

third legs in cardinalis are about equal; in rufus the second is plainly

longer than the third.

Habitat: United States.

PHIDIPPUS GALATHEA WALCK.

Plate I, figures 3, 3a.

Syn.: 1837. ArTTus galathea Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insectes Apteéres, I,

p. 456.

1845. ATTUS mystaceus Hentz, Jour. Bost. Soc. of Nat Hist., Vol. V.

1846. PHIDIPPUS asinarius C. K., Die Arachniden, parila p. 139.

1847. ATrus galathea Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insectes Aptéres, IV,

p. 422.

1875. AtTTus mystaceus Hentz. Coll. of Arachnological Writings,

ed. by Burgess, p. 58.

° Total length 11.6 mm. Width of abdomen 4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 5.2; width 3.8; height 2.

Legs 9.6, 8.5, 8, 10.6; patella and tibia of the first 4; patella and tibia of the

third, 3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.9; metatarsus and tarsus of

the fouth, 3.4.

Lateral separated from middle eyes by 3 their own diameter. Clypeus $ as

high as large middle eyes. Maxillea widened and rounded at tip,

nearly parallel. Labium +as long as maxille, about twice as long

as wide, contracted toward tip. Sternum widest in the middle. An-

terior coxee separated by scarcely the width of the labium. Relative

length of legs 4, 1, 2, 3.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black, covered with heavy gray hairs, and two

tufts of black hairs on each side of the eye region. Abdomen covered

with gray hairs with two pairs of white spots on the anterior part of

the dorsum; when somewhat rubbed a blackish, scalloped band ap-

Attide of North America. 15

pears which occupies the central region. Clypeus covered with white

hairs; palpi, legs, sternum, and venter with gray hairs; falces iri-

descent green; mouth parts reddish brown.

Habitat: Eastern United States.

PHIDIPPUS CARDINALIS HENtTz.

Plate II, figure 4.

Syn.: 1844. AtTus cardinalis Hentz, Journal Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., p.

386.

1875. AtTTUS cardinalis id., Coll. of Arachn. Writ. ed. by Burgess,

Boston, p. 51.

1883. ArTTUS cardinalis Peckham, Descr. new or little known Attide,

p. ol.

6. Totallength 9.5mm, Width of abdomen 3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.1; width 4; height 2.8.

Legs 11.1, 8.2, 8.2, 10.7; patella and tibia of the first 4.5; patella and tibia

of the third, 3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.6; metartarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 3.3.

Lateral separated from middle eyes by } their own diameter; four anterior

eyes looking downward. Clypeus }ashigh as middle eyes. Maxillee

enlarged and blunt at extremity with a projection at the outer corner,

and parallel. Labium 4as long as maxille, a little longer than wide,

blunt and slightly contracted at tip. Sternum, widest in middle, +

longer than wide. Anterior coxze separated by scarcely the width

of the labium.

Coloration: Cephalothorax, abdomen, and venter entirely covered with

brilliant red hairs; there are four indented dots on the anterior part

of the abdomen, and sometimes two longitudinal black bands each

with two red dots, extending from the middle of the dorsum to the

spinnerets, and converging a little behind.

Habitat: Southern United States.

PHIDIPPUS MINIATUS PEcKHAM.

Plate I, figures 6, 6a.

Syn.: 1883. Artus miniatus P., Descr. new or little known Attidx of U.S.,

p. 15.

?. Totallength 13mm. Width of abdomen 5 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 5.9; width 5; heighth 3.8.

Legs 13.5, 10.7, 10.7, 13.7; patella and tibia of the first, 5.5; patella and tibia

of the third, 3.8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 5.1; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 4.

Large ¢. Total length 18 mm.

16 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Anterior row of eyes very little curved; lateral $ as large as middle eyes

separated from them by 3 their own diameter; dorsal a little smaller

than lateral eyes, a little further from each other than from lateral _

borders. Clypeus about 3 as high as middle eyes. Maxille enlarged

and rounded at extremity, diverging. Labium a little more than 4

as long as maxille, contracted and truncated at tip. Sternum not

so wide as anterior coxe. Anterior coxee separated by width of lab-

ium. Relative length of legs 4, 1, 2, 3; no patellary spines.

Coloration: The cephalothorax has the eye-region covered with short,

bright red hairs, intermixed with long black hairs, the latter forming

small tufts between the small median and dorsal eyes; the thoracic

part and sides are covered with coarse yellowish white hairs; the

narrow lower margin is black. The abdomen has a wide band of

gray hairs around the base, and is otherwise covered with short bright

red, and long whitish hairs; at about the middle of the dorsum is a

large somewhat triangular spot, and behind this are two others, not

so large and transversely elongated, all of the same bright red color,

and encircled by black rings; the sides are covered with long gray

hairs. In specimens which are kept in alcohol the color becomes fad-

ed, the red changing to whitish yellow. The clypeus and palpi are

covered with long white hairs; the legs are blackish, excepting the

metatarsi, which are reddish brown; they are covered with gray

hairs; under the femur is a stout fringe of hairs which extends less

heavily on to the patella and tibia; the falces are dark, but very

iridescent; the mouth-parts, sternum, and coxe are dark brown or

black; the venter has a wide central, longitudinal band black, limited

by the gray hairs which come low on the sides; just at the apex, be-

tween the black band and the black spinnerets, is a narrow, trans-

verse band of gray hairs.

Habitat: Florida. Texas.

PHIDIPPUS OBSCURUS Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 5. Plate II, figure 5.

(9) Total length 18 mm. Width of abdomen 5.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.8; width 4.1; height 2.4.

Legs 9.3, 7.5, 7.7, 10; patella and tibia of the first 4; patella and tibia of

the third 2.8; patella and tibia of the fourth 3.9; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth 3.4.

Lateral eyes } as large as middle eyes, and separated from them by # their

own diameter. Clypeus } as high as middle eyes. Maxillee wide at

extremity with projection at outer corner. Labium } as long as

maxille, contracted and rounded at tip. Falces rather narrower

than is usual in this genus, extending, in width only to the inner

Attide of North America. 1?

edges of the lateral eyes. Sternum ‘oval, convex. Anterior coxae

separated by scarcely the width of the labium. Patellary spines on

the second, third and fourth legs.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black, covered on the sidesand above anterior

row of eyes with white hairs, and having a transverse band of yellow

hairs extending between the dorsal eyes. Abdomen with a dark brown

band extending around the lower base and sides to apex; above this,

at the base is a shorter curved pale band; central region of dorsum

dark brown, changing toward the anterior portion to black, and.

marked, in this region with a pair of elongated white spots; behind

these is a large white spot; behind this and near the apex is a pair

of pale curved bands which take the form of a parenthesis, nearly

meeting in the middle line. The dark central region of the dorsum

surrounded excepting behind, by a pale region mottled with brown;.

opposite the large white spot on each side, is an oblique white band

which extends downward through the encircling dark band. Legs.

and palpi brown, covered (especially the palpi) with white hairs.

Venter pale, sternum, coxae and mouthparts brown, all clothed:

with white hairs. Falces iridescent green.

The curved white bands on the posterior part of the dorsum sometimes,

meet anteriorly, extending a little forward to form a chevron.

Habitat: Texas.

PHIDIPPUS McCOOKII PECKHAM.

Plate I, figure 9.

Syn.: 1888. AtTus McCookii P., Descr. new or little known Attide of U.S.,

p. 16.

g. Totallength 14.4mm. Width of abdomen 6 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.9; width 4.2; height 2.5.

Legs 10.7, 8, 8.2, 11; patella and tibia of the first}4; patella and tibia of the

third 2.7; patella and tibia of the fourth 4.3; metatarsus and tarsus of

the fourth 3.

Lateral eyes of the first row one-half as large as middle eyes, and separated

from them by more than one-half their own diameter. Dorsal eyes,

a little further from each other than from the lateral borders. Cly-

peus one-third as wide as middle eyes. Maxille parallel, enlarged

and rounded at extremity. Labium nearly two-thirds as long as

maxillz, widest in middle, rather pointed. Sternum convex, about

twice as long as wide. Anterior coxz separated by a little less than

the width of the labium. Relative length of legs 4, 1, 2, 3.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark rufus covered with tawny hair. Abdo-

men golden yellow with short hairs of the same color; there are four

indented dots near the base, and posterior to these two indistinct dark

18 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

bands extend to the apex; the sides are creased (the abdomen is dis-

tended with eggs in the only specimen which we have of this species).

Clypeus and palpus dark rufus with long white hairs. Falces, mouth-

parts, sternum and legs dark rufus, the inner edges of maxillae and

tip of labium being pale, and the legs having blackish bars. Venter

golden yellow with three iridescent dark bands.

Habitat: Pennsylvania.

PHIDIPPUS ARIZONENSIS PECKHAM.

Plate I, figure 10. Plate II, figure 10.

Syn.: 1883. ATTUS arizonensis P., Descr. new or little known Attide of

Wo Sop 196 ale}.

4. Total length 11mm. Width of abdomen 3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.9; width 4.2; height 2.

Legs 11.4, 9.9, 9.9, 10.8; patella and tibia of the first 4.9; patella and tibia

of the third 3.6; patella and tibia of the fourth 4.1; metarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth 3.

Cephalic part with sides very widely rounded.

Ocular area about one-half wider than long, this being relatively wider than

is usual in Phidippus. Anterior lateral one-half as wide as middle

eyes, and separated from them by their own diameter. Clypeus two-

thirds as high as middle eyes. Dorsal eyes nearly twice as far from

each other as from lateral borders. Mavxillze parallel, enlarged at

extremity, with the outer corner sharp; labium one-half as long as

maxille, rounded. Sternum as wide as imtermediate coxee. Ante-

rior coxze much stouter and longer than the others, and separated

by the width of the labium. There are sometimes patellary spines

on the four pairs. Abdomen long and slender, with its posterior face

truncated; spinnerets turned downward.

Coloration: Cephalothorax velvety black, with two wide, white, lateral

bands beginning just before and below the dorsal eyes and almost

meeting in the middle of the thorax behind the depression. There is

a band of grayish brown hairs above the anterior eyes, and a tuft of

black hairs near each small median eye. Abdomen light brown; be-

hind the middle is a median, longitudinal velvety black band, the

truncated face, and the spinnerets being also black; in the middle of

the dorsum is a pair of indented dots, and a second: pair,

just in front of these, is very indistinct; at the apex are two

white spots one on each side of the black band; on each upper side of

the abdomen isa black line extending to the apex; the under sides

have wide white bands, formed of hairs directed downwards, which

extend beneath on to the venter. The venter is velvety black, dark-

est behind, the white bands marking it off into a long triangle. Cly-

Attide of North America. 19

peus covered with white hairs; sternum, coxae and mouthparts black;

falces black with some white hairs on the anterior surface; palpi and

legs yellowish, excepting the femur I which is black above and pale

beneath; third and fourth pairs darker than first and second, and

showing some reddish rings on patella and tibia. All the legs have,

on the under side, long, fine, yellow hair, which is strikingly long and

thick on the first pair.

The abundance of fine yellowish hairs on the undersides of the first pair

of legs, together with the great distance between the anterior lateral and

large middle eyes distinguishes it from all other species of this genus.

Habitat: Arizona, Texas, California.

PHIDIPPUS ALBOMACULATUS Keys.

(Plate I, figure 13. Plate IT, figure 13.)

Syn: 1885. Puipippus albomaculatus Keyserling, Neue Spinnen aus Ameri-

ka, vi, Verhandlungen Zoologisch-botanischen ge-

selilschaft, p. 5 (491).

9. Totallength 13.4mm. Width of abdomen 5.3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 6; width 4.3; height 3.2.

Legs 13.5, 10.7, 10.6, 14; patella and tibia of the first, 5.6; patella and tibia

of the third, 4; patella and tibia of the fourth, 5.3; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 4.5.

Anterior lateral eyes scarcely one-half as large as middle eyes, and separ-

ated from them by two-thirds of their own diameter; dorsal eyes

equally distant from each other and the lateral borders. Clypeus one-

third as high as middle eyes. Maxille parallel, enlarged and rounded

at extremity; labium a little more than one-half as long as maxille,

oval, or a little contracted at tip. Sternum long, narrow, pointed in

front, very convex. Anterior coxz separated by less than the width

of the labium. Relative length of legs, 4, 1, 3, 2; no patellary spines.

Coloration: Cephalathorax dark brown, entirely covered with short white

hairs, and having some long, black and white hairs on the eye-region.

Abdomen with a large, dark central region, in which is a median,

forked, white band, and two pairs of white dots, while the sides

have a mottled appearance, being covered with mixed white and

brown. hairs; usually there may be distinguished two or three oblique

white bands extending downward over the sides. The pattern onthe

dorsum is frequently indistinct owing to the rubbing off of hairs; fre-

quently all that appears is two dark longitudiual bands, on each of

which are three or four white dots. Clypeus witha thick fringe of

white hairs; falces most brilliantly iridescent; mouth-parts blackish;

sternum, coxe, and venter brown, covered with short, white hairs;

palpi and legs yellowish brown, all covered with thick, long, white

hair.

Habitat: United States.

20 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

PHIDIPPUS OPIFEX McCook.

Plate Il, figure 11.

Syn.: 1873. ATTUS opifex McCook, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. of Philadelphia,

p. 276.

9. Total length, 15 mm. Width of abdomen, 7

Cephalothorax: length, 6.8; width, 4.9; height, 3.5.

Legs 13.3, 11.1, 10.4, 14.2; patella and tibia of the first, 5.2; patella and

tibia of the third, 3.8; patella and tibia, fourth, 5.2; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 4.7.

mm.

Quadrangle of eyes two-thirds wider than long. Lateral anterior eyes more

than one-half as large as middle eyes, separated from them by two-

thirds their own diameter. Middle eyes plainly separated. Clypeus

one-half as high as middle eyes.. Falces wider than the two middle

eyes, three times as long as face, inclined forward, divergent. Max-

ille parallel, enlarged and blunt at extremity, slanting within

toward labium. Labium one-half as long as maxille. Sternum

projecting but little between anterior coxz. Anterior coxee sepa-

rated by width of labium.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark reddish, covered with white hair, and

having a black marginal line. Clypeus and face covered with long

white hairs. Abdomen black, covered with gray hair, with four

white dots on the anterior part of the dorsum. Falces black with

white hairs at base. Mouth-parts brown. Stermum, coxe and ven-

ter covered with white hairs. Palpi light reddish brown, with long

white hairs. Legs banded with black and dark reddish brown, with

some white hairs, especially below. The hairs on cephalothorax, ab-

domen and venter are scale-like.

Habitat: California.

PHIDIPPUS JOHNSONII PECKHaM.

Plate I, figure 14. Plate II, figures 14, 14a.

Syn.: ATTUS johnsonii P., Descr. new or little known Attide of U.S.,

p. 22.

6. Total length 10mm. Width of abdomen 3.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 5.1; width 3.8; height 2.1.

Legs 10.9, 8.6, 8.9, 10.9; patella and tibia of the first, 4.8; patella and tibia

of the third, 3.2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 4; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 3.3.

Lateral eyes of first row one-half as large as middle eyes, and separated from

them by half their own diameter. Clypeus half as high as middle

eyes. Maxillee parallel, with sharp outer corners, and slanting within

toward the labium. Labium a little longer than wide, more than one-

Attide of North America. 21

half as long as maxille, contracted and rounded at tip. Sternum

oval, half longer than wide. Anterior coxz separated by width of

labium. No patellary spines.

9. Totallength 12.2mm. Width of abdomen 3.9 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.3; width 2.8; height 2.1.

Legs 10.4, 8.4, 8.4, 11.1; patella and tibia of the first, 4.38; patella and tibia of

the third, 3.6; patella and tibia of the fourth, 4.5; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 3.5.

Clypeus one-third as high as middle eyes. Maxille rounded. Sternum

relatively wider than in ¢. Anterior coxz separated by less than

the width of the labium.

Coloration: 4. Cephalothorax jet black, sometimes with a few short

bright red hairs (perhaps, in a fresh state, entirely covered with

these). Abdomen bright vermillion red, sometimes with a white

band at base; clypeus dark with a fringe of white hairs; palpus

black; falees dark but, iridescent; maxille and labium brown; ster-

num black with white hairs; venter dark brown with white hairs;

legs dark rufus barred with black. 9°. Abdomen with a white

band at base, and a wide central longitudinal black band, upon

which are three pairs of white dots.

This species is nearest cardinalis ; it is, however, not so high; its color is

crimson rather than scarlet; and on the anterior inner edge of the falx is a

sharp, rather long point, which in cardinalis is but little developed. The

cephalothorax in cardinalis is covered with scarlet hairs, in johnsonii it is

jet black. The latter also has on the palpi of the first pair of legs many

white, rice-like scales or hairs.

Habitat: Washington Territory.

PHIDIPPUS OCTO-PUNCTATUS PEcKHAM.

Plate IJ, figure 15.

Syn.: 18838. P. octo-punctatus Peckham, Descr. new or little known At-

tide of U.S., p. 6.

é. Totallength 8mm. Width of abdomen 2.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.1; width 3; height 2.3.

Legs 8.4, 5.6, 5.9, 7.9; patella and tibia of the first, 3.2; patella and tibia of the

third, 2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.9; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 2.8.

Lateral anterior a little more than 4 as large as middle eyes, separated from

them by + their own diameter. Clypeus } as high as middle eyes.

Falces wider than first row of eyes, three times as long as face.

Maxillz short, truncated, with projection at outer corner, inclined

toward labium. Labium }as long as maxille, 4 longer than wide,

contracted and blunt at tip. Anterior coxz separated by more than

width of Jabium.

az Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Coloration: Cephalothorax above, black covered with short white hairs,

sides dark brown with some irregular whitish spots and sparse yel-

lowish hairs, the lower margin being slightly darker; there are some

long yellow hairs on the eye-region. Clypeus dark brown mottled with

white, with a few yellowish hairs. Abdomen black covered with

short white hairs and longer yellowish hairs; near the base is a short

curved white line, posterior to which are two longitudinal rows of

white spots, four spots in each row; these are divided into two an-

terior and two posterior pairs, the four posterior spots being ob-

liquely elongated; on the posterior sides are two or three short

oblique white lines. Falces, mouth-parts, sternum, coxee and wee

dark brown. Venter black with short yellowish hairs.

Habitat: Missouri.

PHIDIPPUS RAUTERBERGII Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 8. Plate II, figure 8.

2. Totallength 16mm. Width of abdomen 7.38 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 6.2; width 5.8; height 3.8.

Legs 15.8, 11.8, 11.8, 15.2; patella and tibia of the first,6.4; patella and tibia

of the third, 4.4; patella and tibia of the fourth, 6; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 5.1.

Cephalothorax nearly plane; ocular area much wider behind; anterior

lateral one-half as large as middle eyes, and separated from them by

a little more than one-half their own diameter; eyes of second row

more than twice as far from dorsal as from lateral eyes; third row

of eyes considerably narrower than the cephalothorax at that place;

clypeus one-third as high as the middle eyes. Maxillee wide, parallel,

rounded. Labium one-half as long as maxillee, but little longer than

wide, blunt at tip. Sternum oval, convex in front, less than twice

as long as wide, projecting but little between the anterior coxe,

which are separated by less than the width of the labium. Relative

length of legs 4, 1, 2, 3; no patellary spines.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark reddish brown, almost black in the eye-

region, with some short white hairs on the sides and between the

dorsal eyes. Abdomen mottled with brown and white, with two

black spots on the anterior portion, and one large irregular black spot

in the middle from which two black bands extend to the apex; in the

middle of the black spot is a large white spot, and onthe black bands,

is a pair of smaller white spots; there are sometimes two white dots

nearer the apex, and a white spot on the inner side of each of the

black spots on the anterior part of the dorsum, while the space be-

tween the black bands is occupied by a series of white and brown

chevrons. Clypeus brown; palpus brown with three white rings;

Attide of North America. 23

falees iridescent; mouth-parts, sternum, and coxz reddish brown;.

venter with two white longitudinal bands enclosing a darker central

region; legs black, barred with dark red, with short white hairs, and

a heavy fringe of black hairs on the underside of the tibia of the first.

Habitat: Texas.

PHIDIPPUS MEXICANUS Nov. Sp.

Plate II, figure 7.

4. Totallength 11.4mm. Width of abdomen 5 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 6.5; width 5; height 3.6.

Legs 16.3, 12.7, 11.2, 14.5; patella and tibia of the first, 6.7; patella and

tibia of the third, 4; patella and tibia of the fourth, 5.3; metatarsus

and tarsus of the fourth, 4.8. ;

Cephalothorax widely rounded. First row of eyes much curved; lateral

separated from middle eyes by one-half their own diameter. Clypeus

one-fourth as high as large middle eyes. Falces wider than first row

of eyes, more than twice as long as face. Maxille long, widened

and truncated at extremity, with projection at outer corner, cut ob-

liquely on inner side, and excavated for labium. Labium less than

half as long as maxille, contracted and blunt at tip. Sternum one-

half longer than wide. Anterior coxze separated by a little less than

width of labium.

Coloration: Cephalothorax probably covered with snowy white hairs, ex-

cepting a dark brown band around the margin; in our specimen these

hairs are largely rubbed off. Clypeus with white hairs. Abdomen

black with a hairy white band at base. a large central white spot

behind middle, and posterior to this an interrupted, curyed, white

band. Falces brilliant iridescent green. Palpi covered with white

hairs. Legs very hairy; femoral and tibial joimts with black, other

joints with white hairs. Other parts all black.

From the collection of Count Keyserling.

Habitat: Mexico.

PHIDIPPUS INSOLENS HENTz.

Plate I, figure 12. Plate II, figures 12, 12a.

Syn.: 1844. AtTus insolens Hentz, Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. IV.

1845. ‘* podogrosus id., ibid., Vol. V.

1875. . insolens id., Coll. Arach. Writ. by N. M. Hentz. Ed.

by Burgess, Boston, p. 51.

1875. ie podogrosus id., ibid., p. 61.

1877. PuHupippus coloradensis Thorell, Descr. Aranez coll. in Color-

ado, p. 523,

24 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

6. Total length 9.5mm. Width of abdomen 3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 5; width 4; height 2.4.

Legs 14, 9, 8, 10.2; patella and tibia of the first, 6.3; patella and tibia of the

third, 2.8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.2; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 3.

Small ¢. Total length 6.8 mm.

°. Totallength 12mm. Width of abdomen 4.5.

Cepnalothorax: length 4.8; width 4; height 2.5.

Legs 9.2, 7.8, 8, 10; patella and tibia of the first, 4.2; patella and tibia of

the third, 3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 4; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 3.3.

Anterior lateral separated from middle eyes by one-half their own diame-

ter. Middle nearly twice as large as lateral eyes, and a little sep-

arated. Clypeus one-third as high as middle eyes. Maxillee long

inner margin oblique, 6 with marked apophysis on outer corner, ?

enlarged and blunt at extremity. Sternum nearly twice as long as

wide. Anterior coxee separated by less than the width of the labium.

Coloration: Cephalothorax covered with bright red hairs excepting the

lower margin which has a white line above a black line; the ? hasa

tuft of black hairs on the outer side of each lateral eye. Clypeus

with some long white hairs. Abdomen with a silvery white band at

base behind which is a deep black band; the dorsum is of a bright

red color, which is interrupted in the posterior two-thirds by a cen-

tral, longitudinal, angular, black band which is contracted behind,

upon which, in the posterior part, are two pairs of white dots; the

sides are black with two curved white bands. Palpi é black, con-

spicuously marked by a silvery white line along the upper surface.

9 reddish with long white hairs. Falces brilliant iridescent green,

those of the 4 with a slight brownish tinge; fang black. Mouth-

parts dark brown. Sternum and coxe black with white hairs. Ven-

ter deep black with white hairs on the sides, and, in the center, a wide

somewhat triangular band (narrowing behind), of a clear silvery white

color. Legs banded with black and rufus. In the ¢ the first leg has

fringes of black hairs; in the 9 the same leg is covered with long

white hairs.

The hairs in this species seem to rub off even more easily than is usual with

the Attide. When they are gone the spider appears as in Hentz’s drawing.

In general appearance insolens is much like Phileeus rimator, but may be

distinguished by the difference in the shape of the cephalothorax, and the

position of the eyes.

Habitat: Georgia, Florida, Colorado.

Attide of North America. 25

PHIDIPPUS OTIOSUS HENTz.

Plate I, figure 15. Plate I, figure 15 a.

Syn.: 1845. AtTTus otiosus Hentz, Journal Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol V.

1875. Artus otiosus id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz. Ed.

by Burgess, Boston, p. 59.

g. Totallength 11.5 mm. Width of abdomen 4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 5; width 4; height 2.5.

Legs 9.6, 7.5, 8, 10; patella and tibia of the first 4; patella and tibia of the

third, 3.4; patella and tibia of the fourth 4; metartarsus and tarsus of

the fourth, 3.8.

Lateral eyes of first row one-half as large as middle eyes and separated

from them by one-third their own diameter. Clypeus one-half as

high as middle eyes. Maxilla enlarged and rounded at extremity.

Labium two-thirds as long as maxille. Falces nearly as wide as

first row of eyes, as long as face, vertical, diverging. Sternum, very

deepset, oval, projecting between the anterior coxz which are

separated by the width of the labium.

Coloration: A wide band of white hairs extends across the clypeus and

on to the sides, under the eyes, nearly encircling the cephalothorax;

above is a black band which occupies the cephalic part, but grows

narrower on the thoracic, where the white band curves upward. On

each side of the cephalothorax are two tufts of black hairs, one be-

tween the eye of the second row and the dorsal eye, and one just be-

hind and below the anterior lateral eye. Abdomen black with a

band of long white hairs at base, and several lines of white hairs on

each side; on the anterior part of the dorsum are two white dots; on

he middle part and nearer together, are two larger white spots; near

the apex are two large curved spots of a light yellowish red color;

these with the white spots, and the lines on the sides mark off a some-

what irregular black figure on the posterior part of the dorsum.

Falces darkly iridiscent with a fringe of white hairs at their inser-

tion. Palpi and legs black with long white hairs. Mouth-parts,

sternum, coxee and venter black, the venter nearly encircled by

white hairs which form wide white bands on the sides, and with

two white spots in the middle.

This is avery hairy species, in this respect, and in its general color-

ing, resembling P. galathea.

Habitat: Georgia, Alabama.

PHILAAUS (THORELL).

Cephalothorax high and convex, contracted in front and behind, sides

rounded, cephalic part inclined forward, thoracic part slanting, at

first gradually, and then more steeply from dorsal eyes. Ocular area

26 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

at least one-third wider than long, wider behind than in front; ante-

rior row of eyes more or less curved, the middle slightly separated, the

lateral at least one-half as large, separated from the middle by from

one-third to two-thirds their own diameter; eyes of second row very

slightly nearer the lateral than the dorsal eyes; dorsal as large or

nearly as large as the lateral eyes, at least as far from each other as

from the lateral borders, forming a row narrower than the cephalo-

thorax at that place. Clypeus not more than half as high as middle

eyes. Labium about one-half as long as maxille, usually longer than

wide, sometimes as wide as long. Anterior coxe separated by width

of labium or by a little less. Legs(¢)1, 2,4, 3. 1,4, 2,3. 1, 4, 3, 2;

(?)1, 4, 2,38. 1,4,38,2. 4,1, 3, 2; first pair stoutest, second next.

Femur and tibia of the first enlarged, stouter than patella and much

stouter than metatarsus and tarsus; tibia and patella of the third

shorter than tibia and patella of the fourth. Femoral, tibial and

metatarsal spines on the four pairs; metatarsi of the fourth usually

spined throughout their length.

This genus differs from Phidippus in having the eyes of the second row

nearly half way between the lateral and dorsal eyes; the width of the ocu-

lar area, moreover, is frequently greater in proportion to its length.

PHILAUUS FARNEUS. Nov. Sp.

Plate II, figure 16.

¢. Total length 9.2mm. Width of abdomen 3.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4; width 3.4; height 2.1.

Legs 8.4, 6.6, 7.2, 9.2; patella and tibia of the first, 3.6; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.6; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 3.1.

Cephalic part plane, and but little inclined; thoracic convex, falling ab-

ruptly a lttle way behind dorsal eyes. Ocular area one-third

wider than long, much wider behind than in front. Anterior eyes small,

in a moderately curved row; lateral one-half as large as middle eyes,

separated from them by two-thirds their own diameter; dorsal a lit-

tle smaller than lateral eyes, further from each other than from lat-

eral borders. .Clypeus one-third as high as middle eyes, vertical;

falces as wide as first row of eyes, twice as long as face, vertical,

diverging. Maxille parallel, enlarged and rounded at extremity.

Labium a little more than one-half as long as maxillze, about twice as

long as wide, contracted and blunt at tip. Sternum twice as long

as wide, deepset, a little rounded behind. Anterior coxee separated

by less than width of labium.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black with long stiff black hairs on the eye-

region, which form one or two small tufts on each side. Clypeus

covered with short white hairs. Abdomen black, encircled except at

Attide of North America. av

apex by a scalloped white band; on the middle of the dorsum is a

large triangular white spot, in front of, and behind which are two

white dots; near the apex, extending upward from the encircling

band, are two short oblique white bars. Palpi reddish with long

white hairs. Falces iridescent purple. Mouth-parts, sternum and

coxee dark brown. Venter black in the middle with a whitish longi-

tudinal band on each side. Legs dark brown with long black and

gray hairs.

Habitat: Texas.

PHILAUS FARTILIS Nov. Sp.

Plate II, figure 17.

g. Totallength 10mm. Width of abdomen 4 mm.

Caphalothorax: length 4.4; width 3.8; height 2.4.

Legs 9, 7.2, 7.3, 9.5; patella and tibia of the first, 4; patella and tibia of the

third, 2.8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.6; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 3.3.

Ocular area one-third wider than long; anterior eyes small,in a slightly curved

row; middle eyes more than twice as large as lateral eyes, separated

from them by one-half the diameter of the lateral; dorsal as large as

lateral eyes, further from each other than from lateral borders. Cly-

peus one-third as high as middle eyes, vertical. Falces as wide as

first row of eyes, more than twice as long as face, vertical, slightly

diverging. Maxille divergent, enlarged and rounded at extremity,

excavated on inner side for labium. Labium a little more than one-

half maxillze, one-half longer than wide, a little contracted and trun-

cated at tip. Sternum one-half longer than wide, rather deep set.

Anterior coxee separated by less than width of labium. Legs 1, 4,

2,3; metatarsi of the third and fourth with only terminal circles of

spines.

Coloration: Cephalothorax and clypeus covered with long white hairs,

the former with a black marginal line. Abdomen gray except the

posterior part which is blackish; the base and anterior sides are white;

there is a large irregular reddish spot on each side, and on the dorsum

are indistinctly marked three pairs of white spots. Near the apex on

each lower side is a wide white band, and on the upper surface is a

white parenthesis, the black region enclosed having a pair of white

dots. Falces black, the upper part being covered with long white

hairs. Mouth parts, sternum and coxe, black. Venter white with a

wide, central, longitudinal black band. Legs and palpi dark brown

covered with long white hairs.

Habitat: Mexico.

28 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

PHILAIUS MEXICANUS Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 18. Plate II, figure 18.

9. Totallength 10 mm. Width of abdomen 3.1 mm.

Cephalothoraz: length 4; width 3.2; height 2.

Legs 8.3, 6.4, 6.4, 7.8; patella and tibia of the first, 3.4; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.8: patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.2; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 2.4.

Ocular area occupying nearly two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-third wider

than long; anterior row of eyes very little curved; lateral one-half

as large as middle eyes, separated from them by one-half their own

diameter; middle eyes sub-touching; dorsal as large as lateral eyes,

equally distant from each other and the lateral borders. Clypeus a

little inclined, one-fifth as high as the middle eyes. Falces stout and

rather long, inclined forward, and somewhat diverging. Mavxille

parallel, enlarged and rounded at extremity; labium two-thirds as

long as the mawxille, pointed. Sternum convex, nearly as wide as

long, truncated in front. Anterior coxe separated by scarcely the

width of the labium, much the stoutest and longest. First legs much

the stoutest.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark brown in the thoracic region, and black-

ish on the cephalic plate; the lower margin has a fine black line be-

tween two fine white lines; there is a wider band of white hairs

which passes around the face and extends on the sides, below the

second and third rows of eyes, to the posterior margin. Dorsum of

the abdomen bronze brown; a little behind the middle are four white

dots, two on each side. Around the base is a wide white band; on

each side, opposite the dots, is a large white spot; on each side, near

the apex, is a short, wide, ribbon-like white band, extending from

below on to the dorsum, and bifurcating at the end; this makes a

diamond-shaped figure of the bronze color, which connects a smal)

bronze-colored region at the apex with the larger region of the same

color on the anterior part of the dorsum. First and second pairs of

legs darkest in color; all the legs brown, banded with blackish; tibia

of the first leg black with a fringe of black hairs below. Clypeus

covered with gray hairs. Falces dark brown. Mouthparts, coxe,

sternum, and venter, brown, thinly covered with gray hairs.

Habitat: Mexico.

PHILAUS MILITARIS HENTz.

Plate I, figures 19, 19a. Plate II, figures 19, 19a.

Syn.: 1844. ArrTus militaris H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. IV.

1846. ERIS aurigera (¢)C. K., Die Arachn., XIII, p. 189.

? 1846. PHIDIPPUS asinarius id., ibid., XIII, p. 139.

1875. ATrus militaris H., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz, ed.

by Burgess, Boston, p. 62.

Attide of North America. 29

4. Total length6mm. Width of abdomen 1.9 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.1; width 1.9; height 1.8.

Legs 7.5, 3.8, 3.9, 4.6; patella and tibia of the first, 3.2; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.1; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.1;. metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 2.1.

Falces 1.6.

Ocular area one-third wider than long; anterior eyes small, lateral more

than one-half as large as middle eyes, and separated from them by

one-half their own diameter; dorsal a little smaller than lateral

eyes, and further from each other than from the lateral borders,

Clypeus one-fourth as high as middle eyes. Falces nearly as wide

as the first row of eyes, long, inclined forward, and diverging, fang

long. Maxille narrow at base, wider at extremity, long, truncated,

slanting on the inner edge, and excavated for labium; labium less

than one-half as long as maxille, longer than wide, a little contracted

and rounded at the extremity. Sternum nearly twice as long as

wide, truncated in front and rounded behind. Anterior coxe sepa-

rated by scarcely the width of the labium.

9. Totallength 9.4mm. Width of abdomen 4.1 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.2; width 2.4; height 1.6.

Legs 5.9, 4.7, 4.7, 5.7; patella and tibia of the first, 2.1; patella and tibia of the

third, 1.8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.9; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.9.

Falces parallel and vertical, shorter and less robust than in ¢; fang short.

Maxille enlarged and rounded at extremity; labium more than one-

half as long as maxillz, twice as long as wide.

Coloration: ¢. Cephalothorax and abdomen bright bronze brown, the

former with a wide white band on each upper side, and a white spot

in the middle of the eye region, the latter with a wide white band

around the base and sides, and sometimes two rows of white dots on

the dorsum; clypeus, falces, palpi, mouthparts and sternum dark

brown; venter brown, covered with short white hairs; legs brown,

with femur of the first very dark, and proximal parts of the femora

of the second, third and fourth, and all the coxe, light yellowish.

9. Cephalthorax bronze, nearly covered with gray hairs, the abdo-

men with a whitish band down the middle, and four pairs of more

or less elongated white spots; the lower sides are nearly white; cly-

peus covered with long white hairs; falces, mouthparts and sternum

brown; venter brown with short white hairs and a darker central re-

gion; legs and palpi light brown, with white hairs.

Habitat: United States, Mexico.

30 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

PHILAEUS CHRYSIS WALCKE.

Plate I, figure 20. Plate II, figure 20. Plate III, figure 20a.

Syn.: 1837. ATTUS chrysis (4) Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insectes Aptéres, I,

p. 404.

1837. a iris (2?) Walck., id., ibid., p. 455.

1846. PLEXIPPUS awrecalceus, C. K., Die Arachniden, XIII, p. 113.

1847. AtTTUS chrysis Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insectes Aptéres, IV, p.

422.

1847. tris, id., ibid., p. 423.

6. Total length 9mm. Width of abdomen 2.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.9; width 3.5; height 2.8.

Legs 13.7, 9.5, 9.4, 10.9; patella and tibia of the first, 5.7; patella and tibia of

the third, 3.4; patella and tibia of the fourth, 4.4; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 3.2. ‘

Falces 3 mm.

Ocular area one-third wider than long; anterior row of eyes very little

curved; lateral rather more than one-half as large as middle eyes, and

separated from them by one-half their own diameter; dorsal smaller

than lateral eyes, and equally distant from each other and the lat-

eral borders. Clypeus one-fourth as high as middle eyes. Falces

compressed, as wide as the middle eyes, two and one-half times as

long as the face, inclined forward, and diverging; the fang is two-

thirds as long as the falx. Mawxille parallel, long, truncated, with a

projection at the outer corner; labium blunt, one-half longer than

wide, and one-half as long as the maxille. Sternum truncated in

front, rounded behind, one-fourth longer than wide. Anterior coxee

separated by width of labium. Relative length of legs 1, 4, 2, 3.

g. Totallength10.9mm. Width of abdomen 4.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.2: width 3.8; height 2.1.

Legs 9.2, 7.9, 8.1, 9.4; patella and tibia of the first, 4.1; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.5; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 3.

Falces 1.9 mm.

Falces vertical, parallel, and not so long as in ¢ ; maxille rounded; labium

more than one-half as long as maxille; anterior coxee separated by

more than the width of the labium. Relative length of legs 4, 1, 3, 2.

Coloration: As well as it can be distinguished from our badly rubbed

specimens, the coloration is as follows: ¢, cephalothorax black; ab-

domen black, encircled, excepting at the apex, by a white band, and

with two pairs of white spots, or rather of short transverse white

lines, on the posterior part of the dorsum; the under side of the body,

and the legs, black, or very dark brown. 9 , cephalothorax black;

abdomen covered with golden scales, with a white band around the

Attide of North America. Bil

anterior margin which extends on to the sides, a short oblique white

line on each side at the termination of this band, and posterior to

these lines, on each side a semi-circular band, white; the dorsum has,

on the anterior part, four indented dots, and on the posterior part,

opposite the oblique lines one pair of short transverse white lines like

those of the ¢; the mouthparts and falces are black, the sternum

and coxe dark brown; the venter is brown witha central longitudi-

nal white band; the legs are light brown excepting the femoral, patel-

lary, and tibial joints of the first pair, which are black.

Habitat: Mexico, Guatemala. (South Carolina, Georgia, Walckenaer.)

PHILZ.US PRINCEPS PrckHam.

Plate III, figure 21.

Syn.: 1883. ATTUS princeps P., Descr. new or little known Attidz of

We fSb5 195 iter

9. Totallength 8.1mm. Width of abdomen 3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length, 3.9; width, 3.2; height, 2.

Legs 7.1, 5.9, 6, 7.5; patella and tibia of the first, 8.4; patella and tibia of

the third, 2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.6; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 2.4.

Ocular area nearly twice as wide as long, and much wider behind; anterior

row a little curved, the eyes composing it being unusually small, the

lateral about one-half as large as the middle, and separated from

them by nearly two-thirds their own diameter; dorsal almost as large

as lateral eyes, and further from each other than from the lateral

borders. Clypeus, one-third as high as middle eyes. Falces as wide

as the first row of eyes, nearly twice as long as the face, vertical,

slightly diverging. Maxillz parallel, enlarged and blunt at ex-

tremity, slanting on the inner edge to the labium; labium less than

one-half as long as maxillz, as wide as long, a little contracted and

truncated at tip. Sternum deep set, small, one-half longer than wide,

widest in the middle. Anterior coxe separated by less than the

width of the labium. Relative length of legs, 4, 1, 3, 2.

Coloration: 92. Cephalothorax dark rufus, covered with short yellowish

white hairs, and having some long black hairs on the eye region;

abdomen covered with coarse tawny and gray hairs, with a whitish

band at base, and two gray spots, one on either side of the middle

point of the dorsum. Clypeus with thick white hairs; falces darkly

iridescent; mouthparts brown; maxille tipped with white; sternum

black; venter with grayish yellow hairs; legs, palpi, and spinnerets

bright reddish brown, the legs and palpi with white hairs.

Habitat: Pennsylvania.

32 Wisconsin Acadeny of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

PHILAUS RIMATOR WALCE.

late I, figure 22.

Syn.: 1837. ? Attus rimator Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insectes Apteéres, I, p.

446,

1846. PHIDIPPUS auctus C. K., Die Arachniden, XIII, p. 148.

1847. ATTUS rimator Walck., His. Nat. des Insectes Aptéres, IV, p.

422.

1883. ‘© formosus Peckham, Descr. new or little known Attide,

@E We Soo Ws Bar

9. Totallength 8.4mm. Width of abdomen 2.9 mm. ‘

Cephalothorax: length 4; width 2.9; height 2.

Legs 7, 5.2, 4.9, 7.5; patella and tibia of the first, 3; patella and tibia of the

third, 1.7; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2,7; metatarsus and tarsus of

the fourth, 2.

Ocular area one-third wider than long; anterior row of eyes slightly curved;

lateral rather more than one-half as large as middle eyes, and sep-

arated from them by two-thirds their own diameter; eyes of this row

unusually small; eyes of second row very minute; dorsal eyes a little

smaller than the lateral, and placed further from each other than

from the lateral borders. Clypeus one-half as high as middle eyes.

Falces as wide as the first row of eyes, once and one-half as long as

the face, vertical and a little divergent. Mavxille parallel, enlarged

and blunt at extremity, cut a little on the inner edge; labium one-half

as long as maxille, twice as long as wide, contracted and rounded

at tip. Sternum deepset, oblong, narrow in front, one-half longer

than wide. Anterior coxe separated by scarcely the width of the

labium.

Coloration: 9°. Cephalothorax and abdomen covered with bright red

hairs, the abdomen with a white band around the base, and a wide,

central, longitudinal, black band which begins in front of the middle

of the dorsum and extends around the lower, posterior sides; upon

this band are three pairs of white dots. Clypeus and palpi covered

with red hairs; falces brilliant green; mouthparts, sternum and cox

varying from brown to black; venter black; legs brownish with some

red hairs.

Habitat: Pennsylvania, Florida, fowa.

- Attide of North America. 33

PLEXIPPUS PUERPERUS HEnTz.

Plate I, figures 23, 23a. Plate II, figure 23a. Plate III, figure 23b.

Syn.: 1845. ATTUS puerperus Hentz, Journal Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol.

1845. ‘ sylvanus id., ibid., Vol. V.

1846. ALCMENA pallida C. K., Die Arachn., XIII, p. 179.

1874. ArTus branickii Tacz., Les Araneides dela Guyane francaise,

Horae Soc. Entomol. Ross. T., VIII, p. 94.

1875. ATTUS puerperus Hentz, Coll. Arachn. Writ. Ed. by Burgess,

p. 64.

1879. Marpissa branickii Tacz.. Les Aranéides du Pérou. Bull.

Soc. Imp. des Nat. de Moscou. T. LIII, p. 227.

1888. ATTUS agrestis Peckham, Descr. new or little know Attidz of

Wie Sho is 12,

1885. PLEXIPPUS puerperus id., Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. of Wisconsin,

p. 68.

As Dr. Taczanowski has kindly sent us specimens of his Attus branickit

we have been able to compare them with puerperus Hentz. They

are undoubtedly identical. We have the same spider in our ewn col-

lection, from Central America.

é. Totallength'11 mm. Width of abdomen 2.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4; width 2.4; height 2.8.

Legs 12.3, 10.3, 10.5, 10.8; patella and tibia of the first 5.4; patella and tibia

of the third 3.9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.8; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 3.9.

@. Total length 13.6 mm. Width of abdomen 4.7 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.8; width 4.2; height 2.8.

Legs 10.6, 9.1, 10.4, 11.7; patella and tibia of the first, 4.8; patella and tibia

of the third, 3.9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 4.1; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 4.3.

Cephalothorax high, rounded on the sides and widest behind the dorsal

eyes. The cephalic part occupies two-fifths of the cephalothorax; it

is nearly plane and slightly inclined. The thoracic partis somewhat

rounded but falls steeply from the dorsal eyes. The ocular area is one-

fourth wider than long and is a little wider behind than in front.

The anterior row is moderately curved: the middle eyes are sub-touch-

ing and are scarcely twice as large as the lateral eyes, the lateral being

separated from the middle by one-third their own diameter. The

eyes of the second row are placed not quite as far from the dor-

sal as from the lateral eyes. The dorsal eyes are a little smaller than

the lateral eyes and are placed by more than their own diameter in-

1 The size of the male is very variable, ranging from 5.6 mm., total length, to 11 mm.

Ce;

34 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

side the margin: they are further from each other than from the

lateral borders. The clypeus is one-third as high as the large middle

eyes. The falces are stout, being a little wider than the first row of

eyes, and are flattened in front; they are nearly twice as long as the

face, parallel and vertical. The fang is short. The maxille are long

and parallel, enlarged and slightly rounded at the extermity. The

labium is but little longer than wide, a little more than one-half the

maxille, contracted and rounded at the tip. Sternum one and one-

half times as long as wide, truncated in front and rounded behind.

Tt projects between the anterior coxze which are separated by the

width of the labium. Legs, relative stoutness, first, second, third,

fourth, the fourth being plainly more slender than the third. There

are femoral, patellary, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs,

those on the tibie and metatarsi of the third and fourth being found

both above and below, and those on the metatarsi extending to the

base. The ? has no patellary spines on the first and second pairs.

Coloration: (é.) The cephalothorax varies from reddish brown to black

and has on the dorsum a central spot of white, two white lines on

each side near the posterior border, running upward from the lower

margin, and just behind and below each dorsal eye two short parallel

white lines; the abdomen varies from light testaceous to dark brown

and has on the dorsum two longitudinal white bands; on each side of

the bands are some scattered black dots. The legs and falces are

dark brown; the clypeus is dark brown above with a pale band just

over the falces; on the upper portion two lines of white hairs begin-

ning between the middle eyes run obliquely outward to the insertion

of the palpi; the palpus is brown, with a white line above, meeting

that on the clypeus. The sternum, coxze and mouthparts vary from

light testaceous to dark brown; the venter is brown with a longitudi-

nal white line on each side. (2) The cephalothorax is yellow, dark-

est in the eye region, the eyes are jet black, the small middle eye is

on a black spot, thus offering a striking contrast to the light yellow

of the cephalothorax; there is a brown spot just above the anterior

middle eyes; the abdomen is light yellow with three longitudinal

white bands, the middle band often less distinct, and many black

dots. The legs, palpi, falces and clypeus are yellow, the sternum,

coxee and venter pale brown, the venter having a line of white hairs

on each side.

Habitat: California, Florida, Texas, Georgia (Gentry collection), Mexico,

Guatemaia, New Grenada (in collection of Count Keyserling), Bra-

zil,

Attide of North America. 35

PLEXIPPUS PUTNAMIL PECKHAM.

Plate III, figure 24.

Syn.: 1883. ATTus putnamii P., Descriptions of new or little known At-

tide, p. 1.

. Totallength9mm. Width of abdomen 2.6 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.5; width 3.3; height 2.3.

Cephalothorax high, convex, widest just behind dorsal eyes; cephalic a

little shorter than thoracic part; rounded on the sides and slanting

abruptly behind. Ocular area nearly twice as wide as long; wider

behind than in front; anterior row of eyes a little curved; lateral 4

as large as middle eyes, and separated from them by # their own di-

ameter, while the middle eyes are slightly separated from each other;

eyes of the second row a very little nearer the lateral than the dorsal

eyes; dorsal nearly as large as lateral eyes, further from each other

than from the lateral borders, forming a row which is a little nar-

rower than the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus 4 as high as

middle eyes. Falces extending in width to inner edges of lateral

eyes, square, 14 times as long as the face, vertical, parallel; fang

small. Maxillze parallel, truncated at tip, cut obliquely on the inner

edges; labium } as iong as maxillae, as wide as long, pointed. Ster-

num very deep-set, oval, projecting between the anterior coxe,

which are separated by less than the width of the labium. Relative

length of legs 4, 8, 1, 2; first and second pairs stoutest. Femur of

the first rather short, narrow at the ends, and much enlarged below,

in the middle. All the legs have femoral, tibial and metatarsal

spines. and there are patellary spines on the third and fourth; met-

atarsi of the fourth spined throughout their length.

Coloration: Cephalothorax reddish brown; there is a large white spot just

behind the dorsal eyes, and a short white band on each side of

the eye-region extending from tho smaller median to the dorsal eyes;

just back of the small median eye is a tuft of black hairs; there are

thick, light brownish hairs above the anterior row of eyes. Abdo-

men light reddish brown, encircled by a white band; near the apex

two short, transverse, parallel, white bars, on each side, extend from

the encircling band toward the middle of the abdomen; at about

the middle point of the dorsum is a large white spot, and near the

base are two small, indistinct, white spots formed by a few white

hairs. Clypeus covered with short red and long white hairs. Palpus

brownish, with black and white hairs. Mouthparts, sternum and

cox dark brown, sternum and coxee covered with white hairs. Ven-

ter covered with whitish hairs, with a central, longitudinal, darker

band. Legs brownish red with many long white hairs.

Habitat: Towa.

36 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

DENDRYPHANTES CAPITATUS HENTz. .

Plate I, figures 25, 25a. Plate III, figure 25a.

Syn,: 1844. Arrus capitatus H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. TV.

1845. ATTUS parvus(?)id., ibid, Vol. V.

1875. ATTUS parvus (9) id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz.

Ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 62.

1875. ATTuS capitatus id., ibid., p. 51.

1883. Arrus estivalis Peckham, Descr. new or little known Attidee

GE We Sky 1s Ze :

4. Total length 4.8mm. Width of abdomen 1.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.1; width 1.5; height 1.2.

Legs 4.1, 3, 2.6, 3.9; patella and tibia of the first, 1.9; patella and tibia of

the third, 9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.7; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 9.

Cephalothorax high, convex, slightly dilated behind dorsal eyes; cephalic

part inclined, but little shorter than thoracic. Ocular area one-third

wider than long, a little wider behind than in front; first row of eyes

a little curved; lateral a little less than one-half as large as middle

eyes, and slightly separated from them; middle eyes sub-touching; eyes

of second row a very little nearer lateral than dorsal eyes; dorsal eyes

further from each other than from lateral borders. Clypeus one-third

as high as middle eyes, retreating. Falces extending to inner edges

of lateral eyes, flattened, once and a half as long as face, vertical,

somewhat diverging; fang moderately long and stout. Maxille par-

allel, long, enlarged and rounded at extremity, with a projection at _

the outer corner; labium less than half as long as maxille, contracted

and rounded at tip. Sternum oval, twice as long as wide, narrow at

both ends. Anterior coxee separated by a little more than the width

of the labium; considerably longer than the others. Legs relatively

long; first pair stoutest. Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on

the four pairs; on the metatarsi of the fourth throughout their

length.

9. Total length 6.2mm. Width of abdomen 2.3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2; width 1.5; height 8.

Legs 3.5, 2.8, 2.5, 4.3; patella and tibia of the first, 1.3; patella and tibia of

the third, 9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.7 ; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 9.

Middle anterior only twice as large as lateral eyes; lateral not so much sep-

arated from middle eyes as in ¢. Falces parallel, fang short and

weak. Maxillee parallel, without projection at outer corner; labium

more than once and one-half as long as maxille. Anterior coxe sepa-

rated by scarcely the width of the labium and not so long as in 4.

Coloration: ¢. Cephalothorax bronze brown with three longitudinal white

bands on each side; the highest of these is much the widest and ex-

Attide of North America. 37

tends from the anterior lateral eye to the posterior border; the mid-

dle band has its origin on the upper surface of the caput and passing

down between the middle and lateral eye of the first row curves

backward and extends along the side of the cephalothorax through

about half its length; the lowest of the bands is the narrowest; it

begins opposite the origin of the palpus, and passes backward just

above the lower border, terminating a little beyond the middle band.

A wide vertical white band passes between the anterior middle eyes

from the upper surface of the caput to the origin of the falces. Ab-

domen bronze brown, nearly encircled by a white band which ex-

tends around the base and sides and ends abruptly just above and in

front of the spinnerets. Clypeus, falces, mouthparts and sternum

brown; venter brown with three white bands, one on each side, and

one connecting these at the apex.

g. Cephalothorax brown with short white hairs. Abdomen very vari-

able; sometimes pinkish with white bands at base and on the sides,

and four pairs of white spots; sometimes brown with many pale

spots and curved bands; sometimes brown with four pairs of black

spots (resembling H#. octavus) ; sometimes bronze with white hairs at

base and on the sides, and two longitudinal black bands upon which

are three or four pairs of white dots (resembling P. militaris). Cly-

peus white. Other parts varying between light and dark brown.

This species is much like P. militaris, but is easily distinguished from it

by the difference in size, P. militaris being considerably larger. The male

sometimes retains the markings of the female, these being proper to it in

the immature stage. It was a male of this kind that we described as new

under the name of A. estivalis.

Habitat: United States. Mexico.

DENDRYPHANTES ELEGANS HEnNTz.

Plate II, figures 26, 26a, 26b. Plate IV, figure 26c.

Syn.: 1845. ArrTus elegans H. (2), Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1845. a superciliosus id. (4), ibid., Vol. V.

1848. Marvtia cristata C. K. (4), Die Arachn., XIV, p. 70.

1875. ATTUs elegans H.(¢), Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz,

Ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 56.

1875. rs superciliosus id. (4), ibid., p. 68.

1883. eh tibialis Peckham (4), Descr. new or little known Atti-

dee of U.S., p. 11.

é. Totallength 4.3mm. Width of abdomen 1.1 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.9; width 1.2; height .8.

Legs 5.4, 3.2, 3.2, 5; patella and tibia of the first, 2; patella and tibia of the

third, 1.2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.9; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.6.

38 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters

9. Total length 5.6mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.1; width 1. 2; height 1.

Legs 3.7, 3.1, 3.4, 4.3; patella and tibia of the first, 1.3; patella and tibia

of the third, 1.1; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.6.

Cephalothorax moderately high, convex, dilated behind dorsal eyes; sides

nearly vertical in cephalic, rounded in thoracic part; cephalic part

inclined, especially in ¢ ; thoracic part slanting gradually for the first

three-fifths of its length, then steeply. Ocular area occupying about

two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-fourth wider than long, slightly

wider behind than in front; first row of eyes on a ridge, curved

(more in ¢ than in 2): middle eyes sub-touching; lateral one-half as_

large as middle eyes, separated from them by one-half their own di-

ameter; eyes of second row halfway between dorsal and lateral eyes;

é with two ridges of stout hairs oblique and converging, extending

from eyes of second row to anterior middle eyes; dorsal as large as

lateral eyes, further from each other than from lateral borders, form-

ing a row as wide as the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus verti-

cal, scarcely one-fourth as high as the middle eyes. Falces (4).

extending to inner edges of lateral eyes, (?) nearly as wide as first

row, a little longer than face, parallel, vertical; fang weak; maxille

parallel, enlarged and (¢) truncated, (2) rounded at extremity; la-

bium about one-half as long as maxille, as wide as long, rounded

and much contracted at tip; sternum one and one-half times as long

as wide, truncated in front, contracted and rounded behind; anterior

coxee separated (4) by width of labium, (2) by less; legs all fine and

glabrous, first a little the stoutest; femur of the third long; very

weak tibial and metatarsal (and in 6 femoral) spines on the four pairs;

on metatarsi of the third and fourth only in terminal circles.

Coloration: ¢. Cephalothorax black in eye region, reddish on sides and

thoracic part, entirely covered with light green iridescent scales, ex-

cepting a narrow black line between two white lines around the mar-

gin; two whitish tufts of hairs above anterior eyes. Abdomen and

venter covered with green iridescent scales. Clypeus iridescent;

falces brown; sternum black with white hairs; mouthparts and

coxe brown; palpi and legs light brown, legs with a black longitudi-

nal line above, first and second darker than third and fourth; tibia of

the first black at distal end, with a strong black spine and a brush of

black hairs. 9. Cephalothorax dark, covered with iridescent scales,

excepting marginal lines asin ¢. Abdomen dark and highly irides-

cent, with a whitish band around base and anterior sides. Clypeus

iridescent; falces, palpi, mouthparts, sternum and coxe as in ¢.

Venter iridescent; legs pale with black lines asin 4, excepting femur

of the first which is dark.

Habiiat: Middle, Eastern and Southern United States.

Attide of North America. 39

DENDRYPHANTES FLAVUS Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 27. Plate ITI, figures 27, 27 a.

¢. Total length 6.2mm. Width of abdomen 1.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.7; width 2; height 1,2.

Legs 4.6, 3.5, 3.8, 4; patella and tibia of the first, 2; patella and tibia of the

third, 1.6; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.6; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.2.

Cephalothorax not high, convex, dilated at the dorsal eyes, with sides

rounded more widely behind than in front; cephalic part inclined.

Ocular area occupying a little more than one-third of cephalothorax,

one-third wider than long, wider behind than in front; anterior eyes

looking downward, in a slightly curved row; middle eyes sub-touch-

ing; lateral less than one-half as large as middle eyes, separated from

them by one-half their own diameter; eyes of second row a little

nearer the lateral than the dorsal eyes; dorsal as large as lateral eyes,

further from each other than from lateral borders, forming a row as

wide as the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus only a line.

Falces nearly as wide as first row of eyes, two and one-half times as long

as face, a little inclined forward, parallel; fang short. Maxillee par-

allel, one-half as long as falces, enlarged and rounded at extremity.

Labium a little more than one-half as long as maxille, longer than

wide, rounded. Sternum deep set, twice as long as wide, truncated

in front, rounded behind. Anterior coxe separated by width of

labium; coxe of the first and second much the stoutest. Legs of the first

and second stoutest, with femoral joints compressed, and having a sin-

gle row of spines above, and several at the extremity;.there are femoral,

tibial, metatarsal, and sometimes small patellary spines on all the

legs; metatarsi of the fourth spined to the base.

Coloration: Cephalothorax covered with yellow hairs, with a transverse

brown band at dorsal eyes, and, around the margin, a white line be-

tween two black lines. Clypeus covered with white hairs. Abdo-

men covered by yellow hairs which have a somewhat metallic lustre,

and having two longitudinal black bands, on each of which are three

white dots. Falces, mouthparts and sternum dark brown, with some

white hairs. Coxe light brown. Palpi covered with gray hairs.

Legs brown with gray hairs, and tipped with black. Venter brown

with gray hairs.

Habitat: New York.

Syn.:

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

DENDRYPHANTES MULTICOLOR HENtz.

Plate ITI, figures 28, 28a.

1844. AtTrus multicolor B., Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist,. Vol. TV.

1875. a fe id., Coll., Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz.

Ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 53.

9. Total length 6.8mm. Width of abdomen 2.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 38; width 2.5; height 1.5.

Legs 6.1, ——, 4.9, 6.1; patella and tibia of the first, 2.7; patella and tibia

of the third, 1.9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.2: metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 2.1.

Cephalothorax high, convex, a little dilated behind dorsal eyes, with sides

rounded more widely behind than in front, cephalic part inclined;

thoracic part falling slightly in the first half, and much more steeply _

in the second. Ocular area occupying nearly one-half the cephalo-

thorax, one-third wider than long, wider behind than in front. First

row of eyes on a ridge, slightly curved; middle eyes sub-touching;

lateral one-half as large as middle eyes, separated from them by

nearly one-half their diameter; second row a little nearer lateral than

dorsal eyes; dorsal nearly as large as lateral eyes, further from each

other than from lateral borders, forming a row a little narrower than

the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus one-fifth as high as middle

eyes, vertical. Falces extending to inner edges of lateral eyes, twice

as long as face, vertical, parallel; fang short. Mavxillee parallel, di-

lated and rounded at extremity. Labium one-half as long as max-

illze, a little longer than wide, contracted and rounded at tip. Ster-

num nearly twice as long as wide,:a little more contracted behind

than in front, narrowest in the middle. Anterior coxe separated by

nearly the width of the labium. Legs of the first stoutest, with

femoral joints enlarged and compressed. Femoral, tibial and meta-

tarsal spines on the four pairs; metatarsi of the fourth spined

throughout their length.

Coloration: Our single specimen of this species being badly injured, we

quote the following description from Hentz:

‘* Cephalothorax black, with a pale, irregular band each side of the

disc; abdomen metallic green, with a band at base, and a diagonal

spot each side, orange, and with eight small white spots; underneath

obscure gray, with inflections of green on the pectus; feet rufous or

pale, varied with piceous 1. 4.2.3. This species is related to

A. otiosus and mystaceus, but distinct from both by the absence of the

tufts of hair on the cephalothorax, and other characters. The palpi

are pale yellow, and there isa black band more or less visible on

each side of the abdomen.”

Habitat: Pennsylvania, Alabama.

Attide of North America. 41

DENDRYPHANTES ALBO-IMMACULATUS PrckHam.

Plate III, figure 29.

Syn.: 1888. AtTTus albo-immaculatus P., Descr. new or little known Attides

Of Wi S:5 Dev:

g. Totallength5mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.8; width 1.8; height .8.

Legs 3.2, 2.6, 2.4, 3.9; patella and tibia of the first, 1.1; patella and tibia of

the third, 8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.4; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.3.

Cephalothorax rather low, slightly convex, a very little dilated at dorsal

eyes, sides almost vertical, posterior margin truncated; cephalic part

slightly inclined; ocular area occupying two-fifths of cephalothorax,

nearly one-third wider than long, wider behind than in front. An-

terior eyes small, in a slightly curved row; middle eyes touching;

lateral a little less than one-half as large as middle eyes, separated

from them by one-half their own diameter; eyes of second row very

small, slightly nearer the lateral than the dorsal eyes; dorsal a little

larger than lateral eyes, further from each other than from lateral

borders, forming a row as wide as the cephalothorax at that place.

Clypeus vertical, one-third as high as middle eyes. Falces as wide

as first row of eyes, twice as long as face, vertical, parallel; fang

short. Maxille parallel, long, enlarged and rounded at extremity;

labium one-fourth longer than wide, one-half as long as maxille,

contracted and rounded at tip. Sternum twice as long as wide, con-

tracted and truncated in front. Anterior coxe separated by nearly

the width of the labium. Femur, patella and tibia — especially tibia —

of the first enlarged; femur with arow of short and strong black

hairs near the middle of the lower border; patella with two circles of

white hair separated by a hairless median part; the tibia has, on the

upper border, a short ridge of strong black hairs, and on the lower

border a longer ridge, the hairs below being as long as the articula-

tion is thick; metatarsus and tarsus slender, Weak femoral, tibial

and metatarsal spines on the four pairs, on the metatarsi of the third

and fourth only in terminal circles.

Coloration: Cephalothorax and abdomen closely covered with short

white hairs, with a few, scattered, long black hairs; clypeus, falces,

palpi, sternum, coxee and venter covered with white hairs; mouth-

parts pale; first lez brown, excepting the tibia, which is black; other

legs light brown with longitudinal lines of white hairs.

Habitat: Iowa, New York.

ole

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

DENDRYPHANTES FLAVIPEDES Nov. Sp.

Plate Til, figure 29a.

Total length 4.6mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2; width 1.4; height 1.

Legs 4, 3, 2. 8, 3. 4; patella and tibia of the first, 1.5; patella and tibia of the’

third, 1; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.4; metatarsus and tarsus of

the fourth, 1.

Cephalothorax moderately high, slightly convex; a little dilated behind

dorsal eyes, with sides nearly vertical in front and rounded behind;

cephalic part a little inclined forward; thoracic part falling a very

little in the first half, then more steeply. Quadrangle of eyes occu-

pying two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-quarter wider than long, an

a little wider behind than in front. First row of eyes bent; middl

eyes sub-touching; lateral more than one-half as large as middl

eyes, and separated from them by one-fourth their own diameter.

Eyes of second row half way between lateral and dorsal eyes. Dorsal

as large as lateral eyes, further from each other than from lateral

borders, forming a row as wide as cephalothorax at that place. Cly-

peus vertical, one-third as high as middle eyes. Falces as wide as

the two middle eyes, once and a half as long as face, vertical, par-

allel: fang weak. Maxille blunt, cut on inner margins toward

labium. Labium a little longer than wide, less than one-half as long

as maxille. Sternum oval, one-third longer than wide, projecting

between anterior coxes. Anterior coxe separated by width of labium,

stouter and longer than the others. Legs of the first pair much the

stoutest and longest, with femoral joints compressed and enlarged.

Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs, only in term-

inal circles on metatarsi of the third and fourth.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark brown, with the eyes on a black band, a

black line around the lower margin, and some white hairs on the

sides. Abdomen dark brown with six impressed dots on the anterior,

and several darker chevrons on the posterior part. Legs light brown,

tipped with black, and having a black line along the anterior faces of

the femur, patella and tibia of the first and second. — Palpi light

brown, excepting the tarsus, which is black. Face, falces, mouth-

parts and coxee, light brown; sternum and venter a little darker.

Habitat: Canada.

Attide of North America. 43

ATTUS PALUSTRIS PrcKHAM.

Plate I, figure 30. Plate III, figures 30, 30a.

Syn.: 1883. AtTTus palustris P., Descr. new or little known Attidee of

WU. S:; p: 2d:

6. Totallength 5mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.7; width 1.6; height 1.

Legs 4.6, 3.6, 3.4, 4.4; patella and tibia of the first, 1.9; patella and tibia of

the third, .9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.7; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 1.3.

g. Total length 5.5mm. Width of abdomen 2.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.1; width 1.8; height 1.2. ;

Legs 3, 2.7, 2.5, 4.2; patella and tibia of the first, 1.1; patella and tibia of

the third, .9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.5; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 1.4.

Cephalothorax moderately high, and convex, very slightly dilated behind

dorsal eyes, with sides nearly vertical in front, rounded behind;

cephalic part inclined; thoracic part falls gradually in the first half,

then steeply. Ocular area occupying two-fifths of cephalothorax,

nearly twice as wide as long, a little wider behind than in front.

Anterior eyes on a ridge, ina straight row; middle eyes touching;

lateral one-half as large as middle eyes, separated from them by one-

half their own diameter; eyes of second row slightly nearer lateral

than dorsal eyes; dorsal a little smaller than lateral eyes, further

from each other than from lateral borders, forming a row as wide as

cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus one-half as high as middle

eyes, inclined backward. Falces extending to inner edges of lateral

eyes, twice as long as face, flat, vertical, divergent; fang weak.

Maxille parallel, short, enlarged and rounded at extremity. Labium

a little more than one-half as long as maxille, as wide as long, (? )

rounded, (4) more pointed. Sternum oval, not one-half longer than

wide. Anterior coxe separated by more than width of labium.

Legs of the first pair a little stoutest; femoral, tibial and metatarsal

spines on the four pairs; metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout

their length. :

Coloration: ¢@. Cephalothorax dark brown, reddish toward eyes, nearly

black behind; three white lines begin at the posterior end and run

forward; the median line ends before reaching the anterior eyes; the

lateral lines pass just outside the dorsal eyes and inside the small

median eyes, and are connected by a transverse white line which

crosses the eye region just above the anterior eyes; there is sometimes

a less distinct white line behind the dorsal eyes, which, with the median

longitudinal line, forms a white cross; the margin has a narrow line

of white hairs which appear to be combed upward. Clypeus brown

44 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

except a white line just under the eyes, and a fringe of white hairs,

Abdomen with a narrow central longitudinal brown band, on either

side of which the dorsum is black; in the center of the dorsum are

two transverse white bars or large spots, one on each side, in front of

which are one or two dots on each side, while behind them, in the

middle line are two indistinct light dots, one behind the other; just

above the apex are two white bars corresponding to the middle bars

but narrower; the lower sides are light brown or gray, and the base is

sometimes whitish. Falces, mouthparts and coxes dark brown.

Sternum black. Venter gray with two longitudinal brown bands.

Palpi and legs dark brown. 2. Cephalothorax gray with a white

cross behind dorsal eyes and a white band low on eachside. Clypeus

covered with white hairs. Abdomen gray at base, white at apex;

near the base and close together are two large black spots, in the mid-

dle of each of which is a white dot; continuous with these spots are

two narrow black bands, which curve outward and then inward, en-

larging into two posterior spots, which are joined in the middle by a

short black band which curves forward; thecentral region thus en-

closed is white with a dark spot in the middle; behind, in the middle

line and decreasing in size as they approach the apex, are several short

transverse black bands. These markings are somewhat variable but

the species is easily distinguished. Palpus pale with white hairs.

Legs light brown with dark rings. Otherwise like ¢.

Habitat: Wisconsin, Michigan.

ATTUS IMPERIALIS Nov. Sp.

Plate III, figures 31, 31a.

é. Totallength 4mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2; width 1.7; height 1.2.

Legs 4.8, 3.1, 2.8, 4.2; patella and tibia of the first, 2; patella and tibia of

the third, 9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.6; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.3.

Cephalothorax moderately high, slightly convex, a little dilated behind

dorsal eyes, with sides nearly vertical; cephalic part slightly inclined;

thoracic part slanting gradually in the first two-thirds, then ab-

ruptly. Ocular area occupying a little less than one-half cephalo-

thorax, one-third wider than long, wider behind than in front. First

row of eyes very slightly curved; middle eyes sub-touching; lateral

rather more than one-half as large as middle eyes, separated from

them by two-thirds their own diameter; eyes of second row very

slightly nearer lateral than dorsal eyes; dorsal as large as lateral

eyes, further from each other than from lateral borders, forming a

row as wide as the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus one-fourth

Attide of North America. 45

as high as middle eyes, vertical; falces extending to inner edges of

lateral eyes, as long as face, vertical, divergent; fang short, rather

stout. Maxille parallel, enlarged and truncated at extremity, with

projection on outer corner. Labium scarcely one-half as long as

maxille, but little longer than wide, contracted at tip. Sternum less

than one-half longer than wide, truncated in front, narrow behind.

Anterior coxee separated by more than width of labium. Legs, first

and second stoutest, with femoral joints enlarged and compressed.

Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; femoral

spines weak; tibial and metatarsal spines of the first and second in two

inferior rows, on tho third and fourth very weak; on the metatarsi

irregularly on the body of the articulation as well as in terminal

circles.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark reddish brown with a white band on each

upper side, and, on the face, two snowy white bands which begin on

each side between the middle and lateral eye and extend obliquely

downward and backward to the cephalic margin. Parallel with

these are two equally wide and white bands which cover the anterior

faces of the falces. These bands make the appearance of the spider

from in front very striking and characteristic. Abdomen reddish

brown in the middle, with a longitudinal black band on each side;

on each of these bands, near the apex, is a white dot, and below, the

sides and base are encircled by a white band. Palpus brown with a

ring of white hairs at the distal end of the femur. Mouthparts, ster-

num and venter dark brown. Coxe light brown. Legs dark brown

with femoral joints nearly black. ;

Habitat: California.

ICIUS LINEATUS C.K.

Plate I, figure 32. Plate ILI, figures 82, 32 a., 32 b.

Syn: 1848. Mavia lineata C. K., Die Arachn., XIV, p. 77.

1883. AtTrus quadrilineatus Peckham, Descr. new or little known

Attide of U.S., p. 19.

?. Total length 5.8 mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm,

Cephalothorax: length 2; width 1.5; height 8.

Legs 3.4, 2.4, 2.2, 3.9; patella and tibia of the first, 1.6; patella and tibia of

the third, 8; patellia and tibia of the fourth, 1.5; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 1.2.

Cephalothorax low, flat, a very little dilated behind dorsal eyes, with sides

nearly vertical in front, rounded behind; cephalic part inclined;

thoracic part falling slightly in first half, then more steeply. Ocular

area occupying two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-fourth wider than

long, very slightly wider behind, First eyes sub-touching, in a straight

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

row, all small, projecting, lateral about one-half as large as middle |

eyes; eyes of second row a little nearer the dorsal than the lateral eyes;

dorsal a little smaller than lateral eyes, further from each other than

from lateral borders, in a row as wide as the cephalothorax at that

place. Clypeus one-fourth as high as middle eyes, vertical. Falces but

little wider than the two middle eyes, a little longer than the face,

vertical, parallel; fang very weak, maxille parallel, a little enlarged

and blunt at extremity. Labium one-third as long as maxilla, as

wide as long, truncated. Sternum pointed in front and behind,

nearly as wide as long. Anterior coxee separated by a little less than

width of labium. Legs of the first pair stoutest; femoral, tibial and

metatarsal spines on the four pairs, metatarsi of the third and fourth

with only terminal circles.

Coloration: Eye region black covered with yellowish hair, thoracic region

testaceous with sparse yellow hair, lower margin black; abdomen

(dry) blackish, with some yellow hairs; four slender lines of white

hairs begin at the base; the two middle lines start from the same

point; and separating a little pass out on each side of the middle to

the spinnerets; the lateral lines extend along the sides from base to

apex, and are not visible from above. Clypeus covered with white

hairs; falces, mouthparts, sternum and coxe all brown; palpi pale;

legs brown, first pair darkest with black hairs; venter pale with ir-

regular, dark, longitudinal lines.

Habitat: Pennnsylvania, Wisconsin, Georgia (Gentry Coil).

Sym.:

ICIUS PALMARUM HEnTz.

Plate I, figure 33. Plate III, figures 33, 33a.

1832. EPIiBLEMUM palmarum H., Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, art. 21,

p- 108.

1845. a He id., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist.,

: vol. V.

1875. os id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M.

Hintz, ed. by Burgess, Bost., p.71.

1883. ie i Peckham, JDescr. new or little

known Attidee of U.S., p. 28.

é. Totallength 5.5mm. Width of abdomen 1.1 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.1; width 1.8; height 1.

Legs

6.1, 4.2, 3.5, 4.2; patella and tibia of the first, 2.9; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.4; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.7; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.2.

?. Total length 1.6mm. Width of abdomen 1.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.6; width 1.4; height 8.

Attide of North America. 49

Legs 4.5, 2.7, 2.8, 3.5; patella and tibia of the first, 1.5; patella and tibia of

the third, 1; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.8; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 1.

Cephalothorax moderately high, nearly plane, a very little dilated behind

dorsal eyes, with sides nearly vertical in front and rounded behind;

cephalic part very slightly inclined; thoracic part with the first half

falling gradually and the second steeply. Ocular area occupying ( é)

two fifths, (2) less than two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-third wider

than long, wider behind than in front. First row of eyes straight;

middle eyes sub-touching; lateral one-half as large as middle eyes, and

a little separated from them; eyes of second row a little nearer lateral

than dorsal eyes; dorsal a little smaller than lateral eyes, further

from each other than from lateral border, forming a row which is_

narrower than the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus a little more

than one-fourth as high as middle eyes. Falces compressed, parallel,

extending to inner edges of lateral eyes, (4) three times as long as

face, horizontal, (?) as long as face, vertical; fang (4) as long as

falx,(?)short. Maxille long, enlarged at extremity, (4) with pro-

jection at outer corner, and excavated for labium; (?) rounded, not

excavated. Labium two-thirds as long as maxille, nearly twice as

long as wide, contracted and rounded at tip. Sternum oval, one-half

longer than wide, scarcely projecting between anterior coxee. Ante-

rior coxee separated by scarcely the width of the labium. Legs of the

first pair much the longest and stoutest, especially in ¢ , with femoral

joints enlarged and compressed in both sexes; femoral, tibial and

metatarsal spines on the four pairs, on metatarsi of the third and

fourth, only in terminal circles.

Coloration: ¢. Cephalothorax bronze-brown, with short golden down,

lighter in eye region; lower margin black; a wide white band passes

around the clypeus and upper sides, just below the eyes, and just be-

hind the dorsal eye, on each side, curves upward over the thorax,

ending near the posterior margin; the eyes are surrounded with

bright red hair. Abdomen bronze-brown, covered with golden down;

there are white bands on the sides from base to apex, which do not

meet at base, where there is a tuft of black hairs. Clypeus covered

with long, snowy white hairs; falces dark rufus, with lines of white

hairs on their outer edges; mouthparts almost black; sternum rufus;

palpi and legs of the first pair (including coxze) dark rufus; legs of the

second, third and fourth (including coxee), pale, tipped with black,

Venter, rufus, edged with white. 9. Cephalothorax, rufus, covered

with white hairs, with lower margin black; there are two dark

spots in the eye region, behind the middle anterior eyes, and some

long black hairs outside the lateral eyes. Abdomen pale, covered

with white hairs, and having a tuft of white hairs at base; there is a

central, longitudinal, branching, rufus band, made up of many dots,

48 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

spots and lines, which is indistinctly visible through the white hairs.

Clypeus with white hairs; falces, dark rufus; palpus, pale with three

rufus bars, mouthparts very dark, sternum and coxe, light rufus;

legs of the first pair light rufus, the others pale, tipped with black.

Venter covered with white hairs.

Habitat: New York, North Carolina, South Carolina, Alabama, Florida.

ICIUS MITRATUS MHENTz.

Plate I, figure 34. Plate IIT, figure 34a. Plate IV, figure 34.

Syn.: 1845. Atrrus mitratus (é) H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1845. ae morigerus (¢)1id., ibid.

21848. Mavia pallida, C. K., Die Arachn, XIV, p. 79.

1875. ATTus mitratus H., Coll. Arachn. Writings by N. M. Hentz

ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 68.

1875. Ne morigerus id., ibid., p. 69.

é@. Total length 4.7mm. Width of abdomen 1 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.9; width 1.3; height .7.

Legs 5.6, 3.5, 3.2, 4; patella and tibia of the first, 2.2; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.6; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.6.

¢. Totallength5mm. Width of abdomen 1.5 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2; width 1.4; height .8.

Legs 3.2, 3, 2.2, 8; patella and tibia of the first, 1.5; patella and tibia of the

third, .9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.4; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.4.

Cephalothorax rather low, slightly convex, a little dilated behind dorsal

eyes, with sides nearly vertical in front, and rounded behind; cephalic

part inclined; thoracic part falling gradually in the first half,

then steeply. Ocular area occupying about two-fifths of cephalo-

thorax, one-third wider than long, slightly wider behind than in

front. First row of eyes straight; middle eyes sub-touching; lateral

about one-half as large as middle eyes, separated from them by one-

fourth their own diameter; eyes of second row half way between

lateral and dorsal eyes; dorsal not quite so large as lateral eyes, fur-

ther from each other than from lateral borders, forming a row

slightly narrower than the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus ver-

tical, one-half as high as middle eyes. Falces a little wider than

middle eyes, slightly longer than face, parallel, vertical; fang small.

Maxillz long, rounded and a little enlarged at the extremity; labium

twice as long as wide, two thirds as long as maxille,a little rounded

at tip, mouthparts longer and narrower in ¢ thanin ?. Sternum

contracted in front, rounded behind, ( 4 ) nearly twice as long as wide

Attide of North America. 49

(¢) one-half longer than wide. Anterior coxz separated (4) by

width of labium,(9?) by scarcely so much. Legs of the first pair

stoutest, andin ¢ very long. Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines

on the four pairs, on metatarsi of the third and fourth only in ter-

minal circles.

Coloration: Cephalothorax reddish, covered with silvery down; eyes on

black spots, a black line around margin, and (? ) two or three stout

black hairs on each side below the eyes of the second row. Abdomen

(4) covered with white down with an encircling white band, and

three, short, transverse dark bars on the dorsum; (?) covered with

down as in ¢, with three pairs of dark spots. Clypeus covered with

white hairs which extend downward over the reddish falces. Mouth-

parts and sternum reddish brown. Coxz pale; palpi and legs pale

tipped with black. Venter covered with silvery down.

Habitat: Wisconsin, Pennsylvania, North Carolina, Alabama, Georgia,

Florida.

ICIUS PIRATICUS Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 35. Plate IV, figures 35, 35a.

6. Totallength 7mm. Width of abdomen 2.2 mim.

Cephalothorax: length 3.9; width 2; height 1.3.

Legs 5.9, 3.5, 4.9, 5.2; patella and tibia of the first, 2.5; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.8; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.6.

Cephalothorax low, flat, narrow in front, dilated behind dorsal eyes, with

sides nearly vertical in front and rounded behind; cephalic part plane,

slightly inclined; thoracic falling a very little in the first half, then

more steeply. First row of eyes straight; middle eyes touching, lat-

eral sub-touching, one-half as large, and placed plainly further back;

eyes of second row a little nearer lateral than dorsal eyes, and very

small; dorsal a little smaller than lateral eyes, further from each

other than from lateral borders, forming a row as wide as cephalo-

thorax at that place. Whole ocular area occupying a little more

than one-third of cephalothorax, one-third wider than long, wider

behind than in front. Clypeus inclined backward, one-half as high

as middle eyes. Falces but little wider than the two middle eyes,

one-fourth longer than face, vertical, parallel; fang very weak. Max-

illz long, parallel, a little enlarged and rounded at extremity. La-

bium two-thirds as long as maxillz, twice as long as wide. Sternum

not projecting between anterior coxe, a little longer than wide,

rounded. Anterior coxs square, nearly touching. First leg with

femur and tibia exceedingly stout, and metatarsus and tarsus very

short; the other legs weak. Spinal armature as follows: Tibia of the

50 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

first, one short inferior spine; metatarsus of the first, two stout in-

ferior spines; metatarsus of the second, two inferior not very stout

spines; metatarsi of the third and fourth with only terminal circles.

Coloration: Cephalothorax with the entire upper surface covered with

short white hairs, black on the sides, and white on the lower border;

anterior middle eyes surrounded by reddish rings. Clypeus covered

with short white and reddish hairs. Abdomen black with a wide

central longitudinal white band, and the lower sides white. Falces

black, with some short white hairs. Mouthparts black. Coxe

brown. Sternum black with white hairs. Venter covered with

white hairs. Palpi brown with white hairs. Legs of the first pair

black, and of the second, third and fourth, brown, all with white hairs

which form heavy fringes on the undersides of the first legs.

Habitat: Texas.

ICIUS ALBOVITTATUS KEYSERLING.

Plate 1, figure 35a. Plate 4, figure 35d.

Syn.: 1885. Waa albovittata Keys., Neue Spinnen aus Amerika. VI,

Verhandl. zool. bot. gesel. in Wien, p. 31 (517),

6. Total length 5.2mm. Width of abdomen 1.3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.9; width 1.7.

Legs 6.4, 3.7, 3.5, 4.1; patella and tibia of the first, 2.7; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.3; patella and tibia of the fourth 1.6; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.3.

Cephalothorax low and flat, plainly wider in the middle, with rounded

sides; cephalic part inclined forward. Quadrangle of eyes occupy-

ing almost one-half of the cephalothorax, a little more than one-third

wider than long, wider behind than in front. First row of eyes a

little bent. Middle eyes nearly touching; lateral one-half as large

and separated from them by one-third their own diameter. Second

row of eyes plainly nearer the first than the third row. Dorsal eyes

as large as the lateral, further from each other than from the lateral

borders, forming a row not quite so wide as cephalothorax at that

place. Clypeus extremely low. Falces nearly as wide as first row

of eyes, compressed from before behind, wider in middle than at

base or extremity, a little inclined forward, diverging at the extrem-

ities; fang two-thirds as long as falx. Maxille slightly diverging,

rather long, enlarged and truncated at extremity. Labium two-

thirds as long as maxille, longer than wide, a little widest in middle,

truncated. Sternum rounded, nearly as wide as long, projecting a

very little between anterior coxe. Anterior coxee separated by less

than width of labium. First legs much the longest and stoutest.

Femoral and metatarsal spines on the four pairs, only in terminal

circles on the third and fourth; tibial spines on the first and second.

Attide of North America. 5L

Coloration: Cephalothorax red-brown covered above and on the upper’

sides with white hairs; lower sides brown; eyes and lower margin

black; clypeus white; looked at from in front a dark line extends

from each middle and from each lateral eye, backward and down-

ward to the margin. Abdomen bronze brown encircled by a white

band, below which is a dark brown band; lower sides brown: falces,

mouthparts, sternum, coxe and legs of first pair dark red-brown,

excepting the proximal end of the metatarsus, and the tarsus which

are yellow. The other coxe and legs yellow tipped with black.

Venter yellowish brown.

Habitat: North America.

PSEUDICIUS HARFORDII Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figures 36, 36a. Plate III, figure 36. Plate IV, figure 36a.

. Total length 6.3mm. Width of abdomen 2.1 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3; width 2.4; height 2.

Legs 6.1, 5.6, 5.3, 5.9; patella and tibia of the first, 2.6; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.5; metatarsus and

‘tarsus of the fourth, 1.6.

?. Totallength 6.9mm. Width of abdomen 2.7 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3; width 2.4; height 1.7.

Legs 5.4, 7, 4.8, 5.6; patella and tibia of the first, 2.4; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.2; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.8.

Cephalothorax moderately high, slightly convex, a little dilated in the mid-

dle, sides vertical in front, rounded behind; cephalic part inclined.

Ocular area occupying two-fifths of the cephalothorax, one-fourth

wider than long, equally wide in front and behind. Anterior eyes

all small, in a straight row; middle eyes sub-touching; lateral one-

half as large as middle eyes and scarcely separated from them; eyes

of second row nearer lateral than dorsal eyes; dorsal as large as

lateral eyes, further from each other than from lateral borders, form-

ing a row not so wide as the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus one-

fourth as high as middle eyes, vertical. Falces wider than the two

middle eyes, a little longer than the face, vertical, parallel; fang one-

half as long as falx. Maxillze narrow at base, enlarged at ex-

tremity, (4) with point at outer corner, (?) rounded, parallel.

Labium oval (4) one-half (9 ) nearly two-thirds as long as maxille.

Sternum contracted in front, one-third longer than wide. Anterior

coxe separated (4) by more, (¢) by less than width of labium.

Legs of the first and second pairs stoutest; femoral, tibial and metatar-

sal spines on the four pairs; stout and regular in two rows on tibiae

and metatarsi of the first and second, less stout and regular on third

and fourth; metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout their length.

52 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Coloration. 4. Cephalothorax light brown; a band of white hairs comes

up from between the middle anterior eyes and joins a white spot

which is found on the posterior cephalic part; on each upper side is

a wide band of white hairs which extends from the anterior lateral

eye, surrounding the dorsal eye, to the posterior margin; there is a

white line around the lower margin; the entire face is covered with

thick snowy white hairs, which grow from the sides toward the mid-

dle, surrounding the anterior eyes and growing downward on to the

upper part of the falces; just behind and below the anterior lateral

eyes are some small scattering tufts of black hairs. Abdomen light

golden brown, encircled by a wide band of white hairs. Falces (ex-

cepting the white hairs at the upper edge) and mouthparts dark red-

dish brown. Sternum, coxe and venter light brown. Legs all light

brown excepting the last three joints of the first pair which are dark

reddish .brown; all the legs tipped with black. 92. Cephalo-

thorax light brown covered with short white hairs, which are easily

rubbed off, but usually show a white band coming up from between the

middle anterior eyes. Abdomen covered with gray hairs and fine

red dots. Venter covered with gray hairs. Mouthparts pale. Legs

pale (excepting first pair which is light brown) all tipped with black.

Face and other parts as in male. In some cases the male retains the

coloration of the female.

This species bears a strong general resemblance to Icius albo-vittatus Keys.

Habitat: California.

SADALA Nov. GEN.

Cephalothorax rather low and nearly flat, contracted slightly in front and

behind, one-fourth longer than wide, and a very little wider than the

third row of eyes. Cephalic part occupies two-fifths of the cephalo-

thorax; the thoracic part begins to slant near its posterior border, and

is rounded behind. Quadrangle of eyes nearly twice as wide as long,

and equally wide in front and behind. First row of eyes nearly

straight, middle very nearly touching, and three times as large as

the lateral, from which they are just separated. Second row of eyes

small and plainly nearer (two-fifths) the anterior lateral. Dorsal eyes

as large as lateral, and much further from each other than from the

lateral borders. Clypeus very low (one-fifth to one-eighth the height

of anterior middle eyes). Sternum oval, a little longer than wide,

projecting between the coxze of the first pair, which are separated by

the width of the labium. Labium less than half as long as the max-

illee, and as wide as long. Falces short (as long as the face) but little

longer than wide. Legs 1, 4, 2,3. First stoutest, second next. The

patella with tibia of the third shorter than patella with tibia of the

~a—

————

~ 7%

Attidwof North America. 53

fourth. Metatarsus with tarsus of the fourth shorter than patella

.with tibia. Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs.

Metatarsi of the fourth spined to the base. Abdomen long and

slender.

Sadala is near Icius E. §., but differs in having the quadrangle of eyes

nearly twice as wide as long; middle eyes three times as large as the ante-

rior lateral; quadrangle of eyes equally wide in front and behind; legs

1, 4, 2, 3; metatarsi of the third and fourth spined throughout their length.

SADALA DISTINCTA Nov. Spe.

Plate I, figure 70. Plate VI, figures 76, 76a.

6. Total length 5.3mm. Width of abdomen 1.1 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2; width 1.5; height 6.

Legs 4.6, 3.6, 3.1, 3.9; patella and tibia of the first, 2.2; patella and tibia of

the third, 1; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.6; metatarsus and tar-

; sus of the fourth, 1.2.

Cephalothorax not high, slightly convex, contracted in front and behind,

with sides rounded, more widely behind than in front; cephalic part

plane, not inclined; thoracic part with first three-fifths level. Ocular

area occupying two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-third wider than

long, very slightly wider in front than behind. First row of eyes

nearly straight; middle eyes prominent, touching; lateral only one-

third as large as middle eyes, and slightly separated from them; eyes

of second row very small, a little nearer lateral than dorsal eyes;

dorsal as large as Jateral eyes, much further from each other than

from lateral borders, forming a row very nearly as wide as cephalo-

thorax at that place. Clypeus retreating, one-eighth as high as mid-

dle eyes. Falces as wide as the two middle eyes, scarcely longer than

face, length and width about equal, parallel, slightly inclined back-

ward; fang very small. Maxille enlarged and truncated at extrem-

ity, parallel. Labium one-half as long as maxilla, as wide as long,

rounded. Sternum oval, about twice as long as wide. Anterior

cox separated by width of labium. Legs of the first pair stoutest,

second next; these two pairs with femoral joints compressed; femoral

tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; metatarsi of the fourth,

armed throughout their length. Palpus with a tibial apophysis.

Coloration: Cephalothorax clear light-reddish brown; a black band in-

cludes the first and second rows of eyes; the dorsal eyes are placed

upon black spots, and there are two dark spots on the posterior ce-

phalic part; on each side a white line extends from the lateral eyes on

to the anterior thoracic part, passing below the small median and the

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

dorsal eye; near the termination of this line, at the point at which

the thoracic part begins to slant downward, there arises a slightly

oblique white line which passes downward to the border. The lower

margin is dark brown. Clypeus brown. The lower anterior face of

the abdomen is black; above this is a curved white band which ends,

on each side, in an oblique bar. The anterior dorsum is umber

brown; in front of the middle are two black spots, separated by a

line of brown; a little behind these is one large black spot which is

surrounded by white. There is a second pair of oblique white bars,

on the sides, at this point of the abdomen. The posterior end of the

abdomen is white, with one or. two transverse bands of light brown.

The entire dorsum is sparsely covered with long yellowish hairs.

Falces black. Mouthparts, palpi, and coxee of the first and second,

- brown; coxee of the third and fourth, pale, each with a black spot.

ternum black. Legs of the first and second, dark brown; of the

third, femur dark brown, other joints lighter; of the fourth, light-

brown or pale; patella and tibia of the third and fourth, with black

lines on both anterior and posterior faces. Venter black.

Habitat: Mexico.

HRIS OCTAVUS HENTz.

Plate I, figure 37, Plate III, figure 37.

AmTtus octavus H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

ATTUS octavus id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz. Ed.

by Burgess, Boston, p. 70.

Total length 4.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.8; width 1.5; height 1.

Legs 4.2, 3, 3, 3.9; patella and tibia of the first, 1.5; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.4; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.1.

Cephalothorax a little wider at the dorsal eyes, with sides nearly vertical

in front, rounded in the thoracic part, and truncated behind. Ocu-

lar area one-fourth wider than long, wider behind than in front;

anterior row of eyes straight; lateral more than one-half middle

eyes, separated from them by one-half their own diameter; eyes of

second row half way between lateral and dorsal eyes; dorsal eyes

further from each other than from lateral borders. Clypeus one-fifth

as high as middle eyes. Falces extending in width to inner edges of

lateral eyes, as long as face, parallel, vertical. Maxille rather long,

a little enlarged and rounded at tip, parallel; labium one-half as long

as maxille, as wide as long, contracted and rounded at tip. Ster-

num one-half longer than wide, narrow at both ends, truncated in

Attide of North America. 55

front. Anterior coxee separated by scarcely the width of the labium.

First pair of legs stoutest. Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on

the four pairs; the metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout their

length.

Coloration: Cephalothorax and abdomen light rufus, brown, or yellowish,

covered with short white hairs; cephalothorax with the eyes on black

spots; abdomen with four pairs of black spots on the posterior part,

in two converging longitudial lines; all the other parts light brown

with short white hairs, the legs being tipped with black.

Habitat: New York, Alabama, North Carolina, Georgia.

ERIS (?) BARBIPES Nov. Sp.

Plate IV, figures 38, 38a.

¢. Total length 6.8mm. Width of abdomen 2.7 mm.

Cephalothorax: length, 2.4; width, 1.9; height 1.2.

Legs 4.8, 3.6, 4.5, 5.3; patella and tibia of the first, 2.1; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.7; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.3; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 1.9.

Cephalothorax moderately high, slightly convex, very slightly dilated in

. the middle, with sides nearly vertical; cephalic part a little inclined;

thoracic part falling gradually in the first two-thirds, then steeply.

Ocular area occupying one-half cephalothorax, one-third wider than

long, plainly wider behind thaninfrout. Anterior eyes all subtouch-

ing, in a straight row; middle twice as large as lateral eyes; eyes of

second row nearly twice as far from dorsal as from lateral eyes; dor-

sal as large as lateral eyes, further from each other than from lateral

borders, forming a row as wide as cephalothorax at that place. Cly-

peus vertical, one-fourth as high as middle eyes. Falces nearly as

wide as first row of eyes, twice as long as face, vertical, parallel; fang

short. Mayille rather long, parallel, enlarged and rounded at ex-

tremity. Labium more than one-half as long as maxillae, twice as

long as wide, pointed at tip. Sternum about twice as long as wide,

slightly contracted in front and behind. Anterior coxz separated

by less than width of labium. Legs of the first pair much stoutest;

tibia especially enlarged with fringe of hairs; third and fourth slender;

femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; metatarsi of

the fourth spined throughout their length.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black, with cephalic and anterior thoracic

parts covered with short greenish hairs, and a white band around

lower margin. Abdomen black with white basal band, covered with

short scalelike slightly iridescent greenish hairs. Clypeus, falces,

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

mouthparts and sternum black. Coxe dark brown. Venter covered

with hairs as above. Palpi light, covered with short white hairs.

Legs of the first pair black, excepting metatarsi and tarsi which are

light brown; other legs brown, lighter toward extremities, with some

short white hairs.

Habitat: Mexico.

ERIS NERVOSUS Nov. Spe.

Plate I, figure 39. Plate III, figure 39.

Total length 4mm. Width of abdomen 1.5 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.6; width 1.4; height .7.

Legs 4, 3.2, 2.9, 3.7; patella and tibia of the first, 1.3; patella and tibia of the

third, .9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.3; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.

Cephalothorax not high, nearly plane, a little dilated opposite dorsal eyes,

with sides nearly vertical in front, and somewhat rounded behind; ce-

phalic part very little inclined; thoracic part sloping from just behind

dorsal eyes. Ocular area occupying nearly three-fifths of cephalo-

thorax, one fourth wider than long, wider behind than in front. An-

terior eyes small, in a straight row, slightly separated from each

other; middle scarcely twice as large as lateral; eyes of second row

twice as far from dorsal as from lateral eyes; dorsal as large as lateral

eyes, further from each other than from lateral borders, forming a

row as wide as cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus one-half as high

as middle eyes, a little inclined backwards. Falces extending to in-

ner edges of lateral eyes, a little longer than the face, nearly square,

parallel, a little inclined backward, fang weak. Maxille diverging

a little, enlarged and rounded at extremity. Labium one-half as long

as maxille, a little longer than wide, rounded. Sternum nearly

round. Anterior coxe separated by scarcely the width of the labium.

Legs of the first pair stoutest, with femoral joints enlarged and com

pressed, and patella and tibia much stouter than metatarsus and tar-

sus; weak femoral spines on first, second and third; stout tibial and

metatarsal spines on the first, and weak spines on the corresponding

joints of the second.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black. Clypeus black with a few long white

hairs. Abdomen dark reddish brown with some very short white

hairs, three rather indistinct, oblique black bands on each side of dor-

sum, and two white chevrons at apex. Falces and mouthparts dark

brown. Sternum and coxe light brown. Venter dark reddish brown

with short gray hairs. Palpi and legs light brown, the legs tipped

with black.

fF abitat: New York.

Attide of North America. 57

HASARIUS HOYI P5cKHAM.,

Plate I, figures 40, 40a. Plate IV, figure 40, 40a,

Syn.: 1883. ArTushoyi(é)P., Descrip. of new or little known Attide, p.7.

1883 i pinus (2) id., ibid., p. 20.

6 Totallength 5.2mm. Width of abdomen 1.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.3; width 1.9; height 1.6.

Legs 5.2, 4, 5.2, 4.9; patella and tibia of the first, 2; patella and tibia of the

third, 1.7; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.9; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.6.

? Totallength 5.9mm. Width of abdomen 2.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.5; width 2; height 1.7.

Legs 4.6, 4.2, 5, 4.8; patella and tibia of the first, 2.2; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.1; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 1.9.

Cephalothorax rather high, plane, slightly dilated behind dorsal eyes, with

sides nearly vertical in front, rounded behind; cephalic part inclined

(more strongly in ¢ than ing); thoracic part falling but little

in ‘the first two-thirds, then steeply. Ocular area occupying

two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-third wider than long, and almost

imperceptibly wider in front than behind. First row of eyes straight;

middle eyes sub-touching; lateral more than one-half as large as

middle eyes, separated from them by by one-third their own diameter;

eyes of second row half way between dorsal and lateral eyes; dorsal

a little smaller than lateral eyes, further from each other than from

lateral borders, forming a row scarcely narrower than the cephalo-

thorax at that place. Clypeus (4) vertical, one-third, ( ? ) inclined,

one-fifth as high as middle eyes. Falces extending to the inner edges

of lateral eyes, but little longer than face, vertical, parallel; fang

weak. Maxillz parallel, short, slightly enlarged and rounded at ex-

tremity; labium one-half as long as maxille, bat little longer than

wide, a little contracted and blunt at tip. Sternum ‘oval, one-half

longer than wide. Anterior coxz separated by width of labium.

Legs of the first and second pairs stoutest; third longer than fourth by

greater length of femur, femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the

four pairs; on metatarsi of the fourth throughout their length.

Coloration: ¢@. Ocular and anterior thoracic region rufus a little mixed

with black; posterior thoracic region black; a white band on each

side, beginning at or near the base passes forward to the anterior

lateral eyes, and joining these, a white band crosses above the an-

terior eyes; the sides below the white bands are velvety black; the

anterior eyes are surrounded by hairs which are white excepting just

between the eyes, where they are red; looked at from above this

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

gives the appearance of three minute red tufts. Clypeus black with

white hairs. Abdomen black with an encircling white band and a

central, longitudinal, rufus band which varies greatly in length and

breadth, upon which are some variable white marks, which usually

consist of two short, oblique lines near the base, a triangle in the mid-

dle, and a series of chevrons near the apex. Falces dark testaceous

with sparse short white hairs; maxille and labium brown; sternum

dark with black and white hairs; venter black with rufus hairs,

palpi and legs barred with black and rufus excepting the proximal

ends of the femoral joints which are pale. 92. Cephalothorax

covered with brown, black and rufus hairs, with a grayish band

behind dorsal eyes, which passes downward and forward on the

sides to the lateral eyes; clypeus covered with white hairs. Ab-

domen rufus or light brown with a grayish basal band, behind which

is a curved black band; there are several other curved black bands

near the apex,and a central, longitudinal black line. Falces,

mouthparts and sternum brown; palpus pale with hair which is

light brown excepting at the extremity, where it is white; legs, first

pair dark; the others brown with black hairs.

Habitat: Pennsylvania, New York, Wisconsin.

Since describing hoyi and pinws as two species (1883) we have satisfied

ourselves that pinus is the female of hoyt.

HABROCESTUM (E. Sion), 1876.

Cephalothorax rather short, one-fourth to one-third longer than wide, mod-

erately high to very high: thoracic part often convex, but slightly

dilated on the sides, which are somewhat rounded, only a third the

longer. Cephalic part a little convex, inclined, limited by a faint

depression. Quadrangle of eyes one-third wider than long, and equally

wide in front and behind, or a little wider behind. Anterior row of

eyes rather unequal — middle about twice lateral— middle but little

separated, lateral by not more than one-third their diameter, forming

a line straight or slightly curved upward. Second row small, and

nearly half way between the first and third rows. Dorsal eyes equal

to or a little larger or smalier than the anterior lateral, forming’a row

about as wide as the cephalothorax at that place, and almost equally

distant from each other and from the lateral borders. Clypeus varies

from one-half to two-thirds the large middle eyes. Sternum

one-half longer than wide, often truncated in front and contracted

behind, produced between the anterior coxee, which are separated by

a little more or less than the width of labium at its base. Labium

as wide as long! and less than one-half the maxille. Falces weak

1 This is true at least in the American species.

ig Attide of North America. 59

and as long as the face. Maxillee enlarged and rounded or truncated

at extremity. Legs 3, 4, 1, 2, in both sexes. The posterior pairs

long, both absolutely and relatively. The first and second pairs

the stoutest. All the legs spined. Femur, patella and tibia of

the third much longer than the same articulations in the fourth pair.

Tarsus and metatarsus of the fourth nearly equal to the patella and

tibia.

This genus differs from Saitis E. $.—to which it is closely related —in

having the quadrangle of the eyes never wider in front; usually the

clypeus is more than one-half the middle eyes; the third pair of legs

is longer than the fourth. In Saitis the third and fourth pairs are equal

or almost equal.

HABROCESTUM CORONATUM HENTz.

). ATTUS corontus H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. V.

1875. ATTUS corontus, id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz.

Ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 64.

4.juv. Totalleneth5.5mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.9; width 2.

Legs, 3.8, 2.4, 5.2, 4.8.

Cephalothorax high. Ocular area equally wide in front and behind. First

row of eyes straight; middle eyes subtouching; lateral a little more

than one-half as large as middle eyes, separated from them by one-

fourth of their own diameter; eyes of second row half way between

lateral and dorsal eyes; dorsal as large as lateral eyes. Clypeus two-

thirds as high as middle eyes, vertical. Anterior coxz separated by

more than width of labium.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black with some white hairs over the anterior

eyes, and two curved longitudinal white bands on the thoracic part.

Clypeus bright red, sometimes covered with white hairs. Abdomen

black, with three transverse curved white bands, one at the base, the

second in front of, and the third behind the middle of the dorsum,

the second and third sometimes interrupted in the middle line, and

having one or two white chevrons between them; behind the third

curved band is a large central white spot, and on each side of the

apex is ashort longitudinal white band. Falces dark brown. Mouth-

parts pale drab. Sternum, coxe and venter light brown with white

hairs. Palpi and legs brown with black hairs.

Habitat: Pennsylvania, Alabama, Iowa.

60 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

HABROCESTUM C@ICATUM Hentz.

Plate I, figure 42. Plate IV, figures 42, 42a, 42b.

Syn.: 1845. AtTtus cecatus H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1875. oe ue id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz. Ed,

by Burgess, Boston, p. 65.

?. Total length 4.3mm. Width of abdomen 1.7 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2; width 1.8; height .9.

Legs, 3.6, 2.9,.4.4, 4.

Cephalothorax moderately high; cephalic part much inclined. Ocular

area wider behind than in front. First row of eyes straight; middle

eyes sub-touching; lateral less than one-half as large as middle eyes,

separated from them by one-third their own diameter; eyes of second

row half way between lateral and dorsal eyes; dorsal eyes a little

smaller than lateral eyes. Clypeus retreating, two thirds as high as

middle eyes. Anterior coxe separated by fully the width of the

labium.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black, with gray hairs above anterior eyes.

Clypeus bright red. Abdomen black, more or less covered with

whitish hairs, with a curved transverse white band, behind which are

a white, diamond-shaped spot, two short, longitudinal, white bands

on the sides, and two white dots near the apex. Falces, mouth-

parts, sternum, coxee and venter brown, all with white hairs except-

ing the mouthparts. Femur of the first leg black, with a short brush of

black hairs at distal end; patella and tibia covered with white hairs;

metatarsus and tarsus brown; other legs dark brown with some

white hairs; patella of the third with an elevation on the upper sur-

face at the distal end; tibia of the third with a short projection

which extends over the metatarsus.

Distinguished from H. cornatum by the projection on the tibia of the third

leg.

Habitat: Pennsylvania, New York, Alabama.

HABROCESTUM VIRIDIPES Hentz.

Plate I, figure 43. Plate IV, figures 43, 43a.

Syn.: 1845. Arrus viridipes H. Jour. Bost. Soc. of Nat. Jebisiigs NVGIE We

1875. fs os id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz.

Kid. by Burgess, Boston, p. 66.

4. Total length 4.8mm. Width of abdomen 1.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.3; width 1.8; height 1.4.

Attide of North America. 61

Legs 3.5, 3.3, 5.2, 4.6; patella and tibia of the first, 1.8; patella and tibia of

third, 2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.7; metatarsus and tarsus of

the fourth, 1.9.

¢ Totallength5.8mm. Width of abdomen 3 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.3; width 2; height 1.6.

Legs 3.9, 3.7, 4.8, 4.2; patella and tibia of the first, 1.6; patella and tibia of

the third, 2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.8; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 1.8.

Cephalothorax moderately high. Ocular area equally wide in front and

behind. First row straight, all the eyes sub-touching; lateral less

than one-half as large as middle eyes; eyes of second row half way

between lateral and dorsal eyes; dorsal as large as lateral eyes. Cly-

peus nearly two-thirds as high as middle eyes, vertical. Anterior

coxee separated by width of labium.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black with two wide longitudinal bands of

grayish hairs which arise on the posterior thoracic region and extend-

ing forward, surround the dorsal eyes, and meet just in front of

them, thus occupying nearly the whole of the cephalic part. Clypeus

covered with white hairs. Abdomen blackish with a basal band, a

scalloped band which encircles the posterior two-thirds of the dor-

sum, and a central spot of a yellowish white color. The spot and the

inner side of the encircling band are edged with deep black. The

other parts are of a lighter or darker brown color, the sternum being

sometimes much darker than the coxee.

Habitat: Texas, South Corolina.

HABROCESTUM PEREGRINUM PEcKHAM.

Plate I. figure 44. Plate IV, figure 44, 44a, 44b.

Syn.: 1883. ATTUS peregrinum P., Descr. new or little known Attide of

Wis tSkq 19h Ire

4. Totallength 5.3mm. Width of abdomen 1.9 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.9; width 2; height 1.2.

Legs 5.3, 4.5, 6.4, 5.6; patella and tibia of the first, 2.6; patella and tibia

of the third, 2.4; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.7; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.9.

Cephalothorax high, especially behind; cephalic part muchinclined. Ocu-

lar area a little wider behind than in front. Anterior eyes all small,

in a straight row; middle eyes sub-touching; lateral a little more than

one-half as wide as middle eyes, separated from them by one-third

their own diameter; eyes of second row slightly nearer lateral than

dorsal eyes; dorsala little larger than lateral eyes. Clypeus two-thirds

62 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

as high as middle eyes, retreating. Two unusually stout spines on tibia

of the first pair; patella of the third widening toward distal end where

it projects over tibia; this widened portion bears a short pale spine

which projects over tibia, just behind which, on the anterior face is a

small black dot. Anterior coxe separated by width of labium.

Coloration: Ground color of cephalothorax dark brown or black; upper

surface of cephalic part covered with short fawn-colored hairs, bor-

dered behind by a scalloped white band; thorax with two wide white

bands which extend from dorsal eyes to posterior border; a wide

white band extends entirely around the lower border, and below this

is a narrow black line. Abdomen snowy white on sides and middle

of dorsum, with two velvety black longitudinal bands extending

throughout its length. Clypeus covered with thick, long, white hairs.

Underparts and legs lighter or darker brown, well covered with

_ white hairs.

This species is close to H. Copardum Hentz, but is distinguished from it

by the apophysis on the third leg; this apophysis and the spines on the

tibia of the first leg vary considerably in stoutness.

Habitat: New York, Connecticut.

HABROCESTUM CRISTATUM HENTz.

Plate I, figure 45. Plate IV, figure 45.

Syn.: 1845. AtTrus cristatum H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1875, ee iy id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz. Hd.

by Burgess, Boston, p. 67.

9. Totallength 6.6mm. Width of abdomen 2.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.4; width 2.4; height 1.2

Legs 4.8, 4.5, 6.8, 6.1; patella and tibia of the first, 2 2; patella and iba of

the third, 2.8 ; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.2; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 2.2.

Cephalothorax moderately high. Ocular area wider behind than in front.

First row of eyes slightly covered; middle eyes sub-touching; lateral

a little less than one-half as large as middle eyes, separated from

them by one-third their own diameter; eyes of second row a little

nearer dorsal than lateral eyes; dorsal as large as lateral eyes. Cly-

peus nearly two-thirds as high as middle eyes, retreating. Anterior

coxee separated by less than width of labium.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark, nearly covered with grayish hair. Cly-,

peus covered with white hairs. Abdomen covered with grayish

rufus hair with two spots on the anterior part, a slender band which

curves upward from the sides over the middle part, and a small ring

ene

Attide of North America. 63

on the posterior region black. Falces and mouthparts dark brown.

Sternum and coxe light brown. Legs brownish rufus. Venter

covered with grayish hair.

Habitat: New York, Connecticut, Alabama.

HABROCESTUM AURATUM HENTz.

Plate I, figure 46a. Plate IV, figures 46, 46a, 46b.

Syn: 1845. <Attus auratuwm H., Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1875. ee a Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz, Ed. sby

Burgess, Boston, p. 66.

6. Totallength5mm. Width of abdomen 1.9 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.8: width 1.8; height 1.

Legs 4, 3.8, 5.8, 4.2; patella and tibia of the first, 1.8; patella and tibia of the

third, 2.1; patella and tibta of the fourth, 1.6; metatarsus and tarsus.

of the fourth, 1.6.

g. Totallength 6.4mm. Width of abdomen 5 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.2; width 2.2; height 1.1.

Legs 4.5, 4.38, 6.2, 4.8; patella and tibia of the first, 2; patella and tibia of the

third, 2.4; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.9; metatarsus and. tarsus

of the fourth, 1.9.

Cephalothorax moderately high, 9 less convex than ¢; cephalic part in

clined more in ¢ thanin 9°. Ocular area equally wide in front and

behind. First row of eyes straight, middle eyes sub-touching; lateral a

little less than one-half middle eyes, separated from them by (2 ) one-

third their own diameter, (4) scarcely so much; eyes of second row

very slightly nearer lateral than dorsal eyes, dorsal as large as lateral-

eyes. Clypeus two-thirds as high as middle eyes, retreating. An-

terior coxee separated by scarcely the width of the labium.,

Coloration: ¢. Cephalothorax covered with short black hairs which are

intermingled with others of a yellowish brown color, these latter

being by far the most numerous in the eye region and giving to that

part its predominating tint. Three white bands come up on to

the caput from the interspaces in the first row of eyes; the central

one of these terminates behind the middle of the eye region; the lat-

eral ones pass just above the small median eyes, surround the dorsal

eyes and on the thoracic part curve first toward, and then away

from each other, terminating at the posterior border. Around the

lower margin is a black line, and just above this a band of white.

Abdomen black encircled by a wide white band and having acentral

longitudiual white band which ends a little in front of the spinnerets.

Clypeus and falces blackish brown, clypeus sparsely covered with

64 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

short, and falces with long white hairs. Sternum black, and coxe

light yellowish brown, both being covered, not very thickly, with

white hairs. Venter gray, covered thickly with a mixture of black —

and white hairs. Legs and palpi medium brown with many white

scales and some black hairs. Femur of the first with a distinct tuft

of stiff black hair on the under side. Patella of the first with a small,

and tibia of the first with a much larger tuft of stiff black hairs on

the upper surface. 9. Cephalothorax covered with gray hairs. Ab-

domen covered with gray hairs, with a basal band, two oblique bands

on each side, two spots near the apex, and a central line of chevrons

white. Falces reddish brown. Underparts, legs and palpi covered

with short white hairs. ~

qhis species is close to H. peregrinum but the two species are disting-

uished from each other by the differences in the first and third pairs of legs.

Habitat: New York, South Carolina, Georgia.

HABROCESTUM HIRSUTUM. Nov. Sp.

Plate IV, figures 47, 47a.

6. Totallength 5.8mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3; width 1.7; height 1.4.

Legs 4.9, 3.9, 5.8, 5.4; patella and tibia of the first, 1.7; patella and tibia of the

third, 2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.7; metatarsus and tarsus of

the fourth, 1.9.

Cephalothorax high, slightly convex behind, dilated in the middle, with

sides rounded more widely behind than in front; cephalic part plane,

not inclined; thoracic sloping slightly in the first half, then more

steeply. Ocular area occupying two-fifths of cephalothorax, not

quite one-third wider than long, wider behind than in front. First

row of eyes straight; middle eyes sub-touching; lateral less than one-

half as large as middle eyes and a little separated from them; eyes of

second row half way between lateral and dorsal eyes; dorsal as large

as lateral eyes, further from each other than from lateral borders,

forming a row as wide as cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus in-

clined backward, nearly as high as middle eyes. Falces as wide as

the two middle eyes, a little shorter than face, parallel, inclined

backward; fang rather long. Mavxille parallel, short, square, trun-

cated. Labium as wide as long, very short, rounded. Sternum ob-

long oval, nearly twice as long as wide, narrow. Anterior coxe

separated by width of labium; coxe of the fourth touching. Legs of the

first pair stoutest; femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four

pairs, and patellary spines on first and fourth; metatarsi of the fourth

spined throughout their length.

——_

Attide of North America. 65

Coloration: Cephalothorax black, probably originally covered with short

white and red hairs, with a band of white hairs and some long black

hairs above the anterior eyes. Clypeus covered with red hairs, Ab-

domen and venter covered with short whitish brown hairs. Falces

reddish brown. Mouthparts, sternum, coxe and palpi brown. Legs

brown with light hairs, first pair darkest with a fringe of stout black

hairs on the tibia.

Habitat: Oregon.

HABROCESTUM SPLENDENS PECKHAM.

Plate I, figure 48. Plate V, figures 48, 48a.

Syn.: 1883. AtTTus splendens P., Descr. new or little known Attide of

We Shy ios 4h

1885. PELLENES nigroceps Keyserling, Neue Spinnen aus Amerika,

VI, Verhandlungen zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft.,

p. 26 (512).

6. Totallength 6.5mm. Width of abdomen 2.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3; width 2.2; height 1.6.

Legs 3.9, 3.7, 4.9, 4.5; patella and tibia of the first, 1.9; patella nl tibia of

the third, 1.9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.8; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.5.

?. Totallength 7.7mm. Width of abdomen 2.9 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.1; width 2.5; height 1.3.

Legs 5.7, 4.5, 7.2, 5.8; patella and tibia of the first, 2; patella and tibia of

the third, 3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.8; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.9.

Cephalothorax high and convex, a little dilated opposite dorsal eyes, sides

nearly vertical in front, rounded behind; posterior margin truncated;

Ocular area occupying two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-third wider

than long, a little wider behind than in front; anterior row of eyes

straight; middle eyes slightly separated; lateral less than one-half as

large as middle eyes, separated from them by one-third their own

diameter; eyes of second row half way between dorsal and lateral

eyes; dorsal as large as lateral eyes, further from each other than

from lateral borders, forming a row a little narrower than the cephal-

othorax at that place. Clypeus(¢) nearly as high, (9) one-half as

high as middle eyes. Falces extending to inner edges of lateral eyes,

but little longer than the face, vertical, parallel; fang short, Max-

ille parallel, widely separated, enlarged and blunt at extremity;

labium as wide as long, a little less than one-half as long as maxilla,

blunt. Sternum narrowed at both ends, truncated in front, rounded

behind; (4) twice as long as wide, (?) relatively shorter. Anterior

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

coxee separated (4) by scarcely width of labium, (?) by more than

width of labium. Legs of the first and second pairs stoutest; femoral,

patellary, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; ¢ with

spines on trochanters; metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout their

length.

Coloration: ¢. Cephalothorax covered with dark but highly iridescent

scales; under alcohol two whitish testaceous spots appear just behind

dorsal eyes; lower margin black; some upright black hairs on ante-

rior part of eye region. Abdomen bright iridescent red, lighter

around margin, purplish on dorsum, four indented dots near base,

and sometimes a whitish basal band; whole abdomen covered with

sparse black hairs; spinnerets black; under alcohol the base and a

curved oblique band on each side appear black, and the dorsum

dark iridescent green with a short longitudinal red band, narrowest

in the middle. Clypeus iridescent; falces dark reddish brown with

long white hairs on their inner edges; maxillee white at extremities

and on inner edges, otherwise reddish; labium reddish tipped with

white; sternum testaceous, darker than coxe, with white hairs;

coxee covered with white hairs; palpi and legs almost black; venter

iridescent red with two indistinct darker longitudinal bands. 9°.

Cephalothorax rufus, or more rarely black in the eye region, with a

transverse black band between the dorsal eyes; posterior to thisisa |

scalloped white or rufus band which curves forward in the middle;

behind the scalloped band the thoracic part is black; the sides are

black above, and white below; the margin has a narrow black line

between two white lines. Abdomen velvety black, with basal, cen-

tral, and lateral white bands, which are sometimes tinted with

salmon-color. Clypeus covered with white hairs; falces reddish,

with white hairs on anterior face; maxille and labium brown; palpi

and legs varied with rufus and black, with white hairs; venter cov-

ered with whitish and rufus hairs.

Count Keyserling has kindly sent us a specimen of his Pellenes nigroceps

which we find to be identical with H. splendens. The female of this

species is extremely variable, especially in the abdominal markings.

Habitat: Wisconsin, Massachusetts.

é.

HABROCESTUM OREGONENSE Nov. Sp.

Plate V, figures 49, 49a.

Total length 5.8 mm. Width of abdomen 1.9 mm,

Cephalothorax: length 2.5; width 1.6; height 1.

Legs 5, 3.8, 6, 5.5; patella and tibia of the first, 2.3; patella and tibia of the

third, 2.5; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2; metatarsus and tarsus of

of the fourth, 2.

Attide of North America. 67

Cephalothorax high, convex, a little dilated behind dorsal eyes, with sides.

slightly concave in front and a little rounded (nearly vertical) be-

hind; cephalic part inclined; thoracic falling abruptly from a little

way behind dorsal eyes. Ocular area occupying more than two-

fifths of cephalothorax, one-third wider than long, equally wide in

front and behind. Anterior eyes rather small, in a very slightly

curved row; middle eyes sub-touching, scarcely twice as large as the

lateral, which are scarcely separated from them; eyes of second row

a little nearer dorsal than lateral eyes; dorsal a little smaller than

lateral eyes, further from each other than from lateral borders, form-

ing a row as wide as cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus retreat--

ing, one-half as high as middle eyes. Falces but little wider than

the two middle eyes, square, not long, parallel, a little inclined back-

ward; fang extremely small. Maxille parallel, very small, wider

and rounded at extremity. Labium small, a little more than one-

third as long as maxille, as wide as long, rounded. Sternum nearly

round, Anterior coxee separated by more than width of labium at

base. Legs of the first pair much the stoutest, with tibia nearly as wide-

as long, much enlarged in all directions, with fringes of stout hairs;

patella and tibia also enlarged with some stout hairs; long and slen-

der femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs, and patel-:

lary spines on the third and fourth; metatarsi of the fourth spined

throughout their length.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark colored, nearly covered with bright irid-

escent red hairs, with which, on the cephalic part, some long black

hairs are intermixed; lower border with a black line between two

white lines; anterior eyes surrounded by white rings. Abdomen, ven-

ter, clypeus, falces, palpus and legs all covered with iridescent red

hair. Mouthparts, sternum and cox very dark brown, with some.

short, white hairs.

Habitat: Oregon.

SAITIS PULEX MHENTZz.

Plate I, figures 50, 50a. Plate V, figures 50, 50a.

Syn.: 1845. AtTtus pulex H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1846.2? Evopurys offuscata C. K., Die Arachn., XIII, p. 218.

1875. AtTTus pulex id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz. Ed. by

Burgess, Boston, 65.

1885. CyrBa pulew Keyserling, Neue Spinnen aus Amerika, VI,

Verhandlungen zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft,

p. 28 (509).

68 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

é. Totallength 4mm. Width of abdomen 1.4 mm.

‘Cephalothorax: length 2.5; width 1.1; height 1.2.

Legs 2.5, 2.5, 4, 4; patella and tibia of the first, 1.3; patella and tibia of the

third, 1.5; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.5; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.5.

9. Totallength 4.5mm. Width of abdomen 2.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.5; width 1.4; height 1.3.

Legs 3, 3, 4.4, 4.5; patella and tibia of the first, 1.3; patella and tibia of the

third, 1.6; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.6; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.6.

Cephalothorax high and convex, a little dilated behind dorsal eyes, sides .

nearly vertical in front, and rounded behind, more widely in ¢ than

in ?; cephalic part inclined; thoracic part slanting a little from dor-

sal eyes, and dropping abruptly near posterior border. Ocular area

occupying two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-fourth wider than long,

slightly wider in front than behind. Anterior eyes on a projecting

ridge, all sub-touching, ina slightly curved row; lateral about one-half

as large as middle eyes; eyes of second row half way between lateral

and dorsal eyes; dorsal a little smaller than lateral eyes, further from

each other than from lateral borders, forming a row narrower than

the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus retreating, one-third as high

as middle eyes. Falces but little wider than the two middle eyes,

about as long as face, inclined backward, parallel; fang extremely

weak. Maxille parallel, but little enlarged at extremity, (4) almost

truncated, (?) blunt, inner edge vertical. Labium one-half as long

as maxille, narrow and hollowed at base, enlarged in middle, con-

tracted at tip (é) nearly twice as long as wide, (9?) but little longer

than wide. Sternum one-half longer than wide, truncated in front,

narrow and rounded behind. Anterior coxee separated by more than

the width of the labium. Legs all slender; femoral, tibial and meta-

tarsal spines on all the legs, and patellery spines on the third and the

fourth; metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout their length. Fe-

moral joints of the first and second not enlarged, but compressed, es-

pecially in ¢.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark brown; eye region black; central thoracic

region covered with gray and rufus hairs; lower margin black; red-

dish rings around anterior eyes. Abdomen dark brown or black;

a white central band arises at base, and enlarging and then again

narrowing, reaches the central point of the dorsum; posterior to this

two short, oblique, white bands form a chevron whose apex, pointing

forward, touches the extremity of the central band; near the apex are

several small white chevrons; there isa white band on each side.

The white dorsal markings in the 9 are sometimes broken up as in

figure 50; usually they resemble those of the ¢. Clypeus, falces,

mouthparts, sternum and venter brown, glabrous. Palpi and legs

Attide of North America. 69:

sometimes dark brown, sometimes pale with brown rings. Coxe

pale.

Habitat: New York, Pennsylvania, Wisconsin, Iowa, Tennessee, and Ala-

bama.

PROSTHECLINA CAMBRIDGII Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 51. Plate V, figures 51, 51a.

4. Total length 5.2mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.7; width 2; height 1.9.

Legs 6.4, 5, 6, 6; patella and tibia of the first, 2.5; patella and tibia of the

third, 2.1; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2; metatarsus and tarsus 2.

¢. Total length 5.8; width of abdomen 2.5.

Cephalothorax: length 2.5; width 1.8; height 1.7.

Legs 4,8, 4.5, 5.3, 5.7; patella and tibia of the first, 2; patella and tibia of

the third, 2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.9.

Cephalothorax rather high, convex, slightly dilated behind dorsal eyes,

sides vertical; cephalic part inclined; ocular area occupying a little

less than one-half cephalothorax, less than one-fourth wider than

long, a little wider in front than behind. Anterior row of eyes a lit-

tle curved; the four eyes sub-touching; lateral more than one-half as

large as middle eyes; eyes of second row halfway between lateral and

dorsal eyes; dorsal smaller than lateral eyes, nearer to each other than

to lateral borders, in a row scarcely narrower than the cephalothorax

at that place. Clypeus vertical, one-third as high as middle eyes.

Falces extending to inner edges of lateral eyes, but little longer than

face, vertical, parallel, fang short, weak. Maxille parallel, enlarged

and rounded at tip; labium nearly as wide as long, a little more than

one-half aslong as maxilla, rounded. Sternum nearly round, trun-

cated in front. Anterior coxze separated by a little more than the

width of labium. Legs of the first stoutest, of the second next;

femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs, throughout

the length of the articulation on metatarsi of the fourth.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black, with some gray hairs above the anterior

eyes, a white parenthesis on the anterior part of the thoracic region,

and white bands on the lower sides; abdomen greyish rufus with

four black spots; clypeus, falces, and sternum black with short white

hairs; mouthparts and cox rufus; legs of the first, dark, nearly

black, of the second, third, and fourth, varied with black, white and

rufus, palpi rufus with black tarsi; venter covered with gray hairs.

This species agrees with the genus Prostheclina Keys., excepting that

the relative length of the legs in the ¢ is 1. 3, 4, 2; not 1, 4, 3, 2.

Habitat: Florida.

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ASTIA VITTATA MHENTz.

Plate I, figure 52, 52a. Plate V, figure 52, 52a.

Syn.: 1845. Arrus vittatus H., Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V. .

é.

1845. So. OGG. (GS) nels toxicl, ;

1846. PLEXIPPUS undatus C. K., Die Arachn., XIII, p. 1238.

1848. MaArvia pencillata (3) C. K., Die Arachn., XIV, p. 69.

1875. AtTTUS vittatus H., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz. Ed.

by Burgess, Boston, p. 64.

1875. G pocar((S Gk, tote, tos OF

Totallength 7mm. Width of abdomen 2.1 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3; width 1.9; height 1.7.

Legs 5.4, 5, 5.1, 6.38; patella and tibia of the first, 2.8; patella and tibia of

é.

the third, 2.3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.8; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 2.8.

Total length 8mm. Width of abdomen 2.8.

Cephalothorax: length 3.4; width 2.4; height 2.

Legs 5.7, 5.6, 6.3, 6.9; patella and tibia of the first. 3.6; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.2; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 3.

Cephalothorax moderately high, nearly plane, dilated behind dorsal eyes,

with sides nearly vertical in front, and rounded behind; cephalic

part a little inclined forward; thoracic part slanting but little in the

first half, steeply in the second. Ocular area occupying two-fifths

of the cephalothorax, one-third wider than long, a little wider in front

than behind; anterior eyes projecting forward, in a straight row;

middle eyes touching; lateral one half as large as middle eyes, and

slightly separated from them; eyes of second row half way between

lateral and dorsal eyes; dorsal a little smaller than lateral eyes, fur-

ther from each other than from the lateral borders, forming a row

not quite so wide as the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus (4)

one-half, (2) one-third as high as middle eyes, slightly inclined.

Falces (2) but little wider than middle eyes, one-half longer than

face, vertical, parallel; 4 weaker and shorter than in 9 ; fang weak.

Maxille parallel, enlarged and rounded at extremity; labium a little

longer than wide, one-half as long as maxillze, contracted and blunt

at tip. Sternum nearly twice as long as wide, scarcely projecting be-

tween anterior coxe; anterior coxe almost touching. (¢) first legs

stoutest with femur, patella and tibia enlarged; (4 9) with spines on

trochanters, femora, patellz, tibize and metatarsi of the four pairs,

those on the femora numerous at the distal ends; (4) legs and spines

weaker than in ?.

Coloration: ¢. Presenting two distinct varieties; the first has the tho-

racic part of the cephalothorax light brown and glabrous with a cen-

Attide of North America. val

tral, longitudinal, black line, while the eye region is black with some

short white hairs; the abdomen is mottled with black, red and white,

sometimes with alternate white and red chevrons on the central re-

gion; clypeus white; falces, mouthparts, sternum and coxe pale;

venter covered with short white hairs; legs white with black spots

and spines, and underneath on the fermoral joints, characteristic,

oblique, black bars; the second variety (niger) has the cephalothorax

black, with a pale spot, divided by a longitudinal, black line, in the

central thoracic region, and, on the posterior part of the eye region,

forming a transverse row, three long tufts of black hairs; abdomen

black; clypeus, palpi, falces, sternum, mouthparts, venter and some-

times coxee very dark or black; legs pale, with a yellowish tint in

comparison with the white legs of the first variety, tipped with black.

Intermediate between these varieties is one which is nearly as

dark as niger, with pale legs, but without the cephalic tufts. So un-

like in general appearance are the extreme forms that they were

placed by C. Koch in two different genera (Plexippus undatus, Die

Arachniden, xiii, fig. 1183, and Maevia pencillata, Die Arachniden,

xiv, fig. 1825). As this is an extremely common species we have

compared large numbers of them, but have never found the tufts

present in the first variety, which most resembles the 9. 9. Cephal-

othorax light brown in thoracic part, black in eye region, with short

white and red hairs; abdomen white on sides and central dorsum,

with two longitudinal bright red bands; in rubbed specimens the cen-

tral region and sides are pale flecked and striped with reddish, and

the bands are dark red; clypeus, falces, mouthparts, sternum, coxe,

palpi and legs pale; venter covered with short white hairs.

Habitat: United States.

ASTIA (?) MOROSA NOv. SP.

Plate I, figure 53. Plate V, figures 53, 53a.

é. Totallength 5mm. Width of abdomen 2.1 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.4; width 1.8; height 1.3.

Legs 5.4, 4, 5.1, 5.3; patella and tibia of the first, 2.5; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.2; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.9.

9. Totallength6mm. Width of abdomen 3.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.9; width 2; height 1.7..

Legs 5.8, 4.9, 6.3, 6.8; patella and tibia of the first, 2.4; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.6; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 2.4.

72 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Cephalothorax high, especially behind, convex, a little dilated in the mid-

dle, with sides vertical in front and a little rounded behind; cephalic

part plainly inclined; thoracic part slanting quite abruptly from a

little behind dorsal eyes, the cephalothorax being evidently highest

in the middle. Ocular area occupying a little more than one-third

of cephalothorax, one-third wider than long, a little wider in front

than behind. First row of eyes straight; middle eyes touching, lat-

eral more than one-half as large as middle eyes, (?) touching them,

(é) separated from them by one-fourth their own diameter; eyes of

second row half way between dorsal and lateral eyes; dorsal as large

as lateral eyes, (¢) equally distant from each other and lateral bor-

ders, (2) a little nearer each other. Clypeus ( ¢) one-fourth, (2 ) one-

fifth as high as middle eyes, (¢) retreating, (2) vertical. Falces as

wide as the two middle eyes, (¢) a little longer than face, (2 )as long

as face, parallel, inclined backward; fang weak, maxille parallel, nar-

row at base, enlarged at extremity, and truncated. Labium as wide

as long, less than one-half as long as maxille, contracted at tip. Ster-

num nearly twice as long as wide, rounded in front, pointed behind.

Anterior coxee separated (2) by width of labium, (4) more widely.

Legs (4) of the first very slightly stouter than the others, (2 ) equally

stout; femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; (4)

with patellary spines; metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout

their length.

Coloration: 6&6. Cephalothorax pale in thoracic part, much darker in eye

region, probably originally covered with short white hairs; marginal

line black; middle anterior eyes surrounded by rings of white hairs.

Clypeus reddish brown. Abdomen with a black central longitudinal

line over the anterior part of the dorsum, which bifurcates posteriorly,

thus bounding a large triangular pale spot; this spot is limited behind

by some irregular black marks; the sides are pale with black dots and

spots. Falces, mouthparts, sternum and coxe all light brown. Ven-

ter pale with black dots. Legs brown with black rings and tips, the

color being considerably darker on the last three joints of the first

leg. 9. Cephalothorax and abdomen black, almost covered with

mixed red and gray hairs; on the abdomen these hairs are thick at

the base, and form three wide longitudinal bands, one central and two

lateral, over the dorsum, and a large trirngular spot behind the mid-

dle point; near the apex, on each side, are two white dots, the ante-

rior larger anda ttle external to the posterior. Clypeus covered with

short white hairs. Falces dark brown. Mouthparts, sternum and

coxee light brown. Legs and palpi brown with darker rings. Venter

pale with irregular black dots.

Habitat: California.

Attide of North America. 73

MAVIA CALIFORNICA Nov. Sp.

Plate V, figures 54, 54a,

4. Total length 6 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.1; width 1.5; height 1.2.

Legs 5.7, 4.5, 4.5, 5.5; patella and tibia of the first, 2.8; patella and tibia of

the third 1.9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.1; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 2.

Cephalothorax high, convex; sides nearly parallel. almost vertical in front,

and rounded behind; cephalic part very slightly inclined; thoracic

slanting from just behind dorsal eyes. Ocular area occupying two-

fifths of cephalothorax, one-third wider than long, equally wide in

front and behind. Anterior eyes small, sub-touching, in a slightly

curved row; middle scarcely twice as large as lateral eyes; eyes of sec-

ond row a little nearer lateral than dorsal eyes; dorsal as large as

lateral eyes, nearer to each other than to lateral borders, form-

ing arow about as wide as cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus

one-half as high as middle eyes, slightly inclined backward. Falces

nearly as wide as first row of eyes, one and one-half times as long as

face, parallel, slightly inclined backward; fang moderately long.

Maxillz parallel, enlarged at the extremity, with projection at outer

corner. Labium less than one-half as long as maxille, as wide as

long, rounded. Sternum plane, a little longer than wide, truncated

in front, rounded behind. Anterior coxz separated by width of

labium. Legs of the first and second pairs stoutest with fermoral joints

compressed; tibial and metatarsal spines (stoutest on first and second),

on the four pairs; metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout their

length.

Coloration: Entire spider black, excepting the tarsi and sometimes the

distal ends of the metatarsi, which are pale.

Habitat: California.

CYTAA (?) MINUTA Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 55. Plate V, figures 55, 55a.

é. Totallength 4.8mm. Width of abdomen 1.6 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.1; width 1.6; height 1.1.

Legs 4, 3, 3. 6, 3; cephalothorax much longer than patella and tibia of the

first; patella and tibia of the third longer than patella and tibia of

the fourth; patella and tibia of the fourth and metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth equal.

°. Totallength 5mm. Width of abdomen 1.6 mm,

Cephalothorax: length 2.3; width 1.5; height 1.1.

74. Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Legs 3.8, 3.5, 4.1, 4.8; cephalothorax much longer than patella and tibia of

the first; patella and tibia of the third shorter than patella and tibia

of the fourth; patella and tibia of the fourth and metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth equal.

Cephalothorax low, flat, a little contracted behind, with sides nearly verti-

cal in front, and slightly rounded posteriorly; cephalic part not in-

clined; thoracic part level in the first half, then falling steeply.

Ocular area occupying a little less than two-fifths of cephalothorax,

one-fourth wider than long, equally wide in front and behind. An-

terior eyes sub-touching, in a straight row; middle scarcely twice

as large as lateral eyes; eyes of second row halfway between lateral

and dorsal eyes; dorsal as large as lateral eyes, further from each

other, nearly as wide as cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus

scarcely perceptible. Falces as wide as first row of eyes, a little

longer than face, vertical, parallel; fang short and weak. Maxillz

parallel, enlarged at extremity, (4) with small projection at outer

corner. Labium more than one-half as long as maxille, longer than

wide, contracted and rounded at tip. Sternum one-fourth longer

than wide, truncated in front. Anterior coxze separated by width of

labium. Legs nearly equally stout; femoral, tibial and metatarsal

spines on the four pairs; on tibie and metatarsi of the third and

fourth more above than below; metatarsi of the fourth spined

throughout their length.

Coloration. ¢. Cephalothorax with thoracic part dark brown, and

cephalic part with short rufus and long black hairs, three reddish

tufts appearing between the anterior eyes, which are surrounded by

red rings; there are three longitudinal white bands, one central,

running from the anterior eyes to the posterior border, and one on

each lower side above the black marginal line. Clypeus covered

with yellowish white hairs. Abdomen dark brown or blackish with

a central longitudinal abbreviated white line not reaching the mid-

dle, and, on each side, a longitudinal white line which reaches beyond

the middle, posterior to which are three transverse curved white

marks, one behind the other. Falces and mouthparts dark brown.

Palpi covered with thick white hairs above, and sparse black hairs

below. Sternum, coxe and legs light brown, the legs with darker

rings, and tipped with black. Venter covered with white hairs.

é. Cephalothorax resembling that of ¢ but with a greater ten-

dency to reddish color in the eye region, with the white of the

bands not so clear, and with the central band extending only from

the dorsal eyes to the posterior border. Abdomen dark brown or

blackish, with a wide, notched, central, longitudinal white band ex-

tending nearly to the apex, just behind which, on each side, is a

short, oblique, white line; there is a white transverse band at the

apex, and, on each side of the dorsum, a longitudinal row of four or

Attide of North America. 75

five white spots. Palpi pale with white hairs. Other parts like ¢

excepting that the legs are paler.

Habitat: California.

CYRBA TAINIOLA HENTz.

Plate I, figure 56. Plate IV, figure 56a. Plate V, figures 56, 56b.

Syn.: 1845. ArtTrus teeniola H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. Vol. V.

1875. ve se id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz.

Ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 56.

é. Total length 4mm. Width of abdomen 1.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.2; width 1.8; height 1.2.

Legs 4.8, 3.6, 3.6, 5.1; patella and tibia of the first, 2; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.2; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.7.

¢. Total length 6.7 mm. Width of abdomen 2.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.7; width 2.1; height 1.2.

Legs 4.4, 3.6, 3.7, 4.9; patella and tibia of the first, 2; patella and tibia of

third, 1.6; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.3; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.7.

Cephalothorax low, flat, sides nearly parallel, and almost vertical in front,

rounded behind; cephalic part a little inclined; thoracic part almost

level in anterior three-fourths, then falling abruptly. Ocular area

occupying a little less. than one-half cephalothorax, one-third wider

than long, equally wide in front and behind. Anterior eyes project-

ing, ina straight row; middle eyes touching; lateral one-half as

large, and scarcely separated from middle eyes; eyes of second row

nearer lateral than dorsal eyes; dorsal not so large as lateral eyes,

further from each other than from lateral borders, forming a row

nearly as wide as cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus vertical, one-

fifth as high as middle eyes. Falces but little wider than the two

middle eyes, one-half longer than face, vertical, parallel; fang weak

and short. Maxille widely separated, parallel, long, a little enlarged

and rounded at extremity. Labium one-half as long as maxille, a

little longer than wide. (4) truncated, narrower than in ?,(?)

blunt. Sternum not projecting between anterior coxe, rounded in

front and behind, ( 4) one-fourth longer than wide, (2 ) twice as long

as wide. Anterior coxz nearly touching. Legs of the first much the

stoutest, with femoral joints compressed; tibial and metatarsal spines

on the four pairs; metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout their

length.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black, with lower margin white. Abdomen

black with two longitudinal rows of white dots or abbreviated lines.

Clypeus, falces, mouthparts, sternum, coxee, palpi and venter black.

76 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Legs of the first and second pairs black, excepting metatarsi and

tarsi which are light rufus; third and fourth light rufus, excepting

femoral joints which are black.

Habitat: Pennsylvania, South Carolina, Alabama, Georgia, Florida, Wis-

consin.

Syn.: 1757.

1758.

EPIBLEMUM SCENICUM CLERCK.

Plate 1, figure 57. Plate IV, figure 57.

ARANEUS scenicus Cl., Sv. Spindl., p..117 (saltem ad. part.)

ARANEA scenica Linn., Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, I, p. 628, (saltem ad

part.)

** albo-fasciata De Geer, Mem., vii, p. 287 (Saltem ad

part.)

ATTUS scenicus Walck. Tabl. d. Aran., p. 24 (ad part).

SALTICUS scenicus Latr., Gen. Crust. et Ins., I, p. 123 (saltem

ad part).

ATTUS scenicus, Walck., Faune Franc., Arachn., p. 44 (ad

part).

GC ee Hahn. Monogr. Aran., 4, Pl, I, figs. A, B.

Sauticus *“‘ ¢éd., Die Arachn, I. p. 57 (saltem ad part.)

EPIBLEMUM faustwm Hentz, Am. Jour. Science and Arts, xxi,

p. 108.

ATTUS scenicus Sund., Sv. Spindl. Beskrifn., in Vet.-Akad.

Handl. f. 1832, p. 202.

CALLIETHERA scenica C. Koch, Uebers. d, Arachn-Syst., I, p.

31.

a histrionica id., ibid.

ol ne id., Die Arachn., xiii, p. 42.

it scenica id., ibid, p. 37.

a anlica id., ibid, p. 51,

SALTICUS propinquus Lucus, Expl. Alg., Ar., p. 162.

a albovittatus id., ibid, p. 164.

EPIBLEMUM faustum Hentz, Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., v.

p. 367. é

CALLIETHERA histrionica Thorell; Rec. crit. Aran., p. 68.

Hg scenica id., ibid (ad part),

SALTICUS scenicus Blackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 47.

CALLIETHERUS histrionicus Sim., Monogr. d. Att. d’Eur., p.

650 (184).

EPIBLEMUM histrionicum Thorcel. on Eur. Spid., p. 211.

EPIBLEMUM scenicwm id., ibid, II, p. 860. $

CALLIETHERA sceinca Sim, Arachnides de France, III, p. 64.

Attide of North America. “he

1880. EPIBLEMUM scenicwm Workman, Irish Spid., Belfast Nat. Hist.

Soc., p. 16.

1883. ee i Campbell, Spid. of Hoddesdon, Hertford-

shire Nat. Hist. Soc., p. 276.

1884. CALLIETHERA scenica Sim,., Arachnides de Miranda de Ebro,

Soc. Esp. de Hist. Nat.. xiii, 114 (2).

1885. Be «« id., Arachnides de Tunisie, p. 3.

é. Total length 4.9 mm. Width of abdomen 1.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.5; width 1.9; height 1.1,

Legs 3.9, 2.7, 2.7, 3.2.

¢. Total length 5.5mm. Width of abdomen 1.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.2; width 1.3; height 1.2.

Legs 3.8, 2.5, 3.2, 4.

Cephalothorax moderately high, slightly convex, a little dilated behind

dorsal eyes, with sides almost vertical in front, and rounded behind;

cephalic part slightly inclined; thoracic part falling gradually until

the last one-third and then steeply. Ocular area occupying a little

more than one-third of the cephalothorax, one-third wider than long,

equally wide in front and behind. First row of eyes straight; mid-

dle eves touching; lateral one-half as large as middle eyes, and

scarcely separated from them; eyes of second row halfway between

lateral and dorsal eyes; dorsal nearly as large as lateral eyes, further

from each other than from lateral border, forming a row scarcely

narrower than the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus vertical,

one-fourth as high as middle eyes. . Falces not quite so wide as first

row of eyes, (4) four times as long as face, horizontal, diverging,

with two teeth on distal third; fang long; (?) one and one-half as

long as face, vertical, parallel, fang short. Maxillee long, ( ¢) trun-

cated at tip, slightly diverging; (2?) rounded, parallel. Labium a

little longer than wide, slightly contracted at tip, (¢) less than one-

half, (2?) more than one-half maxille. Sternum rounded behind,

truncated in front, about twice as long as wide, relatively wider in 4

than in 9. Anterior coxze separated by width of labium. Legs of

the first pair a little the stoutest; metatarsal spines on the third and

fourth in terminal circles; (2) femoral and tibial spines as well.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark brown, with clypeus and lower border

white, and two white spots in the anterior thoracic region. Abdo-

men rufus, with a basal band and two slightly oblique bands on each

side of dorsum white. Falces dark brown, mouthparts and sternum

blackish, with white hairs; coxee brown. Palpi and legs light brown,

with darker rings, Venter blackish, with white hairs.

Habitat: North America, Europe, North Africa.

78 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ADMESTINA Nov. GEn.

Cephalothorax low and plane, a little widest opposite the middle of thoracic

part, more contracted in front than behind, less than twiceas long as

wide, the cephalic and thoracic parts not separatéd. The thoracic

part is twice as long as the cephalic part, and is truncated behind.

In front the sides are nearly vertical while behind they are rounded.

Quadrangle of eyes much wider — nearly twice — than long, and very

little wider behind. Anterior row a littlecurved upward, the middle

twice the lateral and near together; the lateral separated from the

middle by almost one-half their own diameter. Second row small and

placed two-fifths from the anterior lateral. Dorsal eyes slightly larger

than lateral and as wide as the cephalothorax at that place; plainly

further from each other than from the lateral borders. Clypeus one-

half as high as the large middle eyes. Sternum nearly oval, not pro-

duced between the coxe of the first pair, which are nearly touching.

Maxillz enlarged and blunt at the extremity. Labium as wide as

long, and less than half of the maxilla. Falces weak, wide as mid-

dle eyes, and a little longer than the face, vertical, parallel. Legs

4,1, 3, 2; first pair stoutest; the tibia and patella of the first much

shorter than the cephalothorax. Tibiaand patella of the third shorter

than tibia and patella of the fourth, the latter longer than the tarsus

and metatarsus of the fourth. Legs without spines except on meta-

tarsus of the first pair. Abdomen rather long and narrow. Nearest

Hyctia Simon, but differs in the much greater width of the quadran-

gle of the eyes, in the quadrangle being wider behind, not parallel;

and the relative length of the legs. The sternum is not narrow.

ADMESTINA WHIEELERII Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 58. Plate V, figure 58.

é. Total length 3.7mm. Width of abdomen 1.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.6; width 1; height 6.

Legs 2.3, 1.9, 2.1, 2.7; patella and tibia of the first, 1; patella and tibia of

the third, 8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 8.

Coloration: Cephalothorax and clypeus black. Abdomen pale, with a

central longitudinal branching dark band. Falces and mouthparts

dark brown. Sternum black. Coxe dark brown, excepting those of

the fourth pair which are pale. Venter pale with a wide, central

dark band. Palpus brown. Legs pale with dark rings.

Habitat: Wisconsin.

Attide of North America. 79

HYCTIA PIKEI Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 59. Plate IV, figure 59a. Plate V, figure 59.

4. Total length 8.2mm. Width of abdomen 1.1 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.9; width 1.8; height .9.

Legs 7.1, 4, 3.6, 4.6; patella and tibia of the first, 3.1; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.5; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.9; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.4.

¢. Totallength 8.5mm. Width of abdomen 1.1.

Cephalothorax: length 2.9; width 1.8; height .9.

Legs 6.3, 3.3, 3, 5; patella and tibia of the first, 2.8; patella and tibia of the

third, 1.3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.4.

Cephalothorax very low, flat, long and slender, being nearly twice as long

as wide, contracted in front, the dilation beginning just in front of

the dorsal eyes and increasing in the thoracic part; cephalic part

plane, not inclined, sides vertical; thoracic part with sides a lit-

tle rounded, sloping gradually from dorsal eyes to posterior margin.

Ocular area occupying about one-third of cephalothorax, very I‘ttle

wider than long, equally wide in front and behind; anterior row of

eyes distinctly visible from above, straight; lateral about one-third as

large as middle eyes, scarcely separated from them; middle eyes

touching; eyes of second row very small, halfway between lateral

and dorsal eyes; dorsal smaller than lateral eyes, much farther from

each other than from lateral borders, forming a row which is as wide

as the cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus only a line. Falces ex-

tending in width to inner edges of lateral eyes, but little longer than

face, vertical, parallel. Maxille parallel, long, narrow, truncated.

Labium more than one-half as long as maxille, longer than wide,

pointed. Sternum very long and narrow. Anterior coxe (4) very

close together but separated by anterior end of sternum; (2) separ-

ated by width of labium. Coxe of fourth pair touching; second and

third pairs of coxee separated from each other by a considerable in-

terval. First pair of legs much the longest and stoutest, with troch-

anters visible from above, and tibize enlarged. Femoral, tibial and

metatarsal spines on the four pairs, and one small patellary spine on

the first; spines on the tibize and metatarsi of the first very long and

stout, on the third and fourth exceedingly weak and far apart. Ab-

domen, very long, slender and low.

Coloration: ¢. Cephalothorax very dark brown, blackish on eye region

with some black hairs, and yellowish on the sides, with a black mar-

ginal line; abdomen with a wide, central, longitudinal, black band

from base to apex, and some stiff black hairs at base; on each side

below the black band, a band of whitish hairs; falces dark brown;

80 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

mouthparts light brown; sternum, coxe and venter yellowish, first pair

of legs dark brown, the others yellowish tipped with black. 9 .Much

like ¢ but lighter in color; cephalothorax showing a slender, central,

longitudinal black line from the middle of the cephalic to nearly the

middle of the thoracic part; the central band on abdomen dark brown,

the sides lighter, but not white; first legs darker than the others but

lighter than in ¢.

Easily distinguished, as the abdomen is more than three time as long as

wide.

Habitat: New York, South Carolina, Georgia, Florida.

MARPTUSA FAMILIARIS HENtTz.

Plate I, figure 60. Plate IV, figure 60a. Plate V, figure 60.

Syn.: 1845. AttTus familiaris, H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1846. Marpissa undata, C. K., Die Arachn. XIII, p. 60.

1846. ee conspersa (4) id., ibid., XIII, p. 61.

1846. td varia, id., ibid., XIII, p. 69.

1875. Arrus familiaris, H., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz,

Ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 56.

é. Total length 9.5mm. Width of abdomen 2.9 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.4; width 3.2; height 2.1.

Legs 10.6, 8.4, 8.2, 10; patella and tibia of the first, 4.4; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.3; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 2.9.

°. Totallength 10.5 mm. Width of abdomen 3.5 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.5; width 3.5; height 1.8.

Legs 9, 7.7, 7.'7, 9.1; patella and tibia of the first, 3.8; patella and tibia of the

third, 8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 4; metatarsus and tarsus of

the fourth, 2.9.

Ocular area occupying less than one-third of cephalothorax, nearly twice

as wide as long, and equally wide in front and behind. Anterior

eyes in a scarcely curved row, the lateral less than one-half as large

as the middle eyes, and separated from them by one-half their own

diameter, while the middle eyes are slightly separated from each

other; eyes of the second row halfway between lateral and dorsal

eyes; dorsal a little smaller than lateral eyes, placed (¢)a little, (2)

plainly further from each other than from the lateral borders, form-

ing a row much narrower than the cephalothorax at that place.

Clypeus nearly vertical, rather less than one-half as high as middle

eyes. Falces extending, in width, to the inner edges of the lateral

eyes; one-half longer than face, parallel, vertical; fang short. Max-

ille parallel, enlarged and rounded at extremity. Labium a little

Aittide of North America. 81

more than one-half as long as maxille, as wide as long; contracted

and blunt at tip. Sternum one-half longer than wide, a little nar-

rower infront than behind. Anterior coxe separated by scarcely the

width of the labium. Femoral, tibial and metatarsal joints of the

first and second pairs enlarged. Metatarsi and tarsi slender; femoral,

tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; metatarsi of the fourth

spined throughout their length. :

Coloration: Cephalothorax rufus, darkest in the eye region, with short

dense gray hairs, and a few long black hairs on each side in front;

lower borders black; abdomen dark brown with the central region

occupied by a wide, light gray, scalloped, longitudinal band; clypeus

covered with long white hairs; falces dark reddish brown; sternum

brown; palpus with a short brush of black hairs; legs dark brownish.

red, covered with adpressed white and upright black hairs. Venter

pale gray, with a central longitudinal brown band which tapers to a

point near the apex.

Habitat: United States, Mexico.

MARPTUSA CALIFORNICA Novy. SP.

Plate I, figure 61. Plate V, figure 61. Plate VI, figure 61 a.

4. Total length 9.2mm. Width of abdomen 2.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.8; width 2.9; height 1.8.

Legs 8.4, 7.4, 7.5, 8; patella and tibia, 3.6; patella and tibia of the third, 3; pa-

tella and tibia of the fourth, 3.5; metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth,

2.5.

g. Totallength 9mm. Width of abdomen 2.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.8; width 2.9; height 1.5; relative length of legs,

4,1, 23.

Ocular area occupying a little more than one-third of cephalothorax, one-

third wider than long, equally wide in front and behind. Anterior

eyes in a slightly curved row; lateral one-half as large as middle eyes,

separated from them by one-half their diameter; middle eyes sub-

touching; eyes of second row very slightly nearer lateral than dorsal

eyes; dorsal not quite so large as lateral eyes, ( 4) slightly nearer each

other than lateral borders, (2) further from each other, forming a

line narrower than cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus vertical,

one-half as high as middle eyes. Falces rather short and weak, ver-

tical, parallel. Maxillee parallel, enlarged and rounded at extremity,

Labium more than one-half as long as maxille, as wide as long,

rounded at tip. Sternum nearly plane, one-third longer than wide,

widest in middle. Anterior coxee separated by a little less than the

width of labium. Femoral, patellary and tibial joints of the first

82 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

and second pairs, enlarged; femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the

four pairs; those on the metatarsus of the fourth, throughout their

length.

Coloration: Cephalothorax very dark brown covered with gray hairs,

with whitish hairs around the eyes; central upper surface of abdomen

occupied by a wide, angular gray band; sides black with mixed gray

and tawny hairs; clypeus with white hairs; sternum, coxae and

mouthparts brown; sternum with some white hairs; falees brown;

venter black; legs, excepting the tarsi, which are light in color, black-

ish with much gray and tawny hair.

Habitat:

California.

MENEMERUS MELANOGNATHUS H. Lucas.

Plate I, figures 62, 62a. Plate VI, figures 62, 62a.

Syn.: 1889. (2). SaLticus melanognathus H. Lucas, Webb and Berthe-

1846.

1859.

1863.

1867.

1870.

1875.

1874. -

lot’s Hist. Nat. des Iles Canaries, Tom. II, p. 29, pl. VII, fig. 4.

MARPISSA dissimilis C. L. Koch, Die Arachn., XIII, p. 70, Tab.

CCCCLIV, figs. 11385 and 1136.

a incerta id.. ibid., p. 73, Tab. CCCCLIV, fig. 1188.

SALTICUS convergens Doleschall, Tweede Bijdr. Arachn. Indi-

schen Archipel, p. 15, Tab. IX, fig. 4.

ATTUS muscivorus A. Vinson, Araneides des Iles de la Reunion,

CWGs5 10s 465 JAIL OK, saver, al,

Attus foliatus L. Koch, Arach., etc., Verhandl. zool. and

bot. Ges., in Wien, 1867, p. 226.

SALTICUS nigro-limbatus Cambridge, {Proceed. Zool. Soc. of

London, 1869, p. 542, Pl. XLII, fig. 10.

nigro-limbatus, id., Transact. of the Linn. Soc. of

London, XX VII, p. 527.

MaRPIssa nigro-limbatus, id., Syst. list of Spiders of Gr. Brit-

ain and Ireland, ibid., XXX, p. 333.

ne nigro-limbatus, E. Simon, Arachnides de France,

AN IUD os 28);

Ictus (?) convergens Thorell, Studi, etc., If, Ragni di Amboina,

pp. 232, 309.

.- MARPTUSA marita Karsch, West-Afrik. Arachn. in Zeitschr.

f. die gesammt. Naturwissensch, LI, p. 338.

MENEMERUS foliatus L. Koch, Arachn. Australiens, p. 11238,

AU CONANUL nares, IL 2

Ictus (?) dissimilis Thorell, Studi, etc., III, Ragni Malesi e.

Papuani, p. 461. .

ATTUS mannii Peckham, New or little known spiders of the

family Attidee, p. 27, Pl. II, fig. 21.

MENEMERUS, melanognathus HK. Simon, Arachn. de ?POcean

Atlantique, Soc. Entom., France, pp. 284, 306.

Attide of North America. 83

We have Attus muscivorus Vinson from both Madagascar and Reunion,

and find it to be identical with WM. melanognathus. |

4. Totallength 8mm. Width of abdomen 2.7 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.3; width 2; height 1.3.

Legs 7.8, 7.2, 5.9, 7.9; patella and tibia of the first, 3.6; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.2; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 2.3.

@. Totallength 9.5mm. Width of abdomen 3.6 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3.8; width 3; height 1.5.

Legs 6.8, 6.5, 7.4, 8.5; patella and tibia of the first, 2.8; patella and tibia of

the third, 2.5; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3.3; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 3.

Cephalothorax low and flat, dilated behind dorsal eyes, with sides almost

vertical in front and rounded widely behind; cephalic part scarcely in-

clined; thoracic part slanting very gradually until near the posterior

- border. _ Ocular area ogcupying less than two-fifths of cephalothorax,

one-fourth wider than long, equally wide in frontand behind. First

row of eyes straight; middle eyes sub-touching; lateral rather more

than one-half as large as middle eyes, and slightly separated from

them; eyes of second row half way between lateral and dorsal eyes;

dorsal as large as lateral eyes, further from each other than from

lateral borders, forming a row narrower than the cephalothorax at

that place. Clypeus scarcely one-fifth as high as middle eyes, verti-

eal. Falcesnearly as wide asthe first row of eyes, more than twice as

long as face, vertical, diverging a little at the extremities. Maxille

parallel, long, narrow atbase, rounded. Labium two-thirds as long as

maxillz, twice as long as wide, a littleshorterin 9 thanin ¢,rounded

at tip. Sternum deep set, nearly twice as long as wide, contracted in

front, rounded behind. Anterior coxe separated (4) by about the

width of the labium,(¢)a little less. Legs of the first pair a little

stoutest. Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs;

metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout their length.

Coloration: Cephalothorax dark brown, with rufus hairs over anterior

eyes, a wide white band low on each side, and a large patch of white

hairs on the central thoracic region. Clypeus dark in the middle,

with an oblique line of white hair on each side, these lines beginning

below the anterior lateral eyes and extending over the clypeus and

along the inner edges of the dark brown falces. Abdomen dark ru-

fus with two wide longitudinal white bands composed of both short

and long white hairs, and two black chevrons at the apex. Palpus

with femur covered with white hairs, and tarsus black. Legs rufus

with dark rings and a good many white hairs. Mouthparts, sternum

and coxze very dark, with white hairs. Venter gray with a wide

central rufus band. -

Habitat: Cosmopolitan. Florida, Mexico, Guatemala, Brazil, Islands of

the Atlantic, England, France, Africa, Madagascar, Australia, Malay

Archipelago.

84 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

MENEMERUS PAYKULLIT Aup.

Plate I, 63. Plate VI, figures 63, 63a.

Syn.: 1825-27. AtTTUS paykullii Aud. in Sav. Descr. de ? Egypte, 2. Edit.,

XXII, p. 172

1837. og i Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insectes Aptéres,

I, p. 426.

1837. << ligo id., abid., ps 426.

1845. “« _ binus Hentz, Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1846. PLExippus ligo C. K., Die Arachn., XIII, p. 107.

1849. Sauricus vaillantw Lucas, Expl. del Algerie Zool., I, p. 1386.

1863. Arrus africanus Vinson, Aran. des iles de ‘la Réunion,

Maurice et Madagasear, p. 82.

1865. EvorHrys delibuta L. Koch, Verhandl. d. zool. bot. Ges.

in Wien, p. 874.

1875. AtTTUS binws Hentz, Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz,

ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 54.

1876. HASARIUS paykullii Sim., Arachnides de France, III, p. 81.

1881. MENEMERUS(?) ‘“‘ Thorell. Studi Sui Ragni Mal. et iPaipe.

II, p. 501.

1881. we a Keyserling, Koch and Keyserling’s,

Die Arachn. Austral., p. 1461.

1885. os 28 Sim., Faune Archnologique de l Asie

Mérid., Bull. de la Soc. Zool. de

France, p. 7.

We have Attus africanus Vinson from Madagascar and find it identi-

cal with M. paykullw.

6. Total length 9mm. Width of abdomen 2.7 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 4.5; width 3.1; height .2.

Legs 11, 9.2, 9.5, 10.5; patella and tibia of the first, 5; patella and tibia of

the third, 3.5; patella and tibia of the fourth, 4; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 4.

eo aun or ax high, convex, a little dilated behind dorsal eyes, with sides

nearly vertical in front, and rounded behind; cephalic part inclined;

thoracic part falling gradually from a little way. behind dorsal eyes

nearly to posterior border, then abruptly. Ocular area occupying

two-fifths of cephalothorax, one-fourth wider than long, slightly

wider in front than behind. Anterior eyes all projecting, in a curved

row; middle eyes subtouching; lateral rather more than one-half as

large as middle eyes, separated from them by one-third their own

diameter; eyes of second row a little nearer lateral than dorsal eyes;

dorsal smaller than lateral eyes, equally distant from each other and

the lateral borders, forming a row narrower than the cephalothorax

Attide of North America. 85

at that place. Clypeus retreating, one-half as high as middle

eyes. Falces not much wider than the two middle eyes, three times

as long as face, vertical, parallel; fang not long. Maxillee parallel,

enlarged and rounded at extremity. Labium one-half as long as

maxille, a little longer than wide, contracted and blunt at tip.

Sternum nearly twice as long as wide, rounded behind, slightly con-

tracted in front. Anterior coxee separated by nearly the width of

the labium. Legs of the first and second pairs stoutest; with femoral

joints enlarged and compressed; femoral, patellary, tibial and meta-

tarsal spines on the four pairs, those on third and fourth especially

stout; metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout their length. There

are some stout femoral spines on the palpus.

Coloration: Cephalothorax and abdomen white, with two wide longitudi-’

nal black bands extending from anterior eyes to spinnerets, and two

white dots, one on each band, on the posterior part of the abdomen.

Clypeus covered with white and rufus hairs; a reddish band extend-

ing from each anterior lateral eye downward to the lower border.

Falces brown with fringes of white hairs on the inner borders.

Mouthparts dark brown. Sternum and coxe light brown. Venter

black with a white band on each side. Palpi and legs light brown

(legs of the first pair darkest) with white hairs and black spines.

Habitat: Florida, Guatemala, New Grenada (from collection of Count

Keyserling), Europe, North Africa, India, Malay Archipelago, Aus-

tralia, Madagascar.

HOMALATTUS (WHiItTE) 1841.

Cephalothorax rather low, as wide as long, flat above, a little contracted in

front, the contraction beginning opposite the dorsal eyes, and trun-

cated in frontand behind, where it is holiowed to receive the anterior

margin of the abdomen. Sides gently rounded. Cephalic part oc-

cupying about) two-thirds of cephalothorax, not separated from tho-

racic part. Thoracic part level in the first half and then falling

abruptly; this slanting portion being. concealed by the overlapping

abdomen gives the cephalic part, when looked at from above, an ap-

pearance of exaggerated length. Quadrangle of eyes much wider

behind than in front, and, behind, one-third wider than long. First

row of eyes straight or slightly curved; middle eyes near together;

lateral one-half as large, and separated from the middle eyes, some-

times by more than one-half their own diameter. Eyes of second

row at least twice as far from dorsal as from lateral eyes. Dorsal

eyes as large as lateral, much further from each other than from

lateral borders (often twice as far), forming a row as wide as cephal-

othorax at that place. Clypeus from one-fourth to one-half as high

86 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

as middle eyes. Maxille enlarged at extremity. Labium one-half

as long, sometimes as wide as long, sometimes longer than wide.

Sternum lorger than wide, sometimes truncated in front, projecting

between anterior coxe. Anterior coxe separated sometimes by

more, sometimes by less, than width of labium.

The genus Homalattus is nearest Ballus from which it is not readily dis-

tinguished. The greater length of the cephalic part (two-thirds of cephal-

othorax instead of one-half as in Ballus) and the shape of the thoracic part

enable one to decide. Ballus has the thoracic part contracted and the

dorsum falling gently from the dorsal eyes; in Homalattus the sides are

not contracted, and the fall, which does not begin at the dorsal eyes, is

very abrupt. In Zygoballus the cephalothorax is very high and the thoracic

part falls steeply from the dorsal eyes. Rhanis C. K., Rhene Thorell, and

Rhene Tacz. are identical with Homalattus W.

HOMALATTUS CYANEUS HENTz.

Plate I, figure 64. Plate VI, figures 64, 64a.

Syn.: 1845. ATTUS cyaneus Hentz, Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1848. Marvia chrysea C. Koch, Die Arachn., XIV, p. 88.

1875. ATTUS cyaneus Hentz, Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz

ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 69.

1885. HOoOMALATTUS septentrionalis Keys., Neue Spinnen aus Amer-

ika, VI, Verhandl. zool. bot. Gesel. in Wien, p. 29

(515).

6. Totallength 4.8mm. Width of abdomen 1.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.8; width 1.5; height .7.

Legs 3.1, 2.2, 2, 2.5; patella and tibia of the first, 1.4; patella and tibia of

the third, 8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 1.

9. Total length 4.6mm. Width of abdomen 2.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.8; width 1.7.

Legs 8, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2; patella and tibia of the first, 1.2; patella and tibia of

the third, 8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.1; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 1.

Quadrangle of eyes barely one-third wider than long. First row of eyes

straight. Anterior lateral separated from middle eyes by one-half

their own diameter. Eyes of second row very small, and placed

fully twice as far from dorsal as from lateral eyes. Clypeus one-half

as high as middle eyes. Falces as wide as first row of eyes, one and

one-half times aslong as face, vertical, parallel, anterior surface plane.

Maxille truncated. Labium one-half as long as maxillee, about as

wide as long, contracted and rounded at tip. Sternum oval, nearly

Attide of North America. 8?

twice as long as wide. Anterior coxze separated by about the width

of the labium. First leg with femur, patella and tibia enlarged,

Femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs.

Coloration. Our specimens are somewhat damaged: the ¢ has the scales

all rubbed off and appears entirely black excepting some yellowish

hairs on the clypeus, and pale rings on the metatarsi of the second,

third and fourth legs. On the cephalothorax and abdomen of the

9 there are left a few yellowish white, somewhat metallic scales;

otherwise itis like the 4. Hentz describes this species as brassy-

green.

Count Keyserling has kindly sent us a specimen of his H. septentri-

onalis and we find it identical with cyaneus.

Habitat: Iowa, New York, Pennsylvania, Massachusetts, North Carolina,

Alabama, Georgia, Nebraska. .

BALLUS YOUNGII Nov. Sp.

Plate I, figure 66. Plate VI, figures 66, 66a, 66b.

é. @. Total length 2.8mm. Width of abdomen 1.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.5; width 1.2; height .6.

Legs 1.9, 1.7, 1.6, 2.1. Cephalothorax a little longer than patella and tibia

of the first; patella and tibia of the third shorter than patella and

tibia of the fourth; patella and tibia of the fourth longer than meta-

tarsus and tarsus of the fourth.

Cephalothorax low, plane, a very little dilated behind middle, with sides

vertical in front and slightly rounded behind; cephalic part not in-

clined; thoracic part not slanting until it reaches the posterior border,

where it is truncated and a little hollowed. Ocular area occupying

nearly one-half cephalothorax, one-third wider than long, slightly

wider behind than in front. Anterior eyes touching, in a straight

row; middle twice as large as lateral eyes; eyes of second row half-

way between lateral and dorsal eyes; dorsal as large as lateral eyes,

further from each other than from lateral borders, forming a row as

wide as cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus much inclined back-

ward, two-thirds as high as middle eyes. Falces very weak, about

as long as face, parallel, inclined backward; fang very weak. Max-

illz parallel, short, wider and truncated at extremity. Labium short,

twice as wide as long, rounded. Sternum oval, rather short. nte-

rior coxz separated by width of labium; cox of the fourth touch-

ing. Legs of the first and second pairs stoutest, with femoral joints

compressed; inferior rows of spines on the tibiz and metatarsi of the

four pairs. Anterior end of abdomen fitting into excavation at pos

terior end of cephalothorax.

88 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters

Coloration: Cephalothorax, clypeus, abdomen and venter black, thinly

covered with short yellow hairs; on the abdomen the thickening of

these hairs forms two yellow spots on the anterior part, and three -

transverse yellow bands. Falces, mouthparts, sternum and coxe

light brown. Palpi and legs brown with some short yellow hairs.

The following remarks are from a letter written by Col. John J. Young,

of Allegheny, Pa., to whom we are indebted for this species:

‘‘These spiders are found at this season (November) under the bark of

trees, usually hickory and sycamore. You will note that the general color

of the spider corresponds with the rusty brown of the under side of the

bark of the shag-bark hickory when first pulled off. In that hibernating

locality it covers itself with a thin bluish envelope. The spider is so nearly

of the bark color, and so smali that we would often overlook the speck in

the centre of the envelope, supposing it to be merely the empty tube or

cell of some young spider.”

Habitat: Pennsylvania.

NEON NELLIL Nov. Spe.

Plate I, figure 65. Plate VI, figure 65.

é. Total length 2.5mm. Width of abdomen 1.2 mim.

Cephalothorax: length 1.3; width .9; height .5.

Legs —, 1.8, 2.1, 2.9.

9. Juv. legs 4, 3, 1, 2.

Cephalothorax not high, convex, a little contracted behind dorsal eyes,

sides nearly vertical in front, rounded behind; cephalic part much

inclined; thoracic part sloping from just behind dorsal eyes. Ocular

area occupying more than one-half cephalothorax, less than one-fifth _

wider than long, equally wide in front and behind. First row of

eyes straight, all four touching; lateral one-half as large as middle

eyes; eyes of second row a little nearer lateral than dorsal eyes; dor-

sal larger than lateral eyes, further from each other than from lateral

borders, forming a row as wide as cephalothorax at that place. Cly-

peus slightly inclined, about one-fourth as high at middle eyes. Falces

not as wide as two middle eyes, short, parallel, vertical; fang very

weak. Maxille nearly parallel, rather long, rounded; labium wider

than long, about one-third as long as maxille. Sternum convex,

triangular, truncated infront. Anterior coxee separated by more

than width of labium. First legs stoutest; femoral, tibial and me-

tatarsal spines on the four pairs; metatarsi of the fourth spined

throughout their length.

Attide of North America. 89

Coloration: Cephalothorax brown, darkest in eye region. Abdomen

brown with pale spots and chevrons. Palpi and legs pale with

black rings; first legs darkest; remaining parts dark brown or black.

This species agrees with the genus Neon as defined by Simon, excepting

that all the legs are spined.

Habitat: Pennsylvania, Canada (Collection of J. B. Tyrrell.)

ZYGOBALLUS SEX-PUNCTATUS HeEnrz.

Plate I, figure 67. Plate VI, figures 67, 67a.

Syn.: 1844. ATTUS sex-punctatus H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. TV,

1875. r id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M. Hentz,

Ed. by Burgess, p. 54.

Total length 3mm. Width of abdomen .8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.8; width 1.6; height .8.

Legs 3.7, 2.2, 2, 3.

Cephalic part growing wider to the dorsal eyes; general appearance from

aboye quadrangular, with projecting corners behind dorsal eyes; dor-

sal eyes placed on sides, below dorsum, forming a row wider by the

amount of their projection than the cephalothorax at that place.

Middle anterior eyes touching, lateral sub-touching; dorsal as large

as lateral eyes. Labium two-fifths as long as maxille, as wide as

long. Metatarsi of the third and fourth legs with only terminal circles

of spines.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black with a spot of white hairs in front of each

dorsal eye, and one between the dorsal eyes. Clypeus black, thinly

covered with white hairs. Abdomen black with a white basal band

and six white spots, two on each side near the middle of the dorsum,

and two near the apex. Palpi and falces brown. Legs reddish or

brown, first and fourth pairs darker than second and third. Under

side black, with some white hairs on sternum and venter.

Habitat: North Carolina, Georgia, Florida.

ZYGOBALLUS BETTINI Nov. Spe.

Plate I, figures 68, 68a. Plate VI, figures 68, 68a, 68b.

6. Totallength 4.2mm. Width of abdomen 1.7 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.8; width 1.3; height 1,3.

Legs 4.9, 3.3, 3, 4.4.

g. Totallength 4.4mm. Width of abdomen 2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.8; width 1.4; height 1.1.

Legs 4.4, 3.2, 3, 4.5.

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Clypeus inclined backward. Falces (4) nearly as wide as first row of eyes,

twice as long as face, inclined forward, diverging; fang long; ( ? )ex-

tending only to inner edges of lateral eyes; one and’ one-half times

as long as face, vertical, parallel; fang small. Maxille (4) widest

in middle, blunt at tip, cut obliquely on imner side; (2 ) a little widest

‘at extremity, rounded. Labium one-half as long as maxille, (4)

longer than wide, (2) as wide as long. Legs without patellary

spines, excepting one on the first leg, (6) coxee and trochanter of

the first elongated.

Coloration: 6. Cephalothorax bronze brown; eye region covered with

reddish gold metallic scales; anterior faces of falces, clypeus and

sides of cephalothorax as far back as second row of eyes, covered

with white scale-like hairs. Abdomen bronze, with a silvery white

band passing around base and downward onto the sides; a second

white band, on each side, curves over the side from the upper to the

under surface, and on the posterior dorsum are two more short

curved white bands, these last being semi-circular in form. Mouth-

parts, sternum and venter brown. First leg with elongated coxa

and trochanter, as well as the femur, dark mahogany color; the

other joints and all the other legs yellowish white.

Cephalothorax bronze brown with metallic scales on eye region as in

6. Anterior eyes surrounded by rings of reddish yellow hair. Ab-

domen brown; a white band passes around the base and extends on

to the sides; beyond the termination of this are two short white bars

on each side; on the anterior half of the dorsum is a wide longitudinal

band composed of reddish golden scales; the posterior edge of this

band is notched. Behind the band are two chevrons of the same

scales, and two short bands, one on each side of the spinnerets; two

black spots are found in front of the first, and two more behind the

second chevron. Femur of the first leg mahogany color; other

joints and all the other legs white with some dark rings and spots.

Habitat: Wisconsin, Missouri, Georgia, Florida

1885.

AGOBARDUS ANORMALIS K®YSERLING.

Plate I, figure 69. Plate VI, figure 74.

AGOBARDUS anormalis Keys., Neue Spinnen aus Amerika, VI, Ver-

nandl. zool. bot. Gesel. in Wien, p. 33 (519).

Total length 4.7 mm. Width of abdomen 1.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.6; width 2.

Legs 6.7, 4.9, 5.5, 5.6; patella and tibia of the first, 2.5; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.9; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 2.

Total length 4.6 mm. Width of abdomen 1.7 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.1; width 1.6.

Attide of North America. 91

Legs 3.8, 3.3, 4.6, 4.8; patella and tibia of the first, 1.4; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.6; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.8; metatarsus and tar-

Susy wens

Cephalothorax very high at dorsal eyes but, in front, not higher than cly-

peus and lateral eye, on account of the steep inclination of the ce-

phalic part. Sides nearly parallel, a very little dilated in the middle,

vertical in front, rounded behind; thoracic part falling steeply from

dorsal eyes. Quadrangle of eyes occupying one-half of cephalo-

thorax, twice as wide as long, equally wide in front and behind,

First row of eyes much bent; middle eyes sub-touching; lateral a lit-

tle more than one-half as large, separated from them by one-half

their own diameter. Eyes of second row a very little nearer lateral

than dorsal eyes. Dorsal as large as lateral eyes, equally distant from

each other and the lateral borders, forming a row as wide as cephalo-—

thorax atthat place. Clypeus one-fifth as high asmiddleeyes. Falces

extending to inner edges of lateral eyes, one and one-half times as long

as face, inclined backward, a little diverging; fang weak. Maxillee

slightly diverging, enlarged and rounded at extremity. Labium one-

half as long as maxilla, as wide as long. Sternum nearly as wide as

long, oval, projecting between anterior coxee. Anterior coxe separ-

ated by nearly the width of the labium. Legs of the first pair a little

stoutest. Femoral, patellary, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four

pairs; those on metatarsi of the fourth extending to base.

Coloration: Cephalothorax brown with a lighter central longitudinal band

in thoracic part, in the midst of which is a spot of white hairs; the

eyes are placed in black spots; the anterior part of the cephalic plate,

the lower sides, and the clypeus are covered with white hairs; the

lower margin is black. Abdomen brown, with a curved white basal

band and a central wide white longitudinal band which is often in-

distinct in the anterior part, and is interrupted behind by a slender

brown transverse curved band; this middle band gives off on either

side two short white spots which are longer than wide, one in the

middle of the first half, the other, oblique, just in front of the spin-

nerets. Venter dark brown or black with a white band behind and

on the sides. Palpi yellowish brown excepting the last two joints

which are black, with black hairs. Falces, mouthparts, sternum

coxee and legs reddish brown.

Habitat: United States.

92 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ATTUS CAUTUS Nov Sp.

é Juv. Totallength 4.5mm. Width of abdomen 1.6 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2, width 1.5; height 9.

Legs 3, 3.2, 3.7, 4. Cephalothorax much longer than patella and tibia of

the first; patella and tibia of the third shorter than patella and tibia

of the fourth; patella and tibia of the fourth and metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth equal.

Cephalothorax moderately high, slightly convex, a little contracted behind,

with sides vertical! in front and rounded behind; cephalic part slightly

inclined; thoracic falling gradually in the first two-fifths,then steeply.

Ocular area occupying nearly one-half cephalothorax, one-third

wider than long, equally wide in front and behind. Anterior eyes

sub-touching, in a slightly curved row, the middle twice as large as

the lateral eyes; eyes of second row halfway between lateral and dor-

sal eyes; dorsal as large as lateral eyes, a little further from each

other than from lateral borders, forming a row as wide as cephalo-

thorax at that place. Clypeus inclined backward, one-third as high

as middle eyes. Falces as wide as the two middle eyes, as long as

face, vertical, parallel. Maxille enlarged and blunt at extremity,

parallel. Labium two-thirds as long as maxillz, perhaps a little longer

than wide, contracted and rounded at tip. Sternum one-fourth

longer than wide, truncated in front. Anterior coxz separated by

more than width of labium. Legs of the first and second pairs slightly

stoutest; femoral, tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs; met-

atarsi of the fourth spined throughout their length.

Coloration: Cephalothorax black with lower sides white, a white band

above anterior eyes, another behind dorsal eyes, and a white spot in

the middle of the cephalic part. Clypeus and falces covered with

white hairs. Abdomen with the anterior third and the apex black,

while the remaining portion is covered with bright yellowish brown

hairs; there are four transvere white bands; two cross the anterior

black region, one the brown region, and one/separates the brown

from the black region at the apex. Palpi hght brown with thin white

hairs. Mouthparts and coxee light brown or pale. Sternum dark

brown. Venter brown with a whitish longitudinal band on each

side. Legs brown with blackish bands and some short white hairs.

Not wishing to found a new genus upon an immature specimen we put

this species in the genus Attus Walck.

Habitat: Mexico.

Attide of North America. 93

SYNEMOSYNA (HENTz) 1882.

Cephalothorax low, twice as long as wide, rounded and narrower behind;

Syn.:

thoracic and cephalic part not separated; thoracic part plainly divided

by two transverse constrictions and much longer than cephalic —

sometimes twice as long. Quadrangle of eyes but little wider than

long and a little wider behind than in front. First row of eyes a lit-

tle curved; middle eyes touching, and three times as large as lateral

eyes, from which they are slightly separated. Eyes of second row

small and a little nearer lateral than dorsal eyes. Dorsal eyes larger

than lateral and further from each other, than from lateral borders,

forming a row as wideas cephalothorax at that place. Clypeus

about one-fourth as high as middle eyes. Falces short, rather weak,

vertical, parallel; fang weak. Maxille slightly enlarged and trun-

cated at extremity, about twice as long as labium. Labium as wide

as long, rounded. Sternum long, rather narrow, truncated in front,

contracted behind, projecting between anterior coxe. Anterior

coxee separated by at least the width of the labium at its base. Legs

(s) 4, 1, 3, 2, (2) 4,3, 1, 2, all slender; tibize and metatarsi of the

first and the second, with two rows of inferior spines. Abdomen long,

rounded, slender, with a marked constriction; pedicle of abdomen

visible from above. Synemosyna differs from the other genera of

ant-like Attidze, in the following respects: Synageles Sim., Leptor-

chestes (Thorell) Sim., Damcetas Peckham, all have the quadrangle of

the eyes longer than wide, and the constriction of the cephaloth-

orax wanting, or, if present, very slight, and separating the cephalic

and thoracic parts. Agorius Thorell has the patella of the first leg

much elongated. Paradamoetas Peckham has no constriction of the

cephalothorax. The last two genera resemble Synemosyna in having

the quadrangle a little wider than long. It isnearest Salticus (Latv.)

Sim.; Salticus, however, has the cephalic part on a higher plane than

the thoracic, and the greater length of the maxille, and the labium

being much longer than wide also distinguish it from Synemosyna.

SYNEMOSYNA FORMICA MHENTz.

Plate VI, figures 70, 70a.

1845. SyNEMOSYNA formica H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. V.

1846. Janus gibberosus C. K., Die Arachniden, XIII, p. 21.

1875. SyNnEMosyNA formica H., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M,

Hentz. ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 73.

1883. SyNEMOSYNA formica Peckham, Descr. new or little known

Attidee of U.5S., p. 30.

94 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

é. Total length 3.9mm. Width of abdomen 7mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1.8; width .8; height .7.

Legs 3, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2; patella and tibia of the first, 1; patella and tibia of

the third, .9; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.3; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 1.2.

9 Total length 5.4mm. Width of abdomen 1.8 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.2; width .7; height .8.

Legs 2.7, 2.2, 2.8, 3.5; patella and tibia of the first, 1; patella and tibia of the

third, 1.1; patella and tibia of the fourth, 1.7; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 1.5.

Cephalothorax with one constriction a little way behind the dorsal eyes,

and another just in front of the juncture of the thoracic part with

the abdominal pedicie; abdomen with a deep constriction before the

middle, posterior to which it is enlarged and rounded.

Coloration: Cephalothorax brown, lighter on the upper surface, some-

times blackish on the sides, smooth, glabrous, with a few short

white hairs in the eye region; abdomen in front of the constriction

pale rufus, with a darker longitudinal band on the upper surface;

behind the constriction b ack with a pale band, which is narrow in

the ¢, but in the 2 is wider, occupying the anterior sides and cury-

ing downward under the venter; clypeus blackish; falces black with

pale edges; maxillze and labium black, edged with white; sternum

pale anteriorly, blackish behind; venter pale in front, black toward

apex. Legs of the first pair pale with an internal and external

black line on the femur, patella and tibia; second all pale; third

pale, excepting femur, which is light rufus; fourth femur rufus,

patella pale at proximal, blackish at distal end, tibia proximal end

blackish, shading into pale toward metatarsus, metatarsus and tarsus

pale.

Habitat: United States.

SYNAGELES PICATA HENTz.

Plate VI, figure 71.

Syn,: 1845. SyNEMOSYNA picata H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. Vol. V.

1875. “ « id., coll. Arachn. Writ by N. M. Hentz,

ed. by Burgess, Boston, p. 75.

?. Totallength 4.2mm. Width of abdomen 1.5 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2; width .9; height .7.

Relative length of legs 4, 3, 1, 2.

Ocular area occupying a little more than one-half of cephalothorax, plainly

longer than wide, and a little wider behind than in front. Anterior

row of eyes very slightly curved; lateral less than one-half as large

Attidee of North America. 95

as middle eyes, and slightly separated from them; eyes of second row

twice as far from dorsal as from lateral eyes; dorsal eyes further

from each other than from lateral borders. Clypeus fully one-half

as high as middle eyes, vertical. Falces extending in width to inner

edges of lateral eyes, a little longer than face, vertical, parallel.

Maxille enlarged and: blunt at extremity; labium semi-circular.

Sternum twice as long as wide, contracted in front and behind. An-

terior coxee separated by scarcely the width of the labium. Abdomen

with a constriction in front of the middle.

Coloration: Eye-region black with violet reflections; thoracic part reddish-

brown with a short, transverse white band behind dorsal eyes. An-

terior segment of abdomen reddish-brown; posterior segment glisten-

ing black with two white bands which begin at the constriction and

curve downward over the sides. Venter with a semi-circular green-

ish-yellow spot behind the epigynum.

Habitat: North Carolina, Alabama, Wisconsin.

SYNAGELES SCORPIONA HENTZz.

’ Plate VI, figures 72, 72a.

Syn: 1845. SyNEMOSYNA scorpiona H., Journal Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist.,

Vol. V.

1875. fe £8 id., Coll. Arachn. Writ. by N. M.

Hentz, ed. by Burgess, Boston,

p. 74.

6. Total length 2.4mm. Width of abdomen 5 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 1; width, 8; height, 4.

Legs 2, 1.5, 1.5, 2.6.

¢. Total length 3.5mm. Width of abdomen 1.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length, 1.4; width, 8; height, 5.

Patella and tibia of the first, 1; patella and tibia of the third, 8; patella and

tibia of the fourth, 1.1; metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth, 8.

Ocular area occupying nearly two-thirds of the cephalothorax, a little more

than one-third longer than wide, and wider behind than in front.

Anterior row of eyes very slightly curved, lateral about one-half as

large as middle eyes and separated from them by one-fourth their

own diameter; eyes of second row not quite twice as far from dorsal

as from lateral eyes; dorsal eyes further from eacli other than from

lateral borders. Clypeus, (4) less than one-half, (2) one-half as high

as middle eyes, vertical. Falces as wide as the two middle eyes,

about as long as the face, vertical, parallel. Maxille rather long, a

little enlarged at extremity, ( 4 ) truncated, ( 9 )rounded; anterior cox

separated by more than the width of labium. First legs a little the

stoutest, dark.

96 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Coloration: ¢. Cephalothorax brown; abdomen brown anteriorly, en-

circled by a white line in front of middle, behind which it is black-

ish; other parts brown excepting a pale spot on the anterior part of

the venter.. 9. Cephalothorax brownish with the eyes on black

spots; abdomen pale with two short, curved, dark bands near the

spinnerets; falces brownish, venter pale with a dark region near the

spinnerets; legs brown above, pale beneath; other parts all pale.

Habitat: New York, Ohio, North Carolina.

SALTICUS EPHIPPIATUS Hentz.

Piate VI, figure 73.

Syn.: 1845. SyNEMOSYNA ephippiata H., Journal Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.

Vol. V.

1846. Saxticus albocinctus C. K., Die Arachinden, XIII, p. 36.

1875. SYNEMOSYNA ephippiata H., Coll, Arachn, Writ. by N. M.

Hentz. Hd. by Burgess, Boston, p. 74.

6. Total length 5.2mm. Width of abdomen 1.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.4; width 1.4; height 1.2.

Legs 5.3, 4.1, 4,5, 6.1; patella and tibia of the first, 2.4; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2.6; metatarsus and

tarsus of the fourth, 2.

Cephalothorax moderately high and slightly convex; sides almost parailel;

ocular area very slightly wider than long, and equally wide in front

and behind; anterior eyes small, in a straight row; lateral about one-

half as large as middle eyes, separated from them by one-fourth their

own diameter; eyes of second row halfway between lateral and dor-

sal eyes; dorsal nearly as large as lateral eyes, and a little nearer

each other than lateral borders. Clypeus. less than one-fourth as

high as middle eyes. Falces wider than first row of eyes, more than

three times as long as face, inclined forward, diverging; fang as long

as falx. Maxille long, slender, blunt at tip, about twice as long as

wide, parallel. Labium less than one-half as long as maxille, about

as wide as long, blunt. Sternum narrow, and more than twice as

long as wide. Anterior coxe separated by width of labium. Legs

all slender and long; tibial and metatarsal spines on the four pairs;

the metatarsi of the fourth spined throughout their length. Abdo-

men with a constriction in front of middle.

¢ Totallength5mm. Width of abdomen 1.2 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2.2; width 1.2; height 1.

Legs 3.8, 3.1, 3:4, 5.3; patella and tibia of the first, 1.8; patella and tibia of

the third, 1.8; patella and tibia of the fourth, 2; metatarsus and tar-

sus of the fourth, 2.

Attidee of North America. 97

Clypeus one-fourth as high as middle eyes. Falces extending in width

| only to the inner edges of the lateral eyes, as long as the face, par-

allel, and slightly inclined forward; fang short. Mavxillz less than

twice as longas wide. Labium more than one-half as long as maxille.

Coloration: Cephalothorax brownish; abdomen brown in front of con-

striction, black behind, encircled by a white line at the constriction;

falces dark with white hairs; clypeus, mouthparts, sternum, coxz

and venter brown; legs with a tinge of yellow.

Habitat: Pennsylvania, New York, Alabama.

LYSSOMANES HENTz.

Syn.: 1844. Lyssomanes Hentz, Journal Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. IV.

Cepalothorax moderately high, sloping downward behind and on the sides

from the caput, about one-third longer than wide. General form

oval. Caput occupying one-half or nearly one-half of cephalothorax.

Eyes arranged in four transverse rows of two each. Eyes of first row close to-

gether, from two to three times as as large those of second row, occu-

pying the entire face. Second row just behind first and about as wide

(sometimes a little wider or narrower). Third row composed of two

very small eyes, plainly nearer the second than the fourth row, nar-

rower than the second and wider than the fourth. Eyes of fourth

row about as large as those of second and nearer together; quadran-

gle formed by second and fourth rows as wide as long, or from one-

fourth to one-third wider.

Sternum somewhat heartshaped; length and width about equal. Coxe

separated by the width of the labium and part or all of the maxillee.

Maxille slightly enlarged at extremities. Labium about as wide as

long or a little longer than wide. Abdomen long, slender, tapering;

spinnerets short. Legs usually long and slender; relative length

variable. Long and slender femoral, tibial, metatarsal and usually

patellary spines on the four pairs.

LYSSOMANES VIRIDIS HENtTz.

Syn.: 1844. LyssoMANEs viridis Hentz, Jour. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol.

1875. oe sé id., Coll. Arachn. Writings. Ed. by Bur-

gess, Boston, p. 49.

. Total length 6.5mm. Width of abdomen 1.5 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 2; width 2; height 1.3.

Legs 12, 9.5, 8.5, 8; patella and tibia of the first, 4.5; patella and tibia of

the third, 3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3; metatarsus and tarsus

of the fourth, 3.2. Falx 2.5.

98 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

9. Totallength8mm. Width of abdomen 2.4 mm.

Cephalothorax: length 3; width 2.6; height 1.8.

Legs 10.5, 9, 8.8, 8; patella and tibia of the first, 4.5; patella and tibia of the

third, 3; patella and tibia of the fourth, 3; metatarsus and tarsus of

the fourth, 3.4.

Coloration: Cephalothorax and abdomen light yellow; cephalothorax with .

a slender, central, dark, longitudinal line on the thoracic part; eyes

of second and third rows on black tubercules. Abdomen with six

black dots (sometimes wanting) arranged in two longitudinal rows. ,

There are some orange colored hairs around the anterior eyes, and in |

the male the falces are reddish in front. The other parts are light

yellow.

Hentz describes this species as being tender grass-green. The color prob-

ably changes in alcohol.

Habitat: Southern United States.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

PLATE I.

1. Phidippus morsitans, ?; 1a, epigynum.

2a. se rufus, epigynum.

3. se galathea, 9° ; 3a, epigynum.

5. ae obscurus 2.

6. a minatus, 2; 6a, epigynum.

8. “e ranterbergii, ?.

10. us arizonensis, ¢.

12, es insolens, ¢.

13. nf albomaculatus, ?,

14. a johnsonii, 2.

15. as otiosus, 2.

16. Phileus farneus, °.

We ae fartilis, ?.

18. a mexicanus, ?.

19. Sy militaris, ?.

19a. a “ é.

20. a chrysis, ?.

22. a rimator, ?.

23. Plexippus puerperus, ¢. (Figure blurred on plate.)

23a, 13 GG on

i _aer

Attide of North America.

25. Dendryphantes capitatus, ¢.

25a, 25b. bY ut 9 , two varieties.

27. as flavus, ?.

30. Attus palustris, ?.

32. Icius lineatus, °.

33. Icius palmarum, ?.

34, CC Adana, ee

35. << piraticus, ¢.

cod, °° albovittatus, 4.

36. Pseudicius harfordii, °.

36a. re ce é.

37. Eris octavus, ?.

39. ‘¢ nervosus, 2.

40. Hasarius hoyi, ?.

40a. bs ss $.

42. Habrocestum coecatum, ?.

43. oG viridipes, °.

44, se peregrinum, ¢.

45, ss cristatum, ?.

46a, BC auratum, ?.

48, oe splendens, ?.

50. Saitis pulex, 9.

50a. se se é.

51. Prostheclina cambridgii, 2.

62. Astia vittata, °.

52a, es oy 6.

58. Astia morosa, ?.

55. Cytzea minuta, °.

56. Cyrba teeniola, ?.

57. Epiblemum scenicum, ?.

58. Admestina wheelerii, ¢.

59. Hyctia pikei, ¢.

60. Marptusa familiaris, ?.

61, a californica, 2.

62. Menemerus melonagnathus, ¢.

62a. ss rs Or

63. se paykulli, 9.

64, Homalattus cyaneus, ¢.

65. Neon neelii, ¢.

66. Ballus youngii, °.

67. Zygoballus sexpunctatus, ¢.

68. a bettini, 2.

68a. it mkt OF

69. Agobardus anormalis, ?.

70. Sadala distincta, ¢.

100

liaay

20a.

23b.

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

PLATE II.

Phidippus morsitans, 6 palpus.

RG rufus, ¢ palpus.

if cardinalis, ¢ palpus

‘ obscurus epigynum.

of mexicanus, é palpus.

ag rauterbergii, epigynum.

or me ’cookii, epigynum.

oe arizonensis, é palpus.

opifex, epigynum.

insolens, palpus of 4; 12a epigynum.

albomaculatus, epigynum.

johnsonii, palpus of ¢ ; 14a epigynum.

octopunctatus, ¢ palpus.

otiosus, epigynum.

Philzeus farneus, epigynum.

Phileeus fartilis, epigynum.

ae mexicanus, epigynum.,

a militaris, palpus of ¢; 19a epigynum.

chrysis, 6 palpus.

Plexippus puerperus, ¢ palpus; 23a, tibiaof 6 palpus. For epigynum

see Plate III, fig. 23b.

€é

PLATE III.

Philzeus chrysis, epigynum; —aurecalceus= chrysis.

a princeps, epigynum.

Plexippus puerperus, epigynum.

Hf putnamii, ¢ palpus.

Dendryphantes capitatus, palpus of ¢; 25a, epigynum.

6. For mouthparts and falces of ? see Plate IV,

fig. 26c. .

Dendryphantes flavus, epigynum; 27a, mouthparts and falces of 92.

Dendryphantes multicolor, epigynum; 28a mouthparts-and falces

Gi 2.

Dendryphantes alboimmaculatus, epigynum.

eG flavipedes, ¢ palpus.

Attus palustris, palpus of ¢; 30a, epigynum.

imperialis, 6 palpus; 31a, mouthparts and falces of ¢.

Icius lineatus, 6 palpus; 32a, same, from one side; 32b, epigynum.

elegans, palpus of ¢; 26a, epigynum; 26b, first leg of |

34a.

36.

37.

39.

Attide of North America. 101

Icius palmarum, palpus of ¢; 33a, epigynum.

‘* mitratus epigynum. For 4 palpus see Plate IV, fig. 34.

Pseudicius harfordii, epigynum. For ¢ palpus see Plate IV, figure

56a.

Eris octavus, epigynum.

PLATE IV.

Dendryphantes elegans, falces and mouthparts of 2.

Icius mitratus, ¢ palpus.

‘* piraticus, ¢ palpus; 35a, same from outer side.

albovittatus ¢ palpus.

Pseudicius harfordii, ¢ palpus.

Eris barbipes, epigynum; 38a, first leg of 9.

Hasarius hoyi ¢ palpus; 40a, epigynum.

Habrocestum coecatum, palpus of 4; 42a, epigynum; 42b, third leg

of ¢ from behind.

Habrocestum viridipes, ¢ palpus; 43a, epigynum.

peregrinum ¢é palpus; 44a, patella of third leg of vari-

ety 1; 44b, same of variety 2.

cristatum, epigynum.

auratum, epigynum; 46a, ¢ palpus; 46b, mouthparts

and falces of ¢.

hirsutum, first leg of 4; 47a, 6 palpus.

PLATE V.

Habrocestum splendens, ¢ palpus; 48a, epigynum.

os oregonense, é palpus; 49a, first leg of ¢.

Saitis pulex, epigynum; 50a, ¢ palpus.

Prostheclina cambridgii, ¢ palpus; 5la, epigynum.

Astia vittata,- 4 palpus; 52a, epigynum.

fe morosa, 4 palpus; 53a, epigynum.

Maevia californica, 6 palpus; d5ta, mouthparts and falces.

Cytza minuta, ¢ palpus; 55a, epigynum.

Cyrba teeniola, 4 palpus; 56b, mouthparts and falces of 9. For

epigynum see Plate VJ, fig. 56a.

Admestina wheelerii, é palpus.

Hyctia pikei, 4 palpus. For epigynum see Plate VI, fig. 59a.

Marptusa familiaris, ¢ palpus. For epigynum, see Plate VI, fig. 60a.

ob californica, é palpus, For epigynum, see Plate VI, fig. 61a.

102

56a.

57.

59a.

60a.

61a.

62.

63.

64.

65.

66.

67.

68.

70.

71,

72.

73.

74,

76.

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

PLATE VI.

Cyrba teeniola, epigynum.

Epiblemum scenicum, epigynum.

Hyctia pikei, epigynum.

Marptusa familiaris, epigynum.

ot californica, epigynum.

Menemerus melanognathus, ¢ palpus; 62a,epigynum.

Bd paykullii, ¢ palpus; 63a, epigynum.

Homalattus cyanens, ¢ palpus; 64a, epigynum.

Neon nellii, ¢ palpus.

Ballus youngii, ¢ palpus; 66a, same from one side; 66b, epigynum.

Zygoballus sexpunctatus, mouthparts and falces of ¢; 67a, ¢ palpus.

oH bettini, ¢ palpus; 68a, epigynum; 68b, falces and mouth-

parts of ¢.

Synemosyna formica, ¢ palpus; 70a, epigynum.

Synageles picata, epigynum.

es scorpiona, epigynum; 72a, 4 palpus.

Salticus ephippiatus, ¢ palpus.

Agobardus anormalis, ¢ palpus.

Sadala distincta, ¢ palpus.

PLATE I

VII.

Vou

a. Sci. Arts & Letters,

Wis, Aca

Trans.

Trans. Wis. Acad. Sct. Arts. & Letters. . AG, WAU IPN 10,

‘

1s)

Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts. & Letters. Bed x Vou. VII. Parte III.

Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts & Letters. VOL. Vile PraAre lve

Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts & Letters. Vor. Vils PLATE Wi,

i\\ ne

Serge

«Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts & Letters. Vou. VII. PLATE VI.

ea i ; y

\ : SN My

Attide of North America. 103

INDEX.

Page. | rai Page

/ DUSTIN 5 SEOs SNORE RE ORS BEE BEEBE Ee aBCe Fei

WLGELEN » Sous cponoaspncondendacoocunK 78 MOY}... eee eee yeeteeeeeeee seen eee 5”

AGOBARDUS TLOMATAMIUS Hs sets cteree aclelactenic ocean nite: 85

AMO MINIS eect este tat totals Asielstecreksiste 90 CYANEUS) 2. aeteacloecueceen aie 86

SSTIA w, | HYCTIA

TIOTRORE) GC deaoubadeodeorso dodo doc sscogeup 71 Fare Ay Ga nen Me ated ADEM 9

MIMI y.acdocnoatedcoosudaanbopooanead 70

Artus Sim. Icrus

imperialis NEON TS er se an ee torent 44 ENDO AENAES odo gooocae ookocobohesotes 50

Merete etre ste ere ee AN 43 LIM CALUSH oS As aeiiecl acca Ao aaeahee ee 45

MULT AGUS 4c spetsetsreei alae 48

Arrus Walck. Palmarimbeeeeeseseeeer Spann sn 46

CAULUS .. 2.2. e eee eee neers eee eee ees 92 PILALICUS eee eee eee 49

BAuLus

VOUN TREE pe aaa ittaan nae ae caer sts (27) || LUMISSOMEASIOS oo00, ppoesuesooucoscoadoseoaso 97

WATIGIS Fre eeystylaae cma eran cae cae eee ter 7

CYRBA

UGDINO ico: Sa cee ap DBE Oa Done een 75 | Maevia

californica seen cece cece 73

Cyraa

TIT LGA ONCE ey eietiice ct eerea wesc 73 | MArRprusa

HAIVUTATISS foto ays) Anreiais crocs eto tate ele le 80

DENDRYPHANTES Calitormicatesa os Kn saanorte eRe aes 81

alboimmaculatuss .o <5 52.2 6.te<s, «-- . 41

CODIUAEIR SS rh Ao ise ae ss See claere 36 | MENEMERUS

CTISEENTEI as a a ee ee, oe ee 37 melanognathus...........+++++++++-5- 82

Hey nedenst te es a, cit ccf oo. 42 TO etiy pu eerste eerste teleteeteistereteteleteleristeiatste 84

BENE cob cacob uo a bopsadonodadcodoscar 39 | Neon

PURUELDICOLO Date rel eyetatetalsteietsiciotete ctaraia(lateyernic 40 TEST N thes Meat cone, ak SAR amie Dit are be 88

EPInLEMUM

Rare Cte A. en eee "6 (PEMD IPRUStertereeeeicciscicerseicleicicinctelsieterels ii

, aAlbomaculabusennereeaceccciee ake 19

ERIS AIZONCUSIS eiteteteltelseletefeleteteialeeeie tie eL- 18

[ery ES a od eg oan 55 CATOINANIS Toe ee olce leo elalve ries =lieis(elelsinieiis 15

MELVOSUS eee ation chiclcic bile estore 56 galathea..............+-..s. sees 14

GEER: odd ooaedeosdoonobe pogodnodaacc 54 IMSOIENS ..... 6-61. eee eee eee eee 23

J OMUIS ONT pee erretereeicveats wlerecele ereloreiere eto 20

PEABROORSTUMAasifececiesacl, sess enyeaee 58 TCR COO Leite io ee hee 17

UTE ELD ULI estetctararerateiercisievare civ(eejaieleYe,= cteceiele 63 THLE CANIS eee ee St tas 23

COSCA UUM aes cie Snckinsieces obesicadis 60 DUUETLAL US eects ne oe yas sisi ow eae ce 15

COLONAUUNM Soc ciciisoleiectsie cficlelecieereey 59 INOUSILATIS es teleisieiaecieyeisieiale/s ciesaitie stelopte li

CHISLE DUEL possi sitoteiresiuisel acetone elovalcerele 62 ODSCUUUS ie sets cleleciaiaielcre) sis sie siatievorstats 16

ITS CLM net ee estes ais erosive rare 64 GELOPUNCCRUUS Hen sieciee = sate = ielaleeetal 21

GEE OMEN SOstcmewins ta sicieretaaaieiaaiate et</aieiors 66 QO) Ob sno dad ddosonoc mon AUCUSOCODONS 20

ICLEL TAMMY eects ite as atein aide hare tive ane 61 OUIOSUS Petes iciciomisis eres Gelelessiesisiais sistas 25

NPLCDUGUS ne het ne ters yacc dais ene biee 65 PAUILOLOPI PIs sece aote <wsiislne cstesees news 22

ANIC DOM soa eee retuc c:sis'cie deuce scone ote 60 NINO) lk SB arid GOST pOSOODOOICE CDE Ooor 13

104 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Page

IPHMIANUS Neen ce ee sicketoteis es slorsienietseiee OB) | SADATA NS J, sail Nergntes Se ee eee

MIR SEL Gocncoscoso oso scooSs090055005 30 Chinn: Renerernededuinsnd socacdencec

IPMOTEWS, ogosedcdoocoossavadconeaboues 204s

IHU, oo oaoagaodevscasD0ococcHRdDONTS 27 pulex..... LN ee

THEE AGC MMS so gaosodcagccoogssnbe000s00 28

Tab paris aC Une epee a rae og) | SEES)

POFINCE PS ie eecnercte Reis ss cteisialereie sis cjereerets 31 ephippiatus..........--..--.+ee.2-

TIMALOT. Seine ccs neeciemeckieese nase 32 | SYNAGELES

ie}. SST DT, picate wie ets (Slaleiaie a/ers. Sette epeietera ee eee

JOUBIETS OVENADE G. Gab oaocooécabondoaonoucced 33 rive aaermpctnanO nag onSS coc ee cos c

ULM AMA Hee eee Nee ence 30) [|S YNEMOSWINAG see GREER CEE REET EneEe

PROSTHECLINA FOLMICA LT chalet eee

Cam Pride. econ swine seeiscmeee ne eects 69 |) ZyYGoBALLUS

Psruplenise [einnliblewaranacodan caoocadesooc0Cces

HLarehOnclitt tov whte Seas wire nee Bl Sexpunctatus.....-...+++.+.. po0bc

The Morels and Puff-Balls of Madison. 105

THE MORELS AND PUFF-BALLS OF MADISON.

By WILLIAM TRELEASE.

To facilitate the work of collectors engaged with the cryptogamic botany

of the state, a preliminary list of the parasitic fungi of Wisconsin was pre-

sented to the Academy at its meeting in the winter of 1882.! In continu-

ation of that list, the following descriptions of non-parasitic species are

offered for publication. The groups that have been selected are not closely

related, as might have been inferred from their treatment in a single paper,

nor do they include many species: but they possess some general interest

because the majority of the species are edible, and they derive scientific

interest from the fact that their discrimination is attended with consider-

able difficulty.

Several correspondents have favored me with their collections for study,

and lam under especial obligation in this respect to Dr. J. J. Brown of

Sheboygan. The names that have been adopted rest upon a comparison of:

our specimens with the rich collections of Professors C..H. Peck, of the

New York State Museum, and W. G. Farlow, of Harvard University, the

latter of which includes the Curtis herbarium, and hence contains types of

the species of Berkeley and Curtis, described in Grevillea. My thanks are

also due these gentlemen for the use of papers not otherwise accessible to

me, and for opinions on doubtful forms. Similar opinions have also been

given by the late Dr. G. Winter, of Comrewitz, Germany, Professor P. Mag-

nus, of Berlin, and Dr. M. C. Cooke, and Mr. George Massee, of London; but

for the nomenclature adopted I am personally responsible. While it is be-

lieved that the names employed are in accordance with the opinion of the

best authorities on American fungi, itis by no means certain that refer-

‘ences to the older European names are in all instances above suspicion, for

many descriptions and figures are insufficient, and the paucity of authen-

tic specimens, as well as the poor state of preservation of some of those

extant, contribute to the general uncertainty.

I, MORELS.

Order ASCOMYCETES. Sub-Order DiscoMycereEs.

The popular name of Morel corresponds to the genus Morchella, which

comprises fleshy fungi with a rather stout hollow stem, bearing at the top

a dilated round or conical head, reticulated by prominent ridges that sepa-

1 Transactions, vi, 106. Reprints of the paper were issued early in November 1884, in

advance of the volume.

106 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

rate coarse depressions. This head, or pileus, is covered externally by

elongated sterile bodies (paraphyses) and oblong spore-sacs (asci), both mi-

croscopic. In our species the asci contain eight ellipsoidal spores each; but

others are known in which only two spores are found in each ascus.— The

two species that have been collected about Madison are distinguished by the

character of the pileus.

Pileusiaduate to the stipe; coarsely, pitted 5.242 55..-.4..4.205.2. lee eee M. esculenta.

Pileus free, at least for its lower half, longitudinally ribbed................. M. hybrida.

1. MORCHELLA ESCULENTA (Mich.)— Stipe stout, somewhat mealy or

furfuraceous. Pileus variable, round to conical, regularly and coarsely

pitted. Spores 10—13.517—23y.— Mostly in white oak woods, in the spring.

Reported in Bundy’s list of Wisconsin fungi. !

In the commonest form the plant is two to four inches high, with the

stipe and pileus of nearly equal length; the latter oblong, obtuse, and not

much dilated. Another type, which is not uncommon, is rather shorter,

with the pileus considerably dilated and nearly spherical. In a less fre-

quent form it is elongated and decidedly conical. All arefoundin open dry

woods, and are most abundant under or near white oak trees (Quercus alba).?

Occasionally they are found in meadows, and I once collected a number

of unusually large specimens on the side of a high, gravelly railroad em-

bankment, in company with Hquwisetum arvense. entirely removed from

trees of any kind. Young specimens, with an elongated smoky pileus, the

tops of the ridges only being pale, agree with var. cylindrica as figured by

Vittadini? who recognized it as an immature state.

Figures: — Cooke, Mycographia, i, pl. 81, f. 312. Huxsiccatae: — Ravenel,

Fungi Carol, i. no. 36; Ellis, N. A. Fungi, no. 979.

Other similar species referred to by writers on American fungi are WM.

crassipes Fr. (Bull. Washburn Laboratory, i, 70), WM. elata Fr. (Grevillea,

ili, 149; Bull. Buffalo Soc., ii, 286), M7. deliciosa Fr. (80 Rep. N. Y. Museum,

58), and WM. conica P. (Mycographia, i. pl. 81, f. 315; Cat. Pac. Coast fungi,

33; Bull. Washburn Lab. i, 70.— M. esculenta, var. conica of Bull. Buffalo

Soe. ii, 286 and Curtis, Catalogue, 131). The first two are large, the first,

especially, with a much inflated stipe; the others are smaller and more

delicate. Perhaps one or more of them occur among the Madison speci-

mens, but I am unable to separate our plants by any constant or good

characters.

2. MORCHELLA HYBRIDA (Sow.) P.—Stipe usually slender (one-fourth to

one-half inch), furfuraceous or smoothish, with more or less red-brown trans-

verse striation. Pileus short (three-fourths inch or less), conical or thimble

1 Report. Geol. Surv. Wis., Vol. 1, p. 401.

2 Harkners and Moore speak of M. esculenta as growing under oaks (Cat. Pacific Coast

Fungi, 33). James finds it usually under the ash (Ohio Agric. Rep., 1881, 97). According

to Peck, the commonest form about Albany is found under or in the vicinity of pines 8

Rep. N. Y. Museum, 86), and Day also finds it under conifers (Cat. Buffalo Plants, 152).

8 Descrizione dei funghi mangerecci pid communi dell’ Italia, 105, note, pl. 18, f. 4-5,

The Morels and Puff- Balls of Madison. 107

shaped, its lower half free from the stipe, longitudinally ribbed but with

few transverse ridges. Spores about 1727 4.—Damp shady woods, in

spring; less common than the first.

Two species of De Candolle are included under this name: the first, 1.

semilibera, with a smooth stem; the second, WM. rimosipes, furfuraceous.

If they are distinct, our plant belongs to the latter, though the first has

usually been recognized as the American plant. Vittadini’ could not separ-

ate these forms, nor am TIable todo so. The character of the stipe is too:

inconstant to be of value, at least in herbarium specimens, for watery

plants, grown in wet weather, often have their translucent stems apparently

nearly or quite smooth when pressed. Both forms are represented in English

specimens distributed by Broome? as WM. semilibera. MM. patula P., if dis-

tinct, seems to be characterized chiefly by the greater prominence of trans-

verse ridges, making the depressions of the pileus more regularly polygonal.

M. bispora Sow., with a free pendent pileus, which is found in New York,?

may be distinguished, if it also occurs in Wisconsin, by having 2-spored asci,

M. esculenta is esteemed for the table by most persons, and has usually

been held to be entirely free from the noxious properties resident in many.

fungi. Under some conditions, however, the plants may develop poisonous

principles; and when eaten raw, or even if the water has not been changed

while cooking them, they occasionally give rise to indigestion or symptoms

of poisoning. This is especially true of specimens gathered in wet weather,

and of those which are past their prime or have been kept too long before

cooking, for like all fleshy fungi they are readily putrescible. But where

proper care is taken in selecting and cooking the specimens, the morel

forms an excellent relish and is one of the safest of edible fungi. What

has been said of this species applies generally to the genus Morchella, but

Ishave eaten none of the other species.+

The only fungi that are likely to be confounded with morels are certain

related genera, Helvella® and Gyromitra,— which produce asco-spores on

the exterior of the folded but not reticulately ribbed or pitted pileus; — and

the stink-horn fungi,— species of the basidiomycetous genus Phallus.® Most

of the former are edible. No person possessing the sense of smell is likely

11. c. 114.

2 Rabenherst’s Fungi Europaei, No. 1417.

3 Peck; 30 Rep. N. Y. Museum, 58.

4 For an abstract of recent papers on the necessity for caution in preparing morels, see

Bot. Centralblatt, xx. 243, and a paper by Bihm and Kiilz, in Archiv. fiir experiment,

Pathologie und Pharmakologie, xix. Heft. 6 (Abst. in Bot. Zeitung, 1886, 643-4).— Useful

recipes for the preparation of these fungi will be found in R6ll: Die 24 hiiufigsten essbaren

Pilze. Tiibingen, 41-5.

5 Helvella crispa (sometimes said to be poisonous) occurs in open woods about Madison,

in late summer and fall.

6 P. duplicatus Bose, is common about Madison in summer and autumn, in lawns, grass

by the roadside, etc.; and P. caninuws has been collected at La Crosse by Mr. L. H. Pammel,

108 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

to entertain the thought for a moment of collecting the latter except under

protest, and never of eating them, at least when mature,

Il. PUFF-BALLS.

Order BASIDIOMYCETES. Sub-Order GASTEROMYCETES.

Fungi belonging to the Family Lycoperdaceae are usually, spoken of as

puff-balls, from the powdery character of their spores, that in most species

are emitted in clouds on the slightest touch. When young the plants are

rounded, colorless and fleshy, and most of the species are then edible.

Immature phalloids, already referred to, may be mistaken for puff-balls,

but when cut across they show a layer of translucent jelly just under the

surface. When ripe, the pretty little Lycogala epidendrum, which is

comm on about Madison ondecaying wood, and the subterranean Hlaph-

omyces granulatus, that we have not yet found, resemble, respectively,

Lycoperdon and Scleroderma in their general appearance, but differ

greatly in their development and fructification, the former belonging to

the Myxomycetes, the latter to the Ascomycetes.

Our species of puff-balls may be referred to their genera by the appended

key, which, it should be observed, refers only to Madison species and

makes no provision for those which occur elsewhere:

Outer) peridium forming, aistar when matures. 7.2220) se se. de. ae 2) eee esi eels Geaster.

Outer peridium not star-shaped.

Spores mixed with a conspicuous thread-like capillitium. 4

Entire plant filled with spores and threads, the latter dichotomous

sig oye cues hy COZY LAMAR bball (eee Rae SL ae MCMC AME aA E onda 's to 5.6.00 Bovista.

Base usually more or less spongy and sterile: threads without a main

Sie) cds LA Ue ene a ie Mine Mus Ll ia te Me HAD Sligo Lycoperdon.

Spores when ripe without a fleecy capillitium.

Plant with a solid central columella: spores brownish................. -- Secotium.

Without a columella; spores purplish........................20 00005 . Scleroderma.

SYNOPSIS OF GEASTER.

' Inner peridium sessile.

Mouth few-toothed, not prominent, nor on a disk................. ..- G. hygrometricus.

Mouth silky-striate, conical, on around disk............ (cece eee eee eee G. saccatus.

Inner peridium stalked.

Mouth protruding, deeply plicate, plant small ........ ............-.. G. Rabenhorstit.

Mouth not prominent or plicate, plantrather large...................00.-005 G. limbatus.

1. GEASTER HYGROMETRICUS. P.— Outer peridium leathery, usually

irregularly 8-to-10-rayed, the lobes often notched or forked at apex; with a

thick waxy inner layer cracking when dry, opening and closing with

changes in moisture when fresh. Inner peridium sessile, depressed, rough-

scurfy, with a star-shaped or irregularly torn, scarcely protruding mouth.

Capillitium somewhat anastomosing. Spores rough, 10 to 12 4. in diame-

ter.— Pl. 1, f. 1.— Sandy places, in summer and autumn.

1 For a comparative study of the capillitium of these and other genera see Hesse:

Jahrb. f. wiss. Bot. x. (4), 383, pl. 28-29; Abst. in Bot. Jahresbericht, iv. 163.

The Morels and Puff-Balls of Madison. 109

A poor specimen was once picked up on the shore of Fourth Lake. The

species is also reported from Wisconsin by Bundy, and has been collected

at La Crosse (Pammel), River Falls (King), and Sparta (Miss Rose Schuster):

it ranges over the entire country, from the Atlantic to the Pacific, and is

abundant in Europe.

Figures: — Morgan, American Naturalist, xviii, 969, f. 12; Trelease, St.

Nicholas, xiii, 875, f. 2. Hasiccatae: — Ravenel, Fungi Carol., iii, No. 75;

Fungi Amer. No. 471; Von Thuemen, Mycotheca Universalis, No. 110; Ellis,

N. A. Fungi, No. 108.

2. GEASTER SACCATUS Fr.— Outer peridium usually eight to ten lobed,

the sinuses extending halfway to the base, the lobes reflexed; varying from

cream-color to dark brown, the darker specimens occasionally white-striped

on the outside from the cracking of the outermost layer. Inner peridium

usually a little paler, sub-globose. Mouth prominent, conical, ona distinctly

marked disk, silkystriate, sometimes darker than the rest of the peridium.

Spores brown, semi-opaque, coarsely warted, 3.7 to5 yu. Pl. 1,f. 2. Abun-

dant in damp woods. August and September.

This species, extremely variable in size and color, has been variously re-

ferred by writers. The type (represented in the Lapham herbarium, from

the Penokee Iron Range) is larger and coarser than our form, which corre-

sponds nearly to G. vittatus, Kalchbr., but the white striping of the outer

peridium is exceptional, for specimens growing together differ in this re-

spect, though evidently belonging to a single species. In size and general

appearance our plant resembles G. jfimbriatus Fr., the mouth of which, as

indicated in descriptions and shown by European exsiccatae, is less promi-

nent and not on a sharply limited disk.

Figures:— Morgan, 1. c. 968, f.9. Hxsiccatae:— Ravenel, Fungi Carol.,

Thy 100% Ee :

3. GEASTER RABENHORSTIL Kunze.—Small. Outer peridium at length

papery, whitish buff, mottled with dark brown; divided into six to eight

strongly reflexed lobes. Inner peridium lead-color or brown, distinctly

stalked with a prominent apophysis at summit of stipe. Mouth conical or

cylindrical, deeply furrowed longitudinally. Spores dark brown and

opaque, irregularly globose, coarsely papillate, 4.5 to 5 “.—Pl. 1, f. 3.—

Sandy woods. :

Found once in small numbers under a clump of larches on the Univer-

sity grounds. I have seen the same plant in the collection of Professor

Peck, at Albany. It has doubtless often passed for a small form of G.

striatus (DC.), and is referred to that species by Peck (38 Rep. N. Y. Mu-

seum, 94). Itis G. Schmideli Vitt. of Winter’s Kryptogamen Flora, and

may really be the plant figured by Vittadini.

4, GEASTER LIMBATUS Fr.— Large. Outer peridium seven or eight lobed,

the segments strongly reflexed but with incurved tips. Inner peridium

brownish or gray, globose or somewhat depressed, raised on a short com-

pressed slightly apophysate stipe. Mouth fimbriate, on a more or less evi-

110 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

dent disk. Spores less opaque and more finely granulated than in the last,

4 y4.— Pl. 1, f. 4. Open woods. Wisconsin specimens collected by Bundy,

also occur in the herbarium of Professor Peck.

Figures:— Morgan, |. c. 967, f. 6. Hexsiccatae:— Ellis, N. A. Fungi, no.

1309.

Geaster bryantii, B., reported by Bundy in Rep. Geol. Surv, i, 399, presumably on speci-

mens of G. limbatus, is similar, but with an elongated mouth plicate as in G. Rabenhorstii,

and with a delicate cup at base of the stipe which, in typical specimens, is also surrounded

by a hanging collar-like fold below the apophysis.

Geaster striatus (DC.), also recorded by Bundy, perhaps a specimen of G. saccatus, re-

sembles that species in its general features, but the inner peridium is more or less stalked

and the mouth plicate, while the outer peridium is not saccate at base.

Geaster triplex Jungh., which is represented inthe Lapham herbarium by a specimen

without date or locality, is recognized by a lacerated cup-like intermediate layer, which

surrounds the base of the inner peridium. It should be observed that a similar but incon-

stant and much smaller middle peridium is occasionally seen in the vittatus form of G. sac-

catus as it occurs about St. Louis, and is figured in G. hygrometricus by Corda (cones

Fungorum, vi, pl. 4, f. 42, nos. 16-17).

SYNOPSIS OF BOVISTA.

Less than 1 in. in diameter; spores obovoid, long-pedicelled — B. plumbea.

Over 1 in. in diameter; spores globose, short-pedicelled — B. pila.

1. BOoviIsTA PLUMBEA P.— Usually half an inch to an inch in diameter,

irregularly globose or depressed when old. Peridium at first double, the

outer layer dull white, flaking away, the inner white to lead-color or some-

times dark purplish gray or even nearly black when old, smooth and

slightly glossy, dehiscent at the apex by a round or oblong fissure mostly

with revolute margins. Capillitium deep chestnut brown, much branched,

the twigs blunt. Spores brown, nearly smooth,! short obovoid, 5—6xX6—7 yu,

with colorless pedicels 217 .— Pl. 1, f. 5.— Very common in open hilly

pastures; also sent from River Falls (King), and doubtless occurring every-

where.

B. plumbea and B. nigrescens are species readily confused if they are

really distinct. I have as yet failed to convince myself that our larger,

darker plants are more than a form of B. pluwmbea. Fries (systema, iii. 24)

records both as American; but I have seen no specimens corresponding

closely to B. nigrescens as figured in Berkley’s Outlines of Brit. Fungology,

pl. 20, f. 5. Sturms Flora Heft 18, pl. 15; Bolton’s Funguses about Halifax, pl.

118; and Sowerby pl. 331. Our common form is well represented by Micheli,

pl. 97, f. 6; Corda, Icones, v, pl. 6, f. 47, nos. 8-4 (the former inverted);

Vittadini, Funghi Mangerecci, pl. 33, f. 1; Berkeley, 1. e. pl. 20, f. 6; and

Sturm’s Flora. Heft 18, pl. 16 (copied by Winter). It is hard tosee on what

grounds Fries and Winter refer Batsch. pl. 29, f. 166 to B. nigrescens.

1The descriptions in this paper apply to spores that have not been much soaked in water,

since the markings of many more or less completed disappear when the spores are wet, as

the case of some Ustilagineee and Uredineze.

- .

The Morels and Puff Balls of Madison. 111

A small lead-colored specimen from Albany, N. Y., in the Curtis her-

barium (Peck, no. 76), under this name has round nearly stalkless rough

spores 5 cin diameter, and is evidently a denuded plant of B. cirewm-

scissa’ B. &. C., not yet found in Wisconsin.

I can corroborate the assertion of Vittadini that this is one of the most

delicate of edible fungi when gathered young and properly cooked. The

first sign of discoloration, as with other puff-balls, marks it as too old for

the table.

2. Bovista Pina B. & C., seldom less than an inch and a half in diameter,

usually two or two and a half inches, irregularly globose or somewhat

pinched in at the base, which often bears remnants of a myceliz cord.

Peridium with at most a very delicate flaking outer layer, typically smooth

and glistening, grayish-buff, dark gray or blackish-purple, usually dehiscing

late by an irregular fissure at no fixed point. Twigs of the capillitium

wavy, tapering, chestnut-brown, paler toward the tips, fading to a decided

pink in old weathered specimens. Spores nearly spherical, stalkless,

0, 9 —9 /, nearly smooth, paler than in the last.— Pl. 1, f. 6.— Abundant

in wood-pastures, less frequent in open fields.

This species was originally described (Grevillea, ii. 49) from Wisconsin

specimens collected by Lapham. Ihave seen other specimens from She-

boygan (Brown), Sparta and Middleton (Miss Schuster), Bloomingdale and

La Crosse (Pammel), and have collected it in abundance at Weyauwega.

In its nearly single peridium and irregular dehiscence, this is decidedly

unlike typical species of Bovista. Like the last, it is excellent eating when

gathered young and properly cooked.

Bovista ammophila, Lev., reported (perhaps on specimens of the last)

from Wisconsin by Bundy (Rep. Geol. Surv., i, 399), has a similar cord-like

base, but is distinguished by its spores, which, as figured by Leéveillé (Ann,

Sci. Nat. Bot. 3 ser. ix, pl. 9, f. 5-6), are prominently obovoid and long-

pedicelled.

B, subterranea, Pk., a depressed-globose species, which matures just be-

low the surface of the ground, bulging it up at maturity; is recognized by

its firm dull-brown inner peridium, half an inch to an inch and a half in

diameter, opening by a small apical pore; its fleecy outer peridium, impreg-

nated with dirt and evanescent above; and olive-purple capillitium and

spores, the former flexuous and rather sparingly branched, the latter glo-

bose, stalkless, rough, 4—7 “in diameter. This species, described from

Dakota specimens, has been collected by me in Colorado, and comes from

River Falls (King), so that it may be looked for at Madison, in sandy soil,

Mycenastrum spinulosum, Pk. (Bot. Gaz., iii, 170; vi, 240) a species of the

Southwest which also occurs in the collection made by Dr. Brown at She-

boygan; is a gray puff-ball, irregular or kidney-shaped, measuring as

much as four inches in its greatest diameter. It may be recognized by its

smooth, almost woody, peridium, nearly one-sixteenth inch thick, at last

breaking stellately, often with serrate edges to the lobes, and by its purple-

112 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

brown spinose capillitium and rough, opaque, paler spores 10 to 12 ~ in di-

ameter. It differs from the European M. Coriwm Desy. (also found in Ari-

zona and Colorado) in its decided purple color when freshly broken. I have

been able to test this latter species in Colorado, and find it palatable.

SYNOPSIS OF LYCOPERDON.!

Plants large; peridium flaking away irregularly at top.

Sculptured and somewhat furfuraceous when young................. L. favosum.

Not seulptured, mostly glabrous; ‘very large.......................--- L. Bovista.

Small or medium-sized; opening by a pore at apex.

Spores brown, yellowish, or olive, smooth or minutely roughened.

Shaggy or with deciduous spines.

SHOOHAS UouayeroeChCSMECl Coc oock Gobcdbosceooncbodnessanouss ae L. pedicellatum.

Spores stalkless.

Fleecy, sessile; old peridium not pale-areolate; growing in

meadows and grass land...... Sagi aoe tice ee DROSS L. Wrightit.

Warty, the larger spines deciduous, leaving pale round

dotserowinganithewOOdS eee eee eee ens eee eee . LL. gemmatum,

Smooth, or at most scurfy, (rarely sub-shaggy, in L. pyriforme?).

On rotting wood; gregarious; mostly stalked, with creeping

WAMBO NARS. han decadanaoudcoosaoket TAs uatheety COUN eae TN L. pyriforme.

On the ground; not gregarious.

Sporesiellipsoidal ws) Ses aasasmeteeee cee serene eee ee eee L. oblongisporum.

Spores round or slightly obovoid.

Peridium not dark-dotted, often mealy-scurfy.

Sessile; usually under three-fourths inch.......... L. pusillum.

Oxrtenkstalked Margery essere eee oe L. molle.

Peridium dark-dotted when mature; sessile......... L. coloratum.

Spores more or less red-purple, rough-warty.

At first spinulose or shaggy.

Spines very long, white, all deciduous.......:................. L. pulcherrimum.

Spines shorter, buff or brown.

Mature peridium mealy-roughened, but glossy.......... L. atropurpureum.

Not mealy; reticulated with small brown warts........... L. constellatum.

Not at all shaggy.

Reticulately furrowed; somewhat flesh-colored............... L. rimulatum.

Notifurro wed butt ce ki tre aceite eink ee Cee Ee Ee L. glabellum.

1. LYCOPERDON FAVOSUM (Rostk.).— Three to six inches in diameter, four

to five inches high, depressed, spherical with a stout conical base, marked

with coarse angular depressions, the pale fleecy outer peridium cracking so

as to expose the brown inner layer, in anastomosing lines. Spores and capil-

litium, snuff-color or greenish-brown, liberated by the breaking away of

the thick but fragile peridium. Spores slightly obovoid, nearly smooth,

stalkless, 4.25 —4.5 & 4.5—5 .— Pl. 1, f. 9.— Grassy fields, late summer and

autumn.

1 Since the preparation of this paper, which was presented to the Academy in 1884, two

important publications on Lycoperdacez have appeared, namely: a revision of the genus

Lycoperdon by Massee (Trans. Roy. Microse. Soc. 1887, 701), and the compilation of the

entire group by De Toni, for the seventh volume of Saccardo’s Sylloge Fungorum. So far

as possible, these have been consulted in a final revision of the manuscript for publication.

—May 10, 1888.

The Morels and Puff-Balls of Madison. 113

I have had some doubt as to whether this plant, collected but once,

should be referred to L. favosuwm or caelatum. The latter species is re-

ported by Bundy (Rep. Geol. Surv. Wis. i, 899) and Peck (U. S. species of

Lycoperdon, 12), from Wisconsin, and I have seen unmistakable speci-

mens of it from this state in the herbarium of Professor Peck, while it ap-

pears to be pretty frequently met with in the west.

2. LiycoOPERDON Bovista L. (Ll. giganteum of most authors).— Seldom

under ten inches in diameter, often very much larger: smooth, or at least

not floccose-sculptured nor pitted like the last. Peridium less corky, flak-

ing away in thinner more papery layers, spores and capillitium yellower,

the latter not separating from the sterile base. Spores nearly globose,

almost smooth, 4 to 4.5 .— Grass land in late summer and autumn. Also

reported from Wisconsin by Bundy (J. ¢.).

Figures: — Palmer, Mushrooms of America, pl. 8, f. 1.

Lycoperdon cyathiforme, Bosc., which occurs in the Curtis herbarium from Wisconsin

(Sprague, 1169, Coll. Lapham), has been collected at Sheboygan (Brown), River Falls

(King), and La Crosse (Pammel), and is also mentioned by Bundy (J. c¢.), is a stout

pear-shaped or depressed-globose puff-ball approaching L. callatwm in size, but easily dis-

tinguished by its smoother but areolated outer peridium, flaking away near the top as a

thin papery layer, revealing the thicker fragile purple inner layer, and by its round finely

granulated very purple spores, 4.5,to 6 /4 in diameter. The sterile base persists for a long

time, and is what Bose’s description (Mém.s. quelques espaéces de champignons des parties

mérid. de l’ Amér. Sept., 5-6, pl. 6, f. 11) and figure were taken from. The American.

plant is not distinct from that which Vittadini! at first referred to L. Bovista, but after-

ward called L. fragile.

These three species are esteemed for food, whereas most of the smaller

species of the genus have a disagreeable flavor. On this subject see Peck,

U. S. Sp. of Lycoperdon, 7; 82 Rep. N. Y. Museum, 62; Country Gentle-

man, November 5, 1885; Palmer /. c.; and a note by myself in St. Nicholas,

September, 1886; as well as Badham and other European writers on edible

fungi.

3. LYCOPERDON PEDICELLATUM Pk.— Depressed globose to obovoid or

sub-pyriform, usually one to two inches in diameter, with coarse angular

or slender stellately united spines, a minutely granular darker recticulum

between their bases. Denuded peridium, dull pinkish or buff, with round

or polygonal depressions corresponding to the insertion of the fallen spines:

base granular with more or less persistent coarse warts. Spores olive-

yellow, slightly obovoid, minutely granular, 4-5 5-6 js, with slender

nearly colorless pedicels 18 to 25 4 long.— Pl. 1, f. 7.— Found once on the

ground in open woods; received from River Falls (King); and locally

abundant elsewhere, often in open places.

It has frequently been asserted that the spores of Lycoperdon are stalkless

while those of Bovista are pedicelled. Understanding stalkless to mean

(as in this paper) with a pedicel not exceeding 1 in length, this generaliza-

1 Funghi Mangerecci, 263-8, pl. 33, f. 2. See, also, Berkeley, Notices of N. A. Fungi, no.

382,

114 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters

tion is not true. L. cepaeforme and L. Hongkongense, like the present

species, have their spores permanently stalked. The sterigmata of the group

with red-purple spores (nos. ——) are at first very long, and they are also

sometimes subpersistent. On the other hand the spores of a number of spe-

cies referred to Bovista, e. g. P. pila, B. circumscissa, and B. tosta, are not

pedicellate.

4, LYCOPERDON WRIGHTII B & C.— Round or broadly pear-shaped, often

gregarious and more or less angular from mutual pressure; three-eighths to

three fourths inch in diameter; densely covered with short grouped white

spines that are buff and deciduous at maturity, exposing the pubescent or

nearly smooth, dirty straw colored or buff inner peridium. Spores and capilli-

tium pale greenish buff, the former finely granular, round, stalkless 3.5 to

4,25 u. —pl. 1, f. 8.— Very abundant at the sides of paths and on open, bare

places in dry, closely cropped grass land.

Specimens have also been sent me from River Falls (King), Sheboygan,

(Brown), and Sparta (Miss Schuster), and the species is reported by

Bundy in the list already referred to.

Lycoperdon cruciutum Rostk. (L. separaus Pk., L. Wrightii, var. separaus Pk.), of which.

doubtful immature specimens have been collected about Madison, and which Miss Schuster

sends from Sparta, and Professor King, from River Falls, occurs more commonly in shaded.

places and is distinguished by its somewhat large size (half an inch to two inches) and

more clay-colored or darker spores which are often pedicellate or intermingled with fallen

sterigmata 5 to7 ,,long; and especially by the (very soft and flexible often dark brown) vel-

vety inner peridium, from which the closely united white spines flake away in a continuous

layer. The American plant corresponds well with the figure of Rostkovins (Sturm’s Flora,

Heft. 18. pl 8), though its spines are more crowded than in the figure. If the last runs into

this, the name of Rostkovins must have precedence.

5. LYCOPORDEN GEMMATUM Batsch.— Usually gregarious, one to two

inches in diameter, sometimes as much as three inches high, commonly top

shaped, the fertile pair contracting into a stout obconic stem which equals.

or surpasses the enlarged summit in length, white, passing into pale buff or

gray; with fleshy deciduous warts and intermingled more persistent smaller

ones. Spores pale brown, thin-walled and translucent, finely granulated,

round, stalkless, 3.5 to 4.5 .-Pl. 2, f. 1. Very abundant onthe ground or

occasionally on decayed wood, in the woods.

The Lapham herbarium contains specimens from Milwaukee, and I have

seen others from Sheboygan (Brown). Bundy also reports the species.

The most characteristic feature of this, which is one of our commonest

species, is the occurrence of solid fleshy warts, often one-sixteenth of an

inch or more in length, which stud the upper part of the peridium, giving

it an appearance of great beauty when young. These are easily removed,

leaving round, pale spots, one-thirty-second to one-sixteenth inch in diame-

ter, on the peridium, elsewhere covered with fine granules. Even on old

weathered specimens when the latter have entirely disappeared from the top,

the characteristic pale spots are to be found toward the base.

Figures:— Palmer, Mushroons of America, pl. 8; Trelease, St. Nicholas,

xiii, 875, f. 4. Hasiccatae:— Ellis, N. A. Fungi, no. 1,699.

The Morels and Puff. Balls of Madison. 115

6. LYCOPERDEN PYRIFORME Schaeff.— Our most variable species, globu-

lar, pear-shaped, or clavate, sesaile or stipitate, usually five-eighths inch

to an inchin diameter, and half an inch to an inch and ahalf high (excep-

tionally as much as one and one-fourth by two inches). Peridium buff,

covered with uniform persistent coarse dark brown granules (exceptionally

with substellate short spines?). Spores pale olive, smooth, round, 3.5 to

4.5 yc stalkless.— Pl. 2, f. 5. Wery common in woods, on old stumps,

buried sticks, etc., the plants commonly gregarious, and connected by

coarse white fibers.

I have also examined specimens collected at Sheboygan (Brown), and

River Falls (King), and others occur in the Lapham herbarium. Bundy also

mentions the species in his list of Wisconsin fungi.

Exsiccatae:— Ravenel, Fungi Carolin., ii. no. 72; Fungi Amer., no. 469,

7. LiYCOPERDON OBLONGISPORUM B. & C.— Round to broad, pyriform,

three-eighths in. to 1 in., usually narrowed below, with a mycelial cord at

base. Peridium brown, at first furfuraceous, finally glassy, but with mi-

nute persistent granules. Spores greenish-brown, almost smooth, ellip-

soidal, stalkless, 46 u.— Pl. 2, f. 3. — Rather abundant on the bare ground

in dense woods; August.

This pretty species, previously known only from Cuba,? is indistinguish-

able from the next when immature, the spores affording the only really

characteristic feature. It has probably been overlooked in the past chiefly

for this reason and because the mature plants, from their leaf-brown color,

are not atallconspicuous. L. Hongkongense B. & C. (N. Pacific Expl. Exped.

Fungi,— Proc. Amer. Acad. 1858,— 124, no. 119), as I find from an exami-

nation of original specimens in the Gray herbarium at Cambridge, isa little

more elongated than this species but with the same microscopic characters

otherwise. Its spores, however, differ in being long-pedicelled. In their

memoir on Lycoperdon and Scleroderma (Ann. Sci. Nat. 1842, Ser. 2, xvii,

13-14, Pl. 2, B. f. 5-7) the Tulasnes figure pedicellate oblong spores for some

plants of ZL. cepaeforme Bull., which is referred to as synonymous with

L. pusillum Fr. and L. ericetorwm P.

8. LYCOPERDON, PUSILLUM Fr.— Microscopic characters of the pre-

ceding, but usually paler and less glistening when mature. Spores round

or barely obovoid, nearly stalkless, 3.5 to 4.5 4, evanescently minutely

roughened or smooth.— Pl. 2, f. 4.— Rather frequently on the ground, in

open fields; also sent from River Falls (King), and reported by Bundy (J. ¢.)

Exsiccatae: Ravenel, Fungi Carol. ii, no. 73; Fungi Amer. no. 138.

9. LYCOPERDON MOLLE P.— Depressed, globose, half an inch to an inch

and a quarter in diameter, sessile or on a stipe of equal length. Peridium

cream-color passing into buff, mealy-furfuraceous, glistening when old.

Spores olive, round, stalkless, minutely echinulate, 3.5 to 5 “.—PI. 2, f. 6.

On the ground in open woods and pastures; also collected at River Falls

(King).

1 Berkeley & Curtis, Fungi Cubenses (Journ, Linn., Dec., 1867), 345, no. 505.

116 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

This species superficially resembles small plants of L. glabellum Pk. so

closely that it is difficult to distinguish them. When cut open, especially

if gathered immature and allowed to ripen in the laboratory, it sometimes

also presents a red-purple section; but this does not depend upon the color

of the spores, which afford constant and certain means of distinguishing

the two species, since in this they are about as in L. gemmatum, while in

L. glabellum they are nearly asin L. constellatum or the related species

of the purple-spored section.

10. LyCOPERDON COLORATUM Pk.— Round, and somewhat depressed and

contracted at the base, three-eighths to one inch; from pure white passing

into yellowish and at maturity buff; granular-mealy; finally glistening and

dotted with minute dark granules that persist or often rub away from large

areas. Spores and capillitium buff, the former paler, round, smooth,

stalkless, 4 to 5 w.— Pl. 2, f.2.— On the ground in damp woods; August.

11. LyYCOPERDON PULCHERRIMUM B. & C. (L. Frostii Pk.)— Obovoid, an inch

to an inch and a half in diameter and aboutas high. Peridium coffee-color

at maturity, covered with very deciduous slender white spines, often three-

sixteenths inch long, clustered by their tips; usually smooth and glossy

after their fall. Capillitium at last red-purple, spores varying from pale

buff to reddish-purple, round, with very low colorless warts, nearly stalk-

less, 4 to 6.5 7/.— Pl. 3, f. 1.— Open grass land, not uncommon.

In this and other species of the purple-spored Proteoids the pedicels of

the spores, even in mature specimens, are sometimes 2 to 4 long, whereas

in other groups the species that have not long pedicelled spores very rarely

show pedicels much over 1 4 long.

The spores of the group of species which follows are very uniform,

coarsely warted and usually short-stalked. As shown by Peck (U. 8. spe-

cies of Lycoperdon, 18), they are intermingled with fragmentary colorless,

rods, to which they are not attached, but that represent the fallen remnants

of long sterigmata, as may be seen by examining young specimens. In this

paper (p. 22) and in 32 Rep. N. Y. Museum, p. 68, Peck states that L. pul-

cherrimun B. & C. is evidently the same as L. pedicellatum Pk., an opinion

which I shared until, in looking through the puff-balls of the Curtis herba-

rium, which Dr. Farlow obligingly placed in my hands, I found the type

of L. pulcherrimum, gathered in Pennsylvania, in 1852, and preserved un-

der the number 3933. The description by Berkeley (Notices of N. A. Fungi,

50, No. 3386,— Grevillea, ii, 51) is certainly more applicable to L. pedicella-

tum than to this species, especially as regards the size and color of the spores;

but unless two entirely different things were collected under this number,

so that Berkeley’s description was not drawn up from a duplicate of the

Curtis type, there can be little doubt that L. Frostii and not L. pedicellatum

is a synonym of L. pulcherrimum.

12. LYCOPERDON ATROPURPUREUM Vitt.—Extremely variable in size

and form, three-fourths to two and one-half inches in diameter, one and

one-fourth to three inches high, obconical or pyriform to subglobose; nearly

The Morels and Puff-Balls of Madison. aa liy,

sessile or on a long stipe. Peridium straw color or dull buff, nearly spine-

less or with sharp, dark spines, often united in clusters by their tips, fur-

furaceous with a more or less evanescent mealy coating through which the

inner layer appears glossy. Spores purple-brown, coarsely granular, round,

4.5 to 6.5 «, nearly stalkless or with pedicels 2 to 4 long.— Pl. 3, f. 2.—

Rather frequent on the ground in bushy woods, or occasionally on decay-

ing wood. Reported by Bundy, and occurs from Wisconsin (Lapham) in

Hb. Curtis as LZ. saccatum. The more spinose form is var. hirtellum Pk.

Though easily recognized in most of its forms, this is one of the most

perplexing of ourspecies. Berkeley and Curtis as well as Dr. Winter, who

examined some of our specimens, have considered the plant to be L. sacca-

tum Fr. <As saccatwm is understood by Bouerden (Bot. Zeitung, 1857, 596),

and Winter (Rabenhorst’s Kryptogamen-Flora, i, 901), this determination is

unimpeachable; but L. saccatum of Fries and the Flora Danica (PI. 1189),

has a flaking peridium similar to that of L. bovista and L. cyathiforme,

whereas our plant possesses a persistent peridium opening by a terminal

pore. Recognizing this, Winter (/. ¢.) admits that Bouerden appears not to

have possessed the true species of Fries, yet does not hesitate to follow him.

The real saccatum, which occurs in New York, is certainly very distinct.

Figures:— Palmer, Mushroons of America, pl. 8, as L. saccatum. EHasic-

catae:—Ravenel, Fungi Carolin., iv, no. 78, in part, as L. gemmatuwm.

13. LYCOPERDON CONSTELLATUM Fr. Subglobose or more commonly

in the form of an oblate spheroid, somewhat pinched-in at base, one to two

inches in diameter. Peridium straw-color, gray or copper, at first with

deciduous brown spines clustered by their apices, and intervening low

brown warts that persist as a prominent reticulum, or, ultimately falling,

leave the peridium minutely facetted, somewhat resembling ‘‘ hammered

work” in metal. Spores nearly as in the last, 5 to 6.5 4. Old capillitium

brown.— Pl. 3, f. 4.— On the ground in bushy woods.

Though more depressed than L. wnbrinwm of the Flora Danica (pl. 1800),

which is the prototype of ZL. constellatuwm, our plant agrees so well with

the descriptions, that I have followed Peck in referring it to that species.

According to Dr. Winter, it nearly resembles Z. cupricwm Bouerd.

14, LyCOPERDON RIMULATUM Pk. in herb.— Depressed globose, pinched-

in and radicating at base, slightly umbonate at apex, three-fourths to one

and one-half in. in diameter. Peridium tawny flesh-color. thin, glabrous,

rimulate with anastomosing furrows. Spores red-purple, rough-warty,

5 to 6.5 4“; their pedicels 2 or in immature specimens, as muchas 15 4 long.—

Pl. 3, f. 3.— On the ground in open wood pastures; September; also col-

lected at River Falls (King).

An interesting plant, related to the constellatum group in its spore char-

acters, but differing from our other species of this group in the absence of

a spinose or mealy coating, the outer peridium merely cracking along the

grooves asin L. caelatum. Tam indebted to Mr. Peck for the name employed,

which he has applied to immature specimens in his herbarium, from Ohio

(Morgan) and New York.

118 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

15. LiyCOPERDON GLABELLUM Pk.— Depressed globose, or elongated and

stipitate, more or less umbonate, three-fourths to two in. high. Peridium

buff, very finely furfuraceous. Spores and capillitium purple or more or less

brown, the former 5 to 6 , with coarse warts, and short-pedicelled.— Pl. 3,

f. 5.—On the ground in woods, accompanying L. gemmatum; River Falls

(king).

Tulostoma fimbriatum Fr., a small puff-ball raised on a solid cylindrical stipe about

one-eighth in. in diameter and asmuch as an inch long, may be recognized by its subglobose

more or less granulated peridium, opening by asmall scarcely protruding fimbriate mouth,

brick-colored, remotely spinose, round spores 4-5 jz in diameter, and pale blunt anasto-

mosing capillitium. J have received it in quantity from Professor King, of River Falls.

SECOTIUM.

1. SECOTIUM ACUMINATUM (Mont.) (S. Thunii Schulzer. S. Warnet Pk.)—

Short stipitate, subglobose to conical ovoid, rounded or frequently more or

less acuminate above.

Peridium rather leathery, dull yellowish-white, passing into buff; smooth

or mostly with crenated scale-like elevations often free at their lower

edge, dehiscing irregularly about the stipe, which is prolonged through

the sporiferous portion as a stout columella one-fourth to one-half in.

in diameter, and firmly united with the peridium at apex. Spore-bearing

mass snuff-brown, extending laterally from the columella in a series of

eroded friable thin gills. Spores yellow-brown, smooth, stalkless; extremely

variable, spherical, ellipsoidal, or more or less regularly ovoid, 4-96-14,

most commonly 68 /4.— Pl. 2, f. 7.— Abundant in late summer and fall in

open pastures, etc. My largest specimens were obtained on the bare

ground in a potato patch.

Reported from Wisconsin by Bundy (l. c. 399, — the specimens preserved.

in hb. Peck), and Peck (Bull. Torrey Club), and included in the collections

of Dr. Brown, of Sheboygan, and F. H. King, of River Falls. Edible

when young.

According to Schulzer von Muggenburg (Hednigia, 1883, 48), this species,

described by Peck. as Lycoperdon Warnei (Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, vi, 77),

Podaxon Warnei (U.S. Sp. Lycoperdon, 34), and Secotium Warne (Bull.

Torrey Cl. ix, 2), is identical with the European S. Threnit Schulzer, which

is referrible to S. Acuneinatum (Mont.) Tul. S. Szabolesense Hasl., judg-

ing from his figure and the abstract of his paper in Jost’s Bot. Jahres-

bericht for 1876, p. 161, must be extremely closely related.

Figures:— Peck. Bull. Torry Bot. Club, ix. pl. 9, f. 6-11; Revue Mycolo-

gique, iv. pl. 16. f. 13.

The Morels and Puff- Balls of Madison. 119

SYNOPSIS OF SCLERODERMA.

Peridium thin, dark-dotted ———BS,. verrucosum, More conaceous, uniformly colored,

usually furrowed orsculptured.—. S. vulgare.

1. SCLERODERMA VERRUCOSUM (Vaill.) — Flattened biscuit-shaped, + to

14 in. in diameter, nearly sessile or with a short stipe, radicating at base.

Peridium thin and flexible above, but tough; yellowish buff, a thin outer

layer cracking during development and persisting as small angular darker

scales; dehiscence irregular, apical, spores purple, roundish, stalkless,

sharply echinulate, 8 to 10 ~.— Pl. 3, f. 7.— One of the earliest and com-

monest of our puff-balls, on the bare ground in roads. I have also col-

lected specimens above Kilbourn City, and the species is found at River

Falls (King) and is named in Bundy’s list.

Neither this nor the following species is considered fit for food,'! though

greedly devoured by snails. Even the young plants emit a disagreeable

pungent odor, quite different from that of other puff-balls.

This is, at least in part, S. Bovista of Ellis, N. A. Fungi, no. 24; and,

perhaps, of Von Thuemen. Mycotheca Universalis, no. 607,— both from

New Jersey, but in my own copy of the Mycotheca, and in Dr. Farlow’s,

the latter number appears to be a form of S. vulgare. Our plant is that

figured by Nees (Syst. du Schwamme, pl. 11, f. 124) under the name Bo-

vista plumbea, obviously an error. It is not evidently different, except in

the shortness of its stipe, from Lycoperdon verrucosum, sphaericum, etc., of

Vaillant (Bor. Parisiense, pl. 16, f. 7), ZL. verrucoswm of Bulliard (Pl. Vénén.

de la France, pl. 24), L. defossum. Sowerby (British Fungi, pl. 311), and

Scleroderma verrucosum, Greville (Scot. Crypt. Flora —, pl. —). It is

also quite similar to that figured by Sorokine (Ann. Sci. Nat. 6 ser. iii. pl.

6 f. 12 f.) as S. verrucosum, and agrees in all essentials with a French spec-

imen in the Curtis herbarium referred to verrucosum by Desmazieres. The

transparent border to the young spores, figured by the Tulasnes (Ann. Sci.

Nat. 2 ser. xvii. pl. 1, A. f. 8) in what they doubtfully refer to this species,

and which I have noticed in S. vulgare, f. minor of Saccaede’s Mycotheca

Veneta. no. 1412, has not been observed by me in American specimens of

either species; but is held by Caspary (Sitzber. Geo. zu Konigsberg, 1886,

xxvii, 203) to be merely an immature character.

2. SCLERODERMA VULGARE Fr.— Depressed globose, narrowed and radicat-

ing below, three-fourths to two in. in diameter. Peridium pinkish or buff,

thick, smooth or finely checked by intersecting dark furrows about one-

sixteenth in. apart. Spores as in the last, nine to fifteen “, the spore-mass

when maturing separated into small grains by bundles of pale gray hyphae.

1 Scleroderma vulgare is commonly held to be poisonous to man, but according to Smith

(Gard. Chron. 1888, 48) and Caspany (Schrift. Physik.— Ockonom. Gesellsch zu Kénigsberg,

xxvii, 109; Bot. Centralblatt, xxx, 34), it is collected in parts of England and Germany as @

truffle and eaten after cooking, without known ill effects. But its bad name should be

borne in mind by anyone desirous of experimenting with it.

120 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

— Pl. 3, f. 6.— Grass land or in mossy dry woods. Also sent me from Sparta

(Miss Schuster) and River Falls (King), and reported by Bundy.

Our Western form, as I have seen it at Madison and about St. Louis, is of-

ten smooth except for the simulate areolation referred to, in this respect

differing from a common Eastern and European form, which is also de-

cidedly yellow, but it is undoubtedly a form of the same polymorphic

species. The S. verrucosum of Bundy’s list is presumably the rougher

plant, which is shaggy with coarse scales, often free and recurved above.

Scleroderma Bovista Fr., named in Bundy’s list, differs from vulgare in its thinner perid-

ium, and from both of the preceding species in the more olive spore-mass with inter-

mingled yellow flocci; otherwise it closely resembles S. vulgare, from which, like Caspary

(l. c. 204), I often find it hard to separate it.

Hlaphomyces, one of the Tuberaceae, developing underground, when mature resembles a

Scleroderma; but its spores are borne in asci that are evident in young plants. We

have as yet found no representative of this genus, which should be looked for in pine woods,,.

etc.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

The plants are represented of the natural size, and their spores uniformly

enlarged 2000 diameters.

PLATE VII.

1, Geaster hygrometricus and spore; 2, G. saccatus and spore; 3, G. Ra-

benhorstii and spore; 4, G. limbatus and spore; 5, Bovista plumbea and

spore; 6, B. pila and spore; 7, Lycoperdon pedicellatum (small specimen):

and spore; 8, L. Wrightii, two plants and spore; 9, spore of L. caelatum:

PLATE VIII.

1, Lycoperdon gemmatum and spores; 2, L. coloratum and spore; 3, L.

oblongisporum and spore; 4, L. ericetorum and spore; 5, L. pyriforme and.

spore; 6, L. molleand spore; 7, Secotium acuminatum, in section, and spore.

PLATE Ix.

1, Lycoperdon pulcherrimum and spore; 2, L. atropurpureum, three-

plants and spore; 3, L. rimulatum and spore; 4, L. constellatum (?) and spore;.

5, L. glabellum and spore; 6, Scleroderma vulgare and spore; 7, S. verruco-

sum,— subsessile and stipitate forms.

PLATE VII.

VoL. VII.

Acad. Sci. Arts. & Letters.

Trans. Wis.

Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts. & Letters. Vou. VII. PLATE VilII.

akan

She

Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. Arts. & Letters. ' VOL. ViEES PLATE EXC

The Working of the Madison Lakes. 121

THE “WORKING” OF THE MADISON LAKES,

By WILLIAM TRELEASE.

Every season a greenish-yellow scum occurs in greater or less quantity on

Third and Fourth Lakes (Mendota and Monona), during the hot weather of

summer, after the water has been calm for a number of days in succession. -

When but little of it is present, it appears as fine granules suspended in the

water, often scarcely visible to the naked eye except as they reflect the

light, when they call to mind the dancing motes in a beam of sunlight.

Under the influence of a gentle, but continuous breeze, these particles are

collected into fleecy masses, and driven ashore, so that they accumulate

along the margin of the lake, forming a slimy scum which quickly putre-

fies, giving off a very disagreeable odor. During this change, its color

changes to a decided blue-green, which stains the pebbles, sticks, etc., over

which it is smeared. The appearance of this scum is sometimes spoken of

as the working of the lakes, from a resemblance to the collection of a scum

on cider, etc., when fermenting, or, as an American idiom expresses it,

‘* working.”

Usually the scum is seen in small quantity and only attracts attention

for a day or two at a time, in midsummer, when it collects on the city side

of the lake; for a change in the direction of the breeze, or a brisk wind

from any quarter usually scatters it in a short time. In the summer of

1882, however, the working of the lakes was noticed early in June, and on

the 17th of that month enough scum had collected along the city shore of

Fourth Lake to prevent boating. The odor which it gave off was notice-

able at a distance of one or two blocks from the water. After afew days

a change in the wind brought relief for a time, but the trouble was renewed

at frequent intervals until the middle of November. The first formation

of this scum was apparently traceable to the long, shallow bay between

Picnic and Second Points, in Fourth Lake, and to the bay at the west end

of Third Lake, from which it was scattered by winds, and afterward in-

creased everywhere.

In the summer, during calm weather, the water within a foot or two of

the surface was everywhere filled with the minute granules already referred

to. In places where counter currents met, as off Picnic Point, these were col-

lected ina local surface film, While this appearance lasted the fish in the lake

bit very little. On several occasions white bass were found in large schools

122 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

off the points, jumping under films of this nature, apparently at the glisten-

ing air-bubbles which were entangled at the surface; but though the entire

range of the fly-book was tried, they persistently refused the hook. In

other parts of the lake where there was little scum, the fish, especially

pickerel, bit more freely.

The floating bodies, which at times are as large as pin heads, have once

or twice been noticed as a cause of the dispersion of sunlight in a beautiful

manner. One calm, bright morning in the fall, a student while rowing,

observed a spectrum on the surface of the lake, which took the form of a

parabola, with its vertex at his boat. To another person on shore, the spec-

trum appeared nearly straight. The appearance was of the same nature as

the rainbow, and was apparently caused by refraction in the floating dots,

which slightly projected from the smooth surface of the water, that cov-

ered them with a thin film. A breeze quickly ended it.

The working of the lakes at Madison corresponds to what is known in

parts of Great Britain as the ‘‘ breaking” of small bodies of water. On the

continent, a similar scum is spoken of as water-bloom (Wasserbliithe,

Fleur d’ eau, Flos aque). In all these cases, the phenomenon depends

upon the multiplication of minute alge belonging to the group Cyano-

phycez, which usually accumulate suddenly and often disappear after a few

days, either temporarily or for the balance of the season. Sometimes the

bloom is said to disappear at nightfall, in quiet water, to re appear the next

morning. The futility of fishing at such times is generally recognized in

Europe, the common impression being that the fish are then sick. In this

connection it may be said, however, that the wholesale death of fish, es-

pecially perch, in Fourth Lake, during the summer of 1884, and the death

of numbers of whitefish every summer has apparently no connection with

the water bloom.

Thuret divided the Cyanophyceae into Chroococcaceae and Nostochineae;

the former with their cells not in chains; the latter with their cells placed

end to end, forming filaments. The Nostochineae have since been separ-

ated into several groups equivalent to the Chroococcaceae, but for our pur-

pose the simple division into the two main groups may be retained.

Of the Chroococcaceae, two are pre-eminent as forming water bloom: —

Clathrocystis aeruginosa and Coelosphaerium Kiitzingianum. The princi-

pal part of the scum first collected at Madison consisted of the former spe-

cies (Fig. 8), though the latter (Fig. 7) was also present.

What have usually been called Anabaena flos aquae and A. circinalis are,

in their several forms, the commonest of the Nostochineae that occur under

similar circumstances. A small part of the Madison scum of 1882 was

composed of sterile plants apparently of A. flos aquae, which, with a little

of asmaller Anabaena, occurred intermingled with the Clathrocystis and

Coelosphaerium. These species lasted through the summer, the scum which

they formed also containing not infrequent threads of Lyngbya nollei (Fig.

6), a few stellate plant hairs, and scattering grains of pine pollen. As the

The Working of the Madison Lakes. 123

season advanced, the larger Anabaena became relatively a trifle more abun-

dant, but for the most part remained sterile.

Examinations were not made for several weeks in August and September,

but on the 26th of September, when another sample was taken for the use

-of a laboratory class, the bloom consisted exclusively of the smaller Ana-

baena (Fig. 5), which I have called A. mendotae,' a species that continued

to appear on the shore at intervals until well into November.

M. Bornet, who was obliging enough to examine specimens of this alga

for me, writes as follows: ‘‘The Anabaena you have sent me belongs to

the sub-genus Dolichospermum Thwaites, in the sense in which it is

understood by Wittroch (Wittroch and Nordstedt: Algze exsiccatze, No. 496).

It appears to me new, and differs from all of the species which constitute

water-bloom in the tenuity of its threads, in the length of its articles and

the slenderness of its spores. It is only comparable to Limmochlide flos

aquae in the dimensions and configuration of the different vegetative and

reproductive organs. That you may compare it, I send a tracing from

analyses of authentic specimens of Nostoc fios aquae Lyngbya [Fig. 1],

Nostoc flos aquae Agardh [Fig. 2], and Anabaena circinalis Rabenhorst

[Fig. 3], which is the prototype of the species. Admitting that these three

plants are but forms of a single species, as may be inferred from the ob-

servations of Wittroch on Anabaena (Dolichospermum) hassallii, your alga

still differs from all of them, and is, especially, very distinct from the Ana-

baena circinalis of Rabenhorst.”

As a general thing, protracted heat precedes the appearance of the

water-bloom, which is most frequent in sluggish or stagnant bodies of

water, especially such as are fed by the outlets of bogs, hence the phenom-

enon is most frequently noticed in mid-summer or later: yet the abundance

of the scum in June 1882, shows that a very short period of warmth may

suffice for its formation, as the early part of the spring was cold, and there

had been but few hot days when it appeared.

Unlike the majority of the alge implicated, Limnochlide flos aquae

thrives exceptionally well in cold water, and has even been found luxur-

iating in the greatest abundance in ice.? Anabaena mendotae, which first

became really abundant after the disappearance of Clathrocystis coelos-

phaerium and the larger Anabaena, and lasted until not only the air but

the lake itself had become quite cold, appears to resemble it somewhat in

this respect.

During the summers of 1883 and 1884, I was absent from the city, but I

1 Anabaena (Dolichospermum) mendotae, n. sp -—Threads circinate. Vegetative cells

Slender, usually elongated, especially towards the ends of the filaments, 3-4 & 4.5-12 be

Heterocysts ellipsoidal or barrel-shaped, 4.5 & 6-7.5 44, Spores remote from the heterocysts

slender, more or less curved, 4.5-7.5 )< 20-40 /4, bluish-green, like the vegatative cells (Fig. 5)

Forming a copious water-bloom on Lake Mendota, at Madison, Wis., especially abundant

in the fall.

? Magnus: I. c.

124 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

am informed that though some water-bloom occurred, and at times be-

came offensive, especially in the latter summer, it was less abundant than

in 1882. In 1885 but little was seen. Once or twice toward the end of July

the scum accumulated in small quantity, but was quickly dispersed by a

change in the wind, and it was not until nearly the middle of August that

I was able to collect specimens. On the 10th of August quite a quantity

was noticed floating in sheltered places along the University shore, and in

the lee of Picnic Point, and more was seen off the shore toward Merrill’s

Springs, where it had stained the rocks somewhat. This consisted entirely

of the Anabcena represented in figure 4, In good fruit.

After a warm spring, on my return to Madison, June 6, 1887, I observed

a considerable quantity of putrid scum on the shore of Fourth Lake, but a

south wind scattered it before specimens were obtained. The succeeding

fortnight was hot, and after a couple of calm days, succeeding a strong

wind from the northwest, the southern half of the lake was filled with sus-

pended particles about a millimeter in diameter. These consisted exclus-

ively of Anabeena hassallii, already in full fruit, the spores with the cus-

tomary Sphaerozyga arrangement, in a collection made June 20th. Subse-

quently to this date very little water-bloom was seen, and during the en-

tire summer the lake remained unusually free from it until September 7,

when I left the city.

The water-bioom of 1886 was also slight. Floating specimens collected

in the latter half of August consisted of fruiting plants of the larger Ana-

baena, similar to figure 4, with a small quantity of Lyngbya nollet.

The naming of this larger Anaboena has been attended with ‘some diffi-

culty. The first specimens collected, which were sterile, were referred to

a form of A. flos-aquae; but the subsequent collection of material in fruit

has shown that this reference was incorrect, if A. flos-aquae is understood

to be characterized by globose or sub-globose spores,! remote from the

heterocysts, and hence referable to the sub-genus Trichormus. It is, how-

ever, identical with the Nostoc jflos-aquae of Lyngbya of Dr. Bornet’s sketch

(fig. 1), which would be referred to the sub-genus Spheerozyga, and agrees

essentially with the type of A. hassallii. I should, therefore, refer our

plant to A. hassallii. According to Wittrock, this species varies in the

relative position of spores and heterocysts. as widely as the three figures

furnished by Dr. Bornet. Among our Madison specimens, none have been

found with the spores remote from the heterocysts, but the spores are not

infrequently solitary, as noted by Rabenhorst.?

About the middle of August 1886, while rowing across Second Lake

(Waubesa), south of Madison, my attention was attracted by very numer-

ous yellowish-green spherules about 1 mm. in diameter, floating at all

depths in the water. These proved to be small fronds of Glocotrichia

1 Cf. for example, Cooke: Fresh-Water Algee, p. 235, pl. 93, f. 1.

2 Rabenhorst: Flora Europea alg. aq. dulce. et submar. IT., 195.

The Working of the Madison Lakes. 125

pisum. Each consists of a mass of tapering threads arranged radially in a

gelatinous matrix, from the surface of which their apices protrude more

or less, often rendering the surface bristling. The base of each filament is

occupied by a heterocyst, followed by a slender cylindrical spore, above

which come a series of vegetative cells gradually decreasing in diameter,

until they form a slender colorless point.

This species has been reported from time to time in Europe,

under a number of names, and has recently been discussed at

some length by Bornet and Flatanet. According to Arthur,

who studied a sterile form occurring in certain Minnesota

lakes, it is believed to be poisonous to cattle that drink the

water containing it. Usually itis found without spores, but,

as I learn from M. Bornet, it can readily be kept in the aqua-

rium for several months, during which time the sterile forms

usually produce spores.

Frequenters of the seashore are familiar with a slime of a

bright peach-color that is abundant in midsummer in and

about stagnant pools in salt marshes. This is of the same

nature as the scums already referred to, and is caused by

what is generally called Clathrocystis roseo—persicina, a plant

related to the chroococcaceae, but destitute of chlorophyll,

and recently transferred to the bacteria, and placed under the

genus Beggiatoa, by Zopf.. Species of Trichodesmium, Spiru-

lina, Lyngbya, Oscillaria’ etc., which usually grow at first on

the bottom, frequently break free and float in a gelatinous

film of a yellowish, blue-green, violet or reddish color; and

diffiused threads of some of the species of these genera more

rarely form a true water-bloom? Limnochlide flos aque is also

a common Nostochineous species that forms a water-bloom.

In Europe, water is occasionally fouled, if not discolored, by

Leptomitus lacteus, one of the Saproegnicee, and Crenothrix

Kithniana, one of the bacteria closely related to Beggiatoa.

Beggiatoa alba is also abundant in sulphur springs, hot ditches

and stagnant bays, but is usually attached to the bottom, float- Grororrica1s

ing only exceptionally. Fertile thread,

Certain species of Peridiniwm and Euglena, which have been (X 580.)

regarded as infusoria until recently, but are now classed by Klebs with the

algee, are quite frequent on the water and mud of stagnant ditches, etc.,

in spring, imparting to it a bright red or green color. A species of the

1 The largest of these, Oscillaria princeps Vauch, with filaments 50-57 ,, in diameter, is

found floating in such masses every season in a brook near the city.

2 Thavein my herbarium a specimen of Oscillaria (or Beggiatoa), diffusa Farlow, the oscil -

lating threads of which, composed of cells 4-5 jin diameter and 2-4 4, long, gave a pro-

nounced purple color to the water of Jamaica Pond, Mass., in the spring of 1884, as I am in-

‘formed by Dr. Farlow.

126 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

former genus was so abundant in the drinking water of Baltimore as to-

attract attention in midwinter, a few years since.!

In closing, a word may be added concerning certain objects to some ex-

tent resembling green tomatoes, that have been noticed a number of times

on the bottom of the shallower parts of Third Lake, and of the larger pools.

along the railroads. These are of rounded form, more or less lobed, and

of a pale bluish-green color. Their texture is rather firm, so that they

retain their form when taken from the water, though they may be easily

crushed to a formless mass of jelly, and when exposed to the air for a few

days dry down into a thin film.

These bodies are colonies of Nostoc verrucosum Vauch., one of the Nos--

tochinez, which is also found in the old world. Under the microscope

they are seen to consist of numerous contorted threads of a blueish-green

color, imbedded in a colorless jelly that holds them together and gives form

to the frond.

The following list of papers referring to the water-bloom is confessedly

incomplete, but it will serve as a nucleus for other references. Only the

principal papers treating of the recurrence of bacteria in quantity have

been included; other references may be obtained from them. It should be

added that comparatively few of the papers referred to have much botani-

cal value.

On the flora of ice and snow fields, in Alpine and Arctic regions, which

often produces striking color effects, see Wittrock, in Nordenskiold’s Stu-

dien und Forschungen, veranl. d. meine Reisi im hohen Norden, Leipsic,.

1885, where a bibliography of the subject is given.

The diatomaceous origin of the discoloration of Arctic seas is discussed.

by Robert Brown, in the Transactions of the Botanical Society of Edin-

burgh, IX, 1867-8.

Archer: An Oscillaria of Australian seas occurring in large quantities.

(Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., XVII, 214; Bot. Johresb., VI, I, 403).

Arthur: A supposed poisonous seaweed in the lakes of Minnesota. Proc..

Am, Ass. Adv. Sc., 1888, XX XIT, p. 805 — abstract.

Arthur: Some Algze of Minnesota supposed to be poisonous. (Bull. Minn.

Acad. Nat. Sci., XI, 3; Fourth Rep. Univ. Minnesota, suppl. i, Rept. Dept.

Agr., 1887, 97.

Arthur: Second Report on some Algze of Minnesota supposed to be poison-

ous. Fcurth Report Univ. of Minn., suppl. i, 109.

Berkeley: Gleanings of British Algee. (Supplement to Sowerby’s English.

Botany, 1883).

Bornet & Flahanet: Sur la determination, des rivulaires qui forment des

fleurs d’eau. (Bull Soc. Bot. de France, 1884, 76.)

1 As this is going to press, I notice a record of the occurrence of certain zoospores in such

quantity as to cause a water-bloom (De Toni, Shrovo Gion, Bot. Italiano, xx. 295), in which

references are given to several othor Italian papers on this subject.

The Working of the Madison Lakes. 127

Braun: Ueber Chytridium, eine Gattung einzelliger Schmarotzerge-

wachse auf Algennnd Infusorien (p. 50). Abhandl. Berlin, Akad., 1885, 21).

Cohn: Ueber zwei Folle von sogenanliiter wasserbiithe durch Algen ver-

anlasst. (Sitzber. bot. sect. Schles. Ges fiir Vat. Culture, Nov. 15, 1877;

Hedingia, 1877, 188; Bot. Jahresb., v, 31).

Cohn: Rivulanria flintaus ad int. (Hednigia,1878, 1; Bot. Jahresb., vi., 1,.

402).

Cohn: Untersuchungen tiber Bacterien. Verwandschaft von Asco-

coccus mit Chroococcaceen. (Beite. zur Biol der Pflanzen, I., 3, 155 et

seq.).

Cooke: (British Freshwater Algae, 285, 237, 240, 249, 2'78).

Cooke: Breaking of the meres. (Grevillea, X., 111; Am. Monthly

Micro. Journal, IIT., 94; Bot. Jahresbericht, X., 1, 330).

Coppinger: Oceanic phenomena. (Nature, XXIII., 482; Bot. Jahresber.

IX, 1, 370).

Dichie: Botanist’s Guide to Aberdeen, 1880, 310.

Dolley: Ona cilio-flagellate infusorian recently observed in Baltimore

drinking water. (Johns Hopkins Univy. circulars, III., 60).

Drummond: On anew Oscillatoria, the coloring substance of Glaslough

Lake, Ireland. (Ann. Nat. Hist., I., 1).

Ehrenberg: Antbeil mikroskop. Organismen am Verschlammen der

Seehafen in Wisman und Pillau sowie am Schlich des Flussbettes der Elbe,

und tiber die Miteverbung ahnlichen Erscheinung an der Bildung des Nil-

bodens. (Monatsber. Berlin, Akad., 1841, 127; 201).

Farlow: On certain algein Hom Pond. (Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.,

XIX., 47; Bot. Jahresber. VII., 1, 460).

Farlow: Remarks on some algze found in the water supplies of the city

of Boston. Bull. Bussey Inst., Jan., 1877).

Farlow: Paper on some impurities of drinking water. (Rept. Mass.

Board of Health, etc., I., 131.)

Farlow: Notes on fresh water alge. Bot. Gay., VIII., 224, 246.

Farlow: Relation of certain forms of alge to disagreeable tastes and

odors. Proc. Am. Ass. Ady. Sc., XX XII., 1885, 306.— Abstract.

Farlow: On the nature of the peculiar reddening of salted codfish dur-

ing the summer season. (Rept. U. S. Fish Commission, 1878, 969). See

also Revue Mycologique, VI., 197, VIT, 17).

Farlow: Vegetable parasites of codfish. (Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., VI.,

1, 1886).

Fleischer: Uber ein massenhaftes Aufstreten von Protococcus roseo-

persicinus Ktz. (Hedingia, II., 37.

Francis: Poisonous Australian lake. (Nature, XVIII, 11; Bot. Jahresb.,

VI., 1, 402).

Giard: Etude sur une bactérie chromogéne des laux de rouessage du lin,

Rey. Sci. Nat., V. Jide Zopf.

128 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Girod Chantrans: Recherches chemiques et microscopiques sur les con-

ferves, etc. (Paris, Ann., x.— Vide Schultz, 495).

Gobi: Mittheilungen tiber Rivularia flos aquae Gobi. (Arbeiten Ges.

Naturf., St. Péetersb., X.; Bot. Zeitung, 1880, 478).

Gobi: Ueber eine die Erscheinung der Wasserbliithe im Meerwasser her-

vorrufende Rivularia. (Hedingia, 1878, 33.— Nachtrag. l. ¢., 49; Bot. Jah-

resber., VI., 1, 402).

Harz: Ueber die im veriflossenen Jahre beobachtete Triibung des Schlier-

seewassers. Bot. Centralblatt, 1887, XXX, 286, 331.

[Hitchcock]: Water colored by Algae. (Amer. Monthly Micr. Journal,

III., 94).

Humboldt: Bericht uber die natur hist. Reisen der Herrn Ehrenberg und

Heimpridt.— vide Schultz, 495.

Magnus: Das Auftreten von Aphanizomenon flos aquae (L.) Ralfs in Hise

bei Berlin. (Ber. deutschen Bot. Gesellsch., I., 3, 129; Bot. Jahresb. 6,

XI., 1,298).

Montague: Mémoire sur le phénomeéne de la coloration des eaux de la

Mer. Rouge. (Comptes rendus, July 15, 1844; Ann. Sci. Nat., Ser. 3, II.,

332).

Montague: Note sur un nouveau fait de coloration des.eaux de la mer par

une algue microscopique. (Comptes rendus, Dec. 16, 1846; Ann. Sci. Nat.,

Ser. 3, VI., 262).

Montague: Resumé succinct des observations faites jusqui ici sur la rube-

faction des eaux. (Mém. Soc. de Biologie, I., 59).

Olivier: Recherches sur la rubéfaction naturelle de Peau. (Bull. Soc. bot.

de France, 1881, 216).

Pavesi: Faune pélagique des lacs de Teasin et @’ Italie. (Archives des Sci.

phys, et nat., Geneva. Ser. 3, [V., 151; Bot. Jahresb., VIII., 1, 538).

Phillips: Breaking of the meres. (Grevillea, IX., 41).

Phillips: The breaking of the Shropshire meres. (Trans. Shropshire

Archaeol. and Nat. Hist. Soc. [1884 ?], 1).

Ralfs: On the Nostochineae. (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., Ser. 2, V.

821).

Ray Lankester: On a peach-colored Bacterium. (Quart. Journ. Micr.

Sci., n. s., XIII., 408).

Ray Lankester: Further observations on a peach or red-colored Bac-

terium. (Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s., XVI).

Richter: Ueber die in den Enterichelungskries von Beggiatoa roseo-

persicino geborenden seitheirgen Algenspecies. (Hedingia, 1884, 177).

Richter: Microcystis Kiitz., ein einzuziehendes Algengenus. (Hedingia,

1885, 18).

Schneider: Mittheilung tiber die griinen und gelben Streifen in dem

Meer von Java. (Naturk. Tydskr f. ned. Indie, 1878, XX XIII., 302; Lotos,

1875, 63; Bot. Jahresber., III, 41).

Schnetzler: Ueber eine rothe Tarbung des Bretsees (lac de Bret), Bot.

‘Centralblatt, 1887, XXCXI., 219.

Taine. (is, Mant Sy Abie B2 lies. Vor. VI. Pate X

The Working of the Madison Lakes. | 129

Schultz, C. H.: Die Fortpflanzung und Ernéhrung du Pflanzen, 1828,

495.

Stalher. Report on the Waterville cattle disease (see Arthur). Fourth

Rep. Univ. Minnesota, Suppl. 1, Rep. Dep. Agr. St. Paul, 1887, p. 105.

Thompson: An Alga which colors Ballydrain Lake (Ann. Nat. Hist.,

1840, 75).

Treichel: Ueber Polycystis aernginosa Kiitz, als Ursache von roth

gefarbtem Trinkvasser, (Ber. 2 Versamml. Westpreuss. Bot. Zool. Vereins

zu Marienweider, am 22 Juni 1879.— fide Bor. Jahresber., VII., 1, 486).

Weisse: Monas Oheini. (Bull. Phys. Math. Acad. St. Petersburg, III.,

310).

Weisse: Zereite Verzeichniss St. Petersb. Infusorien. (Bull. Phys. Math,

Acad. St. Petersburg, III., 333).

Wittrock: Anabaena (Dolichospermum) Nassallii (Kiitz, ) Wittr. (Wittroch

& Nordstedt’s Algae aqz dulcis exsiccatz, No. 496; Bot. Notiser, 1882, 58;

Bot. Jahresb. X. 1, 330; XI. 1, 244, 280.)

Wolle: Fresh Water Algz. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, VIII.,88; and Fresh

Water Algz of the United States, Bethlehem, 1887.— various places.

Wood: Contribution to the history of the fresh water algze of North

America, p. 39, etc. (Smithsonian Contributions, 1872).

Zopf: Die Spaltpilze, 1883, 74 et. seg., where other references concerning

Beggiatoa, etc., are given.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE X.

1—4. Anabaena hassallii (Kg.) Witty.

1. Filament of Nostoc flos aquae Lyngb. (< 580). From a sketch kindly

furnished by Dr. Bornet.

2. Filament of Nostoc jflos aquae Ag. (< 580). From sketch by Dr.

Bornet.

3. Filament and spore of Anabaena circinalis Rab. (X 580). From trac-

ing by Dr. Bornet, from analyses of Algen Sachsens, No. 209.

4. Fertile filament and two mature spores of Anabaena (sphaerozyga)

Jlos aquae (Lyngb.) (< 580). From Lake Mendota.

5. Two filaments and mature spore of Anabaena mendotae Trelease.

(< 580). From Lake Mendota.

6. Part of filament of Lyngbya wollei Farlow. (580). From Lake

Mendota.

7. Coelosphaerium Kiitzingianum Noeg. From Lake Mendota. —a.

Fronds (x 25). 6. Group of cellsas seen from the surface (580). ¢. Cells

as seen in radial section of frond (>< 580).

8. Clathrocystis aeruginosa (Kittz). From Lake Mendota.—a. Frond

(< 25). 6. Single cells (x 580).

130 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

THE VILLAGE COMMUNITY AND SERFDOM IN ENGLAND.

By Pror. WM. F. ALLEN.

The existence of village communities with collective ownership of land,

in England, isa fact of comparatively recent discovery. Long after von Mau-

rer and the writers of his school had submitted the subject to an exhaustive

investigation, in relation to the Teutonic countries of the continent, it was

believed that England afforded no examples of the system. The eye of the

American traveler upon the continent is constantly struck by the ribbon-

like strips which almost everywhere testify to a system of occupation and

cultivation of land differing widely from that of his own country; while in

England the fields, of irregular size and shape —although enclosed with

hedges instead of stone walls and rail fences — are precisely what he is fa-

miliar with at home. It was only after the inquiry was, so to speak, com-

pleted for the continent, that a German scholar, Prof. E. Nasse, of Bonn,

took it up in relation to England, and showed that here, too, the system

of village communities, with an open-field system of husbandry, was the

prevailing one during the middle ages.!

The line of inquiry entered upon by Prof. Nasse in the work referred to,

was shortly after followed out by Sir Henry Maine in his ‘“‘ Village Com-

munities,” (1871); and more recently Mr. Frederick Seebohm, in his

** English Village Communities,” (1883), has given a description and analy-

sis of this institution which could not be surpassed in thoroughness and

lucidity. Since the publication of this work, in 1883, there has no longer

been any room for difference of opinion as to the existence of village com_

munities in England, or indeed as to their organization in almost the small-

est detail. A new controversy has, however, been suggested by his work.

Mr. Seebohm holds that these villagescommunities were not, in their origin,

groups of free peasant proprietors, reduced by gradual steps to a condition

of serfdom, as the accepted theory maintains, but that serfdom was their orig-

inal condition, there having been no essential change in this respect from the

first settlement of England down through the feudal period. This view is

closely connected with Mr. Seebohm’s theory of the primitive aristocracy of

1See his treatise, translated and published by the Cobden Club: The Agricultural Com-

munity of the Middle Ages, and Inclosures of the Sixteenth Century in England. Lon-

don: Williams & Norgate, 1872.

Village Community and Serfdom in England. 131

the Germanic nations, which I discussed ina former paper.’ Holding that

serfdom was the original condition of the mass of the German people, he

naturally holds that the same was true of the English settlers. Andit must be

conceded that, if his theory is true for Germany, it must perforce be true

for England, while the converse does not hold. To prove the primitive democ-

racy of the Germans does not prove a primitive democracy for the English,

for the reason that their migration and conquest of a foreign land may

have worked a fundamental change in their social institutions.

The question to be considered is, it will be seen, not whether the village

community existed or not; that has been placed beyond controversy by

Messrs. Nasse and Seebohm. It is, whether it was afree or a serf commun-

ity; and the question resolves itself at once into a larger one, as to the

origin of serfdom in England. This will form the subject of the present

paper.

It has generally been held that serfdom in England was in part at least

the result of a gradual deterioration in the condition of an originally free

peasantry — that while no doubt some serfs were in their origin emancipated

slaves, and others conquered Britons, while others again were brought over

as serfs by the English conquerors; nevertheless the largest portion of

them were the descendants of the conquerors themselves, the rank and file

of the invading armies, who had sunk by degrees to a condition not much

above that of the native Britons. This view is disputed by Mr. Seebohm.

According to him there was no large body of free Germans, but the invad-

ing armiesavere composed of chieftains with servile followers, whom they

settled at once as serfs upon their estates. The manorial system of the

middle ages, therefore, existed from the first; the free Angle or Saxon was

the lord of the manor, or thegn, the serfs whom he brought with him, or

found already upon the soil, were the same body as the villeins of the

feudal period.

His line of argument is as follows: Finding serfdom to be the condition

of the peasantry in the middle ages in association with the village com-

munity, he traces both institutions back by an inductive process of remark-

able ingenuity and cogency, to the reign of Alfred, at the beginning of the

tenth century, at which point of time he shows that the condition of the

peasantry did not differ essentially from what it was in the reign of Ed-

ward I., four hundred years later. #Further back than this he is not able

to go with the same thoroughness of detail, for the want of documentary evi-

dence; he finds, however, passages in the laws of the seventh century which

appear to support his view, and maintains that if we find no change in

tracing the institution back six hundred years to the time of these laws,

we should not be likely to find any change if we could trace it Lack still

further for the much shorter period of two hundred years or so, to the first

settlement of the Angles and Saxons in Britain. This argument isstill fur-

ther strengthened by the assertion that serfdom not merely existed in the

1 See Transactions of the Wisconsin Academy, Vol. VI.

132 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

tenth century (and probably in the eighth) as well as in the thirteenth

but that it was more complete and harsh at the earlier date than at the

latter. If these conclusions are correct, if the agricultural population of

England was in a condition of serfdom uninterruptedly from the eighth cen-

tury to the thirteenth, and if its early form was more severe that its later,

he must be admitted to have made out his case.

As to the first point, it should be noted that he has proved the existence

of serfdom only as far back as the tenth century; its existence at an earlier

date is only an inference, partly from analogy, partly from evidence which,

as will be shown further on, proves the existence of the open-field system

of husbandry, but not of serfdom. The positive evidence goes no

further back than the time of Alfred. Now the interval between Alfred

and the original settlement of the Anglo-Saxons in Britain is just about as

long (400 years) as that between Alfred and Kdward I.; moreover, it is an

important consideration that the years directly following the conquest

would be likely to witness far more rapid and radical changes than the

ater period.

The second point in his argument, that serfdom is found to be more

harsh in its type as we trace it further back in time, requires a careful ex-

amination, being opposed to the accepted view, and resting upon evidence

of a rather doubtful character. We have numerous documents belonging

to various point of time from the tenth to the thirteenth century, which

contain a detailed enumeration of the duties and obligations of serfs, as

well as the amount of land they held. Now the obligations, so.far as they

are specifically enumerated, are much more numerous and burdensome at

the later period than at the earlier: but, at the earlier date, we find, in ad-

dition to the snecific obligations, such general and indefinite ones as: ‘‘ to

work as the work requires,” and ‘‘ every week do what work they are bid.”

In such general and unlimited obligations as these, he says, consists the

essence of servitude.

This argument requires that the obligations, beginning in the tenth

century with unlimited liability to labor, should go on regularly lessening

in amount and becoming easier through the feudal period. The contrary

is, however, the case. Leaving out of account for the present the indefi-

nite expressions just cited, to which we shall return presently, we find the

precisely enumerated obligations to be less in the tenth century than in the

twelfth, and in the twelfth century again to be less than in the thirteenth.

That is, while there is an uninterrupted continuity through these four hun-

dred years in the organization of the peasantry and the general character of

their obligations, these obligations, as specified in detail, appear to have

been steadily increasing during this period. Even the example given by

Mr. Seebohm (p. 157), of the manor of Tidenham at the two periods, sus-

stains this view, except for the phrase, ‘‘ work as the work requires,” at the

earlier period; and a comparison of the duties specified in the Rectitudines

singularum personarum with the numerous descriptions in the Rotuli

Village Community and Serfdom in England. 133

hundredorum or the Cartularies in the reign of Edward J., shows a much

larger amount of required labor at the later period.'

In one instance we have positive evidence in detail of this increase in

burdens. The residents of Weston, in Bedfordshire, made a complaint to

the officers of Edward I. that, in the reign of his grandfather, King John,

they were accustomed to labor in autumn only for three harvest days, on

which days they were provided with food at their lord’s table, one day of

fish and two of meat. But William de Bokland, to whom King John

granted the estate, increased the aforesaid service by one additional day, at

the lord’s table. Afterwards the aforesaid manor came to John Tregoz, who

augmented the service to such a degree that now they perform ten days’

work in autumn at their own providing, and one day besides.? Here we

have on record an actual example of an abuse of power by the feudal lord,

in increasing the burdens of his serfs, such as we must suppose to have

been common in those evil days. Itisa significant point that the extortions

here described were not the work of one man, but of three successive pro-

prietors.

As to the phrase in question—to do ‘‘ every week what work they are

bid” —it is best explained as a general authority to call upon them when

there was need, with an understanding that no unreasonable demands

should be imposed upon them. In this respect this obligation resembles

the feudal aids and tallages, which also were levied at discretion, but were

understood to be only occasional, and implied nothing servile in the relation.

Feudal aids and tallages were nevertheless liable to abuses and extortion

by reason of their indefiniteness, and were at last defined by law. So in

like manner the indefinite obligations in question gave opportunity for ar-

bitrary exactions, like those in the manor of Weston, described above. It

may have been the case, too, that such obligations as these were not uni-

versal, but peculiar to such and such an estate. The tenth century docu-

ment, Rectitudines singularum personarum, says distinctly that the

obligations vary, being lighter here and heavier there; but what it describes

as the usual ones are much less in amount than what was common in the

1 Compare, for the earlier period, the Rectitudines singularum personarum, the Codex

Diplomaticus, No. 977, and the illustration given by Mr. Seebohm, p. 157: for the twelfth

century, the Domesday of St. Paul, and the Abingdon Cartulary, Vol. II, p. 301; for the

close of the thirteenth century the documents are very abundant, the most numerous ex-

amples being in the Rotuli Hundredorum and the Gloucester Cartulary, Vol. IIT.

2In tempore Regum Henrici et Johannis dicti homines non consueyerunt operari in au-

tumpno nisi tantum tres messes in quibus diebus debebant exhiberi in cibis et potibus ad

mensam domini una die in esu piscium et aliis duabus in esu carnium. Postmodum Willelmus

de Boclond augmentavit dictum servicium et per ipsum crevit per unam diem messis ad

mensam domini. Postmodum Hamo le Crevequer tenuit dictum manerium in eodem statu

toto tempore. . . Item deinde venit dictum manerium ad manus Johannis Tregoz qui praedic-

tum servicium augmentavit in tantum quod modo fiunt decem operaciones in autumpno ad

mensam suam. Item praeter istam operacionem exigitur ab hominibus praedictis una

water-bederipe et fit. Et tune bibunt aquam, et hoc crevit primo per dictum Hamon,

ete. Rotuli Hundredorum, i. 6.

134 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

thirteenth century. It should be noted also that the Rectitudines speaks

distinctly of the tenants in question as freemen.

I cannot, therefore, concede to this part of Mr. Seebohm’s argument the

weight which he claims for it. He does not seem to me to have proved that

the obligations were less in the thirteenth century than in the tenth; on the

other hand the evidence seems to me to lean strongly the other way. But

he has proved, and it is a fact of great importance, that the character of

the obligations, and the status of the peasantry, did not, so far as our infor-

mation goes, differ essentially in the tenth century from what we find in

the thirteenth. It is, therefore, perfectly legitimate on his part to infer

that this condition of the peasantry, found alike in the thirteenth and in

the tenth century, probably existed in the earlier centuries also. The infer-

ence is, however, only a probable one, in the absence of direct evidence, and

direct evidence is wanting. For the period before the time of Alfred, he is

obliged to have recourse to indirect evidence, in the assumption that serf-

dom and the ‘‘ open-field husbandry ” went together.

Up to this point he has traced the open-field system and serfdom step by

step, accompanying each other hand in hand. Beyond this point he is not

able to trace serfdom, but the open-field system is traced back at least two

centuries further, and he says that, as it has always carried serfdom with it

in the later period, it may fairly be assumed to do the same thing in the

earlier period. ‘‘ The community in villenage,” he says (p. 105) “‘ fitted into

the open field system asa snail fits intoasheil.” But it is by no means

clear that a free community might not have fitted into this shell equally well,

as, indeed, the prevailing theory holds. The only argument to prove that

the community could not have been a free one is (p. 177) that the Teutonic

custom of dividing estates equally among heirs would have led to endless

and intricate subdivisions of land. But this is exactly what we find to have

been the case. The virgate or ‘‘ yard-land,” which he assumes to have been

the regular peasant’s holding, and which as a matter of fact was the usual

one in the thirteenth century, was the fourth part of a hide; and it is gen-

erally held that the hide, not the virgate, was the original holding. And at

any rate, in the thirteenth century, we find tenures of half and quarter

virgates, and even smaller aliquot parts, by the side of the regular tenure of

the virgate;? exactly the condition of things which Mr. Seebohm says would

have come about.

To carry back, therefore, the open-field system to the seventh and sixth

1 Sicut omnis liber facere debet.

2For example, in the manor of Broctrope (Gloucester Cartulary, iii, p. 140), I find

among the freeholders two tenants holding entire virgates, and five holding half virgates;

and among the customary tenants one with a virgate, nine with half-virgates, two with quar-

ter virgates, and five with an amount of land equal toa sixteenth of a virgate, these dif-

ferences evidently coming from the sub-division of the original hide. For other examples,

see my paper on Rural Classes in the Thirteenth Century, Vol. II, of the Transactions of

the Academy: that the socage freeholds were originally servile holdings is shown in my

paper on the Origin of the Freeholders, Vol. IV, of the Transactions.

Village Community and Serfdom in England. 135

centuries, as Mr. Seebohm does by almost certain inference, is a valuable

contribution to our knowledge; but that serfdom went back with it is an

unwarranted inference. The question of freedom or serfdom is the funda-

mental one, that of land tenure or husbandry being really but secondary.

To this fundamental question of status, therefore, we will now apply our-

selves, leaving that of land occupation aside for the present.

At this point it must be conceded, as I have said before, that the exist-

ence of a large body of free peasants in the Germanic nations of the continent,

‘which I consider to be fully proved, does not necessarily prove the existence

of the same class in England. The Angles and Saxons settled forcibly and

very slowly in Britain, and it is not in itself impossible that the whole body

of the Conquerors became a landed aristocracy in their new home, estab-

lishing such a system of manors, with a population of serfs upon them, as

we find in later centuries. Thisis Mr. Seebohm’s view. But the probability

is the other way. The Angles and Saxons did not enter Britain as the Nor-

mans did afterwards, as a handful of conquerors, ruling over a subject

people. They came as a people, bringing their wives and children with

them, not as an army; and with regard to the Angles we are expressly

told! that they left vacant the country which they had formerly occupied

—the entire people having migrated. Moreover the native inhabitants

were as a people exterminated; in the eastern parts of the island their lJan-

guage, their religion, and so, far as we can judge, their institutions and

customs disappeared. If the invaders established a system of serfdom in

Britain, they must have brought the serfs with them, otherwise the servile

population would have had the preponderence of numbers, and the resulting

community would have been, asin the case of the Normansand the Franks,

the native population with an admixture of the conquerors, instead of — as

the language shows to have been the case — the conquering population with

’ an admixture of natives. Now the Germans had in their native land a

class of serfs called lidi or lazzi, and the Anglo-Saxon laws mention a similar

class called laet, whom we must suppose to have been the serfs (Jidi), brought

with them by the invaders. These Jaet, the serfs of the Anglo-Saxon

period, Mr. Seebohm suggests (p. 175), may have been identical with the

villani, who were the serfs of the later middle ages. This cannot, however,

be the case, as the villani are invariably identified with a quite different

class, the ceorls.

This brings us to the most fundamental question in the snbject under

consideration: Were the ceorls of the early period a free or a servile class?

Two things are entirely certain: first, that the Anglo-Saxon ceorls were the

villani of the Latin documents; secondly that the villani of the later mid-

dle ages were serfs. The point at issue is whether these ceorls were origin-

ally serfs, as Mr. Seebohm’s theory would require, or became serfs by a

gradual process of deterioration, as the common theory holds. I shall en-

1deilla patria quae Angulus dicitur, et ab eo tempore usque hodie desertus inter pro-

vincias Jutorum et Saxonum erhibetur. Beda. Hist. Eccl., i, 15.

136 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

deavor to show: first, that the ceorls of the early Anglo-Saxon period were

freemen; secondly, that the villani of the later period were not always serfs,

there being found some survivals of their original free condition.

The first thing to be noted is that, as has been already pointed out, there

was, in the early Anglo-Saxon period, a class known by the name of laet,

who were undoubtedly serfs, the lidi of the continent. They had below

them the slaves, esne and theow, and above them the ceorls. Now as the

ceorls certainly ranked above this servile class, it may be assumed that they

were themselves probably free. This probability is made stronger by the

consideration that the Saxons of the continent had a class of common free-

men intermediate between the lidi or serfs and the edelingi or nobles, a

class which has no representatives among the Anglo-Saxons unless in the

ceorls, the class under consideration. This class upon the continent was

called frilingi, and in Anglo-Saxon also we meet the friman (freeman)! al-

though this term is for the most part superseded in the early Jutish laws by

the Scandinavian word ceorls.

The probability is therefore that the ceorls were a free class. We will

proceed, however, to examine the actual uses of the word, in order to deter-

mine whether this probability is sustained by facts. First we will take up the

poems of Beowolf, a work which, whatever its date and place of composi-

tion. unquestionably presents the most ancient picture in existence of the

institutions, condition and manners and customs of the Anglo-Saxons. In

this poem I find the word ceorl six times. In none of these is it applied

to a servile class, or even used in a disparaging sense. Twice (vv. 416 and

2,972) it is used of princes; in three cases (vv. 202, 908, 1,591) of the people

in general, and in the sixth case (v. 2,444) of a man of the people. If it

has one meaning that could apply to all these cases, it is perhaps man.?

We pass next to the Anglo-Saxon codes of law. In the earliest of these

laws, those of Ethelbert of Kent (about 690) ceorl is several times used as

equivalent to man or even husband. It is also used to designate a legal

class below the King and eorl (officer). The King’s mundbyrd is placed at

50 shillings, the eorl’s at twelve, the ceorl’s at six. The ceorl was therefore

aman of standing. He even had other men under his protection. Section

16 speaks of his cup-bearer, birele, section 25 of his hlaf-aeta *‘ loaf-eater”

or dependent—the correlative of hlaford (lord) or ‘‘loaf-giver.” The

ceorl could therefore be the lord of another man. Section 17, following

directly upon the mention of the ceorls’ mundbyrd and birele, speaks of a

man’s tun or estate, as it has before spoken of the King’s and the corl’s tun;

1 Leg. Aeth. 24, 27, 29, 31.

21t should be noticed that in the Rigs-mal, the allegorical poem which treats of the ori-

gin of the Scandinavian classes, Karl (Ceorl) is the common freeman, “the red-haired and

ruddy cheeked lad with piercing eyes,” whose sons were ‘“‘ Freeman and Braveman, Hold,

Thane and Smith, Broadshoulders and Bonde [Peasant] ete. The corresponding German

word Kerl has a somewhat disparaging significatlon, while the English word churl is sig-

nificant of the degradation which the class sustained in England.

Village Community and Serfdom in England. 137

evidently the man here is the ceorl; the ceorl could therefore have an es-

tate of land.

The later laws of Kent contain nothing that adds to the evidence here

given. The next stage in the inquiry is the laws of Ine of Wessex, about

700, that is, about 100 years after those of Ethelbert, and 200 years after the

first settlement of Wessex. In these laws we find clear recognition of the

ceorls as a free class, inferior to the noble class of sithcundmen. The

ceorl’s fine for neglecting military duty is 30 shillings, that of the sithcund-

man being 60 or 120, according as he had land or not (§ 51). Now by Ger-

manic law none but freemen could render military service. Therefore the

ceorl wasa freeman. Again, in accusations of homicide, he is placed in re-

gard to compurgation on precisely the same footing with the sitheundman

(§ 54). On the other hand a certain degradation is clearly visible, in the

penalty of amputation of hand or foot, inflicted for certain offences

($§ 18, 37). It would appear also that the ceorl was already required, or at

least expected, as he certainly was afterwards required, to have a lord;

sections 37, 38 and 40 treat of the ceorl, and between them comes § 39, re-

ferring to ‘‘any one” running away from his lord — which would certainly

seem to mean ‘‘ any ceorl.”

There is another passage of the laws of Ine (§ 67), brought up by Mr. See-

bohm, asa proof of the existence of serfdom at this period, but which rather

shows that it was in the process of introduction, than that it was already

existent. I give his translation. ‘‘If a man agrees for a yard-land or

more at a fixed gafol (rent) and plough it, ‘if the lord desire to raise the

land to him to work and to gafol he need not take it upon him if the lord

do not give him a dwelling.” This statute testifies to the practice of ex-

action and encroachment by which tenants were converted into serfs, a

process well attested at this very period in the Frank monarchy. It is

clear that the peasants (assuming them to have been originally free), had

already in large part been reduced from proprietors to tenants, the lands

were rapidly being absorbed into large manorial estates, and by the same

process their proprietors were becoming tenants; the next step was to con-

vert them from free tenants into serfs.

At about this period—the close of the seventh century — belong the

earliest (except three or four) of the charters and land grants, which exist in

great abundance, and afford the most valuable material for the study of

early English social and economical relations. In them we find that the

grants consist regularly of estates with their tenants; and the size of the

1 The charters in question begin in the reign of Ethelbert of Kent, the first Christian king,

in the year 605. In all his charters the grants are merely of land—aliquantulum telluris

mei (a little bit of my land) Thorpe’s CodexDiplomaticus, No.1; aliquam partem terrae

juris mei (a certain part of the land under my jurisdiction), No. 2; villam nomine Sturigao

(an estate named Sturigaw.), No.4. A charter of hisson Eadbald (No. 5) says quandam

partem terrae regni mer, Xxx aratrorum (a certain part of the land of my kingdom,

30 plough-lands). It is not until the close of the century, that the land is defined as of so

many occupants; the first is (670) No.7, unum cassatum (one cottager). From this time

158 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

estates is regularly estimated by tenants — cassati, manentes, tributarii,

sometimes mansa and hida, all these terms being used as equivalent.! This

shows that the peasants were at this time largely tenants upon the estates

of others; it does not show that they were originally so, or that they were

serfs. That they were still personally free, although upon the point of los-

ing their freedom, is, I think, proved by the evidence which I have brought

up: it isa fair inference, from the analogy of other Germanic nations, that

their land was also originally their own, and this seems also to follow from

the mention of the ‘‘mannes tun” (Aeth., 17), when speaking of the ceorls.

After Ine’s laws, of about the year 700, there is a gap of nearly two hun-.

dred years, until the time of Alfred, in which reign the series of statutes

begins again, and continues in an unbroken succession until the conquest.

The most important change noted in the new series of laws after this inter-

val, is the uniformity and reiteration with which it is required that every

man must have a lord, and the rights of the lord are maintained

against the caprice of the man, or the rivairy of other lords. Omnis

homo habeat advocatum suum (every man shall have his surety) Edward, 1.:

non recipiat aliquis hominem alterius sine licentia illius (No person shall

receive the man of another without his permission), id. 7., are regulations

repeated in substance in nearly every body of laws. But notwithstanding

the rigid requirement of this submission to a lord, it appears that there still

survived a certain freedom of choice in the act: ne dominus libero homint

hlafordsoknam interdicat (let not the lord prohibit the free man to choose a

lord). Here the free status of the man is clearly implied; and in the laws of

Alfred we have a number of provisions testifying to the lawworthiness and

therefore original freedom of the peasants. S7 quis in ceorlisces mannes

flet gefeohte, i. e., in rusticanit hominis domus area pugnet Gf any one

fights in the court of a ceorl). Section 40. Ceorli eodorbrece, 7. e., rustict

sepis fractio (trespasses upon the enclosure of a ceorl), where the ceorl is

placed on the same footing as the king, the bishop, the alderman, etc.

Section 10 places the ceorl on the same legal footing with the twelfhynd

and sexhynd men, who were thegns. Section 25 speaks of ceorles mennen=

this is the universal method; but there are several expressions which show that it is still

the land, reckoned in peasants’ holdings, rather than the peasants themselves, that is con-

veyed by the grant. No. 8, (675) says quandam terram . . . . id est, decem manentes

(a certain piece of land . . . thatistosay, tentenants). No. 10, terram . . . xviti

manentes continentem (land containing eighteen tenants.) No. 12, centum manentes qui

adjacent civitati (100 tenants adjoining the city). No. 83 (691) terram . . . quadra-

inta quatuor cassatorum capacem (aud containing forty-four cottagers). No. 40, quadra-

ginta terrae illius manentes (forty tenants of that land); and, especially, No. 20, terra

super verticem montis. . . est sub estimatione sex manentium Gand on top of the mountain

reckoned to be of six tenants). In all these cases it is clear that measurements of land are

in question, and in the last instance it is apparently unoccupied land, roughly estimated

in terms of peasant holdings.

ve... oterram septies quinos tributariorum jugera continentem. Hst autem rus

praedictum in quatuor villulis separatum . . . quinque manentium . . . decem

cassatorum . . . decem mansionum . . . decemmanentiwm. Cod. Dipl. exi.

Village Community and Serfdom in England. 139

ceorles mancipium (the slave of a ceorl). Sections 11 and 85 are peculiarly

significant, as they aim to protect the ceorl and his wife against personal

violence; showing that, while they were still free in law, they were never-

theless on the road to serfdom, and were especially subject to abuse by the

powerful.

We have thus followed the word ceorl, and the class which it designates

(the peasants) from the earliest times down to the time of Alfred, exactly

the point of time which Mr. Seebohm reached, from the opposite direction,

As he traced the manorial organization and a servile peasantry step by

step from the time of Edward I. back to that of Alfred; so we have traced

a class of free peasants from the time of the original conquest down to the

reign of Alfred, and have found it gradually subjected to restrictions and

obligations which have converted it into a servile or semi-servile class.

Mr. Seebohm’s serfs were known as villani; the free peasants of the early

period were known as ceorls; and there is the most indisputable evidence

that these are the Latin and the Anglo-Saxon names respectively for the

same class; this class was the peasantry, who, by this evidence, appear to

have been at first freemen and afterwards serfs.

Undoubtedly there were manorial estates, with serfdom, in the earliest

times, existing by the side of the townships of free peasants, and following

the same system of open-field husbandry. On the other hand it appears

clearly that the entire class of peasants or ceorls was not reduced to servi-

tude. We could not be surprised if no free villani or free townships (ville)

were met with in the records, for it was only the proprietory townships, or

manors (especially those belonging to ecclesiastical proprietors), which had

a sufficiently systematic administration, and exercised sufficient care in

the preservation of documents, to afford adequate evidence as to their ex-

istence and condition. But asa matter of fact there is clear evidence of

free peasants and even of free townships in the feudal period. For example:

Alvarstoke in Hampshire, at the time of Domesday Brook (i. 41, b.) was

held by its own villani (ceorls), tenants of the convent of St. Swithin, of

Winchester. The number of villani was forty-eight, and there were no

slaves, or tenants of a lower grade (bordarii). Two hundred years later

their charter was confirmed by the prior of Winchester, to the effect ‘‘ that

they and their posterity (sequela) should be forever free and quit from

tallages, salt-rent, cherset of hens and eggs and pannage of hogs; should

be at liberty to make wills and dispose of their children and avers [averia=

beasts]; . . . all pleas except pleas of the crown should, by consent of

both parties, be pleaded and tried without delay in the court of Alwarstoke,

in the presence of the prior and his seneschal, according to the law and

customs of England, and the usage of the free tenants of the county.”

This document is fortified by the seal of the community, given by Sir

Frederic Madden in the Winchester volume of the Archeological Proceed-

ings as: Sigill: comune: hominum: prioris: Sci Swithuni: de Alwarestoke.

In 1841 an inquisition declares ‘‘ that there are no traders in Alverstoke,

140 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

and that all live by agriculture and hand labor.” Melebroc (Millbrook) in

the same county the Domesday record (i. 41, b.) gives as being held by

villani. Of Ibthorpe we are told: ‘‘ The people of Ibthorpe are lords of

their own manor and to this day exercise their manorial rights.”! It is

hard to explain these cases except as original village communities of free

peasants, who, in losing the ownership of their land and becoming ten-

ants, did not lose their freedom or their rights as a community.

I have shown that the Anglo-Saxon ceorls, or peasants, were in the sixth

and seventh centuries, that is the period directly following their migration

to England, not serfs but freemen, possessing houses, lands, serfs and slaves

of their own; that at the end of the seventh century, the period of the laws of

Ine, they are still distinctly recognized as freemen,. but as subject to certain

exactions and encroachments on the part of the more powerful classes,

which were reducing them to a semi-servile condition, in particular encour-

aging the practice of commendation, or placing themselves under the pro-

tection of a lord, and becoming his ‘‘ men;” and that in the time of Alfred

this practice of commendation had become universal and obligatory, and

their servile condition distinctly recognized.

In short, the history of the English peasantry in the Anglo-Saxon period,

corresponds very closely to that of the same class upon the continent in the

same period. In both England and Germany the free peasants appear to

have been forced, by the disorders and distresses of society to commend

themselves, or seek the protection of men higher in station than themselves,

The protection was not granted without some equivalent — service, follow-

ing, surrender of land to be given back again as tenure, requirements

of labor, becoming more and more onerous as the relation became more

and more fixed, until at last they were stripped not only of their pos-

sessions, but even of personal freedom, and reduced .to the state of

complete serfdom:—not so complete, however, in the case of the Eng-

lish peasants, but that the memory of their original freedom was preserved

in the principle that it was only in relation to their lords that they were

serfs, and that towards all others they were freemen, having well defined

rights before the law, and a recognized place in the constitution.

1 Antiquary, February, 1888.

Town, Township and Tithing. 141

TOWN, TOWNSHIP AND TITHING.

By Pror. WM. F. ALLEN.

The town is in many respects the most characteristic institution of the

political system of the northern states of the American Union, and of the

primitive constitution of the English people. It may be defined as a terri-

torial district, the inhabitants of which compose a body politic, small

enough to allow the immediate participation of all its citizens in the gov-

ernment of its local concerns, and forming an organic part of the structure

of the state. Its powers of local self-government.are not original and in-

herent, but derived from the larger body of which it forms a part; they are

nevertheless substantial and permanent, in this respect differmg from

those of the school districts or wards into which the town or city is divided.

The City under our system is only a larger and specially organized Town;

the Incorporated Village of New York and the West is a peculiar addition

to the Town system, not forming structurally a part of it.

The Town, as thus defined, is peculiar to England and the United States,

and, in its complete development, to the New England States. In all the

other Germanic countries the territorial division corresponding to the Town

stopped short of an independent political life, being, from the point of view

of the State, nothing but a private corporation for economical purposes,

with only inchoate functions as a body politic. In all these countries the

Hundred was the smallest district of a public character; just as in our

southern states the County is the agent of local self-government. But the

County and the Hundred are too large toallow the immediate participation

of all the citizens in the transaction of public business. The communities

in which these large districts are the only agent of local self-government

are necessarily aristocratic in their political character. It was the growth

of Feudalism, or the establishment of centralized monarchies, in the Ger-

manic countries of the continent, that checked the development of an in-

stitution corresponding to the English Town. In England the growth of a

landed aristocracy and of a centralized monarchical power were not early

or rapid enough to kill the germs of local self-government, although they

seriously interfered with its development.

The political functions of the English towns were so largely obscured

during the middle ages by the manorial or feudal organizations to which they

were subjected, that there have arisen some doubts as to their extent, and

even their existence. Bishop Stubbs, in his ‘‘ Constitutional History of

142 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

England” (Vol. i, p. 82), asserts that (¢n Anglo-Saxon times) ‘‘ the unit of the

constitutional machinery is the township, the villata or vicus.” This is the

view which I have already presented; but a review of Stubbs’ work in the

North American Review (July, 1874), understood to be by the then edi-

tor of the Review, Prof. Henry Adams, takes exception to the assertion,

saying that the township has no constitutional functions ‘‘ of any kind, sort

or description;” that the unit of the constitutional machinery in England,

as onthe continent, was the Hundred. ‘‘ The one permanent Germanic in-

stitution,” he says, ‘‘ was the Hundred. The one code of Germanic law

was Hundred law, much of which is now the common law of England.

The Hundred and its law survived all the storms which wrecked dynasties

and Witan. It was the foundation of the judicial constitution under the

couqueror as it had been under Cnut and Alfred.” The same view is re-

peated in Prof. Adams’ ‘‘.Essays on Anglo-Saxon Law,” p. 382.

That the hundred was the lowest political division in Germany, as Prof.

Adams asserts, admits of no doubt. This fundamental fact, together with

the non-political character of the lower territorial divisions, is perhaps best

formulated by Sohm,! who points out that the local governments in Ger-

many were purely private corporations, having no public character or func-

tions. But it does not follow that what was true of Germany was necess-

arily true of England. England, although a Germanic country, received

in many respects a different development from Germany; and it isthe essence

of Bishop Stubbs’ position that this was the case with the territorial organ-

ization below the Hundred. As the word ‘‘ town” (tun, tunscip) is peculiar

to England, so, it may be, is the thing designated by it. This distinction is

supported by Von Maurer, the writer of highest authority upon the genesis

of local institutions, who, in his Hinleitung zur Geschichte der Mark, Hof,

Dorf und Stadiverfassung (§145, p. 332), asserts that the English institu-

tions differed fundamentally from the German in this respect.’ When,

therefore, Prof. Adams says that such an institution as the one in question

“‘would be quite at variance with all that we know of German law,” he ap-

pears to stretch the argument from analogy further than is warranted. The

very question at issue is whether the development of English institutions

did not upon this point depart from German analogy.

I shall speak first of the territorial character of the English towns, and

then of their political character; and shall try to show that we are to seek

1 The following passage expresses Sohm’s theory with great fulness::Zwm grossen Nach-

theil der Gesammtauffassung nicht blos der Verhdltnisse des frdnkishen Reiches, sondern

der gesammten mittel-alterlichen Entwickelung wird die Thatsache in der Regel tibersehen,

dass, der Reichsverfassung der frdinkischen wie der deutschen, eine Ortsgemeindeverfassung

unbekannt ist. Die Reichsverfassung kennt keine weiteren Zwecke ausser denjenigen, deren

Realisirung in Gau und Hundertschaft vor sich geht .. . Die Ortsgemeindeverfassung ist aus

keinem anderen Grunde local fiir jede Ortsgemeinde verschieden, als weil die Ortsgemein-

deverfassung aus der autonomen Entwickelung der einzelnen Gemeinden hervorgegangen

ist. Die Ortsgemeindeverfassung ist Verfassung nur kraft Corporationsrechts, nicht

kraft Reichsrechts. Sohm, (Altdeutsche Reichs und Gerichtsverfassung, I, p. 231).

Town, Township and Tithing. 143

for analogies with them, not so much in the institutions of Germany, from

which those of England were in a sense derived, asin those of New Eng-

land, which are simply a continuation of those of England.

‘That the towns in England formed a compiete territorial system as sub-

divisions of the hundreds, needs no argument, as it is amply attested by

medizval writers and documents. It is a familiar fact that they were

regularly represented in the courts of the hundred and the shire. I will

also cite the authority of Chief Justice Fortescue, in his De Laudibus

Leguin Angliae, who says that the Shires or Counties were divided into Hun-

dreds, and the Hundreds into Towns or Vills (ch. xxiv). Hundreda vero divi-

duntur per villas. This language indicates clearly that ‘‘ towns” were in the

middle of the fifteenth century territorial divisions of the hundreds; that is,

that the entire area of the hundred, and therefore of the county, was di-

vided up into the areas of the several towns composing the hundred. And

this is still further shown by his going on to say that under the appellation

of towns, ‘‘ the cities and boroughs are included. For the boundaries of

these vills are not ascertained by walls, buildings or streets, but by a compass

of fields, large districts of land, some hamlets, and divers other limits, as

rivers, water-courses, woodlands and wastes of commons.” It is evidently

the intention of the writer in these words to contrast the English towns

with some other towns, the bounds of which are determined not by natural

objects, but by artificial ones; and this object of comparison can be only the

walled towns and cities of the continent, especially of France, the country

with which Fortescue constantly compares England. Attention is here

drawn to the important fact that, whereas upon the continent the munic-

ipal system was sporadic, the open country having no institutions of local

self-government proper, the English municipal system was continuous, em-

bracing the entire territory of the country. The borough was, as Bishop

Subbs says (vol. i, p. 92), ‘‘simply a more strictly organized form of the

township;” and the city a bishop’s seat, with borough organization. And

both borough and city made, as Chief Justice Fortescue says, a part of the

town system.

This town system was brought over to this country by our ancestors, and

put in operation in all the northern colonies. The town system of New

England, as a system of territorial areas, is the town system of medizval

England; and when the people of New England had outgrown the town

system in its primitive form, they developed a new form of organization

on precisely the same lines as the English. The New England “city ”

(and so the Pennsylvania ‘‘ borough”), is simply a specially organized town,

and forms a part of the town system, just as is the case with the boroughs

and cities of Chief Justice Fortescue’s difinition. A city is territorially a

town. And here, as in the case of so many so-called Americanisms, we

have preserved the old English usage, which has disappeared in England

itself. The town, in its ecclesiastical organization, was a ‘‘ parish,” and in

the sixteenth century the parish organization began to supersede the co-

144 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

i {

ordinate town organization for purposes of local self-government.! It

would seem that in the seventeenth century, when this country was settled,

this process had not been completed. The colonists brought with them both —

institutions, and—as all New Englanders know —the parish and the

town were, as a rule, identical in New England as in Old England.

But while in New England the ecclesiastical organization became quite sec-

ondary, and has now practically disappeared, in Old England the reverse

was the case. The parish organization has crowded out that of the

town. Asan Hnglish correspondent writes me: ‘* With us town=market

town ”—a specially privileged, and I suppose specially organized, class of

towns. The towns of the open country are known as parishes, and the

functions of local self-government, so far as they continue to be kept up,

are administered by the vestry, or parish assembly. Still even now we find

a survival of the old usage. The same correspondent writes: ‘‘I am

talking with the squire; the church bell sounds, and I ask him if he knows

why: he replies ‘for a parish meeting, I suppose.’ Again, ina conversation

with a laborer, to the same question he will reply: ‘ for a town meeting, I

suppose, sir.’” Here the primitive term has lingered among the peasantry,

while it has been dropped by the aristocracy.

The transition from town to parish, and the equivalency of the terms, as

well as the fact of local self-government, to be considered further on, are

illustrated by local documents. For example: in the reign of Edward V1., un-

der the influence, I suppose, of the radical reformation of the church favored

by that monarch, we have a record of a large amount of church plate and

other property sold in the eastern counties, by the authority, as it is stated,

sometimes of the town, and sometimes of the parish, showing that the two

terms are employedas identical. For example: ‘‘ Barkinge. Certifficat of

Church wardens there. We present that we have solde by the consente of

thole paryshe a crosse parcell gylte, etc. . . . to Robert Knappe and Roger

HylHe of the same towne.” ‘‘Beccles . . . solde anno primo Edwardi

sexti Regis etc, by the Townshype and Churchewardens so moch plate as

amounteth to the some of x11.” Hast Anglian, May, 1885. ‘‘ Church-

wardens of Martillesham. . . . goods sold by the said churche Revies

and other the hoole Inhitants of the said towne.” id., March, 1887. This

last instance appears to show an identity of the church-wardens with the

medizval reeve. Atalater date we find the village of Exning (Suffolk),

which at the close of the sixteenth century ‘‘ appears” says the correspon-

dent who mentions it, ‘‘ to have been dignified with the title of ‘Town’, viz.,

1590.

“Ttem. pd the xx daye of Aprill for a quarter of wyne for the TOWN

xij. d. etc.” id., March, 1888.

eee ee rts,

1See Gneist’s History of the English Constitution, Vol. ii, p. 196. As this great writer is

‘wont to depreciate the popular elements in the English constitution, it is not surprising

that he does not recognize the town, villata, as a regular part of the machinery of govern-

ment in the middle ages.

Town, Township and Tithing. 145

Tt will be noticed that in these extracts the words ‘“‘town” and ‘town-

ship” are used interchangeably. This was the case also in the early history

of New England. For example: in the Massachusetts Body of Liberties

(1641) we find ‘‘town” in Articles 16, 50, 51, 57, 62 and 85; <‘ township” in

Articles 66, 68 and 84, used with no apparent distinction of meaning. Ar-

ticle 74 couples them together: *‘the freemen of every town or township.”

We can perhaps trace a dispositiou to use the word ‘“‘ town” when speak-

ing of the corporate body, and *‘township” for territory, e. g., Article 78,

where it is forbidden to expend ‘‘any town treasure but by the freemen of

that township.” At present I believe the word ‘‘ township” is not in use in

New England, except occasionally to designate the town from the point

of view of the territorial area; never as a body politic. Curiously enough,

it is this word, fastened upon by De Tocqueville, that is regularly used by

foreign writers to describe the New England town system. The term

** township system” is properly used in this country only for the six-mile

square divisions of the public lands, laid out by the government surveys.

The states erected out of these public lands have a town system of their

own, parallel with the national township system, and generally coinciding

with it in respect to division lines, but not always. For example, the town

of Trempealeau, Wis., contains the whole of Township 19, N., Range 9,

W., and parts of Townships 17 and 18, Range 9, and 18 and 19, Range 10.

In the primitive Anglo-Saxon usage the word ‘‘township,” tunscip, ap-

pears to have been regularly used to designate the town as a municipality

while “town,” tun, was the settled portion— what in New England is

called the ‘‘ village” or the ‘‘ middle of the town.”

This distinction is quite in accordance with the etymology of the word.

Tt is well known that ‘‘ town,” twn, is the same word with the German

zaun, hedge or fence. But while the Germans never used the word zaun

to designate the enclosed (fenced-in) area; the Anglo-Saxons, on the other

hand, never used the word tun except to designate this enclosed area; the

primitive meaning of enclosing body having been entirely lost. Now the

thing fenced in was the village, or group of houses, which was accordingly

the tun; and the tunscip, or township, was the area of land which be-

longed with the village asa municipal organization. As a consequence,

the word twn was popularly applied to any place of collective residence; as

where the Saxon Chronicle (Land Ms. An., 584), says: Ceawlin manige

tunas genam — ‘‘ Ceawlin took many towns.” In the course of time the

word town appears to have crowded out the more strictly correct word

township, in the sense of designating the territorial area as a municipality;

and in this sense the word was brought to New England by the colonists

of the seventeenth century. In this country the meaning of the word is

precisely that of Fortescue’s time. In England, on the other hand, the

modern use appears to be a survival of the loose and popular early usage,

as applying to any place of collective residence; being limited in England

at the present day to large places.

1 .

146 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

In limiting the signification of the word tun, to designate not the object

which encloses (its primitive meaning), but the space enclosed, the Anglo-

Saxon agrees with the Scandinavian language, as is the case with somany

words and institutions of the early Anglo-Saxon period. The definition of

the Icelandic tun, as given by Vigfussen, is: ‘‘a hedged or fenced plot, en-

closure within which a house is built; then the farm-house with its build-

ings; the homestead.” This is precisely the meaning which the word has

in the earliest Anglo-Saxon laws, those of Aethelbihrt of Kent; it will be re-

collected that the settlers of Kent were Jutes, that is Scandinavians, rather

than Saxons, like the rest of the migratory tribes. In these laws we read of

a king’s tun (Ch. 5), an eorl’s tan (Ch. 18), and a ‘‘mannes tun” (Ch. 17) in

all which cases tun is clearly the hedged enclosure, the homestead.! From

the fenced enclosure of an individual homestead or field to that of a village,

as in the later laws, is an easy step; or rather the two uses are alike easy

transitions from the original signification of the enclosing fence or hedge.

This further extension of the word, however, does not appear to have

been made by the Scandinavians of the continent any more than by the

Germans. None of the Teutonic nations of the continent appear to have

had any territorial subdivision of the hundred, of a substantial, individ-

ual, public character. With them the hundred was the unit of the consti-

tutional machinery; and any lesser subdivisions stood to the hundred very

much as our school districts or wards do to our towns or cities — as mere

shifting administrative districts. having no substantial powers, and not

forming a body politic. Scholars are now agreed, as I have already said, that

the Dorfschaft was a division of a purely secondary character, for agricul-

tural and economical purposes. Nevertheless it corresponded closely in its

origin to the English township; and might, except for the early. feudaliza-

tion of Germany, have attained an equal degree of independence. Dorf,

village, is the exact equivalent in meaning (not in etymology) of the English

tun, and the affix schaft is the English scip; so that ‘‘township” is in

meaning precisely the German Dorfschaft.?

From the territorial character of the English township, we pass to the

consideration of its political character, as ‘‘the unit of the constitutional

machinery.” Direct evidence for this is not very abundant, but seems to

be entirely sufficient. I have already spoken of Chief Justice Fortescue’s

mention of town (villa) as an integral part of the hundred, just as the hun-

dred was an integral part of the shire. It is important also to note the

well-known fact that the town (villata) was throughout the medizval

1 This signification appears to have survived in Scotland; as, in Scott’s Redgauntlet,

Letter XI., where Darsie Latimer expresses a doubt whether he ought to go to Redgaunt-

et’s ‘‘ town” in disguise, the context showing that it is only his house that is meant.

2The German city of the middle ages was created not like the English borough, by giv-

ing higher powers to an already existing organism, but by cutting out a section of ter-

ritory and bestowing upon it public functions of a niunicipal character. See articles by

v. Below, Historiche Zeitschrift, 1888.

Town, Township and Tithing. 147

period the unit of representation‘ —and that not as a mere representative

district, but as a body politic; for at this period representation was never of

artificial divisions, but of corporate bodies. This is clearly a political or

constitutional function. Such phrases as ‘‘ by the consent of the saide

Township,” and ‘‘with the consent of the hole Towne,” in the sales of

church property mentioned above, imply organized and collective action —

an assembly or ‘‘ town meeting” of some sort.

That the township lacked the higher judicial powers is admitted by Bishop

Stubbs, who says (p. 90): ‘‘ their assemblies are rather gemots or meetings,

than proper courts; for any contentious proceedings amongst men so closely

connected and so few in number, must have been carried immediately to the

hundred court.” That the township did have a gemot or meeting, is proved

by the mention of a tunscipesmot in a charter of Richard I., and that this

meeting had certain definite powers of self-government, apart from its

function as a unit of representation, is shown, for example, by the Costo-

mary of Tettenhall Regis (English Gilds, p. 482), a body of regulations or

*‘bye-laws” made by the tenants of the manor at their Leet or Law-day.

This Costomary is a complete body of laws for the government of the com-

munity; and in the body of these laws the word ‘: town” is twice used to

designate the manor in its public relations.

** Art. 19. No man shall make yates or gapes in the common field, upon

the corne or grasse of his neighbors, but by the consent of [the] comonty;

and if he do, he shall give to the lord 2s., and to the comonty of the

towne 2s.”

“Art. 21. No man of oure towne shall enter upon the stubble of any

other towne while the corne is upon the ground, except it is upon his own

land, and by the good will of all his neighbors, under payne of iijs. to the

lord.”

In the passages just cited we have ‘“‘town” used as equivalent to

“*manor,”’ just as in those previously cited, it was used as equivalent to

**parish.” The manor was the feudalized township, that is, the township

converted into a fief, as the parish was the township regarded as an eccle-

siastical organization. And just as, in the sixteenth century, the parish,

or ecclesiastical organization, superseded the township; so in the middle

ages the manorial or feudal organization superseded, or at any rate ob-

secured, the township, the original municipal division. This process of

feudalization, or converting a free township into a seignorial estate, began

very early in the Anglo-Saxon period. Indeed, even on the assumption

that England was colonized by free peasants, organizing in free townships,

we must at the same time admit the probability of a considerable propor-

tion of seignorial townships, or manorial estates, side by side witht the free

communities, and intermixed with them. And whatever may have been

the original status, it is certain that long before the Norman conquest,

1 Per quatuor legaliores homines de qualibet villata (Assize of Clarendon, 1.)

148 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

there remained very few self-governing townships, composed of free peas-

ants.! Ido not consider the king’s, eorl’s and man’s tun of Aethelbirht’s

Laws, to have been feudalized townships, at least not always or neces-

sarily; they appear rather to have been farmsteads. But fifty years later

the charters of the Codex Diplomaticus afford ample evidence of towns

which were the private property of the King or powerful noblemen,

the peasants or ceorls being their tenants and fast becoming their serfs, as

I showed in my paper of last year.

The two-fold process here described, of converting the free townships

into manorial estates, and the free peasants into servile tenants upon those

estates, was consummated in the complete feudalization of England which

followed the Norman conquest.. Nevertheless the town organization was not

obliterated, but only obscured. We have seen that it continued to serve as

a basis for representation, and we have frequent mention of the town, villa,

as the equivalent of the manor. The word villa is used about a dozen times

Domesday Book, at least three of these times as equivalent to manor. HE. g.

(i. f. 199 b.) ‘* Wluuin the thane held this manor. In the same town Regi-

nald holds half a hide of Alberic.” [So ii., 381 and 31b.] The Exeter

Domesday and the Ely Inquest, documents which appear to be the rough

draft from which the great record was made up, often use the word villa

where the Hixchequer Domesday says manerium, ‘‘manor.”! But the two

words are not used as equivalent, but rather as describing the same terri-

torial area from different points of view. There might have been two

manors in the same vill, or lands in the vill while were independent of the

manor. Indeed it would naturally be the case that the manor would often

vary from the town in respect to metes and bounds, while the parish or

ecclesiastical organization would, like the town itself, be an unchangeable

district. The manor, being a piece of private property, would be subject to.

the laws of private property, and would be divided, added to or diminished,

through the processes of purchase, sale, inheritance and inter-marriage. So

greatly have these processes changed the boundaries of manors, that it is.

stated that in Hast Kent there is only one manor co-extensive with the par-

ish. (Academy, No. 167). We find, however, instances of this identifica-

tion of manor and town as late as the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries.

In the ‘‘ Certificates of Church Goods in Suffolk,” in the reign of Edward

VI., is mentioned: ‘‘ Mr. Sakford, lorde and patron of the Towne,” evi-

dently lord of the manor. In the time of the Civil Wars (1648), the Me-

moirs of Col. Hutchinson speak of Cromwell having ‘‘a design, by insinu-

ating himself into Colonel Saunders, to flatter him into the sale of a town of

his called Ireton.” (ii., 1387.)

When’ the town was feudalized and became a manor, its gemot, or

meeting, seems to have become that branch of the manorial court known

‘2

1 For examples, see paper upon ‘‘ Village communities and serfdom in England.”

2The Ely Inquest rests upon the evidence, among others, of sex villani uniuscujusque

villae.

Town, Township and Tithing. 149

as the Court Leet. The Court Leet, found also in the Hundred and the Bor-

ough, was, as is shown by the example given above, an assembly for the .

passing of bye-laws and administering the affairs of the town, the precise

prototype of the New England town meeting. It also had a limited police

jurisdiction, held to be derived from that of the Sheriff's Tourn or Leet of the

Hundred. It was not a necessary part of the feudal or manorial organization,

but, ‘‘was created by special grants from the crown to certain lords of manor

in order that they might administer justice to their tenants at home.” Quoted

by Elton, ‘‘ Custom and Tenant Right (1882),” p. 89. It was a thoroughly

democratic institution, ‘ being regarded as the court of the residents

within the district; not of the tenants of the manor;” and ‘‘so far is this

carried that a stranger passing by may be compelled to serve on the leet

jury. The fact of his being found within the district is deemed sufficient

evidence.” Digby, Int. to the Law of Real Property, p. 45. The Leet, asa

popular court, is also found in Iceland during the middle ages. The antiquity

and primitive character of this court is attested by Elton, who says (on

Copyholds, p. 240) it ‘‘is in all probability older than the manorial sys-

tem itself:” and by Ritson, ‘‘ The Jurisdiction of the Court Leet,” who says

(p. 6): ‘* The Leet is the most ancient court in the land.” This court elected

the constable, and, in some boroughs, the mayor (id. p. x.).

It is not surprising, considering their early and almost universal con-

version into manorial estates, that we find so few traces of free townships

in England. From their absence, Mr. Seebohm has attempted to establish

the thesis that the townships of England were regularly manorial estates,

and the peasants serfs, from the earliest settlement of the Anglo-Saxons in

the country. ‘‘ The evidence of the earliest Saxon and Jutish laws” he

says, ‘‘ thus leaves us with a strong presumption, if not actual certainty,

that the Saxon ham or tun was the estate of a lord, and not of a free village

community.” (English Village Communities, p. 175.) I attempted in my

paper, read a year ago to show that, with regard to the peasantry, his evi-

dence was inadequate, and that we have good ground for affirming the ex-

istence of a large class of free peasants in the earliest time. My object in

the present paper has been to continue the argument, and show that there

is good reason to believe that there were: free townships as well as a free

peasantry in the earliest English period. In arguing, however, that the

township was a body politic, and ‘‘the unit of the constitutional machin-

ery.” I would not be understood to claim for it original and self-existent

autonomy, even in the period of the earliest evolution of institutions. As-

suming that the Germanic peoples passed from a community of occupa-

tion based upon kinship to one based upon territorial relations; it was the

Hundred, not the township, that formed the earliest territorial community

or markgenossenschaft. The township, or Dorfschaft, is shown by Thudi-

chum to have been formed out of the hundred by a process of sub-division;

and in this process the German district thus formed succeeded to no

integral share of the powers of the original organization, but stood to it as

150 . Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ward to a city. The English district corresponding to it, on the other hand,

became an autonomous community, with substantial and important, if not

original powers.

The English town has therefore no counterpart in any other Germanic na-

tion; for in all the other Germanic nations the unit of the constitutional

machinery is the Hundred, a district too large to allow of this immediate

and detailed exercise of local self-government which we find in the New

England towns, and, as has been made to appear, in those of England. Much

less has it any counterpart in the Celtic and Slavonic nations, Which never

advanced unassisted to the territorial principle of government; nor in the

Romance nations, whose government, derived from that of the later Roman

empire, was wholly summary and authoritative. On the other hand, the

ancient Greeks and Italians— the only branches of the Aryan race which

possessed an equally strong political sense with the Germanic — developed

a territorial system which has a strong analogy with the English.

The City (civitas, zo As), is the political type of the Greeks and Italians,

as the Town is of the English: and while the two institutions diverged

greatly in their development, they were essentially identical in their origin

and structure. The Greeks, Italians and Germans alike passed from

the social stage of institutions, based upon personal relations, to the polit-

ical, based upon territory, at a very early period. In all of these we find

the territory divided up into autonomous districts, small enough in extent

to permit the direct participation of all the citizens in the work of govern-

ment. The Greek City was thus identical with the German Hundred. But

the development of all the Germanic nations, except the English, was ar-

rested by the creation of great centralized monarchies. Even in England

the more perfectly organized district, the Town, was shortly checked in its

- development by the establishment of the manorial system; and even where

a higher municipal type was developed, in the boroughs, it was sporadic

and thus incomplete.

The Greeks and Italians, on the other hand, concentrated and intensified

their political life by what is known as Synoikismos,— the establishment in

the middle of the territory of each city, of an oppidum or urbs, a place of

collective residence, surrounded by walls, in which were erected their pub-

lic buildings, and where they transacted all public and private business.

This higher organization was applied to all cities, not merely to some here

and there, like the English boroughs. These nations became urban in their

life, while the English remained rural. But, in becoming urban, in build-

ing a city surrounded with walls for residence, trade, worship and social

life, they did not shift the basis of their political organization. The city

continued, as it had always done, to comprise the rural districts as well as

the walled town; citizenship indeed was based upon ownership of land

outside the walls equally with residence or property within the walls: the

distinction between rus and urbs was purely social, in no sense political.

Now the oppidwm, inclosed within its walls, is very much the same thing as

Town, Township and Tithing. 151

the tun, enclosed with a hedge—a higher development upon the same

general lines. But there was one point of contrast of vital moment. The

Greek or Italian city, even if of no greater extent and population than an

English town, was a sovereign state; the English town, however large and

populous, was only a municipality, a part of a larger organism.

The word that is used in the Latin documents of the middle ages as mean-

ing ‘‘town” is villa (or villata)—a word that has had a curious and inter-

esting history. In classical Latin it means a country house — whether a

farm-house, villa rustica, or a gentleman’s country seat, villa wrbana, in

which sense it corresponds precisely to our modern word, villa. From

meaning ‘‘ house” it came by a not long or difficult transition, to mean the

* estate” surrounding the house; and in this sense we find the word used

in the later Roman empire. This was a period of great landed proper-

ties; but these properties, at least in Gaul, were not ‘‘plantations,” latifun-

dia, or vast and indefinite stretches of land, like the Dalrymple farm,

Each great property was made up of a number of villas, not necessarily

contiguous, each of these villas being a compact, organized estate of a mod-

erate size, The small peasants’ estates had for the most part disappeared,

and Gaul at this epoch may be described as divided up into seignorial or

domanial estates, corresponding roughly to the communes, or smallest

territorial divisions of modern France. These villas agreed in many im-

portant particulars with the English manors, being perhaps of about the

same extent, and being ruled autocratically by their owners.

The important fact to be noted here is the change in the significance of

the word villa. From meaning a gentleman’s country house, it has come

to mean the estate depending upon that house; that is to say, it has ac-

quired the meaning of aterritorial district. And although the district thus

designated in Gaul is a seignorial estate, it is easy, when the word has once

become associated with the idea of an area of land, to extend its use to

other districts of similar extent and grade. Thus we find it applied even

on the continent to the Dorfschaft or village mark,!and in England it is

used to designate the township, whether free or seignorial. But that it is

the township that is thus designated, as a territorial area, and not the seig-

norial estate into which the township has been converted, is proved by the

important fact, already noticed, that the manor and the township (villa) are

not always identical. No argument, therefore, for the originally servile

character of the English fun can be drawn from the fact that twi is in

Latin villa; for although in Gaul a villa was a seignorial estate, in England

it was not the estate as such, but an area of land, often identical with the

manor, but often containing two or more manors, or parts of manors, or

isolated pieces of land.

Thus the word villa, having acquired the signification of a territorial

area, was used in England as the Latin equivalent of Twnscip. And as villa

1 Van der Kindere, Notice sur Vorigine des magistrats communauc.

152 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

was ‘‘ town ” — whether free or seignorial —so the cognate word villanus

was ‘‘ townsman’” — whether free or serf. It is used regularly as the Latin

equivalent of ‘‘ ceorl,” the free peasant of the early period, the semi-servile

peasant of the later period, and the villein of the feudal period. When the

ceorls lost their ownership of land, and their free status, their name sinking

from the designation of a free yeoman to the opprobrious term ‘ churl;” so

the equivalent word villanus sank likewise, until it too, from meaning a-

free townsman, a member of the body politic, came to mean one who lived

upon the land of another man, who was his master, paying for *t by obliga-

tory labor. And as ‘‘ceorl” has sank to ‘‘churl,” so the honorable term

villanus has sank to the opprobrious term villain.

A few words in conclusion, upon a subject more obscure in itself, and of

more purely antiquarian interest — the connection of tithing and township.

The word tithing is used as equivalent to township in some of the southern

counties of England at the present day,! and it has been a matter of some

controversy what is the origin of this territorial signification of the word,

and how far back in time it dates. For the discussion of this question I will

refer to Prof. H. B. Adams’ excellent paper in the Johns Hopkins Studies,

Vol. I, No. 4. Itis admitted that there is no positive evidence of any but

the numerical use of the word tithing in Anglo-Saxon times, as designating

a group of ten men — tenmanne tale (Edy. Conf. xx)— formed for the pur-

pose of enforcing mutual responsibility, as the fundamental principle of the

system of the time for the preservation of the peace. The groups would

seem at this period to have been strictly organized by tens. But after the

Norman Conquest,under the more efficient frithborg system then established,

the numerical value appears to have become a secondary consideration, and

we very soon find a tendency towards localizing the term. Of course the

original tithings were in a sense local; that is, each voluntary group of ten

must have been composed of neighbors, and each township would naturally

contain a number of such groups, none of them extending their member-

ship beyond the bounds of the township. But in the thirteenth century

(1284) we find, in the Liber Niger of the Monastery of Peterborough, a list of

townships, each of which consists of a fixed number of tithings, varying,

no doubt, according to the population. Of the town of Bartona we read

(p. 109): tota villata debet presentari per sex capitales decennarios — the

capitales decennarii being the ‘‘ headboroughs” or ‘‘ tithingmen,” Other

towns range from six of these officers to one, and we see the local character

of the office in the fact that that they are the regular representatives of the

town in the great court of the Hundred: (p. 118) omnes libere tenentes et om-

nes capitales decennarti de predictis villis et foedis a tempore cujus non extat

memoria, sc. ante tempus Willemi Regis Conquistoris . . . solebant ve-

nire bis in anno ad duas magnas curias que appellantur Turna vicecomi-

tis, etc. Now, itis evident that in the small townships which had only one

tithing, it would be very natural and easy to identify the two terms, and

pS I OT Sa LI Ts ee TE

1 Stubbs. Const. Hist. i, 85.

Town, Township and Tithing, 153

thus localize the word tithing. Of this we see further evidence in the

Cartulary of the monastery of Gloucester. Vol. iii, No. 966, gives the items

in the view of frankpledge in the Court Leet of the manor; among which we

read: de hiis qui sunt xii annorum, et non sunt in toethinga. From this

passage the tithing might appear to be a purely numerical group: but in

No, 1,011 we read: sunt tenentes in tethynga de Chirchesdona, where the

word tithing seems to havea clearly local value.

The passage from the numerical to the territorial signification is an easy

one, and is illustrated by these passages. We see from the passage above

cited that all boys of twelve were enrolled, not merely heads of families,

as is sometimes assumed; and the same rule was observed in Anglo-Saxon

times, as is shown by the law of Canute (ii., 20 ofer xii wintra). With the

growth and order of good government, so large a number of groups as this

came to be no longer necessary. Two centuries after the Conquest, we find

small towns containing but one tithing, and the largest only six, which may

perhaps have been divisions of its territory into wards or districts. From

this condition of things the purely territorial meaning of the word in some

parts of the country may easily have been derived.

My object in this paper has been partly to trace the origin and powers of

the English town; partly to help to an understanding of its connection with

the New England town. New England being colonized at just about the

time that the parish organization was superseding that of the town in the

mother country, it would seem, as I have already said, that the colonists,

breaking away from the English ecclesiastical system, held to the town or-

ganization, making the parish purely secondary. The powers of the New

England towns do not differ very widely from those of the English towns.

We find, for example, in Russhemer, the ‘‘ Implyments” of the money ob-

tained by the sale of church goods to have been enumerated as follows:

towards the reparacioning of our churche . - - - xls.

ffurther to makyng of a pulpett & a lectern - - - - Xxlijs. liij d.

also to the makying of a grett chest with locks - - - lij s. iiij d.

Item to the pore peple of the parysshe - - - - - XXSs.

Also to the mendyng of the high weyes - - - - Xxiij s. iiij d.”

East Anglier, July, 1887.

In other cases we find: ‘‘for ssyendyng fforthe of v Souldeors to the

Kyngs, Majesties warrs;” ‘‘in the wallyng of their marssh, in costs &

chargs upon the havyn, And upon ther bulwerks of Gunnys. powder, &

shotte for the defense & safegard of the town.” : ‘‘to mainteyne a ffree

scoole,” etc.

These examples are taken from what I suppose to be small country vil-

lages, the prototypes of the New England towns. It may reasonably be

supposed, however, that the boroughs, or higher class of towns, would give

the example for the larger powers exercised by our more independent

towns; and I find in the East Anglian (1886-8) a series of extracts from the

records of the important town of Ipswich, as late as the time of the Com-

154 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

monwealth, which remind one, by the variety and minuteness of their

functions, of those of the New England towns: for example, the hiring of

preachers and teachers, as well as the care of roads, the supervision of

markets, etc. The ‘‘Great Court” of Ipswich, consisting of ‘‘all the free-

men, Portmen, Aldermen and Bailiffs,” corresponds very closely to the New

England town-meeting. The most characteristic feature of the New Eng-

land town-meeting is, however, wanting—the requirement that the

magistrates assume no control of the assembly, but retire into a private

station, as it were, for the occasion; the meeting electing its own chairman,

and exercising authority as a self-governing democracy. In most popular

assemblies the magistrates are the presiding officers: in the English

‘‘vestry”’ or parish-meeting it is the parson, in the Great Court of Ipswich,

one of the bailiffs. This feature of the New England town meeting, which,

with others, it shares with the higher parliamentary bodies, may perhaps

be claimed as another instance of the survival in America of usages or

institutions which have become extinct in the mother country. Gneist

says (p. 202): ‘* The meeting was summoned by the churchwardens; the

chair was regularly taken by the parson, as the landlord of the vestry, and

the first member of the ecclesiastical parish, as a matter of courtesy, but a

positive right of presiding could be established neither by precedent nor by

analogy. In analogy with the tax-granting commoners, the meeting was

rather regarded as its own master, in respect. to the appointment of a

chairman, as well as in respect to its adjournment. The voting was con-

ducted with equal rights for each individual, after the manner of the old

courts leet, the parliamentary elections, and the parliamentary resolutions.

The mode of giving the vote was, as arule, by show of hands, but in dif-

ficult and doubtful cases, by a poll.”

My thesis, that the English towns of the middle ages were an integral

part of the constitutional machinery, and not mere corporations, like the

corresponding bodies of Germany, I have attempted to prove by showing:

first, their territorial character, as conterminous areas of land, embracing

the entire ‘country; secondly, their practice of self-government in local

concerns, and their organic relation to the larger representative bodies.

We have seen that in the sixteenth century, at which time the parish be-

came the organ of local self-government, the terms fown and parish were

used indifferently for the same institutions; and that in the seventeenth

century, when the American colonies were planted, the colonists carried

with them a town-system essentially the same as the parish-system which

continued in England. The analogy with German institutions is mislead-

” upon

ing. The English people developed the institution of the ‘town

their own soil; and it is to be compared, not with the imperfect creation

of the continental Germans, from which it was perhaps derived, but with

the matured institution of New England, to which it gave birth.

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin. 155

REPTILIA AND BATRACHIA OF WISCONSIN.

By Pror. W. K. HIGLEY.

This list is not presented without a realization of the fact that some spe-

cies may be omitted. If, however, any such are found, it is believed that

they will be rare and local species, perhaps found in the outskirts of the

state, which is subject to the migration of species from other regions.

The Mississippi river forms an excellent pathway for the introduction of

some strangers to our Reptilian and Batrachian fauna.

It is hoped that the present list will not only be found complete, but that

the key may be found adequate for the determination of species.

The key is one that has been used in class work under the direction of the

writer, and has been found sufficient for all local purposes. It has been

arranged for the species of this state only, and, it is believed, in such a way

that no new species will be reported that cannot be brought under its

range, for in its preparation all extralimital species, lable to be found here,

were included.

The classification followed is to a great extent that used by my friend,

Dr. W. H. Smith, inthe Herpetology of the State Survey of Ohio.! Dr. Jor-

dan’s ‘‘ Manual of the Vertebrates ” and the list reported by Dr. Hoy in our

State Geology, have also been of great service, the former in the identification

of species, and the latter both asa check list, and also asa source of informa-

tion as to the range of some species outside the districts from which the

writer had identified specimens.

REPTILIA,

Animals having an epidermal covering in form of scales or plates which

in one division become united with the bony skeleton forming an outside

shield or shell; cold blood and an incomplete circulation; the heart three

chambered in our species; the lungs large, consisting of but few cells;

no metamorphosis; the respiration pulmonary throughout life.

KEY TO THE ORDERS OF REPTILES.

I, Epidermal covering united with the skeleton forming a shell which

more or less completely covers the body; no teeth; anal opening

POUL GISHROL BON PT UMC INA eta e cee eicle ete cm aie a clas vale Sat aint de ba-cemmeltie Testudinata,

1 State Survey of Ohio, Vol. IV, Zoology and Botany.

156 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

I. Epidermal covering not united with the skeleton, scales or rarely

plates; anal opening transverse; teeth present.

a. Body much elongated, serpentiform; limbs wanting; mouth

dilatable; eyelids none; no urinary bladder....... duel eae Ophidia.

b. Body elongated; feet usually present; mouth not dilatable; eye-

lids usually present; urinary bladder present. ................ Lacertilla.

ORDER TESTUDINATA, TURTLES.

Body more or less perfectly inclosed in a bony or leathery shell-like

case, plastron and carapace; epidermal plates usually quadrilateral in out-

line; animal variable in form, but generally short, thick-set or flattened;

neck generally long allowing of considerable freedom of the head; the head,

limbs and sometimes the tail may be completely withdrawn into the area

of the shell; the bones of the skull finally became united by complete ossi-

fication; tongue thick; jaws forming a horny ‘beak; food bolted; no teeth.

KEY TO FAMILIES OF TESTUDINATA,

I. Plastron very flat and divided into distinct parts which are so hinged,

by two transverse divisions, as to form, with the carapace, a very

perfect box; carapace very convex and deep; animal thickset; toes

only slightly webbed; jaws not hooked or but slightly so; food

mostly carnivorous................ i Gils rateas Suaue eon ls PA Ee Lara eet gee ayn oe Cistudinide.

Ul. Longitudinal section of the shell somewhat ovate in outline, caused by

the position of the vital organs which are placed far forward, the

carapace is thus higher anteriorly than posteriorly; plastron small

and cruciform consisting of 12 plates; head and neck very muscular;

jaws powerful and more or less strongly hooked; tail muscular with a

ridge of horny obtuse or acute processes above, the longest often

measuring more than an inch, and with two or more rows of scales

underneath; very voracious and extremely fierce; mostly carnivorous

ANGUIAQUATIC Tyce rc ats tem isis ave rei eee oe Oe Ee eee Chelydeide.

Ill. Longitudinal section of the shell ovate or oval, usually deepest near the

center; edge of carapace obovate or oblong in outline, broadest pos-

teriorly; plastron with 12 plates covering the entire under surface

of the body, the anterior lobe sometimes hinged to the posterior;

jaws not hooked, obtuse; carnivorous ...............20.0eeccececee oe ; Emydidas

IV. Body placed far back in the shell, causing an obovoid longitudinal

section; carapace osseous, margins more or less reflexed underneath;

plastron composed of a variable number of plates, seven, nine or

eleven, and hinged, allowing the animal to moreor less perfectly close

itsishell-sheadipoimnted- Tod OL/StLONn eee Eee EEE eee EEE ECE ere Cree eee Cinosternide.

V. Shell orbicular or sometimes with an oval or oblong outline; covered

by a leathery, more or less flexible skin; shell never fully ossified, and.

in some species with the ribs projecting; head long and conical....... Tryonychide.

FAMILY CISTUDINIDA, BOX TURTLES.

Represented by one genus and two species. Mostly carnivorous, and to

some extent decidedly carrion eaters.

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin. 157

Cistubo, Fleming.

OC. clausa, Gmelin, Common Box Turtle.

Varies greatly in color; back ground always dark (black, brownish or

drab) with yellowish spots or blotches; shell nearly oblong in outline;

plastron sometimes truncate; anterior lobe the shorter, generally found in

high but moist woods. Very rare. Two specimens have been reported

from Walworth county.! Length of carapace about six inches; height

about three inches.

C. ornata, Agassiz. Northern Box Turtle.

In many respects very similar to the last. Shell nearly orbicular and

without keel. ‘‘Grant county; rare.” Hoy: Walworth county.

FAMILY CHELYDRIDAS, SNAPPING TURTLES.

Aquatic species of great strength, living in ponds and muddy streams.

Represented by two genera and two species.

KEY TO THE GENERA OF CHELYDRIDAE.

a. Head covered with skin; tail with two rows of scales underneath.......... Chelydra.

b. Head covered with plates; tail provided with many scales underneath in

SOVerallrOwSesmasen tecinen Osos cata a oe aloe oe oleyeteioravs rctule Mia wsicbelove attemieuielcroe Macrochelys.

CHELYDRA, Schweigger.

C. serpentina, L. Common Snapping Turtle.

Very common and well known.

MACROCHELYS, Gray.

MM. lacertina, Schw. Mississippi or Loggerhead Snapper.

This ferocious turtle is occasionally found in the Mississippi river as far

north as the mouth of the Wisconsin. Hoy.

FAMILY EMYDID42, POND TURTLE.

The members of this family are generally very mild when approached,

simply relying on the rapidity of their motions or by plunging into the

water to effect their escape. Some forms (Crysemys), however, when taken

in the hand, will snap quite savagely at the fingers.

Represented by five genera and six species.

KEY TO THE GENERA OF EMYDID.

a. Crapace more or less depressed or flattened; toes webbed; plastron broad

and flattened, yellowish:

(a). Plastron movable on the carapace and divided, the anterior division being

smaller and movable by a transverse hinge; plastron with irregular

NACE SDOLS mercer eee arstcters lec Jaric aioe ie eine ctr tere rsratelis a cles Saline ate ovsintte Emys.

(b). ‘‘ Upper jaw notched in front; shell not keeled in adult” (Jordan); toes

strongly webbed; plastron immovable; carapace with outer plates usu-

Gil aL KeGmiy UME diows we tees cect eetelelacys mid eels oldie he Steen sitter Macclatcas dels Chrysemys.

1 Since writing the above, the author has identified specimens of C. clausa from Milwau-

kee, Pine Lake, La Crosse and Green Bay.

158 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

(e). ‘‘Upper jaw not notched in front; carapace more or less strongly keeled

or tuberculated.” (Jordan); toes strongly webbed; plastron immova-

ble; lower jaw with a spoon-shaped dilatation................... siete Graptemys.

b. Web small; shell elongated, nearly oblong in form; plastron without hinge;

carapace deep; black with or without orange or yellow spots which are

round or oblong; upper jaw notched slightly; plastron light yellow

with black irregular spots......... Ps ciaisrebnjsilacle lerersis lei talciale/ see el Oye Nanemys.

Emys, Brogniart.

E. meleagris, Shaw. Blarding’s Box Tortoise.

Carapace dark colored with irregular yellow spots that are seldom absent.

Terrestrial but generally found near water, to which they rapidly retreat if

approached. Excellent swimmers. Common.

CHRYSEMYS, Gray.

C. marginata, Holb. Lady Turtle. Western Painted Turtle.

Neck, tail and legs striped with red; the plates of carapace variously

marked with red or yellow. A beautiful species. Very common.

OC. oregonensis, Holb. Plain Tortoise.

A form without red markings of marginata, is found occasionally in the

western part of our state.

GRAPTEMYS, Agassiz.

G. geographica, Le Sueur. Map Turtle.

Streaked and reticulated with various shades of yellow upon a brownish

back ground; neck and limbs quite gaily colored; carapace deeply notched

posteriorly; aquatic; not common.

Probably this species is the most bold and active of this family. -L. 9 inches.

G. Le Sueurti, Gray. Le Sueur’s Map Turtle.

The characters distinguishing this from the preceding are not numerous

but prominent. The colors are less striking in general, but the yellow

markings are more intense; back ground grayer; each vertebral plate has a

dark colored posterior which overlaps the succeeding plate; plastron

clouded with brown or black; length of carapace 5-6 inches. Quite com-

mon in southern half of the state.

NANEMYS, Agassiz.

N. guttatus, Ag. Speckled Tortoise.

Carapace black with yellow spots scattered here and there; plastron with

more or less black. But two specimens are known to me to have been

found in this state. These were from Walworth county.!

FAMILY CINOSTERNIDA. CINOSTERNOID TURTLE.

Represented by one genus and species.

1 Additional localities, reported after the above was written, Beloit, Madison, Eau Claire

and other places, indicating that it is rare but generally distributed throughout the south-

ern part of the state.

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin. 159

AROMOCHELYS, Gray.

A. odoratus, Latreille. Musk Tortoise.

Jaws strong; color dark with or without spots; head large with yellow

spots on the side; a strong musky odor is always present; plastron black and

yellow; marking more or less obscured by the adhering mud. Rare. Found

in southern part of the state. I have found it in Walworth county.

FAMILY TRIONYCHIDH. SOFT-SHELLED TURTLES.

Represented by two genera and two species.,

a. ‘ Nostria terminal, crescent shaped”’ (Jordan); carapace with tuber-

clesionitheiantenon mar oinsienee-eeacedeetiectnoeen secre creerrrr Aspidonectes,

b. ‘‘ Nostrals rather under the top of snout” (Jordan); no tubercles

OnEtbeanteriommarciniof carapace sencrnaaceeseciia eerie cern Amyda.

ASPIDONECTES, Wagler.

A. spinifer, Le Sueur. Soft-shelled Turtle.

The habits of this animal are such that they do not need hard shells for

protection. Their color is not far from that of the mud of the streams in

which they live. I have repeatedly passed by groups of them while dredg-

ing, without seeing them. My observations lead me to believe that they

are generally found in groups. They are found in the southern and west-.

ern parts of the state. Though not often met I believe them to be quite

common,

AMYDA, Schweigger.

A. mutica, Le Sueur. Leathery Turtle.

Upper parts brownish; beneath, whitish without spots; anterior margin of

carapace without spines or tubercles. This last character distinguishes it

from the last. Found in the western half of the state and more common

than the last, and with thesame habits, though my observations lead me to

believe that it is not so voracious.

ORDER LACETILIA. LIZARDS.

Body elongated or lacertiloid in form and covered by scales; limbs four

(or two) or none; top of head covered with plates; tail quite long and gen-

erally brittle ;! jaws with teeth, but they are not in sockets.

KEY TO THE FAMILIES OF LIZZARDS.

1. Tongue squamose, thick, fleshy, emarginate at the free extremity— free anter-

iorly and not protrusible; eyes medium size; eyelids scaly; scales

quincuncially arranged; head subtriangular cephalic plates present and

LOLA lac erectore.c wjaiors Risen ciel, aisicjareis Brotis le eM ten ls kiseisteleis dle tiaieitig clade miemytasiace,a% 416 Scincide.

1 This serves as an excellent means of defense. It is very natural for one to catch the

tail of a lizzard sooner than any other part because of its swiftness. The tail being very

brittle it is no sooner touched than it breaks off. Jordan says this is owing “ to a thin,

unossified, transverse septum, which traverses each vertebra.’ I have had them lose their

tails also when confined to close quarters.

160 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters

2. Tongue palpillose, fleshy, emarginate and more or less free anteriorly;

cephalic plates more scale-like or irregular; scales carinalted; head short;

SV S]IGS SCAM scsi Nets Haale cds N oul eves cele ee ede ee ey Iguanide.

8. Limbs not visible but present in a rudimentary state beneath the skin; ear

distinct; lateral fold present; serpentine in form; cephalic plates quite

large; abdominal region covered with square plates; tongue bifid......... Arnguidee.

FAMILY SCINCIDA.. THE SKINKS.

Represented by one genus and two species.

EUMECES, Wiegmann.

E. quinquelineatus, L. Blue-tailed Skink.

Color bluish-black with five yellow stripes, the dorsal stripe divides at

the head sending a branch to each side of the vertical plate; beneath light

blue; throat whitish; tail deep blue; the stripe disappears to a great extent

with age: L. 7-8 inches; tail 4-5. Walworth County; rare.

I believe that this species will be found more common in all the southern

counties, though it has not been reported to my knowledge. Its range is

very extensive. It may be found to the best advantage in May, in dampish,

unfrequented woods under bark.

._E. septentrionalis, Baird. Northern Skink.

Olive with four darker stripes; two narrow lateral lines of white and

black. Walworth County, ‘‘ Not uncommon as far north as Lake Winne-

bago.”? Hoy.

FAMILY IGUANIDA. THE IGUANAS.

Represented by one genus and one species.

SCELOPORNS, Wiegmann.

S. undulatus, Harlan. The Brown Swift.

Color brownish with irregular bands of black; greenish blue laterally;

abdomen yellowish with dark spots; toes whitish; throat with skin more

or less folded; L. 6 inches; rare. A few specimens have been reported

from this state. I have not met it myself.

FAMILY ANGUIDA. THE GLASS SNAKES.

Represented by one genus and one species.

OPHISANRUS, Daudin.

O. ventralis, Daudin. The Glass Snake.

Color dark and yellowish with black streaks; quite common.

“In early days they were not uncommon near Kenosha. They occur in

in the western part of the state as far north as La Crosse.” Hoy.

1 Since writing the above, the writer has examined several specimens from the western

part of the state.

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin. 161

ORDER OPHIDIA. SNAKES.

Body covered with imbricated scales; beneath with a single row of band-

like scales (gastrosteges) as far back as the anus. Represented in this state

by two families.

KEY TO THE FAMILIES OF SNAKES.

1. Both jaws with ungrooved conical teeth; tail tapering, plates underneath

(Urosteges) in pairs, without a rattle; no pit in front of the eyes; head

more or less oblong, and usually tapering gradually into the neck....... Colubride,

2. Nosolid teeth, or but few in the upper jaw; jaw provided with grooved

erectile poison fangs; tail provided with a rattle; Urosteges undivided, at

least anteriorly; a pit in front of each eye; scales carinated; head separ-

able from the body and more or less triangular....................--20008 Crotalide.

FAMILY CROTALIDH. THE CROTALID SNAKES.

Represented by two genera and two species. To this family belong some

of the most deadly poison snakes.

KEY TO GENERA OF CROTALID.

a. Head covered with small seales, tail with large rattle......... gates Crotalus.

b. Head covered with nine large plates; tail with rather small rattle.. Crotalophorus,

CROTALUS, L.

C. durissus, L. Yellow RattleSnake. Banded Rattle Snake.

Sulphur brown with darker in blotches or arranged, more or less regu-

larly, in bands; head very triangular and ugly; dorsal scales in 23-25 rows;

G. 170-180; U. 23-28; L. 3 to 5 ft. In rocky places; rare. Formerly this

species was very common, but it is seldom met now. It may be found in

the rocky bluffs of our larger rivers. Very poisonous.

CROTALOPHORUS, L.

C. tergeminus., Holb. Massassauga or Prairie Rattlesrake.

Color brownish, ‘‘ Spots of dark brown margined with black, and exterior

to this a still lighter circle; vertebral blotches, 34 in number, almost quad-

rate, notched in front and behind, and extending from neck to tail; 2 to

3 series of lateral blotches on each side varying from circular to oblong”

(Smith). There are other series of lighter lines, but the above will be suffi-

cient to determine the species. Dorsal scales 25 rows; G.140-150; U. 25-320;

L, 2-8 ft.; not rare; in grassy marshes throughout the state. Poisonous.

Variety Kirtlandii, Holb.

Much darker and more uniform, with darker blotches above. Walworth

county; rare. W. H. Smith in the State Survey of Ohio says,*— ‘‘ The

* VoLIV, p. 674.

162 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

specimens of CO. tergeminus which I have seen from Wisconsin, “have a

broader head and the transition from the head to neck is more abrupt

than in Illinois or Ohio specimens.”

It is safe to assume, then, that all snakes that have a triangular head,

that may be met in this state, are to be avoided.

FAMILY COLUBRIDAH. THE COLUBRINE SNAKES.

Represented by eleven genera, twenty species and several varieties.

The following Key for the determination of the genera is a modification

of that used by Jordan, Smith, and others.

Dorsal scales carinated, a.

Dorsal scales smooth, 1.

a. Post-abdominal scutella entire, b.

a. Post-abdominal scutella bifid, ec.

by Dorsalrowsiolscalesinotiexceedine 23) see ase ener eee eee Enteenia.

bDeleDorsalirows ol scalesuexceedi ney 25 hneeet een eee eee eeE ere ree reer Pityophis.

ec. lLoral and anteorbital plates, both present, d.

Chorals: ASEM big ein cena ler slntnrs ticieay-tstinanels sermictinle semtcisisce eet tree anise he Storeria.

d. Dorsal rows of scales, 19 or more, e.

e. Cephalic plates typical, f.

e. Cephalic plates not typical, large, h.

f. Post-orbitals three, rarely two; ante-obitals usually one; dorsal rows of

SCALES B= 2 Osea cea eaters ata tance | day cine eae eer PAC aE Mao BANE Mian lett ne 8 Tropidonotus.

f. Post-orbitals two; dorsal rows of scales, TQ SOE IN BY Nb Aaa Regina.

ay WMADUAALS) ToyRO MXC baer ChaVGl THECUS! SoyapAddosuus Badadcuosdoescegnbescead Heterodon.

Te WiDy ANS) 1OVOH [RONSON Cos ocdasosaoous ouanadcosdooeccDaoS Rea ee sic aS Coluber.

i. Ante-orbital plates both present, j.

j. Post-abdominal scutella entire or bifid; dorsal rows of scales 25....... Ophibolus.

j. Post-abdominal scutella bifid; dorsal rows of scales not exceeding 21, k.

Kap awaibthsyellowsrinearoundsbhe mech pean. eeserteeretittiicn heer renter Diadophis.

k. Without a ring around the neck, |.

Mum orsalsscalesamw@omOwSsaaviiceiaciocmcleecle icles on rebelieleelataiayselortcercteetele Liopeltis

lie) onsalyscales#inull/orsmonrestoOwSsee-re seceere ce eeee ecco oes Bascanion.

EuUT&NIA, B. & G.

Our most common snakes; terrestrial; ground color dark; one vertebral

and two lateral stripes; gastrosteges 140-170; urosteges 50-120; dorsal rows

of scales 19.

It is believed that the following Key will enable one to trace any species

or form commonly found, though great variations in the markings exist.

(a) Lateral stripe on the third and fourth rows of scales: body slender; tail

nearly one-third of total length, (b).

(a) Lateral stripe on second and third rows of scales; body stouter; dorsal

band on one and two half rows of scales; tail one-fourth of total length;

GE TB2 1708 (Us BOBO ee MU UGCA CIO Ta alae ea Se Sirtalis.

(a) Scales rough; stripes all narrow; lateral not usually overa scale in width,

placed on part of two rows; six or seven series of brownish or blackish

spots; outer row of scales often very broad............c.eee eee cece eee oe Radia:

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin. 16%

@) Occipital plates with a yellow spot; upper labials eight; dorsal band on one

and two half rows of scales; lateral stripe on third and fourth rows: G.

LAS 180 MU Mless than d 1 OR eR ss sees ewer tesa te ttre Heat in inete nt those Proxima.

(b) Orbital plates yellowish; upper labials seven on each side; dorsal line on

about one row of scales terminating at posterior margin of the occipital

lave iGed 5-180 3 Us Lo OL MOLe snes cine a clvseee cle sits se cae eee ees ieee Saurita.

FE. sirtalis, L. Striped or Garter Snake.

Ground color, blackish; dorsal band yellow; lateral band yellowish; abdo-

men greenish; occipital plate sometimes with two yellow spots; upper la-

bials 7 or 8; offensive when handled; L. 2-24 feet; tail about 6 inches; abun-

dant.

Variety dorsalis, B. & G.

Dorsal stripes broad and marginal on each side with black in one

row of scales; lateral stripe with a row of dark spots above; com-

mon.

Variety parietalis, B. & G.

Dorsal stripe medium; brick red spots in lateral bands; not rare.

Variety with dorsal stripe absent, yet with all the characters of

the typical form present. Walworth county; rare.

Dr. W. H. Smith suggests for this variety the name melanota.

£. radix, B. & G. Hoy’s Garter Snake.

General color above black, with thi‘ee very narrow yellow lines; head

short; L. 2-24 feet; G. 150-165; U. 53-85. Not rare.

E. saurita, L. Swift Garter or Ribbon Snake.

Slender; tail very long and slender, pointed; color dark brown; stripes

extending the whole length, but indistinct in the tail and sometimes becom-

ing obsolete near the end; dorsal and upper edge of lateral lines with black-

ish or brownish margins; under parts greenish; L. 24-8 feet; tail 9 inches;

southern part of the state in damp woods; not rare.

Variety faireyi, B. & G. Fairie’s Garter Snake.

Occipital plates with two yellow spots; lateral line margined, on

both sides by black; same range as the last; not common.

E. proxima, Say. Say’s Garter Snake.

Ground color black; beneath whitish to olivacous, dorsal band yellow or

darker; lateral greenish or whitish; beneath lateral strip lighter than above;

L. under 3 feet; tail under 9 inches; southern half of the state; not rare.

Piryoruis, Holbrook.

P. sayii, Schl. Western Pine Snake.

‘““ Whitish or reddish with many dark blotches and spots; dorsal scales

usually 25 rows. G. 220-230; L. 40-70.” Jordan.

164 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

“A large species: in early days it was common in the western part of the

state; now rare.” Hoy.

L. 4-11 feet; reported from northwestern counties; rare; large specimens

very rare.

STORERIA. B. & G.

KEY TO THE SPECIES OF STORERIA.

(a) Scales 15 rows; belly red; G. 120-128; U. 40-50; Anteorbitals two;

WOODS MEVoNENIS to} Ore OS Monee O OR foros sscoosonccens 6 —svdaceas occipito-maculata.

(b) Scales 17 rows; under parts greenish or nearly. wnite: G. 120-140;

U. 46-60; upper and lower labial plates 7%. ..... ...............<0-- dekayi.

S. occipito-maculata, Storer. Red-bellied Snake.

General color above grayish or brownish, with (usually) or without a dor-

sal band margined by darker spots; L. 9-15 inches; tail about 2 inches;

common througout the state.

S. dekayi, Holb. Little Brown Snake.

General color grayish brown; dorsal stripe lighter margined by dotted

lines; a black line from the occipital plate to the angle of the mouth; one or

two black spots below the eyes; L. 12 inches or less; tail about 2; southern

part of the state: not rare.

TROPIDONOTUS, Kuhl.

Our species have eight upper and ten lower labial plates; these are large

and prominent; aquatic habits; food mostly fish and other water animals.

KEY TO THE SPECIES OF TROPIDONOTUS.

(@) Dorsal scales 27 rows; outer row smooth; above with quadrangular

dark spots about 48 or 50 in number, and reaching to the end of the

AEE WA ae SEAN Co AN A Pe UN eae ee Ste UR ry SEIU LTT A) NL rhonbifer.

(b) Dorsal scales 23 (variety with 25); above with three series of dark

blotches, the dorsal row larger than the others; abdomen irregularly

LOHAN Yah AHO BAVGl LORONAM 3 OW SOAS ose udoacesaneocuondssuseocuasce sipedon.

(ce) Dorsal scales 23; under parts copper colored; head large, triangular; gen-

eral color above, reddish black without spots or blotches............ erythrogaster.*

TI. rhombifer, Hallowell. Holbrook’s Water Snake. Water Adder.

General color, brown; L. 24-3 ft.; G. 140-145; U. 63-74; tail about 6

inches; unfrequented damp places; rare; Walworth county.

T. sipedon, L. Water Snake. Water Adder.

General color brownish; markings sometimes obscure in old specimens;

young with markings very decided, but with some variations in their colors;

body large; carnivorous, living almost entirely on fish; L. 3-4 ft.; tail 10-13

inches; G. 150-155; U. 65-80; southern counties; not common.

*T. erythrogaster, Shaw. Since this report was presented to the Academy, I have seen

two specimens of this species; one from near Beloit, and the other from Lake Geneva. Rare.

‘~

> Fe

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin. 165

ReGina, B. & G. ;

Habits aquatic or terrestrial; dorsal scales in 19 rows.

KEY TO THE SPECIES OF REGINA.

(a) Ante-orbitals two; upper labials, 7; lower, 8; beneath yellow; three black

dorsaliand aryellow lateral ban dail enivse) eee itacine see eisaeaeee leberis.

(b) Ante-orbitals one; beneath brick red, with dark near the exterior of the

Scutellés jupperlabials) Gailower. ei cst warns tector eh sinciels con enon Kirtlandii.

(ec) Ante-orbitals two; beneath, yellowish; upper labials, 7; lower, 8; above,

brownish; dorsal line lighter and bordered with black; lateral line yel-

low, bordered with dark, in first second and third rows ............... Grahamii,

R. leberis, L. Yellow-bellied or Leather Snake.

Above, brownish; lateral band on the first and second rows; L. 2-24 ft.;

tail 5-6 inches; G. 140-150; U. 65-80; not common.

Rk. kirtlandii, Kennicott. Little Red Snake.

Above brownish or purplish brown with irregular blotches in four rows,

the outer being the larger; L. about 1 ft.; tail about 3 inches; G. 120-140;

U. 55-65; Walworth county, and probably throughout southern counties;

rare.

R. Graham, B. & G. Graham’s Snake.

Scales strongly carinated; lateral line broad; L. 14-2 ft.; tail 3-44 inches;

G. 160-165; U. 57; mostly in western countries; not rare.

HETERODON, Beauvois.

Body quite thick set and can be dilated at will of the animal by inhala-

tion of air; hissing very peculiar and characteristic, similar in sound to the

rattle of the rattlesnakes; head triangular. These snakes have a strong re-

semblance to venomous species, when angered or disturbed, flattening their

bodies and head and hissing in a very threatening manner. Odor very

marked and unpleasant.

H. platyrhinus, Latreille. Hog-nose Snake. Blowing Viper. Spreading

Adder.

Above brownish with 28-30 dark dorsal blotches varying from quadrate

to circular; lateral blotches irregular; these blotches become rings on the

tail; vertical plate longer than broad; beneath, slate color and varying

on post-abdominal region from yellow to reddish; upper labials yellow;

dorsal scales 25 rows (usually); G. 125-150; U. 45-50; L. 24-8 feet; tail 7-8

inches; on sandy or dry localities as far north as Madison; not common,

Variety niger, Catesby. Black Viper.

Uniform black or brown above without spots; said to be more

ferocious than the type but is harmless; about the same range as

the last: rare.

aie

‘

166 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters

HI, simus, L. Hog-nosed Snake.

General color lighter and more yellow than the last species; about 32-35

dorsal blotches; vertical plates broader than long; interfrontal region with

4-8 small plates; dorsal scales 23-27 rows; L. 23-38 feet; G. 130; U. 45-55;

sandy localities throughout the state; nut rare.

COLUBER, L.

Body large; head elongated; ante-orkitals one; post-orbitals two; mouth

deeply cleft; upper labials 8, lower 11.

KEY TO THE SPECIES OF COLUBER.

(a) Dorsal scales 25 rows; color above light brown with more or less quadrate,

chocolate colored blotches in three rows, the dorsal two or three times

larger than the lateral; head light brown or yellowish above............. vulpinus.

(b) Dorsal scales 27 (usually); color black and shiny; scales often margined

withbyellowish=sheadmblackiabOVieseer er bene ter eeree ee eee rere ee eer eee neers obsoletus:

C. vulpinus, B. & G. Fox Snake.

Vertical plate broader than long; abdomen with colors in blotches; L. 5

feet; tail about 10 inches long, large at the base; prairies throughout the

state; food, small vertebrates and insects; not rare.

C. obsoletus, Say. Pilot Snake or Racer.

Upper labials yellowish; beneath darker and more or less mottled with

yellow, black and whitish; vertical plate longer than broad; dorsal scales

27 rows (usually); L. 4-6; tail 10-11 inches; G. 230-235; U. 80-85; found

throughout the state in timbered districts, but is not common.

Feeds on squirreis, birds, bird’s eggs, etc.; is somewhat arboreal in its

habits. The larger forms are very rare.

OPHIBOLUS, B. & G.

O. triangulus, Boie. Milk Snake.

Local names numerous and various. General color grayish with three

series of black margined brown blotches, the dorsal row numbering about

50, and elliptical to oval in shape; lateral spots in two rows, varying in size;

head with two blotches above; blotched beneath; dorsal scales in 21 rows;

G. 200-210; U. 48-55; L. 3-4 ft.; tail 5-6 inches; varies greatly; habits carni-

vorous; common.

DIaDOPHIS, B. & G.

D. punctatus, L. Ring-necked Snake.

Bluish black (or darker) above, without spots; occipital region with yellow

ring or spots; beneath orange or lighter, each plate generally having a dark

spot; head depressed; dorsal scales 15 rows; G. 140-165; U. 35-58; L. 13 ft.;

tail about 3 inches, found under stones or bark of decaying trees; odor

strong; not rare.

Reptilia and Batrachta of Wisconsin. 167

LIOPELTIS, Fitzinger.

ZL. vernalis, De Kay. Green or Grass Snake.

Body slender; head elongated; color above bright and uniform deep green;

lighter or yellowish beneath; L. 1-1} ft.; tail about 4} inches; G. 129-140;

U. 70-98.

A beautiful species, very lively in its movements; insectvorous. Com-

mon throughout the state in damp places, and may often be seen in the

morning when there is dew on the grass.

BASCANION, B. & G.

B. constrictor, L. Blue Racer or Black Snake. :

Varies in color; our form varies from azure blue to blue-black; beneath

greenish; mouth deeply cleft; head elongated; dorsal scales smooth and

usually in 17 rows (sometimes 19); L. 4-64; G. 170-205; U. 80-115; southern

part of the state; not common.

This form varies considerably from the Black Snake of the east in its

color, which is often a very intense azure blue; especially immediately af-

ter moulting. Dr. W. H. Smith suggests that this form might well be made

a variety with the very appropriate name of ceruleus.

BATRACHIA.

Body always without true scales and covered by a smooth skin; mata-

morphosis after birth and usually complete; respiration branchial in the

young, and either pulmonary or both pulmonary and branchial in the adult;

heart with two auricles and one ventrical; circulation incomplete.

KEY TO THE ORDERS OF BATRACHIA.

I. Body thick set and when adult without a tail; the posterior limbs much

longer than the anterior and developed first in the metamorphosis; skin

smooth, granular or warty; tongue free behind and can be protruded with

ORES ORNL GUL seo cls eroyt steln to soa turatets fn aval oeveie leis (spor crate eves arejeuace ta leiaisteye istare bterege erate Anura.

Il. Body elongated; the four limbs very widely separated, short and of nearly

equal length; tail, persistent and usually long; tail compressed or terete;

fore limbs developed first in the metamorphosis; motions more or less

STAC OLURE Co ae stare ante pein Chis otale Mineo ee ele eR re eae oso aete s Bis telat enate shoe sie otoleuey ops Urodela.

ORDER ANURA. TAILLESS AMPHIBIANS.

KEY TO THE FAMILIES OF ANURA.

1. Posterior toes webbed; anterior toes more or less webbed; upper maxillary

and vomer-palatine teeth present; skin smooth, or essentially so; posterior

limbs exceeding the length of the body and much longer than the anterior;

tympanum distinct and prominent; fingers not dilatable; tongue emargi-

nate at free extremity; live near water........ ..........00--ccccessseeeee Ranide,

168 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

2. Toes more or less webbed; upper maxillary and vomer-palatine teeth pres-

ent; tympanum distinct; fingers and toes with disks at their tips; skin

more or less granulated; tongue usually simply notched at the free ex- :

cremibys chiefly jarboreal tase) iver. Nata cays tes Mey anoles eevp pee erat ee en a Hylidee.

3. Toes webbed; posterior limbs hardly as long as the body; skin usually warty ;

tympanum small and not apparent; jaws without teeth; tongue entire at

free extremity; terrestrial, nocturnal, and insectivorous.................. Bufoniedoe

FAMILY RANIDA.. THE FROGS.

Represented by one genus and five species.

The following is a key to species of the genus:

Rana, L.

(a). Dorsal region with large and distinct irregular dark spots in usually two

(rarely more and these scattered) rows upon a greenish or brownish back-

ground; beneath very white or yellowish; eyes prominent and usually

with) two dark iblotehes between! them 2) i702) yess se eeeee Shag oes halecina.

(b). Dorsal region with or without small dark spots:

d). Color green or brown; irregularly spotted (or speckled) on the legs and

sides with dark which may reach to the dorsal region; beneath white

COPVellO msn Lesiyell Oye ah See vias OU elie Ap Ie LT aCe a ep oe are clamitans.

(2). Reddish or greenish brown; a dark line passes through the tympanum

and eye, often reaching to the nostrils; legs usually barred or blotched

with dark above; tympanum small; beneath vellowish or whitish.

temporia, var. sylvatica.

(8). Greenish brown with dark irregular spots which are conspicuous on the

legs and sides; beneath yellowish, often mottled with dark brown;

tympanum large; animal very large and muscular; pupils black;

LBL OSYO REST yay eset space Spee eee oT Tee ee TN SD Catesbyana

R. halecina, Kalm. Leopard Frog.

L. 3 to 4 inches; posterior limb 6 inches; in wet places and especially in

marshes and along streams; common.

R. clamitans, Daudin. Green or Spring Frog.

Thighs granulated posteriorly; L. 2-3 inches; posterior limb about 4 in.;

anterior limb about 14 in.; common along brooks and ponds; often in wet

weather may be found wandering to some distance from any stream.

R. temporania, L. Var. sylvatica, Le Conte. Wood Frog.

L. 2 inches; posterior limb about 24 in.; anterior limb about 13; in damp

woods among leaves; not rare.

R nigrescens, Ag. Black Frog.

Prof. Agassiz determined a specimen caught at Racine as the Mgricans;

Rare.” Hoy.

1 R. palustris has the dorsal spots usually square, in four rows with smaller spots scat-

tered irregularly outside. i

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin. 169

Having no description, and never having seen this form, I am unable to

place it in the Key. Some of our authorities, however, consider it merely

a form of clamitans.

R. palustris, Le Conte. Marsh or Tiger Frog.

This is quite common in Michigan, and may possibly be found in Wis-

consin; L. 2-8 inches; posterior limb about 4; anterior limb about 14.

FAMILY HYLIDA. TREE TOADS.

Represented by two genera and four species.

KEY TO THE GENERA OF TREE TOADS.

a. Toes nearly or quite distinct; fingers quite distinct: disks small; body

slender: toncue emarcinate behinds ..25. .. cee sce noo eeebee Chorophilus.

b. Toes webbed; fingers more or less webbed; disks large; body often thick

set; tongue, if at all. only slightly emarginate behind................... Ayla.

CHOROPHILUS, Baird.

C. triseriatus, Wied. Little or Striped Tree Frog.

Color bluish ash or blackish; more or less striped; skin with granula-

tions; no warts; toes with trace of web at the base; L. 1 to 14 inches; pos-

terior limb about twice as long as the anterior.

*“C. maculatus, Ag. Spottea Tree Frog.

Found on Lake Superior.” Hoy.

Hyta, Laurenti.

H, versicolor, Le Conte. Common Tree Toad.

“Patches of vomerine teeth slightly elevated; tongue slightly notched

behind.” W. H. Smith.

Color varying from green to brown with irregular spots; below dirty

white to yellow, seldom spotted; common.

““H. pickeringii, Holb. Pickering’s Tree Toad, abundant.” Hoy.

‘*“ Patches of vomerine teeth not elevated; tongue truncate behind;”

W. H. Smith. Reddish or yellowish brown; spots dark, rhomroidal; lines

dark, and sometimes cuneiform in arrangement.

FAMILY BUFONID4. THE TOADS.

Represented by one genus and one species.

Buro, Laurenti.

B. lentiginosus, Shaw. Var. Americana, Le Conte. Common Toad.

Body warty and very rough when adult; color cinereous and brownish;

speckled; below yellowish or dirty white; tympanum not very apparent;

pupils black; very common.

4 ‘ i

170 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ORDER URODELA. TATLED AMPHIBIANS.

KEY TO THE FAMILIES OF URODELA.

bye (Guill iS oyerHci is) fc) 0) Mae ia Oar er ten DE RGR ae Soe toc aa AER AME Sothéode co oo Proteide.

2) Gills ‘caducous; sill’sht closedim the adulty-2 ssa... o..ceae toe e eee Salamandride.

FAMILY PROTEIDA. THE MUD PUPPIES.

Represented by one genus and one species.

MENOBRANCHUS, Harlan.

M. lateralis, Say. Mud Puppy. Dog Fish. Water Dog.

Body cylindrical and smooth; general color brownish with spots of

darker; a black lateral line is sometimes present;- gills red and bushy, in

three groups on each side; tail compressed; nocturnal and aquatic, liv- .

ing but afew moments on land; L. 1 to 2 ft.; common and carnivorous.

FAMILY SALAMANDRIDA. THE SALAMANDERS.

Represented by five genera and eleven species.

KEY TO THE GENERA OF SALAMANDRIDA.

a. Tongue fleshy, attached by the center, the lateral and anterior margins

being free; costal grooves very distinct; vomero-palatine teeth trans-

versely arranged; posterior toes, 5; color dark; skin smooth with nu-

MNSROUS NORSSS wENll Coad onesecl oy ccoadaodn sosocossodesbcdcboassucccos Amblystoma.

b. Tongue attached by the anterior and posterior edges, a small part of

the lateral being free; costal grooves indistinct; vomero-palatine teeth

longitudinal and divergent behind; posterior toes, 5; tail compressed

IDO MA, [OVS OLISSS COMOWS OHM, 5.5 c¢snakso0c4ecnbasndcagwaonendoaceccaoene Notophthalmus.

ce. Tongue roundish, the anterior edge and center attached, the lateral

and posterior free; vomerine teeth in two patches; posterior toes, 5;

general'color dark; tail tapering to tip.................... .---- vibe Gate Plethodon.

d. Tongue oval, attached by the anterior edge; toes, four in front and

behind; costal grooves distinct; general color above brown; beneath

white with black spots; tail, long, round at the base and then com-

LOU REISS LEY G WU Te as Ri eect Ie En Ae URL a PU Vid oat a NCR REN Red od Hemidactylium.

e. Tongue attached by the center, the entire edge being free (boletoid)

costal grooves distinct; vomerine teeth in a tranverse row; posterior

toes, 5; color yellowish or red; tail long, tapering and compressed....Spelerpes.

AMBLYSTOMA, Tschudi.

A. opacum, Gravenhurst. Blotched Salamander.

Color above dark with tranverse bluish gray bars or blotches; head with

a triangular spot; below slaty; costal furrows or grooves, 11; no large pores

on head. L. about three inches; tail about 14 inch; rare. ‘‘Racine.” Hoy.

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin. 171

A, punctatum, L. Large Spotted Salamander.

_ Black or nearly so with bright yellow spots arranged along each side on

the dorsal furrow, which is quite distinct; skin with numerous pores which

-areenlarged and arranged in two patches on each side of the head; costal

furrows or grooves, 11; L. 6 inches; tail, 24 inches; southern part of the

state; not common.

A. tigrinum, Green. The Great or Tiger Salamander.

Everywhere dark with yellow spots whichare either round or irreg cular;

costal furrows or grooves, 11; dorsal groove quite distinct; head depressed;

L. 7 inches; tail 3 inches; common.

A. jeffersonianum, Green. The Granulated Salamander.

Variable; in general brownish or blackish with ashy spots, but ‘‘ some- |

times uniform plum” (Jordan); costal furrows 13; the furrows on the tail

extending nearly to the tip; L. 3 to 4 inches; tail 1-2 in.; Walworth county;

rare. Dr. Hoy reports them from Racine. I have reason to believe that

they may also be found in the extreme northern part of the state.

NOTOPHTHALMUS, Raf.

N. viridescens, Raf. Common Spotted Triton. Newt. Eft.

Color: olive to scarlet above, and orange to red underneath (variable);

spots on sides, vermillion enclosed in a black ring and usually in a line; be-

neath with black dots; costal grooves about 14. H. miniatus, Raf. I be-

lieve to be the same species, and I have included its characters in the above

description. I have seen the two forms at the same pond during the

breeding season, and have also noted gradations in color between the two

extremes. It seems to me highly probable that age has something to do

with the darker color; L. 3-4 inches; tail 1-2; common in brooks and ponds.

PLETHODON, Tschudi.

P. erythronotus, Green. Red Backed Salamander.

Dorsal stripe red, extending nearly the whole length of the animal; sides

cinereous; head brown above; lower jaw whitish; costal grooves or furrows

16 to 19; caudal grooves 18-22; L. 3-4 inches; tail 1-2; southern Wisconsin;

not rare.

Variety cinereous, Green.

Without the red dorsal stripe. This form may be met, and I have placed

it here as a variety merely to aid in identification for it would seem from

the investigations of our best authorities that the changes are simply those

wrought by age.

Their food consists of snails, worms and insects.

172 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

P. glutinosus, Green. Gray Spotted or Viscid S.

Above glossy black with very smail gray spots; lateral spots larger;

costal furrows 14; spotted below; in moist places; color varying with age,

there being fewer spots on old specimens; not common.

HEMIDACTYLIUM, Tschudi.

AT, scutatum, Schlegel. Four-toed Salamander.

‘Color above, brown, muzzle yellowish, limbs and tail orange brown; up-

per surface with black spots on each side scattered irregularly; beneath

white with patchy black spots,” Smith. Rare; ‘“‘ Racine.” Hoy. Habits,

Insectivorous.

SPELERPES, Rafinesque.

S. ruber, Daudin. Red Salamander. Red Triton.

Color above, intense red with small roundish black spots; color less

marked beneath; head triangular; costal grooves 14-16; L. 5 inches; tail

about 2; in damp and unfrequented swamps of southern half of state; not

rare.

S. longicaudus, Green. Cave or Long Tailed S.

Yellow spotted with dark; below spotless, yellowish; head oval; costal

furrows 18; L. 5 inches; tail 3-34 inches; Walworth county; Racine,” Hoy;

rare.

S. bilineatus, Green. Stripe-backed Salamander.

Yellowish or darker with two (or three) longitudinal black lines; below

yellowish and unspotted; costal grooves 14; L. 2-3 inches; tail 14 inches;

two or three specimens have been reported from southern Wisconsin,

** Racine,” Hoy; rare.

—

ee ee

eae UF og

m= iy} A |

- 5 ' !

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin. 173

REFERENCE AND CHECK LIST OF THE REPTILIA

AND BATRACHIA OF WISCONSIN.

REPTILIA.

LACERTILIA.

SCINCID.

Eumeces quinquelineatus, L. Blue-tailed Skink.

Eumeces septentrionalis, Baird. Northern Skink.

IGUANID 4t.

Sceloporus undulatus, Harlan. Brown Swift.

ANGUID At.

Ophiosaurus ventralis, Daudin. Glass Snake.

OPHIDIA.

CROTALIDE.

Crotalus durissus, L. Yellow Rattlesnake.

Crotalophorus tergeminus, Holb. Prairie Rattlesnake, er Massassauga.

Crotalophorus tergeminus, Var. kirtlandii, Holb. Massassauga.

COLUBRID.

Euteenia sirtalis, L. Common Garter Snake.

Huteenia sirtalis, Var. dorsalis, B & G.

Eutenia sirtalis, Var. parietalis, B & G.

Eutenia sirtalis, var. melanota, Smith.

Eutenia radix, B. & G. Hoy’s Garter Snake.

Eutenia saurita, L. Swift Garter or Ribbon Snake.

Euteenia saurita, Var. faireyi, B. & G.

Eutenia proxima, Say. Say’s Garter Snake.

Pityophis sayii, Schl. Western Pine Snake.

Storeria occipito-maculata, Storer. Red-bellied Snake.

Storeria dekayi, Holb. Little Brown Snake.

Tropidonotus rhombifer, Hallowell. Holbrook’s Water Snake.

174 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Tropidonotus sipedon, L. Water Snake, Water Adder.

Regina liberis, lL. Yellow-bellied or Leather Snake.

Regina kirtlandii, Kenicott. Little Red Snake.

Regina grahami, B. & G. Graham/’s Snake.

Heterodon platyrhinus, Latr. Blowing or Spreading Viper.

Heterodon platyrhinus, Var. niger, Catesby. Black Viper.

Heterodon simus, L. Hog-nosed Snake.

Coluber vulpinus, B. & G. Fox Snake.

Coluber obsoletus, Say. Pilot Snake or Racer.

Ophibolus triangulus, Boie. Milk Snake.

Diadophis punctatus, L. Ring-necked Snake.

Liopeltis vernalis, DeKay. Green or Grass Snake.

Bascanion constrictor, L. Blue Racer. Black Snake.

TESTUDINATA.

CISTUDINID Aa.

Cistudo clausa, Gmelin. Common Box Turtle.

Cistudo ornata, Ag. Northern Box Turtle.

CHELYDRIDA,

Chelydra serpentina, L. Common Snapping Turtle.

Macrochelys lacertina, Schw. Mississippi or Loggerhead Snapper.

EMYDIDA.

Hmys meleagris, Shaw. Blanding’s Tortoise.

Chrysemys marginata, Holb. Lady Turtle.

Chrysemys oregonensis, Holb. Prairie Turtle.

Graptemys geographica, LeS. Map Turtle.

Graptemys lesueurii, Gray. Le Sueur’s Map Turtle.

Nanemys guttatus, Ag. Spotted Turtle.

CINOSTERNID 4s.

Aromochelys odoratus, Gray. Musk Turtle.

TRIONYCHIDA.

Aspidonectes spinifer, Le S. Soft-shelled Turtle.

Amyda mutica, Le 8. Leathery Turtle.

Reptilia and Batrachia of Wisconsin.

BATRACHIA.

ANURA.

RANIDAR,

Rana halecina, Kalm. Leopard Frog.

Rana clamitans, Merrew. Green or Spring Frog.

Rana temporaria, L. Var. sylvatica, Le C. Wood Frog.

Rana catesbyana, Shaw. Bull Frog.

Rana nigrescens, Ag. Black Frog.

HYLID®. *

Chorophilus triseriatus, Willd. Little Tree Frog.

Chorophilus maculatus, Ag. Spotted Tree Frog.

Hyla versicolor, Le C. Common Tree Toad.

Hyla pickeringii, Holb. Pickering’s Tree Toad. ,

BUFONID4.

Bufo lentiginosus, Shaw, Var. Americanus, Le C. Common Toad.

URODELA.

PROTEID 4.

Menobranchus lateralis, Say. Mud Puppy.

SALIMANDRID 2.

Amblystoma opacum, Gray. Blotched Salamander.

Amblystoma punctatum, L. Large Spotted Salamander.

Amblystoma tigrinum, Green. The Great Salamander.

Amblystoma jeffersonianum, Green. Granulated Salamander.

Notophthalums viridescens, Raf. Spotted Triton.

Plethodon erythronotus, Green. Red-backed Salamander.

Plethodon erythronotus. Var. cinereus, Green. Ashy Salamander.

Plethodon glutinosus, Green. Spotted or Viscid Salamander.

Hemidactylum scutatum, Schlegel. Four-toed Salamander.

Spelerpes ruber, Daudin. Red Salmander.

Spelerpes longicaudus, Green. Cave or Long-tailed Salamander.

Spelerpes bilineatus, Green. Stripe-backed Salamander.

175

176 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

SUMMARY.

Orders. Familes. | Genera. Species. | Varieties.

Iba centilia Mercere eevee 3 3 4 MAS ee

Reptilia ...}4 Ophidia..... Pee asaatad ones 2 13 22 6

Mestuadinavarepeeee eases 5 11 AS!) | Yas] No acyeaee meen

3 SAMULA Tes ae seeders 3 4 8 Le oy

Batrachia . ueodels cae ma Ye adi 2 6 12 1

Gee oer ea 15 ok Be Ce

Raised Beaches of Lake Michigan. 177

RAISED BEACHES OF LAKE MICHIGAN.

By FRANK LEVERETT.

fhere are around the head of Lake Michigan several raised beach lines

and sea cliffs, the latter being eroded escarpments of the tall plains and

moraines. These have been discussed at some length by Dr. Edmund An-

drews, of Chicago, President of the Chicago Academy of Sciences, in a

pamphlet entitled: ‘‘ The North American Lakes Considered as Chronome-

ters of Post Glacial Time.” The portions of the raised beach lines and sea

cliffs in Cook county, Illinois, have been referred to by Mr. Bannister of

the Illinois Geological Survey, in his report on the geology of Cook county,

Vol. III, p. 240-2. Neither of these gentlemen have given the distribution

of the separate lines with sufficient detail to subserve our purpose, and slight

inaccuracies of distribution oceur in Dr. Andrews’ map which accompanies

his pamphlet. We, therefore, feel warranted in presenting here the distri-

bution and connections of the beach lines without further reference to pre-

vious publications, since our description is based upon those facts only

which we have obtained independently.

The beach lines vary in number at different points around the head of

the lake, in places there being but one or two — but elsewhere, several, and

in Lake county, Indiana, a large number. There seem, however, to be but

three lines which are maintained distinctly and vigorously for any great

distance. We shall describe these as the Upper, Middle and Lower raised

beaches.

UPPER RAISED BEACH.

Between Waukegan and Winnetka, Illinois, the lake shore is now far-

ther west than it was at the time of the formation of the upper raised beach |

for the lake is undermining undulating till ridges which show no eyi-

dence of having been submerged for any long period. North from Wau-

kegan raised beach lines are developed at intervals, but they have not been

studied with sufficient thoroughness to warrant a description. We, there-

fore, begin our description at Winnetka, in northern Cook county. An an-

cient sea cliff passes in a southerly course from the lake bluff through the

eastern part of this village. The cliff is about twenty feet in height, and

is a prominent feature in the village. Its base is very nearly 60 feet above

the present level of Lake Michigan.

Following the sea cliff south we find it soon changes to a beach line, and

gravel and sandin forms quite similar to those of the present beach lines of

i78 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

the lake are developed for a distance of six or seven miles through the

south part of Tp. 42 N., R. XIII H., and the central part of Tp. 41 N., R.

XIII E. The highest part of the beach line, or beach lines, for a series of

ridges is developed, is about 60 feet, occasionally 61 feet above Lake Michi-

gan. In the vicinity of the Chicagoriver, the elevation gradually decreases

to the level of the river bank, which is about 40 feet above Lake Michigan.

These gravel deposits of the beach line, or of succeeding beach lines which

lap onto its eastern face, have an eastward extension on the north side of

the river, so that when we cross the river to find the beach line on that side

we must go nearly two miles up the stream to catch it. This protrusion of the

sands and gravels on the north side of the stream indicates that at the time

this beach was forming the transportation of sand and gravel was southward

along the shore, and that the current from the Chicago river, which opened

into the lake at the point represented by the position of the beach line on

the south side of the river, carried the material lakeward which was

brought down by the slow moving lake current from the north. This ex-

tension is not in the form of a delta built up at the debouchure of the river

-into the lake — but lies wholly on the north side of the river valley. More--

over, to make it still more evident that it was the lake and not the river

which contributed the great bulk of the beach deposit which skirts its north

bank, we find that the river valley above the point where it entered the old

lake has very little assorted material, such as would accumulate above a

delta. The beach appears on the south side of the river in the south part

of Sec. 19, Tp. 41, R. X{I1 E. It has here avery different aspect from that

immediately across the river, being a low sea cliff, 6—15 feet in height,

with occasional deposits of beach gravels and sands along its front. The

terrace or sea cliff made by the lake, is crossed by the Wisconsin division of

the Chicago and Northwestern railway, at Norwood Park. The profile of

this road shows that the base of the sea cliff has an elevation of 45 feet, and

the top an elevation of sixty feet above Lake Michigan.

At the point where the Chicago, Milwaukee & St. Paul railway crosses

the cliff, in Sec. 32, Tp. 40, R. XIII E., the base has an elevation of 42 feet and

the top 66 feet. The Omaha division of the Chicago & Northwestern railway

crosses it at Oak Park, with an elevation of 88 feet at the base and 49 feet

at the top of the cliff, and a mile further south the Wisconsin Central rail-

road crosses a beach deposit with an elevation of 41 feet at the base and 49

feet at the top.

The sea cliff phase extends only to Oak Park, a village on the east bank

of the Des Plains river. Thesea cliff passes through the east part of the

village to the vicinity of the Chicago & Northwestern railway, where

beach gravels concealit, and we find here an extension of the beach gravel

down the east side the Des Plains river, similar to that extension down the

north side of the Chicago river. The gravel extends south from Oak Park,

in the form of a ridge, or bar, 20 to 40 rods in width and 10 feet or more in

height, for about two miles to the south part of Secs. 18 and 14, Tp. 5%

Raised Beaches of Lake Michigan. 179

R. XII E., termin iting in a club-like expansion which rises to an elevation

of about 55 feet above Lake Michigan, and nearly 20 feet above the plain

which lies east of the Des Plains river, immediately south from its terminus.

This bar or spit shows evidence, where opened, of having been built up

from the east, by successive deposits shingled on its eastern slope — which

dip with the slope. An excavation at Haas’s gravel pit which extends

from the east side of the bar west part of the center — shows beds dipping

at various angles, but all toward the east —some of the beds increase in

thickness as they descend, but the lower bed, which is mainly sand, increases

in thickness toward the deeper portion of the ridge. It appears to be a sand

bar upon which the beach deposits were built. The following section was ob-

tained at*the south-side of this gravel pit, which shows the section of that

particular place only, for Iam informed by Mr. Haas that the material of

the same bed varies greatly in coarseness within the space of a few feet,

but the dip of the beds is uniformly toward the east.

1. A brown-stained gravel at the surface extending down the slope..

Depth 18—30 inches.

2. Fine gravel (unstained) 24 inches at top, increasing to 48 inches near-*

base.

3. Sand beginning with scarcely any thickness at the top, but increas--

ing to a thickness of 36 inches at the base of the excavation.

4, A bed of fine gravel increasing like No.‘‘3” from 0—48 inches in:

thickness.

5. Fine gravel nearly four feet in thickness, which passes upward frony

near the east side of the excavation assuming a nearly horizontal position

beneath the crest of the ridge.

6. Sand at the bottom of the excavation becoming thicker toward the

higher part of the ridge. Depth 6—36 ‘inches.

Molluscan shells thought to be Unios, and also smaller shells have been

found in No. ‘‘ 6,” but none of these were at hand at the time of my visit.

Mr. Haas afterwards sent an oyster shell which was imbedded in No. ‘‘ 6,”

and near it was the tooth of a mammoth. If the oyster shell has not been

artificially introduced it suggests much as to a salt water lake. It is possi-

ble that the shells thought by Mr. Haas to be Unios, were salt water mol-

lusks. We learned of no other instance of the occurrence of molluscan re-

mains along this upper beach.

Passing now to the west side of the Des Plains river we find about a

mile above the southern end of the bar just described a low sea cliff or lake

margin bearing in a curved course through Sec. 14, across the north side

of Sec. 22, and then northwest into Sec. 16, Tp. 39, R. XII E. This is so

low a beach that it scarcely attracts notice, being in places but 2—4 feet in

height, but it has the continuity and horizontality of base that marks fossil

lake shores.

A tributary of Salt Creek has removed the traces of the old shore west

from Sec. 15. The beach comes to the swale which the stream follows.

180 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Passing south about a mile we find the beach well defined in the north-

‘west part of Sec. 28, of this township on the south side of Salt Creek. It

‘is here a beach ridge composed of sand and gravel, and rises 10—12 feet

above the border of the plain on the east. The beach line is 30—40 rods

wide, and extends nearly one mile south from Salt Creek when the gravel

disappears, and a sea cliff marks the continuation of the shore. The bank

tidge is excavated about 40 rods from the north end in a similar way to

that at Haas’s pit; the excavation being from the east side of the beach

west nearly to the outer slope. The excavation is 12—14 feet deep in the™

deepest part, and reveals a series of beds dipping slightly toward the east.

The upper 5—6 feet is a brown-stained gravel. The lower portion is a fine

gravel with sandy portions almost free from gravel. These sandy portions

are not so calcareous as glacial sands. A slight effervescence was obtained

in but one or two tests, out of a dozen or more. The gravel is made up of

worn pebbles comprising nearly every class found in the drift of the vicin-

ity. There is not such a predominance of limestone pebbles as in the

kaves of the neighboring moraines. The nature of the gravel is very simi-

lar in Haas’s gravel pit to that in the one just described.

A sea cliff passes south from the beach ridge just described, through La

Grange. At the point where it is crossed by the C., B. & Q. Ry. its base is

46 and its top 64 feet above Lake Michigan. Thiscliff continues in a south-

easterly course from La Grange to the west border of the Des Plaines

river valley, having a height of 10—15 feet throughout the greater part of

the course. It swings down the river and becomes a part of its bluff —

from a point almost directly west from the village of Summit, near the

corners of Secs. 10, 11,14 and 15, Tp. 38, R. XII EH.

Before continuing our discription of the distribution of the upper beach

it will be necessary to say a word respecting the outlets of Lake Michigan at

that time — since the beach lines are open opposite these outlets. There were

two channels of discharge into the Des Plaines valley. The most northerly

one had its western border, as stated above, about two miles west of Sum-

mit, and its eastern border was about three miles south from Summit, where

the river enters the Valparaiso moraine. Between these points the water

from the lake entered the channel now occupied by the Des Plaines river.

Another avenue of discharge into this valley was through what is known as

“‘the sag,” a low belt of marshy land about one-half mile in width, which

passes almost centrally through Tp. 37 N., R. XII E., from east to west, and

opens into the Des Plaines valley in Sec. 14, Tp. 37, R. XI E., at Say

Bridge Station. Between these two outlets is a prominent portion of the

Valparaiso moraine whose base shows evidence on all sides that it was

washed by the waters of the lake, the rise from the plain on the east being

nearly as abrupt as the bluff of the Des Plaines river on the west or the

border of the sag on the south. The sea cliff which was formed around

this moraine is flanked occasionally by gravel and sand deposits similar to

those found farther north along the sea cliff which was cut in the plain.

Raised Beaches of Lake Michigan. 181

South of the sag a sea cliff was formed along the foot of the Valparaiso

moraine for about 15 miles southeast from the Des Plaines valley, the

sag itself lying near the foot of the moraine for 10 miles or more. The

Wabash railroad rises onto the moraine from the sag, whose elevation, as

shown by its profile, is but 16 feet above Lake Michigan. The gravel

flanking the high land each side of the sag indicates that a depth of 40—50

feet of water passed througn it at the time of the formation of the upper

beach lines.

The plain in Tp. 36 N., R. XIII E., which lies between the sag and the

moraine, rises toward the moraine quite rapidly, its border next the mo-

raine being 50 feet above Lake Michigan at the point where the C., R. I,

and P. Ry. passes from the plain to the moraine. The sea cliff here rises

28 feet above the plain or 78 feet above Lake Michigan. It is not probable,

however, that the water stood as high as the top of the cliff. There is

evidence along the border of the moraine, a short distance east, that it was

some five feet or more in depth —for sand and gravel deposits flank the’

moraine to about this elevation above the level of the plain.

In the northwest part of Sec. 25, Tp. 36 N., R. XIII E., a beach line

leaves the border of the moraine, and from this point southeast to the state

line near Dyer, Indiana, it lies one to two miles north. The Illinois Cen-

tral railroad crosses it about one mile north of Homewood. The top of the

ridge is 65 feet above Lake Michigan (as shown in the profile of this rail-

road). The beach deposits cover a width of nearly a mile where crossed by

this railroad, and their north border is but 41 feet above Lake Michigan.

The highest portion of the ridge is mainly sand, and evidently was drifted

by the wind so that its crest is now several feet above the water level at

the time of the formation of the beach.

At the crossing of the Chicago and Eastern Illinois Railroad near Glen-

wood, the crest of the ridge is 55 feet above Lake Michigan. The ridge

maintains about the same elevation to Dyer, Indiana. A sea cliff flanked

by beach gravels is developed near the state line.

Before taking up the description of this beach in Indiana we will note

the effect produced by the lake upon ‘‘ Blue island,” a till ridge running

north from Blue Island village, some five or six miles. It is evident that

this till ridge was an island in the old lake, for its border is very abrupt like

a sea cliff and its surface is billowy. Furthermore flanking nearly the

whole of the western face —there are beach deposits — whose base is 35-—

45 feet above Lake Michigan. Toward the north end of the ridge the sand

has drifted into dunes, a few of which attain an elevation of 80 feet above

Lake Michigan, but the beach gravels were nowhere observed to have an

elevation to exceed 55 feet above the lake. From the north end of the

ridge a bar composed of both sand and grayel extends out across the plain

ina W.S. W. direction for more than a mile. The plain is about 45 feet

above Lake Michigan, and the bar rises in plains to an elevation of 15 feet

above this plain. This was evidently formed in the lee of the ridge and is

182 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

an indication that the waters flowed west past the north end of Blue island,

at the time when the bar was formed.

The upper beach in Indiana presents a very different aspect except at the

‘immediate border of the two states from what it has in Illinois, for it is

composed mainly of sand, and the sand has drifted into prominent dunes

.and ridges which have frequently an elevation of 25 feet or more above the

plains which lie south of them, and still higher above those on their north

face. The elevation of the plains which lie immediately south of the sand

ridges seldom exceeds 60 feet above Lake Michigan. It is evident, there-

fore, that the level of the lake was not more than 60 feet at the time of the

formation of this beach, though its dunes have sometimes an elevation of

80 feet above Lake Michigan.

From Dyer, a sea cliff flanked by beach gravels passes nearly due east,

changing within two miles to a ridge of dunes. This ridge of dunes passes

through Schereville and extends east of this village about two miles when

‘it quite suddenly terminates on a till plain in the east part of Sec. 12, Tp. 35

ridge a mile or more beyond the old lake border, for passing northwest to

the vicinity of Griffith, a distance of a mile or more, we find the lake

border marked by another line of dunes or rather a belt comprising several

more or less continuous lines of dunes trending W. S. W., E. N. E. in the

same direction as the course of the Joliet division of the Michigan Central

railroad from Griffith to Lake—and thence along the main line of the

Michigan Central railroad for about five miles farther east. The belt is 1

and 14 miles in width and lies almost entirely on the south side of these

railroad lines. Near Liverpool this belt is joined by the line of dunes which

represents the middle raised beach, and from this village eastward the two

ranches are closely associated. Near the crossing of the Baltimore and

Ohio and Michigan Central railroads, a sudden deflection in the direction of

the dune ridges occurs. The whole belt comprising here four main ridges

and several smaller ones suddenly swerves from an E. N. E. to a nearly due

north course—and passes north to the Calumet marsh, at the border of

which all the ridges suddenly terminate. North of this marsh the lower

beach ridges, or at least ridges which are quite continuous with those far-

ther west that are evidently later than the upper and middle beaches, oc-

cupy the interval between the present beach of the lake and the till tracts

which lie south of the system of raised beaches. We consequently find no

indications on the north side of Calumet river, nor indeed in the portion of

Indiana east from there that these beaches remain, for the sands of the

lower beach conceal everything. In Michigan, however, we find traces of

the earlier beaches, some of which have been mentioned in the preceding

chapter. The till ridge which lies east of New Buffalo, has gravel in indis-

tinct ridges at intervals on its western slope— the highest observed deposits

being about 60 feet above Lake Michigan.

North of Galvin river in Secs. 36 and 25, Tp. 7S. R. XXI W., is a beach

Raised Beaches of Lake Michigan. 183

line running from the bluffs of the Galvin river valley, north to the lake

bluff. Its elevation at the lake bluff is about 55 feet, by aneroid deter-

mination, above the present lake level. This probably represents the Up-

per beach.

At several points between these ‘‘ clay banks” in Sec. 30, Tp. 75., R. XX

W., and Sawyer in Sec. 2, of the same township, the gravels on the river

slope of the till ridge, which passes from the clay banks northward are in

the forms of beach lines. They occur at an elevation as great as the track

of the Chicago and Western Michigan railroad, which is 55-60 feet at sev-

eral points where comparisons could be made. One of the best developed

fragments of a beach line may be seen 100 rods or more west of the depot

at Sawyer, where it is crossed by a wagon road. No beach lines were ob-

served north from Sawyer, which will be included with the Upper beach

deposits, but occasionally the slopes of till ridges were coated slightly

by gravel at elevations about the same as those of the Upper beach —i. e.,

— 55 feet or more above Lake Michigan.

The lake bluffs north from St. Joseph were examined with reference to

finding the elevation to which the gravels occur, both in eroded dunes and

above till bluffs, but nowhere were any deposits found at a height ex-

ceeding 35 feet above the lake. Quite frequently eroded dunes exposed

gravel to an elevation of 20—35 feet, but this is probably to be classed with

the gravels of the middle and lower beaches.

THE MIDDLE BEACH.

We find it necessary to explain the general surface features of a tract

north of the Chicago river before attempting to give the distribution of the

beach lines which border it. There is a till plain lying east of the portion

of the upper beach that lies north of this river. Its western border is 30

feet or more above the level of Lake Michigan. This till plain has a width

of two to four miles, and descends toward the east to an elevation of but

10—15 feet above the lake. East of this till plain there is a prominent beach

line rising to an elevation of 30—35 feet above Lake Michigan. The plain

therefore appears to be bordered by two beach lines, the one on the west

being 40 feet more or less above the level of the lake, while that on the east

is 30-35 feet. Taking up now the distribution of these beach lines we can

best describe the western one as lying along the eastern face of the portion

of the upper beach north of Chicago river, differing from it only in eleva-

tion, andin having a more easterly extension down the north side of Chi-

cago river. Theeastern beach line leaves the lake bluff about two miles

north of Evanston and passes nearly due south for some seven miles to

Rose Hill cemetery. At the cemetery it makes an abrupt turn to a course

slightly south of west and extends to Bowmanville in Sec. 12, Tp. 40 N., R.

XII E., where it drops down quite suddenly near the bank of the Chicago

river. It does not reappear on the opposite side of the river. The interval

between the eastern end of this ridge and the western terminus of the spur-

184 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

like prolongation of the western beach line down the north side of the river

is fully 14 miles. This inward curving of the southern ends of the two

beach lines diminishes the distance between the ridges one-half, but still

leaves so wide a gap that the connection of the eastern ridge with the ser-

ies of raised beaches is not yet satisfactorily determined.

No good exposure was found in the western beach line, but the eastern

has a diagonal exposure of its whole vertical section at the lake bluff. Por-

tions of the plain which lies immediately west of this ridge are covered

with peat, and we find that at the exposure along the lake a peat bed

which lies near the surface just west of the ridge, passes under the ridge

as shown in the following section and description.

Section near beach line beneath plain which borders it on the west:

1 (Soiltandseray Sang eon ay caveats sic ee oes eels Meer eaoete) Tie crate tetas een ee 12-15 inches

Qe SPO artis ene Sse Ap cis eo aici zyevevpatansqeyers ais seers tlaehess ovapien sels a eran el a oie rererer ae RARER OTE 2- 3 inches

BS 5! Gravelly {Sen dl sae 2 Secs aisccis, wich sides ns ete reiee Mea lavesre laters iota joie racetarss arahene tooeiove elec teke erat erreee 6-86 inches.

4° yiellowapebblyaclayanvenyacal caneOUSie eae eee err reeee eee aee ener 11-12 feet

The clay No. ‘‘4” assumes a bluish cast near the bottom, just above the

water’s edge. Its upper surface is eroded, and No. ‘‘3” has filled up the

old channels or irregularities in its surface. It is for this reason that it

varies so much in depth. No ‘‘3” contains blocks of limestone 8-10 inches

in diameter, but the majority of its pebbles are small.

_ As we go from this exposure through the exposed section of the beach,

we find the sand which overlies the peat bed in the above section, increases

in thickness as soon as the ridge is entered. When it attains a thickness of

about five feet, a coarse gravel and cobble appears above the sand. This

cobble-gravel is a thin bed at first, but increases toa thickness of 11—12 feet

beneath the highest part of the beach ridge, and has here layers of sand in-

terstratified with it. The bed of sand which lies beneath this gravel has

a depth of some ten feet or more beneath the deepest portion of the ridge.

It is underlain by a peat bed, the continuation of the peat which lies near .

the surface west of the ridge, as is shown in the above section. The peat

bed has slight breaks in it beneath the beach ridge, but can be easily fol-

lowed at a quite definite horizon entirely through it. It is 3—6 inches in

thickness. It contains pieces of mangled wood beneath the higher portions

of the ridge. Between this peat bed and the yellowish blue till which

forms the base of the exposure, there is a gravelly sand 6—18 inches in

depth. The till rises about 12 feet above the level of the lake. The eleva-

tion of the crest of the beach ridge is about 35 feet above Lake Michigan.

The peat bed is found along the lake shore east of this beach, near the

surface, as it is west of the beach. The beach appears, therefore, to have

been built upon a submerged land surface. There is probably significance

in the fact that the peat only extends a few rods west from the beach

ridge, but fringes it on this border for several miles. East of the beach the

peat occupies a considerable portion of the interval between this and a

Raised Beaches of Lake Michigan. 185

Lower beach which is described later, and it was observed beneath this

lower ridge in the same situation as beneath the ridge just described. The

writer has not been able thus far to satisfy his own mind with any theory

explaining the burying of this peaty surface beneath these lake beaches

If the beaches were composed entirely of sand, their material might have

been drifted beyond the lake border and covered the adjacent lands, but there

is here a heavy deposit of coarse gravel capping the beach, which certainly

could not be drifted by the wind. It might seem easy to account for the

phenomena by supposing that there have been oscillations of level with

periods of emergence followed by periods of submergence, but we found

no evidences of such oscillations elsewhere. The limitation of the peat to

the immediate border of the beach also presents difficulties in forming an

explanation under hypotheses which have thus far arisen. The writer has

attempted to conceive a method by which a protective bar could have been

built wp into the form which this beach line presents, but has not been suc-

cessful.

Continuing now the distribution and description of the Middle beach

from the Chicago river southward, we find that the western Middle beach

repeats the phenomena of the Upper beach in swinging down the north

side of the Chicago river so that when we cross the river to find its con-

tinuation we must pass up stream some two miles. The Middle beach is

well developed immediately north of Jefferson, in Sec. 9, Tp. 40, R. XIII E.

It has here an elevation of 40 feet above Lake Michigan, and is therefore

as elevated as the portion of the beach immediately opposite, and some

5—10 feet higher than the spur referred to above as extending eastward

along the north side of the river.

This beach line has a course varying slightly to the east and west of

south through Cragin’s and Austin to the south part of Secs. 16 and 17,

Tp. 39, R. XIIC E., when it assumes a southeasterly course to the Des

Plaines river, at Riverside. The following are the elevations of the crest

of this beach at points crossed by railway lines: Jefferson, 40 feet;

Cragin’s, 38 feet; Austin, 38 feet; Wisconsin Central crossing (west side of

Sec, 16, Tp. 39, R. XIII E.) 38 feet; Riverside, 40 feet.

This portion of the beach line between the Chicago and Des Plaines

rivers seldom rises more than 6—7 feet above the plain, which borders it

on the east, and but 2—3 feet above that on the west. It is a low beach,

coated by beach gravels 1—2 feet in depth, with an occasional depth of

6—8 feet. This bench is a noticeable feature on the level plain, though its

elevation is so slight, and its course is well shown by a narrow belt of tim-

ber, which follows it across the otherwise treeless prairie.

Between Riverside and Summit is the old outlet of Lake Michigan into

the Des Plaines valley. At Summit there is a prominent beach line turn-

ing down the east bluff of the Des Plaines river, which traced eastward

from this opening into the river valley, takes a more or less direct course

toward the north end “ Blue island till ridge,” and keeping slightly north

186 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

of this till ridge, it swings around to its eastern side, and bearing away

from its southern end, comes to the Calumet river near Riverdale. Its ele-

vation at Summit is 40 feet; at Washington Heights, 41 feet; but at sev-

eral points between these villages a survey made by the Chicago Drainage

Commission, reports its elevation as 35 feet above Lake Michigan.

The best exposure of the structure of this portion of the beach is found at

Summit. An extensive excavation is made near the curving portion of

the beach, just as it is about to turn down the River Valley. The beds of

gravel dip toward the north with alow angle (10—15°). There is but little

sand with the gravel. Fora short distance the excavation shows a depth

of 20 feet of beach deposits, but in passing eastward the pebbly clay which

underlies them rises perceptibly. The gravel is brown, stained to a depth

of 3—4 feet from the surface. Below this depth it is unstained. It is

but slightly caleareous, even in the finer sandy portions. The pebbles sel-

dom exceed one inch in diameter. They are worn smooth like those along

the present beach of the lake.

We are told that shells of Unios and of smaller mollusks, also fragments

of wood, have been found at the base of the gravels, but none were at hand

at the time of our visit. Portions of the beach east of Blue Island are

quite sandy.

South from the Calumet river this beach has a wide break, for the lake

discharged past the south end of Blue Island through the sag into the

Des Plaines river valley. The outlet from Blue Island, west to the point

where the sag narrows to pass through the Valparaiso moraine, has a

width of no less than three miles. Its north border is well marked in the

form of a sea cliff, on the north side of the sag, and on the south it washed

the foot of the Valparaiso moraine. An island locally known as Lane’s

Island, les in this outlet, and its borders are flanked by gravelly deposits,

to an elevation of about 35 feet above Lake Michigan. This island ap-

parently, was submerged at the time when the upper beach was formed,

for its surface is very level and has a coating of sand. Similarly, a large

tract of land west of Blue Island, which was not submerged at the time of

the formation of the Middle beach, was covered by the lake at the epoch

of the Upper beach.

We were interested in noting a boulder-strewn belt occupying the por-

tion of the sag outlet, just east of the Valparaiso moraine. The boulders

in places, number several thousand per acre, so that it is very difficult to

till the soil. They are both Paleozoic and Archaen. They may, many of

them, have been dropped by ice-floes at the time of the lake expansion,

for the configuration of the channel west from here, is such as to impede

a free discharge into the Des Plaines valley, but a portion of them prob-

ably, were dropped there by the glacier, at a much earlier period, for other

gaps in the moraines, similar to the sag, where the lake had no outlet,

often have a large number of boldersin them. ¢

The lake at the epoch of the Middle beach, probably extended nearly as far

Raised Beaches of Lake Michigan. 187

south as at the time of the Upper beach, for no beach lines were observed

west of the Illinois Central railroad. Hast from this railway, however, a

well-defined beach exists. It assumes sufficient prominence to be notice-

able in Secs. 27 and 28, Tp. 36, R. XIV E., there being on these sections

a low beach 10—15 feet high, a portion of which is a rocky escarpment,

but the remainder is till across Thorn Creek, from the east end of this

bench in Sec. 35 of the same township, a beach line of much strength is

developed. It is40—80 rods wide, and has dunes 20 feet or more in heighth.

Tt has a nearly due east course for three miles in Illinois, passing through

the village of Lansing. It continues into Indiana with the same course,

lying along the north border of Cady marsh, to the eastern end of the

marsh, thence it continues with a cousre slightly north of east to Liver-

pool, where it becomes associated with the Upper beach lines, and its

further distribution is given in connection with those beaches. The

Indiana portion of this beach west of its junction with the Upper beaches,

is asingle ridge of sand slightly pebbly in places. It drifts into dunes at

several points, but none were observed whose height exceeds 40 feet

above the plain at the base of the ridge. The ridge where not drifted into

dunes, issome 15 feet above its immediate base, and has a width of 40

rods more or less. Its elevation at Lansing, Illinois, is 43 feet above Lake

Michigan. No other elevations are at hand at time of writing.

Between this beach line and the Calumet river there is a plain underlain

by pebbly clay, and having scarcely any coating of sand or gravel. The beach

deposits seldom extend more than 80 rods north from the base of the ridge.

THE LOWER BEACH.

The most northerly point at which this beach has been identified is at

Evanston, Illinois. It rises here nearly 25 feet above the lake, and

has at its northern extremity a width of 30 rods or more. It passes

through the eastern part of the city of Evanston, and its course from Evans-

ton to Ravenswood is nearly south. From Ravenswood it bears slightly

east of south, to Lincoln Park in the north part of Chicago, and passes

through the western part of this park. In the early days of Chicago, the

ridge was developed at intervals through the eastern part of the city, but

all traces are now removed. In the southeast part of Chicago, and in

Hyde Park, the beach has not been removed. Between Hyde Park and En-

glewood it is well developed, having an extreme elevation of 19 feet

above the lake. From Englewood it passes south through Sec. 21, to

the center of Sec. 28, Tp. 38 N., R. XIV E. South from here it is a low

belt of land }—#mile in width, and rising scarcely 10 feet above Lake Michi-

gan, which connects the low lands west of Chicago, and in the Stock Yards

in the southwest part of Chicago, with the low land along Lake Michigan,

near Lake Calumet.

South from this low belt there are two beaches, neither of which are

the exact equivalents in height of the ridge we have just traced. The in-

nermost of these beaches extends from the head of Lake Calumet, east of

Pulman, northwest to the vicinity of South Lynn. In is a bench 4—6 feet

188 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

in height, capped by a slight deposit of beach gravels. Its elevation is but,

12 feet above Lake Michigan, for two miles or more from Lake Calumet,

but further west it is 15—20 feet. Low as it is, it marks a quite distinct

change in the surface deposit. On its east side is a sand deposit, 1-18 feet

in depth, but on the west there is a pebbly clay, except along beach lines

already described.

A second beach lies about a mile west from the one just described. It is a

bench or low sea cliff 10-12 feet in height along its southern part, but less

in the northern part. It can be traced easily from the Calumet river, near

Riverdale, north through Kensington, to the northwest corner of Sec. 15,

Tp. 37 N., R. XIV W., where it merges into the plain which borders it.

South of the Calumet river, in Riverdale, is a ridge of sand and gravel

which is probably of the same age asthe bench at Kensington. It has a

course almost due southeast to the Indiana line, entering that state about

14 miles south of Hammond.

An interesting problem arises as to the outlet of Lake Michigan at the

time the lower beach was forming. There may have been a narrow outlet

through the Calumet, from Riverdale to Blue Island, and thence through

“the sag,” into the Des Plaines valley. There may have been another from

near Lake Calumet, just between the Englewood beach and the low benches

above described, into the Chicago river near the Union Stock Yards, and

thence west through a marshy tract called ‘‘ Mud Lake,” to the Des Plaines

river. There may also have been an outlet via the Chicago river, through

the city to ‘‘ Mud Lake,” and thence into the Des Plaines valley. There are

no points along any of these low belts that exceed 16 feet above the present

level of the lake, and those via. ‘‘ Mud Lake” are in no case above 10 feet.

Probably the whole region in and near Chicago, whose elevation is 15 feet

or less above Lake Michigan, was covered with water at the time when

this beach was forming. It is also probable that the outlet at the north end

of Lake Michigan was opened during the period when the lower beach was

forming, if it had not opened previous to that time.

We are indebted to Prof. Oliver Marcy, of Evanston, fora Carona section

of the beach at the lakeshore in Evanston, made in 1864, at which time

there was a peculiarly good exposure. The section was exposed north of

Heck Hall, at the border of the University campus: .

fi Surbaceysoilis Sandy spa eileen me Uke LS Te nee Aas oe cea aL ne 1144 feet

PA] Syconivaaliste nant: aX brabaveyed ene Woe hue Abe ban Jel on Bes senha bond cuacods 2% feet

3.4 Coarsemenravel, Strabinied mewn ful ed etude ine era Nha ni arn cae 246 feet

4 INE | San diqennw uct ener Soudcasioang sebanosesdancogbososegascaba cmp anoSases 2 feet

Dw Gravelcontainineubonesloted CCLaeane seer a een term ern eee ante Leanne 1% feet

GS ebine}sand(contaimin foal kalo o:Sipes eyes eee eae ps ee ers 14% feet

7. Peat or carbanaceous earth, with a marl bed containing molluscan shells

in the lower portion, or interstratified with the peat.......... ........... 11% feet

Bo Gavel samara th AeGh oS epal ice nna e Saath ey USS sir tLt ate teen i SC ar de 314 feet

Ch Jehpnaaybiss oll yaar Celene nbbaey o) yay! Moyes 65 ose Gdacoondeoseeocadeunscdoces vooce 4-6 inches

10. Yellow clay laminated and contorted—containing pockets of gravel..... 314 feet

alts Bluerpeb liye) ary: aise iat ee ele ae cette OPS clea Sra toes eh AG A 2 feet

PTS S IG NOL SOUL Byes ors he ee AE UA TN Wa ate ages, Ce ana gE 22 ~=feet

Raised Beaches of Lake Michigan. 189

Prof. Marcy has representatives of the above beds in their natural order,

in a glass cylinder. MHealso has the organic remains referred to. The bone

is a portion of the femur of a deer —(species not determined). The oak

wood is well preserved but the cedar ismangled and slivered. Prof. Marcy

also has specimens of mollusks collected from the marl beds associated with

the peat in No. ‘*7” of the above section. The following are specifically

identified —1. Planorbiscampanulatus. 2. Planorbispava. 3. Amnicola

hinosa. 4. Pisidium dubium. 5. Cyclas sulrata.

Unios of various sizes occur, which are not specifically identfied. There

are also other molluscan remains not included in the above species.

Mr. H. M. Bannister of the Illinois Geological Survey, mentions the fossils

found in these beach lines in Vol. III, p. 242, of the Illinois Geological Reports.

He states that there are found existing, species of Unio, Pisidium, Physa,

Lymna, Planorbis, Volvata, Amnicola, Milantho and Ancylus.

A partial exposure at the point on the shore represented by Prof. Marcy’s

section abave given, was examined by the writer in 1887, and the following

section obtained:

Hee MEMO wusSheredaG@ron-staimed) iSandiis samen seeps esreiclstistteielaliniiereieericietiaiac 3-5 feet

Pan Orot DOS MrON OLS STAMULA sats eleisyaciaia sioisicic cle eeielneieeres ais einer Nels oieveictene= 4-6 inches

Grave leyApnubedsOtiSand) TNCIGEd a) 2. sel. cacao eeahseeioce nae Det Tee

The stratification is very irregular in thickness and assorting very imper-

fect) — “

Woarselsan Geno ue al eareousiys rasa tesrehe tacit ners ras eae tera) ee 6-12 inches

iby (OEIKCG Wa YOIUISM HOE Hols tae Glee Creche by Eas RET TOTES Ces ONTO REE 3 inches

6. Yellow clay very calcareous with leaves embedded.......................... 3 inches

(a CAnbOnaceQusipaAndemopncalcaneOuSi. sane tie tie ere sone eee 2inches

SOV elowscalcarcousiGlay SunllarGOINOns Opiae ane anemone co eee ee eee 4-6 inches

9. Band of carbonaceous material not calcareous... ............2.ecececcceecee 2 inches

10. Brown sand with twigs and peaty material..............c.ccccccccccecececs 8-10 inches

Dama LUC LAURIN ONS UT Cle sees reper ct a eens ALN at Re i he gi ta I Ra pe

Talus obscures the lower portion of the bluff. Nos. ‘6” and ‘‘8” contain

gasteropod shells.

Several exposures of Nos. ‘‘6—9” were noted along the lake bluff further

north. They were found well developed at outcrops beyond, i. e., further

northwest than the outcrops of beach deposits, which overlie them in the

above section. Beneath them is a yellowish sand four feet or more in

depth, and beneath the sand resting upon a pebbly clay is an occasional

outcrop of humus soil, probably No. ‘‘9” of Prof. Marcy’s section.

In acut where the wagon road comes down to the lake shore, south of

the Evanston waterworks, the peat beds pass back into the peaty soils of the

low land west of this beach ridge. The connection of this peaty bed with

that beneath the eastern ridge of the middle beach, has already been dis-

cussed in connection with that ridge.

-The profile of Fullerton Avenue conduit in the north part of Chicago

shows the depth of sand and gravel through the entire width of the deposit

between the lake shore and Chicago river. The ridge portion of the lower

190 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

beach lies 1,400—2,100 feet from the lake shore, and the maximum depth

of sand (25 feet), is about 1,700 feet from the lake. On the west border

from 2,100—2,600 feet, the depth is about 17 feet, and from 2,600—6,000 feet

it averages about 12 feet in depth. From the latter point westward the

depth gradually decreases and the sand disappears 1,900 feet east from the

Chicago river. From the inner border of the beach ridge, to the lake shore

a distance of 1,400 feet, the deposits are about 18 feet in depth. At the

water’s edge the depth is but 10 feet. The profile continues out 1,100 feet

beneath the lake and there is but three feet of sand and gravel at its termi-

nus. The deposit throughout is mainly sand, but some gravel was en-

countered. Shells of Unios and other moliusks were imbedded at frequent

intervals throughout nearly the whole width of the deposit. Beneath these

beach deposits there is everywhere a pebbly blue-gray clay, and no difference

could be detected in emerged and submerged portions. This pebbly clay is

described in a previous chapter.

In Hyde Park, the lower beach contains much more gravel than is shown

in the Fullerton Avenue profile. The width of the system of raised beaches

between Hyde Park and Englewood, is fully one mile, and between these

beaches and the present beach, the surface is covered with sand and gravel.

At Riverdale the beach deposits are scarcely four feet in depth, but at

Dolton Junction they are eight feet and two miles east ef Dolton, the

depth along the west of the ridge is 12—15 feet, and at the state line it is

reported to be about 24 feet. The whole surface from Lake Calumet south

to the beach ridge just alluded to, is covered with sand, the depth of which

in places isat least 18 feet. The whole interval in fact between the lower

raised beach and the present lake shore is covered with sand, not only in

Illinois, but also in Indiana and Michigan, as will appear on a subsequent

page. Its separation from the present beach is merely a matter of eleva-

tion, apparently, consequent upon the gradual lowering of the level of the

lake.

The beach which enters Indiana about 14 miles south of Hammond, passes

east through the villages of Hessville, Tolbston and Miller, lying 1—2 miles

north of the Little Calumet, and about an equal distance south of the

Grand Calumet river. East from Miller the beach is quite continuous as

far as Michigan City, lymg 1—2} miles back from the present beach.

East from Michigan City there are only fragmentary beach lines, the dis-

tribution of which will be given presently.

Between the beach just described and the present beach, there are in

Lake County, Indiana, a series of lower beach lines separated by narrow

swamps, which fill the whole interval between the lake and the beach,

leaving no such broad level tracts as occur between the Middle and Lower

beaches along the Little Calumet and between the Upper and Middle

beaches along Caeby marsh. On the meridian of Hessville, there are not

fewer than thirty of these lower beach lines. These beaches are more

closely associated with the main Lower beach in Porter county, for the

Raised Beaches of Lake Michigan. 191

interval between this beach and the lake is much narrower than in Lake

county. These minor beach lines are but a few feet.in height, and 6—10

rods in width. At their western ends they are lost in the sandy plain

which borders Wolf Lake, Lake Calumet and other small lakes near the

state line or the borders of Lake Michigan. It is probable that these beach

lines have each in turn shut off portions of the lake lagoons, and thus

made encroachments upon it. They were probably built up as bars, work-

ing their way westward along the coast, for the shore currents at the

present day are carrying sand across the south end of the lake in a west-

erly course, and building up broad branches at the head of the lake.

By reference to the Illinois beach lines it will be seen that from Chicago

south, the beach which formerly bore west of south to Englewood, has by

gradual accretions along its eastern border, been built out several miles to

the eastward. The shore currents on the west side of the lake are south-

ward, and consequently they unite with the westerly currents on the south

shore to build up a broad beach at the head of the lake; near the state line

between Illinois and Indiana. Between the western ends of the low

- beaches in Lake county, Indiana, and the southern ends of the beach lines

near Englewood, in Illinois, is a low sand-covered tract occupied by sev-

eral small lakes, and nowhere rising to the height of the beach lines, much

of it being scarcely five feet above the level of Lake Michigan. This was

apparently an open bay at the time these bar-like beaches were forming,

but has now become filled with sand, leaving Lake Calumet and other

lakelets and ponds as remnants of its waters.

The shores of the lake at the present day are not stationary. In one

place encroachments are made upon the bordering shores while in adjacent

portions of the shore accretions and accumulation is going on. Thus from

Waukegan to Evanston, Illinois, the bluffs are undermined and removed

at arapid rate, but from Evanston, south to the head of the lake, the ac-

cumulation along the beach is greater than the removal. On the opposite

side of the lake from Langatuck, Michigan, to a point on the shore some

ten miles southwest from Michigan City, Indiana, the removal is greater

than the accumulation, but as is shown above, the accumulation exceeds

the removal along the remainder of the south shore. The projecting points

along the lake are undermined more rapidly than the heights, so that the

lake tends toward a more regular outline by its erosive power, and as we

have seen above the bay-like elongation at the head of the lake has been

greatly reduced since the epoch of the main lower beach, so that the lake

is also tending toward a smoother outline by its depositing power.

The lower beach in Indiana is composed mainly of sand— gravel being

found only in its deeper portions. The sand has drifted into dunes through-

out the entire length of the beach lines in this state —so that elevations

taken along the crest of the main ridge do not show the height at which

the lake stood during its formation. By aneroid determinations there is a

range of more than 50 feet in the elevation of this crest, some portions be-

192 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and. Letters.

ing 80 feet or more, while other portions are but 30 feet above Lake Mich-

igan. The depth of sand at the powder works near Miller, is 32 feet.

Beneath the sand is gravel and sand in which are shells of mollusks called

snail shells by the well-digger, who reported them. The elevation of the

surface is probably not more than 50 feet above Lake Michigan. |

Gravel has been encountered near the bottom of wells along the ridge

in several instances; the writer has no means of computing accurately

the elevation above Lake Michigan, but it is certainly not more than 20

feet. The Lower beach in Michigan occurs at intervals only. It consists

of dunes and low sandy ridges lying back of the dunes of the present

beach, which form a bold front along much of the Michigan shore. They

are usually separated from these higher dunes by marshy belts, but some-

times lie immediately back of them. Their height seldom exceeds 40 feet,

while the dunes along the shore are in some cases 125 feet or more in

height.

The most southerly development of these older ridges in Michigan is

found on the east side of the Michigan Central railroad in New Buffalo

township, where they extend for more than a mile along the railroad.

North from here no ridges of this epoch were noticed south of the clay

banks, in Tp. 7S., R. XXIV, but north from there to the vicinity of St.

Joseph, dunes were noted at frequent intervals lying east of the belt along

the shore. A similar distribution of two series of dunes was noted west of

Carrot, in Van Buren county. Further north this Lower beach was not

thus identified. Occasionally gravel deposits are exposed along the lake

shore, capping the till at elevations of 10—20 feet, which may represent this

epoch, but quite as frequently these deposits, as has been already noted,

rise to heights corresponding with the elevation of the Middle beach (80—35

feet above Lake Michigan). The main development of the raised beaches,

not only of this epoch, but of all epochs, is found in Illinois and Indiana,

for it is only around the head of the lake that the land has gained more

than it has lost since the epoch of the first (Upper) beach.

The Reduction of Transit Observattons. 193

ON THE EMPLOYMENT OF THE MELHOD OF LEAST SQUARES

IN THE REDUCTION OF TRANSIT OBSERVATIONS.

By Pror. T. H. SAFFORD, WILLIAMSTOWN, Mass.

In longitude work upon the continent of Europe the polar stars employed

to find the azimuth and collination of the transit are usually within a few

degrees of the north pole. Each such star gives a value of the azimuth,

and three are generally observed each evening, in reversed positions of the

instrument; while the time-stars are, according to the instructions, twenty

or more in number, arranged symmetrically about the polars, in such man-

ner as to give opportunity for two exchanges of signals. The declinations

of these time-stars are arranged at the same zenith distances south, as th.

polars are north of the zenith, so as to eliminate pivot-errors.

This arrangement, for latitudes near 50°, combines the following advat-

tages:

1. The polar stars are slow enough in their apparent motions for a delib

erate reversal during each of their transits.

2. The time-stars are in the declinations most favorable to accurate ob-

servation when they are equally distant from the zenith with the polars.

3. The reduction becomes extremely simple in execution, as the different

instrumental corrections are directly determined and equations of condi-

tions, to be solved by the method of least squares are not required.

For the more southern latitudes of Europe, which correspond to those of

the northern part of the United States, these three conditions cannot be

simultaneously fulfilled. If, for instance, the second condition be insisted

upon, the first falls out, for latitude 43°, and vice versa. In order to fulfill

this second condition the average declination of time stars must be taken at

about 20°; and the polar-stars at 66°: which is too far south to accomplish

the necessary reversals without hurry during the single transits.

Certain limitations, however, which are necessary in Europe, are needless

in America. For instance, the greater length of the circuits over which

very much of our telegraphic longitude work is done, renders it very diffi-

cult to observe the same stars at both stations. As our absolutely definitive

reductions are not immediately necessary, the star-places used in any cam-

paign can be left open for future improvement; when, for instance, geo-

detic measures shall be made over the whole territory. Again, the unsettled

country in which much of the work is done renders it necessary for us to

194 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

adopt a different type of instruments from the European, lighter and more

portable, less liable to injury in transportation; but, on the other hand,

more care has to be exercised in so arranging our star-lists that all conceiy-

able instrumental errors shall be eliminated; we cannot depend too f1- y

upon one particular arc of the circle described by the telescope. A unese

things considered, it has been the practice of American observers to select

their time and polar stars in a much wider range of declination than the

Europeans employ; and to use the method of least squares in their reduc-

tions.

I have myself employed these methods, both of selection of stars and re-

duction, in second longitude campaigns; and have formulated for myself

the practical rules to be followed. The earlier years of this work were

spent in determinations at very distant points, accessible with difficulty, and

with quite inferior instruments; so that, as they were also usualiy in bad

repair, it required very careful handling to produce even tolerable results.

Later, in 1878, I had the use of an excellent transit instrument, which

was in first-rate condition; and was then able to apply the rules which I

had previously made for myself, to a better state of external circumstances.

In the present paper I shall state the conditions for a good series of time-

determinations in this country, as I now understand them, with especial

reference to the western States and Territories, and the methods of reduc-

tion.

The observations to which I have last referred were made in 1878, at

Ogden, Utah, in latitude 41° 13’. The results are given in the Report of

the Chief of Engineers for 1879-80 (Executive Documents, 2d Session, 46th

Congress, Vol. 5), pages 1983-5. It will be seen that during a space of 24

months, from July 25th to October 10th, 74 days in all, there were 67 deter-

minations of time. Signals were exchanged on 26 nights with the regular

observers of Captain Wheeler’s survey; and the observations on these nights

reduced by the method of least squares; all these caleulations, as well as

the preliminary ones necessary for the other nights, were completed within

the two months after the first exchange, August 12th, so that the method

of reduction is not too complicated to be practicable.

The following would be, in my judgment, an advantageous selections of

stars for a latitude 41° — 44°; the group isarranged nearly as at Ogden, and

differs from my ordinary arrangements in those times only because I had

then fewer close polar stars available. The stars are taken from the Berlin

Jahrbuch, or other ephemerides, and from my catalogue of 2018 stars pub-

lished by the Engineer Bureau:

The Reduction of Transit Observations. 195

Name of Star. A. R. 1885.0 | Decl. 1885.0 Remarks.

Cassiopeiz ......... 0 26 28 + 62 18

Andromede........ 0 30 44 +33 5

GaPpPisciuim).. 2... ..- 0 383 82 +20 48

o Cassiopeiz ......... 0 388 19 +47 39

Cephei 43 H........ 0 58 12 +85 38 Reverse on this star.

SpEISCIUIM 35 <4. cye\< a1s1013 Uo Pa perl + 5 2

TMEISCAULID 2 rye sce, ese, « 1 5 20 +29 29

COTISERUMN 5 o5 shes veiw + ame 0) + 23 59

7 JERI cope orate atl a == td, a

w Cassiopeie ......... al aly eel +67 31

It will be noticed that I have introduced no stars at lower culmination.

The reason for this is, that unless they are very near the pole, the azimuth

co efficient which they furnish is positive in sign, and the stars which bal-

ance them as to the sign of this co-efficient do not as to the form of the-

pivots. In other words, a combination of stars below and above pole would

give the clock correction with a large probable error and with a danger of

constant error, while a combination of stars below pole with those at cor-

responding south zenith distances would be far less advantageous, owing”

to the identity of sign in the azimuth co-efficient, and its greater magni-

tude for the southern stars, than a combination of stars above pole on the-

north side with the ordinary northern time-stars.

When the least square reduction is made, the theoretical test of a good’

combination is obtained by Jacobi’s theorem, which I quote below; the

practical test by the quotient.

Weight of clock-correction.

which should approach the weight of one transit of a zenith star: Practi-

cally I usually employ the following formula for the weight or of one com-

plete transit (on 5 or more wires, or 7 or more, according to the way the

diaphragm is arranged).

w= 12

> 1 + 0.3 Seel2s

For latitude 42° 42'5, this gives the weight of a zenith star equal to

0.836; in general it is easy so to arrange the groups that the weight of the

clock correction from 10 stars shall be 7 at least; but where lower culmina-

tions and southern stars are freely employed this number frequently is re-

duced to 5 or less. That is tosay, 10 stars well arranged give as good a

clock correction as 14 ill arranged; and waste of time spent ia computation

is thus avoided. The few extra minutes lost in observations are usually of

less account; and are perhaps compensated by the greater pains necessary

beforehand. In order to modify the weight-formula to advantage more

196 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

observations are needed, which I intend to make with a portable instru-

ment now constructing for Williams College Observatory; the field observa-

tions have confirmed it with sufficient certainty for my purposes. For in

my least square reductions I have pursued the course so strongly recom-

mended by Gauss (Astr, Nachrichten v. 5, cols. 227 following; Méthode des

moindres carrés, mémoires traduits par J. Bertrand, p. 163) of determining

in advance approximate values of the unknowns, and using the least

squares only to find minute corrections. And the following are the results

for the clock-corrections of the dates in the Ogden campaign, as published in

the Report before alluded to:

Correction to Correction to

Date. provisional result. DEE. _ provisional result.

Ss. | Ss. =

HA A tater —0.008 NSC ptacONaeaeee +0.001

EO ae —0.021 | ile Serene —0.020

PN eae —(.003 Dats tet --0.001

Obie cys —0.010 BO eraakert +0.001

slog Gade ale —0.006 Oey Ste —0.008

SHE}DWs 4) Woao voce +0.016 | heey sition +0.011

Rial ee eee +0.010 Oct Rler ween —0.002

Sree: 0.000 Bite dune —0.009

LQ eevee —0(0.010 Direrene eens — 0.005

NDEs ces +0.017 Gar ieee —0.005

TPO Acs hen +0 .009 Rena starch — 0.003

Demee at +0.010 Dregs ae re —0.018

ibs eet —0.031 LOR Mets ote —0.007

The total effect upon the longitudes of the application of least squares,

consists in the differences of their corrections for the stations. The ob-

servors at the corresponding stations in this campaign had worse instru-

ments than I, and were not so scrupulous in arranging their star lists; so

that the corresponding corrections came out rather larger. Their time

determinations did not suffer sensibly from this cause, however; as both

were experienced observers. The average without regard to sign of the

26 numbers given above—each of which, with trifling exceptions is the

result of two groups of stars —is 0.s 0091: and the probable error of one

preliminary solution +0. 0077; or for a single group of 10 stars +0.*011.

It is evident, then, that if the weights are assigned by my formula with

approximate corrections — so, for instance as to make sufficient distinction

between a very slow-moving and a quiet-moving star —there need be no

fear that it is- not correct enough. The objections to the old process of

giving all stars a weight unity is that the polars of high declination domin-

ate too much in azimuth; this process is about equivalent to leaving out the

quicker-moving stars north of 65° altogether.

Another practice which is quite common is altogether meaningless.

When the weights are approximately correct there is no necessity of omit-

The Reduction of Transit Observations. 197

ting the polar stars in arranging the final table of clock corrections. Each

star, quick-or slow-moving, should go in, with its proper weight to the

clock-correction The method of least squares gives, namely: the most

probable values of all the unknowns; and a more probable one than this

cannot be obtained in any other way, unless the original system of weights

be altered. But this would involve a contradiction; the weight, according

to definition, refers not to the use to be made of the observation, but to the

measure of its precision. The following example taken from my work on

the longitude campaign of 1878 will illustrate several points of this paper.

The observer at Fort Bliss (latitude 31° 45’) frequently inserted stars

subpole in his determinations. As a consequence the weight of the final

time determination was less, proportionately, than it otherwise would have

been; for a zenith star my formula would give

i BS ee) Pee G19

1+ 0. z sec? 31° 45' 1.415

But the group after signals on September 8th contains 11 stars, g°-ving a

final weight of 6.92; or about that of 8 or 9 stars nearer the zenith; two

stars are below pole, and therefore less advantageous. The results of the

individual stars (those north of 65° are marked with an asterisk; these are

now between 45° and 65°) are as follows:

Clock Corr. Clamp.

m S

CANUTE raere syarsrhci ey alae orecens ensuite Se iei2 —1 24.79 W

Pee NC ABO ee Si iclore Sa. oVHONELS alge ici —1 24.89 WwW

ZEON ULAMNU oye say siey stejas a vesTaseies siete alerere wuah ciene ta —1 24.82 WwW

Wraconis: QiEL. Sp) ics voids ayefuiateckeh: —1 25.28* W

arco. BRO Laroche ein cle avotetse ra teres —1 25.39* W

CRE CO ASM eerl ans yao yo es Rho aie a shecers iia re aus —1 24.75 ‘W

Nee POS AST SE afelirs ayers aisles yale a eaeucueneese a lors —1 24.85 B

Za U CDCI sciten crs) stain ctoneearote tran oae aleve —1 25.07* EK

BradleyelloOS spy tatctewe acl sstiertctes et —1 25.37* E

OMPATIOTOMECA ACT Ao cencneis | Wie sacle: “—1 25.09 E

LMR OD AST Mercia scchavs o(siiis <eiae 2 Siete helctons 45 —1 24.7 E

The least square solution gives the mean clock-correction —1' 247.888,

but this includes, with their proper weight, the stars marked with an as-

terisk. If we omit these, and give all others a weight unity we shall have

—1' 24.844, or +0".044 more. But itis plain from least square solution that

some cause affects the observations north of the zenith, probably wear of

pivots '; and the mean of the 6 stars south of the zenith gives —1' 24".803;

1 This is confirmed by the other dates when the same instrument was employed.

198 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

the three north of the zenith and above pole —1’ 25".183; and the zenith

distances are nearly equal for these two groups. It is plain from this that

the least square value —1’ 24.888 is probably nearer correct than the

greater (algebraic) value —1’ 24".803; as it ought to be. In other words,

the exclusion from the final clock corrections of the quick moving polar

stars renders the elimination of pivot error very questionable; as, in fact,

does the employment of groups not sufficiently well-balanced.

The simpler method of reduction, which gives the instrumental correc-

tions separately, without least squares, really assigns to the polar stars their

proper weight; especially if they are all observed at upper culmination, as

the German instructions recommend. For in this case the final clock cor-

rections from each time star are actually reduced by interpolation to the

zenith, as may be seen by using Dr. Braun’s graphical method given in

vol. 109 (No. 2595) of the Astronomische Nachrichten. So that in the pre-

vious example it is not surprising that the preliminary solution gave a

value (1' 24".90) very nearly equal to the final result. Nor is it very plain

that the least square method is absolutely indispensable; I have employed

it in my reductions without objection, although I have never known a case

in which it materially aided in producing a better agreement in the result-

ing longitude. The chief argument in its favor here is that it renders it

unnecessary to restrict the selection of stars to a narrow range, while it re-

moves the arbitrary character of the reductions when this restriction has

not been carried into effect. The chief objection to the method of least

squares is that observers who are not both experienced and careful some-

times permit a blind faith in it to mislead them in preparing their working

lists; and forget the necessity of making observations enough and of the

right quality, which is no less when least squares are used in reductions

than at any other time.

Jacobi’s theorem is in substance the following; and bears directly upon

the point in question:

In order to obtain the least square result for any unknown of m equations

with a less number of unknowns, we solve all possible combinations n by n

of the m equations, and multiply each such result for this unknown by the

square of the corresponding determinant. We add all these products to-

gether and divide their sum by the sum of the squares of the determinant

factors; the quotient will be the least square result sought for.!

To a least square result, then, unfavorable combinations furnish small

contributions relatively to favorable ones; and if the favorable ones cannot

be made, the unfavorable ones are better than nothing. Stars below pole

are the proper ones to employ in combination with those above, when the

azimuth is the unknown most needed, as in setting up a meridian mark;

but for time-determinations proper the best combination is that of polars

above pole with time-stars at nearly equal zenith distances on the other side.

1 Jacobi, De Formatione et Proprietatibus Determinantium: Crelle’s Journal.

The Reduction of Transit Observations. 199

Ihave annexed to this paper, a ‘table for Ogden observatory, latitude

41° 13’ 8".6, which is calculated according to the formula.

1.3

P=; + 0.3sec26

sin (p—6)

= “CON

Vhe columns p, Cp, C . p hold good for any station; the values of A p,

A.,p, ACp must be recalculated for every new latitude. But I have not

omitted them, as their values will serve as a control for a good many

places near the same parallel. The numbers are given to four decimals, to

enable the computor to interpolate readily to three.

The 52 nights out of 78 upon which signals were not exchanged at

Ogden, afforded an excellent opportunity for the criticism of the instru-

ment. <A peculiarity of much far western longitude work is that the tele-

graph lines are in bad order much of the time, and do not afford oppor-

tunities for long exchanges. On some nights of the exchanges with Fort

Bliss (Texas), it was impossible to get a circuit through on the more direct

route, by way of Cheyenne, Denver, and Santa Fé, and recourse was had

to a line of 2,000 miles in length via San Francisco, Southern California,

and Arizona. The time expended while waiting is, under such circum-

stances, best applied to the study of the peculiarities of the instrument.

In conclusion, I will indicate the principal points of this paper as a sum-

mary of directions for the determination of time in latitudes 25° to 49°.

1. A group of time-stars shoald contain about 10 stars in all, with one

reversal.

2. It should contain no more than two or three polars; one of which

may be within 10 degrees of the pole.

3. Stars north of the zenith, not polars, should be included; and may

take the place of polars to some extent.

4. Lower culminations should in general be avoided; and time-stars far

south of the zenith.

5. The stars of a group should so balance at the zenith that the co-effi-

cient of azimuth and collination in the normal equation for clock-correc-

tion should be very small, and the weight of the clock-correction large in

proportion to the number of stars.

6. With proper blank forms the preliminary reduction without least

squares can be very simply effected, and this should always be done.

7. The least square deduction is of little benefit except in removing the

effect of any arbitrary assumptions in the previous process; and should be

200 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

employed only for the signal-nights, or other times when the last degree

of precision is required.

8. In making the least square reductions the weights at different declina-

tions should be combined with the coefficients for azimuth and collination;

and the unknowns should be in the form of corrections to the values derived.

from the preliminary reduction.

JACOBI'S THEOREM.

Notr.— [I give this in the original Latin, as it is very important, ‘and

seems not to be well known to mathematicians. ]

Proponantur aequationes:

! ne (n) —

ax-+-a’x,ta MQ vec ee eee eee eee eee ee ee ences +a xy ==

a,x+a{x,-a", Ky vec ee eee eee eee eee ee eee 55) x Sl

! " = (n) ——

ay xta p x;a p Key vee eect eee ec ee ee eee Tay xy sal

Quarum numerus incognitarum numerum excedat; e quolibet systemate

n+1 aequationum praecedentium valor incognitae eruatur atque per quad-

ratum Determinantis eius systematis, RR, multiplicetur; quibus factis pro

singulis aequationum propositarum combinationis omnium illorum produc-

torum summa per summam omnium RR dividatur: eruitur incognitae

valor idem atque invenitur, si aequationes propositae per Methodum Min-

imorum Quadratorum tractantur.”

Observandum est, valores omnium incognitorum qui ex eadem aequa-

tionum propositarum combinatione proveniant secundum Prop. praec. per

eandem quantitatem RR multiplicare, quam ideo in applicationibus ad

Methodum Minimorum Quadratorum conventt, appellare Pondus Com-

binationis, a pondore valoris incognitae bene distinguendum.

The theorem is thus given in Crelle, vol. 22, p. 316; it is also given inde-.

pendently by Mr. J. W. L. Glaisher in Vol. 40, of the Monthly Notices, p.

607.

The Reduction of Transit Observations. 201

SQUARES AND PRODUCTS OF LEAST SQUARE CO-EFFICIENTS

FOR TIME — OGDEN.

5 12 Ap Cp Avs Pp ACp C.p

0°] 1.0000 |+.6589 — |+1.0000 4342 | + .6589 1.0000

\—1 131 1 —1i2 =i 2

REY) 6458 1.0001 4170 6459 1.0002

2 133 2 168 180 if

21) .9997 6325 1.0003 .4002 6329 1.0009

3 134 4 166 129 12

3] .9994 6191 1.0007 3836 6200 1.0021

5 134 6 164 129 16

4 9989 6057 1.0013 3672 6071 1.0037

7 136) 8 160 127 22

5 | .9982 5921 1.0021 .3512 5944 1.0059

7 137 9 158 128 26

6 9975 5784 1.0030 .BBD4 5816 1.0085

10 138 10 155 127 31

7 9965 5646 1.0040 3199 .5689 1.0116

10 139 12 152 128 35

8 9955 5507 1.0052 3047 5561 1.0151

11 140 14 148 127 41

9 9942 5367 1.0066 2897 5484 1.0192

13 141 16 147 , 128 48

10 | .9929 5226 1.0082 2750 .5306 1.0240

15 143) 17 144 128 48

11 | .9914 5083 | 1.0099 2606 5178 1.0288

17 144) 19 141 129 56

12] .9897 4939 | 1.0118 2465 5049 1.0344

19 145) 20 139 129 61

13” | P2987 4794 | 1.0188 2326 .4920 1.0405

19 147 22 135 130 67

14] .9859 4647 | 1.0160 2191 4790 1.0472

22 148 24 133 152 71

15 9837 4499 | 1.0184 .2058 4658 1.0543

23 149 25 130 133 78

16] .9814 4350 1.0209 .1928 4525 1.0621

25 151 a7 127 134 _ 88

17 9789 4199 1.0236 1801 4391 1.0704

ce 153 29 123 136 89

18| .9762 4046 1.0265 .1678 4255 1.0793

28 153 30 121 138 ae 95

19] .9784 3893 1.0295 1567 ALT 1.0888

31 156 31 117 140 101

20} 97038 3737 1.0326 1440 3977 1.0989

32 157 33 115 142 v

21 | ..967 3580 1.U359 1325 3835 1.1096

34 159 35 110 145 114

22] .9637 3421 1.0394 1215 .3690 1.1210

36 160 36 107 147 21

23 | .9601 3261 1.0430 .1108 3543 1.1331

38 162 38 104 151 127

24 .9563 3099 1.0468 1004 3392 1.1458

41 164 myoe 100 154 135

25 | .9522 2935 1.0507 0904 3238 1.1593

Beas 166 40 95 157 142

26 | .9480 2769 1.0547 .0809 3081 1.1735

45 168 42 92 : 162 149

27 | = 9435 2601 1.0589 0717 .2919 1.1884

47 170 43 87 165 158

28} .9388 2431 1.0632 .0630 2754 1.2042

50 171 45 83 170 165

29] .9338 2260 1.0677 0547 .2584 1.2207

52 174 45 79 175 174

202

SQUARES AND PROD

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

UCTS OF LEAST SQUARE CO-EFFICIENTS

FOR TIME — OGDEN. *

fC CC OC a CG Ca

pa eee

‘Cp

0769

.0817

0866

0916

0967

. 1019

1071

1123

1176

A.p

168

ACp

12389

. 1020

0798

0557

1.2381

183

a a SC > Ca Cy = Cy = C= Tr

(Ju)

(Je)

(os)

The Reduction of Transit Observations. 203

SQUARES AND PRODUCTS OF LEAST SQUARE CO-EFFICIENTS

FOR TIME — Oapen.

2 IP Ap Cp AvP ACp Cyp

56 6635 8027 1.1865 1381 9413 2.1218

172 200 a 231 513 571

57 6463 .o227 1EL867) i L6L2 5926 2.1789

4 178 197 —6| 254 536 594

58 6285 8424 1.1861 1866 6462 2.2383

184 193 16 279 561 5

59 6101 8617 1.1845 2145 7023 2.2998

192 ' 188 a7 305 587

60 5909 8805 1.1818 2450 7610 2.3636

198 182 38) Beale 613 661

61 o711 3987 | 1.1780 2783 8223 2.4297

205 174 52 3624 640 :

62 5506 4161 | 1.1728 3145 4 .8863 2.4981

212 166 67 392 668

63 5294 4327 1.1661 8087 ¢ 9531 2.5686

218 157 s2 42: 697 72

64 5076 4484 1.1579 3960 1.0228 | 2.6414

220 145 100 457 725 748

65 4851 4629 1.1479 AAT 1.0953 2.7162

230 133 119 490 754 769

66 4621 A762 1.1360 A907 1.1707 2.7931

236 119 139 526 784 7

67 4385 A881 1.1221 5433 1.2491 2.8719

242 102 161 561 $12 804

68 4143 4983 1.1060 5994 1.3303 2.9523

246 85 186 598 840

69 3897 .5063 1.0874 6592 1.4143 3.0343

250 66 211 635 867

70 3647 9134 1.0663 1227 1.5010 3.1177

253 43 228 672) 894 843

71 3394 OLTT 1.0425 7899 1.5904 3.2020

5 —21 268 710 918 850

72 3139 .5198 1.0157 8609 1.6822 3.287

256 fos 297 746 940 854

73 2883 .5193 . 9860 9355 1.7762 3.38724

256 33 329 781 959 853

74 2627 .5160 9531 1.0136 1.8721 3.4577

254 62 363 816 975 846

75 2373 .0098 9168 1.0952 1.9696 3.5423

251 94 396 847 988 37

76 2122 5004 8772 LoS 2.0684 3.6260

246 127) 431 877 996 819

77 .1876 A877 8341 1.2676 2.1680 3.7079

239 162! 466 903 998 797

78 1637 A715 1875 1.3579 2.2678 .| 38.7876

232 198 5 925 997 167

79 1407 ALT 7374 = =11.4504 2.3675 3.8643

220 — 234 — 536 943 988 782

80 1187 =|—.4283 .6838 1.5447 —2.4663 3.9375

204

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

SQUARES AND PRODUCTS OF LEAST SQUARE COEFFICIENTS

FOR TIME — OGpEn.

89 sp

88 sp

87 sp

86 sp

85 sp

84sp

83 sp

82 sp

81 sp

80 sp

1187

207

i=)

_—

—

0.1187

te ey ce

— .4283 + .6838

+ 273 —di0

4010 6268

3700 5665

347 633

3308 5082

385 662

2968 .4370

419 8

2549 .3684

454 709

2095 2975

728

1611 2247

513 v4

1098 1506

538 v1

.0560 +0) .0755

560 TDD

0.0000 0.0000

BIT (i)

40.0577 —0).0755

Bg (i)

1167 1506

599 74H.

.1766 2247

603 728)

2869 2975

603 709

2972 . 3684

598 686

.3070 .4370

591 662}

4161 .0082

578 633

4739 . 9665

603

564

9803 6268

570

+ 544 =

+ .5847 —.6888

(ow)

+ 121

8797

w ew

(e)

Ve}

(oy)

ca)

Ne)

—3 .3674

C.p

3.9376

+ 689

4.0065

1 640

4.0705

3 584

4.1289

521

4.1810

454

4.2264

378

4 2642

299

4.2941

217

4.3158

131

4.38289

+44

4.3158

—44

4.3289

ig RS)

3.93576

Emblematic Mounds. 205

THE SO-CALLED ELEPHANT MOUND IN GRANT COUNTY,

AND EFFIGIES IN THE REGION SURROUNDING IT.

By Rey. S. D. PEET.

The survey of the mounds in the neighborhood of the so-called elephant

effigy, which was undertaken under the auspices of the Wisconsin Academy

of Arts, has not, for various reasons, been reported until now. The survey

was conducted by the writer mainly during the year 1885, but a trip previous

to that in 1882, and subsequent to it in 1886, are to be taken into the account.

It is very fortunate that the Society recommended this survey at the time

that it did, as many of the mounds then in a good state of preservation, have

been destroyed since. A railroad has been built along the valley of the

Mississippi and the track has been laid in the very midst of the mounds

that were surveyed. Before giving a description of the survey we propose

BS yrs AW,

I//

yy “7 ain EB

, Bille le

—)

40 50 a _- 10 80 Fen.

Scale 34 feet to the inch,,

Vig. 1.

to give a history of this effigy. The discovery of the elephant effigy was

made by Mr. Jared Warner, of Patch Grove, Grant County, and the account

was first published in the Smithsonian report of 1872, with a cut, an elec-

trotype. (See Fig. 1). Mr. Warner says ‘‘this effigy was situated on

the high sandy bottom lands of the Mississippi, on the east side, about eight

miles below the mouth of the Wisconsin river. There are on each side of

206 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

the mound, some fifteen or twenty rods distant, sandy, grassy ridges, some

fifteen feet higher than the land about the mound; the mound is, therefore

in a shallow valley, sloping gently to the Mississippi river, and only about

eight feet above high water. Its total length is 135 feet; from hind feet to

back, sixty feet; from fore feet to back, sixty-six feet; width across fore

legs, twenty-one feet; across hind legs, twenty-four feet; space between

hind and fore legs, fifty-one feet; from end of proboscis to fore legs, thirty-

nine feet; across the body, thirty-six feet; general height of body above sur-

rounding ground, five feet. The head is large, and the proportions of the

whole so symmetrical that the mound well deserves the name of the ‘‘ Big

Elephant Mound.” Next to Mr. Warner was Mr. Moses Strong, who pub-

lished an account of the effigy and the mounds surrounding it in the Smith-

sonian Report for 1876. Mr. Strong was at the time connected with the

Geological survey of the state, and took in the exploration of the mounds

incidentally. He describes a group of mounds on the Mississippi bottom

situated on Sec. 17, N. E. quarter Tp. 5, R. 6 W. [The effigy is on Sec. 21].

Mr. Strong says, *‘ following the course of the Mississippi about a quarter

of a mile southeast of the preceding locality, numerous long meunds are

seen arranged in several rows parallel to each other and to the river. They

are situated in the cultivated fields and are nearly obliterated. At the time

these localities were visited the valley was covered by a crop of standing

corn which rendered it difficult to find them; and it is probable that many

exist which were not noticed. No circular or effigy mounds were found in

connection with them. Continuing down the valley we come to a group:

in which the three kinds of mounds are well represented. They lie upon

the alluvial bottom quite near a bayou of the Mississippi and none of them

are more than eight feet above high water mark, while those in the south-

ern part of the group are not more than three feet. In this group where

all kinds are represented, there seems to be a separation of the long and

round mounds from each other. There is nothing of peculiar interest in

the occurrence of the long and circular mounds, but we have here two quite

singular effigies. The central one of the group is evidently intended to

represent a bird with the wings spread in the act of flying; the head is di-

rected to the south. The wings measure ninety-four feet each way from

the center of the body to their extremities, and the length of the tail is

sixty-five feet. It is quite a large and well-formed effigy and is different

from the other bird mounds in having an angle in the wings. Situated at

the northern end of the group is the most interesting effigy mound any

where observed. <A description of it by Mr. Warner, of Patch Grove, was

published in the Smithsonian Report of 1872, page 416. It is known as the

‘*Hlephant Mound,” and as it lies upon the ground it resembles an elephant

or mastodon, much more closely than any other animal, and the resemb-

lance is much more perfect in this instance than in other effigies. This

mound, in common with all the rest in the group, has been under cultiva-

tion; and on account of its size, special efforts have been made with plows

Emblematic Mounds. : 207

and scrapers, to bring it to the level of the adjacent field. Its size alone

has protected it. These efforts have resulted in diminishing its height, in-

creasing its width and general circumference, and rendering its outline

somewhat indistinct so that it was difficult to make exact measurements.”

The writer first visited the effigy six years after Mr. Strong made his re-

port. It was then nearly obliterated. Subsequent to this first visit the em-

ployes of the Ethnological Bureau suryeyed some groups of mounds and

effigies on the bluffs, three miles north of the eftigy, but their report has

not yet been published. Subsequent to their survey, Mr. Brown, a student

in Wisconsin University, and an assistant of Prof. Conover, of Madison, .

Wis., was employed to make measurements of the mound, so that a cast

might be made of it and put on exhibition with the Smithsonian relics, at

the New Orleans Exposition, during 1885. The exploration of the writer

under the auspices of the Society was subsequent to all these. It embraced

not only the so-called elephant effigy, but all the mounds in the vicinity.

The mound was again measured, making the fourth actual survey.

The following is the result of the personal examination of the mound

at this time: When the the writer visited the locality in 1885, only

two mounds out of the whole group were left, one which is de-

scribed as the bird effigy, the other known as the elephant mound. Both

of these had been nearly plowed down, but owing to peculiar cir-

cumstances were plainly visible. During the spring preceding the visit,

the water from the bayou had set back into the swail and remained

standing upon the low ground, but did not quite reach to the summit of the

effigies. There was atthe time a growth of clover upon the soil, but this was

drowned out by the flood except where the effigies stood. As aresult the effi-

gies were covered with the clover, but the surrounding ground was either

bare or had a slight covering of grass uponit. Standing upon the summit of

the hill or ridge adjoining, we were able to look down upon the swail and

see the outlines of the two effigies, the dark color of the clover contrasting

with the light shade of the grass. The shapes of the two effigies were easily

made out. The bird had its head toward the southwest, its wings extend-

ing across the swail, nearly reaching the foot of the sand ridges. The so-

called elephant effigy had its head in the same direction, to the southwest,

but its body was lengthwise of the swail, its heavy legs extending toward

the southeast. ‘The two effigies were in contrast, as the bird had long, nar-

row wings, small body and neck, while the animal hada broad, heavy

body,almost square in shape, with its legs unusually wide and clumsy. On

‘approaching nearer the outlines of the effigy were not so distinct as when

at a distance, though the clover seemed to give it an elevation. The real

mound was but slightly raised above the surrounding surface and there

were no sharp lines to the effigy.

The measurement of the mound was very unsatisfactory on account of

the condition in which it was. The figures would not represent the mound

as it was when first seen, and would be very unreliable as there were no

208 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

points from which to begin or end the measurement. One thing was notice-

able, however, to the eye and confirmed by measurements. There was no

proboscis to the figure. The point which extended from the nose was in-

distinct and appeared to be the result of the washing of the sandy

soil down to the level. It was evident that that which was taken for the

proboscis was never long enough or wide enough to properly represent that

part. The writer has had considerable experience in tracing out mounds

which were nearly obliterated and ordinarily would be able to describe the

figure from what might be called the shadow of it. The peculiar color of

the soil, which originally belonged to the figure, and the indescribable

shading of this soil into the undisturbed surface of the soil or ground sur-

rounding it, will ordinarily give the figure to the eye, even if the measure-

ments should be unsatisfactory. The impression formed by this effigy, and

especially the part of it which is the distinctive and deciding point was

that the proboscis was never there. The writer hesitates to put himself on

Zen Sa i

te\ Gti, 2

Sie Es

Fig. 2.

record as contradicting such reliable persons as have given a description of

the effigy to the public. There is this, however, to be considered. If the

engraved figure which was made according to a scale from the measure-

ments of Jared Warner, and those accompanying him, should be taken, and

the narrow, pointed snout left off from the figure as uncertain, we should

have an effigy which bears very little resemblance to the elephant. (See

Fig. 2.) On the other hand, if any one undertakes to draw the figure so

that it shall have the trunk in its usual place and shape he would have to

completely overdraw and distort the figure, asit is now. This view led the

writer, at his first visit, to doubt the intent of the effigy, and every other

visit has increased the doubt. The examination of the effigy itself proved

so unsatisfactory that the writer determined to study and survey the groups

adjoining, and therefore a description of these groups is added to the re-

port. It should be said that the study was given first to the groups on the

bottom-lands, then extended to the bluffs, and afterward the whole region

was traversed and examined, until all the groups in the vicinity were ex-

plored. These will be given in their order.

’

Emblematic Mounds. 209

We call attention to the mounds in the immediate vicinity of the

so-called elephant effizy. The writer traversed the region in a reverse

_order or direction from that which Mr. Strong pursued, but was able to

identify some of the groups which he mentions. There were no effigies in

the vicinity, except two, which were,very nearly obliterated.

There were several groups in the swails which cut through the bottom

land in this vicinity, and to these we first gave our attention. The swails

are the dry beds of water courses, which in the time of heavy rains, flow

out from gorges or so-called ‘‘coolies ” in the bluff toward the bayous of

the river. These swails are generally in a direct line with the openings in

the bluffs, and extend from the foot of the bluffs across the sandy bottom

land or terrace to the bayous. They are so much below the surface that

the mounds in them are not seen until one suddenly comes upon them as

he reaches the edge of the swail. The swail in which the so-called elephant

mound was placed was not exactly in a line with the rest but angles to the

southwest, and where the effigy is, was much deeper than the other

rh)

swails. The method of arranging these mounds in the swails was pecu-

liar. They were placed in parallel rows which extended lengthwise of the

swail, sometimes three or four rows in each swail and in some of the swails

as many as thirty or forty mounds in a group. Four such groups were

discovered by the writer in passing from the elephant mound, northward,

the most of them composed of alternate rows of long mounds and round

mounds, arranged in parallel lines. There were no effigies in the swails,

merely round and long mounds. The only place where effigies were dis-

covered was on the terrace or bottom land outside of a swail about a mile

north from the elephant effizy, on waat was called the Bagley place. These

effigies were nearly obliterated but seemad to have been very large in size,

and possibly one or two of them may have resembled in shape the effigy

which is called the elephant. But the fizures were so far gone that no

effigy could really be traced.

It should be said of these that if one were determined to make out the

existence of the elephant and camel effizies, the shadowy shape left

upon the surface of the soil might easily satisfy him. There were two

210 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

figures. One with a large body anda snout (Fig. 3) extending from it

to a great length, curved somewhat like the horns of the mastodon. The

other with a body slimmer and not so large, but with a long neck protrud-

ing above the body. Still no man of candor would undertake to build up

a theory on so shadowy a foundation as this, for we have only to reverse

the figure to make it represent a gigantic raccoon instead of an elephant,

and the theory is upset. In reference to the different groups of mounds,

which were found in the swails, we should say that they belonged to the

same age as the so-called elephant effigy, and yet there was a fresh look to

them, as if they were of a comparatively recent date. It would hardly

seem possible for mounds to be preserved in the sandy soil, during the

many centuries which have elapsed since the mastodon became extinct,

and the theory that they were built at the time of the mastodon seems un-

tenable. The evidence that they belonged to the same time and belonged

to the same people, is that they were situated in the same kind of swails

and were arranged in the same order, and at the same time were near the

group in which the effigy is found. The probabilities then are against this

effigy being an elephant, and the figure is given only to show how easily one

may be mistaken.

The examination of the effigies and mounds on the bluffs followed

that of the mounds on the bottom lands. It should be said that the bluffs,

in this region, are’ very precipitous, and are broken into narrow and

crooked ridges, on either side of which the water courses through deep

gorges, down to the streams and water-spouts, until it makes its way to

the bayou and to the river. The only way to reach the summit is to climb

the precipitous face of the cliff, or to follow up the narrow and crooked

valley of the stream to the plateau above, and then retrace one’s steps out

on the level to the edge of the bluffs. When one reaches the summit from

either direction he is pretty sure to find mounds on the ridge. They are

hidden from view until he reaches the hill-top, but they run in long lines

from the edge of the cliff back to the plateau at the head of the gorges.

A perfect net-work of these long mounds, round mounds, and effigies,

was discovered, nearly every ridge having its own line, but some of the

ridges having lines that were connected. They seem to be the most num-

erous on the bluffs which intervene between the Wisconsin and Mississippi

rivers, and yet we understand that others are to be seen on the bluffs im-

mediately overlooking the so-called elephant effigy. The lines of mounds

extend to great distances, some of them three or four miles in length, and

it was not difficult to imagine them to be sort of elevated roadways con-

Emblematie Mounds. 211

necting lookout stations, on which warriors might watch the enemy com-

ing down the Wisconsin river, or up the Mississippi river, and so notify

the people residing in the village of the danger that threatened them. At

least the lines of long mounds and round mounds seem to follow along the

ridges which intervene between the two rivers, as if the object was to con-

nect the valleys by lookout stations and elevated roadways. The view

from the edge of the high bluffs is always extensive and commands the

bottom lands below. There are, however, lines which extend from the

face of the bluffs back to the prairies and open plateau in the interior, and

an explanation of these would be that they were elevated ways on which

hunters might run while watching the game that should be driven from

the plateau down the gorges to the bottom land below.

Map 1.

The explanation, however, is not the purpose of the survey, but merely

the statement of the facts. The long lines of mounds on the bluffs, all seem

to have effigies, and the object was to ascertain what kind of effigies they

were. The lines which were followed out were more or less directly con-

nected with the group in which the elephant effigy was situated, at least

they were on the bluffs which overlooked the same terrace and we under-

stood some of them were on the edge of the same gorge through which the

water would make its way, while passing through the swail where the effigy

mound is seen. The elephant effigy forms the southernmost limit; but the

northern limit of the long mounds and effigies upon the bluffs is seven or

eight miles distant, on the Wisconsin river. The groups on the bottom

lands and on the bluffs adjoining, seem to form connecting links, so that if

one were to study one group, he needed to study all. There are three or

four lines of effigies on the bluffs and three or four groups of parallel

mounds on the bottom lands. One object was to see if there was any con-

nection between the different parts of this system. Another object was to

212 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

examine the different effigies on the bluffs and compare them with those

on the bottom lands and ascertain the character of both. <A third object

was to ascertain whether there was any effigy on the bluffs which in any

way had resemblance to the so-called elephant effigy on the bottom lancs.

With these three questions in mind, the exploration was undertake... It

was not an easy thing to do, as the gorges were long and the bluffs were

steep, but it was accomplished by the aid of a guide who knew the location

of all the groups. We take up the groups or lines of mounds on the bluffs

in their order, and call attention to the map of these different mounds as

well as the topography of the country in which they were fonnd. We give

the names of the people who owned the land, and call the groups by the

name of the place. (1) The group on the Kendall place. This is composed

of a series of long moundsand effigies which run from tbe edge of the bluff,

overlooking the village of Wyalusing, out across land belonging to Mr.

Glenn, Sec. 31, to land belonging to Mr. Kendall, on Sec. 82. This group

or line of mounds overlooked the gorges on either side, and extended out to

the level plateau at the head of the gorges. The line was composed mainly

of long mounds, but the effigies were situated at either end of the line,

the effigy of a squirrel being at the west end of the line on the edge of the

bluff, and three effigies at the east end of the line; a moose, wild cat, and

bear. The squirrel was a very unique and interesting effigy, representing

the animal as in the attitude of running; the wild-cat was of the ordinary

shape, but the moose was the most interesting of all. It was situated on

the edge of the bluff overlooking a deep gorge, south of it, and command-

ing a view of other effigies on the other side of the gorge. (See map 1,

the works in Grant Co., also Figs. 4and 5.) The attitude of the moose was

very natural.

We call attention to the different effigies found in these groups, as the

answers to questions asked will be found in them. It will be noticed that

there are no elephant effigies in any of the groups. The effigies as dis-

covered are as follows: (1) The squirrel on the bluff overlooking Wyalus-

ing, map 2, Section 31. (2) The moose, Fig. 4, situated at the head of the

gorge on the Kendall place, Section 82. (83 and 4) The bear and the wild-

cat situated in the same group. (5) Raccoon on the Darby place, Fig. 5,

Section 31. (6) The buffaloes on the Glenn place, Section 30. (7 and 8) A

group of bear and three deer on the Locke place, Section 17. See Fig. 6. (9)

Two buffaloes on Section 18, Figs. 7 and 10. A group of turtles on the Scnee

place, Section 22. These were just such effigies as are common throughout

Kmblematic Mounds. DALE:

the state, though the attitude of the squirrel and buffalo and stag or deer

were quite unique and interesting. They represent the animals which

formerly abounded here. We cannot resist the impression that they repre-

sented the animals which were hunted and fur which the mounds were

erected as observatories. They possibly may have been the ‘‘ dream gods”

or ‘‘dream totems,” or they may have

been ‘‘game gods” or ‘“‘game totems,”

both signifying the same thing to the ae

superstitious hunters. There was noth- a

ing which had any resemblance to the | :

elephant or could convey the idea that

the elephant or mastodon was hunted or f

even known by this people. ; yg:

The locality which was next examined : ==

was north of the Wisconsin river, in gos

Crawford county. This is a region

which has been explored by the assis-

tants of the Ethnological Bureau, and we

need not dwell upon it in detail. It will

be sufficient to say that an interesting

discovery was the result of the explora-

tion by the writer. It was found to be

the residence of a clan, the swallow be.

ing the totem of the clan. We speak of

this because it is important, as throwing

light on the so-called elephant effigy.

The point in mind is this: The swallow

which was everywhere discoverable in

SSS SSS]

Nig,

*% peal

‘gull My

Hp wil

{iyo Way

Voy

al MUHA Aten mane

ayy mi

oo yyy MSL, as My,

uid

‘

willy, 1 iW

all the groups visited in Crawford county, ”

shows that this was a totem of this Ni ets

region; and the probability is that ~~

the buffalo, which is the most num- = a

9 g

3 5

eis Eee ee = Wil 3 i CORNER

ec.2 Sec.i7 E > Z \

Mm ye y Te oomf

; = B

2 3

<a) A&

|Pig: 4: Picts % *

f= 90 Be Y < ' ‘i

FES Faas 3 7 > ' Ry

ae en BY 4 ae : >

& c! Ez

5 : E

° : €

= =

® gn- oe

S®OO0OOOOOC OO: &

quo 400 = 490500 no 70 av S(t Feet. Ei

Fig. 6.

214 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

erous and promiment effigy i Grant county, was the totem of that region.

If this is so, then we have an additional reason to believe that the so-called

elephant effigy was nothing more nor less than a buffalo, and represented

the totem of the region. We have this to contend with, however,— it

was maintained by Dr. J. W. Phene, that he discovered in Campbell coolie,

three miles north of Prairie du Chien, the efflgy of a camel, and that the

camel and elephant were associated in the mound-builders’ art. Thesearch

was in part for this camel effigy, and in part to ascertain whether the theory

of game drives, dream gods, and cJan totems, could be carried out by the

facts. The result was that the clan totem was ascertained and the theory

of the game drive was rendered even more probable.

RS)

; ax

Sy <

S eC.

CS pee, "800 125 we oe 180 300 ‘&

Bea eas pee! ZEB 25 er Beye. ---- 300...

G0.

o 100 200 B00 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Feet, 7,

Vitis 1 1 : 1 : 1 1 ' l =) All

We shail illustrate the points. There are seven or eight groups on the

bluffs adjoining Prairie du Chien extending along the road from Prairie du

Chien to Batavia. In all these groups the swallow is most prominent.

In one group, which was composed in part of long mounds, round mounds

and effigies, the swallow was associated with the buffalo. (Map No. 2). In

another groupit is associated with two effigies of bears. (Map2, No.5. Ina

third, situated near the village of Batavia, it is isolated, and yet other effigies

a DURES

& A

ANTS

Dre, MPa, TG A &

Rr OME mae

We MAY YP AHH

SOE s\Aarsneey

eo Wray of

ET (NA

may have been at one time near it. The groups were all situated on a

ridge, but at points where the ridge was the narrowest, and where the im-

pression was that the' different kinds of game made their way across the

ridge from the Mississippi river to the Kickapoo. In passing down to the val-

Emblematiec Mounds. 215

ley of the Mississippi other effigies were discovered. Two wolves on the

side of the bluff, five miles north of Prairie du Chien (Map 2, No. 9), on the

Brush place, and two effigies nearly obliterated, on the Dousman place.

i) i A : - £ uN

Lien

Fig. 8.

One of these we took to be the effigy of the camel, concerning which

Dr. Phene and Mr. L. H. Lewis, had spoken, but we could discover no re-

semblance to that animal. The hasty exploration of all these groups was

made in company with Dr. Cyrus Thomas, of the Ethnological Bureau,

Washington, D. C., and two of his assistants. Their attention was called

to the location of the groups and the theory of the game drives seemed to

commend itself as a good explanation of the reasons for their erection. On

the way back the party passed a group of large conical mounds, situated

on the bottom lands, near the Courliss Bayou. Dr. Cyrus Thomas advanced

a theory in reference to these, which seemed very plausible. It was that

the mounds were made large and flat so that they could be places of refuge

in times of high water. These mounds were arranged in a large circle en-

closing an area of about twenty or thirty acres. The impression made

upon the writer was, that it was a village site, possibly the site of the vil-

lage of the very people whose game drives had been discovered upon the

hill-tops. The gorges and roadways from the bottom lands to the bluffs

and the summit of the ridges, seemed to concentrate near this point.

Other groups of large mounds, were, however, visited subsequently, and

one of them was found to have an effigy nearit. It is probable that sever-

al villages existed on this prairie at different times. Which one belonged

to the effigy-builders is uncertain.

The discovery of the clan totem was subsequent to this. At a point,

three miles south of Prairie du Chien, there is an effigy of aswallow (Fig. 9)

situated on the edge of the bluff and overlooking the Wisconsin river. The

swallow has its wings spread, but the peculiarity of the effigy is that where

the wings are spread to the widest fan, the bluff itself assumes the shape of

the wing. Where the body is, the ridge is sharp and narrow, so sharp and

narrow that the head and tail of the bird are built out from the sides of the

ridge, making it seem asif the body were dropped down below the wings,

216 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

It was a singular freak for the people to have erected the effigy in such a

place! but no doubt the shape of the bluff or rocky spur suggested the

effigy. The clan totem found its embediment in the rock, or at least it was

so imagined to be by the builders.

Lilpuyzr

LAW)

Confirmatory of this theory of the clan totem was a discovery made a

few days after on the Kickapoo river. At the mouth of this river near

the village of Wazeka, there is a group of long mounds and effigies, one

of them the effigy of a weasel. Five miles north of Wazeka two other

effigies were discovered, both of them swallows. One of these was situated

on the top of a very high hill, which overlooked the valley of the Kickapoo

and which commanded a view of nearly all of the groups which were

previously visited, especially those on the summit of the ridges near the

village of Batavia or Eastman. It was alone swallow and seemed to mark

the border line of the swallow clan. The other effigy was situated in a very

retired and lonely spot, down near the the water’s edge at a bend of the

river and hidden away among the surrounding hills. This also was a lone

bird. Its wings stretched from bank to bank across the bend of the river,

and it covered the bottom-land. The impression formed from these two

effigies was that the Kickapoo river was cccupied by the swallow clan.

In all these groups which were situated north of the Wisconsin river

there were no effigies which resembled in any way anelephant. There were

effigies of bear, buffalo, wolves, birds and weasels, but the most numerous

and common was this effigy of the swallow. This completes the report of

the survey of the effigies in the vicinity of the so-called elephant mound of

Grant county. There were, however, about this time various reports pub-

lished concerning the discovery of elephant effigies in other parts of Wiscon-

sin, and the writer took pains to visit these localities.

The following facts are presented as supplementary to this descrip-

tion of the survey. The place which was visited by the writer to ascertain

the facts about a rumored elephant effigy was in Green Lake county, not

far from the city of Ripon. It should be said the discussion about elephant

pipes which was conducted between Mr. Chas. B. Putnam, Esq., President

of the Davenport Academy of Science, and Mr. Henry W. Henshaw, of the

Ethnological Bureau, during the year 1885, gave additional interest to the

Emblematic Mounds. 217

survey of the effigy mounds and led many of the archeologists, to notice

every report of the discovery of new elephant effigies. When, therefore,

Mr. Theodore F, Wise, who was at the time publishing a monthly paper,

called ** The Young Mineralogist and Antiquarian,” made the announce-

ment that he had discovered an elephant effigy in the vicinity of Green

Lake county, it seemed desirable to the writer that the place should be vis-

ited and the facts about the effigy be ascertained. The extension of the

survey and a report of it will therefore be excusable. Thetrip resulted in

some very interesting discoveries, but in the refutation of everything which

was announced by Mr. Wise in reference to the effigy. The neighborhood

of Green Lake is very interesting on account of the number and variety of

its effigies. Here on the west side of the lake, situated on the summit of

the blufis and overlooking the water, the writer discovered many beautiful

effigies a large majority of them being in the shape of squirrels. The squir-

rels were in every conceivable attitude, some of them of large size.

On the south end of the lake a group was discovered which contained the

effigies of two bears and a deer in the attitude of running. There were

also various groups of effigies on the southeast side of the lake. Some of

these were birds, some panthers and a few turtles, but many of them were

squirrels. (See Fig. 10.) The impression formed by the survey was that

here wasa clan residence, and that the reason for the erecting of these

effigies on the various bluffs, was because the totem of the clan was that

of the squirrel. The trip was extended to the shores of Lake Puckaway,.

Here on the south side of the lake, there are many mounds and effigies.

One long row of mounds was followed for the distance of three miles; the

row was situated on the edge of the bluff overlooking the lake, and con-

sisted of long mounds, round mounds and various effigies, among which

were the bear, and a fox represented as running with his head turned

around and looking behind him, a very interesting effigy. A number of

groups were discovered also upon the north side of the lake, one of them

near the Chicago club-house. This was also in the shape of a squirrel, but

asquirrel ina peculiar attitude. There were no eftigies resembling the

elephant, anywhere on either of the lakes. A gentleman who attended

the writer in his explorations at Lake Puckaway (Mr. A. Aldrich, of Green

Lake) gave information in reference to the so-called elephant effigy, and

volunteered to be a guide to the spot. Accordingly, on the return trip, we

went in search of the effigy, and in a field which had been plowed for many

years, discovered a number of round mounds, and one that looked as if it

might have been an effigy at one time, but it was so far obliterated that no

shape whatever could be made out. This was at Dautz Tavern, half way

between Green Lake and Lake Puckaway. Mr. Aldrich informed the

writer that he was with Mr. Theodore 8. Wise when he examined this

mound, and that at that time it was in the same condition that it was when

we visited it. The resemblance to an elephant was wrought out of the

imagination of Mr, Wise, but had no existence. In fact it was im-

218

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Mere Vee

oe 3

ogee? 3 27Ny* Care =

‘OL “Sh

Ine BL Gl lS)

pe Se

Emablematic Mounds. 219

possible to trace a single outline that would give the idea that it was an

elephant effigy. This finished the search, for it was evident that the effect

of the discussion was to create these imaginary figures, and it did not seem

worth while to follow up uncertainties. The theory in reference to the

clan emblem was confirmed, and the impression was made all the stronger

that the effigies of Wisconsin were imitations of the animals which were

once common in the region, and that no extinct animal is to be found rep-

resented by them.

Fig. 11.

A few words more in regard to the effigies, which might be easily

mistaken for the elephant. There are two effigies at Merrill Spring,

near Madison (see Fig. 11), which have been by some supposed to represent

elephants. They are probably effigies of buffalo. They are placed

around a large conical burial mound, or lookout station, in the midst

of a group which was designed to guard the camping place at the spring.

There is also an effigy on Peck’s place near the city of Beloit (see Fig. 12),

_ Fig. 12.

which at first sight resembles an elephant. It has the sloping rump and

large, heavy body of the elephant, but lacks the proboscis. There is a pro-

jection above the head which is probably designed to represent horns.

This is in the midst of a buffalo game drive, and represents the dream

god, or game god, or fetish, of the hunters. There was formerly a large |

effigy on the Downe place, east of Beaver Dam. It is nearly obliterated

now, but formerly represented some four-footed animal, such as bear, buf-

falo or moose. It might have been mistaken for an elephant. There is a

mound which Mr. T. H, Lewis discovered on the bluffs on the west side of

220 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

the Mississippi river, opposite Prairie du Chien, which he says ‘“ resembles

an elephant.” It is probably a buffalo. Other mounds might be mentioned,

and among them the group which was one of the earliest discovered in the

state, namely, the group described by Mr. S. Taylor, and situated near

Blue Mound. (See Figs. 18 and 14). One of these resembles the figure which

“Yyyye Y sryty Y

Li G “Yfyyp ¢éJfiivy Wy Yy

GY Y YU, Y

we have drawn out of the so called elephant eftigy, and we therefore giveit as

a specimen. Our conclusion after all thisjexploration is that there are no

Fig. 14.

elephant effigies in the state, and that the so-calied elephant mound was

designed to represent either the bear, the wild-cat, the buffalo, or the

moose, every one of which contains the same elements of a heavy body, a

large head and a protruding snout, and any one of which might might be

made to represent an elephant if we would cut off certain parts of the head,

and add to other parts.

SPIDERS OF THE SUB-FAMILY LYSSOMAN A.

G. W. anp E. G. PECKHAM anp WM. H. WHEELER.

222 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

‘

INTRODUCTION.*

Up to the present time there have been formed in the sub-family

Lyssomane, six genera, in the following order of time:

1844. Lyssomanes Hentz.

1869. Asamonea Cambridge.

1872. Jelskia Taczanowski.

1877. Evenus +Simon, Athamas Cambridge.

1885. Simonella Peckham.

Some.time ago M. Eugén Simon, with great generosity, placed a num-

ber of his unpublished species at our disposal; we have also an undescribed

species of Lyssomanes from a collection of Attidz belonging to the Berlin

Museum, which was loaned to us through the courtesy of Dr. Ferd. Karsch;

these additions to our own collections have enabled us to add seventeen

new species to the thirteen already known in this sub-family.

We wish to express our gratitude to Dr. L. Taczanowski for specimens

of all of his species of Jelskia, and to to the Rev. O, P. Cambridge for a

specimen of Athamas whitmeet.

We have endeavored to separate the species into natural groups and to

define the groups as closely as possible. The genus Jelskia we have in-

cludéd as a sub-genus under Lyssomanes, giving the new sub-generic name

Maroussa to the other species of the genus. Thesub-divisions of Maroussa

and Jelskia are merely for practical convenience.

It seems probable that many of the spiders of the Lyssomanii group are

adorned, in life, with delicate and brilliant colors which disappear in alco-

holic specimens. This we know to be the case with Lyssomanes viridis

which is in reality of a tender grass-green color but which appears in collec-

tions to be of the light yellowish tint which is common to many related

species as known to us. The only way to define spiders of this group satis-

factorily is by their anatomical proportions and by their epigynes and palpi,

which should always be referred to in determining species.

Our measurements have been made in accordance with the following

rules:

To determine the length of the cephalothorax, measure from the anterior

edge of the eyes of the second row to the posterior edge of the thorax.

To determine the length of the cephalic part (or of the quadrangle of

* The plates for this article were contributed by tke authors.

+ Afterwards changed to Epeus Peckham.

Spiders of the Sub Family Lyssomane. 223

eyes), measure from the anterior edge of the eyes of the second row to the

posterior edge of the eyes of the fourth row.

Where the expression ‘‘ width of the quadrangle of the eyes” is used, the

greatest width is always meant. :

The position of the eyes of the third row is determined by measuring

from the posterior edge of the eyes of the second, and the anterior edge of

the eyes of the fourth row.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE LYSSOMANTI.

The distribution of the species of Lyssomanii presents some interesting

facts. The genus Asamonea falls very naturally into two divisions. The

two species constituting the first division, A. gracilis and A. flava, are con-

fined to South America; the four species forming the second division are

restricted to Southern Asia and South Africa. At first sight it would seem

well to have formed two genera, allotting to each the Asemonez of a

hemisphere. Carefulstudy of the species, however, has convinced us that

such a proceeding would have been unadvisable, as the morphological char-

acteristics of either group could not be raised to generic importance.

All ten species of Lyssomanes belonging to the sub-genus Jelskia are con-

fined to Central and South America. The sub-genus Marouwssa resembles

aAsamonea in that its species are divided between two hemispheres. One

species only, M. modestus, is reported from the old world, occurring in

Madagascar; of the remaining seven new world forms, five occur in South

America, one in the island of San Domingo and one in the southern states

of the Union.

Regarded as an isolated fact, this distribution of the members of a genus

over the tropics of two hemispheres seems anomalous. But analogous

cases in the distribution of other organisms are by no means rare. Among

plants especially such cases are common. Among animals we may cite

the case mentioned by Wallace of the four species of Megacephala

(a genus of the Cicindelidz, or tiger beetle family) two of which occur in

Africa and two in South America. In like manner four species of another

genus, Peridexia, of the same family, are equally divided between South

America and Madagascar. Then again when we consider the great anti-

quity of the existing genera of spiders, we can see nothing difficult of ex-

planation in the wide and discontinuous distribution of the Asamonez and

Maroussze. We have only another instance confirmatory of the truth of

Wallace's remarks that ‘‘ Insects exhibit in a very marked degree in their

actual distribution the influence both of very ancient and very modern

conditions of the earth’s surface. The effects of the ancient geographical

features of the earth are to be traced in the large number of cases of dis-

continuous and widely scattered groups which we meet with in almost

every family, and which, to some extent, obscure the broader features of

distribution due to the period during which the barriers which divide the

primary regions have continued to exist.” *

* A. R. Wallace, Distribution of Animals, Vol. I, p. 503.

R24 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters. .

The absence of Lyssomanii in Europe and northern Africa would seem

to indicate that the ancestors of this group of spiders during the miocene

tertiary ranged through northern Asia and what is now British America.

The connection existing between Alaska and northeastern Asia, as shown

by the flora of that epoch, would present no obstacle to a group of spiders

originating on one of the continents passing over into the other. The

advent of the Glacial Epoch, we may suppose, drove the Lyssomanii, which

even then had separated into two genera corresponding to our Asamo-

nea and Lyssomanes, members of both of which occurred on either conti-

nent, southward, on the one hand through Asia and on the other hand

through North America.. The distance which the species are driven is

considerable, as none seem to have remained on what is now the Asiatic

Continent, but all passed over to Ceylon and the neighboring Madagascar,

whence some probably wandered to South Africa. Similarly in North

America the species were forced southward to Central America, whence

some migrated to South America. Here the conditions were most favor-

able to the development of species as the majority of existing forms is

reported from this continent. It is still doubtful whether or not the single

species in the island of San Domingo and the single species in the southern

United States are to be regarded as forms which were left behind in the

wholesale migration of the group or whether they are species which have

migrated northward from South America since the close of the Glacial

Epoch. We incline to the latter supposition, since it is more probable that

a limited number of species wouid undertake a northward migration than

that such a limited number would be spared under conditions which were

fatal to the existence of a whole group in the eastern hemisphere. It is,

of course, also possible that the Central American species have migrated

northward since the close of the Glacial Epoch.

It is interesting to note a somewhat similar distribution in another family

of spiders, the Archaeidze. This family includes four genera; one of these

is extinct, and is represented by fossils in the Baltic amber of the Tertiary

period; of the three genera that are represented by living species; one is

found in Madagascar, one in western Africa, and one in the southern part

of South America.*

FAMILY ATTIDA.

SUB-FAMILY LYSSOMAN A.

Eyes in four transverse rows.

Group I. Lyssomanii. Cephalothorax low or moderately high, rather

elongated, longer than wide.

Group II. Athamii. Cephalothorax high, short, quadrate.

Group III. Simonellii. Cephaiothorax nodose; spiders ant-like in form.

* HK. Simon, Ann. Mus. Civ. di Storia Naturale di Genova, V. XX, 1884.

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomane. 225

Group I. LyssomMANIt.

Quadrangle of eyes never more than one-third wider than long ...... .. .... Lyssomanes.

Quadrangle of eyes at least twice as wide as long................. 0... e eee ees Asamonea,

GENUS LYSSOMANES HEnrtz.

Cephalothorax moderately high, sloping downward behind and on the sides

from the caput; about one-third longer than wide. General form

oval. Caput occupying one-half or nearly one-half of cephalothorax.

Eyes arranged in four transverse rows of two each. LHyes of first row close

together, from two to three times as large as those of second row,

occupying the entire face. Second row just behind first and about

as wide (sometimes a little wider or narrower). Third row composed

of two very small eyes, plainly nearer the second than the fourth

row; narrower than second and wider than fourth row. Eyes of

fourth row about as large as those of the second and nearer together;

quadrangle formed by second and fourth rows as wide as long or

from one-fourth to one-third wider.

Sternum somewhat heart shaped; length and width about equal.

Coxee separated by the width of the labium and part or all of the maxille.

Maxille slightly enlarged at extremities.

Labium about as wide as long or a little longer than wide.

Abdomen long, slender, tapering, spinnerets short.

Legs usually long and slender. Relative length variable. Long and slen-

der femoral, tibial, metatarsal and usually patellary spines on the

four pairs.

Sub-genus Maroussa.* Second row of eyes always wider than first. Eyes

of second row frequently only about one-third as large as those of

first.

Sub-genus Jelskia. Second row of eyes not wider than first (equally wide

or a little narrower). Eyes of second row relatively larger than in

Maroussa and often placed directly above those of first row, looking

forward.

Sus-Genus Maroussa.+

A. Quadrangle of eyes not more than one-fourth wider than long.

Femur of the first as long as femur and patella of the second; meta-

CATSUS OM LHe ESL Dent: 5/55 sc ec ce cates ceidsnieisiceu et wane aneeeek sees antillanus.

(San Domingo).

Femur of the first searcely longer than femur of the second; metatar-

suplof the first nob bent. 2255.5. c<.<te neces De aaeldelssielee Asses an see unicolor.

(Peru).

* Russian proper name.

+ All the species of the sub-genus Maroussa have the leg formula 1 234, excepting mo-

destus, Madagascar (4 1 3 2), and antillanus, San Domingo (1 4 3 2); while in the sub-

genus Jelskia the formula 1 2 3 4 occurs in only three species, amazonicus, nigropictus and

landus.

226 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

_LYSSOMANES ANTILLANUS N. Sp.

Plate XI, figure 1.

6. Length of cephalothorax 2.4mm; of abdomen, 4 mm.

Legs 12.5, 9.5, 8.5, 7.4.

Cephalic and thoracic parts equally long. Quadrangle of eyes one-fourth

wider than long. Hyes of first row nearly three times as large as

those of the second. Clypeus one-fifth as high as anterior eyes.

Falces rounded, horizontal, diverging, four or five times as long as

face; fang as long as falx. Mavxille rounded and a little enlarged at

their extremities. Labium a little longer than wide, a little nar-

rower, and blunt at the tip, one-half as long as maxille. Legs 1, 2,

3,4; femur of the first as long as femur with patella of the second;

‘metatarsus of the first elongated and curved.

Coloration (dry): Upper surface of cephalothorax light-yellowish brown,

with some bright red hairs on the eye region, and a dark brown cen-

tral band from the fourth row of eyes to the posterior margin. Cly-

peus bright red with a whitish line above the insertion of the falces.

Abdomen above dark brown with a white band around base and

sides. Falces dark brown, fang black. Legs, palpi, mouthparts

and coxee light brown. Sternum and venter drab, with short white

hairs.

Habitat: San Domingo.

From the collection of M. Simon.

LYSSOMANES UNICOLOR Tacz. 1874.

Plate XI, figure 2; plate XII, figure 21.

Jelskia unicolor Tacz. 1874. Les Aranéides de la Guyane Francaise

Horee Soc. Ent. Ross., T. VIII, p. 181,

BG sf “ 1879. Les Aranéides du Perou, Bull de la Soc. Imp.

des. Nat. de Moscou. T. LIIT, 1878, No. 4,>

p. 373.

6. Length of cephalothorax 2.7 mm; of abdomen 4.2 mm.

Legs 12, 10.9, 10.8, 10.7.

9. Length of cephalothorax 3mm; of abdomen 5.2 mm.

Legs 12, 11, 10.5, 10.5.

Cephalic and thoracic parts equally long. Quadrangle of eyes scarcely

one-fourth wider than long. Eyes of first row but little more than

twice as large as those of second. Second row wider in ¢ than in

?, a little wider than the first row in both sexes. Clypeus about

one-third as high as anterior eyes. Falces weak, vertical, parallel,

about as long as face; fang weak. Maxille rounded and a little en-

larged at their extremeties. Labium about as wide as long, blunt,

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomane. 227

(4) one-half, (9) a little more than one-half as long as maxille.

Coxe of the first not so widely separated as usual, 7. e., by scarcely

more than the width of the labium. Legs 1,2, 3,4; femur of the

first but little longer than femur of the second; metatarsus of the first

not curved.

Coloration (dry): 4. Upper surface of cephalothorax pale yellow;

eye-region nearly covered with bright red hairs; white hairs on the

clypeus, in circles around the anterior eyes, and in patches outside

the second and third rows of eyes. Upper surface of abdomen pale

yellow with two divergent brown bands from base to apex, which

are enlarged at three points to form as many pairs of opposed dots,

one pair at each end, and one in the middle. Legs pale yellow with

black spines and tips and dark brown bands at the joints. Palpus

pale; bulb brown with pale tarsus projecting beyond. Falces and

under surface pale pellow. ‘

The same description answers for the female, excepting that the

bands and dots on the abdomen are indistinct, and that there are no

brown bands on the legs.

Habitat: French Guiana, Peru.

By the relatively larger eyes of the second row, and the relatively

greater length of the quadrangle of the eyes this species approaches the

sub-genus Jelskia.

B. Quadrangle of eyes one-third wider than long.

MALES.

Femur of the first as long as femur and patella of the second.. viridis.

1 (South United States).

Femur of the first not so long as femur and patella of the second 2

{ Tarsus of palpus less than twice as long as tibia................ bi-teeniatus

2- (Venezuela).

Tarsus of palpus more than twice as long as tibia .............. 3

§ No fringe of hairs on tibia of the first. ...............c00ccce cece placidus.

3 (Mexico).

| Mibiaiof the first with fringe Of Hairs. «. 2... scene ese oc vessels 4

Tibia of the first with fringe of hairs on proximal half of up-

per side and on distal half of under side; tibia of the second

4 with fringe of hairs throughout its length on under side...... miniaceus.

(Rio Janeiro).

Tibia of the first with fringe of hairs on under side nearly

throughout its length; no fringe on tibia of the second,...... austerus

(Rio Janeiro) *

FEMALES.

TNC SS Ay Sivaterere sicitic aise swinicowias obiawscts Siu Ahc HAD COON SROBOEOBAOeS modestus.

1 (Madagascar).

TiO PSlaerGl an aus eter staisinin’ selec caer vie Melelatnra trea ioioereeronliaccamelaniiale 2

Eyes of first row three times as large as those of second; falces

twice as long as face, moderately stout..............-.esee0e0- viridis.

2 P (South United States).

Eyes of first row only twice as large as those of second; falces

| BPlONE AS TACO AWOL nani actccscwe be cc ollelt ei nies mulnle aiuiclerdeSeiieice tristis.

(Brazil).

228 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

LYSSOMANES VIRIDIS Watcxk. 1887.

Plate XI, figure 8. Plate XII, figures 6, 6a, 6b.

Altis viridis Walck. 1837. Hist. Nat. des. Insectes. T. I, p. 469.

Lyssomanes viridis Hentz. 1844. Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., IV., pp.

386-396.

ue es a 1875. Occ. Pap. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., II,

Spiders of U.S., p. 48.

$. Length of cephalothorax 2.5 mm; of abdomen 4.5 mm.

Legs 12, 9.5, 8.5, 8.2. Falces 2.38 mm.

@. Length of cephalothorax 3mm; of abdomen 5.2 mm.

Legs 10, 9, 8, 7.8. Falces 1 mm.

Cephalic part not quite so long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes one-third ~

wider thanlong. Eyes of first row three times as large as those of

second row. Clypeus one-fourth as high as anterior eyes. Falces,

(6) horizontal, diverging, rounded, four times as long as face; on

the distal end of each falx, on the inner edge, are two stout projec-

tions; fang as long as falx, curved. Falces (¢?) rather stout, nearly

vertical, twice as long as face; fang one-half as long as falx. Max-

‘jlle rounded and a little enlarged at their extremities. Labium a

little. longer than wide, more than one-half as long as maxille,

blunt; im ¢ narrow at the base. Legs 1,2,8,4. Femur of the first

(é) quite, (9) nearly equal to femur with patella of the second.

Metatarsus of the first (6) bent, with fine fringe of hairs at distal

end. Spines rather long.

Coloration (under alcohol): Upper surface of cephalothorax and falces

light yellow (¢) with tinge of red; ashort dark median longitudinal

line on anterior thoracic part. Sternum, coxee, mouthparts and up-

per and under surface of abdomen pale yellow. Legs pale with

slightly darker spines and black tips, (¢) tibia of the first darker to-

ward extremity with some short dark hairs; matatarsus of the first

brown at distal end with fringe of short brown hairs.

Habitat: Southern United States.

Hentz describes this species as follows: ‘‘Tender grass-green; cephalo-

thorax with some orange-colored hairs near the eyes, and a little black line

on the disk; abdomen with six or eight black dots, sometimes wanting.”

The green color evidently fades to a light yellow in alcohol. Hentz prob-

ably never had a mature male, as he makes no reference to the long hori-

zontal falces.

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomane. 229

LYSSOMANES BI-TASNIATUS N. Sp.

Plate XI, figure 4.

é. Length of cephalothorax 2.5mm; of abdomen 4 mm.

Legs 11.5, 9.4,9,8.8. Falces 1.5 mm.

Cephalic and thoracic parts equally long. Quadrangle of eyes nearly one-

third wider than long. Eyes of first row about three times as large

as those of second row. Clypeus one-fifth as high as anterior

eyes. Falces horizontal, diverging, three times as long as face; fang

bent, as long as falx. On the front face of each falx, just above

the insertion of the fang, are seven or eight stout hairs which form

a triangle with the apex up. Maxille rounded and a littie en-

larged at their extremities. Labium as wide as long, one-half as

long as maxille, truncated. Legs 1,2,3,4. Femur of the first

nearly as long as femur with patella of the second. Metatarsus of

the first elongated, bent, with a fringe of hairs occupying distal

third. Palpus with femur elongated, and patella plainly shorter

than tibia. Tibia with a row of stout hairs on upper and outer side

of distal half.

Coloration (under alcohol): Upper surface of cephalothorax pale yel-

low with a dark line around lower margin, and a central longitudi-

nal dark line on thoracic part. Upper surface of abdomen pale yel-

low with two parallel longitudinal brown bands throughout its

length, on which are three pairs of spots, formed by enlargements

of the bands. Falces pale yellow, with an oblique band of darker

reddish yellow arising at the proximal end, above, and passing down-

ward and inward to the inner side of the insertion of the fang. Legs

pale yellow with dark bands at joints, brown spines, and black tips.

Palpus and entire under surface, light yellow.

Habitat: Venezuela. (Caracas).

From the collection of M. Simon.

LYSSOMANES PLACIDUS N. Sp.

Plate XI, figure 5.

6. Length of cephalothorax 2.8 mm; of abdomen 4 mm.

Legs 12, 9.3, 9, 8.8.

Cephalic and thoracic parts equally long. Quadrangle of eyes one-third

wider than long. Eyes of first row more than twice as large as those

of second. Clypeus nearly one-half as high as anterior eyes. Falces

weak, vertical, parallel, as long as face; fang weak. Maxille trun-

cated and a little enlarged at their extremities, cut obliquely on their

inner edges. Labium longer than wide, rounded, slightly more than

one-half as long as maxille. Legs 1,2,3,4; femur of the first

230

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

shorter than femur with patella of the second; metatarsus of the

first long, slightly bent; tarsus of the first with fringe of hairs. The

tibial and metatarsal spines are long and slender, and are arranged

in inferior rows.

Coloration (dry): Upper surface of cephalothorax light brown with a

dark line around the lower margin; eye-region and elypeus pale,

covered with white and red hairs. Upper surface of abdomen

blackish, with a white central longitudinal band extending through

two-thirds of its length; this band suddenly contracts a little behind

its middle point, its posterior end being thus made narrower than its

anterior portion. The posterior end of the venter is blackish, the

color being continuous with that of the upper surface, and extending

forward in a gradually narrowing band, to about the middle; on

either side of this band, and at the anterior end, the venter is white.

Legs and palpi pale with dark bands and black tips, the first and

second pairs of legs being darker than the third and fourth; tarsus

of the first black with a fringe of black hair. Other parts all pale.

Habitat: Mexico.

LYSSOMANES MINIACEUS N. Sp.

Plate XI, figure 6.

Length of cephalothorax 3 mm; of abdomen 4 mm.

Legs 10.8, 8.8, 8, 7.8.

Cephalic and thoracic parts equally long. Quadrangle of eyes one-third

wider than long. Eyes of the first row twice as large as those of

second. Clypeus nearly one-half as high as anterior eyes. Falces

weak, nearly vertical, about as long as face; fang short. Maxillee

rounded and a very little enlarged at their extremities, excavated on

their inner sides for the labium. Labium a very little longer than

wide, more than one-half as long as maxillee, widest in the middle,

blunt at tip. Legs stouter than is usual in this genus, 1, eye lass

mur of the first but little longer than femur of the second. Fringes

of hair on upper and under sides of tibia of the first, on under side

of tibia of the second, and on outer distal half of femur of palpus.

Coloration (dry): ‘Upper surface of cephalothorax pale brown with a

dark rim around the lower margin. Eye region covered with bright

yellowish red hairs, which surround the anterior eyes. Clypeus light

brown, with lower margin black. Upper surface of abdomen dark

drab, with a wide, pale central band extending through half of its

length; under surface dark brown with a curved, white, longitudinal

band on each side. Falces light reddish. Sternum and coxe light

red, coxee of the first, deeper in color than the others. Mouthparts

brown, tipped with pale. Legs of first pair red; of second, third and

fourth pairs red mingled with white, the fourth pair being almost en-

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomane. 231

tirely white. Palpus red, excepting proximal half of femur which is

pale. Tips of legs, spines and fringes of hair on legs and _ palpi,

black.

Habitat: South America (near Rio Janiero).

From the collection of M. Simon,

LYSSOMANES AUSTERUS N. Sp.

Plate XI, figure 7. Plate XI, figure 17.

6. Length of cephalothorax 2.7 mm., of abdomen 4,5 mm.

Legs 11.5, 9.5, 9.3, 9.3.

9. Length of cephalothorax 2.8 mm; of abdomen 4mm,

Legs 9, 7.8, 7.3, 6.9.

Cephalic part not quite so long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes one-third

wider than long. LHEyes of first row three times as large as those of

second. Clypeus one-third as high as anterior eyes, (4) projecting

forward over the falces. Falces nearly vertical, parallel, as long as.

face, (4) moderately stout, (?) weak. Maxille rounded and a lit-

tle enlarged at their extremities. Labium longer than wide, rounded,.

narrowing slightly toward its base, and a little more than one-half as

long as the maxille. Coxe of the first separated (2) by a little more

than width of labium ,( 4) more widely. Legs 1, 2, 3, 4; femur of the

first nearly as long as femur with patella of the second; tibia of the

first with afringe of stout hairs.

Coloration (dry): ¢. Upper surface of cephalothorax light brown,

pale on the anterior side; eye-region with bright red hairs. Abdo-

men blackish with a pale central longitudinal band above, and two

white longitudinal lines on the venter. Falces brown. Sternum and

coxee pale. Mouthparts dark tipped with white. First and second

pairs of legs with first three joints dark brown and the others pale;

third and fourth pairs dark brown with pale rings; tarsi tipped with

black. Palpus brown with proximal end of femur pale. (?) light

yellow; eye region covered with bright red hairs. Spines and tips of

legs black.

Habitat: South America (near Rio Janeiro.)

From the collection of M. Simon.

LYSSOMANES MODESTUS N. Sp.

Plate XII, figure 10.

g. Length of cepalothorax 2 mm; of abdomen 3.3 mm.

Legs 7, 6.5, 6.8, 8.

Cephalic and thoracic parts equally long. Quadrangle of eyes one-third

wider than long. Eyes of first row a little more than twice as large as

those of second. Clypeus one-half as high as anterior eyes. Falces

232 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

weak, vertical, parallel, scarcely aslong as face;fang weak. Maxillee

rounded and a little enlarged at their extremities. Labium as wide

as long, rounded, almost one-half as long as maxille. Coxe of the

first separated by but little more than the width of the labium. Legs

4, 1, 3, 2; femur of the first scarcely longer than femur of the second.

Coloration (dry): Upper surface of cephalothorax, light yellow; eye-

region surrounded above by a band of bright-red hairs covered in the

middle with white hairs. Clypeus with thick white hairs. Abdomen

above light brown or yellow, with silvery white hairs; two parallel

longitudinal bands of red hairs extend throughout its length, and

these are connected by transverse bands of red hairs in three places,

at the anterior and posterior ends, and in the middle. Legs light

yellow with brown spines and black tips. Other parts all light

yellow. -

Most of our specimens have all the hair rubbed off from the abdomen,

which then presents a plain light colored surface with afew dark dots.

Habitat: Madagascar.

LYSSOMANES TRISTIS N. Sp.

Plate XII, figure 12.

9. Length of cephalothorax 2.5mm; of abdomen 5 mm.

Legs 8.5, 7.4, 7, 5.

Cephalic part not quite so long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes one-third

wider than long. Eyes of first row twice as large as those of second.

Clypeus a little less than one-half as high as anterior eyes. Falces

weak, vertical, about as long as face; fang short. Maxille rounded,

and a little enlarged at their extremities. excavated on their inner

sides for the labium. Labium about as wide as long, blunt, and nar-

rowing a little at the tip, and a little more than one-half as long as

maxille. Legs 1, 2,3,4; femur of the first shorter than femur with

patella of the second.

Coloration (dry): Upper surface of cephalothorax yellowish-brown; eye-

region and clypeus covered with snowy white hairs. Abdomen,

above and beneath, very light brown, probably covered with white

hairs, which in the specimens which we have examined are almost

entirely rubbed off. Legs pale, darkening somewhat toward the

proximal ends, with brown tips, and light colored spines. Other

parts all pale. :

Habitat: Brazil.

From the Berlin collection, through the courtesy of Dr. Ferd. Karsch.

Spiders of the Sub Family Lyssomane. 233

SUB-GENUS JELSKIA.

A. Quadrangle of eyes as long as wide, or barely wider than long.

MALES.

Tarsus of palpus five times as long as tibia...................ecee eee tenuis.

1 ‘ ar (Brazil).

Tarsus of palpus only twice as long as tibia..............se5.-2-+-00e 2

Falces very long @ mm); fang as long as falx....................00% jJemineus.

9 (South America).

Falces short; fang plainly shorter than falx...........0...20..ceesere nigropictus.

(Amazon).

FEMALES.

Metatarsus of the first elongated and bent.................0......00. jemineus.

3 (South America).

| Metatarsus of the first neither elongated nor bent................... parallelus.

(South America).

é.

LYSSOMANES TENUIS N. Sp.

Plate XI, figure 8.

Length of cephalothorax 2 mm; of abdomen 2.9.

Legs 13, 9, 8, 10.

Cephalic part as long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes as long as wide.

Eyes of first row twice as large as those of second. ‘Second row nar-

rower than first. Clypeus one-fifth as high as anterior eyes. Falces

nearly horizontal, diverging, a little longer than face; fang as long as

falx. Maxillee rounded and slightly enlarged at their extremities,

excavated for the labium. Labium as wide as long, one-half as leng

as maxille, narrowing at base, blunt at extremity. Legs 1, 4, 2,3;

femur of the first longer than femur with patella of the second; fe-

mur, tibia and metatarsus of the first, much elongated. Legs all

slender. Spines growing gradually weaker from first to fourth, be-

ing scarcely more than hairs on tibia and metatarsus of the fourth.

Palpus with patella and tibia more than two-thirds as long as tarsus.

Spines on palpus as follows: femur, two spines at distal end, one just

behind these, and a fourth in the middle; patella, one long spine at dis-

tal end; tibia, one in the middle and one at distal end; tarsus, two

spines, or long hairs, on dorsum of enlarged part, one placed be-

hind the other.

Coloration (dry): Upper surface of cephalothorax, clypeus and abdomen

black with thin, white hairs, the abdomen having a faintly indicated

transverse band of a lighter shade behind the middle. Falces and

palpi dark brown. Sternum, coxz and mouthparts, light brown.

Legs light reddish brown, with brown spines and black tips.

Habitat: South America (near Rio Janiero.)

From the collection of M. Simon.

See remarks under Jelskia velox.

234 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

LYSSOMANES JEMINEUS N. Sp.

Plate X¥, figure 9. Plate XII, figure 14.

é. Length of cephalothorax 2.5 mm; of abdomen 5mm.

Legs 16.3, 12, 11.4,11.8. Falces 3 mm.

9. Length of cephalothorax 3mm; of abdomen5 mm. (Legs too badly

broken to be measured.)

Cephalic part not quite so long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes about one-

fifth wider than long. Eyes of first row three times as large as those

of second. Second row slightly narrower than first. Clypeus nearly

one-third as high as anterior eyes. Falces (é) stout, horizontal,

three times as long as face, diverging; fang as long as falx, with a

double curve; (2) stout, nearly vertical, about twice as long as face,

bulging in front, nearly parallel; fang short. Maxillee blunt, and a

little enlarged at their extremities. Labium longer than wide, a lit-

tle more than one-half as long as maxillee, widest in the middle. Legs

1,2, 4,3; (4) femur, tibia and metatarsus of the first all much elon-.

gated, metatarsus curved; a wide fringe of hairs on each side of tibia

and metatarsus of the first,less marked on tibia of the second, and

much less on metatarsus of the second; (2) metatarsus of the first

long, curved, without hairs, but with longer and stouter spines than ¢.

(4) Palpus with femur as long as falx; patella but little shorter than

tibia; patella and tibia two-thirds as long as tarsus; a bunch of hairs

on outer side of distal half of tibia; two spines at distal end of femur

and one at extremity of patella.

Coloration (under alcohol): Cephalothorax, reddish yellow; cephalic

part with a band of yellowish white hairs on each side below the

eyes; a large bright red spot behind the eyes of the fourth row which

extends forward between them; and a red spot on the outer side of

each anterior eye; eyes of third row surrounded by reddish hairs.

Thoracic part with a dark brown central longitudinal band extend-

ing from just behind fourth row of eyes to posterior margin. Falces

reddish yellow. Mouth parts, sternum and coxz pale yellow; abdo-

men above, mottled brown; sides pale yellow; venter with dark brown,

median, longitudinal band. Legs pale yellow or light brown; (¢)

black fringes of hair on tibiae and metatarsi of the first and second.

(é) Palpus pale yellow excepting tibia and tarsus which are brown.

Habitat: South America.

From the collection of M. Simon.

The male of this species is easily distinguished by its elongated falces,

and by the double fringes of hair on the first and second pairs of legs.

Spiders of the Sub Family Lyssomane. 235

LYSSOMANES NIGROPICTUS N. Sp.

Plate XI, figure 10.

6. Length of cephalothorax 2.8 mm; of abdomen 4 mm.

Legs 12.5, 11.5, 11.3, 10.8.

Cephalic part as long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes scarcely wider than

long. Eyes of first row twice as large as those of second row. First

and second rows equally wide. Clypeus nearly one-half as high as

anterior eyes. Falces weak, parallel, vertical, as long as face; fang

. weak, Maxillee rounded and slightly enlarged at their extremities,

excavated on their inner sides for labium. Labium longer than

wide, about one-half as long as maxillee, blunt at tip, widest in the

middle, and narrowing toward both ends. Coxe separated by but

little more than width of labium. Legs 1, 2,3,4. Femur of the first

scarcely longer than femur of the second. Palpus with patella and

tibia three-fourths as long as tarsus. Spines on palpus as follows:

femur, two on dorsum at distal end; patella, one long spine at ex-

tremity; tibia, one behind middle on inner side, and one at distal

end; tarsus, two long spines on dorsum of enlarged part, placed side

by side.

Coloration (under alcohol): Upper surface of cephalothorax with eye-

region white, and the remainder very light brown; there is a black

line around the lower margin and a central dark brown band from

the fourth row of eyes to the posterior edge. Upper surface of ab-

domen white with four pairs of brown spots; the first pair is on the

anterior face of the abdomen and is not plainly visible from above;

the third pair is just behind the middle point of the dorsum; the

fourth pair is just in front of the white spinnerets, and the two spots

are connected by a brown band. Legs white with brown rings and

spines and black tips. Palpus white with a dark line on each side of

the femur, and having the bulb light brown, and some dark hairs at

the extremity of the tarsus. Other parts all white.

Habitat: South America (Amazon).

From the collection of M. Simon:

The tarsus of the palpus of this species has an arrangement of the spines

which is only duplicated in Jelskia velox, the palpus differing from that of

this species in having no fringes of hair on the patella and tibia. It has,

moreover, the first two pairs of legs more nearly equal in length than any

species excepting Jelskia robusta, from which it is quickly distinguished

by its much lighter color.

236 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

LYSSOMANES PARALLELUS. N. Sp.

Plate XII, figure 15.

?. Length of cephalothorax 1.9; of abdomen 3 mm.

Legs 9,7, 7, —. (Fourth leg missing.)

Cephalic part as long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes scarcely wider than

long. Eyes of first row a little more than twice as large as those of

second. Second row narrower than first. Clypeus scarcely one-fifth

as high as anterior eyes. Falces moderately stout, somewhat in-

clined forward, diverging, as long as face. Mavxille excavated on

inner sides for labium; extremities rounded, near together, but little

enlarged. Labium but little longer than wide, truncated, a little

more than one-half as long as labium. Legs 1, 2, 3, —; femur of

‘» the first as long as femur with patella of the second.

Coloration (dry): Hye region covered with mixed red and white hairs;

upper surface of thoracic part brown, glabrous, with a pale trans-

verse band just behind the fourth row of eyes; sides pale excepting

lower margin, which is brown. Clypeus covered with white hairs.

Abdomen pale with two longitudinal brown bands originating separ-

ately at the base and meeting at the apex. Falx yellowish brown

with a fringe of red hairs at extremity. Mouthparts light brown.

Sternum, coxee, and venter pale yellowish. Legs pale; first leg and

femur of second with a dark line on each side; spines brown, tips

black. Palpus pale excepting tarsus, which is light brown.

Habitat: South America.

From the collection of M. Simon.

B. Quadrangle of eyes from one-fifth to one-third wider than long.

MALES.

Tarsus of palpus five times as long as tibia......................20000- velox.

d i : (Brazil).

Tarsus of palpus only twice as long as tibia.....................-.-.0- 2

Femur of the first as long as femur and patella and one-half tibia of

(

2] ULAVE) RTeXC(0) 010 Sige AIGA AONE ea ens BME ASABE MEER a ease di oo longipes.

| (French Guiana).

1 PSF eat UA caer Weak el ates sini 4 nae RI i Itt cia POR EC SER ao SoG robustus.

(Peru).

3 Defend LPN Sat. are thet aie ara NE OT re I apie De NER ESN ON ERPS BN OG amazonicus.

L (Amazon).

FEMALES.

Eyes of first row three times as large as those of second; eyes of

fourth row a little smaller than those of second..................... amazonicus.

(Amazon).

Hyes of first row only twice as large as those of second; eyes of fourth

LOWsaASlaree: asshosewL SCCOndeeeer EGE EEE Erne eee rei » blandus.

(Guatemala).

o_o

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomane. 237

LYSSOMANES VELOX N. Sp.

Plate XI, figure 11.

$. Length of cephalothorax 2.7 mm.; of abdomen 4 mm.

Legs 14, 18.2, 15, 15.5. .

Cephalic part plainly shorter than thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes a little

more than one-third wider than long. Eyes of first row three times.

as large as those of second. First and second rows equally wide.

Clypeus one-fourth as high as anterior eyes. Falces weak, nearly

vertical, parallel, a little longer than the face; fang weak. Maxillz

slightly enlarged beyond the middle, rather pointed, very little exca-

vated on their inner edges. Labium a little longer than wide, one-

half as long as maxille, a little narrower, and blunt af tip. Legs

long and slender, 4, 3,1, 2; femur of the first about as long as femur

of the second. Palpus with patella and tibia one-half as long as tar-

sus; patella and tibia with fringe of hairs on outer edge; those on

tibia pointing downward and outward, those on patella on a higher

plane, and pointing forward. Spines on palpus as follows: femur,

one spine at distal end, another just behind this one, and a third

about in the middle of the joint; patella, one spine at distal end, in

the middle; tibia, one at distal end and one in the middle on the

outer edge; tarsus two long spines on the dorsum of the enlarged

part, placed side by side.

Coloration (under alcohol): Inter-ocular region pale, almost white;

thoracic part and sides brown, growing much darker toward lower

margin. Clypeus brown with a black line above falces. Abdomen,

above, with sides white, and a large white spot at anterior end which

contracts behind to form a long point; dorsum occupied by a wide

brown band which bifurcates in front to surround the white spot.

Falces brown with white extremities. Mouthparts dark brown.

Coxee of the first brown; other coxe, and sternum, white. Venter

pale, excepting at posterior end where it is brown. Legs with upper

faces of femora and tarsi pale; otherwise brown. Palpus dark brown.

Habitat: Brazil.

From the collection of M. Simon.

This species and Jelskia tenuis are easily distinguished from other mem-

bers of this genus by their dark color and elongated legs; while velox is

distinguished from tenuis by the hairs on the patella and tibia of the pal-

pus, and by the position of the spines on the tarsus of the palpus, these

being placed side by side in velox and one behind the other in tenuis,

238 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

LYSSOMANES LONGIPES Tacz. 1874.

Plate XI, figure 12.

Jelskia longipes Tacz., 1874. Les Aranéides de la Guyane francaise,

Horae Soc. Entomol. Ross., T. VIII, p. 32-132.

6. Length of cephalothorax 2 mm; of abdomen 3.2 mm.

Legs 12.4, 8.3, 7.7, 8.

Cephalic part as long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes one-fifth wider

than long. Eyes of first row a little more than twice as large as

those of second. Second row narrower than first. Clypeus about

one fifth as high as anterior eyes. Falces very weak, vertical, par-

allel, aslong as face; fang short. Maxille rounded, and a very little

enlarged at their extremities, excavated on inner sides for labium.

Labium as wide as long, one-half as long as maxille, blunt. Legs 1,

2, 4, 8; femur of the first very long, equalling femur with patella and

half tibia of the second. Palpus with patella and tibia about equal

in length; patella and tibia three-fourths as long as tarsus, spines on

palpus as follows: Femur, two at distal end, and onein the middle of

the dorsum, all short; patella, one at extremity; tibia, one long hair

in the middle, and one at extremity; tarsus, one long hair on dorsum

of enlarged part.

Coloration (under alcohol): Upper surface of cephalothorax deep red-

dish yellow, with a narrow black line around lower edge and an-

other on the central thoracic region; eyes, as usual, on black spots.

Abdomen above, with a blackish region at the extremity in front of

which is a white band;the remainder of the dorsum is blackish ex-

cepting three white spots, one elongated, large, one on the anterior

central part, and two smaller, which come off obliquely from the

posterior corners of the first one. Spinnerets white. Ventral surface

white excepting at the extremity where it is blackish. Sternum,

mouthparts, and falces yellow. Legs light yellow with brownish

spines and tips. Palpus pale with the bulb reddish brown.

When dry, the eye-region is seen to be covered with white hairs. The

abdomen is alsothinly covered with short white hairs.

Habitat: French Guiana.

From the collection of Dr. Taczanowski.

This species is distinguished by the great relative length of the first pair

of legs, and especially by the elongation of the femora of that pair.

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomane. 239

LYSSOMANES ROBUSTUS Tacz. 1879.

Plate XI, figure 13. Plate XII, figure 7.

Jelskia robusta Tacz. Les Aranéides du Perou. Bull. de la Soc. Imp.

des Nat. de Moscou, T. L III, 1878, No. 4, p. 373.

6. Length of cephalothorax 2.3 mm; of abdomen 3 mm.

Legs 9.2, 8.6, 8.8, 8.7.

Cephalic part a little shorter than thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes nearly

one-fourth wider thanlong. Eyes of first row twiceas large as those of

second. Eyes of second row placed directly above those of first,

forming a row equally wide, looking forward. Clypeus only a

line. Falces very weak, vertical, parallel, as long as face; fang

very short. Maxillae and labium unusually short. Maxille

rounded and a little enlarged at their extremities, which are quite

close together, excavated on their inner sides for the labium.

Labium a little longer than wide, rounded at tip, one-half as long ag

maxilla. Legs 1,3, 4.2; femur of the first not quite so long as femur

with patella of the second. Palpus with patella and tibia equally

long; patella and tibia two-thirds as long as tarsus. Tibia with a

stout fringe of hairs on the outer edge. Tarsus with one spine on

dorsum of enlarged part behind middle.

Coloration (dry): Upper surface of cephalothorax jet black, with two

indistinct brownish spots on thoracic part, and afew long white hairs

on eye-region. Clypeus black. Abdomen above, black, thinly cov-

ered with whitish hairs, and having two indistinct brownish spots

behind the middle. Falces black with extremities and fangs pale

yellow. Mouthparts black; sternum black with a large pale yellow

spot in center. Venter pale yellowish, excepting the anterior and

posterior ends, which are pale. Legs light yellow, excepting tarsus

of the first,and tips of other legs which are black. Palpus black,

except that part of the tarsus which projects beyond the bulb which

is pale yellow.

Habitat: Peru.

From the collection of Dr. Taczanowski.

The jet black body and pale legs of this species quickly distinguish it from

all members of this group.

240 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

LYSSOMANES AMAZONICUS N. Sp.

Plate XII, figures 1, 16.

6. Length of cephalothorax 2.5 mm; of abdomen 4.4 mm.

Legs’12.5, 11, 10.8, 10.8.

¢. Length of cephalothorax 2.5mm; of abdomen 5 mm.

Legs 11.3, 10, 9.4, 9.2.

Cephalic part (4) as long (2) not quite so long as thoracic. Quadrangle of

eyes one-fifth wider than long. Eyes of first row three times as

large as those of second. Second and first rows equally wide. Cly-

peus one-third as high as anterior eyes. Falces rather stout, diverg-

ing, not quite vertical, one-third longer than face; on the front of

each falx just above insertion of fang, is a line of three stout hairs.

Maxille rounded and a little enlarged at their extremities. Labium

longer than wide, blunt and slightly narrower at extremity, and a

little more than one-half as long as maxille. Legs 1, 2,3,4; femur

of the first not so long as femur with patella of the second. (¢é)

Palpus with tibia plainly longer than patella; patella and tibia plainly

less than one-half as long as tarsus. Femur with two spines at distal

end and one in the middle; patella with one long hair at extremity;

tibia with one stout hair at distal end on inner side.

Coloration (under alcohol): ¢. Light yellow. Eye-region covered with

white hairs; there is an abbreviated central longitudinal black line

on the thoracic region, and a black line around the lower margin.

The abdomen has two longitudinal brown bands throughout its length

which are enlarged at the middle point and again at the posterior

end to ferm two pairs of spots. The spinnerets are brown. The

legs grow darker toward their extremities and are tipped with black.

9. Yellowish white. Cephalothorax like 6 excepting that there is

no dark marginal line. Abdomen with two pairs of brown spots, and

with the spinnerets pale. The color is paler and the marks less dis-

tinct than in the ¢.

Habitat: South America (Amazon).

From the collection of M. Simon.

The male of this species differs from all others in the greater relative

length of the tarsus of the palpus, the tarsus being more than twice as

long as the patella and tibia together.

Spiders of the Sub Family Lyssomane. ~ 241

LYSSOMANES BLANDUS N. Sp.

Plate XII, figure 13.

9. Length of cephalothorax 2.8 mm.; of abdomen 4.6 mm.?

Legs 12.3, 10, 9.6, 9.6.

Cephalic part as long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes one-fourth wider

than long. Eyes of first row twice as large as those of second. First

and second rows equally wide. Clypeus one-half as high as anterior

eyes. Falces robust, nearly horizontal, one and one-half times as

long as face. Maxille a little enlarged and rounded at their extremi-

ties, slightly excavated on their inner sides. Labium longer than

wide, a little more than one-half as long as maxilla, widest in the

middle, blunt at extremity. Legs 1,2, 2, 4; femur of the first shorter

than femur with patella of the second.

Coloration (ander alcohol): Cephalothorax light yellow; eve-region sur-

rounded with red and white hairs; anterior thoracic part with a dark

central longitudinalline. Abdomen white with scattered light brown

hairs; on the posterior part of the dorsum are two abbreviated, long-

itudinal, light brown bands, and there are some irregular, light

brown spots on the anterior part. Falces, legs, palpi, mouthparts

and sternum all pale yellow.

Habitat: Guatemala.

GENUS ASAMONEA (CAMBRIDGE) SIMON.

Cephalothorax low; cephalic plate usually but little higher than thorax, oc-

cupying alittle more than one-third of the cephalothorax.

Eyes in four transverse rows of two each. Eyes of first row close together,

from two and one-half to three times as large as those of second row

(relatively larger than in Lyssomanes), occupying the entire face.

Second row of eyes wider than first. Eyes of third row much nearer

the second than the fourth and much nearer together than those of

second row; third row narrower than second, and sometimes wider,

sometimes narrower than fourth. Eyes of fourth row about as

large as those of second and nearer together. Quadrangle formed by

second and fourth rows, at least twice as wide as long.

Sternum little, if any, longer than wide, truncated in front.

Coxe separated by the width of the labium and part or all of that of the

maxille ,

Labium at least as wide as long.

Abdomen long, slender, tapering.

Legs slender; ( $) 1482 or 1423;( 9) fourth leg longest, others nearly equal.

Femoral, tibial, metatarsal and sometimes patellary spines on the four

pairs,

242 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

A. Eyes of third row but little smaller than those of the fourth.

MALES.

General color light; integument covered with silvery hairs.......... ..... puella.

(South Africa).

Generalicolonsd al: epee ere eee ieee eis tet ROSA e rs nic ute As tenutpes.

(Ceylon.)

FEMALES.

MiPshian Ob hInG MOSS leo Uae wpe ie eeyaneee scl se sera cet Neate eteis ee eee ia eee tenwipes.

(Ceylon).

Hirshandashindslessinotequalklasseeereeeereosce ere aat eer ee creer eee 2

\ iC OSA OVE NED cytishe rere role miscars Dette ral PSAs arm DEMME ens ec puella.

2 (South Africa).

Gl trees Obi eInORS ih mee RU DR Re nme iva. v7 ie ante eo en Se a 3

MGC RS ANB) ORM ce Sees epee ate eA civgcieiaie Berea el aisin Mes ye ghia eee See ee Reet punctata,.

3 ie (Madagascar).

UB Yee gehies MOTs Ee les ere sian ea racer Me Cie MN air orae 6 UNI Ee Cy mI rr OOS Bag Gio ornatissima.

| (Madagascar).

ASAMONEA PUELLA Simon. 1885.

Asamonea puella Simon. Bull. de la Soc. Zuol. 1885, T. X. p. 27.

Having no mature specimen of this species we translate the following

description from Simon:

> 6. Length6mm. Cephalothorax yellowish testaceous narrowly bordered

with brownish, with the cephalic part covered with yellow hair, and

having on each side a large black three-lobed spot which surrounds

the eyes; the thoracic part, above, with two lines covered with thin red

hairs which come together posteriorly. Clypeus very high, smooth be-

hind the falces, above the eyes densely pubescent, in the middle silvery,

on each side reddish. Abdomen steeply elongate, covered with hairs

which are whitish testaceous and silvery white, adorned above with

two lines, prettily interrupted with red. Spinnerets testaceous, upper

ones brownish. Falces yellow testaceous, cut transversely by a black

band in front. Sternum testaceous. Legs testaceous, femora with

brownish lines below; tibia of fourth from base to apex, minutely

dotted with brown; abundantly armed with long and delicate spines.

Palpi testaceous with the stout femur armed below, back of the mid-

dle, with an obtuse -tubercle; patella short; tibia not longer than

patella, slightly thicker on the outside and enlarged into a keel-

shaped laminate apophysis which is a little thickened and obtuse in the

middle and very sharply prolonged above; the large tarsus longer than

the femur and much thicker, convex and attenuated longitudinally

with a large convex bulb.

g. Length 7mm. Cephalothorax with no lines on thoracic part. Cly-

peus, behind falces smooth, above eyes covered all over with silvery

hair. Falces and legs uniform yellow testaceous without lines or spots.

Region of epigynum, anteriorly, with a transverse pit obtusely tri-

angular and much broader than long; posteriorily, a shining reddish.

transverse spot.

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomane. 243

ASAMONEA TENUIPES Camps. 1869.

Plate XII, figures 5, 19, 19a, 19b.

LYSSOMANES tenuipes Camb., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. S. 4, vol. 3, p, 65.

3}.

Length of cephalothorax 1.5 mm; of abdomen 2 mm.

Legs 6, 5, 5, 5.3.

Length of cephalothorax 1.7 mm; of abdomen 3 mm.

Legs 5.5, —, 6.5, —. (Second and fourth wanting.)

Cephalic part scarcely more than one-half as long as thoracic, in ¢ with

front and sides projecting like carapace of turtle. Quadrangle of

eyes twice as wide as long. Eyes of first row two and one-half times

as large as those of second row. *Clypeus about one-half as high

as anterior eyes. Falces very weak, 6 inclined backward, 9?

vertical, 6 scarcely as long as face, almost quadrate, 9° as long as

face; fang very weak. Maxille short, truncated, ¢ alittle narrower,

? a little wider at their extremities. Labium wider than long, wider

in ¢ thanin ?, @ one-third, ? a little less than one-half as long as

maxille, blunt at extremity. Legs, ¢ 1,4,3,2; 9? first and third

equal. Coxe of the first separated by the width of maxille and

labium. Femur of the first plainly shorter than femur with patella

of the second. Superior spinnerets elongated, in ¢, curved upward.

Coloration (dry): ¢. Cephalothorax dark brown, covered with whitish

iridescent scales; a pale central band extends from the anterior eyes

to the posterior border, and from this, curved white bands extend

around the outer sides of the eye-region; the anterior part of the eye-

region is covered with long white hairs. Clypeus covered with

highly iridescent scales. Palpi, dark brown. Sternum and coxe,

pale. Abdomen, above and below, dark brown, shading to blackish

on the sides, with a wide irregular pale ring near the posterior end:

apex and curved spinnerets jet black; the whole abdomen is thinly

covered with iridescent scales like those on the cephalothorax. Legs

pale yellow; those of the first and second pairs have three black spots

on the posterior side, one at the distal end of the femur, one at the

proximal and one at the distal end of the patella; the tips of all the

legs are black. Spines yellow.

Light yellow with thick snowy white hairs on eye region and clypeus.

Legs tipped!with black.

Habitat: Ceylon.

244 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ASAMONEA PUNCTATA N. Sp.

Plate 12, figure 20.

9. Length of cephalothorax 2.8 mm# of abdomen 5 mm.

Legs 8.7, 9, 9.5, 10.5.

We have also an immature é of this species.

Cephalic part a little more than one-half as long as thoracic. Quadrangle

of eyes more than twice as wide as long. Hyes of first row three

times as large as those of second row. Clypeus fully one-half as

high as anterior eyes. Falces weak, vertical, parallel, as long as

face; fang weak. Maxille rounded, a little enlarged at their ex-

tremities. Labium rounded, ¢ wider than long, ? as wide as long;

less than one-half as long as maxille. Legs 4, 3, 2,1; femur of the

first shorter than femur of the second. Spines unusually long and

stout.

Coloration (under alcohol): 92. Pale yellow, with an indistinct dark

median line on the thoracic part of the cephalothorax, and three

equi-distant pairs of dark brown dots on the abdomen arranged in

two lines of three dots each, the posterior pair of dots being only a

little behind the middle of the abdomen. The tips of the legs are

black, but the spines are light colored. When the spider is dried a

small tuft of black hairs becomes visible at the anterior end of the

abdomen. 4. Upper surface of cephalothorax light brown, ex-

cepting on eye-region and anterior thoracic part, where it is pale

yellow; on each side of the posterior thoracic part are two dark

brown dots. Abdomen with four pairs of dark brown dots at equal

distances between the two ends, the first three pairs converging

toward the posterior end, the two dots of the fourth pair being

placed further apart than any of the others. Probably a fourth pair

of dots has been effaced from the abdomen of our female specimen.

Habitat: Madagascar.

ASAMONEA ORNATISSIMA N. Sp.

Plate XII, figure 22.

9. Length of cephalothorax 2 mm; of abdomen 3 mm.

Legs 6.2, 6.6, 6.4, 7.

Cephalic part a little more than one-half as long as thoracic. Quadrangle

of eyes twice as wide as long. Eyes of first row about two and one-

half times as large as those of second row. Clypeus nearly one-third

as high as anterior eyes. Falces weak, parallel, vertical, as long as

the face, fang weak. Maxille rounded and very little enlarged at

their extremities. Labium rounded, wider than long, less than one-

half as long as maxille. Legs 4, 2,3,1; femur of the first about as

long as femur of the second. Spines growing more slender from

the first leg to the fourth.

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomane. 245

Coloration (dry): Eye region covered with hairs of a rich brownish red

: color, with a wide central band of silver hairs extending between the

eyes of the third row; thoracic part pale, without hairs. Clypeus

with a band of silver hairs. Falces, and entire under side, pale yel--

low. Upper surface of abdomen covered with haits of a rich brown-

ish red, encircled by a band of silvery hairs, and having three spots

of silvery hairs on the dorsum, the anterior one being the smallest,

and the second and third broader. Legs pale, with light brown

spines and black tips.

Habitat: Madagascar.

B. Eyes of third row much smaller than those of fourth (not more than

one-third as large.)

Under this head we have only two individuals of different sexes. The

male is gracilis, French Guiana, and the female flava, Central America.

ASAMONEA GRACILIS Tacz. 1875.

Plate XII, figure 2.

Jeiskia gracilis Tacz., Les Aranéides de Guyane francaise, Horae Soc. Ent.

Ross., T. VIII, pp. 32-182.

4. Length of cephalothorax1.8 mm.; of abdomen 4 mm.

Legs 11, 9, 10.8, 10.4.

Cephalic part not quite so long as thoracic. Quadrangle of eyes more than

twice as wide aslong. Eyes of the first row three times as large as

those of second row, projecting. Clypeus nearly one-half as high as

anterior eyes. Falces very weak, vertical, as long as face; fang weak.

Maxillz rounded and a little enlarged at their extremities, slightly

inclined toward labium. Labium as wide as long, about one-half as

long as maxille. Maxilliz and labium unusually short. Legs 1, 4,

3, 2, very long and fine. Coxe of the first more widely separated

than usual — by fully the width of maxille and labium. Femur of

the first about as long as femur with patella of the second.

Coloration: Cephalothorax and abdomen, both above and beneath, polished

black, with bluish iridescent reflections. Legs very pale yellow with

pale spines and hairs; on the upper surface of the first leg a black

line begins on the trochanter and extends throughout half the length

of the femur; there is a similar line on the upper surface of the

second leg, but here it is much shorter and finer. Falces pale yellow

with a black spot on the anterior face of each. Mouthparts pale

yellow. Palpus black excepting the tarsus, which is light reddish

, yellow.

Habitat: French Guiana.

From the collection of Dr. Taczanowski.

246 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

ASAMONEA FLAVA N. Sp.

Plate XII, figure 18.

g. Length of cephalothorax 1.8 mm; of abdomen 3.8 mm.

Legs 11.8, 10.8, 11.6, 138.

Cephalic part a little more than one-half as long as thoracic. Quadrangle

of eyes twice as wide as long. Eyes of first row two and one-half

times as large as those of second row. Clypeus one-third as high as

anterior eyes. Falces weak, shorter than face, slightly inclined back-

ward. Maxille truncated, and a little enlarged at their extremities.

Labium a little wider than long, less than one-half as long as maxille,

rounded. Legs 4,1,8,2. Femur of the first scarcely longer than

femur of the second. Spines very few in number, and extremely

weak, scarcely more than hairs. The abdomen, which is somewhat

injured, seems to have been cylindrical in shape and truncated be-

hind. , Superior spinnerets not so much elongated as is usual in this

genus.

Coloration (under alcohol): Light yellow; on all the legs the tibial joints

have two dark brown spots at each end; the metatarsi have two

brown spots at the proximal end and the metatarsus of the first has

one brown spot at the distal end; the tarsi of all the legs have the dis-

tal fifth dark brown. Spines matching the legs in color.

Habitat: Central America.

LYSSOMANES PALLENS BuLackwatu. 1887.

Lyssomanes pallens, Blackwall, Proc. Royal Irish Acad., 1877, Vol. III,

Ser. 2, p. 6.

Having no specimen of this species, we are unable to determine its genus,

although, to judge from the drawings, it belongs to the second division of

Asamonea. We quote the whole description as given by Blackwall:

““ Leneth of an immature male (not including the spinners), one-fifth of an

inch; length of the cepholothorax, one-sixteenth; breadth, one-six-

teenth; breadth of the abdomen, one-twentieth; length of a posterior

leg, one-fourth; length of an anterior leg, five-twenty-fourths. The

color of this spider is white tinged with yellow, particularly on the

sides and base of the cephalothorax. The eves are disposed on the

anterior part of the cephalothorax; two, which are situated in front,

are much the largest, and are prominent, pellucid, and almost in

contact; on each side of the upper part of the cephalic region these

eyes are placed in the form of an irregular triangle, on small tuber-

cles seated on confluent black spots, the intermediate eye, constitut-

ing the vertex of an obtuse angle, being the smallest of the eight.

The cephalothorax is somewhat quadrate, convex, glossy, slightly

Spiders of the Sub Family Lyssomane. 247

roundefl on the sides and at the base, and moderately elevated in the

cephalic region. The falces are small, sub-conical, and inclined to-

ward the sternum, which is broad, convex, and heart-shaped; the

maxille are short, rounded at the extremity, and inclined toward

the lip, which is somewhat quadrate, being broader at the base than

at the apex. The legs are slender, and provided with hairs and long

spines, two parallel rows of the latter extending along the inferior

surface of the tibia and metatarsus of the first and second pairs; each

tarsus is terminated by two minute, curved claws, below which there

is a small black scopula. The abdomen is long, sub-cylindrical, and

has a few short, pale hairs distributed over its surface. The superior

spinners are the longest, and their terminal joint, which is pointed,

has the spinning-tubes arranged on its inferior surface. The palpi of

the specimen from which the description was made were very tumid,

but the palpal organs were not developed, indicating that it proba-

bly had to undergo its final change of integument before it arrived at

maturity; the radial was stronger than the cubital joint, and promi-

nent in front.”

GROUP II. ATHAMII.

GENUS ATHAMAS CAMBRIDGE.

Cephalothorax high, short, quadrate, very convex above, sloping steeply be-

hind and on the sides. Caput occupying at least one-half of cephalo-

thorax. Eyes arranged in four transverse rows of two each. Eyes of

first row large and close together. Eyes of second row two-thirds

as large as those of first, forming a wider row. Eyes of third row

half way between second and fourth rows. and about one-third as

large as those of fourth row. Eyes of fourth row smaller than those

of second and nearer together. Quadrangle formed by second and

fourth rows as long as wide. Labium about as wide as long.

ATHAMAS WHITMEEI CaAmBrIDGE. 1887.

Plate XI, figures 3, 11.

Athamas whitmeei Camb., Proc. Zool. Soc. of London, 1877, p. 576.

6. Length of cephalothorax 1.6 mm; of abdomen 1.4mm.

?. Length of cephalothorax 1.25 mm; of abdomen, 1.75 mm.*

Legs 3.5, 2.5, 2.5, 3.

é. Cephalic part a little longer than thoracic. Clypeus one-half as high

as anterior eyes. Falces vertical, short. Maxilles rounded and enlarged

at extremities. Labium as wide as long, one-thirdas long as maxille.

Sternum heart-shaped. Legs rather long and slender, those of the

first pair stoutest and furnished with strong spines; relative length

eee ne Mees EIA eS ER ee eee

* These are the measurements given by Koch. We have no female of this species. \

248 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

1,4, 3,2. Abdomen small and short, slanting from the anterior part to

the spinnerets.

Coloration: As our specimen is considerably rubbed we quote the color

description given by Cambridge. ‘‘The cephalothorax of this very

pretty and distinct spider, is of a-yellow brown color, with a large

pale patch on each side of the hinder extremity, and the ocular area

black, thinly clothed with short white hairs, and shining, in some

lights, with a strong, metallic, dark violet hue; a pale stripe densely

clothed with bright white squamose hairs runs through the middle

of the hinder half of the ocular area to the beginning of the posterior

slope; there is also a spot of similar hairs on each side towards the

hinder part, and another on each side near the hinder part of the

ocular orea, just below the eyes of the third row. a ee ey

The legs are yellow, the femora and the two other basal joints

of the first pair being much stronger than the rest, and brown-

ish black on each side. This, however. is apparently not a con-

stant character; or at any rate it does not always exist at the first

coming of the spider to maturity, but probably is acquired later; for

in one of the examples before me the first pair are of the same color

as the rest, and the femora of only ordinary comparative strength,

and the legs themselves shorter and weaker. * * * The palpiare

pale yellow. * * * Whe falces * * * are of ‘a; browmishisyel-

low color with a broad rather oblique dark yellow-brown longitudinal

stripe on the fore side. The maaille are yellow-brown, paler at their

extremities. The labiwm is also yellow-brown, palest at the apex.

The sternum is * * of a pale yellow color. The abdomen is of a

palish yellow hue; on the fore half of the upper side a clearer yel-

low elongate-oblong central marking is indicated by a dark-brown

dentated marginal line, and terminates posteriorly with a short trans-

verse curved dark-brown stripe, behind which, again, are two longi-

tudinal curved dark-brown markings inclosing a circular area cov-

ered densely with white squamose hairs which extends forward also

to the transverse stripe above described. The sides are marked with

a few dark-brown spots and markings; and on each side of the fore

extremity of the oblong central marking is a large patch of white

squamose hair. In front, below the fore margin, are some coarse,

bristly, black, upturned hairs. The spinners are of a blackish hue,

tipped with pale yellowish. x # Bey There is evi-

dently some variety in the abdominal markings of this species,

since in the other example before noted the upper side of the abdo-

men is generally suffused with dark blackish brown, showing faintly

the longitudinal oblong central, yellowish marking on the fore ' part;

the posterior and two anterior large patches of white squamose hairs:

however, are even more conspicuous in this than in the other ex-

ample.”

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomane. — 249

As we have no female of this species we translate the description given

by L. Koch, Arachniden Austvraliens, p. 1076, T. xeiv.

g. The cephalothorax is brownish with a narrow, black marginal band

which is broadened in some places and a brownish, interrupted longitudi-

nal stripe on the lateral declivity; the space between the eyes black with

faint, blue iridescence. A median longitudinal stripe somposed of brilliant

yellow hairs begins on the posterior declivity and extends to the front row of

eyes; the remaining hair of the cephalothorax is white mixed withlpale yellow.

The hair-rings around the eyes of the first and second rows orange-yellow

and white, those of the first row above and below orange-yellow, without

and within white. Falces dark brown; maxillee, labium and sternum dirty

brownish-yellow. Palpi and legs pale yellow; femur of the palpus with a

black longitudinal stripe before and behind. Femur of the first with a

black longitudinal stripe in front, and two black spots behind; femur of

the second with two black spots in front and behind; femora of the third

and fourth with a black ring on the basal half, and a small black spot on

the terminal half before and behind. Patellee with a black spot before

and behind. The tibiz and metatarsi have a black ring at the base and

the tarsi are suffused with black at the base. Abdomen black above, with

white and pale yellow hairs; from the base to a point in front of the mid-

dle runs a longitudinal band covered with deep yellow hairs, back of this,

and again just in front of the spinnerets, a long spot covered with similar

hair; specimens in alcohol stow also the following markings which almost

disappear completely in the dry animal; from the end of the longitudinal

band above mentioned two undulating pale bands run first to the sides and

thence in an arc back to the base, enclosing a space which is covered with

pale reticulating veinlets; the posterior half of the upper surface is

marked with small blue spots and. streaks; the spinnerets brownish-yellow

suffused with black.

Cephalothorax about one-sixth longer than broad, considerably longer than

patella and tibia of the fourth, high, abrupt on the posterior edge,

falling almost perpendicularly, faintly convex on the lateral per-

pendicular declivity, above, only slightly arched as far as the third

row of eyes, but from these strongly convex, dull, covered with short

hairs; the median, longitudinal stripe with hair-shaped scales; lateral

margin with long black bristles which project outward; one very

long anteriorly directed bristle between the eyes to} the first row;

clypeus as high as the radius of an eye of the first row. Eyes in four

rows; quadrangle of the eyes longer than broad, narrowed behind;

eyes of the fourth row as far again from the lateral borders as from

each other, overhung by the lateral walls of the cephalothorax.*

Kyes of the first row very large, close together and abutting on those

of the second row; eyes of the second row placed above and slightly

* | . von der Seitenwand des Cephalothorax iiberragt.”’

250

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

projecting over those of the first, with their outer peripheries distant

from one another by the diameter of one of the eyes of the first row.

Eyes of the third row nearer to those of the second than to those of

the fourth; those of the fourth smaller than those of the second

row. Falces only a little longer than the breadth at the base, very

glistening, smooth, slightly convex anteriorly, diverging on the inner

sidefrom thebase. Maxille with outer and anterior margins straight,

and inner margins also straight as far as the labium; the inner cor-

ners, consequently rather rectangular; the maxille are excavated

along the labium; labium very short, broader than long, rounded

anteriorly. Sternum cordate, s!izhtly convex, dull, sparsely over-

grown with projecting, long, yellow.sh hairs. Abdomen only slightly

longer than broad, truncate in froat, strongly convex laterally,

acuminate toward the spinnerets, dull, covered with short adpressed.

and longer projecting hairs in many layers; the deep yellow mark-

ings formed by hair like scales. Legs short; femora convex above,

underneath overgrown with long projecting hairs, with two spines

above, those of the first pair with one spine above at the end. Tibize

and metatarsi underneath beset with long spines. Spines of the pa-

tellee, tibize and metatarsi of the third and fourth short. On tibiae

and metatarsi of the third and fourth above, long projecting hairs.

Patella and tibia of the third as long as patella and tibia of the fourth;

metatarsus and tarsus of the fourth longer than patella and tibia of

the fourth.

Habitat: Tahiti, Upolu, Samoa.

GENUS EPEUS* PEcKHAM.

1876. Evenus Simon, Ann. Soc. Entomol. de France (5), pp. 58-59.

1885.

Epeus Peckham, Genera of Fam. Attidee, p. 334.

Cephalothorax rather elongated; thoracic part scarcely the longer, sensi-

bly dilated and rounded; cephalic part plane, elevated behind, in-

clined in front, longer than wide; superciliary projections pro-

nounced. Median anterior eyes very large, almost touching,

occupying the entire width of the face; the lateral eyes much smaller,

separated, placed further back, forming a second line. Dorsal eyes

as large as the laterals, a little nearer together since the sides con-

verge behind. Clypeus almost as wide as the radius of the median

anterior eyes. Falces short, vertical, not ridged. Sternum scarcely

wider than the intermediate coxe. Labium twice as long as wide,

rounded at the tip. Coxe of the first separated by at least the width

* Tn 1885, in our work on the Genera of the Attida, we substituted the name Hpeus for

Simon’s name Hvenus, this latter being preoccupied. It seems very probable that Hpeus

and Athanas should form but one genus, but we have no specimen of Hpeus, and are un-

able, from the description given by Simon, to decide the point. The generic and specific

descriptions of Epeus are translated from Simon.

Spiders of the Sub-Family Lyssomana. 251

of the labium, of the same length as the others. Legs: 3, 1, 2-4,

long, the three first pairs equal in thickness, the fourth more slen-

der; patella and tibia of the first longer than the cephalothorax,

tibia much longer than patella; patella and tibia of the fourth much

longer than patella and tibia of the third, and more slender; meta-

tarsus and tarsus of the fourth at least as long as patella and tibia;

on the two first pairs two rows of very long inferior tibial and meta-

tarsal spines; tibie and metatarsi of the two posterior pairs fur-

nished with slender spines throughout their length. Tarsal claws

long, regularly curved; the external one provided with a series of

five broad, short, conical teeth; the internal one with ten teeth which

are longer, more slender, equal, close together.

EPEUS TENER Simon. 1876.

¢. Cephaloth.: length 3.6 mil., width 2.6 mill. Abd.: length 4.5 mill.,

width 1.5 mill. Legs: first 9 mill., second 8.4 mill., third 10 mill.,

fourth 8.4 mill.

White testaceous, with the circumference of the eyes black. Clypeus

ornamented with thick, very white hairs. Cephalic square ornamented

above with scaly pubescence of a brilliant, slightly gilded yellow, and on

the sides with red pubesecence. Abdomen bright red above, with two fine

lateral yellow lines. Legs and palpi glabrous.

Malamoy, Bassilan Island (Philippine Islands).

GROUPIII. SIMONELLII.

GENUS SIMONELLA PrcKHam.

Body long, slender, nodose. Cephalothorax more than twice as long as

wide, convex above, constricted near the middle; thoracic part twice

as long as cephalic. Eyes very unequal in size, placed in four trans-

verse rows of two each, those of the anterior row nearly touching;

quadrangle formed by the second and fourth rows of ‘eyes, equally

wide in front and behind or wider behind than in front, and wider

than long. Eyes of the third row very small, sometimes halfway

between the second and fourth rows, sometimes nearer the second

than the fourth.

Legs slender, differing but little in thickness; relative length 4, 3, 1, 2.

Abdomen long and slender, sometimes constricted in the middle,

252 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

SIMONELLA AMERICANA PrECcKHAM. 1885.

Plate XII, figure 4.

Simonella americana P., Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. of Wisconsin, p. 24.

6. Totallength 8.5mm. Width of of abdomen 1.1 mm.

Length of cephalothorax 3.5 mm; width 1.4 mm; height 1.2 mm.

Legs 3.8, 3.6, 4, 5.3.

Cephalothorax nearly as highas wide; cephalic and anterior thoracic parts

higher and more convex than the remaining portion of the thoracic,

from which they are separated by a well-marked constriction; that

part of the thorax posterior to the constriction is highest in the mid-

dle, and slants off to form the narrow pedicle by which it is united

tothe abdomen. The cephalic and anterior thoracic parts are jet

black and glabrous; the posterior thoracic part is pale yellow. Eyes

of first row more than twice as large as those of the second; second

row wider than the first; third row nearer the second than the fourth;

eyes of fourth row about as large as those of second and further

apart. :

Clypeus less than one-half as high as anterior eyes, retreating; ridged above;

color black. Palpus black, long and slender, having on outer side

of tibia a stout apophysis. Falces robust, narrowing toward the tip,

long, vertical, slightly diverging; fang as long as the palpus, slender,

yellowish black in color. Maxillee yelowish black, half as long as

palpus, more than twice as long as labium; widest at their extremi-

ties. Labium as wide as long, truncated at tip.

Sternum yellowish, long, truncated in front, narrowing to a point behind.

Legs with weak tibial and metatarsal spines on the first pair; second, third

and fourth pairs unarmed. Patella and tibia of the third, shorter

than patella and tibia of the fourth; metatarsus and tarsus of the

fourth, shorter than patella and tibia of the fourth. Patella, tibia

and metatarsus of the first black on the inner side; otherwise all the

legs are yellowish with a darker shading toward the distal ends of

of those of the fourth pair. Abdomen made up of three parts, the

middle part being a narrow neck which joins the anterior and pos-

terior portions. The anterior is twice as long as the middle, and half

as long as the posterior part.

Habitat: Guatemala.

This species was found running on the ground among leaf-cutting ants.

Spiders of the Sub Family Lyssomane. 253

SIMONELLA MYRMECIAIFORMIS* Taczanowski. 1874.

Plate XII, figure 8.

Janus myrmecizeformis Tacz., Les Aranéides de la Guyane frangaise, p. 94.

Eyes in four rows; cephalothorax in two parts, abdomen with a marked

constriction in the middle; general color ochre yellow, four black

spots on the head, two pale rings on the abdomen. Length 4 7 mm.

é. The cephalothorax is very slender and much elongated, with the head

a little longer than wide, distinctly separated by a marked constric-

tion across the back and throughout.the height of sides; the thoracic

part considerably longer than the head, a little narrower and com-

posed of three distinct portions of which the anterior represents a

short slightly contracted neck, which is followed by a convex knob,

behind which is a rather long pedicle which is more slender than the

neck; the cephalic plate is lightly arched and inclined forward; the

lateral contours of the head are arched; behind it is terminated by a

facet with a gentle slope. Eyes in four rows, ina quadrangle a little

longer than wide;+ those of the first row very large, in contact, and

occupying the entire height and width of the face; those of the sec-

ond pair behind on the lateral border of the back at a considerable

distance from the preceding ones, and directed upward; eyes of the

third pair halfway between those of the second and fourth; external

border of the anterior eyes in a straight line and parallel with those

of the other pairs. falces short, thick and vertical. Abdomen

longer and more slender than the cephalothorax, strongly constricted

in the middle so as to form three distinct parts, of which the ante-

rior is cylindrical, almost horizontal, the second very slender and

strongly bent and the posterior elliptical, of the same breadth, but

much longer than the anterior, that is to say the whole resembles an

S faintly bent and enlarged at the two extremities. The spinnerets

are short. The legs are slender and of moderate length, in the order

4,3,1,2. Palpi short, thicker than the legs, with the tibze short and

stouter than the femora. The body is entirely bare, only a few hairs

being found around the anterior eyes, on the tarsi of the palpi, and

some which are almost imperceptible on the legs. :

Coloration: The general color is a pale ochre yellow; two large black spots

are found on each side of the head at the base of the eyes, the ante-

rior one of which extends between those of the second and third

* The des:riptions of this species and of lucasii are translated from Dr. Taczanowski.

+ This is true when the quadrangle is understood to include the first row of eyes; when

we use the expression ‘quadrangle of the eyes” in relation to the Lyssomanse (as in de-

fining this genus) we refer to the quadrangle formed by the second and fourth rows of

eyes.

254 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

pairs; two wide rings clearer than the general color are found around

the abdomen, the first being in the middle of the anterior part, the

second on the constriction. In the individual from Saint Laurent de

Maroni the posterior part of the abdomen is grayish, much deeper

than the rest of the body. The legs are of the color of the body but

a little paler. The anterior eyes are amber yellow, the others black-

ish. {

Two males from Cayenne and St. Laurent de Maroni; female unknown,

SIMONELLA LUCASIL Taczanowski. 1874.

Plate XII, figure 9.

Janus lucasii Tacz., Les Aranéides de la Guyane frangaise, p. 96.

Eyes in four rows; cephalothorax in two parts, abdomen with a con-

striction near the base; color of cephalothorax reddish yellow; four

black spots on the head; abdomen grayish. Length ° 4mm.

g. Cephalothorax slender and elongated, with the head square, distinctly

separated from the thoracic part by a strong constriction, terminated

behind by an inclined slope. The sides parallel and perpendicular;

the thoracic part longer but not so wide as the head, is comopsed of

a much contracted but short neck, followed by a globular knob,

which is terminated behind by a short pedicle which is more slender

than the anterior constriction. The eyes are in four rows, but are

arranged a little differently from those of the preceding species; the

ocular quadrangle is a little longer than wide;* the anterior eyes are

large, in contact, occupying the entire front of the vertical inclina-

tion of the face; the second pair is placed on the back behind the

eyes of the first pair, but they are a little further from each

other than the distance between the external borders of the first

ones, and are directed sideways; the posterior eyes are larger, but

are separated by the same distance as those of the second row, the

eyes of the third pair halfway between the second and fourth. The

falces are short, thick and vertical. The abdomen is of the same

length as the cephalothorax, thicker, commencing by a short pedi-

cle which appears to constitute a prolongation of that of the thoracic

part; behind this it suddenly grows larger up to the middle of its

length and then grows smaller again so as to terminate in a point.

The legs are slender and not very long, in the order 4, 3,1,2. All

the body is glabrous, with some sparse hairs, which are rather long

on the upper part of the head, and on the posterior part of the back

of the abdomen.

*The quadrangle is wider than long if the second row of eyes is taken as its anterior

line. See note under preceding species.

Spiders of the Sub Family Lyssomane. 255

Coloration: The color of the cephalothorax is reddish yellow, two black

spots on each side of the head of which the anterior one includes the base

of the eyes of the secoud and third pair. The abdomen is grayish yellow.

The legs are pale yellow; the femora and the patella: in the two posterior

pairs are of a brownish gray, so as to form a wide clear ring at the origin

of the leg. The anterior eyes yellow, the others black.

A single female from Uassa.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

PLATE XI.

1. Lyssomanes antillanus, palpus of ¢.

2 wy unicolor, palpus of ¢.

3 ue viridis, palpus of 6.

4, $s bi-teeniatus, palpus of ¢.

5. aS placidus, palpus of 6.

6 ae miniaceus, palpus of ¢.

7 ie austerus, palpus of ¢.

8 ee tenuis, palpus of 6.

9 ee jemineus, palpus of ¢.

10. nigro-pictus, palpus of ¢.

init oy velox, palpusof ¢.

12. ss longipes, palpus of ¢.

13. sé robustus, palpus of ¢.

PLATE XII.

1. Lyssomanes amazonicus, palpus of ¢.

2. Asamonea gracilis, palpus of ¢.

3. Athamas whitmeei, palpus of ¢ (after Keyserling).

4, Simonella americana, palpus of ¢.

5. Asamonea tenuipes, palpus of ¢.

6. Lyssomanes viridis, epigynum; 6a, eyes; 6b, falces of ¢.

7. Lyssomanes robustus, eyes.

8. Simonella mymecizeformis, cephalothorax (after Taczanowski).

9. Simonella lucasii, cephalothorax (after Taczanowski).

10. Lyssomanes modestus, epigynum.

il. Athamas whitmeei, epigynum (after Keyserling).

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Lyssomanes tristis, epigynum.

ne blandus, epigynum.

We jemineus, epigynum.

Hi parallelus, epigynum.

re amazonicus, epigynum.

austerus, epigynum.

Asamonea flava, epigynum.

ye tenuipes, epigynum; 19a, eyes; 19b, falces.

Asamonea punctata, epigynum.

Lyssomanes unicolor, epigynun.

Asamonea ornatissima, epigynum.

O. M. Conover. Q57

0. M. CONOVER.

By WM. F. ALLEN.

In the spring of 1884, the Academy experienced the loss of one of its

most valued members, in the death of Obediah Milton Conover, which

occurred in London, April 29 of that year. He was at the time on his way

home from a two years’ sojourn in Greece and Germany. His remains

were brought to this city, and were committed to the earth in Forest Hill

Cemetery, on the 28th of May.

Dr. Conover was of Dutch origin, being the seventh in the line of descent

from Jacob Wolfertson van Kouwenhoven, who came to this country at its

first settlement, in company with the Patroon van Renssellaer. On what oc-

casion the name was changed to its present form is uncertain. His mother,

Sarah Miller, was of a Kentucky family. He was born in Dayton, Ohio,

October 8, 1825; prepared for college in that city, and graduated at Princeton

in 1844, afterwards studying theology in the same institution (graduating

in 1849), without, however, entering the profession of the ministry. In the

interval of two years between his graduation and his theological course, he

taught school near Lexington, Ky., and in Dayton. While at Dayton he

also studied law in the office of Gen. Robert C. Schenck; and this was the

profession he finally adopted, being admitted to the Dane county bar in

1859.

In 1849 he was married and came directly to Madison, where he resided

the remainder of his life; his wife died in 1863. At first he was engaged in

the publication of The Northwestern Journal, a literary and educational

monthly, of which only a few numbers were published. In 1850 he was

made professor of ancient languages in our University; an office which

he held until 1858. It was the day of small things for the University, but

no institution could be insignificant, or could fail to exert a strong and last-

ing influence, whose faculty consisted of three such men as Chancellor La-

throp, Professor Sterling and Dr. Conover. In 1859, as has already been

said, he was admitted to the Dane County bar; two years later he became’

assistant reporter to the Supreme Court, and in 1864 was appointed re-

porter, which office he held until his death, a term of twenty years. Dur-

ing some years he held also the office of State Librarian. In 1879 he re-

ceived from the University the degree of Doctor of Laws. In September,

1882, he was married to Mrs. Sarah Fairchild Dean, and they immediately

went to Greece, where they spent the ensuing winter.

Mr. Conover was not a man of showy parts, and neither his disposition

nor his taste led him to seek publicity. Besides this, in the later years of

258 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

his life the condition of his health did not permit him to undertake any but

necessary routine labors. For these reasons he was seen but little except

by his nearest friends, or in the performance of his public duties; and it

was only those who were closely associated with him who were able to esti-

mate him at his true worth. The community, however, did not fail to

appreciate his high qualities. He was equally characterized by accuracy of

information, soundness of judgment, and a high standard of conduct; and

these qualities combined gave him an influence the strength and extent of

which he was himself probably far from suspecting. It may be said that

no man among us inspired more universal confidence, or was regarded with

more universal esteem. Always courteous and unassuming, he was a man

of strong convictions, and held to his opinions with great tenacity, although

without intolerance.

In his public duties, as reporter to the Supreme Court, all his best intel-

lectual qualities found room for exercise. His published reports, if I am

rightly informed, rank among the best of their class. But while perform-

ing his professional duties faithfully and with high intelligence, he found

his truest enjoyment in the study of literature —using this word in its

highest significance. He was familiar with the best that has been said by

the great creative minds of the world, and his fine taste and correct judg-

ment were nowhere more marked than here. It was the chief happiness

of his life that at its very close he was enabled to gratify this taste without

stint, and in the most congenial companionship. The master spirits of

Greek literature had always been his favorite writers; and the winter spent

by him in Athens, where the American School of Classical Studies had just

been established, brought him into direct and loving communion with the

choicest memories of classical antiquity. Much as his friends in Madison

regret that he was separated from them during the last two years of his

life, they recognize that this experience was to him the greatest happiness

that he could have wished. His relations to literature were, however, for

the most part those of enjoyment and culture. He wrote very little him-

self, but that of a quality which one would wish to see more common. The

members of the Madison Literary Club will remember with high apprecia-

tion the few papers which he read before them;,and to most of us it was

no doubt an unexpected, although by no means a surprising revelation, when

he came to be known as being possessed of a poetic faculty, genuine, al-

though rarely exercised.

Asa member of our Academy there is little to be said of him. He had

not the physical strength to do any work for it. I do not remember that

he ever took an active part in its proceedings; but its members always felt

it as a privilege and an honor to count him as one of themselves.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY SINCE DECEM-

BER, 1883.

REPORT OF THE SECRETARY.

FIFTEENTH REGULAR ANNUAL MERTING.

Held at Madison, Wisconsin.

Rooms OF WISCONSIN ACADEMY OF

SCIENCES, ARTS AND LETTERS,

CAPITOL, MADISON, WISCONSIN.

FIRST SESSION.

Monpay EvEntInG, December 29, 1884.

The reports of President, Secretary and Treasurer were

presented.

Messrs. Lamb, Allen and Blackstone were appointed a

committee on Treasurer’s report.

Dr. Hoy, Profs. Daniells and Sprague were appointed a

committee on nominations for membership.

SECOND SESSION.

December 30, 1884.

Academy met at 9 A. M.

The report of the Treasurer, showing a balance in the

Treasury of $742.38, was reported back from the Auditing

Committee, and its adoption recommended. The report

was adopted.

The following members were elected:

Mr. F. E. Short, Madison; Mr. G. H. J. Douglass, Madi-

son; Prof. F. B. Power, Madison; Mr. Carl Doerflinger,

Milwaukee; Prof. A. J. Rogers, Milwaukee.

260 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters.

Voted: That a credit of $3.00 on his annual dues be al-

lowed to Rev. 8. D. Peet for his American Antiquarian

for 1884.

Voted: That Prof. W. F. Allen be requested to prepare a

memorial of Prof. O. M. Conover for the next volume of

the Academy Transactions: .

Dr. P. R. Hoy, of Racine, gave an interesting address on

“How did the Indians make their stone implements?”

The statements made by the doctor were somewhat

startling to the gatherers of these ancient implements. ,

Specimens of some of these very ancient implements were

exhibited by the doctor, that had been made within the

past six months, by a resident of our state, and not an In-

dian either.

Rev. 8. D. Peet, of Clinton, addressed the Academy on re-

cent investigations of the Indian mounds in this section of

the state, particularly near the banks of Lakes Koshkonong

and Mendota.

Mr. Peet also read a paper on the ‘‘ Antiquity of Man in

America,” and the conclusion reached was that those who

claimed the great antiquity of man in America had failed

to prove their claims, and that the whole matter was still

an open question.

The discussion of the question was continued by Prof.

Birge, Dr. Hoy and Prof. Irving.

Prof. W. F. Allen read a paper on the ‘‘Changes in the

Local Condition of the English Serfs during the Feudal Pe-

riod.” ;

AFTERNOON SHSSION.

The first paper read was-by Dr. P. R. Hoy, of Racine; on

<<Science and Society.” The discussion of the subject was

continued by Prof. J. 8. Butler, Prof. EH. A. Birge, Prot.

Hoy, Prof. Peckham, Rev. S. D. Peet, and Prof. W. W:-

Daniells.

Prof. L. Heritage read an interesting paper ‘‘On the Date

of the Dialogus de Oratoribus.” The question was further

discussed by Prof. W. F. Allen, Prof. HE. S. Holden, Prof.

Heritage and Prof. Butler.

Report of the Secretary. 261

Prof. C. A. Van Velzer gave an address on the ‘“‘The

Rapid Decomposition of Rotinal Fractions.”

The question of the organization of affiliated societies

came up for consideration, and was discussed by Prof.

Birge, Prof. Peckham, Prof. Sprague, Prof. W. F. Allen,

Prof. K. G. Smith, Dr. Hoy, Rev. S. D. Peet, Prof. Holden,

A. O. Wright and Prof. Van Velzer.

Before acting upon the matter the meeting adjourned un-

til 8 o’clock in the evening.

EVENING SESSION,

Academy called to order by Prof. T. C. Chamberlin, Vice-

President.

The president, Prof. R. D. Irving, addressed the Academy

on the subject of Geology in a most able and interesting

manner.

The Academy then proceeded to the election of officers

for the ensuing three years, which resulted as follows:

President — Prof. T. C. Chamberlin, Beloit.

Vice Presidents —

Department of Sciences — Prof. G. W. Peckham, Milwaukee,

Department of Arts — Prof. 4. R. Sprague, Racine.

Department of Letters— Prof. W. F. Allen, Madison.

Secretary — Prof. E. A. Birge, Madisou.

Treasurer —S. D. Hastings, Madison.

Curator of the Cabinet — Prof. C. R. Van Hise, Madison.

Librarian — Prof. E. A. Birge, Madison.

The matter of affiliated societies was again taken up and

settled by the adoption of the following: Any local, scien-

tific or literary society may apply for affiliation with the

Academy, submitting its constitution, etc., to the inspection

and approval of the Academy. If affiliated, it may propose

for membership in the Academy such of its members as it

shall select. These persons will be considered as nominated

for membership in the Academy, and, if elected, will be

entitled to all privileges of regular members. The society

shall pay to the Academy one-half of the regular annua]

dues of the Academy for each person so elected, and willbe

entitled to as many copies of future volumes of the trans-